Silurian Reefs of Gotland

DEVELOPMENTS I N S E D I M E N T O L O G Y 1 3
SILURIAN R E E F S O F C O T L A N D
TYPOLOGY, PALAEOECOLOGY A N D S T R A T I G R A P H I C A L IMPLICATIONS
FURTHER TITLES IN THIS SERIES
1. L. M . J. U . VAN STRAATEN, Editor

DELTAIC AND SHALLOW MARINE DEPOSITS
2. G. C. AMSTUTZ, Editor
SEDIMENTOLOGY AND ORE GENESIS
3. A . H . BOUMA and A . BROUWER, Editors

TURBIDITES
4. F. G. TICKELL
THE TECHNIQUES O F SEDIMENTARY MINERALOGY
5. J. C . ZNGLE Jr.
THE MOVEMENT O F BEACH SAND
6 . L. VAN DER PLAS Jr.

THE IDENTIFICATION O F DETRITAL FELDSPARS
7. S. DZULY$SKI and E. K . WALTON

SEDIMENTARY FEATURES OF FLYSCH AND GREYWACKES
8. G . LARSEN and G. V . CHILINGAR, Editors

DJAGENESIS IN SEDIMENTS
9. G. V . CHILINGAR, H. J . BISSELL and R. W . FAIRBRIDGE, Editors

CARBONATE ROCKS
10. P. McL. D. DUFF, A. HALLAM and E. K . WALTON

CYCLIC SEDIMENTATION
11. C . C . REEVES Jr.

INTRODUCTION TO PALEOLIMNOLOGY
12. R. G . C. BATHURST
CARBONATE SEDIMENTS AND THEIR DIAGENESIS
14. K. W. GLENNIE
DESERT SEDIMENTARY ENVIRONMENTS
DEVELOPMENTS IN SEDIMENTOLOGY 13
SILURIAN REEFS OF GOTLAND

BY
A.A. MANTEN
Utrecht (The Netherlands}
ELSEVIER PUBLISHING COMPANY Amsterdam London New York 197 1

ELSEVIER PUBLISHING COMPANY
335 JAN VAN GALENSTRAAT, P.O. BOX 21 1, AMSTERDAM, THE NETHERLANDS
ELSEVIER PUBLISHING CO. LTD.

BARKING, ESSEX, ENGLAND
AMERICAN ELSEVIER PUBLISHING COMPANY, INC.

52 VANDERBILT AVENUE, NEW YORK, NEW YORK 10017
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS CARD NUMBER: 68-12477

ISBN 0-444-40706-5
WITH 230 ILLUSTRATIONS, 24 TABLES AND 2 MAP ENCLOSURES
COPYRIGHT 0 1971 BY ELSEVIER PUBLISHING COMPANY, AMSTERDAM
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE REPRODUCED, STORED IN

A RETRIEVAL SYSTEM, OR TRANSMITTED IN ANY FORM OR BY ANY MEANS, ELECTRONIC,
MECHANICAL, PHOTOCOPYING, RECORDING, OR OTHERWISE, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN
PERMISSION OF THE PUBLISHER, ELSEVIER PUBLISHING COMPANY, JAN VAN GALEN-
STRAAT 335, AMSTERDAM
PRINTED IN THE NETHERLANDS

PREFACE
It was the late Prof. Dr. M.G. Rutten who focussed my attention on the
intriguing geological problems which a r e envoked by the Silurian reefs of the
island of Gotland. For several y e a r s he was an amiable advisor, supervisor,
critic, and much more, of my Gotland work. I very much regret that he has
not lived to see the appearance of this book. I remember him with great
gratitude.
The interest shown in my work by several Swedish geologists over the
years is gratefully acknowledged. The inhabitants of Gotland were always s o
hospitable and helpful that I count the Gotland years among the happiest of
my life. By mentioning in particular the Rev. and Mrs. Joh. Siltberg of 6 j a
I wish to thank them all.
A .A.M.
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
VII
CONTENTS
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V
CHAPTER I . INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The scope of this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gotland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The morphology of Gotland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exposures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAPTER I1. PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE BALTIC AREA OUTSIDE

GOTLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The Palaeozoic Baltic basin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The stratigraphy of uland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The Lower Palaeozoic of Gotska Sandijn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
The west Baltic a r e a during post-Gotlandian time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
The east Baltic Palaeozoic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cambrian and Early Ordovician palaeogeography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Silurian palaeogeography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
CHAPTER 111. THE PALAEOZOIC DEPOSITS OF GOTLAND . . . . . . . . . . 29

The basement of Gotland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
The stratigraphy of Gotland: historical review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
The stratigraphy of Hede . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3t1
The stratigraphy of Jux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Correlation with other areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
CHAPTER IV . TECTONICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 45

Pseudo-tectonic phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
The dip of the s t r a t a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 4t1
Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 49
CHAPTER V . THE FOSSIL REEFS OF GOTLAND, GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . 53

Reef definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Palaeozoic reef formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Historical review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
General typology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Stratigraphical and geographical distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
F o s s i l s in the reefs and related sediments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Reef builders and reef dwellers, 59 - Reef builders, 6 8 (Stromatoporoids.
6 8 - Corals. 7 1 - Bryozoans. 78 - Algae. 73) - Associated organisms. 74
(Crinoids. 74 - Brachiopods. 7 5 - Molluscs. 75 - Arthropods. 75 -
Sponges. 76 - Protozoans. 76 - Soft-bodied animals. 76)
The matrix of the reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
CHAPTER VI . THE UPPER VISBY REEF TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 79

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Geographical and stratigraphical distribution of the reefs . . . . . . . . . . .. 79
Palaeogeographical distribution of the r e e f s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 82
General character of the reef limestone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Reef-forming organisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
VIII CONTENTS
Shape of the reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

The knoll shape. 86 - The lens shape. 87 - The inverted-cone snape. 89
-Influence of the open s e a . 92 - Exceptions to the rule. 94
Dimensions of the reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Distinction between reef limestone and stratified sediments . . . . . . . . . . 97
Limestone underneath the reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Limestone lateral to the reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Specific levels of reef development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
The coastal cliff north of Kneippbyn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
The r e e f s north of Visby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
CHAPTER VII . THE HOBURGEN REEF TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
The Hoburgen complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Fauna. flora and matrix of the r e e f s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Structure of the reef limestone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Massive structure. 121 - Stratified structure. 123 - Recognizability of
fossils. 124 - No distinct reef f r a m e preserved. 126
Shape and dimensions of the r e e f s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
-
Inverted-cone-shaped reefs. 127 Pakch reefs. 128 - Lenticular and
irregular reefs. 128 - The Klinteberg reefs. 1 2 8
Interruptions and fluctuations in reef growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Interruptions in reef growth. 131 - Erosion of the reef surface. 132 -
Fluctuations in the extension of the reefs. 134
Interrelations between r e e f s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Natural selection among reefs. 135 - Fusion of reefs. 138 - Compound
reefs. 139
Depressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Interreef basins. 144 - Filled depressions within the reefs. 145 Pools-
in the reefs. 149
The roots of reef formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fissures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Stylolites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Reef-surrounding sediments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Stratified sediments underneath the reefs. 154 - Talus mantle. 161 -
Stratified sediments lateral to the reefs. 165 - Distinction between
stratified sediments and reef limestone. 173 - The boundary between
reef and stratified limestone. 174
Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
.
CHAPTER VIII THE HOLMHXLLAR REEF TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Distribution of Holmhallar-type reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Fauna. flora and matrix of the reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Reef-forming components. 180 - Method of inventarization. 181 -
Stromatoporoids. 183 - Corals. 185 - Crinoids. 187 - Matrix. 187 -
Algae. 188 - Conclusions. 189
Shape and dimensions of the reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Depressions in the reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Debris-filled depressions. 192 - Pools in the reef surface. 194
Interruptions in reef growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fissures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Debris floor and talus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
The formation of raukar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
.
CHAPTER M REEF DEBRIS . . . ....................... 213
Distribution of reef debris . . . . . ....................... 213
Approximation methods. 213 - Distribution of reef debris in a vertical
CONTENTS Ix
direction, 214-Horizontal distribution of debris around some Hoburgen-
type reefs, 217 - Horizontal distribution of debris around some
Holmhallar-type reefs, 219
. .
Directions of dip in reef debris. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
CHAPTER X. STRATIGRAPHY AND REEFS OF 'KARLSGARNA. . . . . . . . . 225

Introduction . , . , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Stratigraphy of Stora Karl& . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Lerberg Marlstone, 229 - Spangiinde Limestone, 230 (A breccia and an
unconformity, 233) - Austerberg Limestone, 235
Stratigraphy of Lilla Karl& . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Pentamerus gotlandicus Limestone, 237 ( Pentamerus gotlandicus
breccia, 239) - Lilla Karls'd Limestone, 240
Reef limestones of Stora Karls'd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
242
Western reef limestones, 244 (Staurnasar reef limestone, 244 -
Marmorberg reef limestone, 245 - Laup-hargi reef limestone, 248) -
Rojsuhajd reef limestone, 250 - General discussion on the older reef
formations, 250 - Svarthallar reef limestones, 252
Reef limestones of Lilla Karlso . . . . . . . . . ...
. . . . . . . . ..
. . . 258
Central Lilla Karlso reef limestone, 259 - Norderslatt reef limestone,
261 - Suderslatt reef limestone, 262 - Flank reefs. 263
.
Discussion. . . . . . . . . . . . ... ... .
. . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Correlation between Stora and Lilla Karlso, 272 - Environment of
formation of the various sediments, 272 - Downward-slipping phenomena,
273 - Correlation with Gotland, 275
CHAPTER XI. STRATIGRAPHY OF THE SILURIAN OF GOTLAND. . . . . . . 277

.
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
.. ....... .. . .
. . .. 277
Visby Beds . . . ..... . , .
. , . . . ... .. .. . , . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Stratified sediments, 277 (Lower Visby Beds, 278 - Upper Visby Beds,
279) - Discussion, 280
Hogklint Beds . .. .. .
. . ................ . ......... . 281
Stratified sediments, 282 (Lower Hogklint Beds, 283 - Upper Hogklint
Beds, 284) - Reef limestones and related sediments, 285 - The
stratigraphical position of the Tofta limestone, 304 - Discussion, 310
.
Slite B e d s . . . . . . . . .. .
. ,. ...... ..
. ..... ..
... .. . 311
Stratified sediments, 312 (Slite I Beds, 313 - Slite 11 Beds, 313 - Slite I11
Beds, 315 - Slite IV Beds, 316 - Slite marlstone, 317) - Reef limestones
and related sediments, 317 - Discussion, 329
. .
Halla-Mulde Beds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . .
. . ... 334
Halla limestone, 334 - Mulde marlstone, 335 - Reef limestones and
related sediments, 335 - Discussion, 336
Klinteberg B e d s . .... .
.. ........... ..,...... .... . . 337
Stratified sediments, 337 - Reef limestones and related sediments, 338 -
Discussion, 349
.
Hemse Beds. . . . . . . . . . . ... . .
. ....... ......... . . 349
Stratified sediments, 349 (Limestones, 350 - Marlstone, 351) - Reef
limestones and related sediments, 352 (Hoburgen-type reef limestones,
352 - Holmhallar-type reef limestones, 372) - Discussion, 38b
Eke Beds . . . .. ...... . ... .... .
.. ..... ......
.... 387
Stratified sediments, 387 - Reef limestones and related sediments, 387 -
Discussion, 391
BuFgsvik Beds. . . . . .. ... ....
. . .... .. . .
. . ... .... .. 392
Stratified sediments, 393 (Sandstone, 394 - Oolite, 394 - Other stratified
-
sediments, 398 - Sedimentary characteristics, 398) Reef limestones
and related sediments, 405 - Discussion, 407
Hamra-Sundre Beds. . .. ..
.... .. . ....
..... ... . .
... .. 408
Stratified sediments, 409 (Hamra limestone, 409 - Sundre limestone, 411)
- Reef limestones and related sediments, 413 (Hoburgen-type reef
X CONTENTS
limestones, 413 - Holmhallar-type reef limestones, 418) - A moving

trough?, 420 - Discussion, 422
CHAPTER XII. PALAEOECOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ON SOME FOSSILS

AND FOSSIL GROUPS. . . . . . . . . . . . .# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
.
Fossils of Gotland in the literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
.
Persistent fossils and guide f o s s i l s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Persistent fossils; 425 - Guide fossils, 425
Facies fossils . .
.. .. . .... .. .. ..... ....... ...... .. 426
The marly facies, 426 - The limestone facies, 429 - The reef facies,429
. . .
Palaeoecology of corals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Some observations on solitary corals, 430 - Influences of mud
sedimentation and growth r a t e on the growth form of colonies, 430 -
Some differences between reef edge and c o r e , 432 - Rhythmic growth
patterns, 433 - Percentage of coral colonies in life orientation, 435
.
Palaeoecology of stromatoporoids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Competition between corals and stromatoporoids, 438 - Stromatoporoids
in Holmhallar-type reefs, 440 - Different growth f o r m s , 443 - Possible
explanation of stromatoporoid palaeoecology, 444 - Latilaminae, 445
Palaeoecology of crinoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Occurrence of crinoids in reef-surrounding sediments, 446 - Occurrence
of crinoids in reef limestone, 448 - Average diameter of crinoid stem
fragments, 148 - Factors which influenced crinoid distribution and size:
451 (Different crinoid taxa, 451 - Linkage to the reef environment, 452 -
Water depth; 453 - Mobility of the water, 453 - Sediment content of the
water, 454 - Better adaptation to the environment in the course of time,
454)
CHAPTER XIII. COMPARISON O F THE REEFS OF GOTLAND WITH REEFS IN

. .
SOME OTHER AREAS. . . . . . , . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Great Britain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Esthonia . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
North A m e r i c a . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
..... ... . .. . . .. . . .. 458
Great Lakes a r e a , 458 - Stages of reef development, 459 - Crinoids, 461
- Comparison with Gotland; the criterion of wave resistance, 461
.
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . 462
CHAPTER XIV. GENERAL CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE REEFS OF

. . .
GOTLAND FORMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . 465
. . . .
Water temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . ... . 465
.
Water depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 466
.
Water aeration. . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... 467
.
Rate of reef growth . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ...
.. .. 468
CHAPTER XV. CONCLUDING REMARKS AND SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Stratigraphy of the Middle Palaeozoic of Gotland. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Occurrence of true fossil reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
General development of the reefs of Gotland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Main periods of reef formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
REFERENCES. . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
ENCLOSURES . ............ . ......... ..... ....... 539

1
Chapter I
INTRODUCTION
THE SCOPE OF THIS BOOK
T h e Swedish island of Gotland, in the Baltic, h a s long attracted the

attention of many geologists. Of these, s e v e r a l have visited the island, and
m o r e than a few have contributed t o the extensive literature concerning i t s
Middle Palaeozoic sediments and fossils. A l a r g e number of museums and
institutions contain beautiful petrifactions derived from Gotland.
Nevertheless i t took a long t i m e before a m o r e or less definite s t r a t -
igraphy of this island could be established. Although the stratigraphical sub-
division, proposed by Hede, h a s been r a t h e r generally accepted since 1921,
a few dissentient views were still subsequently recorded (Wedekind and
Tripp, 1930; J u x , 1957).
T h e s e stratigraphical difficulties stem f r o m the variable genesis of the
sediments involved. T h e stratigraphical column of the Middle Palaeozoic of
Gotland shows an alternation of sediments, typical of deposition in a shallow
s e a , bordered by a base-levelled continent. Small-sized epeirogenetic move-
ments of the sea floor resulted in very marked differences in the facies of
the sediments (marlstone, limestone, oolite, sandstone). Moreover, in several
localities in Gotland, the succession of sediments which is normal f o r a n
epicontinental basin, is overshadowed by the occurrence of reefs. These
r e e f s formed protruding elevations on the s e a bottom and influenced the pro-
c e s s of sedimentation. T h i s caused a number of local differences in the
facies of the deposits, even within a certain bathymetrical zone. Besides,
each of the s e v e r a l facies may contain a fauna largely typical of the special
environment, m o r e s o than of the time of deposition, making stratigraphical
work even m o r e difficult.
I t is clear from these short r e m a r k s , that f o r a good understanding of
the sedimentary succession of Gotland, it is highly important that the distri-
bution of all the different kinds of sediments be carefully mapped and their
faunal contents intensively studied. T h i s has been done especially by Hede.
But this alone is not sufficient. An attempt should a l s o be made t o deduce the
mode of formation of the various sediments, both stratified and unstratified,
and t o study their interrelationships.
In 1955 i t appeared t o P r o f e s s o r M.G. Rutten of the State University in
Utrecht (The Netherlands), that in this respect much work still needed t o be
done. Until then, the Middle Palaeozoic reefs especially had not received the
attention they deserved. Upon h i s advice five of h i s students, the present
author included, spent a s u m m e r of field work in Gotland during 1956. T h e i r
r e s u l t s have been briefly reported by Rutten (1958). From 1957 onwards, the
present author h a s continued studies on the reef formations in Gotland.
2 INTRODUCTION
Attention h a s been paid t o the typology and constitution of the r e e f s , and m o r e

especially t o their genesis and their relation t o the stratified Middle
Palaeozoic deposits.
T h i s book is a survey of the observations and ideas gathered during
these y e a r s , combined with a review of the m o r e important data contained
in e a r l i e r l i t e r a t u r e about the stratigraphy and r e e f s of Gotland. After a few
introductory chapters about the Baltic area in general, the development of
the present stratigraphical subdivision of the Middle Palaeozoic of Gotland,
and some tectonic and pseudo-tectonic phenomena, s i x chapters will be
devoted t o the organic reefs found on the island. T h i s will be followed by an
extensive chapter dealing with the stratigraphy of the island, giving full atten-
tion not only t o the stratified but a l s o t o the unstratified sediments. A sub-
sequent chapter will deal with a number of palaeoecological observations on
Gotlandian fossils. Some comparisons of the reefs of Gotland with r e e f s in a
few other a r e a s , and a s h o r t retrospect conclude the book.
GOTLAND
Gotland, off the e a s t coast of southern Sweden, is situated geographical-

ly between 18O and 19O e a s t and 57O and 58" north. T h e total surface amounts
t o 3160 km', including a number of minor islands surrounding the main is-
land. T h e l a t t e r h a s a n elongated, rhomboidal shape, with a length of about
117 km and a breadth of about 45 km.
Gotland is built up by a Middle Palaeozoic table-land, with a n average
height of 20-30 m , but with some higher hills (up t o 68 m ) in the inland and
with steep cliffs along p a r t of the coast (up t o 77 m high). Large p a r t s of the
land a r e covered with Pleistocene boulder clay, minor p a r t s with Holocene
sand and gravel, and some lower p a r t s with peat.
T h e Middle Palaeozoic s t r a t a consist predominantly of limestones and
marlstones. A s a result Gotland is devoid of r i v e r s . T h e r e are a few brooks
that usually c a r r y water only part of the y e a r .
T h e very permeable limestone areas of Gotland often have a scattered
vegetation of pines and junipers, o r a r e m o r e or less naked. T h e s e a r e a s
are called "alvar". They have a r a t h e r unique flora and vegetation. T h e
slightly lower p a r t s a r e inundated in winter and give rise to lake vegetation,
which at i t s periphery, gradually p a s s e s into xerophilous vegetation. In sum-
m e r the whole a l v a r can be completely dry. T h i s alternation in environ-
mental conditions causes g r e a t annual differences in the occurrence of many
species. Frequent alternation of t e m p e r a t u r e s below and above z e r o , in
autumn and spring, causes f r o s t upheaval which can eradicate even deep-
rooted perennials. T h e introduction by man of certain factors, in particular
the grazing of sheep, has a l s o affected the flora and vegetation of the lime-
stone areas. During the l a s t few decades, however, t h i s has diminished o r
ceased. A s a result, vegetation is again spreading over those p a r t s which
are covered by moraine o r gravel, o r are c r i s s - c r o s s e d by f i s s u r e s . Herb-
r i c h pine vegetation is already found over several lower limestone a r e a s ,
and narrow s t r i p s of vegetation indicate the pattern of fissures in the higher
areas. On the marlstones t h e r e w e r e originally f o r e s t s of deciduous t r e e s
(birch, a s h , a l d e r , lime, hazel, oak), but these areas have been extensively
cleared f o r arable and pasture lands.
Rainfall is slight, and the growing of grapes, mulberries, peaches and
GOTLAND 3
apricots points to a climate sunnier than that of other parts of Sweden. The
occurrence of several orchids, some of which have mainly a south European
distribution (Rosvall and Pettersson, 1951), is also a climatic indicator. In
general, however, the flora of Gotland is poorer in southern species than that
of the island of Oland, southwest of Gotland and much closer to the Swedish
mainland. This may have been caused by the fact that an immigration of the
Late Glacial flora of southern Sweden was easier in Gland, after the ice cover
and Baltic water had withdrawn from there. Gotland was at all times sepa-
rated from the mainland by a rather broad a r e a of water.
The capital of Gotland is Visby, an old and charming little town with its
medieval town wall still almost complete. The record of the habitation of the
island however, goes back to the l a t e r Stone Age. A large number of pre-
historic finds have made it an "El Dorado" for archaeologists.
During Antiquity and the Middle Ages, Gotland was an important com-
mercial centre. Many finds of Roman, Byzantian and Arabic coins have been
made. Gotland's wealth in medieval times led to the flowering of architecture
and local a r t . About a hundred highly interesting churches dating from this
time, still remain. The cruel plundering of the island by the Danish king
Valdemar, in 1361, ended i t s prosperity. Gotland became a dilapidated island,
and was alternatedly occupied by the Danes and the Swedes, until, in 1645, it
became definitely Swedish.
A t the end of the last century Gotland was still very backward. Since
then, however, the discovery of the island by an increasing number of tour-
ists has led to new prosperity.
F o r more information about the interesting prehistoric age and the old
and medieval history of Gotland, s e e Noreen et al. (1959) and further:
Lindblom and Svahnstram (1959), Lundquist (1940), Manten (lQ59,1960d, 1961b),
Roosval(lQ50, 1952) and Sbderberg (1948).
In addition to its growing significance as a tourist attraction, Gotland
has also regained its military importance in recent times. Military establish-
ments a r e to be found all over the island. F o r this reason the northeastern-
most part of the island, east of the line Kappelshamnviken-Hydeviken', is
forbidden to non-Swedes. Notwithstanding all the efforts that were made and
supported by several Swedish authorities, it was impossible for the present
author to receive permission to include this part of the island in his studies
also.
Because Sweden has a state church, the civil and religious units into
which the country is subdivided a r e generally identical. This implies that the
word parish is used in Sweden in a civil and geographical sense also. Outside
its capital, Visby, Gotland is traditionally divided into 92 parishes. A t pres-
ent, most of these are combined t o form larger units, but the ancient parish
boundaries are still recognized in several respects. In this book, the approx-
imate position of various localities will, therefore, often be indicated by
stating the parish in which they a r e situated.
'A short note should be inserted about the use of the article in the Swedish language.
The indefinite article precedes the noun; thus: en vik = a bay, and e t berg = a mountain.
The definite article, however, is generally attached at the end of the noun; thus: viken =
the bay, and berget = the mountain. Because of this, many Swedish geographical t e r m s
often include the definite article (e.g., Kappelshamnviken, Galgberget). In such c a s e s ,
the English article will be omitted in this book. The r e a d e r should also note that
Vasterberg and Vasterberget, f o r example, indicate the s a m e locality.
4 INTRODUCTION
THE MORPHOLOGY OF GOTLAND
Although a n extensive discussion of the morphology of Gotland is out-

side the scope of this book, a few general r e m a r k s are in o r d e r .
T h e relief of Gotland is almost completely determined by the geological
constitution of the island. The limestone complexes are always topographical-
ly higher than the marlstone a r e a s , due t o m o r e resistance against erosion.
A glance a t the geological map (Fig.11) shows that in t h i s way Gotland is di-
vided into t h r e e higher p a r t s , separated by two lower marlstone areas. This
morphology is developed by the action of both glacial erosion and abrasion
by the post-Glacial s e a .
Within the limestones, the reef limestones are again m o r e resistant
than the stratified ones. Most inland hills consist mainly of fossil bioherms.
In p a r t , on the side of the elevation that has not been attacked by the post-
Glacial sea, they may contain some stratified sediment. T h i s g r e a t e r
Fig.1. Coastal cliff about 0.5 km northwest of Axelsro, seen from the south-
west. T h e cliff is built up by the Visby Beds. During on-shore winds, waves
attack the lower p a r t , causing undercutting. Protruding is a n Upper Visby
reef.
T H E MORPHOLOGY O F GOTLAND 5
Fig.2. Detail of the uppermost part of the northeastern face of the Hogklint,
south of Visby, with a protruding nose of reef limestone. Between Hogklint
and Axelsro no large reef-limestone masses occur. This corresponds with
a landward curve of the shore line and an absence of the main Hogklint cliff.
Along the sea shore, however, a low cliff, only a couple of metres high, of
Visby rocks is exposed.
resistance of the reef limestones is also apparent in the present coast. A

good example is presented by the southern peninsula of Gotland where the
highest part of the west coast is formed by the reef-limestone masses of
Hoburgen and HallbjPns. Since at Hoburgen the bioherms were not c.ontinuous,
but were separated by stratified parts, the hill fell apart into four hillocks
upon the erosion of most of the stratified sediments. Also along the north-
west coast of Gotland it can be observed that the cliff, built. up by the Hogklint
Beds, bends inwards towards the land where no bioherms a r e present.
The resistance of the bioherms against marine erosion is also clearly
demonstratedby the raukar fields at some places along the east coast. For
instance, the raukar a r e a s at HolmhPllar and HammarshagahPllar in the
south, project seawards, while between the two there i s a bay, calledsqvalpvik.
In the remarks about the tectonics (Chapter IV) it will be pointed out
that the occurrence of cliffs along the northwest coast is mainly caused by
the southeastward dip of the strata. The height of these cliffs has been in-
fluenced by both the character of the exposed sediments and the post-Glacial
r i s e of the land (cf. Fig.l,2). Steep cliffs a r e found there especially, where
the lowermost parts a r e built up by marlstone. Marine, and in some cases
atmospheric erosion causes undercutting and fall of the higher parts.
The dip of the s t r a t a not only explains the rhomboidal shape of the
island a s a whole, but also the orientation of several bays, a s Burgsviken,
Gansviken (Grbtlingbo Parish) and Lauviken (see further Chapter IV).
6 INTRODUCTION
EXPOSURES
Exposures of Middle Palaeozoic rocks a r e found mainly in ancient and

recent cliffs. Of these the ancient ones have been formed by the Ancylus
lake and the Littorina sea. After the retreat of the sea, weathering attacked
the sediments and crustaceous lichens now cover several of the cliffs.
Nevertheless, many of these cliffs have provided very useful information.
Occasional cliff falls and quarries in the walls have led locally to fresh
exposures.
Examples of Ancylus cliffs a r e , among others, Galgberget (Visby),
Klinteberget, Friijelklint, Torsburgen (the highest inland hill of the island),
Gannberget (Ostergarn), Klinteklint (Gammelgarn), Petsarveklint and
Kaupungsklint (Ardre), Lindeklint, Klev (Sundre). Littorina cliffs a r e , among
others, part of Hiigklint, Korpklint (SnSLckgSLrdsbaden), Brissund klintar,
Lannaberget and Solklint (Slite), Bogeklint, Grogarnsberget (Ostergarn),
Hoburgen.
The present coastal cliffs also contain by far the best exposures, many
of which a r e of great importance. This is especially true of the northwest
coast, from Nyrevsudde to Kappelshamnsviken. Except for the three Upper
Visby reefs a t SnXckgQrdsbaden Hotel, almost all the reefs that can be
studied in this stratigraphical unit occur in these cliff walls. The majority
of Hiigklint reefs occur a s well in the present coastal cliff along the north-
west coast. Recent cliffs also expose many important details of the reefs of
Karls iiarna.
The bizarre raukar fields on the southeastern coast at, e.g.,
Fggelhammar, Ljugarn and HolmhSLllar have a l s o been formed by the action
of the present sea. Their origin will be more fully discussed in Chapter VIII.
In connection with lime burning in earlier years, several quarries were
opened in the unstratified limestones. A t present most of these have dis-
appeared again. Nowadays quarries a r e not of much use for the study of the
Gotland reefs proper. Stratified sediments can be observed in several quar-
r i e s made for other purposes. These expose limestones (large quarries, e.g.,
!? the north of the Graunsklint, LPrbro; in File Haidar; in the Gannberg,
Ostergarn; and in the Klinteberg), marlstones (the huge quarries of the Slite
cement factory) and sandstones (grindstone industry a t Burgsvik). Small,
often private quarries, used only occasionally when a farmer is in need of
building stones, a r e moreover encountered in many places in Gotland.
7
Chapter 11
PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE BALTIC AREA

OUTSIDE GOTLAND
THE PALAEOZOIC BALTIC BASIN
Murchison (1846) was the f i r s t t o state that the Silurian s t r a t a of

Gotland form p a r t of one l a r g e Baltic basin, the oldest deposits of which oc-
c u r on the mainlands of Sweden and Russia, whereas the Upper Silurian sed-
iments are found c l o s e r t o the centre of the basin on the main land and on the
islands of Gotland and Saaremaa (Oesel). T h i s view, a l s o adopted by Schmidt
(1890, 1891) and Dames (1890), h a s since been proved entirely valid (cf. Fig.3,4).
T h i s Silurian transgression over the Baltic shield was preceded by a
number of earlier ones. T h e first of these took place during the Early
Cambrian. During that time the weathered surface of the Fennoscandian
crystalline basement was inundated by a shallow s e a , in which sand and
gravel w e r e sedimentated close t o the shore. P a r t of these near-shore depos-
its can still be studied on the Swedish mainland, in a narrow belt (about 15 km
wide) of sandstones and sandstone conglomerates, along the e a s t coast be-
tween the island of RunnU, a t the height of Paskallavik in the north, and close
to Karlskrona in the south. Much of it,however, is covered with Quaternary
deposits. To the west of t h i s sandstone belt the crystalline basement is
exposed.
Towards the e a s t the Lower Cambrian deposits can be pursued. They
form the floor of Kalmarsont, the strait between the mainland and the island
of Oland. The l a y e r s h e r e show a very slight dip eastwards (varying between
hardly recognizable and about 2"). Cambrian sandstones in westernm-ost
Oland are younger than those a t Kalmar, on the mainland. Crossing Oland
from west t o east, Middle and Upper Cambrian and Ordovician deposits are
encountered. A s will be discussed in the next section of t h i s chapter,
Cambrian and Ordovician sedimentation in the area of &and was not contin-
uous. Still further eastwards, in Gotland, deposits of Silurian (Gotlandian) age
are found. H e r e the l a y e r s dip very gently (on the average about OO30') to-
wards the southeast. They comprise the Llandoverian, Wenlockian, Ludlowian,
and perhaps a l s o p a r t of the Downtonian, of the English standard profile ( s e e
a l s o Chapter III, pp.42-44).
On the islands of Hiiumaa (DagU) and Saaremaa (Oesel) and in the east
Baltic mainland, the l a y e r s generally dip southwards. F r o m north t o south
the s a m e succession as is found in Sweden is encountered, from crystalline
basement via Cambrian-and Ordovician t o Silurian and south of this a l s o
Devonian (Fig.3). Of the Silurian, Llandoverian and Wenlockian a r e en-
countered in southern Hiiumaa, northern Saaremaa and the west coast of
Esthonia (between Hapsal and P e r n a u ) and the Ludlowian is found in southern
Saaremaa. On the floor of the Baltic the stratigraphical boundaries t u r n f r o m
8 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE BALTIC AREA OUTSIDE GOTLAND
Fig.3. Outline map of the Baltic a r e a , showing the submarine distribution of

Palaeozoic rocks a t the floor of the Baltic Sea. The boundaries a r e based on
the extension of submarine escarpments (clints l)and their connections with
the supramarine clints of Sweden and Esthonia. Dashed lines indicate those
p a r t s of the boundaries without morphological features, and they a r e , there-
fore, l e s s well established. The rings indicate fissure fillings ("clastic dikes")
in the strongly-jointed Archaean rocks. (After Martinsson, 1958; reproduced
with kind permission of the author).
a n about south-north direction (Olahd) t o an about west-east direction

(Esthonia); this can be well observed when looking at the coastal and sub-
marine Clint' complexes of the Palaeozoic (Martinsson, 1958).
'According to Martinsson (1958, p.15) Clint is originally a Danish and Swedish word,
used to indicate an escarpment, particularly in sedimentary rocks, without pointing
out i t s morphogenesis. Usually it comprises marine abrasion cliffs, and fluviatile
erosion s c a r p s in Palaeozoic and Cretaceous rocks. The word was already adopted in
medieval English. Unfortunately in the English language "clint" is also used synon-
ymously with g r i k e , signifying a type of hollow formed by k a r s t weathering
(Martinsson, 1958). In this book the word "clint" will be used in its original
Scandinavian sense.
T H E STRATIGRAPHY O F ()LAND 9
w-sw E-NE
1 = Silurian 2-Ordovic ian

3nCambrion 4rPrecambrian crystalline
Fig.4. Schematized section through the Baltic, vertical scale about 100 X
exaggerated.
From a schematized section through the Baltic a r e a from Kalmar t o the

Karelian Nose, it becomes clear that the Baltic is enclosed as a saucer-like
depression in the Fennoscandian crystalline basement. The successive sys-
tems overlie each other as a pile of plates (Fig.4).
THE STRATIGRAPHY OF OLAND
Before starting with a discussion on the Middle Palaeozoic sediments

of Gotland, it may be valuable t o briefly describe the older deposits first, in
order t o present some idea of the previous history of sedimentation in the
Baltic basin. In the f i r s t place, these older deposits a r e represented by the
Cambrian and Ordovician strata of the neighbouring island, Oland (Table I,
Fig.5).
Sandstones of the Lower Cambrian, oq. Holmia Series, have been ob-
served in only one outcrop on the island of Oland, but have a l s o been en-
countered in a few borings. These sandstones indicated thai the Lower
Cambrian sea had transgressed over an uneven morphology. Quartzite
monadnocks gave rise t o small islands that drowned much later in the Lower
Cambrian sea and consequently a r e covered with a much thinner sedimentary
complex than the surrounding a r e a s . Thus of two borings, a little l e s s than
10 km apart, in one were found 78 m of Lower Cambrian sandstones, in the
other only 2 m (Westergard, 1936). This has been interpreted as evidence
that the Lower Cambrian s e a presented a picture comparable with the Recent
skerry coast off Stockholm. According t o the present author this conclusion
is not yet warranted. Much more data would be necessary before it could be
decided that no other morphological features might have caused these sed-
imentary differences in thickness,
The Middle Cambrian strata a r e known as the Paradoxides Series. They
are developed as conglomerates, sandstones, shales and limestones. The
Lower Paradoxides Series ( P . oelandicus Stage) starts with a thin conglom-
erate, covered by grey and greenish shales with lenses of impure limestone;
the total thickness near Borgholm was about 57 m (of which the uppermost
10 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF T H E BALTIC AREA OUTSJDE GOTLAND
Chasmqw Limestone
I 3 Orthoceras Limestone
S Schroeteri Limestorm
p P/atyUrVS M d
Limestone
A ASqphus L i m e s t m e
L Planilimbata and
Limbata Li-tone
Alum Shales
Paradoxissirnus Sandatone
Oelundicus Shales
Fig.5. Simplified geological map of Oland, showing the distribution of the,

Palaeozoic sediments.
ca. 18 m have now been removed by erosion), decreasing towards the north
and south t o l e s s than 25 m (Regn611, 1948; W e s t e r g h d , 1936). The middle
part of the s e r i e s ( P . paradoxissirnus Stage) a l s o has a thin conglomerate
at its base. It is 10-15 cm thick and contains pebbles derived from the
P . oelandicus Stage. It is overlaid by a 7-30 m thick complex of thin-bedded
TABLE I
Subdivision of the Palaeozoic of Oland and its correlation with VLsterglltland and Scania
tratigraphy Oland VBstergBtland Scania
Dalmanitina
Series
not observed
I Dalmanitina
Limestone
Dalmaizitiitn Shales
and Limestone
Ostersjt) Limestone
Sandstone
Masur Limestone
Tretaspis Tretaspis Mudstone Tretaspis Shale
Series Paleoporella Limestone
(all three known from loose and Limestone
s l a b s only) ~~~~~~~~~
Zone with Dicrono-

Shale graptus clingani
(Chasmops) macrourns Limestone Chasmops Lime- Zone with Amplexo-
(loose slabs only) stone with
metabentonite gmptus vasae
I Shale
Zone with Diplo-
graptus molestus
Chasmops
Series Ludibundus Limestone
(Echinosphaerites Lime- Ludibundus Lime- Zone with Nema-
stone graptus gracilis
stone)
Zone with Climaco-

Crassicauda Limestone Crass icauda graptus haddingi
Limestone (Bronni Limestone)
Schroeteri L i m q t o n e Schroeteri Lime- Zone with Glosso-

stone and Shale graphs hincksi
Phtyurus Limestone
~
Upper Red
Megistaspis) gigas Limestone Limestone
Asaphus raniceps Limestone -1 Upper
Didymograpllis
Asaphus Lower Grey Shale
Series Limestone
(Orthoceras
Series) Asaphus lepidurus Limestone
(Megistaspis) Eimbata I Orthoce ras

Limestone Limestone
Lower Red
Upper (Megistaspis)plani- Limestone
Lower Didvnzogvaplus
limbata Limestone Shale
Lower (Megistaspis) plani-
lim bata Limestone
Ceratopyge Cera topyge Ceratopyge
Series Ceratopyge Shales and
Limestone Limestone Limestone
Dictyonema Shales I
Olenus
Series
Paradoxides forchhammeri Stage

Paradoxides
Series Paradoxides paradoxissimus Stage
Paradoxides aelandicus Stage
Holmia kjernlfi Stage

Holmia
Series Schmidtiellus torelli Stage
12 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF T H E BALTIC AREA OUTSIDE GOTLAND
sandstones and sandy limestones with thin beds of shale. The upper stage
( P .forchhurnrneri Stage) is, on the whole, developed in southern Oland only.
T h e r e i t consists in the extreme south of a thin conglomerate with Oligornys
exporrecta, overlaid by a bed of alum shale and bituminous limestone, with
a thickness of 0.5 m. Elsewhere, it is exclusively represented by the
Oligomys exporrecta conglomerate that thins out towards the north and can
be traced in the northern p a r t of the island in scattered localities only.
T h e r e i t contains an association of fossils that is characteristic partly of the
upper P. forchhammeri Stage and partly of the Upper Cambrian and even the
Dictyonema Shales of the lowermost Ordovician. This indicates that conglom-
e r a t e formation continued into the basal part of the Lower Ordovician
(Westergard, 1946; Thorslund, 1960).
The Upper Cambrian o r Olenus S e r i e s , is only developed in its normal
succession of alum shales with some limestones in the southern part of &and;
it is incomplete even there. The maximum thickness, established in a boring
in the south of the island, is 13.2 m , built up by alum shales, that contain a t
various levels nodules, balls, or beds of bituminous limestone (anthraconite
or stinkstone) (Hadding, 1 9 5 8 ~ )Towards
. the north i t is to a greater or l e s -
s e r extent replaced by conglomerate horizons, finally wedging out completely
( W e s t e r g h d , 1922, 1944, 1947).
The Lower Ordovician is divided into two s e r i e s , the Ceratopyge S e r i e s
and the Asaphus ( o r Orthoceras) Series. T h d l o w e r s e r i e s , resting upon the
Upper Cambrian conglomerate mentioned abpve, consists of shales with a
maximum thickness of 78 m in the south of Oland, overlaid by about 3 m of
limestones, of which the lower 314 p a r t in the south is replaced by shales.
The Asaphus S e r i e s is a complex of limestones, coloured r e d or grey, and
about 32 m thick.
Limestones a l s o build up the Middle Ordovician Chusmops Series.
These limestones a r e the youngest Palaeozoic rocks exposed as solid rocks
on the island. T h e top of this s e r i e s and the Tretaspis S e r i e s (lower Upper
Ordovician) only occur as loose fragments, whereas all younger Palaeozoic
sediments a r e lacking completely.
F o r further information about the Lower Palaeozoic of &and the r e a d e r
is r e f e r r e d t o reviews by Regnell (1948) and Manten (1960a,b) and t o the
m o r e specialized publications cited in these p a p e r s or given in the list of
references at the end of this book (e.g., Bohlin, 1949, 1955; Hessland, 1953;
Jaanusson, 1955, 1957; Jaanusson and Strachan, 1954; M. Lindstrilm, 1963;
Regnell, 1940, 1942; Waern, 1949; Westergard, 1929).
THE LOWER PALAEOZOIC OF GOTSKA SANDON
North of Gotland a deep boring was c a r r i e d out on the island of Gotska

Sandiln, 40 km north of F g r a (Thorslund, 1958). In addition t o that which has
been said e a r l i e r in this chapter about the Lower Palaeozoic south of Gotland,
and in comparison to that which borings have revealed about the basement of
Fig.6. Diagram showing the lithology of the Cambrian, Ordovician and Lower
Silurian underneath Gotska Sandbn, a s m a l l island, about 40 km north of
Gotland. (Drawn after data from Thorslund, 1958.)
I I
021
011
001
06
08
Lopu
UO131AO
-KI~UJO~
OL
NQGNVS WS.LO3 60 3IOZO3VTVd 83MOT 3H.L
14 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF T H E BALTIC AREA OUTSIDE GOTLANU
Gotland (Chapter III, pp.29-32), s o m e data about the correlating deposits of

Gotska Sandlln will b e useful (see Fig.6).
The boring was made n e a r Hamnudden, in the southwest of Gotska
Sandon. It reached a depth of 241 m below the surface, or 239 m below s e a
level.
The lowermost 9 m of the c o r e consist of a generally coarse-grained
quartzitic sandstone, distinctly bedded, with a dip of 10-15O. I t s age is pre-
sumably Jotnian, perhaps younger (Thorslund, 1958, p.193). T h i s sandstone
h a s been described in detail by Gorbatsehev (1962). T h e underlying crystal-
line was not reached.
The c o r e section between the depth of 232 and 159.5 m is r e f e r r e d to
the Cambrian. Skolithos Sandstone, common in the borings in Gotland, was
not found in Gotska Sandan. At the base of the Cambrian is a loose, coarse-
grained sandstone, with conglomerate horizons, containing small-sized
gravel. The bulk of the Cambrian is formed by fine-grained sandstone, with
intercalated pelite layers, especially in its lower and upper parts. The whole
section is correlated with the Lower Cambrian, the thickness of which (72.5 m )
is thus comparable with that at Bijda in Oland (78 m), but s m a l l e r than that
under Gotland (130 m at File Haidar, 106 m at Visby). It may be mentioned
h e r e that at Tallinn (Esthonia) the Lower Cambrian m e a s u r e s 130 m and a t
Leningrad 170 m in thickness.
Both the Middle and Upper Cambrian a r e missing in the Gotska SandBn
core.
The Ordovician section, 86.5 m thick, between 159.5 and 73 m in depth,
consists almost completely of limestone. Only between 99 and 92 m do pelite
l a y e r s with thin l a y e r s or lenses of impure limestone occur. The oldest
Ordovician l a y e r s may possibly represent the Megistaspis gigas Limestone.
Both the Lower and Middle Ordovician l a y e r s contain s e v e r a l surfaces of
discontinuity. The highest Ordovician strata which w e r e found belong t o the
Paleoporella Limestone. It is overlaid by Quaternary deposits, which attain
considerable thickness (73 m ) .
THE WEST BALTIC AREA DURING POST-GOTLANDIAN TIME
T h e Silurian stratigraphy of Gotland will be discussed in Chapters 111and XI.

F o r s o m e t i m e it was thought that the youngest Palaeozoic sediments of this
island belong t o the basal Devonian (cf. pp.43-44). F r o m almost the whole of
the west Baltic a r e a , no sediments a r e known t o have been deposited during the
long s t r e t c h of t i m e between the Early Devonian and the Late Quaternary. In the
east Baltic a r e a however, sedimentation continued during the Devonian ( s e e
the next section of this chapter). It is not known whether the connection with
the western s e a (Fig.7-9) was still in existence. The possible Devonian sed-
iments that have been described from the Oslo a r e a a r e of continental char-
a c t e r . However, the connection between the Baltic a r e a , e a s t of Oslo, and the
western s e a may have been situated further south of Oslo, as in fact it was
during, e.g., the Early Cambrian. Stronger negative evidence is that no
Devonian and younger Palaeozoic sediments a r e found in Scania or anywhere
e l s e i n Sweden.
It is difficult to ascertain whether the west Baltic a r e a was above s e a
level during the entire interval between the Early Devonian and the Quaternary
o r only during p a r t of it. The latter possibility would imply that younger
T H E EAST BALTIC PALAEOZOIC 15
deposits had been present, but were again eroded. Two facts might point to
this possibility. One is the established deposition of Devonian sediments
further to the east but still within the limits of the Baltic area. The second
is the preservation of uppermost Silurian (probably Downtonian) sediments
in Gotland. One would expect that these Middle Palaeozoic deposits would
have been removed by subaerial processes, had they been exposed to the
atmosphere for the entirety of this long time interval.
Quaternary land ice left great amounts of morainic material. During
post-Glacial time much of the land in the Baltic area was inundated. Many
fossil beach ridges and marine cliffs a r e proof of the former lower position
of the land relative t o sea level, which caused a greater extension of the sea
and lakes. Examples of such cliffs in Gotland have already been mentioned
in Chapter I.
THE EAST BALTIC PALAEOZOIC
In the east Baltic, sediments comparable t o those in Oland and Gotland

may be found in Esthonia, where the basement shows a general fall in the
southern direction ( 3 4 m/km on the average). This is similar to the dip of
the overlying Lower Palaeozoic deposits. The basement r i s e s again only in
the southeastern part of Esthonia. This basement is built up of crystalline
rocks of varying composition (gneiss, granite, pegmatite, amphibolite). Its
surface is uneven, with an amplitude of some tens of metres. Moreover, this
surface is strongly weathered in i t s uppermost few metres; in many places,
kaolin clay is found.
This basement i s overlaid by a 150-700 m thick complex of sedimentary
rocks belonging to the Cambrian, Ordovician, Silurian and Devonian. Its
stratigraphical subdivision is shown in Table 111. The Lower Palaeozoic is
in its turn covered by Quaternary deposits almost everywhere.
The Cambrian in Esthonia begins with a complex of coarse-grained

sediments called the Gdovi Stage or, in older literature, the " Lower Sandstone
and Conglomerate" . Conglomerates and gravelites directly overlie the base-
ment in some places. Coarse-grained sandstones a r e dominant in the Lower
Gdovi and fine-grained sandstones or aleuroliths in the Upper Gdovi. The
overlying Kotlini Stage (Laminarite Clay) is built up of greenish-grey or
brownish clays, in which thin layers of sandstone a r e interbedded. The thin
bedding is characteristic; it is further emphasized by the presence of sapropel
films on the bedding planes. The Kotlini is well developed in east and south-
east Esthonia, but is absent or thin in the west and centre. Gdovi and Kotlini
a r e united t o the Valdaic Series or Waldai Series.
Next is the Baltic Series, which opens with the Lomonossovi Stage, or
Upper Laminarite Sandstones, built up mainly of coarse- and fine-grained
sasdstones; these are overlaid by clays of the Lontova Stage (Lower Cambrian
Blue Clay, in the strict sense). At the top, the fine-grained sandstone of the
Pirita Stage (EoPhytolz Sandstone) is found.
The stratigraphical position of the Tiskre Stage is questionable. During
recent years, many geologists have classified it as Middle Cambrian, where-
a s others favour the upper Lower Cambrian. The Tiskre consists of fine-
grained sandstone with generally thin interbedded layers of sandy-clayish
material.
16 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF T H E BALTIC AREA OUTSIDE GOTLAND
TABLE D[
Earlier and present subdivisions of the Ordovician in Esthonia
n
Vormsi
1-I
Rakvere
L
Vasalemma I DUI
Jahvischichten
I
.g
a
1“ “ Kukruse
Lasnamlgi
I cu I
Toila (Volchov)
Leetse
No further Middle Cambrian is present in Esthonia and the Upper

Cambrian is completely missing. The thickness of the Esthonian Cambrian
is 100-250 m.
The Ordovician in Esthonia is mainly built up of limestones. Only in the

lower part do sandstones and slates occur. Table I1 shows the recent strat-
igraphy of the Esthonian Ordovician, which is based mainly upon publications
of the last two decades, and predominantly upon those published in Russian or
Esthonian. It is compared to the well-known e a r l i e r stratigraphy of dpik and
others and to the f i r s t stratigraphy of that area, which was given by Schmidt.
A few other authors have published more o r less deviating stratigraphical
subdivisions, but these need not be reviewed in this section.
There has been some difference of opinion about the lower boundary of
the Ordovician. Schmidt (1858,1881) posited the base of the Glauconite Sand-
stone for this. During the first half of this century, almost all stratigraphers
a l s o inaluded the Dictyonema Shales in the Ordovician. In recent years, there
T H E EAST BALTIC PALAEOZOIC 17
TABLE III
Stratigraphy of the Palaeozoic in Esthonia
Thickness
stage (m)
names
Svinordi 1.5
Seloni 8.8
Eudovo 6-12
F rasnian (Tsuudovo)
Pskovi 12.5-17
Snetogori 5-55
Devonian Amata 1-5
Gauja 55-65
~~ ~
Burtnicki 82-105
Arukllla 70-100
Givetian
Narva 25-100
1 z:zmaI
Ptirnu 7-72.5
Ohesaar Kq approx. 10
approx. 15
Ludlowian Kg
K2 approx. 15
Kaarma K1 35-65
approx. 25
Silurian 30.5-56.5
Lower Adavere 27.3-35.4
RaikkUla 30-52
Llandoverian Tamsalu 6.8-14.4
Juuru 8.4-22
Porkuni 3-16
Pirgu Fl.3 25-57

Vormsi Fib 6-2 0
Nabala Fla 22-42
Rakvere E 8-2 5
Vasalemma Dm 0.5-10
Keila Dn 1.5-26.8
Jahvi DI 5-12.9
Idavere Cm 0.4-1 1
Ordovician Middle Kukruse cn 4-14
Uhaku CIC 4-16
Lasnamtigi Cm 5-1 3
Aseri crs 0.1-7
Lower
1 Kunda
Toila
Leetse
I
I
Bm
Bn
-
BI
0.1-14
0-1 4
0.34
Pakerordi 1 A2-3 2-21

Middle (7) Tiskre 10-30
Pirita 10-20
Baltic Lontova 25-85
Cambrian
25-30
Lower ~~
Valdaic
1 Kotlini
Gdovi
I Albl
A h
2-47
15-65
18 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY O F THE BALTIC AREA OUTSIDE GOTLAND
has been a growing tendency to return to Schmidt's idea.

Similar difficulties exist for the upper boundary. In 1944, Jaanusson
published the opinion that this boundary belonged between the Vormsi and
Pirgu Stages, since several characteristically Silurian genera occur already
in the Pirgu. Most Esthonian stratigraphers, however, still do not seem to
share his opinion but stick to the boundary as defined earlier by Opik (1934).
This also s e e m s to be true for Jaanussonls (1945) lower and upper bound-
a r i e s of the Middle Ordovician, which he drew between the Aseri and
LasnamXgi and between the Keila and Vasalemma, and even more for
Bekkerls (1922)e a r l i e r definition of the lower boundary of the Middle
Ordovician a t the base of the Kukruse Stage.
The Lower Ordovician i s called Olandian in Esthonia; it is subdivided

into two subseries, the Iru and Ontika.
The I r u comprises one stage, the Pakerordi. This begins with fine-
grained sandstone (Ulgase member; Sandstone with Acrotreta ). Next is the
Maardu member which begins with a basal conglomerate that is not developed
everywhere. It is overlaid by one or two layers of the Obolus Conglomerate,
consisting of quartz-sandstone lenses very rich in shells of Obolus and their
fragments. Over this conglomerate, sandstone with interbedded Dictyonema
Shale is found. Locally, the Maardu member ends with the so-called Pyrite
layer, a nearly 10 cm thick layer of quartz sandstone with Obolus fragments
cemented with pyrite. Underlying this layer is the well-known Detritus layer
of a few centimetres to 1-5 m thick, consisting of sandstone rich in Obolus
fragments. The Turissalu member (Dzctyonema Shales) is only developed in
northern Estonia.
The Ontika Subseries has three stages. The oldest is the Leetse Stage
or Glauconite Sandstone. Next is the Toila ( o r Volchow), formerly known as
Glauconite Limestone o r Megalaspis Limestone. The youngest is the Kunda,
which is bounded at both its base and top by discontinuities. In the east, the
succession consists of oolitic limestone, dolomitic limestone, limestone and
oolitic limestone. In the west, a phosphoritic conglomerate, limy sandstone
and limestone a r e present; the latter farther westward passes into sandy
limestone.
The Middle Ordovician or Viruan Series is comprised of not less than

eight stages. The oldest is the Aseri Stage, which consists mainly of lime-
stones, generally containing ferruginous ooids. The Lasnamiigi Stage was
originally known as Building Limestone, The Uhaku Stage is represented by
thin-bedded marly limestones, Next is the Kukruse Stage, with marly lime-
stones with interbedded bituminous limestone and kukersite (oil shale). The
Idavere Stage is built up of limestones with a large number of locally inter-
bedded marlstone layers. About the s a m e sediments a r e found in the JBhvi
Stage. The Keila Stage shows marly limestone and harder, purer limestone
with uneven bedding planes. The youngest is the Vasalemma Stage. It is
comprised of three members, which are not represented everywhere. The
Vasalemma member consists of coarse-grained cystoid limestone and un-
stratified, dense and marly reef limestone. The Saku member is of an ex-
tremely varied lithological composition with, from the base upwards, coarse-
crystalline dolomitic limestone, marly dolomite and dolomitic limestone with
interbedded layers of clayey marlstone, and marly limestone. The Oandu
member contains marly limestone, marlstone and claystone.
THE EAST BALTIC PALAEOZOIC 19
The Upper Ordovician is known in Esthonia a s the Harjuan Series. This

begins with the characteristic limestone of the Rakvere Stage. This limestone
is relatively homogeneous, yellowish in colour, microcrystalline, and shows
shelly fracturing; it reminds one of lithographic limestone. The next or
Nabala Stage contains similar limestone and dolomitized variations of it.
The Vormsi Stage consists of nodular limestone with varying marl content.
There is a discontinuity between this and the preceding stage. A t the top,
the Vormsi limestone passes gradually into the marly nodular limestones of
the overlying Pirgu Stage, which often contain interbedded marlstone layers.
In the Pirgu Stage, some reefs are also present (cf. RGSmusoks, 1960, p.67).
The Silurian i s exposed in central Esthonia and on the islands. It is

mainly represented by limestones, dolomites and marlstones. Most geol-
ogists draw the lower boundary at the base of the Porkuni Stage; however,
some include the upper part of the Porkuni, which is devoid of fossils, in the
next or Juuru Stage, and then draw the boundary below the thus-defined J u u r u
Stage. The top of the Silurian in Esthonia is the Ohesaar Stage. Younger
Silurian sediments a r e not found there. The discontinuity continues up to the
Middle Devonian. In Latvia and Lithuania, younger Silurian deposits a r e found
by drilling.
The Silurian sediments of Esthonia were deposited in a shallow sea
during a period of regression. The direction in which the sea withdrew can
be established from the outcrops of the various stages of the Esthonian
Silurian. Whereas the oldest deposits of the Llandoverian extend up to the
town of Mustvee at Lake cuds, the Upper Silurian is only exposed in the
island of Saaremaa and smaller islands in the environment of that island.
The lower three quarters of the Porkuni Stage consist of pure, marly
and bituminous limestones, which locally a r e very fossiliferous. Small reefs
occur, built up by corals and Algae. The Upper Porkuni consists of quartz
sandstone or sandy limestone overlaid by limestone, and is devoid of fossils.
The Juuru is unquestionably of Llandoverian age. It is represented by
marly limestones with many interbedded marlstone layers.
. The Tamsalu Stage occurs in a belt from the west coast of Hiiumaa to
the vicinity of the town of Mustvee, and is composed mainly of limestones and
marly limestones. Five members a r e distinguishable. Of these, the Ridala
member composes the lower beds of the stage, t o a thickness of 3.3 m. It is
represented by three lithological complexes which, from the base upwards,
a r e (1)Pentamerus limestone, containing shelly detritus and limestone
pebbles (0.5 m); (2) limestone consisting of shelly detritus and partly of
rounded psammitic limestone grains (1.5 m); and (3) thin bedded marly lime-
stone rich in Aulopora sp. (1 m). The Hilliste member is 7.7 m thick and also
comprises three lithological complexes, which a r e ( 4 ) medium-grained lime-
stone with limestone pebbles and coarse shelly detritus (1.7 m); (5) fine-
grained marly limestone with very small shell fragments (1 m); and (6)
crinoid limestone, coarse-crystalline or with varying granulation and con-
taining coarse shell detritus (3-5 m). A characteristic of the Hilliste member
is the occurrence of relatively small reefs, mainly built up by corals. The
Purga member (1.5-10.15 m ) is mainly composed of thin-bedded marly lime-
stones which often contain redeposited carbonate particles. The Tammiku
member (1.85-10 m ) is mainly represented by Pentamems limestone and is
very rich in shells and shell fragments of Pentamems borealis Eichwald,
20 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY O F T H E BALTIC AREA OUTSIDE GOTLAND
together with corals and stromatoporoids. The Kose member consists of

marlstones and marly limestones which, except for small shell fragments,
a r e very poor in fossils.
South of the Tamsalu Stage, the Raikkllla Stage is exposed. In western
Esthonia it is represented by grey limestone, limestone rich in corals and
stromatoporoids and thin-bedded limestone. These a r e overlaid by limestone
with interbedded conglomerate layers, coral limestone, light-grey limestone
and cavernous dolomite. In eastern Esthonia, irregularly-dolomitized lime-
stone and marly dolomite occur, which a r e overlaid by cavernous dolomite
with corals and stromatoporoids, marlstone, and thin-bedded fossiliferous
limestone.
The Adavere Stage represents the uppermost Llandoverian. In the west
of the Esthonian mainland, there is a succession comprised of dolomitized
marly limestone with Pentamerus oblongus Sowerby, marly limestone, marl-
stone and claystone with Catazyga furcata (Sowerby), dolomitized limestone
with Pentamerus oblongus Sowerby and dolomitized marly limestone with
Pentamerus estonus Eichwald. Towards the west and south, there is an increase
in terrigenous components. In drillings in Saaremaa, the Adavere Stage was
found to consist mainly of claystones and marlstones. In the east, there is a
succession of light grey dolomite with pentamerids, yellowish coarse-crystal-
line dolomite and bluish-grey coarse-crystalline dolomite with pentamerids.
The Wenlockian begins with the Jaani Stage, which is exposed as a nar-
row belt along the northern shore of the islands of Saaremaa and Muhu; in
the Esthonian mainland, this belt is broader (up to 15 km),but does not ex-
tend farther to the east than the village of Viindra. From h e r e it is covered
by the Middle Devonian. The lower part of the stage consists of dolomitized
marlstone and clayish marlstone. The content of terrigenous components in-
c r e a s e s in the westward direction. The upper part shows fossiliferous marly
limestone and marlstone, which a r e dolomitized over large a r e a s ,
The Jaagarahu Stage is exposed in the islands of Vaika and Vilsandi,
the northern part of the island of Saaremaa, the island of Muhu and the south-
west of the Esthonian mainland. The stage consists of limestones, part of
which a r e dolomitized. Three members a r e distinguishable. In Saaremaa,
west of the Triigi Peninsula, the Pangamagi member is present, with light-
coloured limestone, crinoid limestone and, to a l e s s e r extent, marly lime-
stone. Reefs and biostromes of corals and stromatoporoids a r e character-
istic, East of the Triigi Peninsula, the Kesselaid member can be found with
dolomitized limestone and relatively many reefs, mainly built up by cal-
careous Algae and bryozoans. In Muhu and in the northeast of Saaremaa, this
member is overlaid by the Maasi member, which consists of yellowish,
dolomitized limestone locally rich in spongiostromids.
The Ludlowian of Esthonia is only expoaed in the island of Saaremaa.

Four stages a r e distinguishable. The oldest of these is the Kaarma Stage.
In the west of the island, it consists of thin-bedded limestone which rhythm-
ically alternates with dolomite containing Eurypterus, and marl. These a r e
overlaid by light-coloured dolomite. In central and east Saaremaa, the stage
is mainly built up of light-yellowish dolomite which is thick-bedded and
partly cavernous.
The Paadla Stage is found from the southwest coast, over Kogula, to the
southeast coast. In the west of this stage the Atla member is found, which
CAMBRIAN AND EARLY ORDOVICIAN PALAEOGEOGRAPHY 21
consists of stratified limestone and reefs built up by c o r a l s and stromato-

poroids. In the central and e a s t e r n p a r t of the area where the Paadla is exposed,
the Irase m e m b e r c r o p s out, which consists of stratified limestone. In t h e
environs of Liimanda and Paadla, these m e m b e r s are overlaid by the Kogula
member, with thick-bedded, fine-grained limestone containing Solenopora sp.
and Ilionia Prisca (Hisinger).
T h e Kaugatuma Stage is exposed in the south of Saaremaa, including the
north of the SFjrve Peninsula. In the lower p a r t of this stage, g r e y marly lime-
stone and marlstone occur, and in the upper p a r t , grey crinoid limestone and
fossiliferous marly limestone are present.
T h e Ohesaar Stage is only exposed in the southern p a r t of the SFjrve
Peninsula and in the s k e r r y Ohesaar and its surroundings. It comprises lime-
stone, marly limestone and marlstone. In the top of the Ohesaar section,
sandy limestone is a l s o found.
During the end of the Silurian, the E a r l y Devonian and p a r t of the Middle
Devonian, continental conditions prevailed in Esthonia. Denudation occurred
with the result that deposits from these periods are missing. On the washed-
out surface of the Silurian, Ordovician and even Cambrian and P r e c a m b r i a n
(in the drilling at M h i s t e ) , Middle Devonian (Givetian) sediments of conti-
nental origin can he found, which w e r e deposited on the extensive alluvial
coastal plains (sandstones, claystones, marlstones). T h e s e deposits are fol-
lowed by Upper Devonian sediments. T h e r e is no distinct lithological bound-
a r y and the sediments of the lower t h r e e stages of the Frasnian consist a l s o
of m a t e r i a l of continental origin. They are overlaid by m a r i n e sediments
(dolomites, limestones).
T h e deposits of the Middle Devonian and the lower p a r t of the Upper
Devonian have a cyclic character. Individual cycles consist mainly of sands
and sandstones in the lower p a r t and mainly of marlstones and claystones,
alternating with aleuroliths and sandstones, in the upper part. T h e fossil
content is comprised of primitive plants and a r m o u r e d fishes, but only a few
invertebrates. T h e upper p a r t of the Upper Devonian, on the other hand, is
again r i c h in invertebrate fossils.
CAMBRIAN AND EARLY ORDOVICIAN PA LAE W E OGRAPHY
Since the areas with Cambro-Silurian sediments in Sweden are relative-

ly s m a l l and in most cases situated at considerable distances from each
other, it is a difficult t a s k to draw palaeogeographical m a p s for various t i m e s
during the E a r l y Palaeozoic. However, such a wealth of data has been col-
lected on the Cambrian and E a r l y Ordovician that such m a p s can be made
for certain stages of these s y s t e m s (Fig.7-9). They present a general picture
of how the E a r l y Cambrian sea reached the Baltic shield through a n a r m
covering northernmost Jutland, Kattegat and southwestern Scania. The south-
western boundary of this a r m is uncertain. T h e E a r l y Cambrian s e a inundated
vast p a r t s of the Baltic area. T h e m a p s a l s o show the culmination of this
transgression in the middle of the E a r l y Cambrian. During the Middle
Cambrian the sea again withdrew from most of the Baltic area. I t still
covered vast a r e a s of Norway however, and from t h e r e intermittent, s m a l l e r
t r a n s g r e s s i o n s in a n e a s t e r n direction took place during both the Middle and
Late Cambrian. During these, Oland was usually inundated in contrast t o
Fig.?. Palaeogeographical map of two phases during the E a r l y Cambrian

(above) and two phases during the early Middle Cambrian (below). (After
Thorslund, 1960; reproduced with the kind permission of the author and
Sveriges Geologiska Undersokning, Stockholm).
CAMBRIAN AND EARLY ORDOVICIAN PALAEOGEOGRAPHY 23
Fig.8. Palaeogeographical maps of an early and a late phase during the

middle Middle Cambrian (above) and of two phases during the Late Cambrian
(below). (After Thorslund, 1960; reproduced with the kind permission of the
author and Sveriges Geologiska Undersokning, Stockholm).
Fig.9. Palaeogeographical maps of four phases during the Lower Ordovician

Epoch: Tremadocian (upper left), Early Arenigian (Hunneberg Age in the
Swedish geochronology; upper right, below left) and Middle Arenigian
(Billingen Age; below right). (After Thorslund, 1960; reproduced with the kind
permission of the author and Sveriges Geologiska Undersokning, Stockholm).
SILURIAN PALAEOGEOGRAPHY 25
Gotland which generally remained dry. A new l a r g e transgression began in

the Early Ordovician, beginning with and including the Early Arenigian (Early
Asaphus Epoch), when the s e a expanded m o r e generally over the a r e a of
resistance (RbEmusoks, 1960, p.66; Thorslund, 1960, p.75) ’.
Unfortunately no palaeogeographical maps of the Middle and Late
Ordovician and the Silurian have been published up till now. T h e r e s e e m s t o
have been a reduction of the a r e a of the s e a covering the Baltic a r e a during
the Middle and Late Ordovician Period. Middle Ordovician sediments have
been recorded from several regions. Those of JPmtland exhibit a general
change of facies, expressed by a diminishing content of limestones and an
increasing wealth of shales and sandstones. In Dalecarlia and in the south of
the Gulf of Bothnia the so-called Kullsberg Limestone is found, which in-
cludes reef-like formations.
Of the Upper Ordovician the Tretaspis S e r i e s has a l a r g e r extension
than the overlying Dalmanitina Series. The latter is missing in the Gulf of
Bothnia a r e a , in Esthonia and in Gotland (Chapter 111, p.32). In Dalecarlia
t h e r e is a second sequence with reef limestone (Boda Limestone) in the Up-
p e r Ashgillian. T h e lithological development of the Dalmanitina Series in
Vistergotland points t o deposition in shallow water (Thorslund, 1960, p.83).
In t)stergotland the Tretaspis shales and finely nodular limestones a r e over-
laid by a limestone conglomerate belonging t o the Dalmanitina Series. T h e r e
this series otherwise consists of argillaceous limestone with l a y e r s of
calcareous shale.
SILURIAN P A LA E OGE OGRA P HY
For a better understanding of the Silurian of Gotland a few lines about

the palaeogeography during that period are still necessary. An attempt will
be made h e r e to give a generalized picture of the distribution of the Silurian
sediments, as has been recorded until now.
It has been mentioned in one of the previous sections of this chapter
that Silurian sediments w e r e deposited in the e a s t of the Baltic, on the
islands of Hiiumaa and Saaremaa and in the east Baltic main land.
Silurian sediments a r e a l s o well-known in southwestern Scania. They
start with the black and dark-grey Rastrites Shale (Rastrites Series). The
boundary with the underlying Ordovician is indistinct and has been a m a t t e r
of discussion (Troedsson, 1936; Waern, 1948). The s e r i e s is correlated with
the English Llandoverian.
The Rastrites S e r i e s is overlaid by the Cyrtograptus Series that is
correlated with the two uppermost zones of the Llandoverian, characterized
by Monograptus spiralis, and Cyrtograptus lapworthi, respectively, and with
IIn a personal letter professor Thorslund s t r e s s e d once more that the maps, repro-
duced h e r e in Fig.7-9 are only tentative drawings, as all palaeogeographic maps must
be. H e kindly informed me that the Middle Baltic Island during the Billingen Age very
likely extended further to the east and southeast than drawn in Fig.9. The cover of the
Early Palaeozoic sea over Denmark is unknown but for the island of Bornholm. How-
ever, according t o Holmsen (1958) the boring at Ringe (Fyn, Denmark) very likely
reached Permian o r T r i a s s i c arkose which was previously dated as Precambrian.
Consequently, it i s possible that there a r e Early Palaeozoic strata below as found in
the Oslo region (Thorslund, personal information).
26 PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE BALTIC AREA OUTSIDE GOTLAND
the whole of the Wenlockian. It consists mainly of grey t o black shales,

Lenses o r thin beds of grey o r yellowish, dense and hard limestone a r e com-
mon. In its lower p a r t s thin l a y e r s of metabentonite a r e present.
Presumably following upon the Cyrtograptus S e r i e s is the Colonus Shale.
It is remarkable however, that in no locality has the Colonus Series been seen
in direct contact either with underlying or with overlying s t r a t a (Regnell, 1960).
The s e r i e s comprises mainly light-grey, or greenish, bluish, or reddish
micaceous shales, which a r e generally somewhat calcareous. Lenses or
intercalated thin beds of grey limestone occur frequently. The Colonus S e r i e s
is correlated with the Lower and Middle Ludlowian.
The youngest beds of Palaeozoic age in Scania belong to the 6ved-
Ramsasa Series, of Upper Ludlowian age. It is comprised of a composite
group of limestones, marlstones, shales and sandstones.
F r o m a stratigraphical point of view, the Silurian is far m o r e com-
pletely represented in Scania than in any other part of Sweden, Gotland not
excepted. With r e g a r d to facies there is a great difference between these two
a r e a s , with shales predominating in Scania, and limestones, marlstones and
sandstones in Gotland. Not only is the Silurian of Scania very complete, it is
a l s o enormously thick in comparison with sediments of s i m i l a r age in other
p a r t s of Sweden. No definite figure can be given, but the entire thickness of
the Silurian of Scania may be estimated t o be in the o r d e r of 1000-1500 m
(Rustrites Series approx. 40-100 m; Cyrtogvaptus S e r i e s approx. 100 m ? ;
Colonus Series approx. 600 m; bed-Ramshsa S e r i e s approx. 300 m ? )
(Regndll, 1960; Thorslund, 1960).
In Ostergotland and VPstergijtland no Silurian stages higher than Upper
Llandoverian a r e present. In Jamtland, along the border of the Scandinavian
mountain range, the Llandoverian and lowermost Wenlockian a r e represented.
No Silurian sediments have been reported from Narke, in the a r e a of the
great lakes. In Dalecarlia there a r e shales belonging t o the Rustrites S e r i e s
and shales and limestones that a r e correlated with the uppermost Llandoverian
and lowermost Wenlockian. Most of the Wenlockian and all of the Ludlowian
a r e missing. The youngest Palaeozoic beds a r e those of the O r s a Sandstone.
The basal beds of this rock unit a r e coarse-grained, in p a r t conglomeratic
and cross-bedded. The main m a s s of the unit consists of a fine-grained, soft,
sometimes calcareous sandstone. Its colour v a r i e s from almost white to red,
i t s clayey, shaly bedding planes occasionally show beautiful mud cracks
(Thorslund, 1960). The Orsa Sandstone is probably of uppermost Ludlowian
age and may have been deposited during a n eastward transgression of the
western sea.
From this survey i t may be concluded that during the Llandoverian the
s e a covering the Baltic a r e a again had a l a r g e r extension than during the
uppermost Ordovician. The northwestern s h o r e line of the s e a , however,
showed a general trend to withdraw southeastward. During the time the
Silurian sediments of Gotland w e r e deposited, Gotland on the average was
situated not far away from the northwestern s h o r e line of the sea which
covered part of the present Baltic a r e a . Between this s e a and the western
s e a the connection over Scania and the Kattegat still existed. In i t s main
points the situation may have been m o r e or l e s s comparable with that of the
Early Cambrian.
A different interpretation of the Silurian situation around Gotland is

given by Von Bubnoff (1952). He a s s u m e s that the facies with graptolite
SILURIAN PALAEOGEOGRAPHY 27
s h a l e s in central southern Sweden has been deposited in deeper water than
the limestone in the areas east (Gotland, Esthonia) and west (Oslo) of it.
Consequently, he a s s u m e s that a l a r g e sea covered the whole area between
Oslo and Esthonia. But, whereas the limestones in the marginal areas show
a thickness of a few hundred m e t r e s , the shales in central southern Sweden,
according t o him, do not m e a s u r e m o r e than about 50 m . T h i s is interpreted
by Von Bubnoff (1952, p.76) as being due t o a stronger subsidence of the sea
bottom in the central area, which h a s not been compensated by sedimentation
t o the s a m e extent as the marginal areas. He, therefore, r e g a r d s the lime-
stones in Gotland and Esthonia as directly related t o those in the Oslo a r e a .
Several arguments can be advanced t o dispute this view of Von Bubnoff:
(1) T h e Silurian in central southern Sweden is indeed relatively thin,
But this is due t o the fact that no sediments of Wenlockian and Ludlowian age
are known from Ostergijtland, VastergBtland and Narke. T h e r e are no indica-
tions whatsoever of a n inundation of these areas of Sweden during the middle
and upper stages of the Silurian.
( 2 ) On the Swedish mainland the Silurian is developed most completely
in Scania ( s e e above). However, the thickness of the Silurian t h e r e should be
estimated as in the o r d e r of 1000-1500 m , not about 50 m . It is t r u e that
r a t h e r considerable vertical displacements must have taken place in connec-
tion with the deposition of the Colonus S e r i e s , but these can adequately and
in fact m o r e satisfactorily be explained on the b a s i s of block faulting (Regnkll,
1960).
( 3 ) T h e bathymetric chart and the sections published by F r o m m (1943)
f o r the northwestern Baltic show a northwestern boundary of the Silurian
basin that is in accordance with the picture presented in the f i r s t p a r t of this
section, and not with that of Von Bubnoff. Both the c h a r t and the sections show
that the crystalline basement takes up a n increasingly lower position towards
the e a s t and southeast. Also, the sequence of the Cambro-Silurian i n c r e a s e s
in thickness with increasing distance from the e a s t e r n s h o r e of Sweden.
( 4 ) Epeirogenetic movements in Gotland during the Silurian took place
around a dominantly northeast striking hinge line (Chapter TV, pp.46 -48).
Occasionally the s t r i k e of the hinge line was about e a s t o r north. Von Bubnoff's
interpretation is not supported by any of the directions of dip.
( 5 ) T h e distribution of both the bioherms and the stratified sediments
in Gotland indicates formation not far from the northwestern s h o r e line of the
Baltic (see, e.g., Chapter XI).
In conclusion, the validity of Von Bubnoff's view of a l a r g e Silurian sea
must be denied. A palaeogeographical situation with a s m a l l e r s e a covering
part of the present Baltic area is m o r e likely. The area now constituting
Gotland formed p a r t of this sea, but was relatively close t o the northwestern
shore. F u r t h e r south this sea had a connection with a n other, western s e a .
T h i s connection occupied the area of the present Scania and Kattegat.
29
Chapter III
llE PALAEOZOIC DEPOSITS OF GOTI,AND
THE BASEMENT O F GOTLAND
Knowledge of the basement of the Silurian s t r a t a exposed in Gotland

h as been obtained f r om the c o r e s of two deep borings, one near Visby
(Hedstrom, 1923d), the other in the a r e a of File Haidar, between TingstPde
TrXsk and Slite (Thorslund and Westerggrd, 1938).
Both borings w e r e brought down into the Precam bri an basement, which
w a s reached a t a depth of 382.3 m n e a r Visby and of 500 m i n File Haidar
(Fig.10). It consists of grey-veined gneiss, with r e d pegmatite. T h e s e rocks
are considered Archaean of age and w e r e found t o be r a t h e r strongly
weathered.
Th e Cambrian overlies the basement with a basal conglomerate, 35 cm
thick, which is ver y loosely cemented and crowded with sm al l pebbles which
do not exceed 15 m m i n diameter and which are, as a rul e, well worn. T he
bulk of them are made up of light-grey quartz'; t o a minor extent the pebbles
consist of light quartzites.
T h e Cambrian deposits, mainly consisting of sandstones, reach a thick-
n e s s of 140.9 m under Visby and of 157.3 m under File Haidar. They rep-
r es en t the Lower Cambrian (Holmia S e r i e s ) and the lowest stage of the Middle
Cambrian (Paradoxides oelandicus Stage) (cf. Table I). T h e lower as well as
the upper boundaries of the Cambrian i n the borings are very sharp. T he bed-
ding planes a r e , broadly speaking, horizontal. However, at some levels they
show a dip which is usually slight but which may reach a maximum of 13O
(Thorslund and W e s t e r g h d , 1938).
T h e Lower Cambrian sandstones, in p a r t with s e a m s of shale, a r e very
poor in fossils. B ur r ow s and trails (Skolithos linearis Haldeman, and
Diplocraterion parallelurn Thorell), on the other hand, are common i n nearly
the whole sequence. T h e Paradoxides oelandicus Stage in Gland and other
Scandinavian regions consists predominantly of shales. T h i s sediment is a l s o
the predominating lithological constituent of the P. oelandicus section in the
co r e of the Visby drilling (HedstrBm, 19234). In the File Haidar core, how-
ev e r , sandstone prevails. T h e fauna of the Middle Cambrian too, is
lThorslund and Westergard (1938) consider it evident that the quartz of the pebbles
originated from pegmatite dikes piercing the subjacent gneiss. This conclusion is not
considered obvious by the present author. Between the Archaeic and the Cambrian a
long time has elapsed during which several peneplanations must have occurred, which
may well have left behind quartz of an other origin. This is also suggested by the
presence of quartzites, which are not directly derived from the Archaeic basement
of gneiss with pegmatite dikes.
30 T H E PALAEOZOIC DEPOSITS OF GOTLAND
260
2 70
280
2 90
300
Limestone LEGEND Polite with Lenses and

nodules of limestone
Limeston. with corrosion surface Pelite
Glaucanitlc Itmeetone W s t o m dtsrnafkq ulthrhaie
Limestone oilernoting with Sandstone

calcareous mudetonr
Gneiss and pegmatite

THE BASEMENT O F GOTLAND 31
remarkably poor in the cores; winding trails a r e common, but burrows occur
only sparsely.
The bulk of the upper part of the cores, including Ordovician and
Silurian beds, consists of limestones of different textures and compositions.
Only in the uppermost, Silurian, part do argillaceous beds dominate, as this
part is built up of marly pelites with intercalations of limestone, the latter
diminishing in thickness and becoming more and more separated from each
other towards the top of the core.
AS previously mentioned, the contact of the Ordovician with the under-
lying Cambrian deposits is very distinct, and - to judge from the core-sec-
tion of File Haidar - almost horizontal. There is no conglomerate at the base
of the Ordovician, which consists of a light-grey glauconitic limestone, in
which only a few rounded grains of quartz have been observed, close above
the Cambrian strata. From its faunal contents it is evident that this
glauconitic limestone represents a stratigraphical unit which must be cor-
related with the Asaphus Limestones in Sweden ( s e e Table I) and with the
Kunda Stage ( Vaginatum Limestone) in the east Baltic region.
It thus appears that not only the middle and upper part of the Middle
Cambrian and the Upper Cambrian a r e missing underneath northern Gotland,
but a l s o the lower p a r t s of the Lower Ordovician, comprising the whole of the
Ceratopyge Series and the Upper (Megistaspis ) planilimbata Limestone and
the (Megistaspis) limbata Limestone of the Asaphus Series.
Moreover, the available sequences in the cores of the deep borings also
show signs of several stratigraphical gaps higher up in the s e r i e s . The
Asaphus Limestones in the core of File Haidar a r e only about 1 m thick and
contain several corrosion surfaces. Thus, even the Asaphus Limestones of
northern Gotland would very likely prove t o be fairly incomplete if detailed
comparisons could be made with the different zones of the AsaPhus
Fig.10. Diagram showing the lithology of the Cambrian, Ordovician and lower-
most Silurian underneath File Haidar, 8 km west of Slite and 25 km northeast
of Visby. The upper 200 m were drilled by percussion drill; from this level
to the bottom (507.5 m below the surface, which is 62.4 m above s e a level)
diamond drilling was employed. (Drawn after data from Thorslund and
Westerg%rd, 1938).
The correlation of the sediments from the drilling core with the stratig-
raphical units given in Table I is as follows:
- Dalmanitina Series, missing.
248.8-312.4 m : Tretaspis Series.
312.4-338.5 m : Chasmops Series; the fossil material obtained is not suf-
ficient t o permit an exact determination of the limits be-
tween the different zones that a r e distinguished within this
series.
338.5-341.7 m : Platyurns Limestone.
- Megistaspis gigas Limestone, missing,
34.1.7-342.7 m : Asaphus Limestones.
- Megistaspis limbata Limestone, Upper Megistaspis
Planilimbata Limestone, Ceratopyge Series, Olenus Series,
Upper and Middle Paradoxides Series, all missing.
342.7-ca.374 m: Paradoxides oelandicus Stage.
ca.374-500 m : Holmia Series.
32 THE PALAEOZOIC DEPOSITS OF GOTLAND
Limestones on both sides of the Baltic Sea (Thorslund and Westergard, 1938).
Above the Asaplzus Limestones, deposits corresponding t o the
(Megistaspis)gigas Limestone of the Swedish Upper Asaphus Series seem to
be lacking, but the presence of Plutyurus Limestone and of all four stages of
the Chasmops S e r i e s (Table I ) could again be proved.
The upper p a r t of the Ordovician section is difficult t o correlate with
other a r e a s . The limestones between 312.4 m and 289.7 m in the File Haidar
boring a r e considered by Thorslund and WestergArd (1938) as representative
of at least p a r t of the Rakvere (Wesenberg) Stage in Esthonia, which is cor-
related with the Lower Tretaspis S e r i e s in Sweden. T h e overlying algal lime-
stones in this boring a r e correlated with the Nabala and Vormsi Stages
(Lyckholm Stage) in Esthonia and the Upper Tretaspis S e r i e s in Sweden.
Equivalents of the Porkuni ( o r Borkholm) Stage in Esthonia, which is
now generally considered to represent the lowermost Silurian, a r e missing
in the borings. Thorslund and W e s t e r g h d a s s u m e that a l a r g e hiatus in the
profile exists a t this level. T h i s hiatus should comprise not only the
Dalmanitina S e r i e s of the Swedish profile, but a l s o the Lower Rastrites Shales.
In total, the thickness of the Ordovician sequence underneath Gotland
amounts to 98 m in the Visby boring and 93.9 m in the File Haidar boring.
T h e maximum thickness of the Silurian sequence of Gotland is about 650 m ,
of which about 140 m a r e situated below s e a level. The contact Ordovician -
Silurian was found in the two borings at a depth of 142.8 m and 248.8 m
respectively. It is marked off by a very distinct corrosion surface. Above
this surface t h e r e a r e no signs of stratigraphical breaks in the sequence of
strata. In the lowermost p a r t of the File Haidar c o r e some Lower Llandoverian
may be represented, though the fossil evidence is poor (cf. Martinsson, 1968).
Graptolites in the File Haidar core, between a depth of 241.5 m and
217.6 m , make a correlation with the Swedish Cephalograptus cometa Zone
likely, which means upper Middle Llandoverian. Overlying these rocks, the
borings showed the presence of r e d clayish-marly beds, which reach a thick-
ness of at least 54 m (Hedstrdm, 1923d). Comparable rocks have been de-
scribed by Lindstrdm (1888a) from loose blocks found on the beach near Visby.
They underly the Low&- Visby Beds (Stricklandinia m a r l of Lindstrdm) and
a r e included in his stratigraphy as stratum a. On the b a s i s of its fossil con-
tent he considers this stratum as Llandoverian of age. T h e Lower Visby Beds,
the oldest rocks to be seen on the surface in Gotland, have been considered
by some authors t o belong t o the top of the Upper Llandoverian (Munthe, 1910;
Hede, 1942) whereas others claim them to be of Wenlockian age (Van Hoepen,
1910; Teichert, 1928).
THE STRATIGRAPHY OF GOTLAND: HISTORICAL REVIEW
The study of the stratigraphy of the Silurian deposits of Gotland began

in 1845 when R.I. Murchison, together with M. de Verneuil, visited the island.
He attacked the problem a r m e d with a n extensive knowledge of the s e r i e s of
strata in the Wenlock and Ludlow districts (Great Britain). The reef lime-
stones, termed "ball-stones" by him, were correctly interpreted as local
intercalations of little stratigraphical importance. A s a result, the main
points of h i s ideas about the stratigraphy of Gotland (Murchison, 1846) are
in accordance with the present day interpretation, in that the strata strike
about northeast and have a slight southeastward dip. Thus the strata gradual-
ly become younger when going from north to south. Later the same views
THE STRATIGRAPHY OF GOTLAND 33
about the Silurian of Gotlandwere expressedby Schmidt (1859,1882,1890,1891).

His conclusions are based both on biostratigraphical considerations and on
comparisons with Esthonia and Saaremaa (Oesel).
A second approach t o the unraveling of the succession of the Gotlandian
s t r a t a was made by Lindstram (1857, 1882a,b, 1888a). T h i s author h a s been
of fundamental importance f o r h i s studies on the multitude of fossils occur-
ring in Gotland, but, unfortunately, had no c o r r e c t insight into their strat-
igraphical use. Thus, based upon their s i m i l a r lithological character, he
considered all crinoid limestones as belonging t o one stratigraphical horizon.
T h e s a m e was held f o r the "cephalopoda and stromatopora strata".
Lindstram (1888a), in his way, came t o the following subdivision of the
Silurian of Gotland:
(h) Cephalopoda and stromatopora stratum1 - Upper Ludlowian
(g) Megalomus banks - Guelph Limestone (Canada)
(f) Crinoid and coral limestone - Aymestrian o r Ludlowian
(e) Pterygotus stratum - basis of Ludlowian
(d) Limestones and oolite banks, with marlstones - Wenlockian Limestone
(c) Marl shale and sandstone - Wenlockian Shale
(b) St?'icklandinhmarl - Upper Llandoverian
(a) Oldest red Aruchnophyllum shale - Llandoverian
According t o Lindstram these strata occur all over the island. T h u s the
stromatopora limestones and the crinoid limestones, attributed t o his hori-
zons f-h, are found in the north as well as in the middle and the south of
Gotland. Lindstrbm' s stratigraphy is consequently a lithostratigraphy. T h e
palaeontological difficulties which a r o s e as a result of t h i s lithostratigraphy
are well illustrated in Lindstrbm's view about his s t r a t u m c, m a r l shale and
sandstone. T h i s horizon w a s found t o contain at least five different faunistical
areas, following each other, as he stated, not in a vertical direction, but
horizontally, from north t o south: c1: Visby fauna, c2: Westergarn fauna, 123:
fauna of the central area, c4: Petesvik - Hablingbo fauna, c5: sandstone
fauna of southernmost Gotland. I t is clear, without any further comment, that
Lindstram's lithostratigraphy can not be maintained when the concept of
guide f o s s i l s is accepted f o r at least p a r t of the fossils that are found in the
different faunistical areas.
With the work of Lindstram and Schmidt the two main directions f o r
f u r t h e r stratigraphical studies w e r e indicated. Dames (1890), Stolley (1897)
andWiman (1897a)followed the views developed by Lindstram. T h e i r contribu-
tions, as far as these are concerned with the stratigraphy of Gotland, only
give certain ameliorations of h i s subdivision. Other geologists, such as Holm
(1901) and Munthe (1910) who both initially adhered t o Lindstrom's views,
became m o r e and m o r e convinced that h i s stratigraphy w a s untenable when
carrying out detailed mappings i n the island.
T h e Dutch professor of geology H.G. Jonker, being among other things
engaged in the study of the origin of glacial boulders, thus came in contact
with the Silurian of Gotland and a r r i v e d a t s i m i l a r doubts. T h e s e w e r e
lThe word stratum as used by Lindstrom has the same sense as defined by Rice
(1954, p.393): "A layer of rock more o r less similar throughout, a lithologic unit.
It may consist of one o r more beds, and may constitute a formation or a member or
be only one of several s t r a t a in such formation or member". It will be used in this
sense throughout this book, It should be noted that this definition is broader than that
given in Schieferdecker (1959, p.139, cf. t e r m s 2410 and 2411).
TABLE IV
Comparison of the Middle Palaeozoic stratigraphy of Gotland according to Hede with that of some
e a r l i e r authors
LindstrOm (1888a) I
Van Hoepen (1910) 3ede (1921. 1S25a)
South Gotland
f-h (partly): limestone (partly); Sundr e Lini est one
Upper Limestone Limestone A.scocer~ls layer
(m a jor p a r t )
i
(pa rtly)
Upper Sphaerocodium
d (partly): Oolite Phacites Lime-
stone (except layer:
f-h (partly):
Upper Limestone EriLy lower
Ilionin-Spongiosl l'o~llo
Hamra Limestone
Sandstone with clay; Burgsvik Sand

Sandstone; stone; Oolite stone and
d (partly): Plracrtes Lime- Oolite
Oolite stone (lower pa rt)
Lower Sphaerocodium
d (partly): Lauensis Ma rl layer (partly);
Oolite Ek e Group
Rhizophyllum reef
I
limestone
Ma rl shale with
q:Petesvik- Petesvik Marl; limestone (partly);
Hablingbo; Nisse Limestone; Dayia flags;
fauna; Kr3klingbo- and Ilionia layer;
Hemse Group
Ostergarn Ma rl; A s c o c e r a s layer
d (partly); South Gotland
f-h (partly) (partly);
Limestone (partly) Upper Mega lomus
la ye r
Ma rl shale with
limestone (partly);
c (partly); Klinte Limestone Iliuhia-Spongio - IV-VI and Klinteberg
d (partly); stroma layer (part-
(major pa rt) VII Limestone
f-h (partly) l Y );
Younger crystalline
limestone (partly) I
Ma rl shale with Mulde
limestone (partly) Marlstone
F i r 0 Limestone layer (partly ); Halla

111?
(partly) Spongwstroma Limestone
la ye r (partly)
I
I Skrubbs Limestone: Ma rl shale with
Follingbo Limestone;
c z c 3 (partly); Klinte M a r l (part- limestone (partly);
d (partly); Younger c rys t a l - IVkV11 Slite Group
f-h (partly) l Y ); line limestone
Klinte Limestone
(partly)
Na Stromato-
f - h (partly):
Upper Lime- Binger Limestone Spongiostroma Pora Limestone Tofta
la ye r (partly) and Spongio- Limestone
stone
HOgklint Lime-
d (partly ) stone and Marl; Lower Sphaerocodium III Upper Clint HOgklint
e Korpklint Lime- la ye r (partly) Level Limestone
I stone
CI: Visby fauna I Hall Marl Ma rl shale with

limestone (partly)
II Lower Clint
Level
Upper Visby
Marlstone
Stricklandin ia Stricklandinia I Stvicklandinia Lower Visby
Ma rl Marl Marlstone
N.B. The names within each rectangle do not indicate ve rtic a l succession.
T H E STRATIGRAPHY OF GOTLAND 35
TABLE V
Comparison of the Middle Palaeozoic stratigraphy of Gotland according to Hede
with that of some later authors
Hede (1921, 1925a) Wedekind and Jux (1957) Manten (this book)
Tripp (1930)
c.
Sundre Limestone
Hamra-Sundi-e Beds
Hamra Limestone Burgsvik
Folgen
Burgsvik Sandstone
and Oolite I Burgsvik Beds
Eke Group 1 Eke Beds
Hemse Group I HemseBeds
Folgen
11-In
Halla-Mulde Beds
Halla Limestone
Slite Group Slite Beds
Tofta Limestone
HBgklint Beds
HBgklint Limestone
Upper Visby
Marlstone
-I Visby Beds
Lower Visby
Marlstone !
I .
1
1
1I
Lower
sustained by the well-known publication of Kiaer (1908) about the Oslo

Silurian. He thereupon advised one of h i s students, Van Hoepen, t o use the
resolution of this controversy as the subject for his doctorate thesis. Based
on less than four month's studies in the field, Van Hoepen (1910) presented
a n excellent piece of work, fully supporting the ideas of Murchison and
Schmidt. When consulting the l i t er at ur e, however, one recei ves the i m pres-
sion that the influence of the publication by Van Hoepen on the Swedish geol-
ogists working on Gotland w a s slight.
In the s a m e y e a r HedstriSm (1910) published a paper on the stratigraphy
of the Silurian s t r a t a of Visby and its surroundings. He clearly recognized
that the reefs and t hei r surrounding crinoid limestones are equivalent t o
distinctly stratified m ar l s t ones and limestones furt her away. A s can be seen
from the summarizing table (Table IV),Hedstrom's interpretation of the age
of th e rocks younger than those occurring i n the coastal cliffs n e a r Visby was
disputable; it still shows s om e adherence t o the stratigraphy of Lindstrom.
Munthe at this time realized m o r e and m o r e that a solution t o the
divergences of opinion would only be found when full profit w as derived from
the fossil contents of the sediments. I' I may say emphatically, that before we
can completzly understand the sequence of s t r a t a in Gotland, we must have
much further help f r om the palaeontologists" (Munthe, 1910). It was Munthe
who, in 1917, when he w as di r ect or of the Geological Survey, saw t o it that
Hede became engaged in this task. His r es ul t s (Hede, 1921 and l at er), which
will be mentioned m o r e extensively in the next section of this chapter, definitely
proved the validity of the ideas expressed by Murchison (1846), Schmidt (1890,
1891) and Van Hoepen (1910).
A third way of interpreting the Silurian sediments of Gotland,which has
been proposed by Wedekind and T r i p p (1930), endeavours t o make a kind of
compromise between the two main solutions discussed above. Palaeontolog-
ically it is based mainly on a study of c o r a l faunas (Wedekind, 1927, 1932).
T h e authors distinguished three m a r l complexes converging towards the
north, and three limestone complexes. Although the limestone complexes a r e
built up of stratified limestones with isolated reefs, they called each lime-
stone complex a "reef". F r o m top t o bottom their stratigraphical subdivision
is:
Iv Hoburgen reef
III/IV Linde - Lau m a r l
111 Klinteberg reef
I1 /III Slite m a r l
11 Visby reef
I Visby m a r l
The succession of deposition, according to their opinion, should be
visualized as follows:
After the circumcontinental platform had been drowned, the Visby m a r l
was sedimentated. In this m a r l the Visby reef developed, and was subse-
quently covered by the Slite m a r l , while 30 km farther t o the south the
Klinteberg reef originated. The upper p a r t s of the Visby reef a r e synchronous
with the lower p a r t s of the Klinteberg reef. The l a t t e r reef was in i t s turn
covered by the Linde - Lau m a r l , in which, again about 30 km towards the
south, the third reef belt developed, the lower p a r t s of which a r e synchronous
with the upper p a r t s of the previous reef belt,
T h i s view, which is not supported by the enormous amount of data col-
lected by Hede (1921, 1925a,b, 1927a,b, 1928, 1929, 1933, 1936, 1940, 1958,
1960), did not find any favour in the geological world, until it was adapted by
Jux (1957).
An attempt to correlate the e a r l i e r stratigraphical subdivisions of the
Silurian of Gotland with that of Hede (1921) h a s been made in Table IV, where-
as a comparison of the stratigraphical views of Wedekind and Tripp (1930)
and Jux (1957) with the subdivision by Hede (1921) is given in Table V.
THE STRATIGRAPHY OF HEDE
F r o m 1917 onwards, when Hede became engaged in geological work in

Gotland, he h a s devoted almost all his energy to the study of the Silurian
rocks of this fascinating island. No geologist ever had as extensive a know-
ledge of the sediments of Gotland and their fossil contents, as does Hede.
Although he a l s o published a number of m o r e general papers on the
Fig.11. Simplified geological map of Gotland showing the distribution of the

Palaeozoic sediments, according t o the stratigraphy of Hede (1921). 1. Lower
Visby Marlstone, 2. Upper Visby Marlstone, 3. Hogklint Limestone, 4. Tofta
Limestone, 5. Slite Group, 6. Halla Limestone, 7. Mulde Marlstone,
8. Klinteberg Limestone, 9. Hemse Group, 10. Eke Group, 11. Burgsvik Sand-
stone and Oolite, 12. Hamra Limestone, 13. Sundre Limestone.
THE STRATIGRAPHY OF HEDE 37
38 THE PALAEOZOIC DEPOSITS O F GOTLAND
stratigraphy of Gotland (Hede, 1921, 1925a, 1958, 1960), the geological maps
with their accompanying descriptions especially give evidence of the consci-
entiousness with which he c a r r i e d out h i s work.
Hede's stratigraphy ofthe Silurianof Gotland (cf. Fig.11) is, fromtop to bottom:
( 1 3 )Sundre Limestone. Very fossiliferous limestones, especially rich in
crinoid remains, but also in stromatoporoids, corals and bryozoans; and reef lime-
stones.
(12) Hamra L k e S t O n e . At the base an algal limestone. This i s overlaid by
crystalline limestones and marly limestones, reef limestones and crinoid limestones.
(11)Burgsvik Sandstone and Oolite. The Upper Burgsvik i s composed of
sandstone, oolite, argillaceous shaly sandstone and claystone; the Middle Burgsvik
almost exclusively of sandstone; the Lower Burgsvik of argillaceous shaly sandstone
and claystone.
(10) Eke Group. Marlstone, passing into marly limestone and limestone in the
northeastern part of i t s a r e a . Reef limestones are s c a r c e .
(9) Hemse Group. In the north limestones, including reef and crinoid lime-
stones, towards the south passing into marlstone.
(8) Klinteberg Limestone. Dominating thin-bedded limestones, rich in
stromatoporoids, c o r a l s , Algae, lamellibranchs, brachiopods and other fossils. Reef
limestones and crinoid limestones.
( 7 ) MuZde Marlstone. Soft, dense marlstone, alternating with harder layers
of finely crystalline, marly limestone. The Mulde Marlstone wedges out towards the
northeast.
( 6 )Hulk Limestone. Crystalline limestones, partly finely oolitic, partly
marly. A few small reefs. In the northeast in the Lower Halla the well-developed Bara
oolite. Towards the southwest the Halla Limestone is gradually disappearing.
( 5 )Slite Group. Limestones, marly limestones and reef limestones in i t s
northwestern part. Towards the southeast these limestones pass over into m a r l . In the
most southwestern p a r t of its range some sandy limestones and limy sandstone.
(4)Tofta Limestone. Limestones, partly marly, very r i c h in Algae, dis-
appearing towards the north.
( 3 ) Hogklint Limestone, The Hogklint Group is composed of crystalline lime-
stones and marly limestones, upwards partly finely ooiitic, while they often are also
rich in Algae in the upper p a r t of the group. Reef limestone and crinoid limestone are
common. The lowest continuous thicker limestone beds f o r m the base of the Hogltlint
Limestone.
(2) Upper Visby Marlstone. Marlstone with intercalated limestone lenses.
In the upper p a r t of the sequence the limestone lenses e;rade into thin layers,
which wedge out into the marlstone. The horizontal dimensions of these thin
limestone layers increase in the uppermost p a r t of the Upper Visby Marlstone.
Small reefs occur.
(1) Louier Visby M a r k t o n e . T h i s unit consists of a thin-bedded, bluish-grey
m a r l with flat lenses of harder, dense to finely crystalline marly limestone.
Since the moment of its publication, the stratigraphy of Hede has become
quite generally accepted. Except f o r the papers by Wedekind and Tripp (1930)
and by J u x (1957), l a t e r publications dealt only with minor improvements of
this subdivision. F o r instance, Hadding (1941) carefully hinted that perhaps
the Halla Limestone and Mulde Marlstone might form different lithofacies
of one and the s a m e stratigraphical unit. In 1956 the s a m e author stated that
the Tofta Limestone could be regarded as a local, extreme shallow-water
f a c i e s of the uppermost p a r t of the Hijgklint Group and the lowest part of the
Slite Group.
In this book the Tofta Limestone will be included as a facies in the
Upper Hogklint Beds, the Halla Limestone and Mulde Marlstone will be
united in one stratigraphical unit, the Halla-Mulde Beds, and the Sundre
THE STRATIGRAPHY OF JUX 39
Limestone will be united with the Hamra Limestone to the Hamra-Sundre

Beds. F o r further details s e e Chapter XI. A tabular comparison is given in
Table V.
The present author will avoid the use of lithological indications in the
names of the main stratigraphical units of Gotland. Nor does he want to at-
tach any specific rank to these units, and, therefore, following Martinsson
(1962a), prefers to use the term beds for them. This tendency to use neutral
t e r m s for a local o r regional stratigraphy has advantages insofar a s it avoids
confusion. Even in England, the t e r m beds is now used in Silurian strat-
igraphy if reference is made to specific English deposits and not to the inter-
national stratigraphical standard (cf. Holland et al., 1959; Lawson, 1960).
Hadding (1941), who also did not use lithostratigraphical names, at-
tached the chronostratigraphical rank of stages t o the units in Gotland. How-
ever, this was incorrect. Since the units form the first order subdivision of
the Silurian of Gotland, the name s e r i e s should have been used. Moreover,
the use of the word s e r i e s would then a l s o have been in accordance with the
practice in the subdivision of the Swedish Cambrian and Ordovician (Table I).
There, Hadding ( 1 9 5 8 ~also
) attached the rank of s e r i e s to the units given in
column two of Table I.
A detailed correlation with the English Silurian is still a matter of
interpretation. The individual English s e r i e s cannot be recognized without
doubt in Gotland, because of various differences in lithology and fossil con-
tent. A s will be shown in Chapter X I , only a very small fraction of the fos-
sils found in Gotland can be regarded as index fossils. The unit boundaries
in Gotland a r e probably not always equivalent to stratigraphical boundaries
in England (for further information, see the last section of this chapter).
THE STRATIGRAPHY OF JUX
Whereas some of the older authors paid too little attention to the role
played by the reef limestones and related sediments in the Silurian of Gotland,
a more recent publication (Jux, 1957) offers an example of the other extreme.
Jux tried to explain all facies differences in the geology of Gotland by
the occurrence of three successive reef belts. During the time of develop-
ment of each reef belt, nearest to the shore a shallow-water facies was
thought to be present, passing into reef debris and reef limestone, with
debris again on the seaward side of the reef, now gradually replaced by marl.
Three rather rapid regressions are posited by Jux, separating three " Folgen"
(stages), each with a synchronous lateral development of facies belts (Visby
Folgen, Klinteberg Folgen, Burgsvik Folgen).
The present author has experienced that these short periods, character-
ized by a rapid regression, propounded by Jux, cannot be deduced from field
evidence. Instead, there were times during which the water became gradually
shallower, which can be deduced both from the sedimentation and from the growth
of biostromes and bioherms. The first of these periods in which the water
gradually became shallower was from Lower Visby to Upper HBgklint time
(including the time of deposition of the Tofta limestone). After a deepening
of the water during Lower and Middle Slite (Slite I-111), the second shallowing
took place from Upper Slite (Slite IV) time up to and including Halla-Mulde
timef. In Klinteberg time the water remained shallow. Hemse time began
anew with deeper water that showed signs of becoming shallower until the
time in which the top of the Middle Burgsvik Beds was deposited. (See also
Chapter XI of this book). The waters becoming shallow, therefore, at all three
times took much longer than Jux supposed for the short regressions which he
posited. From Table V it follows, moreover, that the shallowing periods
actually present a r e distributed indiscriminately over the Folgen" of Jux.
There is no field evidence either for prolonged periods with reef formation,
during which the water depth should have been constant, a s is assumed by
that author. Instead it has been found by detailed field work that water depth
generally underwent changes during the periods of reef formation (see the
various discussions in Chapter XI).
It should also be remarked that the names which Jux has chosen for his
three "Folgen" a r e unfortunate, because they can easily be confused with the
Visby Marlstones, Klinteberg Limestone and Burgsvik Sandstone and Oolite
of Hede (1921, 1925a) (cf. Table V).
Because of the importance, in one way or another, of the ideas of Jux
for the interpretation of reefs and reef genesis, a number of points will be
discussed. They show that the factual data underlying his presentation a r e
either invalid or wrongly interpreted,
A s is clear from the geological map of Gotland and the data given in
Chapter XI of this book, the Slite reefs a r e separated very distinctly, strat-
igraphically, from the Hbgklint reefs. The division of Jux in three stages can-
not account for this, since he has to assume a more or l e s s comparable age
for all reefs within his Visby Stage. Even a little field work shows the unten-
ability of this assumption, such a s a northwest-southeast traverse through
northern Gotland from the northwest coast to the a r e a of Slite.
No more a r e the Klinteberg and Hemse reef limestone synchronous
("Klinteberg Folgen" of Jux). A traverse from the Klinteberg to the Lindeklint
could here be suggested a s could some detailed field work in the east of
central Gotland.
The fact that the influence of the reefs did not reach more than about
half a kilometre seawards from the reefs (cf. Chapter IX) makes it impos-
sible to consider the Slite and Hemse marlstone complexes as the distal
deposits of a reef belt, as interpreted by Jux. Moreover, they a r e often not
situated immediately behind the reefs, but only begin a few or more kilo-
m e t r e s away from the reefs, separated from the reefs by stratified lime-
stones containing reef debris and normally developed limestones.
The incorrectnes of Jux' views is still more evident in the case of the
Eke marlstone (Jux, 1957, p.77). This sediment is also considered by Jux to
be the distal deposit of reefs, which, however, a r e almost lacking in the Eke
Beds. The Eke marlstone is geographically too f a r separated from the Hemse
r e e f s to be explained as the distal deposit of these. Should, moreover, the
hiatus which may occur between the Hemse and Eke Beds be of the geo-
graphical and geochronological extension as some authors suppose it (cf.
p.391), there would be still further objection against Jux' conception of the
l T h e shallowing during Halla-Mulde time is apparent from the Halla limestones in the
east of Gotland. It is in this area that the reefs f r o m this epoch are found. Further to
the west, where the limestones a r e replaced by the Mulde marlstone, a deepening of
the water s e e m s to have taken place. A discussion of this dichotomy within the Halla-
Mulde Beds will be given in Chapter XI.
THE STRATIGRAPHY OF JUX 41
Eke Beds. However the solution of the problem of the Hemse - Eke hiatus
may turn out, the fact remains that the boundary between the Hemse and Eke
Beds is m o r e distinct than that between the Eke and Burgsvik Beds, although
it is the latter which f o r m s the boundary between J u x ' Klinteberg and Burgsvik
Stages.
J u x (1957, pp.76-77) s t a t e s that the algal limestones too, are related to
reef formation, and characteristic of a shallow-water environment, at some
distance from the reefs, at their landward side, where the sea-bottom relief
was slight and the transport power of the water decreasing. He considers the
Tofta limestone as a facies zone of his northern reef belt and the Lower Hamra
algal limestone as a facies zone of the bioherms in southern Gotland. In the
opinion of the present author the algal facies is essentially a shallow-water
deposit quite independent of reef formation. Of course, r e e f s and Algae may
occur together, as they do m o r e than once, e.g., in the Klinteberg, because
even a slight deepening of the s e a might have caused formation of small reefs
within an a r e a in which Algae grew. T h i s can be well observed in southern-
most Gotland especially, where the basal p a r t of the algal limestone of the
Lower Hamra Beds does not contain reefs, whereas in the higher p a r t s of
this deposit the beginnings of reef development can be seen, The r e v e r s e
can be observed in the Hagklint Beds, where the formation of an algal lime-
stone (Tofta limestone) occurred at the end of a period of reef growth when
the water had become very shallow. Both occurrences show that the Algae
do not belong t o the reef facies o r any of the facies that accompany the reefs.
They a r e quite independent.
Another point to be raised is the development of the Hamra Beds in
southern Gotland. The main p a r t of the Hamra group, as defined by Hede
(1921 and later) is indicated by J u x (1957, p.82, Abb.7) as a clay-marl facies
("Ton-Mergel-Facies" ). Actually it is mainly formed of limestones, as is
a l s o indicated in Hede's stratigraphical terminology, as he called the g r u p
the Hamra limestone. Only in the near vicinity of the r e e f s is the occurrence
of marlstone indeed locally observed. Here a calcium-carbonate percentage
as low as 50 may occur. Elsewhere in the normal Hamra limestone however,
this percentage amounts usually t o 87-98. The insoluble fraction ranges from
a small fraction t o 12.5% at the maximum; a bit low for a clay-marl facies!
The Hamra limestone is not lagoonal either. It was not deposited in
"einem lagunaren Bereich" (Jux, 1957, p.79), in between the sandstone and
the reef debris. T h e contrary is true. In reality the Hamra limestone was
deposited at the seaward side of the reefs. Although the big black spot of
Hamra limestone on the geological map of J u x (1957, Abb.7) has been de-
s c r i b e d a s reeflimestone by Munthe (1921b) - an interpretation adopted by
other authors (Hadding, 1941, p.11; Jux, 1957, p.82) - this area actually con-
sists of thick-bedded limestone in which stromatoporoids and a few corals
commonly occur. Only on the western limits of the Hamra limestone do r e e f s
occur, e.g. , at Hoburgen and Kettelssrd, while indications of reefs, demolished
by Recent erosion, a r e found on the western beach at Killingholmen in the
north of Vamlingbo P a r i s h , and in the northeastern p a r t of Gratlingbo-udd.
The Hamra r e e f s w e r e thus found in a south-southeast - north-northwest belt.
This means that in Jux' view the main p a r t of the Hamra limestone ought t o
be re-interpreted as " Riffdetritus-Facies". Except f o r locally in the west,
however, where narrow blankets around the individual r e e f s may be detrital,
the Hamra limestone shows no sign of a reef-detrital character either. More-
over, this implies that the Sundre limestones further east, including the
raukar fields at HolmkXllar, Heliholm, Austre and Hammarshagahitllar

cannot be considered as a detritus facies, as is done by Jux, for they a r e too
far away from the actual reef belt of J u x ' Burgsvik Folgen. These raukar
fields can, therefore, only represent the remains of real reefs ( s e e Rutten,
1958; also this book, Chapter VIII), but of an other type than those of Hogklint
and Hoburgen, and comparable with those of Ljugarn and Fggelhammar in the
Hemse Beds.
In as far as Martinsson's work on the succession and correlation of
ostracode faunas in the Silurian of Gotland has a bearing on the geo-
chronology of reef formation, it also does not support the theory of Jux
(Martinsson, 1967, pp,381-382).
It cannot be denied that the interpretation of Jux, on first appearance,

is very attractive. In fact, it represents more or l e s s the ideal scheme we
too had in mind when field work in Gotland began in 1956. However, when in
the field,it becomes clear that the actual situation is much more complicated.
The presence of only three main stratigraphical units, each with a standard
range of synchronous facies could not be proved. After a detailed discussion
of the reef types of Gotland, the picture arrived a t by the present author will
be presented in Chapter X V . The main objection against Jux is that his
publication on a territory with a complicated palaeoecology is not supported
by sufficient field observations; not much more than a number of the most
beautiful exposures seem to have been visited by him and these led him to
a grossly oversimplified interpretation. A further discussion of the general
conclusions arrived at by Jux is consequently unwarranted.
CORRELATION WITH OTHER AREAS
In the f i r s t section of this chapter is has already been mentioned that

both the Cephalograptus cometa Zone of the File Haidar boring (24 m thick)
and the red Arachnophyllum shale (Lindstrbm, 1888a, stratum a ) are cor-
related with the Llandoverian of the English type section, while Hede (1942)
a l s o includes the Lower and Upper Visby Marlstones in this s e r i e s , more
especially in the Upper Valentian (Upper Llandoverian; cf. Elles and Wood,
1914). It thus appears that at least a great deal of the time covered by the
Middle Llandoverian and the Upper Llandoverian is represented by Silurian
sediments in Gotland.
The Hogklint Beds a r e considered to be Lower Wenlockian of age, the
Slite marlstone is correlated with the Middle Wenlockian, the Halla-Mulde
Beds with the Upper Wenlockian.
The Lower Ludlowian may start with the Klinteberg Beds. The age of
the Hemse Beds is especially well determined, due to its relatively rich fauna
of graptolites (Hede, 1942). It belongs t o the Lower Ludlowian and corre-
spondswiththe Zone of Monograptus nilssoni, the second of the four zones
into which the English Lower Ludlowian has been subdivided. Since one
specimen of M. scanicus has a l s o been found, 12 m below the top of the Hemse
Beds (Hede, 1919a), at least part of the third zone, too, is represented by the
Hemse Beds.
Serious difficulty a r i s e s when one attempts t o correlate the younger
stratigraphical units of Gotland with the English type section. There is only
one point on which all authors agree, viz. that the Burgsvik Beds a r e of Upper
CORRELATION WITH OTHER AREAS 43
TABLE VI
Correlation of the Middle Palaeozoic s e r i e s of s t r a t a in Gotland with that of some other a r e a s
Gotland Great Britain Scania Oslo a r e a East Baltic
Hamra-Sundre Beds ? Downtonian Lower
I
___------- - bed-Ramsha
Burgsvik Beds Formation
Upper c
------ .d
Eke Beds Middle
-_---- Stage 9
i
Hemse Beds 2
;
I
Colonus Series
Lower
Klinteberg Beds
Halla-Mulde Beds Upper c

d
Middle
3
Slite Beds 0
3
Cyrtograptus Serie Stage 8 J
Hagklint Beds Lower ;
Visby Beds 1
1
Upper
Llandoverian
.
Ludlowian age (Hede, 1921; SPve-Sader ergh, 1941; Spjeldnaes, 1950; Jux,
1957) and presumably contemporaneous with the Upper Whitcliffe Flags. This
would mean that the relatively thin Eke Beds represent not only the whole
Middle Ludlowian, but a l s o the lower p a r t s of the Upper Ludlowian and
perhaps even the upper part of the Lower Ludlowian. Munthe (1902) and
Spjeldnaes (1950) found a surface of discontinuity between the Hemse and Eke
Beds in the Lau district ( e a s t e r n Gotland). No such indications a r e furnished
by outcrops in the west of the island. Consequently, the problem of the age
of the Eke Beds cannot yet be considered as definitely solved.
The s a m e applies to the age of the Hamra-Sundre Beds. In 1960, Hede
was still inclined to attribute a Ludlowian age t o h i s Hamra and Sundre Lime-
stones. However, from other sides dissentient views have been brought forth.
A s early as 1846, Murchison wrote that the highest stratum of the
island is "a sandy and calcareous equivalent of the Upper Ludlow rocks, with
indications of a passage into the Devonian group." (Murchison, 1846, p.27).
In this connection, it should b e recalled that at that time the boundary
between the Silurian and the Devonian was drawn between the Upper Ludlow
Group (which included the Ludlow Bone-Bed) and the Lower Old Red
Sandstone.
On the b a s i s of vertebrate remains from the Upper Burgsvik Beds,
SWe-SOderbergh (1941) and Spjeldnaes (1950) correlated this horizon with
the Ludlow Bone-Bed.
In 1950, White redefined the Silurian - Devonian boundary in England,
and placed this at the base of the Ludlow Bone-Bed. T h i s implied that the
Upper Whitcliffe Flags would constitute the uppermost l a y e r s of the Silurian
(cf. a l s o Lawson, 1960) and the Downtonian would be the lowermost Devonian.
Spjeldnaes (1950) drew the consequences of this for Gotland and felt
tempted t o place the youngest Palaeozoic sediments of Gotland in the Lower
Devonian (Downtonian). In the terminology of the present author these
included the Upper Burgsvik Beds (about 7 m thick) and the Hamra-Sundre
Beds. Thus, Murchison's view that the boundary between the Silurian and
44 THE PALAEOZOIC DEPOSITS O F GOTLAND
Devonian could be traced in Gotland was rejuvenated, though it now was an

otherwise defined boundary.
The International Symposium on the Devonian System, held in Calgary
in Canada, in 1967, moved the Silurian - Devonian boundary up again, to the
basis of the MonogYaPtus uniformis Zone. This brought the Downtonian into
the Silurian. The major reason for this decision was that the base of the
Ludlow Bone-Bed was criticized by a number of researchers as a boundary
marker, since it was said to be a facies boundary and to reflect a hiatus. It
may well be, however, that the Ludlow Bone-Bed boundary is nevertheless
a suitable reference level from stratigraphical and palaeontological points
of view (cf. Martinsson, 1969).
Anyhow, as the situation is now, the Upper Burgsvik Beds and the
Hamra-Sundre Beds of Gotland have to be considered again as belonging to
the Silurian. Their correlation with the Downtonian, however, remains
possible.
Kaljo and Sarv (1966) have correlated the Sundre and the Hamra Beds
with the Leintwardine Beds in England. Fahraeus (1967), however, thereupon
argued that the Ludlowian of Gotland probably reaches higher in the system
than anticipated by Kaljo and Sarv. The Sundre Beds and at least the upper
part of the Hamra Beds (in Hede's subdivision of the Silurian of Gotland) a r e
correlated by F&raeus with the Upper Whitcliffe Beds, Ludlow area,
England, through the identification of the lower part of the eosteinhornensis
conodont zone (named after Spathognathodus steinhomensis eosteinhornensis
Walliser).
Martinsson ( 1 9 6 5 ~ studied
) the boulders found on Hoburg Bank (south-
east of,Hoburg in the Baltic) and found evidence that calcareous equivalents
of the dved-Rams%sa Beds of Scania are to be found along its northwestern
parts, and the Beyrichienkalk, found in drift south of the Baltic, occurs in
its higher parts. The Hoburg Bank is a longish feature along the strike of
the Silurian beds and scarps of Gotland,
In connection with the movement back and forth of the Silurian -
Devonian boundary, it should be noted that the line indicating this boundary,
as it is drawn in Fig.3, stems from the years when the boundary was defined
between the Ludlowian and the Downtonian, below the Ludlow Bone-Bed. The
line indicates the situation on the floor of the Baltic basin. The course of
that line, therefore, does not necessarily exclude the possibility that strata
belonging t o the Lower Downtonian a r e present on top of the stratigraphical
succession in the island of Gotland.
For a summary of the correlation of the Gotlandian series of strata
with that of England as well as some other areas, s e e Table VI.
45
Chapter ZV
TECTOMCS
PSEUDO-TECTONIC PHENOMENA
Tectonic movements of any importance have never affected the Middle

Palaeozoic strata of Gotland. The whole island gives the impresssion of
extreme geological quietness, a s can also be said of the west Baltic as a
whole. The soft marlstones, the character of the limestones, the preserva-
tion of the fossils and the very slight dip of the strata make it clear that the
Palaeozoic sediments of Gotland have never been submitted t o strong tectonic
influences.
Notwithstanding this, there a r e a number of more o r l e s s localized
phenomena, apart from the general dip of the strata ( s e e the next section of
this chapter), which have been explained by means of tectonics, especially by
early authors. Most of these phenomena, however, can a l s o be understood
without the assumption of the occurrence of crustal movements.
F i r s t , a couple of steep cliffs sometimes a r e explained as fault scarps.
Thus, Munthe (1902, p.269) explains the steep northwest coast of Gotland by
assuming a fault, running parallel to the coast. In a later publication (Munthe,
1921b) the same assumption is made for the straight and steep coast, striking
north-northeast near and north of Hoburgen, on the west coast of the southern
peninsula of the island. Now that the stratigraphical subdivision by Hede has
been generally accepted, implying that the Palaeozoic strata of Gotland gen-
erally have a slight dip towards the southeast, it will be understood that
marine cuestas will be formed at the northwest side of the island. In the
south of the island the Burgsvik Beds show a slight dip towards the east-
southeast. Consequently, the direction of the coast line here is also deter-
mined by the outcrop of resistant layers. The fault o r fold zone whichMunthe
assumes to be present between the lines Klinteberg - Gothem and Stenkumla -
Bail is explained geomorphologically by the l e s s e r resistance of the marl-
stones against erosion (see also Chapter I). Finally the steep walls found
between Lojsta and 6 s t e r g a r n (Nathorst, 1886, p.328; Munthe, 1902, p.269)
can a l s o be explained geomorphologically by differential erosion, without
the assumption of the presence of dislocations.
Another topographical feature has attracted the attention of Van Hoepen
(1910). This is a depression crossing the southern peninsula from Mjulhatte
T r P s k l in the west, via Halshage T r l s k and Rarviks T r l s k to Stockviken’ in
the east. This depression lies about 5-10 m lower than the landscape north
and south of it. Van Hoepen is inclined to assume the presence of faults to
lSwedish: trgsk = marsh; vik = bay.

46 TECTONICS
explain this phenomenon. T h i s interpretation was strengthened by the observa-

tion that the boundary between the Burgsvik sandstone and the overlying
Burgsvik oolite in the MjZIlhatte T r a s k canal lies only 1.7 m above sea level,
whereas a little m o r e than half a kilometre northwards t h i s boundary is
situated at least 5 m higher. T h e present author has carefully looked for
other indications which might confirm t h i s s u r m i s e , but h a s not found any.
On the other hand it h a s been observed that the boundary between sandstone
and oolite is undulating ( s e e Chapter XI). At SnBckviken, about 3.5 km south
of the Mjolhatte T r a s k canal, this boundary does not lie much above sea level
either. Consequently, the occurrence of dislocations a c r o s s the southern
peninsula of Gotland is a l s o not v e r y likely.
Finally, the following features can a l s o be explained without the as-

sumption of the occurrence of c r u s t a l movements.
(1) T h e dislocations that Munthe (1902) felt obliged t o posit in the Lau
district, on the b a s i s of the stratigraphical ideas of Lindstrom. These are
refuted without further ado with the acceptance of the stratigraphical views
of Hede (1921) (see a l s o Van Hoepen, 1910, p.25).
( 2 ) T h r e e fold-like s t r u c t u r e s mentioned by Munthe (1910) from the
south of Gotland. T h e s e may be re-interpreted as fossil offshore b a r s ( s e e
Chapter XI, pp.399-400).
(3) Saucer-like depressions which are, f o r instance, found very clearly
developed in theBurgsvik sandstone at the foot of Hoburgen, but a r e a l s o
encountered in other exposures in Gotland. T h e s e are distinctly related t o
the high p r e s s u r e exerted by the heavy load of overlying reef-limestone
m a s s e s (differential compression, cf. Chapter VII, p.155).
(4) T h e bends found locally in the linlestone l a y e r s e a s t of Visby; a l s o
the ” flexure’’ n e a r the road crossing Lairbro - Storugns - Vestrume, and the
strong southeastward dip n e a r Hau (east of Baste TrBsk, Fleringe Parish;
other directions of dip may be observed t h e r e as well!), etc., which were all
thought by Van Hoepen (1910, pp.24-25) t o be probably of a tectonic nature.
In fact, these are a l s o all genetically related t o the presence of reefs.
THE DIP O F THE STRATA
After the r e m a r k s in the preceding section of this chapter, only the

origin of the slight dip of the strata now r e m a i n s t o b e discussed. T h i s dip
is generally directed towards the southeast (compare the map in Fig.11,
showing the stratigraphy of Hede). T h e amount of the dip is about OO30’.
Munthe (192lb)andHede (1925a)believe that t h i s d i p h a s been caused by
the tilting of a f i r m block, due t o a postsedimentary c r u s t a l movement. For
the axis of tilt Hede a s s u m e s a southwest t o northeast direction.
From the discussion of the stratigraphy of the Palaeozoic of Gotland in
some m o r e detail (Chapter XI) it will be seen, however, that the general
s t r i k e in the island is not as regular as would appear from the course of the
stratigraphical boundaries, given in the m a p s of Hede. Variations in the
s t r i k e and dip are found within some of the sequences of s t r a t a .
F r o m t h e s e variations it follows that a tilt of the strata as a firm block
through a postsedimentary tectonic influence is unlikely. Therefore, instead
of a postgenetic tilt of all the Palaeozoic s t r a t a of Gotland, another picture
is presented h e r e , one of synsedimentary tilting, along a n a x i s that has not
T H E DIP O F T H E STRATA 47
always been in the same position, nor pointed in the same direction at the
time of deposition of the Palaeozoic strata.
The regular shift of the reef belt with time towards the southeast shows
that, seen a s a whole, epeirogenetic uplift of the basin floor occurred in the
a r e a of Gotland. However - as will be shown - these movements, more
specifically, were active over definite periods only and even alternated with
periods of slight subsidence of that p a r t of the Palaeozoic basin floor.
When analysing the average dip of the strata, it was found that it de-
creases from the older s e r i e s of strata towards the younger ones. Thus, the
average dip for the Upper Visby and Hogklint Beds together amounts to about
O O 3 1 ' ; the average dip for the Klinteberg and Hemse Beds together is about
OO27'; the average dip for the whole of Eke, Burgsvik and Hamra-Sundre Beds
is about OO23'. These differences can only be explained when a synsedi-
mentary origin of a t least part of the dip of the strata is assumed. Owing to
the prevailing downward movement of the centre of the basin, the older sedi-
mentary strata (e.g., the Hagklint Beds) already had a slight dip when the
younger ones (e.g., Hamra-Sundre Beds) were deposited.
Whereas Hede (1925aJp.31) posits a general southeastward dip and a
northeastward striking tilt axis for Gotland as a whole, Munthe (1921bJ p.73),
who has been mapping the Palaeozoic deposits in the south of Gotland, posits
a north to northeast directed tilt axis in southern Gotland, in order to explain
the east to east-southeast dips that prevail in that part of the island.However,
the boundary between the Hemse and Eke Beds still dips approximately to-
wards the southeast. This implies that the movements not only followed one
after the other, but that they also took place in different directions. More
deviations will be mentioned in Chapter XI.
For the moment, attention will now be focused on the Slite Beds. Near
Bunge, the marlstone marking the top of the Slite 111 Beds, i s very thin, and
exposed at about 25 m above sea level. A t about the same height the marl-
stone is found near Othem and Liksarve (Tofta Parish). A l l three places a r e
situated close to the line of maximum extension of the Slite marlstone
(Chapter XI,p.316). In Bogeklint (also called Klinteklint, about 2 km south-
southeast of Boge Church) the top of the Slite marlstone lies about 10 m above
sea level. Near Tjeldersholmklint the marlstone is found at about present
sea level. A s will be discussed in Chapter XI (p.329), the seaward retreat of
the a r e a of m a r l deposition a t the beginning of Slite IV time, which is marked
by the onset of the Slite IV limestones, took place rather rapidly. A s a result,
the top of the marlstone on all five places may be considered a s more or l e s s
synchronous. Bogeklint is about 8.5 km southeast of the line Liksarve (Tofta)-
Bunge, Tjeldersholm about 12 km. Thus over a distance of 8.5 km the bound-
a r y Slite 111 (marlstone) - Slite IV (limestone) descends 15 m, whereas over
a distance of 12 km the descent amounts to about 22 m. In both cases this
points to an angle of dip of about OOO6'. On the island of Furillen and the
peninsulas Smoje-udd and Sankt Olofsholm, the boundary between marlstone
and Slite IV limestone a l s o lies only slightly above sea level. Calculation of
the dip between this line and Bogeklint shows an angle of about OOO8'.
Quite another picture is manifest when obseryjng the boundary between
the Slite and Halla-Mulde Beds. Southwest of Bara Odekyrka (ca. 3 km south-
southwest of Vallstena) the base of the Halla Limestone lies about 23.5 m
high. Near Bryggans FisklPge (ca. 10 km south of Slite) the top of the Halla
Limestone lies at a maximum of about 3.5 m above sea level. Since the Halla
Limestone very likely attains a thickness of about 15 m here, its base will be
48 TECTONICS
about 11.5 m below s e a level. The distance between both observation points
in the direction 140° is ca. 3.5 km. Calculation of the dip of the boundary of
the Slite and Halla-Mulde Beds gives a n angle of about OO35'. In central
Gotland there a r e a number of small exposures of the uppermost Halla Lime-
stone in the parishes of Vate, Viklau and Halla. Calculations give a dip of the
-
Slite Halla boundary of about OO27'.
Calculated in a comparable way, the dip of the boundary between the
Hagklint (incl. Tofta) and Slite Beds is about OO20' - OO25'.
It thus appears that t h e r e a r e remarkable differences in the angle of
dip when calculated from a few m o r e or l e s s suitable horizons. Although the
present author is aware of the fact that the r e s u l t s of such considerations as
the above should be handled with extreme c a r e , the differences a r e such that
they may still be accepted as an indication that moderate epeirogenetic move-
ments did take place during the time that the Middle Palaeozoic sediments of
Gotland were deposited.
The decrease in dip which presumably took place at the beginning of
Slite IV time, and which resulted in a shallowing of the water, may have been
caused by a downward movement of the basin centre around an about north-
east-striking hinge line, situated northwest of Gotland. A new movement took
place at about the transition from Slite t o Halla-Mulde time. T h i s movement
was upward. The sediments of the Halla-Mulde Beds show signs of a shal-
lowing of the water in the east of Gotland and of a deepening in the west ( s e e
Chapter XI). The axis of tilt consequently then s e e m s t o have crossed central
Gotland, with an about east-northeast strike.
Combining these data i t appears that in the a r e a of Gotland neither the
direction nor the location of the axis of tilt h a s been constant during the
Middle Palaeozoic .
T h e r e is reason to a s s u m e that the same reasoning can be applied t o
the Cambrian and Ordovician in the west Baltic a r e a .
Deposits of the Paradoxides paradoxissimus Stage occur in Oland in an
about south - north belt, thinningout towards the north; the Paradoxides
forchhammeri Stage is barely represented. Underneath northern and central
Gotland both these stages a r e not represented a t all. This suggests that
during the Middle Cambrian or Paradoxides Epoch the direction of the coast
line in the northwestern p a r t of the basin was curved, with a direction from
north-northeast bending t o northeast and that this coast line crossed the a r e a
of present-day Gotland south of Visby and File Haidar.
After a temporary r e t r e a t of the basin, during the Late Cambrian or
Olenus Epoch the s e a re-invaded the a r e a of Oland from south t o north. The
isopachs of the Olenus S e r i e s t r a v e r s e the island from west to east. This may
have been the direction of the coast line and a l s o of the axis of tilt. Under-
neath Gotland the Upper Cambrian is missing.
The isopachs of the Ceratopyge S e r i e s run in southwest - northeast
direction with some deviation in western direction towards the northern part
of the island (Thorslund, 1960, p.96). Underneath Gotland this stratigraphical
unit is not represented. Apparently, again a change in the direction of the
coast line took place on the verge of the Cambrian to the Ordovician and a
situation resulted with a coast direction of northeast bending t o east-north-
east, passing south of the present-day Visby and.File Haidar.
The isopachs of the Asaphus S e r i e s run in Oland in about the direction
of the long axis of the island, Underneath Gotland this s e r i e s is a l s o
JOINTS 49
encountered, but with many hiatuses. The direction of the coast line during
the Asaphus Epoch s e e m s t o have been about north-northeast, bending to
northeast.
Too little information is available about the Middle and Late Ordovician
and the E a r l y Silurian in the west Baltic area t o speculate about coast-line
changes during these t i m e s , and about epeirogenetic movements of the basin
floor which may have caused these changes.
JOINTS
Almost all Middle Palaeozoic sediments in Gotland show m o r e o r less

well developed joints (Fig.12). They w e r e f i r s t studied by Kaufmann (1931).
Von Bubnoff (1931, 1952, p.95) h a s made a n attempt t o put the joints s y s t e m s
of Gotland into a m o r e general picture of the Baltic area as a whole.
In the stratified limestones of Gotland the groups of joints are generally
v e r y regular in direction. They are systematic joints (Hodgson, 1961). The
dip is vertical t o sub-vertical. The dominating direction of s t r i k e is north-
east, with annexed, subordinate joints generally about perpendicular t o them.
T h e criteria f o r distinguishing the main and annexed joints are given in
Table VII. In s e v e r a l limestone exposures in northern Gotland this system
is c r o s s e d by a second double system of joints, with its main joints striking
about east-northeast - west-southwest.
In the unstratified reef limestones the s t r i k e s of the groups of joints
are m o r e i r r e g u l a r , their walls m o r e uneven, fillings of calcite remarkably
less common. The difference can well be established in the coastal cliff in
the northwest. The crinoid limestone around the Hogklint reefs is regularly
jointed, the joints striking northeast. However, at the boundary with the reef
limestone they terminate. On the reef limestone side of the boundary, joints
are i r r e g u l a r a r d indistinct.
In the marlstones the s t r i k e of the groups of joints is the s a m e as in the
adjacent limestones, i.e., northeast, but the individual joints are generally
further from one another.
In the Burgsvik sandstone joints are still m o r e separated (6-10 m).
Whereas in some exposures (Hoburgen, Kettelshrd, Valar, Burgsvik) the
main joints s t r i k e about northeast, in others (Oja, FidenPs, S m i s s in
Grtitlingbo) they show a n about east - west strike. In all cases t h e r e is only
one double joint system in the sandstone.
T h e main joints in general thus show a s t r i k e that is parallel t o the sup-
posed northwestern b o r d e r of the basin and t o the main s t r i k e of the
Palaeozoic s t r a t a , I n relationship t o the bedding planes the main joints a r e
s t r i k e joints and the annexed joints are dip joints (Badgley, 1965, p.99). The
s a m e applies t o the joints in the Cambrian and Ordovician of Oland and in the
Lower Cambrian in the Kalmar area, along the east coast of the Swedish
mainland. The usual northeast s t r i k e is gradually replaced in the latter a r e a ,
towards the south, by a dominating north-northeast s t r i k e . Kaufmann (1931)
h a s shown that the l a t t e r joint system had already occurred during Jotnian
time; it remained the main direction until the E a r l y Cambrian. In the E a r l y
Cambrian apparently the epeirogenetic movements affecting the Palaeozoic
basin of the Baltic area began, causing new directions of the groups of joints.
Of the joint s y s t e m s in Gotland only the main joints often contain a f i l -
ling of calcite. T h i s indicates that only these were open when calcite
(Text continues on p.52)
50 TECTONICS
4
12.'.
0 i
L
%6
i,
/-
22:.
JOINTS 51
TABLE Vn
Differences between the main joints and the annexed joints in limestones of Gotland (After Kaufmann,
1931)
Main joints (strike o r longitudinal joints) Annexed joints (dip or c r o s s joints)
(1) common (1)l e s s common
( 2 ) only limited variation in strike within ( 2 ) strike more scattered
a certain locality
( 3 ) may be followed over distances up to ( 3 ) often terminating against the main joints
100 m and more
(4) usually planar, smooth surfaces (4) more curved, undulating and rough surfaces
( 5 ) usually continuing downwards in the ( 5 ) a t bedding planes often shifting step-wise
same plane
(6) as a rule vertical (6) sometimes dip deviating from vertical
( 7 ) thin (0.5-5 mm) fillings of calcite (7) no fillings; often exfoliation
very common; occasionally thick
fillings (up t o 3 cm)
(8) long horizontal striations rather (8) striations l e s s common, short and wedge-shaped
common
Fig.12. Joint directions in Gotland. The following localities a r e represented:
1. Luseklint, coastal cliff, marlstone with interstratified limestone layers,
Upper Visby Beds; 2. Vialms-udd, stratified limestone, Hagklint Beds;
3. Storugns, large quarry, stratified limestone, Hagklint Beds; 4. Galgberg,
large quarry, irregularly stratified limestone, Hogklint Beds; 5. Visby, large
quarry of the former cement factory, stratified limestone, Hogklint Beds;
6. Visby shooting range, small quarry, stratified limestone, Hogklint Beds;
7. Hogklint, cliff, stratified crinoid limestone, Hogklint Beds; 8. F h b , large
quarry, stratified limestone, Slite Beds; 9. BungenPs, large quarry, stratified
limestone, Slite Beds; 10. Sankt Olofsholm, large quarry, stratified limestone,
Slite Beds; 11. Solklint, Slite, stratified limestone, Slite Beds; 12. Bogeklint,
small quarry, stratified limestone, Slite Beds; 13. Hejdeby, small quarry,
stratified marly limestone, Slite Beds; 14. Hejdeby, small quarry, stratified
marly limestone, Slite Beds; 15. Hejdeby, large quarry, stratified marly lime-
stone, Slite Beds; 16. Stenkumla, small quarry, stratified limestone, Slite
Beds;' 17. Barabacke, stratified limestone, Halla-Mulde Beds; 18. Mulde-
Stenstu, marlstone, Halla-Mulde Beds; 19. Klinteberg, large quarry, strat-
ified limestone, Klinteberg Beds; 20. Alstide, small quarry, stratified lime-
stone, Klinteberg Beds; 21. Ostergarn, large quarry, stratified limestone,
Hemse Beds; 22. Sjausterhammar, stratified limestone, Hemse Beds;
23. Sigsarve, small quarry, stratified limestone, Hemse Beds; 24. Lindeklint
(east), cliff, stratified limestone, Hemse Beds; 25. Lindeklint (west), small
quarry, stratified limestone, Hemse Beds; 26. Burgen, large quarry, strat-
ified limestone, Burgsvik Beds; 27. Smiss, large quarry, sandstone and clay-
stone, Burgsvik Beds; 28. FidenPs, large quarry, sandstone, Burgsvik Beds;
29. Oja, small quarry, sandstone, Burgsvik Beds; 30. Burgsvik, small quarry
near school, sandstone, Burgsvik Beds; 31. Valar, small quarry, sandstone
and oolite, Burgsvik Beds; 32. Sigreifs (Vamlingbo), small quarry, sandstone
and oolite, Burgsvik Beds; 33. Kettelvik, large quarry, stratified limestone,
Hamra-Sundre Beds; 34. Hoburgen, large quarry, stratified limestone, Hamra-
Sundre Beds; 35. Vamlingbo, small quarry, stratified limestone, Hamra-Sundre
Beds; 36. Sundre, small quarry, stratified limestone, Hamra-Sundre Beds;
37. Sundre, small quarry, stratified limestone, Hamra-Sundre Beds;
38. Vsndburgsviken, stratified limestone, Hamra-Sundre Beds. (11, 17, 22
measured by the present author, all other data after Kaufmann, 1931).
52 TECTONICS
deposition took place. The s t r e s s field thus h a s been in a direction perpen-

dicular t o the main joints, i.e., tension occurred generally in a northwest -
southeast direction. This is fully in accord with the view presented in the
previous section of t h i s chapter, which posits epeirogenetic movements
around a varying but often about northeast striking hinge line. In relationship
to the regional s t r u c t u r e the main joints may thus be called longitudinal
joints and the annexed joints a r e then c r o s s joints (Badgley, 1965, p.99).
It has been stated in the previous section of this chapter that the tilt
axis has not always pointed in the s a m e direction. During Halla-Mulde time
the s t r i k e of the hinge line s e e m s to have been about east-northeast. This
s a m e direction is indicated by the main joints of the second double system
in northern Gotland. It is not impossible that this double system has been
caused by the epeirogenetic movements that took place at about the Halla-
Mulde time. The double system with its northeast striking main joints may
have originated at that s a m e time, but is determined by the s t r i k e of the
s t r a t a . Presumably it has been intensified by post-Halla-Mulde movements.
In the limestones of southern Gotland the presence of a second system
with east-northeast striking main joints can a l s o be established, but it is
much l e s s pronounced there, The main joints in the Burgsvik Beds every-
where a r e in the direction of the s t r i k e of the strata ( s e e a l s o Chapter XI,
p.407).
53
Chapter V
THE FOSSIL REEFS OF GOTLAND, GENERAL
Now that a general view has been obtained of the picture in which the
Silurian reefs of Gotland fit, we may in this chapter begin a more detailed
description of these reefs by discussing their typological, geographical and
stratigraphical distribution and organic and lithological composition. Before
doing so, however, a few words on the definition of the word “ r e e f “ and a few
lines on reef building during the Palaeozoic in general a r e justified.
REEF DEFINITION
There are probably few t e r m s in common geological use about the

definition and use of which s o much has been written as on the term 4creef”.
If a conclusion can be drawn from this, it is that these organic structures
vary s o much in size, form and composition with local conditions in space
and time that each definition of organic reefs can only be artificial and
arbitrary. This is certainly true if the definition has to be applied to both
Recent and fossil reefs. Consequently, there is little purpose at this point
in discussing the various definitions proposed in literature or attempting to
give a general definition. Instead, the present author will follow Colter (1957)
by listing some of the factors that might be expected to have controlled reef
formation, and some of the characteristics which might be expected to be
found in reefs.
(1)Reefs have probably formed in quite shallow water because of the
dependence o r probable dependence of part of the constituent organisms upon
light. This shallow water may lie off a gradually sloping shore, around or
over an oceanic island or submerged island, or over a more o r less level
shelf.
(2) Subsequent growth of reefs has and does depend upon a multitude of
factors, including stability, disposition and form of the original substratum,
relative movements of sea level, suitability of local climatic conditions, com-
position, ventilation and degree of turbidity of the surrounding waters, degree
of exposure to wave and current action, size and force of local waves.
( 3 ) There must be, in each case, an association of benthonic organisms,
chiefly compound organisms, building up a rigid frame, which makes up part
o r all of the structure. Generally, material was and is swept from this frame
by wave action, forming more o r l e s s extensive fragmental deposits associ-
ated with the frame. These depdsits vary in disposition with the form of the
reef and the movement of the water. Some or all of the space between the
frame builders is filled by this fragmental material.
(4) A s a result of the intense biological activity associated with the
54 THE FOSSIL REEFS OF GOTLAND
reef, the rate of deposition of material there has exceeded or will exceed, in
some degree, that in adjacent a r e a s of the sea floor. Given the right circum-
stances, the reef could or may thus grow up above i t s surroundings, possibly
at steep angles, made possible by the frame-building organisms.
The character of wave resistance, used in several reef definitions, has
been omitted from this list. This has not been done because Lowenstam (1950,
p.438) rejected the structures in Gotland a s reefs, since he felt that there
should be no sufficient evidence that they were wave resistant (in the same
journal issue, Hadding, 1950, p.405, presented evidence of "reef induced
turbulence in Gotland", Lowenstam's criterion for wave resistance!) The true
reason is threefold: (1)wave action is not a universal constant but depends
on a variety of mainly local factors; ( 2 ) with organic structures, there is a
grading spectrum from non-wave-resisting towave-resisting depending on both
environment and the variations in composition and potentials of the organic
structures; (3)it is oftendifficult toprove that fossil reefs were wave resistant
( a s an example s e r v e Lowenstam and Hadding's controversial statements
about the reefs of Gotland).
The term I' bioherm'' , introduced by Cumings (Cumings and Shrock,
1928a; see also Cumings, 1932), is considered a s a (superfluous) synonym of
"organic reef )I, since by derivation and definition1, it means little more than
"organic reef". More useful is his term 'I biostrome" for purely-bedded
structures, such a s shell beds, crinoid beds, coral beds, etc., consisting of
and built mainly by these organisms and not swelling into mound-like or lens-
like forms, No other word existed for this type of structure. Since 1928, the
term biostrome has been widely used.
When discussing the lateral extension of the reefs in the HiSgklint Beds
of Gotland, Hadding (1941, pp.13-14) points out that whereas some of these
show the shape of an inverted cone with a curved and widely-extended base,
others seem to have developed over wide p a r t s of the sea bottom, showing a
lateral extension of up to 1-5-2 km. He apparently decided that reefs of the
latter type should be called biostromes. The present author is of the opinion,
however, that Cuming's t e r m is incorrectly used that way, even though it
must be admitted that the distinction between a laterally extended reef o r
bedded outgrowths of normal reefs and a biostrome must become rather
obscure under certain circumstances, The extended HiJgklint reefs, however,
a r e more of a biohermal than a biostromal type of development.
The rock m a s s that has remained of fossil reefs, the reef limestone, is
generally classified in systematic petrology as a calcareous sediment.
According t o the Geological Nomenclature (Schieferdecker, 1959), a sediment
is "any part of the lithosphere that has been formed by sedimentation". In the
same dictionary sedimentation" is defined as "the process of deposition of
solid lithologic materials on the lithosphereL1.In this sense, reef limestone
is not a true sediment, since an important part of it, the reef frame, has not
been deposited, but owes its existence to the building activities of organisms
that created the rock on the very place where it forms part of the lithosphere.
T o be absolutely consistent, the reef frame could rather be called a sedentate
and its formation sedentation. It is, however, s o common to also use the word
'A bioherm is a reef-like, mound-like, lens-like or otherwise circumscribed structure

of strictly organic origin, embedded in rocks of a different lithology.
PALAEOZOIC R E E F FORMATION 55
sediment for reef limestone, that the present author will do s o as well.
"Sediment" should then be redefined as any part of the lithosphere that has
been formed either by sedimentation or by organisms attached to the litho-
sphere ".
PALAEOZOIC REEF FORMATION
At this point, it may be useful to briefly sketch the picture which we

have at the present time regarding Palaeozoic reef formation.
The oldest true reefs (bioherms) known, date a s far back a s the Middle
Precambrian, and the first organisms to build such reefs were calcareous
Algae, During the Cambrian, sponges also developed reef-building abilities.
They were followed in the Ordovician by the stromatoporoids, corals of
various kinds, and bryozoans. Four groups of organisms: stromatoporoids,
corals, bryozoans and Algae, were the dominant reef builders during the
subsequent periods of the Palaeozoic. They were generally accompanied by
a great variety of reef-dwelling organisms. The climax of Palaeozoic reef
building was reached during the Silurian and Devonian Periods. It should be
-
noted that this Silurian Devonian peak in reef formation is synchronous
with the maximum diversification, abundance and geographical distribution
of the stromatoporoids, the most dominant reef-forming organisms during
these two periods.
During the S i h r i a n Period, stromatoporoids were especially common
in three large a r e a s , viz. the North American area, the British - Baltic a r e a
and the Siberian - east Asian area. Extensive reef formation has occurred
in all three areas, the reefs of North America being those most thoroughly
studied, The huge extent of the eastern reef belt is shown by Lowenstam
(1957, p.215, fig.1). It stretches a s far north as Cornwallis Island in the
Arctic, to the south of Indiana and Illinois, and to the east to the Gulf of
St. Lawrence and Anticosti Island, A short review will be given in Chapter
XIII. In the west of the U.S.A., reefs a r e found in Nevada (Winterer and
Murphy, 1960). The reefs in England and the east Baltic a r e a will also be
briefly discussed in Chapter XIII. In southern Europe, graptolitic facies pre-
dominate in the Silurian deposits, possibly reflecting depths of water too
great for reef growth. Unfortunately, the present author is not sufficiently
informed t o include a description of the reefs in the Siberian - east Asian
a r e a in Chapter XIII. No reefs seem to be present in Japan, In South America,
Africa and Antarctica, no Silurian reefs a r e known. The Ordovician -
Gotlandian reefs in southeastern Australia, indicated by Schwarzbach (1949),
are now believed to be of Lower Devonian age and to be coralliferous lime-
stones rather than r e a l reefs (Teichert, 1952, p.35), but Talent and Philip
(1956) still consider r e a l reefs of uppermost Silurian or Early Devonian age
t o be present in Victoria.
Although large reefs are known to exist from the Ordovician onwards,
small reefs dominate in the stratigraphical column of the Palaeozoic.
Generally, several of these occur together.
HISTORICAL REVIEW
When looking at the number and character of scientific geological

publications dealing with Gotland, it can be seen that initially, during the
nineteenth century and the very beginning of this century, attention was
focused mainly on the well-preserved organic remains of the Middle
Palaeozoic of Gotland. Papers dealing with the stratigraphy were l e s s in
number, but increased rapidly due to the works of Holm (1901), Munthe (1902,
1907, 1910, 1912,. 1915a, 1916), Hedstrbm (1904, 1910), Van Hoepen (1910) and
Hede (1919a,b, 1921), the discussion - following the publication of Hede's
stratigraphy (Hede, 1921) - between Hedstrbm (1923b,c), Munthe (1923) and
Hede (1923a,b), and the working out of Hede's stratigraphy in the geological
maps of the island (Munthe, 1921b; Munthe et al., 1925; Hede, 1925b, 1927a,b,
1928, 1929, 1933, 1936, 1940). Then work on the Palaeozoic of Gotland
diminished. The total number of publications between 1931 and 1950 was only
about one third of that between 1911 and 1930. Since 1950, however, interest
-
in the world of fossils has strongly revived, In the ten y e a r s 1951 1960, 40 %
more papers were published about the Middle Palaeozoic of Gotland than in
the twenty y e a r s before. Among these, publications dealing with the reefs and
their fauna again play an important part.
The first to recognize the reef character of the unstratified limestones
of Gotland, was Murchison (1846). He stated that the raukar near Slite I' a r e
in fact dismantled portions of former hard coralline reefs". Since then, Dames
(1890), Wiman (1897a, 1933), Hedstrbm (1910), Bather (1914), Twenhofel (1916)
and Wedekind and Tripp (1930), among others, have published material about
the Silurian reefs of Gotland. A detailed historical review of work carried out
before the Second World War, can be found in Hadding (1941, pp.79-94). The
latter author, however, does not mention that E. Maillieux held a lecture on
the reefs of Gotland for the Geological Society of Belgium in 1933. Unfor-
tunately, only a summary has been published (Maillieux, 1933). This summary
does not contain much more than a review of the stratigraphy of Hede (from
which, without argumentation, the Halla Limestone has been omitted) and the
distribution of the reefs. It states that there a r e morphological differences
between the reefs of Gotland and the Devonian reefs of the Ardennes, but
these differences a r e not described.
Hadding himself has also contributed considerably to the study of the
reefs of Gotland (Hadding, 1941, 1950, 1956, 1959). With the main exception
of the Tofta limestone, which he regarded as a shallow-water facies of the
uppermost Hbgklint and the lowermost Slite Beds, he built on the stratigraph-
ical work of his colleague at Lund University, J.E. Hede. The picture pre-
sented by Jux (1957) is quite different, being based both when treating the
stratigraphy and the reefs, too much on an ideal model derivecrfrom theoret-
ical considerations, rather than on the t r u e situation found in Gotland in the
field (cf. Chapter 111).
In 1958, Rutten reported on some work done by students from Utrecht
University, of which the present author was one. Following some preliminary
publications (Manten, 1958, 1961a, 1962, 1966a,b, 1968, 1970) the present
book is a continuation of the studies which were begun by his group. ,
GENERAL TYPOLOGY
A l l previous authors have discussed the Si1urh.n reefs of Gotland

without making any subdivision for them other than a stratigraphical one.
Nevertheless, distinct differences do occur, which a r e very characteristic.
GENERAL TYPOLOGY 57
TABLE VIII
'Main characteristics of the three reef types of Gotland
Characteristic Upper Visby type Hoburgen type HolmhPllar type
-
enclosed in a marlstone and marly
limestone in alternating marly limestone and rather pure
profile of limestone limestone
layers
most common knoll; lens; inverted inverted right elliptical
shape cone cone; very elongated crescent
flat lens
average size
of reef limestone l ess than 10 m2 about 100 m2 more than 1000 m2
section
ratio heightllength 1-51 1 1
--- 1
of the reefs -w 15 75
organic composition
of reef frame rather variable generally variable rather uniform
Algae absent or very r a r e common very common
number of fossil
species per moderate in
number (10 - 60) not many ( 5 - 40)
reef as a whole many (20 - 200)
(incl. reef for small reefs for large reefs
dwellers)
dominant reef stromatoporoids;
corals stromatoporoids
builders corals
average size relatively small larger large
of reef builders
average shape round or irregu-
of stromatoporoid rather flat lenticular
lar and high
colonies
very strongly little marly
matrix strongly marly
marly
conglomeratic; generally conglom-
weathered sur- eratic; partly
face sometimes bed- massive
like brecciated or bed-
like
surrounding narrow mantle of reef detritus; reef detritus;
sediments stratified marly large amounts of
limestone tcrinoid limestone
crinoid limestone
Therefore, the @resentauthor proposes a subdivision of the Gotlandian reefs

into three main types. Table VIII gives a summary of the most important
differences, as these can be observed in the field. In order to exclude, as
much as possible, a n element of perhaps subjective interpretation, no argu-
ments based on palaeoecological deductions regarding these reef types have
been advanced. A comparison of the last sections of the Chapters VI, VII and
VIII will show, however, that the observed typological differences a r e , in all
likelihood, actually connected with differences in the genesis of these reef
types.
The Upper Visby reefs a r e the oldest reefs found in the island. Since
they a r e restricted to one stratigraphical unit, there is little objection to
using the stratigraphical name to also indicate the type of reef occurring init.
Both other types of reefs, however, a r e found in more than one strat-
igraphical unit. Therefore, new names have to be introduced to characterize
them. MDst common a r e reefs of the Hoburgen type, for which the well-known
58 THE FOSSIL REEFS O F GOTLAND
cliff-complex of Hoburgen, in the south of Gotland, has been adopted a s the

standard example.
Less common are the large reefs of the third type. A very character-
istic exposure of such a reef, which has been intensively studied, is the
raukar field of HolmhPllar, on the east coast of southernmost Gotland.
Consequently, this type has been named the HolmhXllar reef type.
Some other reef types, deviating from these three and occurring only
on the small KarlsBarna (Carl Islands) off the west coast of Gotland, will be
discussed in Chapter X.
STRATIGRAPHICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION
Reefs of the Upper Visby type occur in Gotland in the Upper Visby Beds
only. Exposures a r e found almost exclusively in the coastal cliff in the north-
west, between Nyrevsudde and Hallshuk.
The reefs of the Hoburgen type have, by far, the widest stratigraphical
and geographical distribution. They a r e found in the Htrgklint, Slite, Halla,
Klinteberg, Hemse, Eke, Burgsvik and Hamra-Sundre Beds. They a r e most
abundant in the HBgklint, Slite and Hemse Beds. Geographically, they a r e
rather widely distributed over 'each of the three limestone a r e a s (Fig.11; see
also the enclosed geological map).
Reefs of the HolmhXllar type a r e found in the Hemse and the Hamra-
Sundre Beds. Those of Hemse age a r e exposed all along the east coast, be-
tween Snabben and Ljugarn. The youngest HolmhXllar-type reefs a r e exposed
in the Sundre-limestone a r e a , mainly along the east coast of the southern
peninsula of Gotland and slightly inland.
FOSSILS IN THE REEFS AND RELATED SEDIMENTS
In discussing the reef fauna and flora in the following pages, and the
various reef types and stratified deposits in further chapters, one must
realize that a general insight into the data presented can only be gained if
they a r e placed against the background of their palaeoenvironment. It is
necessary to recognize that all that can be said about palaeoenvironments is
based upon interpretations.
These interpretations will have to be deduced from two main sources:
( 1 ) The nature of the rocks, both reef limestones and stratified sedi-
ments. Their composition and fabric has generally been co-determined by
the geographical, physical, chemical and biological environment of formation.
(2) The fauna and flora preserved in and contributing to the deposits.
The latter source again is comprised of two approaches:
(a)A comparison with taxonomically - related living representatives.
Much caution is, however, required in this approach, especially since the
relationships a r e so remote in time.
(b) A comparison with morphologically-related living organisms, with
respect to any constancy of association between certain growth forms and
certain environments..
FOSSILS IN THE REEFS AND RELATED SEDIMENTS 59
Reef builders and reef dwellers
Modern reefs possess a rigid frame, built up by the activity of organ-

i s m s that were firmly attached to the underlying material and who through
building their calcareous structures, create and maintain an environment
favourable for their growth. This framework of the reefs i s generally more
or l e s s discontinuous, but the interstices a r e filled with sediment consisting
of the remains of other organisms, of debris derived from the fragmentation
of the actual reef builders and of terrigenous material trapped by the reef.
The same holds true for ancient reefs, including those found in Gotland.
Therefore, the organic remains found in them can be distinguished in reef
builders and associated organisms or reef dwellers, The term I' reef buildersii
is used here to mean those organisms which actually built the solid reef
f r a m e , such a s stromatoporoids, corals, bryozoans and Algae, Associated
organisms may be defined a s those whose remains chiefly fill in the inter-
stices in this framework, such a s crinoids, brachiopods, gastropods,
cephalopods, and others. Of course, the wording of the distinction is not very
sharp. A s has been said before, fragments of the reef builders may help to
form the matrix, and crinoid roots may add to the framework.
In the sediments directly surrounding the reefs, both fragments and
intact specimens of the hard parts of the reef builders a r e generally present.
They a r e found there together with remains of a great variety of other organ-
i s m s which found favourable living conditions in the reef environment.
Among the latter, crinoids a r e usually strongly dominant.
Table IX gives a collective survey of the organisms of which remains
have been observed in the reef limestones and their surrounding crinoid lime-
stones. In the following pages, the various fossil groups will be briefly dis-
cussed and their importance assessed. A more specific treatment of the
organic content of each of the different reef types will be given in the respec-
tive chapters on these reef types. Although the same main taxa have contrib-
uted, chiefly, to each of the three kinds of reefs, the emphasis seems to be
on different forms.
Reefs of the Hoburgen type a r e , by far, the richest i n species. Alto-
gether, about 265 species have been identified (of which about 50 can be clas-
sified a s reef-building species) and the actual number present is even
greater.
The smallest number of species known is from the Holmhillar-type
reefs. Some reasons can be given to explain this: (1)the number of exposures
i s much smaller; ( 2 ) the rock is generally very hard and consequently dif-
ficult to sample; moreover, m a r l pockets have only scarcely been preserved
and it is particularly in these that a very large number of reef dwellers in the
Hoburgen-type reefs can be collected. These two factors, which concern the
way in which the Holmhillar-type reef limestone presents itself, should
certainly be taken into account. It is the author's firm belief, however, that
there is still another reason of a primary nature: ( 3 ) the organic composition
of the Holmhillar-type reefs has presumably always been more uniform,
certainly as far a s the actual reef builders a r e concerned.
A t least 61 species a r e known from the Upper Visby reefs, but there,
too, the actual number may be much higher; compared to the Hoburgen-type
reefs, especially the reef-dwelling fauna is considerably poorer in species.
(Text continues on p. 68)

TABLE I X
Fossils found in the reef limestones and surrounding crinoid limestonee of Gotland __
Crini limestone
Lithology -Reef limestone - - -
iobu !n type olm-
T- lllar
3
Y
u
::
!?l a
- -
ALGAE
Rothpletzella sp. +
Solenopora gotlandica Rothpletz +
Solenopwa sp.
Unidentified calcareous Algae +
HYDROZOA
Actinostroma astroites (Rosen)

Actinostroma sp.
Chthrodictyon striatellurn (d’orbigny) + t
Clathrodictyon c f . variolare Rosen
Chthrodictyon c f . vesiculosum Nicholson et Murie-
Labechia conferta (Lonsdale) +
Stromatopora discoidea (Lonsdale) +
Stromatoporella sp.
Syringostroma sp.
Unidentified stromatoporoids : + + +
ANTHOZOA TETRACORALLA
Acervularia amnas (L.) + +

Aceruularia breviseptata.Weisserme1 +
Acervularia sp. +
Calostylis denticulata (Kjerulf) + +
C1isiophy 1lum (Dinophy llum ) invo lutum
Edwards et Haime +
Cyathophyllum bisectum
Cyathophyllum sp. +
Cystiphyllum cylindricum Lonsdale +
DaploZpora grayi (Edwards et Haime)
Dokophyllum htigbai Wedekind
Entelophyllum fasciculatum Wedekind +
Goniophyllum pyramidale (Hisinger) +
Hedstroemophyllum articulatum Wedekind + + +
Hedstroemophyllum sp.
Holophragma calceoloides (LindstrOm) +
Kodonophyllum truncatum (L.) +
Kyphophyllum sp. +
Lykophyllum hisingeri Wedekind + +
Lykophyllum tabulatum Wedekind +
Lykophyllum torquatum Wedekind +
Omphyma sp. + +
Phauhctis angusta (Lonsdale) -k
Pholidophyllum hedstrtimi Wedekind +
Pholidophyllum tabulatum Schlotheim +
Pho lidophyllum tenue W edekind +
Polyorophe glabra Lindstrllm + +
Polyorophe lindstrtimi Wedekind +
Pycnactis sp. +
Ptychophyllum truncatum (L.)
TABLE IX (continued)
limestone -
en ty- iolm-
Ular
\ Beds I
;
ii
-
ANTHOZOA TETRACORALLA (continued)
Rhabdophyllum striaturn Wedekind

Rhegmaphyllum conulus (LindstrOm)
Rhizophyllum elongatum LindstrOm
Rhizophyllum gotlandicum (Roemer)
Schlotheimophyllum patellatum (Schlotheim) +
Stauria fauosa {L.) t
Syringaxon dalmani (Edwards et Haime)
Zelophyllum hlrgklinti Wedekind
Zelophyllum intermedium Wedekind
Zelophyllum spinosum Wedekind
ANTHOZOA TABULATA
Aulopora roemeri Foerste

Aulopora sp. - t
Catenipora escharoides Lamarck +
Favosites asper d'Orbigny
Favosites gothlandicus Lamarck - + k
Favosites sp. + t
Halysites catenularius (L.) + t
Halysites catenulatus (Martini) -
Halysites sp. t t
Milleporites madreporifonnis Wahl enberg
Planalveolites fougti(Edwards et Haime) + t
Roemeria kunthiana Lindstrtlm +
Roemeria sp. - t
Striatopora halli LindstrOm
Striatopora stellulata Lindstrtlm
Syringopora sp. + +
Thamnopora lamellicornis (Lindstrtlm) t
Thamnopora sp.
ANTHOZOA HELIOLITIDA
Cosmiolithus ha lysitoides LindstrOm +

Heliolites barrandei Penecke - +
Heliolites interstinctus (L.) .) +
Heliolites paruistella Ferd. Roemer - +
Heliolites spongodes LindstrBm t
Heliolites sp. + +
Plasmopora calyculata LindstrBm - +
Plasmopora foroensis LindstrOm -
Plasmopora heliolitoides Lindstrtlm
Plasmopora petalliformis (Lonsdale) - +
Pksmopora Yosa LindstrOm
Plasmopora rudis LindstrOm
Plasmopora scitaEdwards et Haime - 4
Plasmopora suprema LindstrOm
Lithology : limestone - C noid

- tt
-
f 3U
- Holm-
hPllar
Beds
1a
W
Fossils 0 $j (Y
B
: 2 L
- - z- 2-
ANTHOZOA HELIOLITIDA (continued)
Plasmopora sp. +
Propom conferta Edwards et Haime
Propora speciosa Billings t
Propora tubulata (Lonsdale) t t
Thecia hisingeri (Jones)
Thecin swindemiana (Goldfuss) e t t t
Unidentified corals t + + t t
ANNELIDA
Autodetus calyptratus (Schrenk)

Conchicolites nicholsoni Vine
Conchicolites tuberculiferus Chapm.
Conchicolites s p . t t t t
Cornulites scalariformas Vine +
Cornulites serpularius Schlotheim t t
Comulites s p . c + t
Spirorbis lewisi Sowerby t
Spirorbis sp. e + + t
Unidentified annelid remains +
CRINOIDEA
Bawandeocrinus sceptmm Angelin t
Botryocrinus sp. + t
Calceocrinus s p . t t
Crotalocrinus sp.
Cyathocn'nus sp. + t
Eucalyptocrinus granulatus Lewis +
Euspirocrinus spiralis Angelin + t
Cissocrinus sp. + + t e
Herpezocrinus s p . t
Eypanthocrinus sp. +
Pisocrinus sp. t t
Polypeltes sp. F
Promelocrinus sp. t
Streptocranus crotalurus (Angelin) t
Unidentified crinoid remains t + + + e
BRYOZ OA
Berenicea consirnilis (Lonsdale) +

Coenites repens (Wahlenberg) + t c
Coenites variabilis Hisinger
Coenites sp. + t e
Fenestella mobergi Hennig 1 +
Fenestella reticulata (Hisinger) t + + t c
Fenestella sp. 1 + + t +
T A B L E IX (Continued)
Lithology Reef limestone Crinoid limestone

- - - -
\ I
-- b
Hoburgen Holm-
hPllar
-
c
.- a
a d a v1
al
r
F
- B
c
L
4
Prl x)
X Gi
0
4.
.A
B
5:W
4
al E
ri
- - - - - - - -
t +
+
+ + t + + + +
+
+ t
t + + + + + +
+
t
t
+ + t + + + t t
+
+ + + +
+ + t + t
+ c + t t
+ +
+ + +
t t t
+
+
+
t
t
+
+
t
+
c
+
+I t
+ + + + + t t
+
+
+ +
c t
+ c
+ t
+
+
+ +
Eospirlfer Schmidt i( Lindstrllm) 1
Eospirifer sinztosiis (Hedstrflm) +
Eospirijer sulcatus (Hisinger)
Eospirifer Sp. c
TABLE M (continued)
Lithology Reef limestone C

- 1
-(
Hob1 $en
- -
t e
-
Beds
id
W
c
G'
! a;
Fossils 3 3 a;
2- ij- $ B
E
x)
z-
u
I
B
r:
- X
- -
BRACHIOPODA (continued)
Gypidula galeatu (Dalman) + + + +

Howellella elegans (Muir-Wood) + + +
Kozlou'skiellina deltidialis (Hedstrllm) +
Leptaena lovf?ni D e Verneuil +
Leptaena rhomboidalis (Wilckens) + + + + + + t
Leptaenoidea silurica Hedstrllm + 7
Leptostrophia filosa (J. de C. Sowerby)
Leptostrophia impressa (LindstrBm) + t
Lesenea canaliculata (Lindstrllm) + +
Lingula lewisi J. de C. Sowerby +
Linopore 1la pun ctata ( D e V erneuill- + + +
tissutrypu sp. +
Meristina obtusa ( J . Sowerby) +
Nucleospira pisum (J. de C . Sowerby) t
Orbiculaidea pilidium (Lindstrllm)
Orbiculoidea sp. t + + t
"Orthis" ttibulata Lindstrllm +
Orthothetes adnata Hedstrllm +
Pentamerus gotlandicus Lebedev +
Platystrophia bijorata (Schlotheim) + + +
Platystrophin sp. + + +
Plectatrypa imbricata (J. de C. Sowerby)- + + + +
Plectatrypa lamellosa (LovBn) + +
Plectatrypa marginalis (Dalman) + t
Plectodonta duuali (Davidson) +
Plectodonta transversalis lata (Jones) +
Protoathyris didyma (Dalman) + t
Protoathyris s p . +
Ptychopleurella bouchardi (Davidson) + + t t
Resserella basalis (Dalman) + +
Resseretla elegantula (Dalman) + + +
Resserella uisbyensis (Lindstrom)
Resserella sp. + + + t
Rhipidomella hybrida (J. de C. Sowerby) + + + + + t
Rhynchospirina bay lei (Davidson) +
Rhynchospirina bouchardi (Davidson) +
Rhynchotreta cuneata (Dalman) + + + + +
Sphaerirhynchia wilsoni (J. Sowerby) + + + + + t
"Sparifer" insignis Hedstrom +
Streptorhynchus nasutum ( Lindstrom) +
Stropheodonta semiglobosa (Davidson) + + + +
"Strophomena" concinna Lindstrllm in museo- t
"Strophomenu " orbignyi Davidson
Wrophumena" mgata LindstrBm +
Wrophomenaf' t e s t d o LindstrBm i n museo- t +
'Strophomena" sp. + +
Trimerelln lind$tr&Jmi (Dall) t
Trimerelln sp. t + + t
Unidentified brachiopods t + + + + + +
'i
\ Lithology Reef limestone

en t e
-
-
Solm-
ioid I
\
Wlar
(Y
9 i$
Fossils
7;
-
:
-
LAME LLIBRANCHIATA
Actinopterella sp. +
Conocardium s p . + +
Cypricardinia crispula (Lindstrnm)
Cypricardinia exomata Lindstr8m in museo - +
Cypricardinia sp. +
Goniophora cymbaeformis (J. de C . Sowerby)- +
Ilionia prisca (Hisinger) +
"Megalomus" gotlandicus LIndstr8m
"Megalomus" sp. +
Myfilarca acuta Lindstr8m in muse0 +
Pterinea nodulosa Lindstr8m in museo +
Pterinea sp. +
Rhombopteria s p . +
Unidentified lamellibranchs i +
PTEROPODA
Conularia laevis Lindstr8m +
GASTROPODA
Bellerophon gemma Lindstr8m +

Bellerophon taeniu LindstrBm +
Belbrophon sp. +
Craspedostoma elegantalum Lindstr8m i +
Craspedostoma glabrum Lindstrnm +
Craspedostoma sp. +
Cyclonema adstrictum Lindstr8m +
Cyclonemh apicatum Lindstrnm +
Cyclonema cancellatum Lindstr8m +
Cyclonema carinatum (Sowerby)
Cyclonema distans Lindstr8m +
Cyclonema peruersum Lindstr8m +
Cyclonema turritum Lindstr8m
Cyclonema zonatum Lindstr8m +
Cyclonema sp. + +
Euchrysalis lineolata Lindstr8m +
Euomphalopterus alatus (Wahlenberg) t
Euomphalus walmstedti Lindstr8m +
Holopea applanata Lindstr8m
Holopea n u Lindstr8m +
Hobpella minuta Lindstr8m +
Homotoma s#, t
Lophospira bicincta (Hall) *
Loxonem,a fasciatum LindstrBm +
Loxonema strangulatum Lindstr8m +
Machrochilirui bulimina Lindstr8m +
Machrochilim cancellata Lindstr8m +
Murchisonia attenuata (Hisinger) +
Murchisonia cancellata Lindstrnm +
66 THE FOSSIL R E E F S O F GOTLAND
-
Lithology Reef limestone -
Crin lest
Hob1 ?en t ie
-
Holm.
hBllar
bI
W
ti W
4-
j 2 5i
- 8-
C
$
;dB -
2
X
-
GASTROPODA (continued)
Murchisonia cochleata Lindstrbm +

Murchisonia compressa Lindstrbm - +
Murchisonia crispa Lindstrllm +
Murchisonia deflexa Lindstrbm - +
Murchisonia imbricata Lindstrbm + +
Murchisonia paradoxa LindstrBm +
Onychochilus cochleatum Lindstrbm +
Onychochilus reticulatum Lindstrllm +
Oriostoma acutum Lindstrbm t
Oriostoma alatum Lindstrllm t
Oriostoma angulatum (Wahlenberg) t t t
Oriostoma contrarium Lindstrbm t
Oriostoma coronatum Lindstrllm +
~'Oriostoma"nitidissimum Lindstrllm +
Palaeacmaea solarium Lindstrbm +
Pilina unguis (Lindstrnm) t +
Plotyceras cornutum Hisinger t t t + +
Platyceras cyathinum Lindstrbm
Platyceras disciforme Lindstrllm
Platyceras enorme Lindstrllm t
Platyceras spiratum (Sowerby) t +
Pleurotomaria aequilatera Wahlenberg ? ?
Pleurotomaria bicincta (Hall) +
Pleurotomaria cirrhosa Lindstrbm +
Pleurotomaria claustrata Lindstrbm t +
Pleurotomaria glandiformis Lindstrbm +
Pleurotomaria gradata Lindstrllm +
Pleurotomaria laqueata Lindstrllm t
Pleurotomaria limata Lindstrbm t t t
"Pleurotomaria '' linnarssoni Lindstrllm +
Pleurotomaria Eloydi Sowerby +
Pleurotomaria marklini Lindstrllm t
Pleurotomaria planorbis (Hisinger) +
Pleurotomaria uoluta Lindstrbm +
Pleurotomaria sp. +
Poleumita discors(J. Sowerby) t e t + +
Poleumita globosum (Schlotheim) t e t + +
Poleumita r oem er i ( Li nds t r 8m )
Poleumita sculptum (J. de C. Sowerby) e
P o l e m i h sp. t
Pymomphalus acutus Lfndstrllm +
Subulites ventricosus Hall (according t o
Hedstrllm, 1923) e
Tremanotus compressus Lindstrbm +
Tremanotus longitudinalis Lindstrllm
Trochus astraliformis Lindstrbm
Trochus cauus Lindstrbm +
Trochus gotlandicus Lindstrllm t
Trochus incisus Lindstrllm t t
Trochus visbyensis Lindstrllm +
Trochus sp. t t
Tryblidium reticulatum Lindstrllm t +
Unidentified gastropods t t + +
R I f limestone Crinc :one

Lithology - - -
Hoburgen type Holm-
- - -
htillar
Beds ty -
#
c)
W W
Y)
Y W
Fossils W
.*
c)
G;
:3
- -
E
3 2
a-
-
TENTACULITIDA
Tentaculites multiannulatus Vine +

Tentaculites sp. + +
CEPHALOPODA
Ascoceras bohemicum Barrande

Ascoceras cochleatum LindstrBm ?
Ascoceras cucumis LindstrBm t
Ascocems decipiens Lindstrllm t
Ascoceras fistula LindstrBm +
Ascoceras gradatum LindstrBm
Ascoceras lagena LindstrOm +
Ascoceras manubrium LindstrQ k
Ascocems pupa LindstrOm t
Ascocems reticulatum LindstrOm t
Ascoceras sipho LindstrBm k t
Ascoceras sp. + k t
Choanoceras mutabile LindstrBm +
Dawsonocems annulatum (J. Sowerby) +
Clossocems gracile Barrande t
Comphocems s p . (according to Hedstrbm, 1923) - t
Ophidioceras reticulatum Angelin + t 1
Ophidioceras rota Lindstrllm k
Ophidwceras sp. +
Orthoceras sp. + + k t + +
Phragmoceras inflexum HedstrBm +
Phragmoceras praecurvum HedstrBm k
Phragmoceras sp. + k t
Unidentified cephalopods + + k t
TFULOBITA
Arctinurus omatus (Angelin) + +

Arctinurus s p . +
Bumastus sulcatus LindstrBm +
Bumastus sp. + + t +
Calymene excavata LindstrBm -
Calymene neointennedio R. et E. Richter
Calymene spectabilis Angelin +
Calymene tuberculata (BrUnn) + +
Calymene sp. + + + t t + +
Dalmanites imbricatulus (Angelin) +
Dalmanites obhcsus (LindstrOm) t +
Encrinurus hevis (Angelin) +
Encrinurus obtusus (Angelin)
Encrinurus punctatus (WaMenberg) + + + t ? + +
Eophacops musheni (Salter)
Eophacops sp.
Proetus conspersus (Angelin) t ? +
Proetus deIica3us HedstrBm
Crinoid limestone
t limestone -
Hobc :en type 3olm-
illllar
% 8
B
r:
(Y
5
a-
B
31
- -
TRILOBITA (continued)
+
Proetus sp. t + +
Sphaerexochus laciniatus Lindsti-Bm t +
t +
Unidentified trilobites t + +
OSTRACODA
Beyn'chia sp. +
Craspedobolbina clavata (Kolmodin) +
Hemsiella maccoyana (Jones) + +
Leperditia baltica (Hisinger) +
Leperditia gigantea Roemer +
Leperditia gregaria Kiesow + +
Leperditia phaseolus (Hisinger) +
Leperditia sp.
Neobeyrichia buchiana (Jones)
Neobeyrichia nodulosa (Boll) + +
Neobeyrichia sp. + +
Unidentified ostracodes + + +
- - -
Reef builders
St roma toporo i d s
The most important reef builders of the reefs in Gotland proper a r e the
stromatoporoids. They strongly dominate in the fauna of both the Hoburgen
and HolmhPllar-type reefs ( s e e Chapters VII and VIII). Only in the smaller
Upper Visby reefs a r e the stromatoporoids outnumbered by the corals
(Chapter VI). In the reefs of the two Karlsbarna (Carl Islands), stromato-
poroids a r e distinctly l e s s common than in Gotland proper. This applies
particularly to the lower parts of the reefs of StPurnasar type and to the
reefs of Fanterna type ( s e e further Chapter X).
Despite the abundance and wide distribution of stromatoporoids in the
Middle Palaeozoic of Gotland (and in Silurian and Devonian formations in
many other parts of the world) relatively little is known about their structure
and taxonamy. Some of the publications on the geology of Gotland deal inciden-
tally with stromatoporoids. However, the group as such is still badly in need
of extensive monographical treatment. The present author regrets that such
a time-consuming study could not be included in his programme and con-
sequently, only some rather general remarks can be made about this im-
portant group,
FOSSILS IN T H E R E E F S AND R E L A T E D SEDIMENTS 69
In the field, stromatoporoids a r e impossible t o identify, with the excep-

tion of Labechia conferta (Lonsdale) and Strornatopora discoidea (Lonsdale).
The former is coarsely structured and generally occurs in a thin-laminar
growth form. It is quite common in Gotland, especially in reef parts with a
relatively-high m a r l content, in marginal p a r t s of reefs, and in some bio-
stromal outgrowths of reefs on the surrounding beds. Stromatopora discoidea
is usually found as thin covers over some other fossils.
In thin section, it is not very easy to study stromatoporoids in detail,
owing to the recrystallization which has often affected them. Only a limited
number of thin sections has been studied. Consequently the part of the hydro-
zoans in Table IX is not complete in either taxonomic or stratigraphical r e -
spects. The thin sections, nevertheless, indicate that the stromatoporoids of
Gotland fall into two main groups.
The stromatoporoids of the first group have a skeleton composed of
regular laminae and definite pillars. In this group, there a r e representatives
of at least four genera: Actinostroma Nicholson (family Actinostromatidae),
Strom atopore 1la Nicholson (family Clathr odictyidae ) and Strom atopora Goldfuss
andsyringostroma Nicholson (family Stromatoporidae). The tissue of the laminae
and pillars of Actinostroma is compact; the pillars a r e strong and continuous.
The tissue in Stromatoporelkz is coarse t o fine porous; the pillars a r e not
regularly superposed. In both genera of the family Stromatoporidae, the tis-
sue is maculate and a l s o fills t o a large extent the interlaminar spaces; both
genera can best be distinguished in tangential section, in which Syringostroma
shows large, round pillars. Sections through a Stromatopora sp. a r e given by
Hadding (1941, p.27, fig.20,21).
The stromatoporoids in the second group have a skeleton not composed
of regular laminae and definite pillars, but of imperfect cyst plates. This
group comprises the genera Labechia Edwards et Haime, in which the cysts
occur in an imbricating manner, and Clathrodictyon Nicholson and Murie, i n
which the cysts a r e placed side by side o r end t o end, o r approximately so.
Hadding (1941) discussed the different growth forms displayed by the
stromatoporoids in Gotland. Roughly, the following main forms can be distin-
guished: (1)tabular, (2) dome-shaped o r nodular, ( 3 ) spheroidal, (4)columnar.
It should be added immediately, however, that there a r e no distinct bound-
a r i e s between these four groups of shape types. The stromatoporoids exhibit
an enormous variety in shape and transitions between various types of growth
forms are common. The groups which Hadding distinguished are, in fact, not
more than a rough expedient which aids in describing the variety that i s found.
The tabular stromatoporoids spread as covers or thin lenses over
larger o r smaller p a r t s of the s e a floor. A s covers, they a r e common in
stratified stromatoporoid limestone. Even rather-clayey mud could be an
acceptable ground for their development. In several instances such stromato-
poroid covers formed a solid basis for other sessile organisms, often leading
to reef building. Several such covers a l s o commonly follow above each other,
with mostly thin l a y e r s of marlstone or marly limestone in between them.
A similar development but with l e s s sediment in between, can be found in
p a r t s of some reefs, most particularly, the Gannberg variety of the Hoburgen
reef type ( s e e C h a p t e r m , p.357). Both the upper and lower surfaces of the
covers a r e wavy, generally more so in the reefs than in stratified deposits,
in some reefs being in part even very extreme. The thickness of an individual
cover may show local variations, and generally the m o r e so when it is
strongly curved, but on the whole the thickness is rather constant per cover.
Fig.13. “Waistcoat-pocket bioherm? Boundary between Upper Visby marl-

stone and Hbgklint limestone. North side of Ihrevik. (After Rutten, 1958, fig.25.)
More common in the reefs, however, i s a l e s s regular development, with an

uneven lower and upper surface, and a varying thickness. Together with the
lenticular stromatoporoids, they may give the reef limestone a vaguely
stratified appearance.
In the group of dome-shaped or nodular stromatoporoids, Hadding in-
cluded “all the rather varying types which differ from the tabular ones by
their very arched shape and from the spheroidal ones by their greater
breadth”. In this group he evidently a l s o included forms shaped like thick
lenses. More common, however, a r e thinner lenses. These a r e rather sim-
ilar to the irregular-tabular forms, especially when occurring i n large num-
b e r s as they often do. However, the thin-lenticular forms differ from the irregular.
tabular forms in the fact that the successive thickenings in the plane parallel
to the s e a floor a r e not inter-connected but distinctly form separate colonies.
The truly nodular stromatoporoids have a more irregular, tuberous shape
than the lenticular forms. Lenticular and large nodular stromatoporoids may
occur together in large numbers, constituting the bulk of several reef parts,
especially of the Hoburgen type. Due t o the influence of weathering and dis-
integration of the reef limestone, such parts generally have a coarse-conglom-
eratic appearance. Dome-shaped stromatoporoids and variations of that
growth form a r e also common. They show usually well-developed latilaminae,
which indicate that the colonies grew radially from an eccentric point in the
fully developed colony, the successive latilaminae following more or less
concentrically. The size of a colony can be large to very large, a length of
1 m being not unusual, especially in the Holmhllllar-type reefs. There, as
well as in the Hoburgen-type reefs and even in some stratified stromato-
poroid limestones, several such m o r e or less dome-shaped colonies may
FOSSILS IN THE R E E F S AND RELATED SEDIMENTS 71
occur side by side or even joined together to a large cover with dome-shaped
elevations. A s Hadding also pointed out, these occupy an intermediate posi-
tion between the dome-shaped and strongly wavy tabular stromatoporoids, but
in contrast t o the latter, they usually show pronounced latilaminae. A s in
other latilaminated stromatoporoids, weathering often causes the colonies to
disintegrate in curved pieces, representing fragments of these latilaminae.
The spheroidal stromatoporoids often vary in size between that of a
tennis ball and that of a walnut, but they may even be much larger. Usually
they a r e strongly recrystallized and show no distinct latilaminae. They often
occur in pure, massive reef limestone, which brecciates through weathering;
in other cases they may contribute to a coarse-conglomeratic appearance of
the rock, A single colony of spheroidal shape may form, which Rutten (1958,
p.382) called a " waistcoat-pocket bioherm" (Fig.13).
Columnar or branched stromatoporoids have only sporadically been
observed in the fossil reefs in Gotland.
Presumably both environmental factors and specific differences have
contributed t o the variety in growth forms. The former factor probably was
the most important, but the author has not been able to clearly prove this.
The subject of different stromatoporoid growth forms will be further touched
on in Chapter XZI.
Corals
Compared to the stromatoporoids, fortunately much more systematic

literature is available on the corals that a r e represented in the Middle
Palaeozoic of Gotland. No doubt this is due mainly to the fact that the exter-
nal form of the corals is generally well preserved and characteristic and
a l s o the microstructure in the majority of specimens is still well recogniz-
able. At least 36 species of tetracorals, 13 species of tabulate corals and 17
species of heliolitids have been found in the reefs. Most likely, however, the
actual number of species present is distinctly higher still.
It s e e m s that the solitary corals suffered comparatively l e s s competi-
tion from the stromatoporoids and compound corals in a muddy environment.
Solitary corals a r e abundant in the Upper Visby Marlstone and also, e.g., i n
the Lerberg Marlstone of Stora Karlsi) (Chapter X). In the reefs they are
commonest in the Upper Visby-type reefs and the lower parts of the Hoburgen-
type reefs in the Lower Hbgklint Beds. Generally, however,. even within the
group of the anthozoans, the solitary corals a r e unimportant as reef builders,
being overshadowed by the compound forms.
These compound corals play a prominent part in the reefs of Karlsaarna.
In the lower parts of the reefs of StLurnasar type Halysites particularly is a
dominant reef builder. Compound corals a r e generally a l s o common in the
upper parts of these reefs and in the reefs of Fanterna type. Comparatively,
the Kar1si)arna reefs are much richer in corals than those of Gotland proper.
Compound tetracorals, although fairly common, have only a scattered
distribution in the reef limestones of Gotland; comparatively speaking,
Acervuluria ananas (Linnaeus) is the most frequently found and occasionally
in very large colonies. In the Hjgnnklint, a reef part of 4 m wide and 6 m high
consists almost exclusively of Acervuluria colonies, which a r e also common
i n the environment of that reef. A similar, but somewhat smaller occurrence
of this coral was found in Storburg, Hoburgen.
Unbranched, massive compound corals a r e common in most of the
Fig.14. Two species of Halysites. Above H . catenulatus (Martini), below parts

of two colonies of H . catenularius (Linnaeus). Both species a r e commonly
found in the Upper Visby Beds, in both the reefs and the stratified sediments.
They a r e also found in several reefs of Hoburgen type, relatively more fre-
quently in the lower parts thereof than in the upper parts. (After Manten, 1962,
fig.8.)
r e e f s of Gotland proper. They have been found to be most abundant in the

Upper Visby reefs and least common in the reefs of HolmhPllar type.
Although they can commonly be found in all p a r t s of the Hoburgen-type reefs,
they a r e often relatively most frequent in the lower parts, where it is not
unusual that they form the solid substratum f o r other reefbuilders. Halysites
(Fig.14) is, of course, also well represented there, both by intact colonies
and fragments, but the massive f o r m s among social corals often outnumber
it even in these reef parts. Among the latter, there is in the first place,
Favosites gothlandicus Lamarck in its various growth forms, followed by a
range of heliolitids, lead by Heliolites interstinctus (Linnaeus), but also com-
prised of some other Heliolites species, as well as species of the genera
Plasmopora and Propora. The size of the colonies is generally small or
moderate; in the lower reef parts, they a r e often bun-shaped or tabular,
whereas larger and more roundish colonies a r e most common in the more
marginal parts.
Thin covers of Tkecia swinderniana (Goldfuss) are a l s o often found,
characteristically in the marginal p a r t s of the reefs, although they occur
elsewhere in the reefs too, as well as in the stratified sediments directly
around the reefs. Thecia a l s o appears in a branched form, the shape ap-
parently being influenced by environmental conditions. The same holds for
the laminar and branched growth forms both found with Heliolites parvistella
Ferd. Roemer. More about this and other aspects of coral palaeoecology will
be said in Chapter X I I .
Branched corals a r e present mainly in the more central reef parts.
Where they a r e found, they often developed in a pool in the reef surface s u r -
rounded by stromatoporoids, sometimes together with some massive coral
colonies.
Bryozoans
The number of bryozoan colonies observed in the reefs is very much

smaller that that of the stromatoporoids and also less than the number of
corals. Since they a r e , moreover, generally of small size, bryozoans usually
do not contribute much to the total volume of the reef limestone. The only
common exception a r e the reefs of Fanterna type in Karlsbarna.
The branched and fenestrate bryozoan colonies probably relied general-
ly on the more protected parts of the reefs. Even there they may from time
to time have suffered serious destruction, a s their broken remains a r e com-
monly found in several reefs and the surrounding sediments. Occasional
colonies which a r e found overgrown by stromatoporoids a r e well preserved
in the reefs of Gotland proper. In Karlsbarna intact colonies a r e much more
common.
Locally encrusting bryozoans a r e found, again most commonly in the
more central parts of reefs, where they cover both reef builders and reef
sediment; probably most of these encrustrnents belong to the genus Fistulipora.
A lga e
Because one is apt to overlook the Algae in the Silurian reefs of Gotland,
their contribution to reef formation has often been underestimated. Hadding,
for instance, was guilty of this in his major contribution on the reefs of
Gotland (Hadding, 1941), but later corrected himself (Hadding, 1950, p.407).
Once having recognized the Algae, they a r e found to be quite common, even
abundant in parts.
The role of the genus Solenopora was rather similar to that of the
modern coralline Algae. The genus is fairly well represented. In places, its
porcellaneous remains characterize substantial parts of the reef limestone.
This is particularly true for the Hbgklint reefs, and also in Hoburgen-type
r e e f s in the Slite Beds and elsewhere where it is found rock-forming, thereby en-
crusting other reef builders in places. The shape ofSolenopora, as that of modern
coralline Algae, varies and is generally very irregular. In cross-sections,
growth laminae can be seen, generally l e s s than 1 mm thick. These laminae
a r e roughly concentric around the point of attachment, becoming increasingly
irregular with greater distance from it and usually finally splitting up into
a number of different lobes.
There has been much discussion on the true nature of the algal remains
which have long been known as Sphaerocodium. The starting point has been
the algal limestone in the Lower Hamra Beds. In the older literature, the
algal material constituting the balls occurring frequently in the deposit is
called Girvanella problematica Stolley, 1893, and the deposit consequently
Girvanella limestone. In 1891, Rothpletz introduced the genus Sphaerocodium,
on the strength of material from the Alpine Triassic. In 1895, Seward had
already shown that the genus diagnosis of Rothpletz was dubious and insufficient
(cf. Seward, 1898). Nevertheless, Rothpletz stuck to his genus and in 1908 described
material from Gotland as Sphaerocodium gotlandiurn. Since then, the name
Sphaerocodium has frequently been used in literature on the Silurian of
Gotland. This was even more so as algal remains with a similar structure
t o that of the Hamra Beds were a l s o found in several other beds, including
reef limestones, on the island. Pia (1926) stated that Sphaerocodiuwz i s only
an intergrowth of several species of Girvanella. Hadding (1933) also noted
that the "Sphaerocodium" balls a r e only seldom homogeneous, but that often
two or more Algae contributed t o the formation of these limestone concre-
tions, whereas other organisms could a l s o have aided in this. In 1941, he
used the name Pilothrix for l a y e r s or thin coatings of Sphaerocodium
material as these a r e found in the reefs (Hadding, 1941, p.38). Although the
present author did not go deeply into the problem of the nature of these
questioned algal remains, the impression gained is that in the reef limestone
the filamentous Algae seem to belong mainly to the genus now known as
Rothpletzellu, with probably some contributions by Giruanella. In the algal
balls, these two,again a r e present, the first one probably being the more
important, but there a r e a l s o some layers of Spongiostroma-like material;
even encrusting bryozoans have taken some part in the formation of a num-
b e r of the balls, A detailed taxonomic study of the Silurian Algae of Gotland
would be very useful.
The algal c r u s t s found in part of the reefs cover both reef builders and
reef sediment and their contribution may thus have been both in strengthening
the reef frame and in binding the loose sediment filling the interstices in that
frame. In the reef limestone of the Hbgklint, characteristic alternations of
Thecia and algal layers were found in some marginal reef parts, similar to
those described by Hadding (1941,p.40). Particularly important a r e algal
c r u s t s in the reefs of Holmhgllar type.
It is the presence of Algae in many of the reefs in Gotland that gives
the most evidence of the lowest limit of the water depth in which these reefs
grew, as these must have been confined t o p a r t s of the s e a floor within the
reach of sunlight.
Associated organisms
A s was said before, in addition t o the true reef builders, a great

diversity of other organisms was present on, in and around the reefs. Those
which lived on the reefs comprise both forms which were attached to the r.eef
and free-living forms. Attached were, e.g., crinoids and several solitary
corals, and not attached such animals as crustaceans, molluscs and
arthropods. Mixed with debris of reef builders, calcareous mud and t e r r i -
genous detritus , their remains constitute part of the interstitial material of
the reefs. Together with reef builders, debris derived from the fragmentation
of them and the remains of organisms living around the reefs, associated
reef organisms a r e a l s o found embedded in, or even may form the major
part of, the sediments surrounding the reefs.
Crinoids
There is hardly any reef in Gotland in which remains of crinoids cannot

be commonly observed, macroscopically as well as microscopically. In the
latter case, their optical behaviour and usually characteristic shape make
them recognizable in thin sections. They must have been present in large
numbers on the outer parts of the reefs and probably a l s o directly around
FOSSILS IN THE R E E F S AND RELATED SEDIMENTS 75
them. The ease with which they disarticulated made them by far the major
source of bioclastic debris. Consequently they contributed considerably to
the formation of the stratified deposits around the reefs, particularly in the
Hoburgen and Holmhlllar-type reefs. Although several crinoid roots were
seen still attached to colonies of reef builders, the number of these is in-
significant compared to the extremely abundant stem fragments. The number
of identifiable calyces found was even smaller.
Some aspects of the palaeoecology of the crinoids found in Gotland will
be discussed in Chapter XII.
Brachiopods
Brachiopod shells a r e commonly, often even abundantly, found in the

reefs of Gotland. Where the matrix is marly, and especially in m a r l pockets,
they can be extracted and identified. In many other cases, this is virtually
impossible. The latter holds true particularly for the HolmhPllar-type reefs,
but also for several Hoburgen-type reefs or parts of them. The contribution
of the brachiopods to the total reef limestone is merely a passive space-
filling one.
Molluscs
Of the classes belonging to the phylum of molluscs, that of the gastro-

pods is most commonly represented. Gastropods occur particularly in the
reefs of the Hoburgen type, but a r e also well represented in reefs of the
Upper Visby type. More of their remains were found in the reef limestone
than in the crinoid limestone, the commonest form in the latter being
.
Platyceras cornutum Fragments of gastropods, whose structure suggests
that they have recrystallized from rhombic aragonite, a r e not uncommon in
thin sections of reef limestone. A comparable type of recrystallization i s
shown by remains which may be those of lamellibranchs. The latter, as
molluscs, might also have contained aragonite. It is significant that brachio-
pod remains never show a similar type of recrystallization.
An occasional pteropod has been observed.
Lamellibranchs occur in reefs of Hoburgen type, but a r e distinctly
fewer in both number of species and number of specimens than the gastro-
pods. The relative scarcity of lamellibranchs in the reefs of Gotland is
notable since in several modern reefs, including the Great B a r r i e r reef
(Maxwell, 1968), the lamellibranrh species a r e possibly a s varied a s and
certainly more numerous than the gastropods. The commonest lamellibranch
in the Hoburgen-type reefs of Gotland is the genus Conocardium .
In several reefs of the Hoburgen and HolmMllar type, one or several
specimens of cephalopods were seen, but only very few were observed in the
surrounding stratified deposits. Cephalopods a r e not particularly r a r e in the
reefs of Gotland in contrast to other a r e a s , such as the English Wenlock,
where they a r e only very rarely found in association with reef-bearing beds
(Colter, 1957, p.27).
Arthropods
The easiest recognizable arthropod remains a r e those of the trilobites.

They a r e represented in each of the three reef types and a r e rather common
both in the reef and the surrounding stratified sediments, A t least 17 species
a r e known from these rocks in Gotland.
Remains of ostracodes a r e a l s o easily recognized. Their parts a r e
usually found throughout the reef matrix, but are best preserved in marl
pockets, where both articulated and disarticulated valves can be seen.
Sponges
Sponge spicules occur fairly commonly in several of the reefs, but they
a r e relatively inconspicuous and hardly contribute t o the bulk of the reef rock.
The silica of the spicules is usually replaced by calcite. It has not been pos-
sible to identify the isolated spicules in genera. Both hexactinellid (triaxonid)
and lithistid sponges a r e represented, the latter being comparatively most
common in t h e more central p a r t s of the reefs, which might suggest a pref-
erence for a more sheltered environment.
Protozoans
In thin sections of both reef limestone and surrounding sediments,
peculiar bodies can be seen, which in sagittal sections a r e flask-shaped (Fig.15).
Similar bodies from the English Wenlock have been described by Colter (1957,
pp.28-30), who was struck by their resemblance to certain Mesozoic and
Recent Tfntinnia (sulphylum Ciliophora). Whereas Tintinnia have long been
thought not.to occur in deposits older than J u r a s s i c (PokornJi, 1958), they
have recently been described from the Devonian of the Sahara (Cuvillier and
Sacal, 1963) and the Silurian of the Betic Cordilleras in Spain (Hermes, 1966).
This increases the likelihood that these flask-shaped fossils from Gotland
and from the English Wenlock a r e a l s o Tintinnia.
Fig.15. Flask-shaped bodies, resembling Tintinnia. Reef limestone, Hagklint,

Hilgklint Beds.
Soft -bodied anima 1s

In addition t o the t r u e reef builders and the associated organisms of
which hard remains have been preserved, there is no doubt that several more
animals have been present on and in the reefs at the time of their formation.
However, since these did not have hard parts which could fossilize well, no
t r a c e of them i s generally left. Exceptions a r e , in some cases, infilled
borings and burrows and faecal pellets,
Pellet-like bodies a r e found in some places in the matrix and since
they consist of massive marly limestone, there is reason to assume that
these a r e faecal pellets. Occasionally, t r a c e s of borings a r e also found in
the reef limestone, transversing reef builders and filled by either calcite or
sediment; borings are, however, not nearly as common as in many Recent reefs.
THE R E E F MATRIX 77
THE MATRIX O F THE REEFS
A s the reefs grew upwards, they became subject t o progressively m o r e

s e v e r e erosion. Debris thus derived from the fragmentation of the reef
builders was mixed with r e m a i n s of other organisms, with calcareous mud
and with terrigenous detritus. T h i s mixture fills in all the interstices in the
reef f r a m e and is partly bound by calcareous Algae. Together they constitute
the reef matrix.
Detailed study of this reef m a t r i x shows that t h e r e is great variation
from one place t o another, even within one reef. Four m o r e o r e less p u r e
types may be distinguished, but all possible transitions between these occur,
while the transitional o r complex m a t r i x f o r m s a r e m o r e frequently found
than the “end” f o r m s of m a t r i x which are: (1) inorganic mud, with s o m e
small reef debris and r e m a i n s of associated organisms scattered through it;
( 2 ) fine-grained o r dense limestone with scattered s m a l l fossils; ( 3 ) a matrix
composed almost entirely of r e m a i n s , broken or otherwise, of reef builders
and associated organisms with crinoids often dominating; ( 4 ) vaguely s t r a t -
ified, procellaneous limestone of a stromatolitic nature.
-
Matrix f o r m s (1) ( 3 ) speak for themselves. Type (4), however, needs
s o m e further discussion.
T h e stromatolitic type of m a t r i x h a s s e v e r a l characteristic properties,
both macroscopic and microscopic. In polished surfaces, it is commonly
visible as s t r i n g s of pinkish or c r e a m y porcellaneous limestone. T h e vague
stratification may be horizontal, but is often wavy, surrounding other reef
builders (Hadding, 1950, plate 1). T h e l a y e r s may even be vertical, which
proves that they w e r e not formed by normal sedimentation. Using a sample
of reef limestone from the Galgberg, Hbgklint Beds, Colter (1957, fig.10,ll)
demonstrated that the m a t e r i a l was coherent a t all stages in its formation
and that the successive l a y e r s r e p r e s e n t temporary outer surfaces during
its outward growth. He concluded that many tabular bryozoan colonies evi-
dently found the horizontal, dipping and vertical l a y e r s all suitable for at-
tachment.
In thin sections, the wavy layering in the stromatolitic limestone is
even m o r e apparent. T h e boundary with a normal limestone m a t r i x of usually
greenish, sometimes brownish colour, is often distinct, but t h e r e are a l s o
gradual transitions. Transitions a l s o occasionally occur from stromatolitic
towards distinctly filamental algal material. T h e number of enclosed frag-
mental r e m a i n s of other organisms is generally small; there is some em-
bedded inorganic m a t e r i a l of clay or sometimes s i l t size, either in isolated
grains or in s m a l l pockets. Rarely does a sample show a l a r g e number of
imperfect tubules, 0.05 - 0.10 m m in diameter, as are a l s o reported by
Colter (1957, p.40) from s i m i l a r m a t r i x m a t e r i a l in the English Wenlock
reefs.
It follows that although s o m e of the c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s mentioned point to-
w a r d s a n algal origin, t h e r e is no absolute proof that the m a t e r i a l is an algal
or otherwise organic limestone. T h e s a m e conclusion, however, would result
from a n independent study of s e v e r a l Recent calcareous deposits of undoubt-
edly algal origin.
If the assumption that stromatolitic reef m a t r i x is formed by Algae is
warranted, one must conclude that it has been the Algae themselves which
have precipitated calcium carbonate and which were not merely sediment
binders. Evidence supporting this conclusion includes the observed transitions
t o filamentous Rothpletzella material; the porcellaneous appearance of the

sediment, s o s i m i l a r t o that of known algal limestone with Rothpletzella; the
different colour with respect t o the normal limestone; and the small amount
of inorganic detrital sediment in i t , as compared t o the other kinds of matrix.
Locally a s m a l l interstice in the reef f r a m e seemed t o have remained

unfilled at the t i m e of reef development, because i t generally had only a
small opening. T h e s e a r e now found filled with calcite. The bottom of such
filled cavities is usually r a t h e r smooth, evidently as a result of fine sediment
that has been sieved into the cavity; the walls and roof are commonly i r r e g -
ular and determined by the shape of the surrounding reef builders. The cal-
cite filling the cavity is granular and s i m i l a r t o that filling c r a c k s in the reef
limestone, suggesting that i t was deposited well a f t e r the time of formation
of the reefs. No fibrous calcite h a s been observed, such as is described from
the P e r m i a n reef in the central southern U.S.A. (Newell, 1955, p.308), and
which s e e m s t o have been deposited synchronously with reef formation and
p r i o r t o the infiltration of fine sediment. Nor has fibrous calcite been ob-
served by Colter (1957, pp.45-46) in the Wenlock reefs in England. He sug-
g e s t s that its absence may be connected with the s i z e and form of the reefs,
o r their depth below the surface of the sea in which they developed. The reef
which Newell studied is much l a r g e r than those found in Gotland and England,
and Colter quoted Newell, who mentioned that in modern reefs, aragonite is
formed by the passage of warmed sea water, supersaturated with calcium
carbonate, through the reef at ebb-tide, after it h a s lain f o r some time on the
extensive reef flat,
79
Chapter VI
THE UPPER VISBY REEF TYPE
INTRODUCTION
One of the most conspicuous c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s of the west coast of

Gotland, over a distance of about 60 k m , between Nyrevsudde and Hallshuk,
is the difference between the lower and the upper p a r t of the coastal cliff.
The lower p a r t consists of bluish grey marlstone, slaty t o thin bedded,
which alternates with thin, elongated l e n s e s of marly limestone. Upwards,
these limestone l e n s e s i n c r e a s e in number and thickness, although most of
them are not thicker than 5 cm. Small reefs occur. This p a r t of the cliff is
built by the Visby Beds, mainly the Upper Visby Beds. The upper part of the
cliff is built by fossiliferous limestones, thick bedded, varying from a grey
to whitish o r reddish colour, and with intercalated l a r g e reefs. These
sediments f o r m part of the Hogklint Beds. The boundary with the underlying
Upper Visby Beds is not well defined. Usually the first thick and continuous
layer of limestone is taken to be the basis of the Hogklint Beds.
F r o m the coastal cliff in an inland direction, the H8gklint limestones
are generally found a t the surface. Only occasionally does s o m e Visby
marlstone outcrop in low-lying spots.
In the coastal cliff, exposures of Upper Visby sediments a r e common.
Nevertheless, the range of exposures is sometimes interrupted. This is
especially the c a s e at those places where a t present the sea hardly ever
reaches the foot of the cliff, and where p a r t s are covered by s c r e e .
Beautiful sections, however, are not rare either, especially south of Visby.
GEOGRAPHICAL AND STRATIGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE REEFS
A point of orientation in the south is the Korpklint, which bounds the

Tofta Skjutfalt in the north. This cliff, whose name is confusingly used twice
in the area, is s m a l l e r than the t r u e Korpklint (Vasterhejde P a r i s h ) , which
is found a short distance f u r t h e r northwards. The upper p a r t of the section,
with sediments of Hogklint age, occurs m o r e inland in the case of the
southern Korpklint. The Upper Visby cliff along t h e s e two Korpklintar can
best be studied starting from the Ygne Fisklage. The next a c c e s s to the
beach is a t Fridhem. If one wants to study the steep Hogklint cliff f r o m the
side of the beach, Fridhem is the best starting point. Going northeastwards
from t h e r e , one may, via Axelsro, get close to Kneippbyn. Northeast of
Kneippbyn the beach is interrupted f o r a short distance. At Kneippbyn
Fisklage the beach can b e reached again.
Not only the reefs of the Hiigklint Beds but also those of the Upper
03
0
I r e e f limestone EFl vegetation 01 1 2 3 metres
Fig.16. The southernmost of the three reefs exposed along the road southwest of Snackgardsbaden Hotel. The reef
contains favositids, heliolitids, tetracorals and stromatoporoids, together with several kinds of reef dwellers, i n a
3*
voluminous marly matrix. Around the reef a mantle of stratified limestone which passes gradually, but within a EM
rather short distance, into the normal Upper Visby interstratification of marly limestone and marlstone. 4
*
4
GEOGRAPHICAL AND STRATIGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION 81
~ V V . . C . V V W . @
~~~~
EZl reef limestone E J veqetotion
Fig.17. The central of the three Upper Visby reefs exposed along the road
southwest of Snackgardsbaden Hotel. It is about equally as thick a s the reef
of Fig.16, but much less laterally extended. The character of reef limestone
and surroundings are similar to those of i t s northern neighbour.
Visby Beds a r e very common and beautifully exposed south of Visby, i n the
cliff between Nyrevsudde and the Visby shooting range. The coast along this
shooting range has not been studied by the present author. Further south
there is a second such range (Tofta Skjutfalt), of which the coastal stretch
Nyrevsudde -
Bl%ha11- Stavsklint - southern Korpklint forms part. Thanks
to the kind cooperation of the military authorities, the present author was
allowed to include this a r e a in his studies. It showed several interesting
exposures.
The number of Upper Visby reefs observed per kilometre of cliff
varies south of Visby from about 18 (Kneippbyn) to about 1 2 (Tofta Skjutfalt).
That the latter number is lower depends, however, mainly on the degree of
exposure of solid rock in the coastal cliff. Altogether almost one hundred
Upper Visby reefs have been recorded south of Visby, in varying sizes and
degrees of clearness. Consequently these reefs a r e certainly not as r a r e a s
was assumed by some earlier authors (e.g., Hadding, 1933, p.60).
The reefs south of Visby occur in the upper two-thirds of the Upper
Visby section, albeit with some variation. (Thus, in the a r e a of the Tofta
Skjutfalt, the oldest reefs occur a few metres lower than at Kneippbyn.)
However, comparatively the most reefs a r e found i n the uppermost part of
the Upper Visby Beds. Unfortunately, as a consequence,they a r e often
82 T H E U P P E R VISBY R E E F T Y P E
situated rather high i n the cliff wall, with the result that a part of them is
nearly o r completely inaccessible. It is also unfortunate that almost all
sections through the reefs follow the general direction of the coastal cliff,
which is about southwest - northeast.
North of Visby, three rather well-known Upper Visby reefs a r e found

south of Snackgardsbaden Hotel (cf. Hede, 1940, pp.16-17). They lie along a
road which is regularly treated with calcium chlorate. The dust from this
road covers the exposures like plaster s o that they a r e , therefore, no longer
a s beautiful as at the time when the photographs in the publication by Hede
were taken. For a detailed study, many of the reefs exposed i n the coastal
cliff, mentioned earlier, a r e now more suited than these three at Snack-
gardsbaden. Drawings of two of the Snackgardsbaden reefs a r e given i n
Fig.16 and 1 7 .
Northeastwards, between Snackgardsbaden and Lundsklint, the coastal

cliff is generally hidden behind s c r e e material. North of Lundsklint the
Upper Visby sediments a r e again better exposed. The average number of
reefs, present p e r kilometre, is distinctly lower there than south of Visby.
Further northeast, moreover, it can be observed that reef growth started
continually later during Late Visby time. In the environment of Lickershamn,
the oldest Upper Visby reefs occur only comparatively close to the boundary
with the overlying Hijgklint Beds, into which they often continue and in which
they generally reach their maximum extension. At Hallshuk, in the extreme
north of the a r e a which shows the Visby Beds, no more reefs occur in the
Upper Visby Beds. The reefs, recorded north of Visby, which began growth
during Late Visby time, total about forty in number. Some of these a r e
completely enclosed i n Upper Visby sediments, but some only have their
lower parts enveloped by the Upper Visby Beds.
PALAEOGEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION O F THE REEFS
In the previous section it has been shown that the Upper Visby reefs
are most common south of Visby, where they also s t a r t at a distinctly lower
level than in the north. Circumstances favourable for their growth, however,
seem to have extended gradually. Other data from the Upper Visby Beds
(Chapter XI) indicate a gradual decrease in the depth of the water during
Late Visby time. Reef development makes certain demands as to water depth.
Therefore, it could be assumed that a relationship between the first occur-
rence of reefs at a certain locality and water depth at that time existed.
This suggests that, when reef growth started in the south, the s e a
further northeast was still too deep. It is further assumed that the depth
contours were generally parallel to the contemporaneous shore line. Thus,
a slight angle has to be presumed between the Upper Visby shore line and the
present coastal cliff. Since the latter trends about northeast - southwest, the
direction of the Upper Visby shore line may consequently be assumed to have
run about north-northeast - south-southwest. This conclusion is important
for the explanation of a number of observations which will be dealt with in
l a t e r sections of this chapter. The Upper Visby reefs developed in a belt
about parallel to the shore line. With the shallowing of the sea, this reef belt
gradually moved in the direction of the .basin centre.
STRUCTURE AND MATRIX 83
GENERALCHARACTEROFTHEREEFLIMESTONE
The Upper Visby reef limestone generally shows a nodulose and

unstratified o r an indistinctly stratified structure. The nodulose o r
conglomeratic character is caused by the reef builders. These consist of
grey, recrystallized limestone, which is harder than the marly reef matrix.
Consequently, they protrude somewhat in not-very-fresh exposures. The
marly matrix generally constitutes quite a large percentage of the total reef
volume; often in the order of 40-50%. Probably as a result of so much marl
sedimentation, the reef builders, on the average, did not reach the sizes of
those which a r e found in reefs of the Hoburgen o r Holmhallar type. The fact
that most of the compound reef builders (predominantly colonial corals) have
distinctly larger horizontal than vertical dimensions, is often one of the
causes of the vague stratification that can be seen in some of the reefs. For
another part, this may be due to the large matrix volume, leading to inter-
calated short and thin marlstone layers. An example of a vaguely stratified
reef is that occurring about 0.15 km northeast of the staircase close to the
southern boundary of the Visby shooting range. Many of the reef builders i n
that reef show a more o r less similar thickness (4-6 cm), and they also seem
to have had some preference for certain horizons within the reef. Their lower
and upper sides, bounded by the marly matrix, thus bring out approximately
horizontal lines, which do not correspond, however, to bedding planes outside
the reef limestone. A s will be discussed in the section on coral palaeoecology
(Chapter XII), variations i n the supply of continental clastics may have
strongly influenced the development of the main reef builders. Thus,
temporarily greater supplies of mud not only affected the volume and
character of the reef matrix, but presumably also the vitality of the organic
frame.
The dominating flat shape and horizontal position of the reef builders
may also help to explain why the reef limestone, though generally
unorganized in character, nevertheless offers a l e s s disorderly impression
than that of several reefs of Hoburgen type. The percentage of reef builders
which a r e found in their orientation of growth, is comparatively high (see
further Chapter XII). Several (presumably mutually dependent) factors may
have contributed to this, such a s the shape of the colonies, the small
dimensions of the reefs and the consequently smaller internal pressures, and
relatively less water turbulence.
In some of the larger reefs a slight decrease in marliness is found
higher in the reef. This is the case, for instance, with three large reefs
about 0.1 km north-northeast of Nyrevsudde (Tofta Skjutfalt), of which the
southern one (more than 6 m thick) and the middle one (about 5 m thick) a r e
well exposed. A slight decrease in marliness may in some cases also be
observed when the amount and character of the matrix are studied in
horizontal direction from the periphery towards the centre of the reef.
Despite the apparent loose construction of the reefs and the high
percentage of marly matrix, the reef limestone is more resistent to erosion
than the nearby normal stratified sediments of the Upper Visby Beds
(marlstone interbedded with harder marly limestone). In many cases, the
reefs protrude from the cliff wall. The three reefs at about 0.1 km north-
northeast of Nyrevsudde a r e also a good example of this. All three rest upon
a kind of ledge, consisting of stratified marly limestone, which is, in this
form, limited to the direct environment of the reefs. This limestone is
84 T H E UPPER VISBY REEF T Y P E
thickest underneath the northern reef, which is. apparently sectioned through
its periphery. The ledge dips there towards the cliff. The lowermost portion
of that reef is talus-like in character and contains many fossils lying awry.
The limestone underneath the reefs will be further discussed in a later part
of this chapter.
REEF-FORMING ORGANISMS
In general the same organisms a r e found i n the Upper Visby reefs a s

in the stratified sediments of this stratigraphical unit, though in different
frequencies. Compound corals play the most important part i n the reefs,
mainly with three important groups: Favositidae, Heliolitida and Halysitidae.
of these three groups, the favositids a r e the most striking. The shape
of their colonies varies greatly, from thin, undulous plates to almost-globular
specimens, presumably depending mainly on the environment in which they
developed. A soft substratum may have promoted horizontal expansion;
increasing sedimentation could cause the death of some corals, but may also
have stimulated the upward growth of others.
A Favosites sp. can easily be recognized, but the subdivision of the
genus is difficult. P a r t of the species ascribed to this genus in the literature
may be dubious. Many of the favositids in the reefs under discussion may
presumably be best assembled in one species. This then becomes Eavosites
gothlandicus sensu lato. In this sense, this species shows a great range of
variations and includes such other "species" as F. forbesi Edwards et Haime
and F . clausus Lindstrom.
It can easily be decided whether a Favosites sp. is lying in its orientation
of growth o r not: i t s upper side is characterized by wide, open tubular calyces,
the lower side by closed, round cells.
The heliolitids or "sun" corals, also played a n important part i n the
Upper Visby reefs. A s in the case of the favositids, there is a great variation
in shape. The growth of the heliolitid corals was apparently l e s s rapid.
Under the influence of strong m a r l sedimentation, colonies growing from a
solid substratum, among which many reef -building specimens, generally
developed rather-globular forms (cf. Chapter XII). Some colonies, showing
the shape of a mushroom with a short stem, may have grown in even more
turbid water. The latter a r e found occasionally in the reef limestone, but
a r e somewhat more common in marlstone layers of the stratified Upper
Visby succession. A s in the favositids, some flat heliolitid colonies may
have also adapted themselves to increased m a r l sedimentation by the
formation of more o r l e s s knobby upper surfaces. Colonies exhibiting this
phenomenon have also been observed in both the marlstone layers and i n the
marly limestone, but particularly at transitions from a limestone to a marl-
stone layer and in reefs (e.g., in two reefs about 0.15 km south of Axelsro).
There, the knobs on the corals were on the average 1-3 cm high, but a
Heliolites sp. has been observed with upward outgrowths a s high a s 4.5 cm.
The heliolitids of the Upper Visby Beds belong to a number of species from
the genera Heliolites, Plasmopora and Pyopora, which a r e very difficult to
distinguish on the basis of their external appearance.
The chain-pore coral genus Halysites occurs in two species, one with
a f i n e network, H. catenularius (Linnaeus), and one with a coarse network,
H . catenulatus (Martini) (Fig.14). They consist of upright lamellae, which
REEF- FORMING ORGANISMS 85
may branch, and which enclose substantial interspaces, in which all s o r t s of

foreign material, e.g., marl, could be stored. Thus, they could live even in
very turbid water. Consequently, they a r e found even more commonly in
marlstone than in limestone and reef limestone. In the latter, but
occasionally also i n the stratified sediments, they are partly broken up into
a heap of sharp sherds. The reason for their fragmentation may have been that
the interspaces were not yet completely filled when the colony was put under
pressure, or that the filling material was not yet consolidated enough at that time.
Several species of solitary corals a r e also well represented in the reef
limestone. In general, however, they were quantitatively rather unimportant
as reef builders.
In general, stromatoporoids a r e strongly subordinate to corals in the
Upper Visby reefs. Only one small reef has been found, which was mainly
formed by stromatoporoids (see p.108). A s the reef matrix contains more
marl, s o generally the number of stromatoporoids i n the reef is propor-
tionately smaller. The shape of the stromatoporoids s e e m s to have also been
strongly influenced by the environment. Most common are specimens with
the shape of a flat disc. In two reef remains about 0.1 km south-southwest
of Stavsklint, the largest colony measured 19 cm in horizontal diameter,
with a maximum height in the centre of 5 cm. Larger colonies a r e r a r e i n
the Upper Visby Beds. Occasionally stromatoporoid colonies are also found
with a mushroom-like form, moreover, partly showing a knobby upper side.
Sometimes stromatoporoid colonies are covered with a network of Aulopora sp.
In the field i t is very difficult to identify the various genera of
stromatoporoids. An exception is Stromatopora discoidea (Lonsdale), which
shows a surface pattern with small "suns"; in young specimens just one, in
older ones more than one. Generally this species occurs a s thin covers over
other fossils. Also found encrusting, are some small specimens of
Clatkrodictyon striatellum (d'orbigny).
Some corals may, in the field, easily be confused with stromatoporoids.
A s Colter (1957, p.255) also experienced, some specimens which externally
resemble stromatoporoids, may on sectioning be found to be corals such as
Planalveolites spp., o r off -centre sections through the large solitary coral
Scklotheimopkyllum patellatum (Schlotheim).
In most cases, the stromatoporoids a r e found unattached to any kind
of substratum. It remains an open question in how far this always represents
the original condition. Occasionally it can be established that colonies of
stromatoporoids o r corals - both in the reefs and in the stratified
sediments - began their growth by attachment to an older colony, a solitary
coral o r any other solid fragment.
In several reefs, fragments of bryozoans have also been observed,
among which remains of Eenestella sp. and Helopora sp. Their contribution
to reef building as a whole has been slight.
In several places within the reefs, the m a r l forms small pockets. In
these it often shows a very thin stratification. Both in the matrix and in these
pockets, solitary corals, brachiopods and molluscs (mainly cephalopods and
gastropods) a r e commonly found.
Although i n and around the Upper Visby reefs, crinoid remains have
been found, nowhere are these rock-building. This is in contrast to the
occurrence of crinoids in the Hogklint Beds and younger stratigraphical units.
A more detailed survey of the fossils known from the Upper Visby reefs
is given in Chapter V, Table IX (pp.60-67).
86 THE UPPER VISBY R E E F T Y P E
SHAPEOFTHEREEFS
Somewhat schematized, the most common shapes found among Upper

Visby r e e f s a r e the knoll, the Iens and the inverted cone. In both the Iatter
c a s e s , a section through the reef in the present coastal cliff is generally not
symmetrical, but shows a steeper southwest than northeast side.
The knoll shape
An example of a knoll reef is found about 0.4 k m south-southwest of

Stavsklint, in the a r e a of the Tofta Skjutfalt (Fig.18). It m e a s u r e s about 1 m
in both length and height. The reef is extremely marly. At the top of the reef
Fig.18. Small reef, about 0.4 k m south-southwest of Stavsklint, Upper Visby

Beds. The Iength and height are both about 1 m. The matrix of the reef is
extremely marly. The water flowing a t the boundary between the cover of
weathered rock and the underlying solid rock shows the impermeability of
the Visby marlstone to water. (After Manten, 1962, fig.3)
SHAPE O F THE REEFS 87
the stratified sediments arch over it; otherwise the reef seems to have
exerted little influence on the position of the surrounding sediments.
Immediately against the reef, a little more stratified limestone is present
than elsewhere in the succession1. This limestone is very fossiliferous,
especially in relatively-small solitary corals (1-3 cm long) and in brachiopods.
A knoll-shaped reef, which is somewhat vaguely developed, is present
about 0.45 km southwest of BlHhaIl (Tofta SkjutfPlt). This one too, is about
1 m long and high. It r e s t s upon a saucer-shaped swelling of stratified lime-
stone, which in its centre is about 10 cm thick, but increases in thickness
towards the margin. Similar limestone also builds a 0.5-1 m-broad mantle
at the right side of the reef, faintly interfingering with the almost vertical
southwest side of the reef. At the northeast side of the reef, which r i s e s
outwards at an angle of about 35O, there is a very poorly developed lime-
stone mantle. Around the top, the mantle is even lacking completely. The
reef itself shows a vague stratification, which is caused by the voluminous
marly matrix, together with reef builders of a flat-lenticular or tabular form.
Most knoll-shaped reefs occur comparatively low in the reef -carrying
part of the Upper Visby Beds. They are small and very marly (cf. also p.97).
The lens shape
There is a gradual transition from the knoll-shaped to the lens-shaped

or lenticular reefs. The difference between the two is mainly in the ratio
between the dimensions: knoll-shaped reefs a r e about equal in length and
thickness; lens-shaped reefs a r e distinctly longer than thick. Moreover, the
latter a r e usually larger than the knoll-shaped reefs. Thus i n the area of
the Tofta Skjutfalt, where the mentioned examples of the knoll reefs occur,
a lenticular reef is found about 0.2 km north-northeast of Nyrevsudde which
measures about 3 m long and 1.5 m thick. This reef also, possesses a rather
strongly marly matrix, but it does not show stratification. Especially at both
sides of the reef, but also underneath it, the succession of stratified
sediments is distinctly richer in marly and relatively hard limestone (Fig.19).
Many lens-shaped reefs found elsewhere a r e still significantly larger (see
also p.95).
Both the larger size and the better-developed limestone mantle of the
reef suggest that the lens-shaped reefs grew under somewhat more favour-
able conditions than the knoll reefs. There is no essential difference i n fossil
content between the smaller and larger reefs within the Upper Visby Beds.
Two other, approximately lenticular reefs a r e exposed closely together
in the southwest - northeast-orientated coastal cliff about 0.15 km south of
Axelsro. The northern one of these is shown in Fig.20. Both reefs a r e well-
developed and occur just below the boundary between the Upper Wsby and
Hsgklint Beds. Both distinctly show the asymmetry, mentioned at the
beginning of this section. At the southwest side of both reefs, there is a very
well developed mantle of hard, stratified limestone. The first reef, which is
about 9 m long, shows a rather steep boundary with this limestone mantle.
lWhere the dimensions of Upper Visby reefs a r e mentioned in this book, the mantle
of stratified limestone, a s found with several of them, is not included, unless otherwise
indicated.
Fig.19. Upper Visby reef about 0.2 km north-northeast of Nyrevsudde.
Fig.20. The northern of the two Upper Visby reefs south of Axelsro (below
fallen tree). Much stratified limestone is found at the southwest side of the
reef (right), less at the northeast side (left). There is no difference in the
reef fauna between the reef core and the reef margins.
SHAPE OF THE REEFS 89
At the northern reef, about 6 m long, this contact is even vertical and slightly
interfingering. At the northeastern side, the limestone mantle is only very
poorly developed. The lower lateral contact between reef limestone and
stratified sediments there r i s e s gradually over the latter. At the second,
northern reef, a talus-like zone, of about 1 m thick, i s intercalated between
the reef and the mantle of stratified limestone.
It is rather usual in theupper Visby reef-limestone exposures to find
that the southwest side of the reef limestone is steeper compared to the lower
boundary at the northeast side, a s was observed i n the two reefs described
above. Between Hogklint and Visby, this is true for 75% of the well over forty
l a r g e r Upper Visby reefs which were observed there. Only two exceptions to
this rule have been observed. In the remaining little over 208 of the exposures,
there is no distinct difference in the dip of the two lateral boundaries between
reef limestone and stratified sediment.
An explanation for the observed asymmetry may be found if the angle
between the directions of the Upper Visby reef belt and the present coastal
cliff is taken into account (see p.82). This implies that the northeastern side
of the reef-limestone exposures is more related to the original seaward side
of the reef, and the southwestern side more to the original landward-directed
side. The east side of the reef was presumably i n direct contact with the open
s e a and received a constant supply of water rich in food and nutrient salts.
Reef expansion, therefore, will have been mainly in this direction, thus
causing the lateral reef boundary a t that side to r i s e over continuously
younger surrounding deposits. It is true that the seaward side of a reef is
also subject to the greatest demolition, but with the type of reefs such a s
those found in the Upper Visby Beds, which only protruded slightly above
their surroundings, this seems not to have significantly influenced horizontal
expansion. On the other hand, organisms detached from the reefs were
deposited mainly at the landward side. Those still alive then, came into
relatively more turbid and l e s s well-refreshed water. With reefs as these,
developing under marginal living conditions, this may, in several localities,
have been fatal for at least some of these detached reef builders, even though
other, non-reef -building organisms were able to maintain themselves at those
places.
A further good example of an asymmetrical reef, and one which rather
convincingly suggests that expansion of the Upper Visby reefs indeed took
place mainly in a seaward direction is the reef exposed about 0.6 km south-
west of Bl!i.htill. This reef i s about 4 m long and has a southwest side, about
3 m high, which is almost vertical and which interfingers slightly with a
narrow limestone mantle. Some stratified limestone is present also under-
neath the northeastern side of the reef, which rises at about 2 5 O over the
surrounding layers. The lowest point of the reef-limestone mass as a whole
is at the southwest. Reef expansion a s revealed by this section, seems to
have taken place only towards the northeast, in reality perhaps towards the
east, that is in the direction of the open sea.
The inverted-cone shape
In cases where both seaward and landward expansion of a reef took

place rather slowly, a reef-limestone mass developed in the shape of a n
inverted cone (Fig.21). In general the available data suggest that cone-shaped
r e e f s developed under somewhat l e s s favourable circumstances than lens-

shaped reefs, but under conditions more favourable than those for the knoll
reefs. Thus, for instance, the conical reefs a r e generally larger than the
knolls. On the other hand, the rocks of the inverted-cone reefs show a less-
distinct reef character than is general in the lens-shaped reefs.
From the various reefs with the shape of an inverted cone, two will be
selected a s examples.
The first example is the reef about 0.15 km northeast of the staircase
close to the southern boundary of the Visby shooting range, already mentioned
in the discussion of the general character of the reef limestone (p.83). In
cross-section, it shows a V-shape with a distinctly convex upper side. Its
maximum length and height are both about 2 . 5 m. Both the northeast and the
southwest side of the reef limestone rise outwards at an angle of about 55-60°
against the stratified sediments. The mantle of stratified limestone is some-
what more strongly developed at the southwest than at the northeast side of
the reef, but the difference is not great. With this mantle included, the reef
is about 7 m long. The general character of the reef limestone gives grounds
to the surmise that reef growth was not very prosperous (see p.83).
Another reef with the shape of an inverted cone is exposed about 0.1 km
northeast of Kneippbyn Fisklage. Its maximum height and length a r e about 4 m;
.g.21. Upper Visby reef with the shape of an inverted cone. Southern part
of the Hogklint. The reef is enclosed in the uppermost Upper Visby Beds and
the lowermost Hiigklint Beds. Internal stratification of the reef makes i t s
reef character somewhat vague, but a mantle of stratified limestone identifies
it, nevertheless, as a reef. At the top of the succession, Hogklint reef limestone
SHAPE O F THE REEFS 91
Fig.22. Upper Visby reef between Axelsro and Kneippbyn, a s seen from the
southeast. At its base a 2.25 m thick “attempt at reef growth”.
the southwest side is a little steeper than the northeast side; the upper side
is rather flat. The reef limestone is vaguely stratified. At both the northeast
and southwest side of the reef a well-developed mantle of stratified limestone
is present. The normal Upper Visby stratification sags underneath the reef.
If a reef with the shape of an inverted cone is cut through its periphery
by the present cliff, it may give the impression of being a large knoll reef.
Although the difference between such an exposure and a true knoll reef is
but slight, if only one cross-section is available, it remains useful to
restrict the indication “knoll reef“ within this stratigraphical unit to the
small reefs discussed in the beginning of this section.
An interesting exposure, showing a reef of r s a l intermediary position between
an inverted cone and an exceptionally large knoll shape is found about half-way between
Axelsro and Kneippbyn (Fig.22). This reef is rather large and well developed. Since it
92 THEUPPERVISBYREEFTYPE
i s exposed rather low in the cliff wall, it is reasonably accessible. It illustrates

formation under l e s s favourable conditions than s e e m s to have been the c a s e with large
reefs of a lenticular shape.
In the succession of stratified sediments underneath this reef, a portion about
1-1.5 m broad and 2.25 m thick i s present. This portion is very fossiliferous and
s e e m s to represent unsuccessful incipient reef growth. Most common a r e flat-
lenticular coral colonies (Favosites, Heliolitida, Halysites), whilst a few thin
stromatoporoid covers are also present. Of the characteristic interstratification of
the Upper Visby Beds, the marlstone layers generally continue through this part. though
often undulously. The limestone layers, however, a r e often interrupted by the occur-
rence of the fossil colonies, some of which appear not t o be in their orientation of
growth.
At the southwestern side of this "attempt at reef growth", the limestone layers
strongly increase in thickness. The marlstone layers, still present in the fossiliferous
p a r t discussed above, gradually disappear in a transition, about 1 m broad, which lies
between this fossiliferous p a r t and the complex of thickened limestone layers. This
transition is eroded t o a depth of about 0.5 m into the cliff wall, causing a shallow
niche (Fig.22). About 1.5 m towards the southwest, the limestone complex (right below
in Fig.22), passes again into the normal Upper Visby stratification. The thickened
limestone layers a r e very fossiliferous, especially with solitary corals and brachiopods,
but also with small coral colonies, a few thin stromatoporoid covers, crinoid remains
and bryozoan fragments. The presence t h e r e and the character of the limestone com-
plex may indicate that north of the niche still more coralliferous rock has been present.
Above the "attempt at reef growth'! there is the t r u e reef, about 6 m thick and
in the middle also about 6 m long. If the unsuccessful "attempt at reef growth" is
excluded, the shape of the reef is thus that of a large knoll. With the underlying
coralliferous rock included, it approaches r a t h e r the inverted-cone shape. A sur-
rounding mantle of hard, stratified limestone is present around the t r u e reef, but is
l e s s well developed than is often the case. Especially at the northeastern side, the reef
limestone may in some places lie directly against the normal Upper Visby sediments.
At the steeper southwestern side, the reef limestone interfingers with the mantle of
stratified limestone. At both sides of the reef, in i t s direct environment, several coral
colonies are found. These are not in their growth positions. The sediments there a r e
relatively r i c h e r in solitary c o r a l s than is the reef limestone. In the reef limestone,
by far the most coral colonies a r e in their orientations of growth, although some
colonies in oblique positions and upside down are also found. The matrix is very marly;
especially close to the margins, it shows some vague stratification; at several places
in the r e e f , it f o r m s m a r l pockets.
Compared t o the sediments lower in the cliff section, the stratified sediments
in the normal Upper Visby succession at the level of the r e e f , but which are at some
distance f r o m it, do not show distinct evidence of relative increase in the cumulative
thickness of the limestone layers. This i s in contrast to what has been found in the
environment of several other reefs, e.g., the two r e e f s near Fridhem (see the section
on specific levels of reef development, p.107) and the reefs south of the Visby shooting
range (see the section on the coastal cliff north of Kneippbyn, p.108). Such an increase
may point to a more general improvement of living conditions for limestone-forming
organisms. That such an increase in limestone deposition is lacking here is even more
remarkable when we realize that the reef is situated r a t h e r high in the Upper Visby
Beds. Presumably i t s top i s only about 2-3 m below the Upper Visby - Hogklint
boundary.
I@uence of the open sea
In the preceding paragraphs, emphasis has been laid on the influence of

the open s e a in explaining the shape of the reefs. To support this presumption,
two more examples will be discussed in this section. Both deal with two
SHAPE OF THE R E E F S 93
1 NE sw
I I
Fig.23. Two Upper Visby reefs, about 0.5 km southwest of the southern
Korpklint. The northeastern reef has probably been initiated by one o r more
reef builders washed off the southwestern reef.
inter-related reefs, of which the youngest in its relationship to the older reef
may show influence of the open sea.
The first example is found in the a r e a of the 'l'ofta Skjutfalt, about 0.5 km
southwest of the southern Korpklint (Fig.23). Two reefs r e s t here upon an
irregular limestone swelling. At the southwest side of the southwestern reef
there is a broad limestone mantle against the rather steep reef wall. In
between the two reefs there is an area, about 2 m long, which is also occupied
by stratified marly limestone. In this limestone, the layers dip away from the
southwestern reef, but towards the northeastern reef. This suggests that the
latter reef, which is smaller, started growth later than the southwestern reef.
Perhaps its growth was initiated by one o r more reef builders which were
loosened from the southwestern reef, but found a suitable place for further
development on the limestone mantle of this mother reef at its seaward side.
It is the only case of a kind of flank reef observed in the Visby Beds. At its
northeastern side, the younger reef also, is surrounded by a mantle of
stratified limestone.
The other example lies about 0.5 km northeast of Axelsro. There two
reefs a r e found, whereof part of the one closely overlies the other. The lower
one is small and possesses a very poorly developed limestone mantle (see
also the section on the limestone lateral to the reefs, p.104). A t its base, the
stratified limestone passes very gradually into the reef limestone.
Immediately above this reef, and also further northeast, there is an elongated,
solid complex of stratified fossiliferous limestone. It forms part of the lime-
stone mantle of the second reef. A section of the latter can be seen above
these limestone layers, which s a g slightly under the reef. This reef is much
larger than the lower reef; in the section, it shows a length of about 15 m.
Unfortunately, its top is no longer exposed, but it seems likely that the upper
side will have been rather flat.
There a r e no indications of a direct relationship between these two
reefs. Presumably they began their growth independently. Development of
the smaller, western reef may, however, soon have been hindered by that of
the other. This western reef is very marly. Together with the many flat-
lenticular reef builders, this causes some vague stratification. The second
reef, apparently, thrived much better. It probably developed in more direct
contact with open water. This may imply that the western reef became
continuously more screened, until it finally died and was covered by the lime-
stone mantle of the expanding eastern reef. This latter reef shows no sign of
an internal stratification, and i t s matrix is also comparatively l e s s marly.
Both examples may thus indicate that r e e f s which were i n direct contact
with the open s e a had greater vitality.
Exceptions to the rule
A s was mentioned earlier, two reefs have been observed south of Visby,
in which the steepest side was not the southwest side of the reef but the
northeast side. The first exception can be observed about 0.55 km northeast
of Axelsro, high in the coastal cliff. There a lens-shaped reef is found, which
is about 15 m long and 1-3.5 m thick. It shows large but dominantly flat-
lenticular reef builders and a very marly matrix, which, a s usual, occupies
quite a large volume. In between the reef builders, there a r e a number of
thin and undulous marly layers, some of which may be followed for more
than 1 m; they a r e relatively the most common in the lower part of the reef.
The reef also contains a few intercalations of stratified marly limestone.
Even compared with other Upper Visby reefs, this one is not a model of
vigorous reef growth. The greatest thickness of the reef limestone is found
relatively close to the northeastern side of the exposure. Towards the south-
west, the lower lateral boundary between stratified sediments and overlying
reef limestone gradually rises. This suggests that, although reef growth at
the seaside continued, horizontal expansion took place mainly in a southwest-
o r westerly direction, that is more coastwards than seawards.
The second exceptional case that should be mentioned here, is found i n
the cliff directly southwest of KneippbynFisklage. At that place, two reefs
are exposed next to each other in about an east-northeast - west-southwest
section. The maximum dimensions of the southern reef a r e about 3 m long
and 1 m thick. The east-northeastern boundary of this reef, with the under-
lying stratified sediment, r i s e s at about 60°, the west-southwestern boundary
I
Fig.24. The northern of the two reefs found in the coastal cliff southwest of
Kneippbyn Fisklage. The cross-section suggests that the centre of reef
growth gradually moved from the middle towards the west-southwest. There
is hardly any mantle of stratified marly limestone around this reef.
'
Conspicuous limestone layers are drawn. The remaining parts of the reef
surroundings a r e taken up by the normal Upper Visby alternation of layers i
of marly limestone and marlstone. I
DIMENSIONS OF THE REEFS 95
is approximately vertical and interfingers slightly with the stratified rocks.

This is all in agreement with the general picture. However, the northern reef
shows quite another picture (Fig.24). It is about 3 m long and 2 m high. The
deepest place in the reef base is about in the middle. The west-southwest
boundary is approximately vertical and interfingers slightly with the sur-
rounding sediments. At the other side, the stratified sediments soon regained
ground on the reef. The exposures thus suggest that following an initial
expansion, the living surface of the reef gradually became more and more
restricted to the west-southwestern part. These two Kneippbyn reefs are,
moreover, remarkable in the almost complete absence of a mantle of
stratified limestone. At the base and at the west-southwest side, a few
comparatively thicker limestone layers still occur, but at the east-northeast,
these are lacking, with the exception of a few at the very top. The reef lime-
stone is of the normal Upper Visby type.
Instead of a more or l e s s stationary reef growth at the landward side
and reef expansion at the seaward side, the latter reef and i t s enveloping
sediments thus reflect the l e s s vigorous situation of death and retreat at the
landward side and only stationary growth at the seaward side. The example
fits into the general picture as far as the relatively greatest vigour at the
seaward side is concerned, but differs from other reefs insofar that it was
the seaward boundary which, a s a consequence of the inability of the reef to
extend itself during most of i t s life, developed about vertically.
DIMENSIONS OF THE REEFS
As has already appeared from the examples described in the previous

pages, the dimensions of the Upper Visby reefs a r e generally modest. Many
knoll reefs a r e not much longer and thicker than 1 m. The largest lens-
shaped reefs are of up to about 15 m in length and 4-5 m in thickness.
Specimens with the shape of an inverted cone may have reached a maximum
thickness of little over 6 m. The average of all Upper Visby reefs may be
taken as 3-4 m in length and 2-3 m in thickness. These figures do not
include the dimensions of a number of generally large reefs, which began
their growth in Late Visby time, but reached their greatest extension during
the Hijgklint Period.
Since it has already been mentioned that lens-shaped reefs generally
occur higher in the Upper Visby Beds than the knoll reefs, the above figures
show an increase in the dimensions of the reefs upwards in the stratigraph-
ical succession. Relatively large reefs only occur high in the Upper Visby
Beds. Small reefs occur throughout the reef-carrying part of the Upper Visby
Beds, but are most common in the lowest part.
The following example, observed in the coastal cliff close to Kneippbyn, gives
an impression of how this increase in size may appear in the field.
Southwest of the Kneippbyn "Fisklage" (only a few small fishermens' barns), two
small reefs occur, which have already been mentioned at the end of the previous
section of this chapter. The reef limestone is exposed in a cross-section of about 2.4
and 2.0 m2, respectively.
Immediately underneath the fiskllge a third reef is exposed (Fig.25A). It shows
a faintly developed mantle of stratified limestone, is about 1 m thick, 1.5 m long and
has an exposed reef-limedone surface of about 1.2 m2. The southwest boundary of the
reef is about vertical. The northeast boundary is <-shaped; the reef limestone rising
Fig.25. Some of the Upper Visby r e e f s found near Kneippbyn Fisklage.

A. Small reef found underneath the fisklage. B. L a r g e r reef, about 15 m
northeast of the previous reef, photographed from the west-southwest. The
reef occurs in the protruding rock part and shows a mantle of stratified
limestone a t both sides. A swelling of marly limestone underneath the reef
sags somewhat under the p r e s s u r e of the latter; on the photograph, this is
partly hidden behind vegetation. C. Vague reef, found in between those in B
and D, resting upon a slight swelling of marly limestone above the hammer.
D. L a r g e r reef about 0.1 k m northeast of the fisklkige, seen from the west-
southwest; f o r comparison of s i z e see the hammer at the foot of the cliff.
The reefs of B and D a r e found a t a higher level in the Upper Visby Beds
than those of A and C, illustrating an increase i n reef s i z e upwards in the
suecession.
DISTINCTION BETWEEN REEF AND SURROUNDINGS 97
initially at an angle of ca. 25O outwards, and afterwards retreating at an angle of

about 35O.
A fourth reef is exposed about 15 m further northeast (Fig.25B). This one is
about 2 m long, 1.25 m thick and measures in cross-section about 2 m2. The reef
possesses a solid mantle of stratified limestone, at its base sagging under the reef
limestone, at its top arching over it.
After a small, indistinct reef, with a surface of less than 1 m2 (Fig.Z5C), a sixth
reef is encountered about 0.1 km northeast of Kneippbyn Fisklage (Fig.25D). It is
about 4 m long and thick and 9 m2 in the cross-section. At the northeast side a very-
well-developed mantle of stratified limestone is present, dipping reefwards; a
comparable mantle is present at the southwest side.
Of these six reefs, the first, second, third and fifth have their bases all at
about the same height in the Upper Visby Beds. The average surface of reef limestone
exposed per reef is less than 1.75 m2; none of them possesses a strongly developed
limestone mantle. The fourth and sixth both begin at a level, which is about 1m higher
than the previous level of reef initiation; of these two reefs, the one only slightly
exceeds the average size of the reefs of the lower level, the other one is considerably
larger; both show a well-developed limestone mantle.
A good example of greater geographical extension, which shows increase in reef

size upwards in the Upper Visby Beds, is found in the coastal cliff between Stavsklint
and Korpklint (Tofta Skjutfalt). About 0.2-0.3 km northeast of Stavsklint, six round
knoll reefs a r e found, on the average about 1 m in diameter. They occur close to
each other, with their bases at about the same level. A s a rule, they r e s t upon locally
thickened layers of harder, marly limestone. Moreover, a few other local limestone
swellings occur, which did not later lead to reef formation. The reef knolls a r e very
marly and show a vague stratification, which, however, cannot be correlated with the
alternation of layers in the surrounding stratified sediments.
A short distance southwest of these knolls, on a somewhat higher level, an
almost 3 m long, flat reef is exposed. At its base, stratified limestone is found, about
0.2 m thick, which is also present, in greater thickness, at the right and left side under
the reef. A few more reefs occur on this same level, northeast of the above-described
knoll reefs.
About 0.5-0.35 km southwest of the southern Korpklint, five relatively large
Upper Visby reefs occur within a distance of about 150 m; their maximum length is 6 m,
and maximum thickness is 5 m. Four of them have their base at more or less the
same level. This third level i s in its turn about 1 m higher in the Upper Visby Beds
than the second. The basis of the four reefs is now about 9 m above sea level. The
growth of the fifth and smallest of these reefs started at a level about 2 m lower.
Because of selective Quaternary erosion, the reefs protrude a s humps from the cliff.
DISTINCTION BETWEEN R E E F LIMESTONE AND STRATIFIED SEDIMENTS
Although the majority of Upper Visby reefs a r e easily recognizable,

there are also cases where it is more difficult to distinguish between the
stratified sediments and the reef limestone of the Upper Visby Beds. South
of Visby, this especially applies to reef-like formations in the lowermost
2 m of the reef-carrying part of the Upper Visby succession. Thus it is
doubtful whether a few reef -like formations appearing between the Korpklint
(southwest of Hogklint, Vgsterhejde Parish) and the Korpklint (at the
northern boundary of the Tofta Skjutfalt) represent fossil reefs o r not.
A good example is a small reef -like formation about 1 km south-southwest
of the northern of these two Korpklintar, the Vasterhejde Korpklint. In
general appearance, there is only a slight difference from the stratified
sediments. The voluminous marly matrix in places gives r i s e to a vague
stratification. However, the succession of marlstone and limestone found in
98 THE UPPER VISBY R E E F TYPE
Fig.26. Upper Visby reef a t the south-southwest side of Hogklint.
the stratified sediments does not continue through the reef -like formation.
Moreover, a few limestone layers sag slightly under i t o r a r c h over it.
Type and colour of weathering in the reef-like formation are about the same
as those in the stratified sediments.
Such resemblance in weathering and colour with the surroundings is
also found in several other reef-like formations. In fact, the interruption in
the normal stratification - or, if the formation shows a vague stratification,
the lack of correlation between this and the normal stratification - and the
relatively higher number of coral colonies, are the only indications that the
reef -like formations in question presumably represent elementary reefs.
A s will be discussed in the next section, reef growth was often preceded
by a gradual improvement of the environmental conditions, resulting in the
deposition of a local complex of stratified marly limestone o r varying
thickness. This limestone may be overlaid by a reef. Sometimes the remains
of an unsuccessful attempt at reef development a r e found on top of a lime-
stone swelling. Some examples a r e found in the environment of Axelsro. In
places above a local swelling of limestone, which may o r may not bend
slightly downwards, more coral colonies a r e present than elsewhere in the
surrounding sediments. Halysites spp. often play a major part, but often
other genera also are present, whereas even stromatoporoids may contribute.
Failure of reef growth can be established from the continuation of the Upper
Visby stratification through these rock parts, albeit sometimes with a thinning
of the marlstone layers. Exposures like these show that even the criteria for
reef growth, given in the preceding paragraph, have to be used with care and
only in combination with each other.
LIMESTONE UNDERNEATH THE REEFS 99
Although indistinct reef-like formations, as discussed in the f i r s t paragraph of

this section, are generally found in the lowermost p a r t of the reef-carrying p a r t of the
Upper Visby Beds, some also occur higher up. T h i s i s illustrated south-southwest of
Hogklint. A reef exposed there is vaguely stratified, strongly marly and shows the
shape of an inverted cone. It has developed so late during the Late Visby Period that
its uppermost p a r t is found surrounded by H6gklint sediments. The Upper Visby
deposits p a s s , close t o the reef, into thicker layers of hard, marly limestone. Both
this limestone and the Hogklint limestone on top of i t , terminate mainly against the
reef, o r partly bend under it o r over it. Directly south of this reef, a second one is
present, with its base still a little higher in the Upper Visby Beds (Fig.26). This reef
is somewhat smaller and more lens-shaped. Also this reef has a voluminous marly
matrix and is vaguely stratified. It r e s t s upon a small swelling of stratified limestone.
Laterally of it, hardly any limestone mantle i s present; the reef limestone i s bound
almost directly by the normal Upper Visby sediments. The top of the reef i s sur-
rounded by Hogklint limestone.
The poor development of these reefs may presumably have been caused by the
presence of one o r more other r e e f s , which were more to seaward and which
influenced their environment.
In all c a s e s mentioned above, a high content of m a r l contributed to a vague

stratification in certain reefs. One r e e f , however, is a notable exception to the rule.
It is exposed at the foot of Stavsklint (Tofta Skjutfalt), some tens of m e t r e s northeast
of the southwestern end of this cliff. In a large p a r t of the section, this reef shows
some stratification, caused not by m a r l but by a high content of stratified limestone
of a character s i m i l a r t o that of the sediment which forms the mantle around the reef.
The reef builders occur in between these short limestone layers, sometimes as
isolated colonies, usually in heaps together, corals, stromatoporoids and bryozoans
intermingled. The uppermost limestone layers show some arching. Because of the
close connection between stratified limestone and reef limestone, the exact dimensions
of the reef are difficult t o determine; i t s length is about 4 m , i t s thickness 2-3 m.
The upper side of the reef is still about 9 m below the boundary between the Upper
Visby and Hsgklint Bedb.
LIMESTONE UNDERNEATH THE REEFS
The development of the Upper Visby reefs only became possible after
a local change in the environmental conditions had taken place, which was
favourable for the potential reef -building organisms. This involved a
relative increase in the deposition of marly limestone in such localities, at
the cost of the marlstone.
A s was already mentioned in passing, in the previous section of this
chapter, many Upper Visby reefs came to r e s t in this manner over one o r
more thick (generally 10 or more cm) and local layers of'hard, marly
limestone. Whereas, however, such limestone swellings needed to be
mentioned earlier in order to be better able to interpret that which was found
on top of them, a few pages will now be devoted to these limestone deposits
themselves.
The local improvement in environmental conditions causing the lime-
stone swellings did not always last long enough to lead to effective reef
growth. In several places within the Upper Visby Beds, local lenses of hard,
marly limestone which a r e not covered by reefs, can be seen. Sometimes
such a limestone swelling, comprising one o r more layers, occurs rather
isolated in a section. In other cases, some swellings are found above each
other, each passing over a short distance again into the normal Upper Visby
alternation of layers of marly limestone and marlstone, which may thereupon
Reef Limestone
Stratified limestone THE UPPER VISBY REEF TYPE

MarL
Coral colony
Fig.27. Detailed section, showing the Upper Visby interstratification under-

neath an Upper Visby reef of about 2 m long and 1 m thick. Note the increase
in (marly) limestone towards the base of the reef. The numbers indicate
thicknesses of the successive l a y e r s in centimetres. About 0.2 k m south-
southwest of Stavsklint (Tofta SkjutfHt). (After Manten, 1962, fig.6.)
LIMESTONE UNDERNEATH THE REEFS 101
be followed by another limestone lens. There a r e also examples where two

o r more swellings occur side by side, a s local thickenings of what a r e else-
where not very typical, thin layers of the usual marly limestone.
Examples of such local limestone lenses a r e well-exposed in, among
other places, the higher parts of the Upper Visby Beds at Axelsro. The high
fossil content points to a mainly organogenic formation. Generally brachiopods
and solitary corals dominate, but compound corals a r e also found. However,
the difference in the conditions under which formation of the normal Upper
Visby sediments took place was only gradual, since coral colonies occur also
in the normal Upper Visby succession. The larger ones (up to 20 cm in
horizontal section and generally between 1 and 10 cm thick) though a r e
usually either fully enclosed, o r have only their bases, i n a fossiliferous
layer of marly limestone within the succession of strata. Apparently a richer
development of solitary organisms was often a good preparation for the
development of compound potential reef builders.
Some of the local limestone accumulations represent a kind of
transitional form towards what has e a r l i e r been called "attempts at reef
building which failed". Thus, slightly more than 0.5 km southwest of Blghall,
some swellings of vaguely-bedded, very fossiliferous limestone a r e found,
which a r e on the average 0.5 m thick and not quite 1 m long. They a r e
roughly semi-globular, with the convex side downwards. The underlying
sediments sag slightly under the limestone swellings.
The improvement in environmental conditions which can be deduced from the
cliff closely southwest of Blhhall, continued somewhat further. High in this cliff, in
three places, a very local swelling of layers of hard limestone can be observed. In
each of the three occurrences, the l a y e r s together have a thickness of about 2 m . The
fossil content consists predominantly of brachiopods and solitary c o r a l s , with in
between these a number of coral colonies. In the lower p a r t s of the swellings, the
limestone layers are separated by thin layers of marlstone, some of which distinctly
a r c h over the limestone. On top of the limestone swellings, in each of the three c a s e s ,
a small accumulation of true reef builders is found; they a r e predominantly rather
flat f o r m s , and a r e separated by marlstone. Within the accumulations t h e r e is no
stratification. Immediately above the accumulations, the normal Upper Visby
alternation continues. Reef development, thus, only lasted a very short time.
T h e r e a r e many examples where the limestone thickenings a r e overlaid by r e a l
reefs. At this place, a reef exposed about 0.2 km south-southwest of Stavsklint has
been selected. It is about 2 m long and 1 m thick. Hard limestone is found both at its
base and on i t s sides. The latter rock is restricted to the direct environment of the
reef. At a very short distance from the reef, the limestone l a y e r s already s t a r t
decreasing in thickness. Marlstone begins t o occur in between the l a y e r s , and over
a distance of some m e t r e s the deposit passes into the normal Upper Visby alternation.
Some of the limestone layers continue as thin layers of marly limestone within the
stratified succession; the majority of the layers thin out entirely.
In view of the fact that reef development was preceded by an improve-

ment in the local conditions, it would be interesting to know how far down in
the sedimentary succession this local change in environmental conditions
f i r s t began to make itself perceptible. In this connection, the thicknesses of
the alternating layers of hard, marly limestone and of marlstone directly
underneath the above-mentioned reef south-southwest of Stavsklint were
measured (Fig.27). It is clear that upwards, towards the reef, the limestone
layers began increasingly to dominate over the layers of softer, generally
thinly foliating marlstone. Some of the higher limestone layers a r e already
102 THE UPFER VISBY R E E F TYPE
rich in coral colonies, up to 20 cm long. The majority of these are in their

orientation of growth, a few a r e upside down. The shape of the colonies varies
f r o m rather flat to almost globular. If from the reef limestone downwards,
the total thickness of the limestone layers for each successive 25 cm i s
counted, the following figures a r e obtained from the section shown i n Fig.27:
25, 23, 19, 15.5, 15, 14.5, 17.5, 13.5. F o r this part of the Upper Visby Beds,
a ratio of 15 cm marly limestone/lO cm marlstone may be considered as
being normal in localities where there are no reefs. It therefore appears
that the improvement in local environmental conditions, which finally
resulted i n reef growth, started when the sediments some 75-80 cm under-
neath the reef were laid down.
In a number of cases, several reefs within a certain length of coastal
cliff (up to a few hundreds of metres) a r e seen to have started growth at
about the same level. This level, then, is characterized by the presence of
limestone layers which are thicker than the average at that height in the
Upper Visby succession. Underneath the reefs these layers a r e often even
more thickened. With the aid of coloured-chalk markings, such levels can
easily be traced in the field. The greater dominance of the limestone layers
can, from time to time, be checked by determining the total limestone
thickness per 25 cm, as was done in the above example. The level on which
the increase in limestone started, appears from such counts to fluctuate
somewhat. Underneath reefs the increase in limestone deposition generally
began from one to a few decimetres lower. Some examples of reefs which
started growth more o r l e s s simultaneously will be given in a later section
of this chapter.
It should be noted h e r e that the development of reefs which started at
the same level, did not end at the same time, not even within a restricted
area. Some reefs reached a thickness of less than 1 m, others a r e several
metres thick and some even continue until well into the Hijgklint Beds.
Reef development in Late Visby time was not always preceded by
preliminaries of such long duration as is reflected by the local limestone
swellings o r the development of a substratum zone of larger extension.
There a r e also Upper Visby reefs which a r e hardly underlaid by extra-thick
limestone. They apparently represent cases where soon after an improve-
ment of local conditions began, an early attempt at reef building was already
successful.
A s most reefs a r e surrounded by a mantle of stratified limestone (for details
see the next section of this chapter), the possibility that some exposures show a very
peripheral section through a reef should also be taken into account. In such a section,
a lens of stratified limestone seen underneath the reef limestone is in fact a deposit
formed laterally to an older p a r t of that reef. The number of c a s e s in which reef
growth was preceded by increased limestone deposition may, therefore, be somewhat
less than one would think when working in the field.
LIMESTONE LATERAL TO THE REEFS
A s already mentioned above, increased limestone deposition, a s

compared to a r e a s without reefs, also took place laterally to many Upper
Visby reefs. An example was already given in the previous section - the
reef about 0.2 km south-southwest of Stavsklint. Especially at the southwest
side of the reefs (which because of the general orientation of the coastal
LIMESTONE LATERAL T O THE R E E F S 103
cliff a r e usually sectioned in a northeast - southwest direction) this lime-

stone deposit is often found to be well developed. At the northeast side, a s
exposed, the limestone mantle is generally thinner, especially with the
smaller reefs. Overlying the reefs a local limestone zone is found in some
cases only. Otherwise, there is the normal Upper Visby alternation of marly
limestone and marlstone. A cover of limestone is present mainly i n those
reefs, which end relatively close to the Upper Visby - Hogklint boundary,
e.g., the three reefs of Snackgardsbaden. In an upward direction the limestone
of such a reef cover becomes more-thinly stratified.
The limestone lateral to the reefs is, for instance, clearly developed
around the two reefs found about 0.15 km south of Axelsro, and mentioned
already a s examples of the shape of the Upper Visby reefs (p.87). Here also,
more stratified limestone is present at the exposed southwest side than at
the northeast side or even underneath the reefs. Only a very few marlstone
layers alternate with the limestone. Southwest of the more southern of these
two reefs, the limestone can be followed, i n a total thickness of almost 2 m,
over a distance of more than 10 m. In one place it is even developed as a kind
of transition form between the reef -surrounding stratified limestone and the
reef limestone. Southwest of the more northerly of the two reefs (Fig.20),
the stratified limestone, about 2 m thick, extends over a distance of about
7 m to near the southern reef. The normal succession of Upper Visby
sediments sags under the reef -surrounding limestone, though less than under
the reef limestone.
In the majority of cases, the stratified-limestone mantle of Upper Visby
r e e f s is no more than a few metres wide (also a t the southwest side of the
reefs), and it is often even narrower.
Like the stratified limestone found underneath several reefs, the lime-
stone lateral to the reefs is almost always very fossiliferous. Solitary corals
and brachiopods a r e abundant and there a r e also several compound corals,
bryozoans and crinoid remains, and some stromatoporoids. In a general way,
this limestone can be compared to the stratified limestone with reef debris
and crinoids which is found around reefs of Hoburgen type. The latter,
however, take up much more space around those reefs, particularly the
crinoid limestones. This may be connected with the generally larger size of
the Hoburgen-type reefs and also with the much more abundant crinoid
development around them. Although in the higher parts of the Upper Visby
Beds, and particularly in the reef-surrounding limestones, an increase in the
number of crinoid remains can be noted, nowhere the crinoids notably out-
number the other fossils. None of the Upper Visby reefs possesses a crinoid
limestone around its higher parts which, in any way, could be compared to
that around many of the younger reefs in the a r e a of Gotland (e.g., "Hoburg
marble", "Karlso marble").
A s was also mentioned earlier, in some cases of rather vague reefs,
the presence of a limestone mantle may help to characterize such a marly
and somewhat-stratified formation a s a fossil reef. An example is found i n
the southern part of the HSgklint cliff (Fig.21). The very-marly matrix of
this reef shows a faint stratification, which, however, does not correlate
with the stratification in the normal Upper Visby succession of limestone
and marlstone layers, a s found in the close vicinity. The reef is bound from
these sediments at both sides by a narrow mantle of marly limestone, which
is distinctly stratified and very fossiliferous.
The differences in the amounts of stratified limestone as found
104 THE U P P E R VISBY R E E F T Y P E
southwest and northeast of the exposed reefs may probably be explained i n a

similar way a s the asymmetrical shape of most of the reefs (p.89). A s was
shown there the northeast side of the exposures may give an impression of
the situation that existed at the side directed more towards the open sea,
whereas the southwest side of the exposures may represent the situation
more as it developed at the landward-directed side of the growing reefs.
There is a second indication in support of this explanation. The cliff
coast about 0.1 km north-northeast of Stavsklint has an orientation about
north-northeast - south-southwest. Three large Upper Visby reefs a r e
exposed there. Both underneath and on both sides of the northern of these
three reefs, much more surrounding stratified limestone is found than around
the other two reefs. To judge from the present local situation,.most of the
reef limestone of the northern reef is still hidden in the cliff. The exposure
thus gives an impression of the situation at the west side of the reef, and
thereby suggests that at this west side, during reef development the strongest
limestone deposition took place; this was at that time the landward side of
the reef.
An indication that the least limestone deposition took place at the
original seaward-directed side of the reefs, is probably presented by a
small and comparatively vague reef, exposed about 0.5 km northeast of
Axelsro. It r e s t s over a thick layer of limestone. A small cave is present at
the southwest side. In the cave it can be seen that at the lateral and upper
sides of the southern part of the reef limestone, only a thin mantle of marly
limestone is present, rapidly passing into the normal alternation of marl-
stone and marly limestone. These rocks also bound the reef at the northeast
side.
In the few cases in which there a r e no signs of extra amounts of lime-
stone around a reef, one should be cautious in deciding that these represent
possible sections through the east-southeastern periphery of the reef. The
angle between the direction of the present section and that of the coast line
at the time of formation of the reef should also be taken into account. If this
angle is not rather small, the exposure cannot solely represent the original
seaward side of the reef. Other factors must also have played a part.
A s a general rule (but one that has exceptions), it can be said that the
limestone mantle has developed most strongly in those cases where the
environmental conditions for the growth of the reef itself also seem to have
been most favourable. This holds for the succession from the oldest to the
youngest reefs found within the Upper Visby Beds, but also where, within one
level, very distinct and vaguely developed reefs alternate. Under favourable
conditions a reef probably r o s e more rapidly to well over its surroundings,
with the result that it was also more subjected to the demolishing forces of
the water. The presence of the reefs may have caused increased water
turbulence, preventing part of the terrigenous debris from settling. At the
same time, under favourable conditions a reef occupied a larger a r e a and
thus contained a greater quantity of reef builders and consequently also a
greater quantity of potential reef debris. And, fourthly, the more favourable
environmental conditions may also have attracted many organisms to live in
the direct environment of the reef.
A s is usual with stratified sediments around a reef, those around the
Upper Visby reefs also often a r c h somewhat over, and sag somewhat under
the reefs. The main causes of this a r e the effects of greater r a t e s of development
on the reef, compaction of the stratified rocks at the side of the reefs and depres-
sion of those beneath due to the weight of the reefs.
SYNCHRONOUSLY STARTED R E E F GROWTH 105
SPECIFIC LEVELS O F R E E F DEVELOPMENT
In some localities in the coastal cliff examples can be found of reefs

which apparently started growth at more o r l e s s the same time.
The part of the coastal cliff which s t a r t s about 0.2 km northeast of
Stavsklint will be considered as a f i r s t illustration of this phenomenon.
The first occurrence oPreef limestone found there, belongs to a reef,
about 3 m long, and flat. Its lowest exposed part r e s t s over a succession,
about 20 cm thick, of some layers of hard limestone. A comparable rock, in
greater thicknesses, is also present right and left of the reef centre, under-
neath the lateral parts of the reef.
Directly northeast of this reef, the f i r s t occurrence is found of six reef-
like, round knolls, with an average diameter of just over 1 m. They follow
shortly after each other, all at about the same level in the cliff wall and
NE
EZl marlstone
Fig.28. Distribution of marlstone and limestone layers underneath and
lateral of the northern one of the two Upper Visby reefs, which a r e found
near Fridhem, northeast of Hjgklint.
106 THE UPPERVISBYREEFTYPE
underneath aside the 1.75m south underneath aside the 1.75m south
the reef reef of the reef the reef mf of the reef
Fig.29. Graphical representation of the total thickness of the limestone layers

p e r successive units of 25 c m (left) and 10 c m (right) in vertical successions
underneath and l a t e r a l to the northern Upper Visby reef, found n e a r Fridhem,
northeast of Hogklint. See a l s o Fig.28. Both s e t s of graphs present the s a m e
picture. Working with 25 c m units emphasizes somewhat m o r e the general
trend, by eliminating s o m e fluctuations.
somewhat lower than the level a t which the first-named reef occurs. The
knolls p o s s e s s a strongly marly m a t r i x and show a vague stratification,
which, however, cannot be correlated with the stratification found in the
surrounding stratified sediments. The knolls mainly r e s t upon one o r m o r e
thick l a y e r s of hard, marly limestone. T h e r e are also s o m e platforms of
this limestone, generally a few m e t r e s long, that occur a t the s a m e level,
but on top of which no reefs developed.
Going further north, the level of preference, on which the s i x reef knolls
SPECIFIC LEVELS OF R E E F DEVELOPMENT 107
started growth, disappears again as such. Some reefs found there are vague
and, with one exception, have their bases at a higher level.
In order to gain some understanding of how specific levels of reef

growth originated, a second example is still to be mentioned.
Near Fridhem, north of Hagklint, two small Upper Visby reefs occur,
with a distance of about 7.5 m in between them. They both r e s t over the same
layer of marly limestone, which thickens to 10-20 cm underneath the reefs,
but in between the reefs is only 3 cm thick and does not differ there from the
other layers of marly limestone which occur in the Upper Visby Beds (Fig.28).
The reefs are small in size. The southern one is at a maximum 1 m long and
thick, the northern one is a t a maximum 1 m long and 0.75 m thick. Both
show the normal characteristics of the Upper Visby reefs.
Some sections were measured in the vicinity of these reefs. On the
basis of the thicknesses measured, the contribution of the limestone layers
to each successive 25 cm was calculated and the same was done for each
successive 10 cm. The results a r e shown in Fig.29; both graphs present the
same picture. Underneath the reef, the limestone layers together take up
about 65% of the total section. The thickened limestone layer below the reef
again represents an improvement in the environmental conditions, which at
a certain moment made reef growth possible. This improvement i n conditions
can also be traced in the environment of the reef, but began there at a later
stage. It f i r s t became clear there at the level at which reef building started.
At the height of the reef, the limestone layers in the reef environment take
up about 75% of the total succession of strata. A temporary increase i n marl
deposition is represented by a marlstone layer, about 4 cm thick, not far
below the top of the northernmost of the two reefs. Such a thick marlstone
layer is rather unusual at this height i n the Upper Visby Beds. It is not
impossible that this increased supply of terrigenous debris caused the death
of the northern reef, o r of both reefs. Above the reefs, a ratio of the
cumulative thicknesses of the limestone layers against those of the marlstone
layers of 3/1 is restored again. The steepness of the cliff wall prevented
detailed measuring. About 3 m above the base of the reefs, the boundary
between Upper Visby and Hogklint Beds is exposed.
The comparatively thick limestone layer underneath the reef, together
with the distinct increase in the amount of limestone at some distance from
the relatively small reef, are clear indications that the greater deposition
of limestone cannot be attributed to the reef and the debris which i t produced,
but represents a r e a l alteration of the environmental conditions.
The differences in the height within the Upper Visby section, at which
the increase in limestone formation is notable f o r the f i r s t time, suggest
that the improvement in conditions started locally and spread from there
over the direct environment. Reef growth occurred particularly at those
places where the improvement in environmental conditions was strongest
Generally, these were also the places where the improvement of the
environment f i r s t started. If these places were very local, the growth of
adjacent reefs started a t different levels; if the environmental alteration
involved a somewhat larger area, more reefs could s t a r t growth at about he
same level.
108 THE UPPER VISBY REEF TYPE
THE COASTAL CLIFF NORTH OF KNEIPPBYN
Good examples of Upper Visby reefs a r e found north of Kneippbyn (about 3.7 km
southwest of Visby). They illustrate several of the phenomena described in the previous
pages.
F r o m Kneippbyn Fisklage northwards, a few reefs can first be seen, which have
already been described in the section on the dimensions of the Upper Visby reefs (pp.95-97).
T h e r e i s no particular reason to describe the five lens-shaped reefs which follow next.
The t e r r i t o r y of a shooting range soon follows. The reefs to be dealt with h e r e a r e
found in the environment of the boundary between the f r e e beach and the shooting range.
About 25 m southwest of this boundary a small reef is exposed, which is the only
Upper Visby reef in which stromatoporoids dominate. bcluding the stratified limestone
a t its base, this reef is in i t s centre about 0.9 m long and about 0.7m thick (Fig.30).
The base occurs about 4 m above present sea level. The succession s t a r t s with a
horizontal, 12 cm-thick layer of hard limestone which consists, for a very substantial
part, of brachiopods and solitary tetracorals. This layer is overlaid by a marlstone
one, 3 cm thick. On top of this, a lens of limestone occurs, which i s 40 cm long and in
its centre 5 cm thick, and again very fossiliferous. Over the lens a layer of marlstone
follows, on the average about 2.5 c m thick. On top of this layer, six large
stromatoporoids are present, of a semi-globular shape, on the average 75 c m long and
in their centre 1 0 c m thick. These stromatoporoids cover each other in a kind of right-
left alternation, and a r e separated by layers of marlstone, generally l e s s than 1 cm
thick. The lowermost stromatoporoids have settled upon solitary corals; except for
the lower side, they envelop these corals almost entirely. Also an occasional Eavosites
colony, only a few centimetres l a r g e , is completely surrounded by one of the lower
stromatoporoids. In between the stromatoporoids some colonies of Heiiolites are
Fig.30. The only Upper Visby reef in which stromatoporoids play a dominant
part. North of Kneippbyn.
THE COASTAL CLIFF NORTH OF KNEIPPBYN 109
5 10 15 20cm
Fig.31. Graphical representation of the cumulative thickness of the layers of

marly limestone per successive units of 10 cm (left) and 20 cm (right); about
7 . 5 m southwest of the stromatoporoid reef of Fig.30. Although the succession
is seemingly a normal Upper Visby section, the levels on which reef growth
started can be well distinguished. The development of the stromatoporoid
reef was preceded by a long improvement in local conditions. The * horizon
corresponds to the 12 cm-thick limestone layer underneath that reef.
A temporary increase in m a r l deposition (**) probably caused the death of
this small reef. Soon conditions became more favourable again and the
*** horizon corresponds to the beginning of the limestone thickenings
underneath the reef directly northeast of the stromatoporoid reef. The three
special horizons can be followed over several tens of metres. The other
limestone layers all thin out after a shorter distance and other ones appear.
The total general picture of the ratio between the thickness of the marlstone
and limestone layers, however, remains the same.
present in the reef. Upon the margins and the top of the reef, some compound corals
and some solitary corals have settled.
The stratified Upper Visby sediments underneath the above-described succession
show no signs of sagging. Laterally, the layers surrounding the lower 20 cm of the
reef come to a dead end against it. The higher layers dip upwards against the reef,
with an increasing angle, which is at the maximum 4 5 O . The uppermost surrounding
layers arch over the reef. Only 20 cm above the reef the normal, horizontal
stratification is restored. In the stratified rocks closely above the reef, relatively
many coral colonies a r e present.
110 THE UPPER VISBY R E E F TYPE
A layer of limestone, 5 c m thick, which is very rich in brachiopods and solitar)

c o r a l s , i s found at the southwest side of the reef, about half-way up. Apart from this
layer, there a r e no extra amounts of limestone to surround the reef laterally. The
boundary between reef and stratified sediments shows a similar pattern at both sides.
At about the height of the top of the stromatoporoid reef, just over 1 m further
northeast, the f i r s t of a succession of locally-thickening limestone layers i s found.
The succession reaches a thickness of 0.5 m . The thickened limestone layers a r e
separated by m a r l l a y e r s of 1-3 mm thick. On top of the local limestone deposit, a
reef i s exposed about 1.5 m long and less than 1 m thick. It i s , unfortunately, mainly
hidden behind recent s c r e e . The southwestern boundary of this reef lies above the
stromatoporoid reef, described before. Both at the southwest and the northeast side
of the reef a well-developed limestone mantle is present, but the one a t the northwest
side thins out much m o r e gradually. Similar to the limestone layers underneath the
reef, the layers of the mantle in the northeast a r e knobby and rugged and very
fossiliferous (many compound and solitary corals and brachiopods). The m a r l layers
in between the limestone l a y e r s a r e thin, 1-3 m m , particularly those close to the reef.
About 5 m southwest of the stromatoporoid r e e f , and with its base at the same
level, there i s an unsuccessful attempt a t reef building, which is about 0.75 m wide and
thick. At the base there is a limestone layer, locally thickened to about 8 cm. Also a
number of limestone l a y e r s show an increase in thickness there. Some c o r a l colonies
are present; slightly higher in the section there are even quite a number of them, up
to 15 c m in horizontal diameter and up to 8 c m thick. The layers of marlstone continue,
Fig.32. Upper Visby reef in the coastal cliff north of Kneippbyn, about 25 m
north of the southern boundary of the Visby shooting range. At the base of
the reef the normal Upper Visby interstratification of marly limestone and
marlstone. Stratified limestone occurs l a t e r a l to the reef. This limestone is
best developed a t the southwest s i d e (at the right on the photograph). (After
Manten, 1962, fig.4.)
THE COASTAL CLIFF NORTH OF KNEIPPBYN 111
Fig.33. Upper Visby reef, north of Kneippbyn, in the south of the Visby
shooting range. The reef shows a well-developed limestone deposit a t i t s
southwest side, gradually passing into the normal Upper Visby inter-
stratification of m a r l y limestone and marlstone. (After Manten, 1962, fig.5.)
albeit thinner, around the fossils o r arching over them. Although their number and
thickness decrease upwards, the locality could not fully differentiate itself from the
normal sedimentation pattern of the Upper Visby Beds.
In the section exposed at a distance of about 7.5 m southwest of the
stromatoporoid reef, the ratio of the amounts of marlstone and marly limestone was
measured (Fig.31). The picture obtained gives an average of about 7 c m of limestone
p e r unit of 10 c m thickness. This section is reasonably representative of the Upper
Visby Beds as exposed in the coastal cliff in this area.
Directly north of the southern boundary of the shooting range, a reef, about 1 m
long and thick is exposed. The limestone mantle of this reef is especially well
developed a t i t s northeast side, which is an exception to the general rule. The reef
started growth during the f i r s t improvement in environmental conditions shown in Fig.31.
About 25 m over the boundary of the shooting range, near a staircase which i s
built against the cliff wall, a reef i s present which has maximum dimensions of about
5 m long and 4 m thick (Pig.32). It started development a t about the same level as the
stromatoporoid reef. Underneath the reef there is hardly any extra limestone. The reef
mantle of local limestone layers i s more strongly developed a t the southwe.st than a t
the northeast side. At both sides the boundary between reef limestone and surrounding
stratified sediments r i s e s outwards at an angle of about 6 0 ° . The reef i s built mainly
by compound corals. In comparison with other Upper Visby r e e f s , it is somewhat more
unorgani'zed, with a greater number of colonies which lie obliquely o r upside down.
In between the above and the next major reef, a small reef i s exposed, at about
the level of the stromatoporoid reef. It possesses a r a t h e r well-developed mantle of
limestone l a y e r s , separated by very thin layers of marlstone.
112 THE UPPER VISBY REEF TYPE
About 50 m past the s t a i r c a s e , the next Upper Visby reef i s exposed (Fig.33).
The reef is comparatively large for this reef type. It clearly belongs to the second
level of reef development. In between the predominantly flat reef builders, mainly
compound c o r a l s , several s m a l l pockets of very thinly stratified m a r l are found.
Against the southwest boundary of the r e e f , which is very steep and in the upper part
almost vertical, a zone of stratified limestone, a t the minimum 2.5 m wide, i s present.
The northeastern reef boundary, which r i s e s at an angle of about 25O outwards over
the stratified sediments, also has a mantle of stratified limestone, which is on the
average 1.5 m wide, and particularly well developed against the lower half of the reef.
At both sides the layers of the limestone mantle dip slightly towards the reef, caused
by subsidence of the entire complex of reef and reef mantle in the normal Upper Visby
deposits. The limestone layers therein a r e l e s s thickened underneath the reef than
under many other r e e f s of this type.
Following three small, vague reefs, another l a r g e r reef is found about 75 m past
the above mentioned. Also this one started growth in the second level. It i s found
slightly lower in the present cliff wall than the previous reef, but this i s caused by a
sagging, here even stronger, of the entire Upper Visby Beds under the p r e s s u r e of the
reef and its surrounding sediments. The reef is about 4 m thick, and i s about 5 m long
without the surrounding limestone mantle, and about 10 m long with it.
Especially at the southwest side of the reef quite a l a r g e amount of limestone is
present, measuring about 4 m in thickness, with a width of about 2 m a t the base and
about 4 m at the top. In between the limestone layers of the mantle practically no marl-
stone layers a r e present. At a height of 2-3 m above the base of the reef a notable
zone, about 1 m thick, i s present in the reef surroundings. In this zone several thick
limestone layers extend much further southwestwards than the actual limestone mantle
of the reef. At a distance of 7 m away f r o m the r e e f , several can still be clearly
recognized as extra-thick l a y e r s , but they gradually become thinner and the Upper
Visby interstratification of limestone and marlstone regains more and more its normal
appearance. At the height of the uppermost m e t r e of reef limestone such long, thickened
limestone layers a r e l e s s common.
Below the deepest p a r t of the reef, limestone layers a r e present to a total
thickness of about 0.5 m , with in between them a few thin marlstone layers. Northeast-
wards, this basal limestone complex increases to an average thickness of about 1 m
and a local maximum of 1.5 m. Southwestwards underneath the reef, the increase is
even stronger (up t o 2 m) and the marlstone l a y e r s disappear there almost completely.
The boundary of the reef limestone at the northeast side r i s e s for the lowermost
1.5 m of reef thickness over the stratified limestone with an angle of about 6 0 ° ; the
angle d e c r e a s e s further upwards t o a s little as 15", after which it increases rapidly
again. The southwest boundary is much steeper, being about 65O in the lowermost
m e t r e and upwards f r o m there about vertical. Also the boundary between the limestone
mantle and the more normal Upper Visby succession is steeper a t the southwest side
(about 60" outwards, without considering h e r e the zone with the extended limestone
layers a t 2-3 m above the reef base) than at the northeast side (about 30O). The upper
surface of the reef is faintly convex.
The reef about 0.15 km northeast of the staircase has already been discussed
e a r l i e r in this chapter, as an example of the inverted-cone shape (p.90) and as one
illustrating the general character of the reef limestone (p.83). P a s t this reef there a r e
only two vague reef-like developments. The beach then is interrupted by a coastal a r e a
in which the s e a directly bounds the coastal cliff.
THE REEFS NORTH OF VISBY
The reefs which a r e exposed north of Visby, particularly along the

coast, present relatively little new information compared to the reefs which
have been described from south of the capital of Gotland.
THE REEFS NORTH OF VLSBY 113
One of the sites showing an Upper Visby reef i s near the Luseklint, the f i r s t
major cliff northeast of Nyhamns FisklPge. The cliff is built predominantly by Hogklint
reef limestone. An Upper Visby reef i s present t h e r e , low in the section, in the south-
west. It has a well-developed mantle of stratified limestone, which is somewhat wider
at the southwest side than at the northeast side. The boundary between reef limestone
and mantle at the southwest side is r a t h e r steep. At the northeast side, both the
boundary between reef and mantle and the boundary between mantle and the normal
Upper Visby succession advance outwards with an angle of about 20-25O. Above the
reef, the lowermost stratified Hogklint Beds a r e t o be found.
Further north, but still a t the base of the high cliff, two more reefs are found
which are mainly enclosed by the uppermost Upper Visby Beds.
Directly north of the cliff, two reefs,belonging t o the Upper Visby Beds, are
found r a t h e r closely together. The sediment in between these reefs is stratified
limestone. Of both reefs only the uppermost p a r t s outcrop, all the r e s t i s hidden
behind s c r e e . The southern reef is better exposed. It is about 2.5 m long and thick
and strongly weathered. It shows the normal nature and composition of the Upper Visby
reefs. The northern reef probably was somewhat larger. The mantle of stratified
limestone around it is well exposed. The boundary between reef and mantle is very
steep at the southwest side and r i s e s more gradually over the stratified sediment at
the northeast side.
Rather characteristic for the exposures north of Visby is the gradual

transition from the Upper Visby to the Hogklint Beds. This is also reflected
in the reefs. Several reefs have their bases in the uppermost Upper Visby
Beds and their upper parts enveloped by the Hijgklint Beds. Some of these
even gave r i s e to reef masses which a r e comparatively large for Gotland.
A good example is given by a large cliff, about 0.7 km northeast of Lundsklint,
which can easily be recognized in the field, because of the enormous accumulation of
loose blocks at i t s foot. Fig.147 shows part of this complex, about 180 m long, of
Hogklint reef limestone. At the very left, an isolated Upper Visby reef can be seen.
Its base i s about 6 m below the Upper Visby - Hogklint boundary. Including the mantle
of stratified limestone and also the thickened limestone layers underneath, the reef i s
about 6 m long and about 5 m thick. The reef protrudes f r o m the cliff wall; i t s upper
p a r t is covered by travertine and s c r e e .
In between the reef mentioned above, and the large complex of Hogklint rocks,
the Upper Visby Beds a r e relatively rich in marly limestone. The Hagklint reef
complex is distinctly rooted in the Upper Visby Beds. The lowest point i s about 7 m
below the stratigraphical boundary. The reef complex consists of a large number of
lenses, separated by some limestone layers.
A s i m i l a r development can be found with several other Hogklint reefs which
occur low in the stratigraphical succession. Others, however, show g r e a t e r unity in
the total amount of reef limestone which is exposed. An example is the reef about
0.28 km northeast of Lundsklint (Fig.44), which also clearly has its root in the Upper
Visby Beds. Underneath these reef complexes the Upper Visby Beds show a distinct
local increase in the thickness of the limestone layers.
In the lower coastal cliff in between the two large cliffs mentioned in the
preceding paragraphs, there is a distance of about 0.4 km in which only two small
reefs a r e found, completely enclosed by the Upper Visby Beds. Some other reefs
started growth at about the transition from Visby to Hogklint time, o r slightly e a r l i e r .
This illustrates that the development of Upper Visby reefs in the a r e a north of Visby
was l e s s common and also started l a t e r than that further south.
114 THE UPPER VISBY R E E F T Y P E
SYNTHESIS
The phenomena described in the previous pages were often based on a

generalization of specific observations. The more such generalizations cover
a wide subject, the more the risk inherent in such generalizations usually
increases. The author is aware of this, but nevertheless, if a general under-
standing of the Middle Palaeozoic geology of Gotland is to be reached, this
has to be done. Therefore, the discussions of the reef types found i n Gotland
will be concluded by an attempt to synthesize the collected data. The same
will be done with the information from the various stratigraphical units
(Chapter XI). Finally, all these views will be brought together to give the
total picture of Chapter XV.
In the course of Late Visby time, conditions on the s e a floor apparently

changed gradually. More marly limestone and l e s s marlstone w a s deposited.
The situation did not alter uniformly over the entire s e a floor. In some
restricted o r very restricted parts, the modification in environmental
conditions was ahead of the general trend. More organisms populated these
a r e a s and contributed to extra limestone formation. Also, they provided hard
objects upon which larval forms of the potential reef builders could settle.
The early colonies themselves again provided a suitable place for the settling
of further larvae. If the environmental conditions remained reasonably
favourable, this could lead to the formation of small reefs, which are often
surrounded by mantles of stratified marly limestone. However, small
alterations in the environmental conditions could still strongly influence the
development. Consequently, several attempts a t reef formation failed. Where
the pioneering organisms did manage to found a reef, environmental conditions
in combination with differing growth r a t e s in different individuals led to
slightly different forms of reefs, such a s knolls, reefs with the shape of a n
inverted cone o r lenticular reefs.
Corals, in a rather great variety of forms, strongly dominate the
organic element in the reefs. Apparently conditions were still too unfavour-
able for a really substantial contribution by the stromatoporoids, and this
applied even more for the calcareous Algae. Crinoids also found the
environment still too unfavourable f o r abundant development.
With a continued gradual improvement of the environment towards the
end of Visby time, reef development was increasingly Savoured. The
foundations were thus laid for much richer reef growth in the next, Hogklint
Period. A number of Hogklint reefs root in the Upper Visby Beds. With an
increase in reef size, the organic composition of the reefs also became more
varied.
The difference in abundance of reefs north and south of Visby suggests
that reef growth was restricted to a certain depth zone. The direction of that
reef zone was probably parallel to the direction of the coast line at that time.
115
Chapter VII
THE HOBURGEN REEF TYPE
INTRODUCTION
The Upper Visby Beds, in the northwest of Gotland, are overlaid by

the Hogklint Beds. These also c a r r y reefs, some of which already started
growth in the uppermost Upper Visby Beds o r around the lower boundary
of the Hijgklint Beds. Thus there is a continuation of reef formation from
the one stratigraphical unit into the other. Nevertheless, the reefs in the
two units a r e different. The reefs in the Hogklint Beds a r e not of the Upper
Visby type, but of the Hoburgen type. The main differences between the two
a r e shown in Table Vm. More o r less similar reefs a r e present in several
other stratigraphical units in Gotland: the Slite, Halla, Klinteberg, Hemse,
Eke, Burgsvik and HamraSundre Beds. The latter beds include the well-
known (in Gotland) locality of Hoburgen, in the very south of the island.
There reefs of this nature a r e well exposed and this site has, therefore,
been made the type locality for this kind of reef.
Although Hbgklint also is a well-known locality, and one which
consists largely of reef limestone of the type now to be described, it has
purposely not been selected as the locality after which the reef type is to
be named. The major reason is that Hogklint has already given its name
to a stratigraphical unit, and, as mentioned above, reefs similar to those
found in this unit a r e present also in other stratigraphical units. Calling
the reef type the Hbgklint reef type could easily lead to confusion as to the
stratigraphical distribution of this kind of reef. Secondly, the exposures in
Hbgklint reveal less detail about various aspects of this kind of reef as do
some other sites, such as Hoburgen.
In the following pages the Hoburgen reef type will be described in
some detail, using information obtained from Hoburgen but also from
various other localities and other stratigraphical units, in order to reach
the best possible picture of the reef type in all i t s variations.
The reef limestone is more resistant to erosion than any of the
stratified sediments and often reef limestone appears as hillocks o r cliffs,
frequently with steep walls at the side which was o r is affected by post-
Glacial o r Recent wave erosion.
THE HOBURGEN COMPLEX
Since Hoburgen has been made the type locality of the most-common
reef type of Gotland, it is appropriate to include in this chapter a short
description of that locality (Fig. 34).
116 THEHOBURGENREEFTYPE
Fig.34. Sketch map of Hoburgen, showing the position of the four hillocks
("burgar").
Hoburgen, which means "the high citadel", is located in the southwest

of the southern peninsula of Gotland. It consists of four hillocks, called
"burgar" (singular "burgt'). Together they have a length of about 750 m and
a breadth averaging 150 m. Of these hillocks, the m.ost southern one, the
Hoburg proper, also called Storburg (Swedish: stor = large) o r the first
burg, is the most important. To the north follow successively the second,
third and fourth burgar. The last two a r e very-narrowly connected on the
east side, but separated in the west.
As said above, the Storburg is the largest hillock and also the highest.
Its summit is 35.2 m above sea level. In the southwest it shows the follow-
ing sedimentary succession:
Around and a little above sea level Burgsvik sandstone is found, with
in its uppermost part a characteristic and very fossiliferous layer. On top
of it is 60-80cm oolite, in which a little sandstone is interbedded. This is
overlaid by limestone in a somewhat reef-like development (max. thickness
1 m), which passes westwards into a synchronous crinoid limestone (max.
60 cm thick). Above this reef-like deposit there is limestone, very rich in
algal balls (see also the section on the Hamra limestone in Chapter XI,
FAUNA, FLORA AND MATRIX 117
pp. 410-411). Next is crinoid limestone again, passing into reef limestone
in the east. This reef limestone is mainly built by stromatoporoids and
corals in a marly matrix. A.lso present a r e bryozoans, crinoids, brachiopods
and some lamellibranchs. From there upwards, almost the whole west cliff
is composed of reef limestone. In the uppermost part, finally, there is the
so-called "Hoburg marble", a red crinoid limestone with thin marly
intercalations.
The south cliff of Storburgen (about 20 m high) consists at the
bottom of marly Hamra limestone, and has a t the top 8-10 m of "Hoburg
marble". The latter sediment also occurs i n the east cliff.
The upper surface of the Storburg is somewhat undulating; the low
tops are in all likelihood connected with reef centres. Between the reef
limestone, exposed locally on top of the Storburg, "Hoburg marble" is still
found at several places in between the reef builders. Where we imagine
this non-reef material to be absent, the reef should show a surface com-
parable to a field covered with freshly-lifted large potatoes.
The north side of the first burg, as well a s the south side of the
second one, is composed of marly limestone, which presumably in former
times also took up the space between the two burgar.
The second burg, too, shows sandstone and oolite in the lowermost
part of the west cliff. These a r e overlaid again be reef limestone, which in
the middle of this wall takes up almost the full height, but to the north and
south passes into crinoid limestone. In the rather poorly exposed east side
of this burg, mainly "Hoburg marble" outcrops.
The top of the second burg shows in the west a landscape with several
higher parts, presumably caused by the presence of fossil reefs. In the
east, on the other hand, the surface is rather smooth, which leads to the
presumption that no reefs occur there.
Also for the indentation between the second and third burg, there are
indications that stratified limestone has been present there, which has only
rather recently been removed by erosion.
The third burg shows in the west crinoid limestone at its bottom; while
the rest is composed of reef limestone. In contrast to these well exposed
west cliffs, the east side is nearly completely overgrown with vegetation.
The west cliff of the fourth burg is almost exclusively composed of
reef limestone. Here also the east side is covered with vegetation. The
upper surfaces of the third and fourth burgar are uneven, but show an east-
southeastward dip everywhere.
FAUNA, FLORA AND MATRIX O F THE REEFS
In fact the essential facts about the organic remains and matrix in
the reefs of Hoburgen type have already been given in Chapter V. Some
additional information, more specific for the reefs of Hoburgen type, will
be added in the following paragraphs.
Stromatoporoids, by virtue of their large numbers and frequently
large size, form the most-conspicuous part of the fauna of the Hoburgen-
type reefs. The contribution made by the corals varies from reef to reef
118 THE HOBURGENREEFTYPE
and also between the various stratigraphical units in which the reefs occur.
Massive compound corals a r e generally well represented, aIthough they
a r e in almost every reef distinctly subordinate to the stromatoporoids.
Branched corals are present, sometimes in large colonies o r groups of
colonies, in the more-central parts of some of the reefs, but may be
almost absent in other reefs, even in close vicinity. Solitary corals,
occurring in so many specimens and species in the Upper Visby reefs, a r e
not very abundant in most of the exposures of Hoburgen-type reef limestone.
It i s quite usual if only a few a r e observed over a n exposed surface of 1 m2.
Comparatively the highest numbers of solitary corals a r e found in the reefs
which follow in stratigraphical age directly after the Upper Visby reefs,
those in the Lower Hogklint Beds. The most-striking figures a r e presented
by the reef limestone drawn as part B of Fig.151. In the major part of the
exposed reef area, about 200 solitary corals per 1 m 2 can be seen, whereas
in the lowermost 0.5-0.75 m of the reef, this number can be as high a s
about 750 per 1 m2.
Bryozoans a r e present more a s isolated branches than as intact
colonies, but are common in that fragmented form. Their contribution to
the bulk of the reef limestone, however, is generally negligible.
Coralline Algae of the genus Solenopoya a r e fairly common in some
parts of the reefs.
The distribution of the various reef components over the reefs varies.
One has to imagine that the reefs, a t the time of their development, showed
a great variety of living and dead material. From place to place there were
differences in vigour and vitality of the reefs. At one spot there was hardly
a space as large a s a human hand which was not covered with living reef-
building organisms, while in other places, perhaps only a few metres
away, there were only a few reef builders, separated by much matrix
material, fragmented organic remains and organisms out of their growing
positions. Some rough general lines can be subtracted from the variation
seen.
Generally, the reef builders in the lowermost parts of the reefs a r e
smaller than higher upwards (Fig.35). The same holds for the reef
builders in the uppermost parts in various reefs.
Massive tabular stromatoporoids and corals a r e frequently found in
the basal parts, but they a r e generally largest and relatively-most
abundant in the marginal regions. The stromatoporoid Labechia and the
coral Thecia may locally form expansions of a biostromal nature from the
reefs out an to the surrounding sediments.
Generally the reef builders are embedded in a matrix, which may vary
from marl to rather pure limestone. In places, pockets o r stratified inter-
calations of matrix material may also occur, both marginal and central i n
the reefs. In the larger reefs, it can, in several instances, be established
that the volume of the reef limestone taken up by the matrix is higher at
the original-landward side than at the seaward side. In some reefs, how-
ever, also the latter side may be relatively rich in matrix material.
This latter situation is illustrated in, e.g., the east-eastsoutheast
wall of the Spillingsklint (Othem Parish, Slite Beds). In the southern part
of this wall, reef limestone is exposed which has been formed at the
southeast, seaward side of the reef. At a level of 4.5-2 m below the top of
the reef, at least ten pockets of marly sediment occur, on the average 25 cm
0 1m
p.".1reef limestone similarly orientated coral

fragments
stratified limestone stromatoporoids
Fig.35. Detailed section, showing the base of the reef limestone in the
HjSinnklint, about 1.5 km southwest of Halls FisklSige. Hijgklint Beds. The
contact with the underlying stratified fragment limestone is remarkably
smooth. The lowermost reef limestone consists of stromatoporoids and
some corals in a matrix of very finely crystalline to dense limestone. In
this matrix, remains of several other fossils can be seen, but they a r e
strongly recrystallized and not o r almost not identifiable. Two well-
recognizable stromatoporoid horizons are notable. In the lower of these,
the colonies are on the average 15 cm long; in the upper horizon they
measure up to 40 cm. The horizons a r e bounded by irregular lines. Some
of these lines a r e caused by fragments of branched corals, lying almost
side by side in an orientation which is about north-northwest - south-
southeast. The other lines a r e caused by weathering of somewhat softer
matrix material from between the reef builders. The reef limestone above
the upper stromatoporoid horizon shows a conglomeratic structure.
long, 15 cm deep and 10 cm high. In this zone also a cave was developed,
and a horizontal niche, about 6.4 m long, 0.9 m high and a few decimetres
deep; both originated most likely through erosion of stratified sediment.
Both the cave and the niche a r e covered by reef limestone. South of the
niche, a few similar notches were found, 1-3 m long, which, however, a r e
overlaid by stratified crinoid limestone with reef debris, intercalated in
reef limestone.
In the Solklint (Slite, Slite Beds), it was found that at the original-
seaward side of the reef most local intercalations of layers of stratified
marly limestone have a direction of dip towards the reef centre. At the
original-landward side the directions of dip a r e somewhat more irregular.
The dip directions, particularly those at the seaward side, suggest that
most of the local stratified intercalations were formed at the lee side of
reef parts which had risen over the surrounding reef surface.
A s said, not only marginally, but also in the more central parts of
many Hoburgen-type reefs, pockets and, though l e s s frequently, larger
intercalations of stratified sediment do occur. This is generally marl-
stone, limestone with reef debris o r crinoid limestone. Deposition may
have taken place at quieter places in between the reef builders. In a very
few cases crinoid calyces were observed in m a r l pockets.
In part of the occurrences of stratified sediment, deformations can be
observed, which are due to differential compression and to displacements
that must have taken place within the reef-limestone bodies. In older
exposures, such stratified portions a r e often partly or completely
weathered away, leaving holes and niches of various sizes and forms. For
more details about intercalations of stratified sediments in the reef lime-
stone the reader is referred to the descriptions of the various localities in
Chapter XI (e.g., pp. 288, 295, 296, 320, 324, 359, 362, 366, 369).
In addition to debris of the reef frame, animal remains found in the
matrix include crinoids, brachiopods, molluscs, arthropods, sponge
spicules and small, tintinnid-like bodies.
The crinoids probably lived more on the sides of the reefs than on
the reef surface (see also the section on crinoid palaeoecology in
ChapterXII, particularly pp. 448,452; cf. alsopp. 461, 464).
Frequently brachiopod shells a r e found in small pockets. The author
is unable to answer the question whether these shells were generally
transported there together o r whether the animals had a certain preference
for sheltered patches. In some of the pockets brachiopod shells occur
together with remains of other reef dwellers, in other cases they a r e the
only fossils in such pockets. The local brachiopod assemblages often show
high size and shape variability. Several of the reef brachiopods were
attached during their life to the reef by means of a muscular stalk o r
pedicle protruding from an opening under the beak of the pedicle valve.
Gastropods a r e regularly found in the reef limestone, with many
species, but they are only occasionally abundant; most common among them
is Platyceras comutum Hisinger. Lamellibranch species a r e l e s s common
and certainly l e s s varies than the gastropods, in contrast to modern reefs
i n the Great B a r r i e r Reef province (Maxwell, 1968, p.168). Cephalopods a r e
distinctly l e s s common than the two previous molluscan groups.
In places the reef matrix is of the stromatolitic type described in
Chapter V (p. 77).
In general, field investigations of the composition of the reefs a r e
easier in the comparatively-younger exposures than in several of the
older, inland exposures, where observation is hindered by the patina which
covers the weathered rock and in part also by the brecciation which has
taken place.
STRUCTURE O F THE REEF LIMESTONE
The general appearance of the reef limestone is to a large degree

dependent on the shape of the reef builders and the total volume, composi-
tion and distribution of the reef matrix. In his well-known study of the
Gotlandian reef limestones, Hadding (1941)distinguishes two types of reef-
limestone structures: massive and bed-like. Massive a r e those reef lime-
stones which a r e built up of elements with varying o r indeterminate
orientation. Two subtypes are distinguished: conglomeratic and brecciated.
The bed-like structure is subdivided according to whether the structure is
due to embedded loose material o r to tabular reef builders.
STRUCTURE O F T H E R E E F LIMESTONE 121
The present author accepts the classification of Hadding, in general,
but with an addition and a modification.
The addition is necessary because not all occurrences of massive
reef limestone can be classified as either conglomeratic o r brecciaceous.
Also sections are found showing massive reef limestone with relatively
smooth surfaces. Some parts with a stromatolitic matrix may show such
exposed planes. Smooth surfaces may also be found in strongly-recrystal-
lized reef limestone. Some raukar, which a r e the remains of the most-
resistant parts of a reef, for instance, show such smooth surfaces, but also
exposures along joint planes. Reef-limestone exposures of this type may be
described as having a solid structure or being massive sensu stricto. A
solid reef-limestone surface, however, is not always a stable situation. If
it has been exposed to weathering for a long time, it may pass into a
brecciaceous appearance (see below in this section).
The modification in Hadding's classification of reef-limestone
structures is proposed, because the present author has objections to the
t e r m bed-like structure. A bed is generally defined as being a division of a
stratified complex, marked by a more-or-less-distinct divisional plane from
its neighbours above and below. Bed-like means: having the appearance of a
bed. In fact, however, it is meant that in the reef limestone more-or-less-
distinct beds can be distinguished, that is to say, that the rock shows a
(vague) bedding o r stratification. Therefore, the t e r m s stratified and
iraguely stratified a r e preferred to bed-like to describe this type of reef-
limestone structure.
Massive structure
In reefs which show a brecciated structure, the matrix of the reef

limestone has generally undergone stronger recrystallization o r cementa-
tion and hardening than in those with a conglomeratic structure. The matrix
may thus form an equally-resistant part of the reef a s the reef builders. An
example of reef limestone with a brecciated structure is that of the
Bogeklint (Slite Beds, p. 320).
Between the reef builders and the hard matrix, marly films may be
found. In other cases there is no sharp boundary between them. In such
cases even colonies of reef builders can be found which through
recrystallization gradually pass into the matrix limestone. Elsewhere only
a few fossils are recognizable in the brecciaceous reef limestone. In
general, more fossils a r e visible in brecciaceous reef limestone than i n
the strictly massive (solid) type, but l e s s than in conglomeratic o r vaguely
stratified reef limestones.
The pieces into which the brecciaceous reef limestone breaks apart,
generally measure a few centimetres in diameter, but may vary from less
than 1 cm to large fragments of 20-100 cm in diameter.
The brecciated reef-limestone structure may, a s Hadding (1941,
p. 51) suggested, have originated already in an early stage, because the rock
could not c a r r y its own weight but broke to pieces. Thereupon the pieces
were dislocated in relation to each other. A s a rule, movements were
small and the cracks insignificant, but the rock nevertheless obtained a
characteristic brecciated structure. The cracks can best be seen in thin
sections. They a r e irregular, pass through reef builders and matrix alike
and a r e partly filled with calcite. Broken shells commonly present evidence
of small displacements.
A s has been said, reef limestone with a solid structure may pass into
brecciated limestone a s a result of weathering. One of the reasons f o r this
may be the presence of many intact or nearly intact stromatoporoid
colonies, with a characteristic latilaminar structure. In weathering, the
rock easily splits along these latilaminar planes. In the Hallshukklint,
brecciation was also found to occur where branched coral colonies, in a
little-more-marly matrix than elsewhere, are the main reef builders. In
other cases, the explanation may be that parts of the apparently solid reef
limestones a r e , in fact, brecciated in structure, but are stronger and
rather-uniformly recrystallized, because their matrix was relatively pure.
In the freshly exposed rock, the pieces may still adhere to each other, but
they become detached when the rock has long been subjected to weathering.
This latter explanation is supported by the observation that, in the reef
limestone of Hoburgen type, parts with a rather-solid structure occur in
several places enclosed in reef limestone with a brecciated structure, into
which these parts also gradually pass.
In general, reef limestone which is predominantly built by corals was
stronger of construction than rock very rich in stromatoporoids. This
appears from the observation that massive coral limestone is generally
not brecciated, but solid in structure. Brecciation was neither observed in
a reef part which consists of an intimate interoccurrence of colonies of
corals and stromatoporoids and was found in the south of the HjPnnklint
(Hall Parish, Hijgklint Beds). Apparently, coral colonies have greater
carrying power than stromatoporoids. Neither do sections through large
coral colonies generally brecciate through weathering.
Also in places where the reef matrix was relatively pure over larger
p a r t s of a reef, a solid reef-limestone structure may have formed which
does not brecciate through weathering. Presumably the total reef mass has
been solid there since the time of deposition of the reef matrix, through
authigenic sedimentary formation of calcite (see also below in this section)
o r a stromatolitic type of matrix. Only slight dislocations took place within
it afterwards. These may have occurred along erratic lines which can be
seen in several of the larger exposures of solid reef limestone. They
generally divide an exposed wall into spool-shaped parts of usually about
1 m length. Their origin may be connected with zones of weakness in the
reef, e.g., surfaces containing the upper sides of several reef builders.
Many of the lines a r e weathered out a s thin grooves. Some a r e filled with
calcite, some contain marl. In the south of the Hjannklint, one groove
contains a great many coral branches which lie horizontally and are
orientated about northwest - southeast (Fig. 35). These branches up- and down-
wards pass into structureless calcite. Along part of the lines solution also
seems to have taken place and some took the character of stylolites.
If in weathering, the matrix of the reef seems to be l e s s resistant to

erosion than the embedded reef builders, and still more, if in addition the
latter a r e more o r less bun-shaped, the rock presents a conglomeratic
appearance. If we only look at the exposed section, the term nodulose
(=knotty o r having nodes; cf. Rice, 1954, p.273) can also be used to
STRUCTURE O F THE R E E F LIMESTONE 123
describe the general appearance of the rock. Examples of reef limestone

with a conglomeratic structure a r e found, among many others, in the
Galgberg (p. 291), near Herrvik (p. 363), in Torsburgen (p. 363) and in the
Lindeklint (p. 371).
Stratified structure
In several reefs a number of horizons a r e found which a r e richer in

matrix than the remainder of the reef. This may cause a more o r less
vague stratification. Generally these horizons do not occur through the
reef as a whole but only in limited p a r t s of it, more often at the periphery
and in the lowermost o r uppermost part of a reef than in the centre.
Also the reef builders themselves may aid in giving the reef lime-
stone a stratified character, by occurring dominantly in flat-lenticular o r
tabular colonies.
These two causes of a more o r less vague stratification in the reef
limestone a r e generally not independent. Increased sedimentation, which
in itself already produces stratification, will in i t s turn also have
influenced the shape of the reef builders.
As has been discussed in the previous chapter, stratification is found
in quite a number of the Upper Visby reefs. In the basal Hogklint Beds
stratified parts within the reef limestone are also common. Higher in the
reef-carrying Hogklint, too, reef parts with some stratification a r e
regularly encountered. Examples are drawn in Fig.36 and Fig.153. The
raukar at Lickershamn, too, show several intercalations of a stratified
character. For the Upper Visby and Hogklint Beds together a vertical
succession of stratified - conglomeratic - brecciated, solid and
conglomeratic - conglomeratic with some stratified, is a perceptible rule,
though one with several exceptions.
As was said four paragraphs earlier, in several reefs a tendency to a
stratified structure can be observed in the top parts. Often this is caused
by comparatively more matrix and/or debris. It suggests that at least in
many cases reef growth ended not abruptly but was preceeded by a period
of decline. Examples a r e found in the Hbgklint Beds in kbgklint (p. 285), in
the Slite Beds in the Bogeklint (p. 320), in the Hemse Beds in the Lindeklint
(p. 371) and in the Hamra-Sundre Beds in Hoburgen (p. 415). Vaguely
stratified reef limestone is also common in the lowermost parts of some
reefs, for instance in the Klinteklint (Hemse Beds, p. 366).
In the light of the above observations it is easy to understand that in
small reefs (e.g., those of the Klinteberg o r Eke Beds) a (vaguely)
stratified structure is comparatively more common than in large reefs.
Not included in this classification are reef-limestone parts which

generally consist of fossil fragments, small fossils and m a r l o r marly
limestone, often in random intermingling. These parts occur in a number
of reefs a s intercalations in the reef limestone. They will be discussed in
the section dealing with debris-filled depressions.
1 reef limestone
stratified limestone
I S marl
not exposed 0 5m
Fig.36. Reef and stratified limestones, belonging to the Hagklint Beds, as

found approx. 0.9 km south of Sigsarvebodar. The lower part of the reef
limestone is massive. Within the dashed line at the left, it is of solid
structure and light grey in colour, fossils are macroscopically hardly
recognizable, except in m a r l pockets; there are several nests of calcite
crystals. Elsewhere the lower part of the reef limestone is of brecciaceous
appearance and grey in colour; the wall there is l e s s steep; some stroma-
toporoids can be distinguished, of most other fossils at the best "ghosts"
are present (spots of slightly differing colour). The higher part of the reef
limestone at the left is vaguely stratified. It brecciates through weather-
ing. The weathered surfaces show several fossils. The colour of the
weathered rock is yellowish grey.
The reef is traversed with a few cracks. Ofthese the one a t the
boundary between massive and vaguely-stratified rock presumably follows
a plane where reef growth has been interrupted; it is covered by a thin
layer of marl, which continues eastward even after the crack has ended in
another, roughly circular crack. At the upper boundary of the reef lime-
stone, there is also such a thin m a r l layer. In the east, the reef limestone
is somewhat crushed in appearance. The overlying stratified limestone is
coarsely crystalline and fossiliferous. Intercalated in it is a small
occurrence of stromatoporoid reef limestone. The younger stratified
limestone has thinner layers, is finely crystalline and l e s s fossiliferous.
It is overlaid again by reef limestone.
Recognizability of fossils
The Hoburgen-type reef limestones can also be classified in another

way, viz. as reef limestones which macroscopically still show the fossils
which contributed to their formation and reef limestones in which
STRUCTURE OF THE R E E F LIMESTONE 125
Fig.37. Detail of the northern part of the reef limestone complex about
0.7-0.9 km north of Lundsklint. At the right, the characteristic sub-
division into smaller reef-limestone bodies, as found also in a number of
other reef-limestone massifs in the Hogklint Beds. At the left, so much
stratified limestone is found between the reef-limestone bodies that they
appear as separate reefs. At the base, a badly exposed small reef,
belonging to the Upper Visby Beds. On top of this reef, the Upper Visby
succession contains more limestone than north and south of it.
diagenetic recrystallization of the total mass has gone s o far that fossils
a r e only occasionally recognizable in the field. The variation which the
Hoburgen-type reefs show in this respect is greater than with that of the
Upper Visby and Holmhallar-type reefs.
In general reef limestones of the first group show a conglomeratic
structure, o r a r e more o r less vaguely stratified, but some have a solid
o r brecciated structure. Reef limestones in which fossils a r e hardly
recognizable generally show a solid o r brecciated structure.
In all cases in which the fossils are still readily recognizable, they
a r e found to have nevertheless been recrystallized. There are, however,
differences in the degree of, recrystallization. If the matrix is strongly
marly the fossils a r e less changed. Apparently the clay content of the
sediment reduced the permeability to water and thus hindered the
recrystallization process. This is further indicated by the fact that the
fossils found in the stratified m a r l deposits in Gotland are least
recrystallized. On the other hand, there is also a general rule that the
purer the limestone of the matrix, the stronger the recrystallization of the
reef builders and also the harder the matrix itself. In such cases the
external shape of the fossils may still be distinct but the finer intertial
structures are often lost. Hadding (1941, p.46) rightly warned that as a
result of this, tabular corals may be mistaken for stromatoporoids or vice
v e r s a and thus care is required in determining the fossil content of a reef.
In the Hdgklint Beds, but also elsewhere, examples have been seen where,
in addition, the external shape has partly disappeared. The one part of a
large fossil, especially a coral colony, may then still show i t s outline,
whereas in the other part even this has been lost and the fossil has passed
into solid reef limestone.
It is not impossible that hardening of the calcareous mud which

constitutes the matrix of the reef limestones in which fossils are only
vaguely distinguishable ("ghosts"), took place contemporaneously with
deposition, assuming that calcite also crystallized simultaneously from
the no-doubt-saturated solution in which the mud was deposited (cf. Hadding,
1941, p.44). Together, thereafter, they underwent secondary, diagenetic
formation of calcite. If the matrix was almost pure, it may even have
become the most-resistant part of the reef limestone, which then often
shows a solid structure.
Nowhere in the reef limestones of Gotland does dolomitization seem
to have taken place. At any rate, there is no large-scale dolomitization,
such as has affected the Silurian reefs in, e.g., the Great Lakesareaof
North America.
No distinct reef frame Preserved
Contemporaneously with reef growth, the reef was attacked by

destructive forces, which detached reef builders and caused their falling
over and rolling o r fragmentation. Furthermore, in most cases the reef
limestone has to a greater o r lesser degree been compressed by the
weight of the higher reef parts and the overlying rocks, which has led to
dislocations within many reef-limestone occurrences. During the Glacial
Period the sediments were, moreover, subjected to the pressure of the
inland ice. Where the rock in Recent times has been cut by cliffs, sliding
may also have taken place (cf. Fig.139; another good example can be
observed west of Stuguklint, s e e p. 296 j.As a result, even in those
exposures where fossils are still generally recognizable, parts are found
only occasionally which still seem to have something left of the original
calcareous skeleton of the reefs. In the Hiigklint Beds such restricted parts
a r e found in the Kinnertorpklint, in the south cliff at Brissund, and in the
Hjiinnklint. Also a few parts with large and dome-shaped stromatoporoids
in the Hijgklint and Galgberg may be fairly intact. At Hoburgen (Hamra-
Sundre Beds), a relatively-large part of apparently-original character is
found in the south of the west cliff of the second hillock. It consists almost
entirely of stromatoporoids.
SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF THE REEFS
The shape of the reefs of Hoburgen type varies rather, from a single
spheroidal stromatoporoid colony (Fig.13) to an inverted right-elliptical
cone of up to about 2 km in its longest horizontal direction and a thickness
of up to 30m, o r to generally thin but extensive stretches of patch-reef
nature. In defining the form of the reef in more detail one meets with more
difficulties, because there seems to have been quite a lot of variation and
only two-dimensional exposures a r e available of many of the reefs, whose
SHAPE AND DWENSIONS OF T H E REEFS 127
sections, moreover, do not generally go exactly through the centre of the

reef.
Inverted -cone -shaped reefs
Although the point of origin of the reefs is generally not satisfactorily

exposed, one may assume that the majority of them began growth at a more-
or-less-central point and from there in the course of time spread out. In
the case of the inverted-cone-shaped reefs, such as the one shown in Fig.38,
an inverted conical base developed. The plan form, however, is not
generally roughly circular, as an early description by Hadding (1941, p.13-
14) suggests, but more elliptical (cf. Hadding, 1956, fig.1, 4; this book
Fig.75, 74). Consequently it is more accurate to describe the generalized
form of these reefs as inverted elliptical cones. The reef surface usually
slopes in a roughly-radial way outwards from the centre. This means that
the central axis of these conical reefs is generally approximately vertical;
hence this reef shape may be described as an inverted right-elliptical cone.
Stratified sediments often arch over the reef; the boundary is generally
more-or-less sharp; the covering sediments may be compacted into
irregularities in the reef surface.
The ratio between the thickness of a reef and its horizontal dimen-
sions may have been mainly determined by the depth of the water and
alterations therein during the time of formation of the reef. In the Hogklint
Beds, which developed in water that gradually became shallower, the base
of conical reefs is usually shallow o r very shallow; for the Hoburgen reefs
(Hamra-Sundre Beds), development of the reefs in deepeningwater is assumed
and there, with roughly the s a m e thickness of the reefs, the horizontal
extension is much smaller.
N S
marl I
I stratified limestone Dl unexposed
1 1
Fig.38. Schematic drawing of the Hutingsklint, approx. 5.5 km north-
northeast of Ihrevik FisklPge. The lower part of the reef is enclosed i n
rnarlstone with interstratified layers of marly limestone; the top is
surrounded by stratified limestone. Within the reef, two large parts,
consisting of stratified limestone. HSgklint Beds.
Patch reefs
Water depth was probably also a determining factor leading to the

formation of patch reefs. Reef development also in these cases may have
started at a certain point, but from the very beginning the reef expanded
more laterally than in an upward direction, causing the formation of a
reef basin with a low angle of slope (cf. Fig.66). Such reefs frequently
show a length of up to several hundred metres. Other exposures of this
length o r even more, present evidence that they formed through lateral
fusion of two o r more such patch reefs (see further on in this chapter). In
the Hogklint Beds, the patch reefs a r e generally thinner than the inverted-
cone reefs. Hadding (1941, p.14) was of the opinion, that these a r e not
patch reefs, but peripheral sections through inverted-cone reefs. However,
he produced no evidence to prove this. It would be illogical, however, to
assume that almost always the central part of such r e e f s has been removed
by erosion, and also the fact that some of the large reef-limestone
exposures show laterally fused reefs of this elongated type seems to
support their classification as patch reefs. Several more patch reefs a r e
found in the Slite and Hemse Beds.
Lenticular and irregular reefs
Where lateral expansion was l e s s strong than in the patch reefs, a

more lens-shaped (or 1enticular)or an irregular reef form developed. The
thickness is generally about 5-10 m; some are thicker, but never more
than 25 m. In some of these, the horizontal extension is hardly more than
the reef thickness, in others the length measures a few times that of the
thickness. Generally, the base is l e s s flat than that of the patch reefs and
the same, to a l e s s e r extent, may apply to the surface. Whereas most of
the other reefs generally may have risen at low angles from the surround-
ing sea floor, some of the reefs in this group present evidence that they
have risen at quite steep angles. This is indicated particularly be laminar
reef builders, usually the stromatoporoid Labechia, whose latilaminae at
the reef margin may be inclined at high angles, flattening off higher
upwards, thus suggesting a reef margin which was convex outwards. A s
the adjacent stratified sediment is unaffected, there is no reason to assume
slumping, at least not after their deposition took place. Should slumping
have occurred before their sedimentation, a steep reef edge still has to be
assumed. The lateral extent of the successive stromatoporoid covers,
however, rather points towards successive growth on a strongly-inclined
surface. Displaced material, on the other hand, are, undoubtedly, blocks of
reef limestone with steeply-inclined reef builders which a r e included in
reef talus in some localities, and which also indicate that the parent reefs
must have risen well over their direct vicinity. These blocks will be
further discussed later in this chapter, when dealing with the reef talus.
The Klinteberg reefs
The reefs found exposed in the Klinteberg, and also elsewhere in the
Klinteberg Beds, are on the average much smaller than those in the
SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF THE REEFS 129
Fig.39. Photograph taken at the north side of the Klinteberg, northwestern

part. At the base, crinoid limestone; higher in the wall, reef limestone.
The latter deposit contains, as main reef builders, colonies of stromato-
poroids and corals ( Halysites, Favosites, Acervularid. The stromato-
poroids are almost all flat lenticular in shape. The matrix is strongly
marly and there are many m a r l pockets with crinoid fragments. The reef
limestone is unorganized and vaguely and irregularly stratified. The
boundary between crinoid limestone and reef rises from left to right in the
photograph, passing along the top of the niche, and is not very distinct.
Hogklint, Slite o r Hemse Beds. Some representative examples are given in

Fig.39-43. The largest reef observed in the Klinteberg reached a thickness
of about 9 m, but generally the reefs i n the Klinteberg Beds a r e more-or-
less lenticular in general outline, with a thickness of not more than a few
metres. The matrix of the reefs is generally strongly marly. Stromato-
poroids a r e the main reef builders, but compound corals a r e also well
represented. Most of the stromatoporoids in the Klinteberg reefs a r e
lenticular.
The distinction between a reef and the surrounding stratified lime-
stones is in several instances rather blurred. The surrounding rocks may
also be very fossiliferous, the reef limestone may be vaguely stratified
and contains m a r l pockets and intercalations of stratified limestone. Both
the reef and stratified limestones may brecciate through weathering.
The crinoid limestones around these reefs a r e often cross-bedded.
The bedding planes are often rugged, which may be due to wave action.
Algae are commonly found in certain a r e a s between the reefs, elsewhere
large coral colonies are common. These are some of the indications that
the reefs in the Klinteberg Reds probably developed in shallower water
than the great majority of Hoburgen-type reefs in the other stratigraphical
units of Gotland.
IE W N S NW
A 0 C
EJ reef limestone Stmtltled limestone rzZa unexposcc!

0 1 2 3 4 5 m
Fig.40. Three sections through one reef in the Klinteberg Beds. The reef
is exposed in the south of the Klinteberg, about 325 m south-southwest of
the three-fork of roads close to Klinte Church. Section C forms one of the
walls of an old quarry. This quarry is mainly excavated in stratified marly
limestone of brownish grey colour. In i t s lower exposed parts, this lime-
stone is thickly bedded, with layers up to 1 m thick, which through weather-
ing may appear to be composed of a number of thinner layers, occasionally
cross-bedded. Higher up the layers of the limestone a r e on the average
3-15 cm thick. The sediment is very fossiliferous, crinoid fragments being
especially abundant and there a r e several coral colonies, generally in their
orientations of growth. Further, there a r e solitary corals, stromatoporoids
and many brachiopods.
In the right of section C it can be seen how this stratified limestone
interfingers with marly reef limestone. Most reef-building coIonies a r e
flat lenticular in this reef, with an average length of 20-30 cm. The origin
of reef growth was probably close to the corner between sections C and B.
In the lower and upper parts of the reef, the reef builders a r e flattest but
in the middle rounder forms also occur. Within the reef limestone north of
this reef centre, local intercalations of stratified limestone occur. North-
westwards, the reef thins out again between the stratified sediments, as
can also be seen in section A. The reef limestone enclosed between the
three sections probably represents about one quarter of the original reef,
which then may have had a diameter in the order of 20 m and a thickness
of not much more than 5 m.
INTERRUPTIONS AND FLUCTUATIONS IN REEF GROWTH
No doubt a great variety of factors, generally very complexly inter-

connected, has operated in the moulding of reef topography. It is most
difficult and inappropriate here to analyse each of these factors; an attempt
to do s o will be made in Chapter XIV. What has to be done first i s to
describe all the effects they brought about in the reefs and to attempt to
understand their origin. This will be done in this and the next two sections
of this chapter, and has in fact to some l e s s e r extent also come up already
in the previous two sections.
INTERRUPTIONS AND FLUCTUATIONS IN R E E F GROWTH 131
Fig.41. Photograph, showing the southern 4 m of section B in Fig.40. Klinteberg.
Interruptions in reef growth
Although in several places in Hoburgen, the exposed reef limestone is

traversed by horizontal o r subhorizontal lines o r cracks, for almost all of
these a recent origin has to be assumed, as a result of weathering. There
is, in fact, only one case where a line might follow a primary structure of
the reef, probably a plane of interrupted reef growth. This line is exposed
over a rather-long distance in the fourth hillock (Fig.217). Unfortunately it
occurs at such a height in the steep wall that over most of its extension it
cannot be directIy studied if one has no special appliances available. There
is no difference in fossil content above and beneath the line, but the volume
of marly matrix is higher at this level than anywhere else in the reef,
whereas also a few lenses of marl, with an average length of about 25 cm,
were found intercalated in the reef limestone at this level. In these m a r l
lenses, a few crinoid fragments were found but no large fossils such a s
stromatoporoids o r coral colonies o r even fragments of these. This
supports the theory of a temporarily-quieter environment which led to
increased deposition of terrigenous debris.
Whereas interruptions in reef growth a r e rare in Hoburgen, several
can be found in reefs of Hoburgen type in the Hogklint, Slite and Hemse
Beds. An example where a thin layer of marlstone traverses the entire
section through the reef limestone is shown in Fig.36. Generally, however,
an interruption in reef growth affected only part of the reef (see the left
Fig.42. Photograph of the most northern part of section B in Fig.40. Klinteberg.
part of the reef drawn in Fig.44. They may be revealed as intercalations

of some extent and generally-restricted thickness, which consist of
stratified sediment, as discussed in the section dealing with the reef
organisms and matrix. Other local interruptions in growth have led to the
formation of depressions o r pools in the reef .surface, which will be
discussed in a later section in this chapter.
Erosion of the reef surface

In the younger parts of the Hogklint Beds, some reefs a r e found which
apparently suffered from marine erosion at the time of their formation. In
the environs of Gustavsvik, for example, reefs a r e found which a r e ratber-
flatly sheared off at their top and a r e overlaid by horizontal layers of lime-
stone rich i n Algae and crinoids (Hede, 1940, p.26, fig.8).
INTERRUPTIONS AND FLUCTUATIONS IN R E E F GROWTH 133
[ N-NW
~~
S-SEI N-NE
2 3 4 9
metres
Fig.43. Section through the west-northwestern part of a reef in the

Klinteberg, about 20 m north of the reef shown i n Fig.40. At the base,
crinoid limestone, with upwards an increasing amount of crinoid fragments
and also reef debris. This deposit only faintly sags under the overlying
marly reef limestone. The latter is intersected by a zone of stratified
crinoid limestone.
KNE s-sw
- A _ - ------
ViSbY
0 tp 15 + 25m ITI reef limestone
Fig.44. Hdgklint reef, 0.28 km north-northeast of Lundsklint. The reef began

its development already during Upper Visby time. From i t s root, the lower
surface of the reef rose gradually and probably in all directions. In this way,
a reef-limestone body was formed with roughly the shape of a n inverted
elliptical cone with a widely extended base, of which the longest axis was
probably more o r less parallel to the direction of the coast line during the
time of reef development. Reefs of this form a r e also found in several
other places in the Hogklint Beds and in other stratigraphical units contain-
ing reefs of the'aoburgen type. North of the above-figured reef, the stratified
limestone shows some local faults along which small displacements have
taken place. Local occurrences of stratified limestone within the left-hand
half of the reef indicate that in places of the reef its growth has been
temporarily interrupted. There is, however, no distinct subdivision of the
reef into separate smaller bodies, a s can be seen in several reefs in the
Hogklint Beds.
This phenomenon can be observed in a much-more-striking way in

some exposures in the Hemse Beds, particularly in the north of the
Gannberg (Fig.l’7’7), where some very elongated, but thin patch reefs may
follow over each other, separated by thin zones with stratified sediment
rich in reef debris. Since the surfaces of the reef-limestone bodies a r e
notably horizontal over long distances, it is not likely that variations in the
extension of one and the same reef, as will be discussed next, have caused
the exposed pattern. More likely is reef development in very shallow water,
with presumably some variations in depth, in which recolonization of the
sea bottom by reef builders took place very quickly.
Fluctuations in the extension of the reefs
In several exposures, especially in the Hemse Beds, there are

alternations of reef limestone, reef debris, crinoid limestone with reef
debris, and other related deposits. These suggest that at least part of the
reefs have had periods of lateral expansion which alternated with periods
in which the reef retreated again. The deposits surrounding the reefs
moved backwards and forwards with the reef. Such fluctuations a r e
relatively most common at the landward side of the reefs.
An example where this phenomenon is exposed in the Hemse Beds is the

Kaupungsklint, in which close to Ardre Odekyrka, the following section is found:
0.54 m + Greyish white to light brownish-grey crinoid limestone, irregularly
bedded, marly, strongly recrystallized, contains several small nests of
calcite; carries “Megalomus“ gotlandicus.
1.00-1.30 m Stromatoporoid limestone, grey, greyish-white or light brownish-grey,
finely crystalline, strongly recrystallized, faintly marly, rather
structureless, conglomeratic in appearance.
0.65 m Light grey to light brownish-grey crinoid limestone, more-or-less-
distinct and somewhat-irregularly bedded, faintly marly, finely
crystalline, contains markedly less stromatoporoids than the rock
underlying and overlying it; “Megalomus I’ gotlandicus is present.
0.47 m + Stromatoporoid limestone of the character as above.
When going north-northeastwards it appears that the above sediments can
replace one another also in a horizontal direction. Behind the farm, about 0.2 km
north of Ardre Odekyrka crinoid limestone is exposed to a thickness of about 2 m,
partly rather rich in reef debris. Reef limestone is found there over a length of
about 10 m and a height of up to 1.4 m.
About 0.1 k m north of the farm, the wall, which is about 2 m high there,
consists of stratified marly limestone with beds 0.2-6 cm, bedding planes a r e
irregular. At the base of the wall the fossil content is high, especially in stromato-
poroids; upwards within a short distance, but nevertheless without a distinct
boundary the number of stromatoporoids decreases very strongly. Some tens of
metres further north-northeast, this stratified sediment ends over most of its height
against reef limestone, of very disorderly appearance, with mainly small reef
builders, of which several a r e not in their orientation of growth, and a marly matrix.
In the Visneklint, also belonging to the Hemse Beds, the following section has
been observed:
210 cm + Grey stromatoporoid reef limestone of Hoburgen type, with also corals,
bryozoans and crinoids; inserted some nests of stratified limestone,
generally less than a few square decimetres.
18 cm Reef talus
17 cm Vaguely stratified limestone
36 cm Reef talus
INTERRELATIONS BET WE EN REEFS 135
30 cm Vaguely stratified limestone, brownish light grey to grey and finely

crystalline
80 cm + Talus-like deposit consisting of a matrix of marly limestone with a
great number of fossils and fossil fragments, none of which i s in a
position of growth; upwards many intercalations of stratified limestone
occur, the number of reef builders decreases strongly and within a short
distance there i s , at the top, a gradual transition into more-general
limestone, not particularly fossiliferous, but with some stromatoporoids
and crinoids.
These rock types also occur elsewhere in this wall, but in varying succession
and thickness. Thus, reef talus can also be found with reef limestone both overlying
and underlying it. The alternation of rocks gives the impression of a stratified
deposit and this may have caused Hede (1929, p.47) to speak about stratified stroma-
toporoid limestone. Doubtless, however, the rocks originated at the periphery of a
reef with slight fluctuations in its extension.
INTERRELATIONS BETWEEN REEFS
Where the s e a floor and water conditions were particularly favourable

f o r reef growth, i t is not uncommon to find that s e v e r a l r e e f s began develop-
ment close to each other and almost synchronously. With continued growth
of these reefs, they became ever-more s e r i o u s competitors. The result
would be either fusion of adjacent r e e f s o r the end of one o r m o r e of the
competing reefs.
Natural selection among reefs
Particularly in Hoburgen, i t can b e seen how in many c a s e s reef-

limestone m a s s e s have been formed by a number of reefs, with sometimes
different growth rates, which grew close to, against and over each other. A
good example is provided by the seaside wall of the third burg (Fig.45).
1
'9reef I Elr e e f n EEl r e e f m
reef debris 0 5 mm
Fig.45. Section shown in the west side of the third hillock, Hoburgen.
Hamra-Sundre Beds. Reefs I and 11 are separated by stratified limestone,
in which a cave has been formed by the Littorina sea. The cave is known as
"Hoburgsgubbens Matsal" (the dining room of grandfather Hoburgen). A
s m a l l e r cave is found in the southwest. This cave has two openings, of
which the western one is drawn at the right; it s e e m s to have been excavated
by erosion of a softer p a r t of reef II. The upper p a r t of the section is taken
up by the third and largest reef.
This wall contains a large cave, known a s "Hoburgsgubbens Matsal" ("the

dining room of grandfather Hoburgen"). On the left a s well as on the right
side of this cave, a reef is exposed with stratified limestone in between.
The presence of the latter perhaps explains why a cave could be excavated
at that place by the waves of the Littorina Sea. Both reefs have expanded
over the stratified limestone. On the left end in this wall in some places,
t r a c e s of stratified limestone a r e still preserved, which contain a great
abundance of crinoid fragments, several brachiopods, but only rather few
reef builders. The difference between the unstratified and stratified lime-
stone is quite distinct.
In the middle of the back wall of the cave, the stratification in the
bedded limestone shows a kind of basin-like depression; on the left side
this interfingers with the reef limestone, and on the right side the
stratified sediment thins out against the reef limestone within a short
distance. It seems that south-southeast of the cave, a third reef was present,
which grew rather quickly and expanded also in a north-northwestward
direction, into the passage between the two reefs mentioned earlier. The
third reef soon collided with the reef on the right side. In the deeper part of
the cave, it can be seen how this led to a further narrowing of the passage
between the reefs, which now became confined by the left reef and the pro-
truding third reef. Continued obtrusion of the latter reef northwards
increasingly narrowed the zone in which stratified limestone could be deposited,
until that reef also collided with the left reef and expanded over it. It is the
third reef which forms the roof of the cave.
It is thus likely that the two small reefs died a s a result of being
buried with the reef outwash from the adjacent third reef. It is important
to note that this latter reef developed at the east, or seaward, side of the
other two. Apparently it was the most vigorous and vital of the three.
Lowenstam (1950, p.474), writing about the reefs i n the Great Lakes
a r e a of North America, reported a similar phenomenon, but one where the
conquering reef earlier had also led to the genesis of the smaller reefs,
because the zone of reef-induced turbulence in the environment of a greater
reef prevented settling of fine terrigenous clastics and favoured the
development of secondary reef centres. The greater the distance from the
primary centre, the greater the probability that the secondary reefs would
attain wave resistance, whereas more-closely-spaced building sites had
l e s s chance of survival because of encroachment of excessive reef debris.
It is doubtful whether Lowenstam's description is also applicable to
the situation found in the third hillock of Hoburgen. The stratigraphical
succession at that locality makes it most unlikely that the third reef could
have been significantly older than the two which it covered. It is more
likely that its m e r e position at the seaward side of the other two caused
its more-favourable development; otherwise the three may have started
growth under more-or-less-equal conditions.
Completing the description of the exposures presented by Hoburgen's third
hillock, one finds on both the left and right side of a second cave, with two openings,
southwest of Hoburgsgubbens Matsal, reef limestone of the right-hand reef, with
only a slight thickness, caused by the early death of that reef. The reef limestone is
thinnest in the south-southeast, being somewhat thicker right and left of the. cave,
thus forming a saucer-like depression in the reef surface. In this depression,
initially material midway between stratified and reef limestone was deposited. The
protruding third reef provided an increasing amount of debris to fill the depression;
INTERRELATIONS BETWEEN REEFS 137
I E-NE
w-sw I N-NE
5-sw I
I A
Fig.46. Section about 2 km east-northeast of Jungfrun. HGgklint Beds. The

cliff, which further northeastwards lies parallel to the present coast line,
has bent inland here. The section shown is that of the second exposure,
going inland. Three reef -limestone parts are sectioned, overlying each
other. The reef limestone exposed at the base is strongly marly. A cave
about 2.5 m long and 0.7 m high has been formed in it. Reef-building
colonies are relatively small. The matrix is rich in reef debris and
solitary corals. This reef limestone is overlaid by rather coarse crinoid
limestone with reef debris. This limestone is regularly stratified. The
middle reef limestone presumably covered the lower one from the south-
east, but never extended much further northwest than the present exposure.
This can be deduced from the presence of stratified limestone in the
northwest corner (centre of the drawing). It could not be established
whether this middle reef limestone belongs to the same reef as the reef
limestone at the base, o r whether it represents a second reef which
developed a little to the seaward of the first, and therefore under more
favourable conditions, causing the death of its landward neighbour, and
finally overgrowing it. A second complex of stratified limestone and a
third reef limestone occur on top, to which the same reasoning is
applicable. (After Manten, 1962,fig.20.)
the dips in the deposit gradually increased, as did the coarseness of the deposit.
Finally the reef extended over its debris, to build the upper part of the cliff, at the
same time reaching there its maximum extension in this direction, as is shown by
the preserved remains of a talus zone, which will be discussed later in this
chapter.
The second hillock of Hoburgen presents a few further examples

where the reef at the seaward side conquered in the competition with other
reefs. These will be described when dealing further with the exposures i n
Hoburgen in Chapter XI (pp. 415, 417, Fig.215).
Some similar situations a r e also found in the HGgklint Beds (see
Chapter XI, pp. 296, 299, 301 and Fig.46).
The reef of which the root i s found exposed in the Lithberg Grotta (Storburg,
Hoburgen) shows that in the l a t e r stages of i t s development, conditions for i t s
growth turned out to be less favourable. Whereas initially the reef expanded a t all
sides, the exposed wall makes it c l e a r that at a certain level, the growing reef
surface was forced to withdraw to i t s central p a r t (Fig.59). Close to a small cave,
above the Lithberg Grotta, a vaguely-stratified and very marly intercalation i s
present in the reef limestone; at about the same level some comparable indications
of decreased reef growth are found in the reef south of it. In the centre of the
surface of the Lithberg reef and its direct southern neighbour growth still continued
for some time, but not as long as the growth of some other neighbouring reefs, such
as the one northeast of it (partly exposed left of the Lithberg reef) and the reef some
10 m south of the two s m a l l e r reefs. On the left above the LithbergGrottaan isolated
p a r t of the reef t a l u s i s preserved, in which nearly all fossils occur in an almost
vertical position, suggesting that the reef has probably not extended much further
northwest than the place of the present cliff wall, which thus presents a peripheral
cross-section, but also that it stood well out over the surrounding sea floor. The
exposed reef limestone of both central reefs does not reach the top of the wall: the
reef limestone of the reefs northeast and south of the two does. If also the amount of
talus material around the two central reefs i s noted, the impression is obtained that
they developed slightly m o r e coastwards than the passage between the two other
r e e f s ; this passage was gradually narrowed because of expansion of the northeast
reef, which in a l a t e r stage of i t s development even managed to override the two.
The examples given suggest that with several young reefs developing
closely together, the reefs at the coastward side had the least chance to
reach large size. If they were located behind other reefs, the expansion of
these decreased water turbulence around the more coastward reefs; if the
position w a s slightly behind a passage, water turbulence and erosion
strongly increased; both could lead to the death of the affected reefs.
Competition did not necessarily conclude with the surviving reef over-
riding one o r more others. Especially in the f i r s t of the two possibilities
outlined above, it may well have been enough that the more-seaward of the
competing reefs grew faster upwards and sideways, whereby the created
lee-side environment with decreased water movement and supply of oxygen
and food, and increased sedimentation was already in itself sufficient to
retard and finally end growth of other reefs present at that lee side.
Fusion of reefs
Rapid colonization of a part of the s e a floor by reef builders is
revealed by a reef base which is close to the horizontal. Such rapid lateral
expansion may have taken place immediately after the beginning of reef
growth, but also at some later stage. When it happened later, the local
root of reef formation can be seen to be surrounded by sediment layers
older than the ones which directly underlie the reef base. It now happens
that some of the patch reefs in Gotland of which the base is exposed for a
length of some importance, do not show only one, but two o r more such
local wide-angle deepenings of reef limestone into the underlying stratified
sediments; these deepenings may each represent a section through roots
of reef formation. This suggests that long patch reefs may have started
growth on more than one place and as a result of fusion attained the length
which they show. It may be assumed that with the rapid and flat coloniza-
tion that took place, little reef debris was produced and consequently the
ends could join without a debris deposit i n between, so that it is hard to

discover where the actual fusion took place, except that slight variations in
the slope of the reef base might give some rough idea a s to approximately
where two reefs fused. Such slight variations in the course of the reef base
may, as they are found now, however, also have had other causes and in
themselves, they cannot be taken a s proof of the lateral fusion of reefs. An
example of a patch reef which may have originated through fusion of some
earlier smaller patch reefs, is shown in Fig.154.
It is not impossible in some cases that smaller reefs of a more-
lenticular o r irregular shape, which started growth closely together, may
have also fused. This is suggested by exposures such a s the one drawn in
Fig.70.
Compound ye efs
In the Hogklint Beds it can often be seen that several more-or-less-

lens-shaped reef-limestone bodies occur very closely together, to form a
large reef-limestone massif. The size of the individual bodies varies
largely, between only one metre o r so to several tens of metres in
horizontal extension and several m e t r e s in thickness. The combined massif
may be up to 120 m long and about 20 m thick. The problem in such situa-
tions is whether the individual bodies are to be regarded as separate reefs,
which by their close proximity and growth have joined o r fused, o r whether
the larger massif should be regarded as one reef. Between the reef-lime-
stone bodies, mantles of stratified limestone are found. The transitions
from obvious reef limestone to apparently stratified crinoid limestone take
place with bewildering rapidity, both laterally and vertically. In some
cases, these separating mantles of stratified sediment a r e only thin and/or
they may after some distance even wedge out, making the boundary between
adjacent reef-limestone bodies indistinct (Fig.37, 48, 147). In other cases
the mantles a r e thicker (Fig.46, 152), but in a horizontal direction, they may
after a short distance abut abruptly against another reef-limestone body
( T a t con ti^ on p 142)
Fig.47. Example of a raised cliff wall, predominantly consisting of reef

limestone in lengthy patch-reef development. North of Brissund. HGgklint
Beds.
Fig.48. Lundsklint, about 17 km north-northeast of Visby. At the base,

interstratified marly limestone and marlstone of the Upper Visby Beds is
exposed. The upper half of the section shows reef limestone and stratified
limestone, belonging to the Hiigklint Beds. The left part of the reef i s sub-
divided into some smaller units by means of narrow mantles of stratified
limestone. In the right part, local and more o r l e s s horizontal planes
intersect the reef limestone. These planes appear in the section as
weathered-out grooves. Also narrow, subvertical occurrences of stratified
sediment are present. The stratified limestone north of the reef limestone
i s a coarse-spathic crinoid limestone, also containing solitary corals and
washed-in stromatoporoids and halysites. (After Manten, 1962, fig.12.)
I N-NE s-s w
Fig.49. Section about 0.65 km north of Lundsklint. The main reef limestone
occurrence belongs to the same reef as the reef limestone shown in Fig.50.
North of it is a smaller reef. Both belong to the Hijgklint Beds. They over-
lie the Upper Visby interstratification of marly limestone and marlstone,
which shows a flexure-like deformation, caused by differential compression
under the influence of the overlying rocks.
I
W-NW E-SE
TnzI Massive limestone
.g.50. Legend see p. 142.

N-NE s-sw
0 25 m
reef limestone Bstratlfled limestone marlstone @ scree

Fig.51. Reefs belonging to the Hogklint Beds in the Luseklint, approx. 16 km
north-northeast of Visby. Note that the subdivision of the reef-limestone
m a s s into smaller units is distinct at the north-northeast and south-
southwest sides of the exposure, but not in its central part.
(Fig.51), showing that deposition of stratified sediment at one place was

synchronous with reef formation in close proximity. In some exposures
the mantles are so well developed that the bodies do indeed appear a s
separate reefs (Fig.49,50; compare also the southern and northern parts of
the cliff section presented in Fig.136).
In between reef -limestone massifs which show such a subdivision into
smaller bodies, others occur in which no stratified intercalations a r e found
at all. Compare Luseklint (Fig.51) and Lundsklint (Fig.48) with the more
than 100 m long and 20 m high reef-limestone mass, which is located only
0.28 km north of Lundsklint and does not show any subdivision (Fig.44). Its
development is comparable to the reef in the HXftingsklint (Fig.38). See
also the reef exposed about 0.5 km north of Lundsklint (Fig.52).
The exposed wall of the Luseklint (Fig.51) shows clearly that a
development with a number of individual smaller reef-limestone bodies is
distinct in the peripheral parts of the reef-limestone mass, but not in its
more central parts. The same pattern is suggested by the cliff walls of
Snackgardsbaden (Fig.133, 1361, where no individual smaller bodies a r e
visible in section BC and in the central and southern parts of section AB,
whereas these bodies are clearly present in the north’ernmost part of
section AB. The examples suggest a process with a comparatively rapidly
Fig.50. Section about 0.62 km north of Lundsklint. At the base, stratified

marly limestone and marlstone and a small reef, belonging to the Upper
Visby Beds. The local deposits of hard and massive limestone at the
right of this reef, which a r e enclosed in stratified marly sediment, are
remarkable; they seem to be restricted to the close environment of the
reefs. Higher in the cliff wall, reef limestone of HSgklint age is found. This
is overlaid by stratified HSgklint limestone. At the right of this reef is a
narrow intercalation of stratified limestone, which divides the reef into a
smaller and a larger unit. (After Manten, 1962, fig.15.)
DEPRESSIONS 143
Fig.52. Reef about 0.5 km north of Lundsklint. Hijgklint Beds. The reef i s
an unstratified mass, predominantly built by stromatoporoid colonies. The
rock is strongly recrystallized. It is surrounded by stratified limestone
with crinoid fragments. (After Manten, 1962, fig.19.)
expanding reef of the inverted-cone form, which at its margins joined o r

fused with other, smaller reefs. See also the situation pictured in Fig.146;
had the main reef expanded somewhat further south-southwestwards, it
would have covered o r fused with the adjacent small reef. The situation
shown in Fig.46 has presumably developed through a process described
before a s natural selection among reefs, thus also through the contributions
of more than one reef.
It has already been described how within a reef, intercalations of
stratified sediment can be commonly found. It is not impossible, and for
some exposures even likely, that these may also have contributed in
causing the compound nature of some reef-limestone masses.
DEPRESSIONS
Two main types of depressions can be distinguished, those which

developed as basins between some closely-neighbouring reefs, and those
which originated within one reef when a certain part of the reef surface did
not grow upwards at the s a m e rate as the a r e a s around it. In the latter
case, reef debris could at a certain moment s t a r t to accumulate in the
depression, thus building the floor of the depression again up to a level
approaching that of the surrounding reef surface, after which reef builders
generally colonized the a r e a again. But it could also happen that organisms
other than the reef builders common on the reef surface profited by the
sheltered conditions in the depression and thus a different fauna developed
there. In the latter case, the author prefers to call such a lower a r e a of the
reef surface a pool. An intermediate form is that in which the common reef
builders themselves flattened out temporary unevennesses in the reef
topography; examples of this have been seen in the LPnnaberg (Slite Beds,
p. 323).
Znt e w e ef bas ins
In several places in Hoburgen, passages o r basins developed between

small reefs that grew close to each other. They could be filled with reef
debris or stratified limestone containing a varying amount of such debris.
A good example of an interreef basin is found in the second hillock of
Hoburgen (Fig.53), a little north of the rich stromatoporoid development
pictured in Fig.214. At both the left (northwest) and right (south) side of
the depression, reef limestone is found, while from the shape of the layers
of stratified material in the basin it seems very likely that a reef has been
present also west of it; o r perhaps the reef at the northwest side once
extended a little farther to the south.
The lower part of the basin is filled with talus material, which most
likely came mainly from the reef south of it. This is overlaid by stratified
limestone with only a limited content of reef debris. Thereafter in the basin
a tongue of another reef invaded from the east. The weight of this extend-
ing reef further contributed to give the layers of the stratified limestone
in the basin a saucer-like shape. At the left side of this reef tongue, a
narrow, almost vertical zone of talus is found, not more than 0.5 m thick.
Also at the right of the reef tongue there is some talus, over which the
reef expanded southwards. Thereafter the invading reef came into contact
with the reef south of the basin, but soon afterwards its growth terminated.
Slightly south of the middle of the west wall of the second burg of
Hoburgen, there is another basin, which developed between a t least two
reefs. It is filled with very marly sediment in which reef outwash is
embedded, mainly stromatoporoids that got loosened from the reef, but
also coral colonies; further crinoid remains, several solitary corals and a
few brachiopods a r e found in it. Crinoids a r e nowhere a s richly abundant
in the interreef basins in Hoburgen as they a r e in the crinoid limestone
("Hoburg marble") which is normally found around the reefs. Higher in the
wall the interreef basin and the two exposed reefs flanking it are overlaid
by stratified limestone of which the layers show a slight downward buckling
where they cover the basin sediments. Recent erosion there has led to the
formation of a cave.
In the majority of cases the reef debris and crinoid material in inter-
reef basins is coarser than elsewhere around the reefs. However, in some
instances more sheltered places were created. There the deposited
material had little to suffer from water movement. In such places even
DEPRESSIONS 145
Fig.53. Hoburgen, detail of the southwestern part of the second hillock. A

basin is s h a m which developed in between three o r perhaps even four
reefs. The reef limestone part which is visible at the right, belongs to the
reef very rich in stromatoporoids, part of which is shown in Fig.214. This
reef also supplied the debris on which the hammer lies. On top of this
debris, stratified limestone has been deposited. Finally, the reef at the
west side expanded to such an extent that i t penetrated into the basin,
causing a deflexion of the limestone layers which it overlies. Hamra-
Sundre Beds.
intact crinoid calyces can be found, as appeared, e.g., in the south cliff of
Brissund (Fig.140). An interesting observation made in the latter locality
was that on top of one of the crinoidcalyces, over the anal opening, a specimen of
Platyceras cornuturn Hisinger was seen in its living position.
A rather peculiar interreef basin is the one shown in Fig.54, 55, 56,
presenting almost a transitional form to the filled depressions within a
reef, to be described next.
Filled depressions within the reefs
The reef limestone at the south side of the interreef basin in the
middle of Hoburgen's second hillock, described above, appears to have been
formed by one of a few centres of growth into which a reef, which initially
developed as a whole, at a certain stage has fallen apart. Apparently the
individual growth centres differed much in vigour. Between the part bound-
ing the interreef basin and the one south of it, a depression in the reef
Fig.54. Exposure about 0.8 km north of Lundsklint, showing three reefs.

The lowermost of these is the least well exposed and is f o r the major part
still surrounded by Upper Visby sediments. The upper two reefs are, at
their base, connected through an approximately 4 m long isthmus of reef
limestone. These reefs are illustrated in more detail in Fig.55 and 56.
They belong to the Hisgklint Beds. The isthmus is underlaid by limestone
with interstratified thin marly layers and is overlaid by stratified, hard
limestone with reef debris.
-O lm
DEPRESSIONS 147
Fig.56. The northern reef of Fig.54. The reef r e s t s over an alternation of

limestone layers, about 20 cm thick, with marly layers, about 5 cm thick.
The highest layer is marly and is ruggedly overlaid by the stromatoporoid
reef limestone. At the right hand top is a mantle of sediments, about 0.5 m
thick, that forms the transition from the reef to the normal stratified
limestone. It is somewhat marly and contains reef debris.
surface initially developed, filled with stratified limestone and reef debris,
until the southern growth centre, which was larger and apparently also more
vigorous, expanded over the depression. Periods of vigorous growth
apparently alternated also in this growth centre with times of lesser growth.
In a small indentation in the wall it can be seen how within this reef part,
another depression began to develop, though it was soon covered again by
reef limestone. Elsewhere it shows a distinct increase in matrix volume
in some places, locally even leading to a vague stratification within the
reef. Nevertheless this southern growth centre managed to survive the
other ones; it is the only one of this reef which extends to the plateau of
the second hillock, but while standing on this plateau it can be seen how
from all sides the stratified limestone expands over the reef limestone.
Fig. 55. The southern reef of Fig. 54. Conglomeratic reef limestone, due to
stromatoporoid colonies with rather round shapes, which are separated by
a marly matrix. The upper part of the reef shows several crinoid remains.
At the left in the drawing is stratified limestone ending against the reef. The
rock is whitish in colour and relatively hard. The layers ar.e on the average
10-15 cm thick, with only little or hardly any m a r l in between. They show
only a few recognizable fossils.
The example illustrates, a s do the .data presented earlier in this

chapter about fluctuations and interruptions in reef growth, that the reefs
of Hoburgen type were liable to comparatively rapid changes in form. It
seems probably that they hardly ever remained perfectly stationary but
generally slowly advanced o r retreated. Every movement they made
affectedin some degree the water circulation around them, thereby influencing
fayourably or unfavourably the growth of the organisms further on the
reef. They may be compared to huge living pulsating organisms, slowly
stretching out an a r m here and withdrawing one there, in some places show-
ing youth and vigour, in others disease and death; capable of withstanding
the rough buffetings of storms and surf and yet extremely sensitive to some
ostensibly much slighter changes in the environmental conditions.
In part of the exposures of Hoburgen-type reef limestone, cracks a r e

found. Of these particularly the horizontal and subhorizontal ones deserve
special attention. Good examples are found in the raukar of the Lannaberg
(Slite, Slite Beds).
Two types of horizontal and subhorizontal cracks can be distinguished
there. Those of the f i r s t type often cut indiscriminately through both matrix
and colonies of stromatoporoids and corals. The reef limestone above and
below the crack is of similar character. Cracks of this type a r e also found
in all possible other directions, up to vertical. These cracks have undoubted
ly formed after induration of the rock.
Directly above some other cracks the fossil content of the reef lime-
stone is different from that underneath them. Thus reef builders may be
much smaller and thinner there; o r corals may temporarily outnumber the
stromatoporoids. These a r e cracks of the second type. They can be
followed for distances of 1-7 m and in some cases in more than one rauk.
Three-dimensionally, they often show the shape of a basin, with rising
edges which gradually fade away in the reef limestone. These edges vary in
height between one and a few decimetres. It seems likely that these cracks
a r e connected with original phenomena in the reef -limestone structure,
presumably parts which for some time were lower than the surrounding
growing reef surface. In a few instances it has been observed that a crack
indicated the base line of a debris-filled depression, containing crinoid
fragments and reef debris which were overlaid again by reef builders in
situ. On one occasion, four basin-shaped cracks were found above each
other. In the Lannaberg, most of these cracks of the second type were
found in the north, that is, more at the landward side of the reef.
In fact there is no sharp distinction between pockets of stratified

sediment o r reef debris, found between reef-building colonies, and filled
depressions in the reef surface. It is mainly a matter of size. In part of
the larger and thicker filled depressions, phenomena of compaction and
buckling can be observed similar to those often found in the stratified
sediments underneath the reefs.
If the debris, filling a depression, is very coarse and comprises many
complete reef builders, it is sometimes difficult to distinguish it from the
surrounding reef limestone. In the Solklint (Slite, Slite Beds) a debris-
filled depression was recognized only because out of ten coral colonies
which were found embedded closely together in some reef debris, not l e s s
than nine were upside down.
THE ROOTS OF R E E F FORMATION 149
The distinction from the true reef limestone can also be blurred when
i n the part of a reef surface that developed into a depression, reef growth
never completely came to an end. The m a r l o r fine debris deposited in
such a depression may then still enclose some reef builders in their grow-
ing positions and the result may vary from an intercalation of stratified
material with some reef builders to only-vaguely-stratified reef limestone.
Pools in the reefs
From the foregoing subsection, it will be clear that also no sharp

boundary can be drawn between debris-filled depressions and pools
characterized by a different faunal composition. Lower portions in a reef
surface were always susceptible to debris accumulation. Local conditions
may have been determinative as to whether, in the depression, organisms
could develop o r not; and where the first applied, such organisms in the
one case settled directly on the floor of the depression, in another on a
basal layer of debris. Furthermore, in the one case, the organisms had
little to suffer from an influx of reef debris; whereas in another pool the
remains of these organisms a r e mixed unsystematically with debris washed
into the pool from the surrounding sea floor.
Since the organisms in a pool grew in a relatively-sheltered part of
the reef, generally not many colonies in pools a r e found detached and out
of their normal positions. Where many colonies in a depression a r e not i n
their life orientations, these a r e generally massive colonies rather than the
branched ones which often characterize the pools, and these will then more
likely be washed in from the surrounding parts of the reef. Also fragmental
debris is then generally found. But what about those massive colonies that
a r e found in their correct orientations? These may either also have been
swept into the pool o r have developed there. Which of the two applies is
often difficult o r even impossible to determine.
THE ROOTS OF REEF FORMATION
In some places in Hoburgen it can be observed how a reef began to

develop on the s e a bottom and from its centre of origin gradually expanded
laterally over progressively-younger layers of stratified sediment.
A beautiful example of a reef root is found in the middle of the west
wall of Storburg. It i s exposed below the overhanging part with Hoburgs-
gubbens Trappa (Fig.77)) at the left side, in a cave. It is a strikingly-untidy
mass, because many of the fossils occur in orientations other than those of
growth; there are also many fragments of fossils, and the marly matrix
occupies a rather-great volume of the total reef rock. A s reef builders,
several compound and solitary corals are present, together with many
stromatoporoids; among the latter a few large specimens are found, but the
majority a r e small-lenticular ones. In the matrix some crinoid remains
occur. The developing reef very soon produced a thin layer of debris
around it, over which it expanded. The weight of the developing reef led to
the formation of a saucer-like depression in the sediments beneath (Fig.57).
The sediment in the direct environment of the reef root is very poor i n
fossils and consists of an alternation of layers of argillaceous marly
Fig. 57. Storburg, Hoburgen. Hamra-Sundre Beds. Buckling of stratified

sediments underneath the root of a reef, as exposed in a cave in the middle
of the western cliff.
Fig. 58. Storburg, Hoburgen. Hamra-Sundre Beds. Alternation of argillaceous

marlstone and hard, marly limestone, close to the root of a reef. The
photograph was taken on the right at the back of the small cave visible on
Fig. 57.
THE ROOTS OF R E E F FORMATION 151
material with layers of hard and splintery limestone, which are a few
centimetres thick on the average (Fig. 58).
Considering the general picture presented by the central part of the
west wall of Hoburgen's Storburg (Fig.77), it may be that the reef root
described has been the beginning of a secondary centre of reef growth,
which after a short time fused with the parent reef. No distinct boundary
could be established with the reef limestone of the large and evidently-
older reef exposed north of it.
In Lithberg Grotta (Lithberg Cave), in the north of the Storburg, another reef
root is found, surrounded by stratified sediment. It is not impossible that in this case
reef growth began at two different places, but close to each other, because at the left
side in this cave the boundary between reef and stratified limestone is seen to be a
little lower than in the middle of that cave. The reef root is relatively rich in fossils:
although flat reef builders dominate, there a r e also several rounder ones: stromato-
poroids a r e in the majority. The stratified sediment in the back of this cave, especial-
ly close to the reef root, is rather marly and shows a vague alternation of softer
marly layers with harder ones of marly limestone, but the alternation is less well
developed than in the exposure north of Hoburgsgubbens Trappa. A s far as can be
seen, the reef that grew out of the root in Lithberg Grotta expanded all around.
Southwards, it extended over its own talus until it soon abuted against the talus of a
presumably slightly older reef (Fig.59).
An outcrop of lesser quality occurs in the south of the second burg, close to
the reef part rich in stromatoporoids, shown in Fig.214. This reef root also shows a
rather-untidy building, with a great many fossil fragments as well as fossils that are
not in their life orientations; the whole is embedded in a matrix of strongly-marly
limestone. There, too, in the very beginning of reef growth, the stromatoporoids
already outnumbered the compound corals. Also solitary corals, crinoid remains and
brachiopods were found.
A little south of Hoburgsgubbens Trappa, in the Storburg of Hoburgen, the
lowermost part of the cliff shows a rock which in all likelihood was deposited very
close to the base of a reef, which later on expanded over it. It is a marly sediment
very rich in fossils, among which especially the numerous thin and faintly wavy
tabular stromatoporoids a r e notable. It is overlaid by reef talus (Fig.60). More
information on the general development of the sediments underneath reefs will be
given in a later section of this chapter.
N s
Fig.59. Northern part of the west wall of Storburg, Hoburgen. In the centre,
two smaller reefs surrounded by a talus mantle. The reefs a r e overridden
by a third and larger reef which had its point of origin about northeast of
the other two and the peripheral section of which is exposed in the left of
the wall. At the right of the two reefs, stratified fragment limestone is
found, after a short distance followed again by reef limestone (cf. Fig.77).
Fig.60. Sediment very rich in flat stromatoporoids, deposited very close to

the base of a reef, and overlaid by reef debris. Middle of the western wall
of Storburg, Hoburgen. Hamra-Sundre Beds.
Exposures in other stratigraphical units confirm the observations

in Hoburgen that in the majority of cases, already in and around the roots
of reef formation, stromatoporoids predominate. There is no general
faunistic zonation in reefs of Hoburgen type.
FISSURES
In some exposures of Hoburgen-type reef Iimestone, especially in the

Slite Beds, but also in a few reefs in the Hiigklint and Hemse Beds, fissures
a r e found traversing the rock.
The reef limestone exposed in Hejnum HPllar (see p. 325) shows several
vertical cracks, up to 1 m deep; some a r e up to 15 cm wide, others just a
few centimetres. There is a strongly-dominant 120°direction (E 3 O O S ) . The
fissures a r e fairly straight and there a r e no indications that they were
originally filled.
Also in the reef limestone of Gisslauseklint, about 3 km east of Othem
(p. 325), several vertical and subvertical cracks a r e found. Some of these,
with northeast o r southeast directions, almost certainly a r e joints. A few,
however, with northeast directions are characterized by weathered sur-
faces covered with enormous amounts of fine reef debris. Fragments
l a r g e r than 2 cm hardly occur, the majority being much smaller. There a r e
indications that once the entire cracks ware filled with such debris. The
cracks traverse reef -limestone parts which a r e relatively poor in large
reef builders.
These fissures a r e found only in reefs of large horizontal extension.
Therefore, it s e e m s likely that their origin is connected with reef expansion
STY LOLITES 153
and w a s due to strain set up when younger reef parts progressed over
unconsolidated sea-floor deposits which underwent compaction under the
weight of the growing reef.
Since such fissures a r e more characteristically found in reef of
Holmhallar type, a further discussion on their nature is postponed until the
next chapter (pp. 200-205).
S TYLOLITES
In some reef limestone exposures, stylolite seams can be observed.

They a r e much l e s s common there than they a r e in several exposures of
stratified, finely-crystalline limestone. In these stratified limestones,
especially in the Slite and Hemse Beds, the stylolite seams generally, seen
on a large scale, a r e parallel both to the orientation of the bedding planes
and to the other stylolites observable in the exposure, even though they
apparently run independently of each other. In the reef limestones, on the
other hand, several of the stylolites strongly deviate, even up to go", from
a horizontal direction. They may even c r o s s each other, o r divide into two
separate branches. Stylolites in uneven-grained stratified limestones take
an intermediate position. No stylolites have been observed in the coarse
crinoid limestones.
The formation of the stylolites can be explained by a process of

differential chemical solution in indurated sediments, under pressure, and
with deposition of insoluble residues in situ. This is the solution-pressure
theory of Stockdale (1922, 1943). Two other theories on the origin of stylo-
lites, advanced by Shaub (1939, 1949, 1955) and Prokopovich (1952) a r e
inconsistent with the available data on stylolites as observed in Gotland
(Manten, 1966b, 1968).
The greater variance in the orientation of stylolite seams in the reef
limestones may be explained by inhomogeneities in this sediment, which
led to local anomalous directions of the pressures, during solution.
Of the several examples which illustrate that solution of hard rock has
actually taken place, an especially explicit one has been reproduced a s
Fig.61.
REEF-SURROUNDING SEDIMENTS
The stratified sediments enveloping the reefs can be separated into

those underlying the reefs, those occurring lateral to the reefs and those
overlying the reefs. Such a division simplifies their description, but it
should always be kept in mind that there a r e no sharp boundaries o r even
distinct patterns i n the distribution of the various sediments. The sediments
laterally surrounding the reefs can be further subdivided into the talus
mantle and stratified limestone with crinoid remains and reef debris; the
talus mantle is often absent, but where present, it passes outwards with-
out sharp boundary into the crinoid limestone with reef debris.
Fig.61. Vertical section through a stromatoporoid colony (Stromatoporellu

sp.), crossed by a stylolite seam. A cf. Syringoporu corallite, enclosed by
the stromatoporoid, shows that solution has caused a shortening of at
least 2 mm. Reef limestone. Hamra-Sundre Beds, Hoburgen. (After Manten,
1966b, fig. 3.)
Stratified sediments underneath the reefs
Normally approximately the same stratified sediments a r e found

underneath the lowest point of a reef of the Hoburgen type a s elsewhere i n
the same beds where there a r e no overlying reefs. This is generally a
dense o r finely crystalline, somewhat marly limestone. The bedding planes
a r e often covered by a film o r thin layer of marl, and in some cases there
is even an alternation of layers of m a r l and limestone. In some localities a
coarser and more fossiliferous limestone is found. Whether deposition of
coarser and fossiliferous limestone o r of fine limestone poor in fossils did
take place may possibly have been determined by the intensity of current
action over the s e a floor.
In the stratified limestone, small coral colonies a r e found locally,
often in their position of growth. Their development was somewhat faster
than the velocity of sedimentation of the limestone, with the result that they
soon extended slightly over the surrounding sea floor. As they got older,
their velocity of growth decreased and some extra deposition of mud might
easily have caused their deaths. Especially m a r l deposition may often have
been fatal, since several coral colonies a r e covered by a m a r l film such a s
found on several bedding planes.
Solitary corals, and also bryozoans in places, a r e generally more
common in the sediment underneath the reefs than colonies of corals and
stromatoporoids, which indicates that the environmental requirements of
the latter were somewhat higher. However, they were present, and slight
improvements in growth conditions caused them to increase in number and
to s t a r t reef building. In a few localities, small lumps of limestone in
biohermal development represent attempts to form reefs which failed at a
very early stage, but in most cases, the reef growth succeeded.
Some of the Lower Hogklint reefs originated in the uppermost Upper
Visby Beds o r at the Visby - Hogklint boundary (Fig.44, 54, 147). In
REEF- SURROUNDING SEDIMENTS 155
NE
K X . % ( *
x x x
3 2 1
-0 lm
I,"xl reef limestme reef debris stratified limestone
Fig.62. Detailed section, showing the contact between stratified limestone

and reef limestone in the Hjannklint, about 1.45 km southwest of Halls
Fisklage. Hogklint Beds. The basal stratified limestone is fossiliferous
and of varying coarseness. At three places, the stratified limestone pene-
trates into the reef limestone. All three penetrating wedges a r e finely
crystalline and poor in macroscopically-recognizable fossil remains. The
reef debris is especially rich in fragments of solitary and social corals in
a calcareous matrix. The boundary between reef debris and reef limestone
in between the stratified wedges 2 and 3, can be followed northeastwards
in the reef limestone. It separates the basal reef limestone with small
stromatoporoids and reef debris from the overlying reef limestone in
which larger stromatoporoids are the main reef builders.
contrast to the general situation with Hoburgen-type reefs, around the

roots of these early reef f o r m t i o n s , local and thick limestone layers a r e
usually found, similar to those occurring underneath the Upper Visby reefs
which have been described in the previous chapter.
The actual boundary between stratified sediment and overlying reef
limestone generally is somewhat irregular. In some cases, however,
especially underneath the extensive flanks of patch reefs, the boundary can
be remarkably plain (Fig.35). In a few other cases the stratified sediment
penetrates in wedges the basal reef limestone (Fig.62, 156).
In many exposures, the stratified limestones ,have sagged underneath
the reef -limestone masses overlying them. The phenomenon which caused
this could best be called "differential compression" (different weights on
the same material), rather than "differential compaction" (the same weight
on different materials). The dips in the sagging sediment, underlying and
bordering a reef, can be up to 35O, but a r e generally much less. The
steepest dips a r e found where close underneath the reef-carrying layers a
marlstone complex occurs. Where compression was very strong in such
. * . . I x x = *
j % j l l j . l s *
. . I * * ~ " I I X I I I I
. , " 1 . 1 . . 1 1
l " x . x * . "
" " . . . . X . *
* L X X * X . * X
" " E L \
* X I * X I "
X " X l ( . "
. " X I X " l i
" X X * X *
* X " X X
SE NW
Fig.63. Hallshukklint, about 0.27-0.21 km southeast of the Hallshuk light-

house, showing the location of Fig.73 (a) and Fig.64 (b). In the southeast,
26 m of the section is formed by stratified limestone with a number of
interstratified marlstone layers. In the rest of the section, the stratified
limestone is overlaid by reef limestone. At only one place does the
stratified limestone at the base reach a height of about 5 m. A cave has
developed there, indicating that this sediment is l e s s resistant to erosion
than the reef limestone. The stratified material was most probably
deposited in between two reefs. At the basal lateral contacts between reef
and stratified limestone, the stratified sediment is folded, due to the
squeezing out of stratified sediment from underneath the reef, as a
consequence of the heavy burden placed upon it. A l l sediments belong to the
HOgklint Beds.
cases some layers may even have been squeezed out from underneath the
reef. Also fold phenomena a r e occasionally found (Fig.63, 64).
Differential compression is probably also mainly responsible for the
rather undulant upper boundary of the Upper Visby Beds along the north-
west coast of Gotland. These beds generally reach higher in places where
the overlying Hjgklint Beds developed as stratified sediment. A similar
phenomenon is found in the Eke Beds. The stratified limestones underneath
some Eke reefs is thin and overlies the Hamra marlstone; the limestone
layers show sag dips up to 35O.
A stromatoporoidal deposit as shown in Fig.60 is not a common
phenomenon underneath a reef.
Underneath the more peripheral parts of the reefs, fossiliferous

limestone is generally found (Fig.65). This deposit is usually coarse o r
medium grained, but is sometimes finely crystalline. The coarseness of
the sediment and the number of fossils contained in it can vary without any
apparent regularity in both the vertical and horizontal directions within a
given layer, as well as between successive layers. A s a rule, the sediment
REEF-SURROUNDING SEDIMENTS 157
SE NW
x x x x x x x x x x x x x n x ~
x x x x x x u u x x a x m x x
x x x x J ( x x x x x n x x x
solid reef limestone reef detritus
conglomeratic reef limestone stratified limestones
Fig. 64. Detailed section, showing the contact between stratified and reef
limestone at b in Fig.63. Hallshukklint. H6gklint Beds. The stratified
limestone encloses a body of reef debris, against which the surrounding
layers end. The layer on top of it is extremely rich in fossils, particularly
solitary corals; the number of fossils decreases northwestwards. The basal
reef limestone, overlying this layer, has a conglomeratic structure, with
colonies in rather a marly matrix. The remaining reef limestone shows a
solid structure.
is especially rich in crinoid remains. Favourable conditions for reef growth

were usually also favourable for an abundant crinoid development; crinoid
limestone could be formed even in an early stage of reef growth. The colour
of the rock varies; it may be yellowish o r brownish-grey, locally light
greenish-grey, grey to whitish-grey, and often red-mottled.
In addition to the crinoids, especially stromatoporoids and thin coral
colonies a r e generally present; also solitary corals, brachiopods, bryozoans
and a few gastropods are usually found. In comparison to the stromato-
poroids in the reef, those in the underlying sediment are as a rule
distinctly smaller, with a horizontal diameter averaging l e s s than 7 cm in
several localities; some a r e lenticular o r dome-shaped, but most a r e
tabular. As far a s can be ascertained, most of the flat stromatoporoids and
corals a r e in their normal orientation, and only a small fraction a r e upside
down. It can be seen that some of the reef builders enclosed in the lower-
x
-x x x x x x
Coralliferous crinoid Limestone
Fig.65. Detailed section of the contact between stratified limestone and

reef limestone at b in Fig.5'0. Hallshukklint. Hjgklint Beds. At the base is
crystalline stratified limestone, which passes upwards into an extremely
fossiliferous limestone, largely built by solitary corals and crinoid r e -
mains. The layers enclose a coral colony which s e e m s to be in the same
position as during growth. Thinner layers of marlstone lie between the
limestone layers. The thickest of these contains a small coral colony,
lying upside down. Above it lies a stromatoporoid colony. The overlying
reef limestone contains m a r l in small pockets. (After Manten, 1962,
fig.233
most reef limestone started life on stratified sediment deposited laterally

to a lower and earlier part of the reef. Branched corals o r bryozoans a r e
represented by fragments, although occasionally a large piece of up to
20 x 20 x 10 cm is found in its original coherent form. Algal balls with an
average diameter of 2-3 cm and occasionally up to 10 cm a r e found in
several localities.
The thickness of the crinoid limestone varies. In one place, there may
be only one layer of a few to some tens of centimetres thickness, while in
others there is a complex of layers up to about 1 m or more thick. The
layers, often about 2-5 cm thick, may wedge out over short distances o r
show a tendency towards current bedding. In many cases, films or thin
layers of m a r l occur on the bedding planes. A s a rule, there is l e s s marl
the closer one gets to the reef base.
An example of the upward decrease of m a r l i n a section through

sediments underlying reef limestone was measured underneath the northern
part of a Hogklint reef about 0.5 km south of Sigsarvebodar, where the reef
limestone is mainly exposed in raukar. The succession from the reef lime-
stone down is given in Table X.
The decreasing occurrence of m a r l upwards to the reef limestone is
even more apparent when we summarize the thickness of the sediment
types per each successive 25 cm (Table XI).
In the limestone underneath the peripheral parts of a reef, there
generally is a distinct upwards increase in the amount of reef debris, which
may even become the dominant constituent in the uppermost part of it, as
will be shown while discussing the reef talus.
A notable section through stratified limestones underneath a reef was found in

the Hjannklint (Hall Parish) (Fig.66). In the south, there i s a c o a r s e and fossiliferous
limestone at the base, which is especially rich in crinoid remains. It i s overlaid by a
limestone l a y e r , the lower and upper side of which are both strongly hummocky, so
that the layer as a whole resembles a string of very large beads. The layer can also
easily be followed because of i t s brownish colour, which contrasts with the yellowish
grey of the underlying limestone and the greyish white of the overlying limestone.
The "beads layer" i s covered by a complex of limestone l a y e r s which very
irregularly interdigitate. The weathered rock falls apart into angular pieces of
varying size and thickness. The limestone i s coarse, and rich in such fossils a s
stromatoporoids, crinoids, bryozoans, branches of branched coral colonies, and
small massive coral colonies; all fossils are strongly recrystallized and sometimes
they are in a beautiful way partly liberated on bedding planes. P a r t of the fossils i s
probably reef detritus. The rock has a distinctly stratified appearance, even though
the 1-7 cm thick layers cannot as a rule be followed more than 0.3 m. Three layers
are exceptions to this (see Fig.66). Layer 1 i s a very thin layer of marly, scaly-
weathering material occurring closely above the "beads layer". Layer 2 consists of
very fine limestone which contains no fossils and i s thinly stratified; i t s thickness i s
about 3 cm, and its colour i s yellowish grey. In the very south of the sketched
section, this layer i s not particularly distinct, but after some m e t r e s , it i s well
developed. Layer 3 is s i m i l a r to layer 1.
N
=strotifled limestone
Elreef limestone
ElspR1OI zones
E J scree
. . . . . . . .. .. .. A.= .$3 . &-., . .

. I I . . x
x . . I . I
* 3
Fig.66. Section exposed in the HjLnnklint in north Gotland, about where a

small road connects the roads Hallshuk - Hall and Hallshuk - Norrby.
Hdgklint Beds. F o r a detailed explanation, see the text.
160 THE HOBURGEN R E E F TYPE
TABLE X
Stratigraphical succession underneath a Hogklint reef about 0.5 km
south of Sigsarvebodar
reef limestone
23 cm crinoid limestone
9 cm reef limestone
1 cm marlst one
1.5 cm crinoid limestone
0.25 cm marlstone '

0.2 cm marlstone
<0.1 cm marlstone
5 cm marlstone
0.1 cm marlstone
0.5 cm marlstone
1.5 cm marlstone very rich in fossils, especially crinoids
2 cm marlstone
0.1 cm marlstone
<0.1 cm marlstone
2.5 cm fossiliferous marlstone
0.8 cm marlstone
0.5 cm marlstone
0.7 cm marlstone
8 cm very fossiliferous marlstone
TABLE XI
Stratigraphical succession of Table IX summarized per 25 cm
Reef limestone Crinoid limestone Marlstone
25 - -
- 25 -
9 14.45 1.55
- 15.1 9.9
- 13.1 11.9
REE F-SURROUNDING SEDIMENTS 161
The part of the wall in the south of Fig.66 from the scree up to layer 3 , forms
a rock shelter. The sediment above it is reef limestone which, about 8-10 m from
the place which i s represented at the right margin of the drawing, shows a beautiful
example of wealthy stromatoporoid development.
The stratified limestone forming the lower part of the wall in the central and
northern parts of the drawn exposure differs from that in the south because coarse
fossiliferous limestone irregularly alternates with fine limestone poor in fossils in
both the horizontal and vertical directions; a few “beads layerst1 are interbedded. At
the base of the reef limestone, several stromatoporoids and other fossils a r e found
embedded in a matrix of finely crystalline to dense limestone.
The great variety of deposits found in the Hj‘ahnklint underneath the reef
limestone suggests that the local conditions under which these were laid down have
varied both in space and in time.
Also an exceptional development is the occurrence of lumps of hard

and massive limestone enclosed in stratified marly sediment lateral to the
Upper Visby reef and underneath the H6gklint reef of Fig.50.
Talus mantle
By far, not all reefs of the Hoburgen type a r e surrounded by a mantle

of reef talus. There is a talus mantle around some of the reefs exposed in
Hoburgen itself, whereas around some other reefs at Hoburgen such a
mantle is absent. In reefs of similar type in other stratigraphical units, a
talus mantle is an exception rather than the rule. In the absence of such a
mantle, the reef limestone is generally directly surrounded by crinoid
limestone with reef debris. Directly against the reef, the content of debris
may sometimes be higher than that of crinoid remains, especially at the
landward side of the reef, but the abundant crinoids, the approximately
horizontal stratification, the direct transition in crinoid limestone with
reef debris and the absence of reef blocks were criteria which caused the
author not to call this true reef talus. It is admitted, however, that the
distinction between talus mantle and surrounding crinoid limestone with
reef debris is arbitrary.
A s was mentioned earlier, most of the Hoburgen-type reefs (with the
exception of those which developed in Hamra-Sundre time, and which include
the reefs in the Hoburgen area) developed during periods of on average
slowly falling s e a level. It may be assumed that as a s e a becomes very
shallow, turbulence and currents become s o strong that they prevent the
local accumulation of a proper reef -debris mantle, and scatter the debris
over the surrounding sea floor. The general distribution of reef debris in
the reef-surrounding sediments will be discussed further in Chapter M. At
this place only the talus as found directly aside the reef limestone will be
described.
As said, the talus supplied by reefs of the Hoburgen type can well be
studied in some places in the Hoburgen complex itself.
The first outcrop to be discussed here is found in the south of the sea-
ward wall of the third hillock of Hoburgen (Fig.45). There is a depression on
top of reef II which is filled with limestone rich in reef debris. This is
overlaid by the talus of reef IlI, which was deposited while this reef expanded
westwards. When the reef was still at a certain distance from this locality,
only small debris material was deposited there, but with the gradual approach
of the reef, the deposit became coarser and included l a r g e r complete

colonies of stromatoporoids and other reef builders. The talus directly
around the reef even contains reef-limestone blocks of 1 m3 o r more, in
which all the flat stromatoporoids show about the same orientation. Perhaps
these loosened as a whole from the reef and rotated while moving down the
reef.
This phenomenon of large dislodged blocks can also be studied while
standing on top of the third hillock, a s well a s in it west-southwest cliff
where it is beautifully exposed (Fig.67). This cliff section passes almost
entirely through reef talus. It shows several of such tumbled blocks in
which almost all of the fossils occur in the same orientation, which can be
a t all angles to the horizontal. Fig.68 is a photograph of part of such a reef-
limestone block enclosed in the reef talus of this west-southwest cliff. Note
that almost all of the flat stromatoporoids at the left a r e roughly parallel
to each other but with a n orientation about perpendicular to the only slightly
dipping stratified limestone at the right.
Another place in Hoburgen, where H a m r a r e e f s are exposed together with their

surrounding talus is in the north of the west wall of the Storburg, close to the cave
called Lithberg Grotta (Fig.59). Two reefs occur there; the southern one presumably
began i t s growth somewhat e a r l i e r than the northern reef. The southern reef shows a
well-developed steep talus, especially at i t s north side. It also has a depression at
the top which i s filled with reef debris. The reef does not reachthetopof the cliff and
i s covered by a thin zone of younger reef limestone. The northern of the two reefs is
surrounded by talus both a t i t s north and south sides. P a r t s occur in the talus of this
reef which in all likelihood can be interpreted as being large blocks which were torn
loose as whole pieces from the reef by wave action.
SE
reef limestone
Fig. 67. Hoburgen, west-southwest cliff of the third hillock. Hamra-Sundre

Beds. At the lowermost left side, part of reef 11 of Fig.45 is exposed. This
reef is overlaid by the talus of the larger reef 111which developed east of
reef I1 and expanded over it. South-southeastward in this wall, the talus
deposit wedges out in stratified limestone. In the course of time, these
stratified sediments a r e seen to have progressed over the talus and again
levelled the sea floor. Above the exit of the cave at the left (drawn black),
there is a thin remnant of stratified limestone overlying the talus material;
it contains a rather high amount of reef debris; immediately behind it i s
still the reef talus deposit.
R E E F - SURROUNDING SEDIMENTS 163
Fig.68. Reef talus. Note that almost all of the stromatoporoids a r e

perpendicular to the stratified limestone at the right of the photograph. They
probably became separated from the reef all together in a huge block. West-
southwest wall of the third hillock, Hoburgen. Hamra-Sundre Beds.
In a talus deposit in the northeast of Klinteklint (Gammelgarn Parish, Hemse

Beds), there i s a block 1.10 m high and 1.30 m broad in which a great many flat-
lenticular and tabular stromatoporoids up to 0.70 m long occur parallel to each other
in a very orderly manner, with a dip of about 20° to the south-southwest. It is likely
that this i s also a block which was detached from a reef as one piece.
In this same locality, other parts of the talus deposit also show parallel flat-
lying reef builders, but these were probably not brought there a s blocks. In itself, it
is not remarkable to find that fossils became generally parallel orientated in places
where hardly anything else besides m a r l and very flat fossils were deposited.
Deviations from this pattern occur when rounder fossils a r e intermixed because the
flat fossils then were not deposited on a smooth bottom and consequently show dips in
various directions, according to the unevenness of the underlying material, bottom
currents and the like. Indeed, such parts a r e found in the northeastern Klinteklint a s
well. P a r t s in which the fossils and fossil fragments were likely deposited one by one
164 THE HOBURGEN REEF TYPE
can be distinguished from the large blocks by the greater number of fragments in the
first, and also by the abrupt ends of some of the flat-lenticular and tabular colonies
with no indication in the direct environs of where the detached peripheral parts have
gone.
In both the examples from Hoburgen and Klinteklint, the blocks a r e

found in talus which was likely deposited more at the coastward side of the
reefs. Observations of present-day reefs have shown that storms approach-
ing the reefs from the landward side may cause major destruction of the
reef edge. Large portions of the reef edge may then become dislodged and
are carried down the slopes. Two factors make the landward side of Recent
reefs more vulnerable than the seaward side: the edge at that side is often
steep and overhanging and the reef there is often less solid than at the sea-
ward side. For the reefs of Gotland, the second factor may also have played
a part. In the many cases where the reefs stood only a few metres above the
surrounding s e a floor, steep overhanging edges would have been l e s s common
than with the thick reefs of the present day. But it is notable that nowhere
a r e tumbled blocks s o common a s in Hoburgen, and the Hamra Beds a r e
the only distinct case where reefs of the Hoburgen type developed in water
of increasing depth. The Hamra r e e f s on the average have a greater thick-
ness in proportion to their horizontal extension and may have grown up-
wards at a higher r a t e than most of the other reefs, leading to relatively
steeper edges and perhaps even less-solid reef frames.
A notable phenomenon found in a small southwestern cliff near the southern
end of the second hillock of Hoburgen should also be described here, since it is
likely to be connected with the occurrence of a talus slope of a reef (Fig.69).
A t the very left at the bottom of this cliff, a small remnant of reef limestone
overlaid by stratified limestone occurs (not visible in Fig.69). The whole remaining
exposed lowermost part of the cliff is composed of reef limestone very rich in tabu-
l a r stromatoporoids. These stromatoporoids all dip distinctly in the north-northwest
direction, but nevertheless they a r e in all likelihood in their positions of growth
(lower half of Fig.69). Because of their flat shapes, they give the rock a somewhat
irregularly stratified appearance. Presumably, this reef limestone developed over a
talus slope previously formed by the same reef. At the left, the stromatoporoid reef
limestone abuts against stratified sediment; at that left side, a few lenses of marly
clay are intercalated in the reef limestone. The dip of all the stromatoporoids makes
it likely that they extended from the top downward. If the reef limestone had developed
from the sea bottom upwards, one would expect to find them in horizontal positions
with each new stromatoporoid extending a little farther to the right than its
predecessor, at the edge. The centre of the reef must have been more into the hill
than the corner between this southwestern cliff and the westward-facing cliff south
of it. The topography in the corner between these two walls shows a slope parallel
to the dip of the stromatoporoids, but the direction of slope turns southwards from
northwest to south-southwest, thus giving the area the shape of a quarter of
the area of a cone with its top in the northeast corner. Perhaps this topography is
determined by the talus slope over which the stromatoporoid reef later expanded
westward.
Stratified sediments were deposited on top of the dipping reef limestone at the
right side; these do not extend more than a few metres westwards. From the west,
the reef limestone with the dipping stromatoporoids was overgrown by a younger
reef which expanded eastwards. At the left, this reef directly overlies the older reef
limestone; at the right, it extends over the intercalated stratified sediments.
R E E F-SURROUNDING SEDIMENTS 16 5
Fig.69. Detail from the southwest of the second hillock, Hoburgen. Hamra-
Sundre Beds. At the base, a dipping stratification in the reef limestone,
caused by tabular stromatoporoids. Overlying it is a younger reef, part of
which can be seen in the top left hand of the photograph.
Stratified sediments lateral to the reefs
Crinoid limestones a r e present underneath the more peripheral parts

of several reefs of the Hoburgen type, but a r e generally much better
developed laterally around the reefs and their enveloping talus and partly
also on top of the reefs. They most commonly appear a s light-coloured
limestones with a more o r less well-developed stratification. They are so
enormously rich in crinoid remains that in some instances the name
crinoid breccia would be appropriate. The crinoid limestones contain a
varying amount of reef debris, which is most commonly made up of frag-
ments and entire colonies of stromatoporoids, corals, bryozoans and
locally also calcareous Algae. Solitary corals a r e regularly encountered;
other fossils, such as brachiopods, cephalopods, gastropods and trilobites,
a r e seldom abundant. Compared with the bioherms, the variety i n species
is less. Where the reef limestone is surrounded by a talus deposit, this
talus usually gradually passes into the crinoid limestone with reef debris.
Where there is no talus mantle, as is the case in several reef exposures,
there may be a rather sharp boundary between the reef limestone and the
surrounding sediment rich in debris and crinoids, but in some instances,
this boundary is a narrow gradual transition zone. There a r e also examples
where the contact is interfingering, especially i n the lower part of a reef
(Fig.70, 71). In cases of a sharp boundary, occasionally this boundary is
~ ~
R
i;;Ieef limestone B S t r a t i f i e d sediments mvegetation mRubble ? 1 3 4 5"
Fig.70. The lower part of the Hallshukklint, southeast of the lighthouse.

a, b and c indicate the locations of Fig.72, Fig.65 and Fig.70, respectively.
Note that the boundary between stratified limestone and reef limestone is
generally more distinct at the east side of the reef than at the west side. At
the west side, layers of stratified limestone may penetrate into the reef
limestone. Hogklint Beds. (After Manten, 1962, fig.21.)
very steep and rather straight; in such instances one likely is dealing with
an eroded reef edge against which the crinoid limestone was deposited.
In general, the crinoid limestone with reef debris is widely variable i n
composition, texture and structure where reefs lie closely together.
Although the crinoid limestones present abundant evidence of current
o r wave action in the form of displaced corals and stromatoporoids, the
degree of rounding and sorting i s usually low, though both a r e seen. The
impression gained, therefore, is that except for in some narrow passages
R E E F - SURROUNDING SEDIMENTS 167
Reef limestone =Stratified limestones Cave
a Reef debris Stromatoporoid %Rubble

0 1 2 3 4 5 m
Fig.71. Detailed section of the contact between stratified limestone and

reef limestone at c in Fig.70. Hallshukklint. Hijgklint Beds. At the base,
stratified limestone is seen, containing reef debris. In the east, it is
overlaid by reef limestone. At about 0.2 m above the stratified limestone,
the reef limestone shows a deviating horizon, with fewer and smaller stroma-
toporoids (6 colonies per square metre, and on the average 15 cm long), in
rather a marly matrix with abundant small (about 1 cm) fossils and fossil
fragments. At the base of this horizon the fossils a r e somewhat larger, but
fewer in number. Thin, finely-crystalline layers occur there, which can be
followed in the stratified limestone further west, where they form the
bottom of the lower cave. Towards the east this horizon is already
indistinct at the left margin of the drawing, and it disappears about 5 m
east of the cave. Upwards, the horizon passes into normal reef limestone
with rather a brecciated structure.
At the top of the cave, there is a horizon with rather large stromato-
poroids. It is overlaid in the east by a comparable rock, which at its
westward side ends .against a reef-debris like deposit. The latter, in i t s
turn, is distinctly bounded against the normal stratified limestone to the
west. Eastwards, the conglomeratic stromatoporoid limestone passes into
brecciated reef limestone.
The upper cave shows a layer of finely-crystalline stratified lime-
stone both at its base and top; they penetrate into the reef limestone. (After
between neighbouring reefs, the crinoid gravels associated with the reefs
were not subjected to continual washing backwards and forwards.
Close to the reefs at the coastward side, the crinoid limestone tends
to be more marly than elsewhere around the reefs and marl may be found
on the bedding planes there.
In some sheltered basins between a number of neighbouring reef-
growth centres the crinoid remains and reef debris were relatively little
influenced by water movement. The deposits found there consequently
strongly contrast to those found in narrow passages. In such sheltered
places even intact crinoid calyces may be found. An example of such a
deposit is in the southern cliff of Brissund (Fig.140).
While discussing above the alternation of reef expansion and retreat,

it was pointed out that crinoid limestone can be found alternating with reef
talus and reef limestone in one vertical succession.
An increase i n the content of crinoid remains and especially of reef
debris in a vertical section through a succession of stratified sediments, is
a reflection of expansion of a nearby reef. Examples of such a situation are
the exposures in the Hemse Beds close to the crossing of the three roads
to Etelhem, Garde and Lye (p. 368).The expansion of a reef, a s reflected
in this manner, can be either laterally o r upwards. Without other exposures
or indications about reef behaviour, it is difficult to establish which of the
two reasons caused the higher debris deposition in a certain locality, al-
though generally a combination of the two may be supposed.
Since there is usually a gradual transition in character from the

limestones at the side of a reef to the stratified limestone on top of a reef,
a few words may also be said here about the latter deposit. A good example
of crinoid limestone overlying reef limestone is the "Hoburg marble"
exposed on the plateau of Storburg, Hoburgen; reef debris can be observed
immediately over the reefs there, indicating that up to the moment that the
entire reefs were buried, wave action worked loose parts of the reef
surfaces, which were then embedded in younger sediments. The size of the
debris material is much smaller than in the talus directly surrounding the
reefs of Hoburgen. Nithin a vertical distance of only a few decimetres, the
size of the debris decreases rapidly, as well a s the quantity. The sediment
about 30-50 cm above the top of the reefs is a nearly normal crinoid
breccia o r limestone.
In several cases, it can be seen that the uppermost lateral layers and
also some higher layers arch over the reef. This may be due to a stronger
settling of the stratified sediments than of the unstratified reef limestones.
However, the phenomenon may also be partly synsedimentary. The dead
reef formed an elevation on the sea bottom and may have been covered by
the younger layers a s with a blanket.
In places where the sedimentary complex was cut by cliff walls in
Quaternary times, the heavier reef limestone may have caused thrust
phenomena in i t s surrounding sediments. An exampIe of this is shown in
Fig. 139.
With increasing distance from the reefs, the crinoid limestone

generally passes gradually into stratified limestone which is often finely
crystalline and not very rich in fossils; the thickness of the layers varies
REEF- SURROUNDING SEDIMENTS 169
Finely-crystalline limestone
a Fragment limestone
0
c
0.25rn
1
Fig.72. Relationships between finely-crystalline o r micro-crystalline

stratified limestone and fragment limestone at a in Fig.70. Hallshukklint.
Hogklint Beds. At the base, fragment limestone (a) occurs. This i s over-
laid by two mixed layers (1, 2) separated by a thin, crumbled layer of very
finely-crystalline limestone (b). At the top, a layer of very finely-
crystalline limestone occurs again. The two mixed layers show cross-
bedding. Almost all lamellae of these layers differ in appearance, varying
from coarse fragment limestone with fossils and fossil fragments up to
2 cm large to micro-crystalline limestone. Macroscopically, the latter
shows hardly any or completely no fossil remains, but microscopically
it is found to contain some small fragments, and traces of microcoquina,
completely recrystallized. About 10 m northwest of this detailed section, a
large reef-limestone mass occurs. Only about 4 m northwest of the section,
a small reef-limestone exposure is found (cf. Fig.70). This suggests that
reef limestone i s also present directly behind this section, within the klint.
(After Manten, 1962, fig.22.)
(Fig.72, 73). In several localities, films or thin layers of m a r l are found

between the limestone layers.
The picture is somewhat more complicated when several reefs to-

gether form a kind of b a r r i e r (Fig.74). In the passages between the reefs,
coarse, well-worn calcareous fragments were often deposited, especially
where the passage was relatively narrow, on the order of 0.1 km o r less.
Such a limestone deposit in a passage is usually practically f r e e from clay
and the calcium carbonate content may exceed 99%. The layers a r e thick
and the bedding planes a r e rugged.
The limestone at the seaward side of the reefs is over some distance
of the same character as that in the passages, but is l e s s even-grained. It
passes into stratified limestone showing no reef influence.
+ +
P=-
+ -+.
1- . . . . .. . . ..
1I.Y + +
Elfragment limestone
Ufinely crystalline limestone
a knob of fossiliferous limestone
Islfossil
H marlstone
Fig.73. Detailed section, showing the character of the stratigraphical
succession found at a in Fig.63. Hallshukklint. Hiigklint Beds. Coarse and
generally fossilif erous fragment limestone alternates with finely-crystalline
to micro-crystalline limestone which is l e s s fossiliferous. The finely-
crystalline limestone in the middle, encloses a knob of very fossiliferous
limestone, which apparently has been deposited there a s a whole. It may
have been washed off a reef which is still hidden behind the fagade of
stratified sediment. Note that several bedding planes of the finely-
crystalline limestone a r e rugged; also that m a r l is generally found in
connection with the fine limestone.
Fig.74. Schematic sketch of the distribution of fragments and marly

sediments at the reefs of Smojen, 9 km east-northeast of Slite, as
established by core drillings. Slite Beds. The reef bodies, which a r e drawn,
measure 0.2-0.3 km ip diameter and the intervals between them a r e l e s s
than 0.1 km. The limestone complex in which the reefs a r e enclosed, over-
lies marly shales. The change from marlstone to limestone deposition was
caused by a shallowing of the water. Together with other reefs, those which
a r e drawn form a b a r r i e r , in a northeast - southwest direction. The
distribution of sediments around the reefs is more regular than at
Kappelshamn (Fig.75). In the passages between the reefs, coarse, well-worn
calcareous fragments were deposited; crinoids, bryozoans, corals,
calcareous Algae, and shells included. On the northwestern (lee) side,
behind the reefs, marly layers are found with interbedded limestone layers.
In the extensive field a t the northwest side (inside) of the reef b a r r i e r ,
there is a moderately coarse o r fine fragment limestone which here and
there is marly. (After Hadding, 1956, fig.1).
Directly behind the reefs at the landward side, marly layers may be
found with interbedded limestone layers, but most of the area shows
moderately coarse to fine fragment limestone, which here and there is
marly. The stratification is more marked and the layers a r e thinner than i n
the coarse limestone between the reefs.
The situation of several reefs occurring in an a r e a together, but
randomly distributed, is even still more complicated (Fig.75). These reefs
caused irregular current action and consequently a more irregular deposi-
tion of coarse and fine material.
In a number of localities with reefs a hundred metres o r more apart,
thick layers of medium to fine material occur between thinner layers of
finely crystalline limestone. In a few cases, the thicker layer shows an
internal current bedding (Fig.76).
The stratified sediments between neighbouring reefs take more and
more the character of those in reefless a r e a s as the distance between the
reefs increases. Stratified sediments deposited a t greater distance from
the reefs and showing little o r no reef influence will be described in
Chapter XI.
172 THE HOBURGEN R E E F TYPE
Fig.75. Occurrence of reefs and conglomerates at Kappelshamn. Hijgklint

Beds. Due to the random distribution of the reefs, current action was
complicated, and the distribution of coarse and fine material was, there-
fore, more irregular than with reefs occurring in a single row (Fig.74). The
conglomerates, whose distribution has been mapped, appear a s bands of
rather insignificant thickness in layers of fragment limestone. These bands
also occur elsewhere and approximately at the same stratigraphical level
in the Upper Hogklint Beds. Their formation may be connected with a
general elevation of land. (After Hadding, 1956, fig.4.)
w E
3-3n
0
-ct
Fig.76. Current bedding within a thicker layer of fragment limestone in an

inter-reef deposit. Such a thicker layer is generally interstratified between
thinner layers of finely-crystalline limestone. Sections of this character
are found in some a r e a s where Hijgklint reefs occur some hundred o r more
metres apart. Towards the reefs, the sediments change to crinoid limestone
with reef debris. The above example was observed east of Ihrevik. It is
found a t about the same stratigraphical level a s the conglomerate bands
mentioned i n Fig.75. (After Manten, 1962, fig.27.)
HEE F- SURROUNDING SEDIMENTS 173
Distinction between stratzyied sediments and reef limestone
Also something must be said here about the degree of difference

between the reef limestone and the normal succession of stratified sedi-
ments. In order to make this point clear, the sediments underneath the
r e e f s will be shortly considered again as well.
It has been noted already that sediments underlying the root of a
Hoburgen-type reef generally do not differ much from those found else-
where at about the same stratigraphical level. This is in contrast to what
was found for the Visby Beds, where in the deeper-water marly Lower
Visby Beds no reefs a r e found, and where in the Upper Visby Beds distinct
local improvements of the environment often seem to have preceded reef
growth. Apparently conditions for reef development became better in
shallower water with limited deposition of terrigenous debris. In Hogklint,
Slite or Hemse times, a lesser change in environmental conditions was
needed to lead to reef formation.
Once colonial corals o r stromatoporoids had established and built a
platform for further reef development, other organisms apparently found
conditions there more favourable than on the surrounding sea floor. The
result is that there is a distinct difference between reef and stratified
limestones in most stratigraphical units in Gotland.
It has also been noted already that the difference between stratified
and reef limestone in the Klinteberg Beds is less than elsewhere in
Gotland. In parts of the Klinteberg, the stratified limestones a r e very rich
in coral colonies, often of large size and generally in their positions of
growth. The stratified limestone between Hastings and Hallbjens, northeast
of Guldrupe Church, is very rich in stromatoporoids and Algae. East of
Bringes (southwest of the former railway station at Bjerges, Vange Parish),
a zone of marly limestone about 1 m thick is found, which is very rich in
stromatoporoids, bryozoans and corals; it may even be somewhat reef-
like in appearance, but is distinctly bedded, generally with layers of 2-10 cm
thick. The overlying finely oolitic limestone and the underlying Sfiongwstroma
limestone a r e also relatively fossiliferous. Between Krasse and Vasterby
(Guldrupe Parish), north and south of the (former) Buttle Station, northwest
of Ovre Lundsmyr, southeast of Hejde Church, and in other localities, the
stratified Klinteberg Beds also approach a reef-like character, without
loosing their stratified nature, due to a relative increase in corals, stroma-
toporoids, bryozoans and crinoids.
The general impression is that in the shallow s e a of Klinteberg times,
conditions were favourable in many places for the development of a rich and
varied organic life. Where conditions were relatively more favourable,
potential reef builders became more and more common in the stratified
sediments; these sometimes gradually developed a semi-reef retaining a
rude stratification, and sometimes passed finally into a true unstratified
reef. Where conditions were most favourable, the reef builders in a very
early stage developed an unstratified reef surrounded by crinoid limestone
with reef debris. A l l intermediate stages between general stratified lime-
stone and unstratified reef limestone can thus be encountered in the Klinte-
berg Beds.
The boundary between reef and stratified limestone
After comparing in the field a number of exposures of reefs and reef-

surrounding sediments in Gotland, one usually experiences no difficulties i n
drawing the boundary between reef limestone and stratified sediments. In a
few instances, however, there may be uncertainties.
In the first place, there may be doubts in some cases where the
exposed cliff walls are very steep and boundaries have to be determined
from a distance. The sediment surrounding the reef is not always very
distinctly stratified close to a reef and, on the other hand, intercalations of
stratified sediment, tabular reef builders and cracks caused by weathering
may give the reef limestone a somewhat stratified appearance. As soon as
close observations can be made, the problem is usually l e s s great.
Secondly, the boundary may be difficult to f i x in older and partly
weathered outcrops, particularly in cases where there seems to be little
difference in composition between reef limestone and stratified limestone.
An example of such a situation is the weathered reef mass (h) in the western
cliff of the Storburg of Hoburgen, north of the overhanging part which is
called Hoburgsgubbens Trappa ( c in Fig,77). The southern boundary, which
is in the lower part of the cliff with stratified limestone at the other side
and at the top of the cliff with another reef, is still reasonably traceable.
But in the north, the reef limestone gradually passes into a thick-bedded
limestone. The peripheral part of the reef is not as fossiliferous as reef
limestone normally is, and among the fossils present are many crinoids.
The adjacent stratified sediment contains several fossilized potential reef
builders. The stratification does not end abruptly, but gradually fades away.
Nevertheless, this is virtually the only indication of where the boundary has
to be sought.
Locally in some exposures, especially in the Hemse Beds, where reef
limestone gradually passes into crinoid limestone with reef debris, the
exact boundary between the two is sometimes difficult to determine very
precisely; nevertheless, it can generally be established to within one o r a
few decimetres in larger exposures. The distinction sometimes remains a
problem where only small and scattered exposures a r e available, e.g., as
in the Ausarveklint (Hemse Beds), where in some small outcrops stromato-
poroids dominate but are embedded in vaguely stratified limestone rich in
crinoid remains. Without knowing the nature of the sediments around the
exposure, it is hardly possible to tell at which side of the boundary between
reef and surrounding sediments the exposed rock was formed.
The lower boundary of a reef sometimes is indistinct, either because
the underlying sediment is also very fossiliferous, or because the lowermost
unstratified part with the appearance of reef limestone shows too few reef
builders to account for the different nature of the rock by their frame-
building activity. Thin sections can then help to f i x the boundary. In such
detailed sections, the fossiliferous limestone underneath a reef clearly
demonstrates how the sediment Was compacted under a somewhat irregular
reef base. The matrix has often been distinctly squeezed between the solid
fossils and fossil fragments, and individual particles are usually closely
sutured into their neighbours. In such sections, the lower reef boundary can
then be fixed at the place where the fossils start to be embedded in a
structureless matrix which shows l e s s indication of great compaction and
where the individual rock components show no suturing.
Ilu 51
Fig.??. The central part of the west wall of Storburg, Hoburgen. In the north and south, reef limestone; in between
these, stratified limestone is exposed in an overhanging part of the wall, reminiscent of the underside of a stair-
case and therefore, in accordance with other phenomena in Hoburgen, called here "Hoburgsgubbens Trappa".
a = stratified clayish marlstone; b = stratified marly sediment, probably deposited very close to an early stage of
reef growth, the rock is very fossiliferous and among the fossils present, there are many thin and slightly wavy
stromatoporoid covers, overlying it is some reef debris, followed by about 22 m of reef limestone; c = stratified
limestone, forming "Hoburgsgubbens Trappa"; d = small occurrence of reef debris, containing many flat
stromatoporoids which all dip very steeply in the same direction, suggesting that they form part of a block of reef
limestone which loosened a s a whole the reef; e = reef limestone, or more probably reef talus, very rich in
and in the roof of the cave,
h = reef limestone, which in the
reef some crinoid limestone with
generally small and thin in the lower part of the reef limestone, the matrix is very
marly and includes j = cave, above which the reef contains a substantial part which 2
cn
Another aspect of the boundary between reef limestone and surrounding

sediment that deserves. to be mentioned here is the occurrence in some
places of sharp boundaries between massive and stratified sediment where
i t seems there is very little else to distinguish the reef from the neighbour-
ing stratified rock. The peripheral part of such reefs may contain only a
few reef builders, certainly not enough to make it likely that together they
had once formed a continuous rigid framework. Sometimes crinoid remains
a r e even the most prominent fossils in the reef limestone. Nevertheless,
the unstratified peripheral reef rock s e e m s to have been practically
incompactable, while the adjacent stratified limestone is distinctly com-
pacted. What determined the difference in behaviour of the rocks?
Newel1 et al. (1953, p.82, fig.39H1, i n an attempt to explain similar
sharp boundaries found by them in the Permian reef complex in southern
North America, supposed that compaction of unconsolidated sediments
around the reefs resulted in a lateral squeezing out of some sediment i n
the direction of the reef, where compaction was less.' This would explain
the apparent rigidity and resistance to compaction of the massive lateral
reef limestone a s well.
The present author agrees with Colter (1957, p.54) that this mechanism
s e e m s unlikely to explain all sharp lateral boundaries of the nature as
described above. Locally in Gotland, the limestone and especially the
thinner interbedded marlstone layers which may neighbour the massive
rock contain pellet-like bodies and ostracodes with valves intact, and it i s
unlikely that either of these would survive a squeezing process. In agree-
ment with this no such pellet-like bodies or intact ostracodes have been
observed in sediments underneath reef limestone which have been subjected
to squeezing out in directions away from the reef centre.
SYNTHESIS
It will be apparent from the data presented in this chapter about the
Hoburgen reef type, that the reefs must have developed in shallow water.
Water depth was l e s s than that in which the Upper Visby reefs formed. The
following data support this conclusion:
(1) The stratified sediments in which the r e e f s a r e intercalated a r e
limestones and marly limestones, but no marlstone. Directly around the
reefs, crinoid limestones a r e generally present, sometimes showing cross-
bedding, rounding, o r other shallow-water characteristics; a talus mantle may
separate reef and crinoid limestone and the latter almost always contains
amounts of reef debris.
( 2 ) The Hogklint Beds present abundant evidence of decreasing water
depth during their time of deposition; they contain many Hoburgen-type reefs
and these beds conformably overlie the Upper Visby Beds.
(3) Algae are fairly common in the Hoburgen-type reefs; stromato-
poroids, not corals, a r e the dominant reef builders.
1This process thus affected the stratified sediments aside of the reefs and should
not be confused with the squeezing out of stratified sediment from underneath a reef,
due to the heavy burden placed upon it (cf. p. 156 and Fig.63, 64).
SYNTHESIS 177
( 4 ) Erosion of some reef surfaces has taken place. The common

occurrence of patch reefs suggests that shoaling i n several instances pre-
vented further upward expansion.
When compared to the Upper Visby reefs, the reefs of Hoburgen type
developed under generally much more favourable conditions. This is
apparent from the distinctly l e s s e r deposition of terrigenous sediment, the
larger size of the reefs and the much greater diversity in organic composi-
tion.
In their distribution the reefs show relationships to the contempo-
raneous coast line. Although they often present an irregular distribution
within a certain zone (Fig.75), the orientation of that zone is parallel to
what on the basis of other information may be assumed to have been the
direction of the shore line. Moreover, the orientation of the individual reefs
shows the longer axis to have that same direction (cf. also Chapter XI, e.g.,
pp. 289, 322, 323, 366, 407, and the enclosed geological map of Gotland).
Where reefs occurred very closely together, the seaward ones developed
under more favourable conditions than their close neighbours on the land-
ward side.
That the width of the reef zones often amounted to several kilometres
supports the belief that the Silurian basin was a large, flat and shallow-
bottomed sea, where comparable conditions prevailed over extensive areas.
The distribution and size of the reefs, combined with influences
exerted by wind and current directions, determined to some extent the
depositional pattern of the stratified sediments found around the reefs, but
not to such a strong degree as is the case around the large reefs of the
present day. This subject will be somewhat further touched on when speak-
ing about the reef debris in Chapter IX.
179
Chapter VIII
THE HOL-LAR REEF TYPE
DISTRIBUTION OF HOLMHALLAR-TYPE REEFS
Along the eastern shore of the southern peninsula of Gotland reef lime-
stones a r e found that differ in character from those described in the two
preceding chapters (cf. Table VIII). They are predominantly exposed in
picturesque erosion-forms, the so-called "raukar" (singular "rauk") or
stone giants (Fig.78). Just like the reef limestones of the Hoburgen type,
these reef limestones have a greater resistance to erosion than the s u r -
rounding stratified sediments. The latter, for the most part, have dis-
appeared, leaving the reef limestones as promontories o r small off-shore
islands. The best outcrops a r e found at Holmhallar, near Austre, on the
island of Heliholm, at HammarshagahPllar and along the southeastern shore
of Faludden (see also Chapter XI). All of these belong to the Sundre lime-
stone, as defined by Hede (1921). The Sundre limestone is included by the
present author in the Hamra-Sundre Beds.
Furthermore, reef limestones of similar character also occur in the
Hemse Beds, in the raukar fields at Ljugarn, Fagelhammar South and North,
Fig.78. Rauk (stone pillar, stone giant), consisting of reef limestone of

Holmhlllar type. Heliholm. Hamra-Sundre Beds.
180 THEHOLM~LLARREEFTYPE
and Sjausterhammar (see also Chapter XI). Reef limestones which show a
tendency towards a transition from the Holmhallar type to the Hoburgen type
a r e foundbehveenSnabbenandSandviken(0stergarn Parish)(cf. pp.183,372,374).
These also belong to the Hemse Beds. All localities mentioned a r e situated
along the east coast of Gotland.
In older publications the sediments from the above-mentioned local-
ities have been taken together with some other deposits elsewhere in Gotland,
which show reef limestones of Hoburgen type, under the names of Ascoceras
limestone o r Etelhems limestone (Munthe, 1910). The resemblance between
these Hoburgen-type reef limestones and the reef limestones in the raukar
fields named above is mainly in the common occurrence of red colours.
After Hede (1921) had shown that the Ascoceras limestones belong to
stratigraphically separate units, Munthe (1921b) introduced the more
neutral name of red-brown marble reef limestone, or, i n shorter form,
marble reef limestone. The present author is of the opinion that there is no
need for these names, which may even cause confusion, because their usage
may still wrongly suggest a strong community of, e.g., character, palaeo-
ecology and/or age. There i s no need whatsoever for a special name, even
if only adopted for descriptive purposes, for reef limestones which corre-
spond in a characteristic of so subordinate importance a s a common red
colour (cf. also p.188). Therefore, these names will not be used in this book.
Because the present author started his investigations in southern
Gotland, Holmhallar was the first reef of this type that he intensively studied
(see also Rutten, 1958). Later field work by him confirmed that the raukar
field at Holmhallar was one of the best exposures of this kind and, therefore,
there is no objection to making Holmhallar the type locality of this reef type.
The accompanying map (inserted loose at the end of this book) gives the
distribution of the raukar over this locality. In the southeast the raukar r i s e
up to 3.5 m above present s e a level; in the west the highest raukar reach up
to about 6.5 m above sea level. A few raukar found scattered in both the west
and northeast have been omitted, a s they a r e strongly weathered and over-
grown by lichens and did not allow such detailed studies as were carried out
in the mapped part.
Several of the characteristics of the Holmhallar reef will be discussed
in the following pages.
FAUNA, FLORA AND MATRIX O F THE REEFS
Reef -forming components
The Holmhallar-type reef limestone can be characterized, in short, a s

a pure, compact and hard limestone, which i s unstratified, has a greenish
grey to reddish brown colour, is very rich in large stromatoporoids, which
a r e generally strongly recrystallized, and is of a relatively homogeneous
nature. On the average, the reef limestone consists to the extent of approx-
imately 70% of the remains of animal reef builders and reef dwellers, with
30% composed of a calcareous matrix and calcareous Algae. Among the reef-
building animals stromatoporoids a r e most evident; they produced approx-
imately 60% of the total rock volume. The reefs, therefore, a r e
FAUNA, FLORA AND MATRM 181
stromatoporoid reefs. Other animal reef builders played a very minor part.
Corals take the second place, with an average of only about 3%. Almost
nowhere do bryozoans show high percentages. Moreover, when found they a r e
often only fragmental and a r e dispersed among the other fossils.
In the matrix remains of several other animal groups may be observed.
Among these, cephalopods are quite common. Gastropods a r e l e s s well
represented. The same is generally true for brachiopods and lamellibranchs.
Whereas the cephalopods a r e obviously more common (cf. p.120), particularly
the latter two groups a r e apparently l e s s common in these reefs than they a r e
in reefs of the Hoburgen type. Trilobites, too, a r e only scarcely represented.
The reefs show only slight evidence of destructive work by boring organisms.
Except for the pronounced recrystallization, little seems to have been altered
after the death of the reef builders and before Quaternary erosion began.
In comparison with the fauna of the Hoburgen-type reefs, the Holmhallar
reefs appear to be considerably poorer in species (see Table IX). This may
partly be due to the fact that fewer reefs of this type are exposed and that
their massive construction and marked recrystallization greatly hinder the
collecting of fossils. But it is the impression of the present author that
primary circumstances have also played a part in this.
Calcareous Algae are well represented in the Holmhallar and similar
reefs. Macroscopically, however, it is generally very difficult o r even im-
possible to distinguish them from the calcareous matrix, a s Hadding (1950)
also experienced.
A striking difference as compared to the Hoburgen reefs is the great
regularity in organic composition of the Holmhallar reefs. This aspect will
be elucidated in the subsequent paragraphs of this chapter.
Method of inventarization
It is difficult to give exact data about the percentage volumetric com-
position of the reef limestone for a great number of observation points,
especially if these data have to be collected in the field. Nevertheless, it was
important to have more information about the distribution of the stromato-
poroids, corals, bryozoans, crinoids, and calcareous matrix and Algae
throughout the reef. Therefore, an estimation method was designed,by which
the quantities of the various components were indicated by means of the
figures 1-7. The rough definitions pertaining to these figures a r e given in
Table XII. Estimations were made in Holmhallar in 300 observation points,
which a r e marked on the accompanying map; and where this appeared useful,
one o r even more additional observations have been added afterwards.
Although the figures obtained a r e rather subjective in character, i n the field
they supplied useful information. A s a follow-up, it was decided to look for
a more exact basis for the estimations that had been made. This has been
done by careful mapping of 25 reef-limestone surfaces, 1/4-1/12 m2 large,
on millimetre paper, with a scale varying between 1:5 and 1:1. By calculating
the total surface taken up by each of the reef-limestone components which
have been distinguished, percentages could be fixed for their distribution
over these two-dimensional parts. These have been compared with the
estimation figures (cf. column one in Table XII) listed earlier for the same
parts. The results are given in the columns three and four of Table XII.
With the aid of the average values in column four, the graphs in Fig.79-82
have been drawn. A s a result of the way i n which the graphs were constructed,
182 THE HOLMHALL& REEF TYPE
TABLE W
Estimation method for the composition of Holmhtillar-type reefs
Quanti- Definition Percent- Average

fication ages percentage
figure
For stromatoporoids, corals o r bryozoans:
1 reef limestone almost exclusively built

up by the fossil group in question. . . . . . . 76-96 84
1-2 ............................. 68-81 73
2 reef limestone built up f o r a large part
by the fossils in question . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-63 57
2-3 ............................. 48 48
3 number of colonies rather large, but al-
most all of these a r e separated by the
matrix ........................ 26-42 31
several colonies present, but not very
common ....................... 21 21
only a limited number of colonies . . . . . . 3-14 5
just one or a few colonies. . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . 2 4 3
not observed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -
For crinoids:
1 extremely numerous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-72 42

2 numerous ...................... 17-29 23
3 very common. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 13
4 mainly concentrated in a number of
"pockets" but a l s o dispersed in the
matrix.. ...................... 6 6
only a few "pockets", also scattered frag-
ments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3
only scattered in the matrix .......... 0.4-2 0.7
not observed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-0.2
For calcareous matrix and calcareous Algae together:
1 constituting a very large portion of the

reef limestone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 74-87 83
1-2 ............................. 66-79 71
2 abundant throughout the limestone . . . . . . 58 58
2-3 ............................. - 45(? )
3 mainly concentrated in thin films between
the animal reef builders and in a few
other places. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-39 30
not much, only locally more common .... - 25(9 )
rather small amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 8
very small amounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 5
almost absent. ................... 0-6 2
they a r e not very exact but nevertheless give a reasonable picture of the
variations which occur in the distribution of the main reef builders and the
matrix over the reef limestone.
Stromatoporo ids
A s has already been stated, stromatoporoids a r e by far the most

important constituent of the Holmhallar reefs. They generally occur close to
each other, separated only by thin layers of calcareous matrix o r Algae.
The shapes of the individual coloiiies vary: some a r e more o r l e s s spheroidal
or dome-shaped. Other colonies a r e firmly united so that the boundaries
between them a r e indistinct. Both types may be large. In other reef portions
most colonies a r e tabular; this may have led locally to a kind of pseudo-
stratification. A great diversity of other stromatoporoid forms also occurs,
some of which a r e quite extreme. A few random examples are drawn in Fig.226.
Several observations on the palaeoecology of stromatoporoids are
presented in Chapter XII. Included there a r e also data collected in Holmhallar
and related reefs.
From the graphs in Fig.79-82, it can be seen that the percentage of
reef limestone consisting of stromatoporoids distinctly decreases from the
central part of the reef towards the ends of the crescent. N e a r the margins
of the reef, moreover, more colonies show a tabular shape and a r e smaller
in size than in the centre, where huge specimens are found. Aberrant growth
forms, too, a r e more common in the marginal reef portions. In those a r e a s
where many tabular colonies cause a vague stratification, as in some places
near the margins of the Ljugarn reef, the colonies at the original seaward
side can sometimes be seen dipping moderately reef-downwards.
Most of the stromatoporoids in the Holmhallar-type reefs a r e
pronouncedly recrystallized. This has made reef portions with a high
stromatoporoid content more resistant to erosion. A s a result of this, most
raukar have a pedestal of rock which is extremely rich in stromatoporoids.
In higher portions, which suffered comparatively l e s s from erosion - since
they are not attacked by the present wave action - similar reef limestone
may occur, but there less-massive reef limestone is also preserved locally.
Such less-massive portions were undoubtedly also present lower down, but
a r e now eroded. The impressicp that the stromatoporoid content is higher
in the lower portions of the reef than in the upper ones consequently is
thought to be due to the Recent influence of selective demolition.
The colour of the stromatoporoids on a fresh fracture is usually
whitish to light grey. In recrystallization the latilaminar structure has often
been preserved, and on weathering the colony may break along the latilamina-
tion planes. Locally, this leads to a somewhat crumbly demolition, especially
where the reef limestone is no longer affected by wave action.
The preponderance of large stromatoporoids in the reefs of Holmhallar
type is fairly general, with only one regional exception. Between Snabben and
Sandviken, along the east coast of central Gotland, Ostergarn Parish, the
remains of several reefs a r e found. Although many of the reefs in this region
show large and even very large stromatoporoid colonies, part of the reef
limestone does not give the same impression of compact stromatoporoid
rock as does the Holmhallar reef. There may be more smaller colonies, the
VI
m
0
c
s
En
u
-5
?
s 60- --__
--__--__
.
0 . .H..
+
+ . ...
..t.
0
+ w ____----
umetric composition of the
H olmh2llar reef limestone
in the central part of
HolmMllar, along three
E? 50- ----_____
-- -_______
~ - - strom.
~_-- ------------- lines across the raukar
o x
z
n 30-
u 20-
4o-
-
___^________--
+
+ +to+ t
X .
t +
matrix
----- and Algae
----___________________
t ++t -H. +++ + .
---__
+ +
++++ ------__-
field (see the enclosed map
of HolmMllar). The curve
for the crinoid remains is
5 ___--- ______-------x-----x- crin.
x-----*--*-x_-x __-______ A x-x----c--
- exaggerated by a factor two.
- 10. -...-..-
, ~.-.-..------+--~-x-xx----
_
X
)(x __-_ 5 _-____ h _______________ --_-
-_ ( 0 = stromatoporoids,
>
0 - XXX corals ond b r y o z o a n s X
x = erinoids, + = matrix
and Algae).
185
70-
$60
m
a 0. ma
strorn, _______
+ a ~ a e + e+ e +
; 50
- ---- -- -a-t-a-5- - x a
-+-+--.- -a-
+
----____
.
J 40---------
matrix and Algae
t
n3Q +a ++ +----K----x~---n++.+---,-~--a-.
u 2@---- t x + .+ t o m
The stratigraphical subdivision a r r i v e d at by the present author is

shown in Table XXIV. Compared to the stratigraphy drawn up by Hede (1921,
1925a), t h e r e are four modifications: (1) The Lower and Upper Visby m a r l -
stones are united in one main unit; the subdivisions proposed f o r other main
units by the present author are often thicker than the Lower or Upper Visby
number of tabular stromatoporoids may be l a r g e r and some may even be of

laminar character; also the matrix percentage may be higher. A s mentioned
in the beginning of this chapter, i n this region there seems to be some
tendency towards a transition to reef limestone of Hoburgen type.
Corals
Corals do not, in general, constitute an important part of the reef

limestone. Solitary corals were only found at little more than half of the
observation points. Although compound corals are somewhat more common,
186 THEHOLMHALLARREEFTYPE
ia t
K J
Fig. 81. Approximate volumetric composition of the Holmhallar reef lime-

stone in the northern part of Holmhallar, along three lines a c r o s s the raukar
field (see the enclosed map of Holmhallar). The curve for the crinoid remains
is exaggerated by a factor two.
t t
t
E F G H
Fig. 82. Approximate volumetric composition of the Holmhallar reef lime-

stone along two lines about perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the reef.
Left:in about the central part of the reef, right:at the northern end. The
curve for the crinoid remains is exaggerated by a factor two.
their total volume is only about 3% of the reef and only locally does their
contribution occasionally surpass 5% of the total reef -limestone mass.
Both massive and branched colonies are present. Massive colonies a r e
relatively most common in the north of Holmhallar. Branched colonies a r e
seldom found intact; most have disintegrated. In Holmhallar no increase in
the total number of corals towards the reef margins has been established;
such a tendency seems to be evident in Ljugarn, but there too, the differences
between the coral percentage in the reef centre and at the margins a r e only
slight.
A distinctly higher percentage of corals has 'been found in pools in the
reef surface (see later in this chapter), where apparently the vitality of the
stromatoporoids decreased as a result of a stronger deposition of calcareous
mud.
Crinoids
Crinoid remains a r e anything but r a r e i n the Holmhallar reef and in

most other reefs of similar type; the smaller stem and crown fragments a r e
particularly common. However, some large stem fragments and root remains
have also been observed, embedded in calcareous mud. Generally, the higher
percentages in crinoid material are found near the assumed edges of the
reef. A s is shown in the accompanying graphs (Fig.79-82), the percentage
of crinoids increases both in the north and west and in the southeast of the
Holmhiillar raukar area. These increases go together with an increase in
matrix volume and a decrease in the total stromatoporoid volume. This is
one of the arguments in favour of the theory that crinoids grew more on the
reef sides and probably also in the immediate surroundings of the reef than
on the upper surface of the reef (see further Chapter XII).
Large accumulations of crinoid material within the reef a r e found in
several of the debris-filled depressions (see later i n this chapter). Such
portions are of a much less massive character than the reef limestone proper.
Matrix
In between the reef builders, there is a certain amount of calcareous

mud. Macroscopically, this matrix is often hardly if at all distinguishable
from the reef-building Algae, s o that an exact percentage i s difficult to give
(see also the paragraph on the Algae, p.188), but an average of 10-20% of
the total volume seems to be a fairly safe estimate. Close to the reef
margins and in debris-filled depressions and in pools, the matrix percentage
is generally much higher, locally up to as much a s 70% of the reef-limestone
volume.
A s a rule, the matrix of the Holmhallar reef is hard and dense. In a
few cases, small pockets of softer material, greenish-coloured and marly,
a r e intercalated. In a few other cases, the cementing limestone was found
to be somewhat porous.
The matrix of the Holmhallar reef occurs in two varieties: a red to
reddish brown one and a greyish green one. Generally, the latter colour
predominates. In the north of Holmhallar, however, the red colour is found
more frequently. In most cases, the two colour varieties are clearly
separated f r o m each other. Then, in the raukar, the red variety generally
overlies the greyish green one. In a few cases, especially in the north of
Holmhiillar, both varieties are intermingled. Nevertheless, it can also be
established i n many of these cases that the grey colour is more common in
the lower parts of the reef limestone than in the higher parts (e.g.,
observation points 3, 10, 3 3 , 37, 45). Also, if the reef limestone is
predominantly grey, some red-coloured spots may be concentrated in the
top portion of a rauk (e.g., observation point 31).
Presumably the red colour i s mainly secondary i n character, caused
by an infiltration of Fe3+-containing solutions. In the red-coloured reef-
limestone parts, iron oxide has been deposited on the outer surfaces of the
fossils and along very fine cracks, which intersect the sediment irregularly.
The interior of the fossils in the reddish-brown reef-limestone variety is
generally white in colour.
Locally, there is a breccia-like mixture of the red and the light-
coloured variety of the Holmhallar-type reef limestone. This is interpreted
as an indication that slight disturbances have taken place within the reef
limestone, presumably caused by compaction. This compaction may have
taken place when the reef became thicker and perhaps even more so when it became
buried under younger sediments, Small slickensides, encountered in several
places in the reef limestone, provide further evidence of compaction. Relatively
large disturbances of reef portions a r e marked by the fissures which will be
described later in this chapter.
It is not unlikely that a certain fraction of the calcareous matrix found
in reefs of the Holmhallar type originated in situ by disintegration of the
skeletons of reef builders and reef-dwelling organisms. Much of it, however,
must have.been s t i r r e d up by water turbulence and was redeposited after-
wards, as is suggested by the distinct relation between calcareous-mud
deposition and stromatoporoid growth (see also pp.197-198). This mud may
have had its origin either on the reef itself o r in i t s immediate environment.
Stromatoporoids, with their massive colonies, a r e bad potential sources of
small-grained bioclastic debris. These colonies constitute the main part of
the reef. Around the reef, however, enormous amounts of crinoids grew.
Their skeletons easily disintegrate post mortem into bioclastic sands and
sediments which are even finer than these sands. The representatives of all
other phyla were probably greatly subordinate to the crinoids a s matrix-
mud suppliers. It should be noted that in the graphs (Fig.79-82), there is
some similarity between the curves for the matrix and the crinoid remains.
Algae
A large portion of what in the field seems to be matrix of the reef, on

closer examination - especially in thin sections - appears to consist of
calcareous Algae. A s already stated, a distinction between true calcareous
matrix and Algae is often difficult o r even impossible to make. Therefore
both have been taken together when estimating the composition of the reef
limestone at the more than 300 observation points. More detailed examination
of samples from a number of observation points revealed that in the reef
centre a very large proportion of the "matrix" consists of Algae; this is also
true, to a great degree, for the area close to the southeastern margin.
Towards the north and west end of the reef, the percentage of Algae decreases,
SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS O F THE REEFS 189
a s does that of the stromatoporoids. In pools and debris-filled depressions,

most o r all of the matrix consists of calcareous mud. Therefore, it may be
concluded that stromatoporoid development was more strongly influenced by
mud deposition than by algal growth.
Conclusions
Apart from such reef portions as pools and debris-filled depressions,

which a r e still to be described(pp.191-196), the HolmhPllar reef, and also
the other reefs of this type, shows a striking regularity in organic com-
position, with stromatoporoids as the dominant reef builders and with corals
and bryozoans playing only a very subordinate part. In HolmhZllar (as well
as in other similar reefs) stromatoporoid development was most vigorous
i n the reef centre and decreased towards the north and west flanks, in which
direction mud and crinoid remains gain in importance a s reef-limestone
components.
SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF THE REEFS
On the basis of what has been said in the previous section about the
distribution of fossils within the HolmhPllar reef, it can be assumed that the
most vigorously developing part of the reef was in the centre, that is in the
southeast. Both towards the north and the west, the vigour of reef growth
decreased. This is especially evidenced by the percentage of stromatoporoids
in the reef limestone.
A similar distribution of different degrees of growth vigour over a reef
is found in modern reefs which grow perpendicularly to the dominating wave
o r current direction. At both edges of such a reef deposition of debris takes
place, over which the reef may expand. In this way, a reef develops which
possesses the shape of a crescent o r a horse-shoe. At the inner curve, growth
is less, possibly due to slighter water movement and the consequently smaller
supply of food and nutrient salts. The opening of the crescent is generally
directed towards the coast. The dimensions of such a reef seem to be related
to the depth of the water.
It should be noted that the distribution of the raukar in Holmhallar shows
a crescent-shaped pattern. It is unlikely that this is due to the abrasive action
of the present sea, since the southeastern part of the raukar field forms the
head of a promontory and is most severely attacked by wave action.
The conclusion s e e m s warranted, therefore, that the Holmhallar raukar
field represents a fossil crescent-shaped reef, with the opening directed
towards the northwest. A similar reef shape can be deduced from the raukar
fields of Hammarshagahallar, north of Holmhallar, and Heliholm, south of
Holmhallar, as well as from a number of raukar fields in the Hemse Beds.
One of these reefs in the Hemse Beds still shows part of the surrounding
sediments. This reef lies about 1.2 km north-northeast of Sjausterhammar.
There a northwest - southeast-orientated raukar zone reaches the beach,
where the outer boundary of the raukar field is turned towards the south.
After a few tens of metres, this outer reef-limestone boundary again retreats
westwards, via a section with a northeast - southwest direction. Around the
place where the raukar group reaches the present shore in the northeast, a
190 THE HOLMHALL- REEF TYPE
few of the raukar show reef debris overlying the true reef limestone. The
preserved debris blanket is up to a few decimetres thick and dips slightly
towards the northeast. Where the reef-limestone margin in the southeast
begins to retreat inland, the reef limestone is underlaid by stratified,
strongly-recrystallized crinoid limestone, dipping towards the centre of the
reef. Similar stratified limestone is also exposed further south of the reef.
From these data, i t appears that this reef possesses a semi-circular outward
boundary. At the inward side, however, no stratified sediments a r e present,
but some reef limestone very poor in crinoids is exposed. The reef thus
shows a semi-circular rather than a crescent shape.
Most of the other reefs of Holmhdlar type in the Hemse Beds were
presumably also semi-circular o r crescent-shaped, rather than elongated
like the Hoburgen-type reefs.
Along the northwestern shore of Sandviken, however, some remains of
reef limestone are found, which probably formed part of relatively small
reefs, which were perhaps elongated reefs, roughly narrow-elliptical in plane.
The exposures, unfortunately, do not permit any reliable conclusion.
It has been argued in Chapter IV, that the slight dip in the Gotlandian
s t r a t a is due to syn-sedimentary tilting. Though deviations have occurred,
the main direction of dip is towards the southeast. It is likely that the
direction of the depth contours, and also that of the coast line, has been more
o r l e s s parallel to the tilt-axis, viz. in general approximately northeast -
southwest. In the southern peninsula of Gotland, reef limestone of the
Holmhallar type is found from Faludden in the north to Heliholm in the
south, that is, in a roughly northeast - southwest-directed belt. Combining
these data, it appears very likely that the crescent-shaped reefs of
Holmhallar and environment, just a s more recent reefs, had their opening
directed towards the coast which existed during the time of reef formation.
The original shape and orientation of the Holmhallar reef, as deduced
from the detailed field analysis, a r e indicated on the accompanying map by
means of a dashed line.
In the Hemse Beds, reefs of the Holmhdlar type occur in the Snabben -
Sysne-udd area in a north-northeast - south-southwest arrangement, with
their openings directed roughly west-northwest. A similar orientation of the
opening is found in the Ljugarn, Fagelhammar and Sjausterhammar reefs.
Therefore, in the Hemse Beds too, a relationship may be assumed between
the form and orientation of the Holmhallar-type reefs and the direction of the
coast line at that time.
Measured in a straight line, the Holmhallar reef had a base
approximately 650 m long. The greatest breadth and height were attained in
the centre. The highest raukar a r e still found there.
A horizontal extension comparable to that of the Holmhdlar reef was
reached by the Ljugarn reef of the Hemse Beds. That reef, a s measured
between the two ends, shows a chord length of about 550 m. The Fagelhammar
reefs a r e somewhat smaller. Still smaller a r e the reefs in the Sjausterhammar
area.
Several reefs, probably on the order of fifteen, must have been present
in the Hemse Beds between Snabben and Sysne-udd. Most of these were quite
small, with a chord length of 50-150 m. About half-way along the south-
western coast of the Sysne peninsula, the remains a r e found of a reef which
probably measured not more than 10 m in chord length. Of this small reef
DEPRESSIONS IN T H E R E E F 191
only a nucleus of about 3 m in diameter is exposed. It is surrounded at a

distance of one to a few metres by reef-detrital limestone. This limestone
dips about 20° away from the reef nucleus and overlies the margins of the
reef.
In the Hemse Beds, the reefs of Holmhallar type thus obviously
decrease in size in a northeastward direction. A tentative explanation of this
observation will be given in the discussion of the Hemse Beds in Chapter XI
(p.386).
The thickness of the reefs of Holmhallar type exposed i n the Hemse

Beds i s only slight. The raukar only rarely reach over 4 m above sea level.
Only in Fagelhammar South a r e higher raukar, up to 6 m, found. It is not
known how much reef limestone is still below s e a level in Figelhammar and
Ljugarn. In the surroundings of Sjausterhammar, the underlying sediments
of part of the reefs a r e exposed at around sea level. But since F%gelhammar
is only about 6 km southwest of Sjausterhammar and the general dip of the
s t r a t a of Gotland does not deviate much from a southeasterly direction, it
seems unlikely that a great thickness of reef limestone is still hidden below
sea level. Presumably the reef limestone in the centre of the large reefs had
a maximum thickness on the order of 6-8 m (see also the section on the
Holmhallar-type reef limestones of the Hemse Beds in Chapter XI), whereas
the smaller reefs, e.g., in the Snabben - Sysne-udd belt, may have been even
thinner.
DEPRESSIONS I N THE REEF
In the Holmhallar raukar field, several indications a r e found that

during development of the reef i t s surface in places was rather uneven.
P a r t s with the characteristic stromatoporoid fauna alternate locally with
parts in which reef and/or crinoid debris dominates o r i n which a different
fauna is present. Just as with the Hoburgen-type reefs described in Chapter
Vn, those parts in which debris could accumulate will be termed filled
depressions, and the ones in which a different fauna developed will be called
pools. It is admitted that this distinction is not a sharp one. Pools, too, may
contain a certain amount of debris and, on the other hand, depressions may
have developed upwards into pools. Nevertheless, the distinction facilitates
a description of the reefs.
Normal reef portions, depressions and pools not only alternated
synchronously, but they also succeeded each other in time. Thus, debris-
filled depressions usually overlie reef limestone rich in stromatoporoids.
Debris accumulated in them until, in a later stage, reef builders may again
have expanded over the filled depressions.
Arkell (1935, pp.98-99), i n a study on Jurassic reefs from the vicinity
of Oxford, postulated that in these reefs growth might have been mainly
confined, after a while, to the margins. In this way, outgrowths from the
margins might have enclosed sheltered embayments, in which reef limestone
of different faunal and sedimentary facies could accumulate.
A comparable mode of origin may have led to the formation of
depressions in the surface of reefs of the Holmhallar type i n Gotland. In
places with the best supply of water, rich in food and nutrient salts, reef
builders may have grown faster and larger than elsewhere, thus leading to
an uneven topography, with sheltered depressions behind the faster-growing

reef parts. In these depressions debris could accumulate, o r a different
fauna could develop.
No apparent regularity has been found in distribution of the debris-
filled depressions and pools over the reefs. They seem to have developed in
all parts of the reefs, certainly not only behind outgrowths from the reef
margins. This may have been connected with the probably seaward-sloping
upper surface of the reefs (cf. Chapter IX,p.223), which may have caused
not only the reef margins but also many other parts of the reef surface to be
in regular contact with circulating water. But in the lower parts of the raukar,
remains of filled depressions and pools a r e rarely found; this, however, is
assumed to be due to selective Recent erosion ( s e e the section on the
formation of raukar, later in this chapter, p.208).
D e b r i s -fi I led d e p r e s s ions
Among the debris deposited in depressions there a r e , of course,

remains of stromatoporoids, corals and bryozoans, but also crinoid fragments,
orthoceratids, trilobites and occasional brachiopods, gastropods o r lamelli-
branchs. Whereas crinoid stem fragments are extremely abundant in some
of the depressions (e.g., observation point 73), they are much less numerous
in others (e.g., points 131, 173A). In general, there seems to be a relation-
ship between the amount of crinoid remains i n a filled depression and the
distance of this depression from the reef margin. This is one of the indica-
tions which suggest that crinoids grew more abundantly on the flanks of the
reefs than on the upper surface (see also Chapter X I ) .
Other factors too, however, must have influenced the filling of these
depressions, such as fluctuations in the wind direction and in the strength of
wave action. The latter can be illustrated with the facts observed in point 78
(Fig.83). This point forms part of a large depression, aremnant of which is
still left of dimensions of over 2 m high, about 5 m long and about 2 m broad.
The debris filling consists in very large part of red-coloured crinoid remains.
They give the sediment as a whole a r e d colour, even though the calcareous
matrix in between them is mainly greyish green. However, this matrix is a
l e s s important element of the sediment than a r e the crinoids. The sediment
shows a distinct stratification, with layers dipping towards the southeastern
edge of this rauk. Presumably, the depression was deepest in this vicinity.
In between the crinoids, numerous remains of stromatoporoids and corals
a r e present. These a r e mainly concentrated in a number of special layers,
which alternate with layers of a more standard crinoid content. Within these
layers of coarser material, the stromatoporoid and coral remains occur in
all possible positions, intermingled at random with crinoid fragments.
Towards the top of the depression, larger fossils decrease in number and in
the highest part of the rauk, only a few a r e present. The presence of larger
fossils in some layers and their absence in others cannot be accidental but
must have been caused by an agent such as occasional severe storms that
attacked the developing reef.
Distinct stratification is also found in the depression seen at observa-
tion point 85. Crinoid remains a r e numerous there too; stromatoporoids and
corals a r e principally represented by fragments. The individual layers vary
in thickness between one and a few centimetres. The stratification evidently
DEPRESSIONS IN THE R E E F 193
Fig.83. Holmhallar, observation point 78. Depression in the reef surface, at

the bottom filled with crinoids and fragments of stromatoporoids and corals,
at the top mainly with crinoid remains. Hamra-Sundre Beds.
is caused by a sorting according to size of the crinoid and other fossil

remains, whereas slight variations in the matrix volume may also have
contributed somewhat. Fluctuations in the intensity and direction of wave
action may have been the main factor leading to this stratification.
The boundary between the actual reef limestone and an overlying debris-
filled depression is usually distinct, due to the sudden decrease in the number
of stromatoporoids and the simultaneous increase in fragments of fossils.
From this, one can surmise that several of the depressions have developed
f r o m lower parts within the reef surface in which reef growth was ended
within a short time, perhaps due to the washing-in of great amounts of debris.
A gradual smothering of reef builders by washed-in material would have led
to less distinct boundaries and to transition zones in which the autochthonous
fauna was more gradually replaced by the debris.
The debris material i n the depressions is generally softer than the
stromatoporoid reef limestone. It is, therefore, interesting to note that no
filled depressions have been preserved around present s e a level, where
erosion was strongest. The only examples found a r e higher up in the raukar,
resting on a pedestal of stromatoporoid limestone (cf. p.183). Where larger
depressions occur at that level, the lesser resistance to erosion is often
demonstrated by an inward curving of the rauk surface (e.g., observation
points 191-192, 137).
An example of a debris-filled depression is found in Holmhallar, at
observation point 137. The depression overlies reef limestone very rich in
branched corals, bryozoans and stromatoporoids. The presence of the f i r s t
two groups suggests that, prior to the debris accumulation, this locality
constituted a pool in the reef surface.
The boundary between the reef limestone and the material which filled
the depression is very sharp. The base of the depression is somewhat
undulous and faintly concave. In the centre it reaches about 25 cm lower than
at its margins. The diameter of the depression is about 6 m. The filling of
the depression consists mainly of crinoid debris. In the observation points
137A and 137B it can be seen how the crinoid breccia interfingers over a
height of about 2 m with the actual reef limestone. In point 137A the average
course of the boundary is about vertical. In point 137B in the lower part the
crinoid breccia expands towards the northeast over the reef limestone,
whereas higher up in the cross-section, the reef limestone in i t s turn expands
again quite rapidly over the debris. The interfingering strongly suggests that
the filling of the depression with debris took place mainly in bouts and
continued until a level more or l e s s equal to that of the surrounding reef
p a r t s was reached.
Close to the boundary between depression and reef limestone in
observation point 137C, there is a rather sinuous crack along which later
displacement has taken place. This is demonstrated by fossils which a r e cut
off and lack their counterpart. Comparison of the sediment at both sides of
the crack suggested that a part of the same fossil now lies about 20 cm
lower at the depression side of the crack than at the reef side. Slight
horizontal movements, too, a r e suggested by this exposure. Both may have
found their origin in compaction of the depression-filling material.
It is significant that, whereas in points 137A and 137B the depression
is almost exclusively filled with crinoid debris, in point 137C stromatoporoid
remains are also found, several of which dip rather strongly in one o r
another direction. There is even a large piece of stromatoporoid limestone,
about 40 cm high and 20 cm broad, lying almost upside down. This indicates
that the reef of Holmhallar occasionally may have been attacked by storms
which were strong enough to tear blocks from the reef edge and toss these
onto the reef surface. This phenomenon is reminiscent of the formation of
"negro heads" on modern reefs. Point 13°C is located at the most seaward
part of the depression under discussion.
Debris-filled depressions in other Holmhallar-type reefs a r e of
character and size similar to those in Holmhallar. Thus the largest one in
FPgelhammar South has a diameter of about 6 m. It is filled with a distinctly
stratified breccia of crinoid fragments and a few small remains of reef
builders; it is now found on top of a rauk, well out of the reach of Recent
wave action (Fig.84). Some other depressions in this raukar a r e a were found
to be filled with stromatoporoid fragments in a matrix of calcareous mud,
with crinoid remains in between.
Pools in the reef surface
The term rrpool"is used by the present author to denote a part of the
reef surface which was situated lower than its surroundings but which
nevertheless was covered with living organisms. Exposed reef limestones can
be recognized a s having been formed in pools in the reef surface, if they
differ markedly in faunal composition and/or in matrix percentage from the
surrounding reef limestone.
DEPRESSIONS IN THE REEF 195
Fig.84. Rauk in Fagelhammar South. Reef limestone with at the top of the
rauk a debris-filled depression. Hemse Beds.
A good example of a fossil pool has been found in Holmhallar at the

observation points 159-165. An increase in the matrix percentage, of about
25% of the total volume, coincides with a strong decrease in the number and
s i z e s of the stromatoporoids. Underneath the pool and around it, stromato-
poroids constitute about 60% of the total reef volume. In the pool they decrease
to a volume percentage as low a s about 10. Consistent with the decrease in
stromatoporoids in the pool, the number of coral and bryozoan colonies rises.
Although there is also an increase in the amount of crinoid remains, they do
not, by far, reach a volume percentage as high as in several of the debris-
filled depressions. In addition to the estimates in observation points 159-165,
nine further estimates have been made of the composition of the reef lime-
stone in that part of the Holmhallar raukar field (Fig.224). The results of all
sixteen estimates together are given in the graph of Fig.225.
In a number of cases, pools directly overlie reef parts which are very
rich in stromatoporoids. These pools have presumably been formed by a
local decrease in the velocity of reef growth.
In some of the topographically lower parts in the reef surface, growth
came to a complete standstill and debris-filled depressions formed, as
discussed before in this chapter. In these parts, debris deposition could
continue until the floor of the depression was raised to about the level of the
surrounding reef surface. Subsequently the initial depression was overgrown
again by reef builders, forming normal stromatoporoid reef limestone. It
could also happen, however, that organisms settled on the floor of the
depression before it was completely filled, thus converting it into a pool.
196 THEHOLMHXLLARREEFTYPE
An example of this has been seen in HolmKXllar in the observation points 131-132.
In point 131 the base of a depression lies at a height of about 2 m above present sea
level; in point 132 the same base lies at about 1.6 m altitude. The boundary with the
underlying stromatoporoid rock is distinct and somewhat undulating. Compared with
typical crinoid-filled depressions, crinoid remains in this depression are less
numerous, but they a r e of larger size. Stromatoporoids, corals and bryozoan frag-
ments do not reach high percentages, The amount of matrix mud, mainly red coloured,
on the other hand, is greater than in many other depressions. In point 131, higher up
in the original depression, a number of coral and bryozoan colonies can be seen that
have grown on and between the debris. In point 132, these are already present close
to the base of the depression. Further upwards, a few stromatoporoids also appear,
but they a r e generally of rather small size. The more the distinction between pool
and surrounding reef limestone fades away, in successive higher parts, the more the
stromatoporoids are seen to have regained ground on the other reef builders.
INTERRUPTIONS I N REEF GROWTH
In several places in Holmhallar and related reef-limestone exposures,

the raukar show, within their structure, more or less horizontal planes,
which may have been further emphasized by erosion. In places they give the
reef limestone a somewhat pseudo-stratified character (Fig.85). These planes
almost always occur where the reef limestone is very rich in stromatoporoids.
The reverse is not generally true, a s there a r e also many parts of the reef
rich in stromatoporoids, which do not show this kind of wide-apart pseudo-
stratification.
Some of these exposed planes are bordered above and below by exactly
the same kind of reef limestone, with the same faunal composition. If, more-
over, the limestone is of crumbling nature, it is not impossible that these
Fig.85. HelihoIm. Raukar of reef limestone very rich in stromatoporoids.

Wide apart, sub-horizontal planes which c r o s s the reef limestone give the
latter a pseudo-stratified character.
INTERRUPTIONS IN R E E F GROWTH 197
planes were formed only i n Quaternary times, e.g., a s the result of frost
action (see p.200). But a syn-genetic origin is also possible, as will be
discussed next for some other planes, and a definite solution of the problem
of the origin of all planes cannot be given.
A number of planes suggest a syn-genetic origin. This is especially

likely in cases where there are notable differences in the character of the
limestone below and above the plane. An illustration of the latter feature has
been found at the observation points 272-276, There a plane is exposed which
descends from a height of about 3 m above present s e a level at point 272 to
an altitude of less than 1 m above s e a level at point 276. From there, towards
the northeast, the plane ascends a little again. At the other side of point 272,
the plane can still be traced at point 265. Thus, horizontal extension of this
plane is a t least 25 m. Immediately below the plane and, still more evident,
in the lowermost 0.5 m above it, the limestone is distinctly richer in
calcareous matrix than it is in the lower and top parts of the raukar at these
points. In the fossil content differences are less well marked, though the
reef limestone just above the plane is relatively richer in corals and
bryozoans than elsewhere in these raukar. These taxa decrease in number
upwards and are replaced by stromatoporoids which, being already numerous
slightly above the plane, build the reef limestone almost exclusively in the
higher portions, just as they did below the plane. The conclusion from this
example is that formation of the plane has been linked to a retardation o r
interruption in reef growth.
An even more evident interruption in reef growth is found in observq-
tion point 139. There a layer, about 5-10 cm thick, of hard, splintery and
almost non-fossiliferous limestone is intercalated in the reef limestone, at
a height of about 0.75 m above present sea level (Fig.86). The line of outcrop
is rather sinuous, but as a whole, the plane shows a distinct southeastward
dip. In view of the thickness of the layer and the general lack of fossils in it,
it is likely that during deposition of this layer, reef growth was interrupted.
There are, however, no apparent differences in the faunal composition of the
reef limestone above and below this layer.
Higher up in the same rauk, there is a second layer of such splinteryJimestone
but of smaller extension and thiclaess, and, therefore, less striking than the lower
one. In contrast to the previous case, this second interruption in reef growth
additionally appears because of differences in the fossil content of the reef limestone.
Going upwards from the first to the second layer, a gradual increase in matrix
percentage and in the number of bryozoan remains can be observed, together with a
decrease in the volume percentage in stromatoporoids. Above the second limestone
layer the number of stromatoporoids is very high again, and the amount of matrix and
bryozoans has distinctly decreased. The colour of the matrix is predominantly grey
below the second layer and mainly red above it.
A third layer of hard, splintery limestone occurs, at this locality in Holmhdlar,
at about 2 m above sea level. This one, too, shows a somewhat sinuous line of outcrop.
It is the least-well-developed one of the three.
At observation point 140 there is a somewhat sinuous layer of limestone,

very rich in crinoid remains but also containing fragments of corals,
stromatoporoids, and other organisms. It is situated at a height of about
1.5 m above s e a level and shows an average thickness of about 15 cm.
Deposition of this layer in all likelihood also indicates a local interruption
198 THEHOLMHALLARREEF TYPE
Fig.86. Holmhdlar, observation point 139. Rauk with two intercalated layers
of hard limestone, nearly devoid of fossils.
of reef development. The reef limestone overlying this layer is very rich in
stromatoporoids, from immediately above the interruptive layer onwards.
This is in contrast to the reef limestone underneath the layer, which is less
rich in these fossils and contains more corals, bryozoans, crinoid remains
and matrix. There s e e m s to have been a tendency in these reef-building
components to gradually replace the stromatoporoids, which at the base of
this rauk were the sole reef builders but upwards decrease in importance.
It is likely that this crinoid layer corresponds to the upper layer of
splintery limestone, recorded from observation point 139. How the two may
have passed into each other unfortunately cannot be established since the
rauk is interrupted at this height over a distance of a few metres.
In the examples described above, there is evidence that local inter-

ruptions in reef growth have occurred. The s a m e may be true in several
other cases, in which the reef limestone is intersected by planes which
generally appear a s more o r less straight horizontal or sub-horizontal lines
in the sides of the raukar. More especially if a correlation of the lines in
several raukar over not too small an area is possible, the probability that
they a r e due to a temporary break in reef development increases.
However, this argument must be used with caution and additional
evidence still needs to be obtained. This is, for instance, illustrated by the
vague pseudo-stratification that is found in the observation points 109-111.
The two planes exposed in this large rauk can be followed over quite a
distance with slight variations in their height above present s e a level. But
they 'do not only intersect the reef limestone proper but at the same level
INTERRUPTIONS IN R E E F GROWTH 199
also cut through a debris-filled depression and thus, most probably, were
not formed at the time of reef growth.
TO explain the mode of formation of the actual interruptions in reef

growth several possibilities have to be considered, such as (1) the fact that
the reef locally reached the sea surface; (2) an increase in the turbidity of
the water; ( 3 ) a temporary strong increase in s e a depth; and (4)the action
of waves, more especially s t o r m waves.
(1) It seems highly improbable that reef growth was periodically inter-
rupted because parts of its surface reached s e a level. Reef growth in an
extremely shallow s e a is illustrated, e.g., by the small reefs of the Lower
Hamra limestone, which exhibit a much more unorganized character and a
higher content of terrigenous material. There is no apparent similarity of
these reefs to the reefs of the Holmhiillar type.
( 2 ) Where differences in faunal composition are found together with an
increase in the matrix percentage, a temporarily greater turbidity of the
water may have played a part. Since the matrix is rather pure limestone,
however, greater turbidity was not related to an increased supply of
terrigenous material. The calcareous mud was pmbaply derived from the
reef o r its immediate environment and was s t i r r e d up by water turbulence.
Its deposition and its influence upon reef growth can thus only have been
secondary phenomena, which resulted from an alteration in the physical
environmental conditions.
( 3 ) A rate of subsidence 01 the sea bottom in excess of the rate of
upward growth of the reef would not have stopped reef growth until the s u r -
face of the reef was too deep to receive the required minimum supply of
light o r until the reef surface came below effective wave base (marl deposi-
tion). If such a stronger subsidence actually happened, reef development
would have stopped over the entire surface of the reef and not just locally.
Moreover, lowering below effective wave base would have permitted the
settling of sediment, that was present in suspension. Such sedimentation
would have continued until water depth again decreased to depths in which
renewed reef growth could take place. All interruptions in reef development
thus should then be characterized by layers of sediment of greater extension
and thickness than those which are actually found.
(4)Since the r e m a r k s made under (2) and (3) indicate that reef develop-
ment took place above effective wave base, alterations in the effects of wave
action remain the most probzble cause of the local interruptions in reef
growth. During storms, wave action would have greatly increased in
intensity. The higher parts of the reef may then have been attacked, and
much reef and crinoid debris may have been formed which was deposited in
depressions in the reef surface and around the reef. The planes of inter-
ruption, thus, should not only indicate a local break i n reef development but
also partial demolition. The finest debris was kept floating until wave action
had decreased. Its deposition may have influenced reef growth, especially in
pools, and may even have caused the death of several organisms. In this way,
it perhaps caused secondary interruptions in reef development elsewhere on
the reef. This explanation clarifies (a) why reef growth was interrupted only
locally; (b) why some of the planes do not show indications of the deposition
of calcareous mud o r reef and crinoid debris, where others do; (c) why some
of the interruptions were accompanied by shifts in faunal composition.
FISSURES
The raukar field of Holmhallar is intersected by a number of large,

sub-vertical fissures, which c r o s s the reef limestone from one side to the
other. Similar fissures occur in the other raukar fields in the southern
peninsula of Gotland (Fig.87, 88), as well as in Ljugarn (Fig.89) and
Fggelhammar. Generally there are also several smaller cracks linked to the
main ones.
The length of the main fissures ranges from about 25 to 75 m, as far
a s observations a r e possible; several may have been longer, intersecting also
portions of the reef that have been eroded. The total width is generally in the
o r d e r of some tens of centimetres, but some are much wider. Thus a large
f i s s u r e on the island of Heliholm, southeast of the lighthouse, reaches a local
A B
Fig.87. Fissures intersecting reef limestone of Holmhallar type. Heliholm.
Hamra-Sundre Beds. A. East of the famous rauk "Penningkammare".
B. Southeast of the lighthouse; part of the sediment which filled the fissure
is in this case still preserved.
FISSURES 201
Fig.88. Fissure crossing reef limestone of Holmhalar type in the

Holmhallar raukar field, near observation point 214. Hamra-Sundre Beds.
Comparison of fissured fossils in the right and left limestone parts suggests
that in a vertical direction the two parts have been displaced, compared to
each other, over a distance of about 8 cm.
maximum width of 94 cm. The widest fissures seen in Ljugarn measured

approximately 70 cm.
The fissures usually have a more o r l e s s sinuous course. They were
filled with fine reef debris, which is generally softer than the true reef
limestone. Consequently, Recent erosion has reopened several of the cracks,
leaving only some of the original sediment filling locally against the margins
of the fissures. Only in a limited number of cases are the fissures still
completely filled with a light-coloured, finely-crystalline limestone. In a few
of these, the filling limestone appears to be even harder than the actual reef
limestone and the f i s s u r e is consequently exposed as a ridge. The fissure
fillings a r e usually very rich in small-sized organic remains, such a s
fragments of branched corals and bryozoans and of other reef-building
organisms. Only rarely do they contain larger fossils, such as intact
colonies. That the difference between the components of the reef limestone
and those of the f i s s u r e fillings is mainly a matter of size suggests that the
fissures were formed and filled at the time of reef growth.
202 T H E H O L M H X L L A R R E E FT Y PE
Fig.89. Ljugarn. Hemse Beds. Fissure in reef limestone.
The fossiliferous sediments in the fissures often show an approx-

im'ately vertical stratification, which is not found in the surrounding reef
limestone. The thickness of individual layers is generally on the order of
1-10 cm. In the large fissure on Heliholm mentioned above, the average
thickness of the layers is 1-2 cm, but locally they a r e much thicker (Fig.87B);
in other cracks on that island several layers have been observed of only up
to a few millimetres in thickness.
This type of stratification is, in all likelihood, linked with the formation
of the fissures. Initially these must have been rather narrow. They then
became filled with calcareous mud and small fossil fragments; for larger
debris there was no space. This material soon hardened. Thereafter, the
fissure widened a little and was filled up again. This may have continued
several times and this succession must have led to the vertical layers
present in the fissures.
The cause of the formation of these fissures presumably has to be
found in compression of the sea bottom underneath the expanding reefs.
Small sliding planes and striae that can be observed on the bedding planes
FISSURES 203
of the fissure sediments prove that small, sub-vertical displacements have

taken place.
The reefs originated on a very soft limy substratum. At places where
reef building took place, this sediment was compressed by the weight placed
upon it. With continued upward growth of a reef, the degree of compression
decreased. Lateral expansion of the reefs, however, caused the reef flanks
to grow on a less consolidated part of the s e a bottom. Thus, at a certain
stage, compression of the basal sediment under the reef margins exceeded
compression under the reef centre. Tension increased until fissures formed
and the reef margins moved slightly downwards. With continued reef
expansion, this may have been repeated several times. This mode of
formation then explains why all fissures a r e almost perpendicular to the
curved longitudinal axis of the reefs (see the map of Holmhallar).
A s follows from the above, displacements along these large cracks must
have been slight and were directed downwards. Horizontal movements a r e not to
be expected with such amode of formation as is assumed here. Moreover, these
were excluded by the sinuous course of the fissures. Distinct information
about the extent of the vertical displacements which have taken place could
be gained at the Holmhallar observation points 159-165, where a fissure
intersected a pool with a faunal composition different from that of the
surrounding reef limestone. The base of the pool at one side was only a few
centimetres lower than at the other side. Consequently, the main movement
has consisted of a slight sagging of the outer reef part. At the observation
points 214-215, there is a fissure which is 12-25 cm wide, where broken
fossils suggest that the reef limestone at the west side has presumably
moved 8 cm down, compared t o the reef limestone at the east side (Fig.88).
There should not be an essential difference in the fissure pattern
between cases in which fissures are formed by a downward movement of the
margins and others in which there was an upward push in the centre. This is
confirmed by data from salt domes and volcanoes.
Beds above rising salt domes often show a radial fault pattern com-
parable to the fissure pattern of the Holmhallar reef. An example is given i n
the structure map of the Hawkins Oilfield, shown by De Sitter (1956, p.261).
Radial faults are accompanied there by normal longitudinal faults.
If, in a volcano, the supply of magma from the depth exceeds the
production 01 the volcanic vent, the surface is pushed up. This phenomenon
has been described from the Merbabu volcano in central Java, Indonesia
(Van Bemmelen, 1954, p.81). The vent of the volcano became blocked up, the
cone was pushed up by the advancing magma and finally Tsdial faults
originated through which the lava appeared at the surface.
Longitudinal fissures, comparable to those that a r e present above the
Hawkins salt dome, a r e not evident at Holmhallar, but a few have been seen
in the neighbouring raukar field on Heliholm. They showed an average dip of
approximately 70" inland and may be taken as evidence of the seaward
expansion of the reef. Other examples have been observed in Ljugarn and i n
FQelhammar.
Since the seaward margin of the reef was in direct contact with the
open sea, the reef builders will from there also have grown outward over the
forereef in a way similar t o their sideward growth over the lateral debris
deposits. The forereef rested 011 deposits whose supporting competency was
not yet great and which might be compressed o r have flowed f r o m beneath
the load. The newer reef parts overlying the forereef caused the latter to
2 04 T H E H O L M H A L L A R R E E FT Y PE
subside to a stronger degree than did the sediment underneath the older reef
parts, and consequently caused the formation of the fissures perpendicular
to the radial ones, in a way comparable to these radial fissures.
In fact, there may even be a direct connection between a radial and a
longitudinal fissure. An example of this has been observed in the south of the
Ljugarn raukar field where a fissure, of about northwest - southeast direction,
ends in a fissure with a more south to southwest direction.
Another type of filled fissure has been found i n Holmh&llarat about

1.5 m southwest of observation point 145 (Fig. 90). This fissure is bounded
by two sub-vertical planes which slightly diverge upwards. The width of the
Fig.90. Holmhallar, observation point 145. Fissure, filled with reef debris.
The debris is much coarser than in other filled fissures and shows no sub-
vertical stratification. This suggests that the fissure was filled in one single
stage. Hamra-Sundre Beds.
FISSURES 205
f i s s u r e is about 10 cm at the bottom and more than 40 cm at a height of

about 3 m. The difference in relation to the surrounding reef limestone is
slightest at the bottom. The f i s s u r e filling there consists mainly of
stromatoporoid colonies and fragments (all dipping in one o r another
direction), calcareous mud and some crinoid remains. Upwards the number
of crinoid columnals strongly increases, together with the number of
bryozoan fragments; some corals a r e also present there; stromatoporoids
still occur, but a r e relatively less common than in the lower part. This
f i s s u r e s e e m s to have been filled from bottom to top in one single stage.
Indications of this a r e the presence of much-coarser reef debris and also
the complete absence of any sub-vertical stratification, which is s o
characteristic of the other fissure fillings. Towards the north-northwest of
observation point 145 this fissure narrows (Fig.91); towards the southeast,
lack of suitable exposures hinders reliable observations.
Fig.91. Holmhallar. The same fissure as that shown in Fig.90, but some
m e t r e s further north-northeast. The fissure is narrower at this place. It can
only be followed upwards until the about horizontal plane in the upper part
of the rauk.
The character of the filling material and the increasing width upwards
suggest a mode of formation comparable to that of the other fissures but
with only one vigorous hinge-like movement instead of several successive
stages.
It is interesting to note that north-northeast of observation point 145,
where the exposed reef limestone reaches higher, the fissure does not
continue until the top of the reef limestone (Fig.91). After the fissure had
been filled, the reef builders apparently grew normally over that area.
DEBRIS FLOOR AND TALUS
Neither in Holmhallar nor in the other raukar fields in the southern

peninsula of Gotland has anything been preserved of a talus mantle sur-
rounding the reefs. Neither is the debris floor over which the reef flanks a r e
supposed to have expanded exposed.
An impression of the debris underneath the reef flanks can be gained
in F k e l h a m m a r South. In the north of this raukar field the raukar get
smaller, hardly ever reaching over 1 m in height, whereas the coastline
gradually bends inwards. In the reef limestone large stromatoporoids a r e
comparatively less common, flat colonies and also stromatoporoids showing
strong vaulting are more common there than in the centre of the reef; corals
are anything but r a r e , crinoid remains a r e very common. The reef limestone
thus shows several indications of representing a peripheral part of the reef.
In an elongated rauk-like exposure (see section a-b in Fig.193), this reef
limestone passes laterally into a comparable sediment which shows a vague
stratification and a reefward dip. At the north side of this exposure, it can
be seen how this limestone overlies fossiliferous marly limestone which is
very irregularly stratified, and in which fossils occur chaotically.
Stromatoporoids predominate, but corals are common. In the matrix of
bluish grey marly limestone, irregular flat lenses of hard, brownish grey
limestone a r e also found, usually very rich in crinoid remains. This
sediment, too, dips reefwards, that is southeast to south-southeast. Upwards
it passes into harder, more resistant sediment, which is much richer in
stromatoporoids and crinoids, and gains the character of the stratified, reef-
like limestone mentioned before from the south side of this exposure.
Further towards the .north a few raukar still follow which a r e built of
reef limestone (Fig.193). This is, however, less characteristic of the
Holmhallar type of reef limestone than that in the centre of the reef.
Presumably these exposures represent the northern end of the Fsgelhammar
South reef, in which the reef spread over a base of reef debris. Formation
of reef debris must have varied; e.g., more was worked off the reef during
heavy storms. The exposure discussed perhaps represents such a stage of
increased debris deposition, forming an elevation in the debris floor under-
neath the reef flank.
The sediments underlying the reef limestone could also be observed i n

an elongated rauk, about 0.4 km northeast of Sjausterhammar Fisklage, close
to the shoreline (Fig.192). In the southeastern side of this rauk which is
about 3 m high, the following succession is present, from top to bottom:
1.30 m + Reef limestone; at the base mainly flattened colonies, upwards soon
also rounder specimens.
0.70 m Stratified marly limestone, bluish grey, finely crystalline, layers
generally 0.5-5 cm thick; many solitary corals, a few small
stromatoporoids, mainly in thin, laminar growth forms,
occasionally brachiopods.
0.30 m Reef-like limestone with mainly flattened reef builders, several of
which a r e not in their living position.
0.65 m Calcareous slate, bluish, very thinly cleaving, dense to very finely
crystalline; only a few fossils.
Differences in resistance 40 erosion make the reef limestone protrude
over the underlying sediments. All layers dip approximately 5 O towards the
northeast.
DEBRIS FLOOR AND TALUS 207
North and south of this exposure, the outcrops do not reach much above
sea level. Those north of the rauk mainly show limestone of a reef-detrital
character, occasionally some reef limestone o r more-normally stratified
limestone. The outcrops south of the rauk predominantly show calcareous
slate, generally dipping a few degrees seaward, but occasionally up to 20';
the sediment often contains reef debris.
The reef which must have been present in this area, as is indicated by
the succession of strata and by the desdribed distribution of the sediments,
s e e m s to have been eroded in Recent times.
A third example of the relationship between reef and underlying

sediments, is presented by the exposures in the south of the Sjausterhammar
peninsula (Fig.191). The outward boundary of the reef limestone in that
locality follows a curved course from north-northeast - south-southwest via
east - west to about east-southeast - west-northwest, suggesting a crescent-
shaped reef with its opening about northwestwards. The reef limestone is
underlaid by stratified stromatoporoid limestone, which in i t s turn overlies
calcareous slate. In the centre of the reef, the reef limestone s t a r t s close
above the calcareous slate; towards the flanks, the intercalated stratified
stromatoporoid limestone increases in thickness.
The calcareous slate is similar to that described above from 0.4 km
northeast of Sjausterhammar Fisklage. Its exposed thickness ranges from
a few decimetres to a maximum of about 1 m.
The stratified stromatoporoid limestone which underlies the east-
northeast side of the reef dips perceptibly about west-southwest. More
commonly than underneath the reef, it crops out at the south side of the reef,
dipping reefwards. It is found there at a level somewhat lower than that of the
adjacent reef limestone. The bedding planes are irregular, due, partly, to the
very high content of potential reef-building organisms, many of which a r e not
in their life orientations and may actually have been washed from the reef.
In i t s upper portion the sediment is light grey to greenish light grey, often
faintly red-mottled, finely crystalline, very rich in stromatoporoids, but also
containing crinoids, corals and bryozoans; the thickness of the layers varies
generally between one and a few decimetres, though some may reach about
1 m; several of the layers show an indistinct and irregular subdivision into
zones about 5-10 cm thick. The lower portion of the stromatoporoid limestone
is light brownish grey, almost dense to finely crystalline and marly; the
bedding planes are irregular and knobby; the thickness of the layers is
generally 3-10 cm. Part of the stromatoporoids in this lower portion of the
stromatoporoid limestone presumably represent reef detritus, but others
may have grown on the spot. Also crinqid remains, corals, bryozoans, and
some orthoceratids and ostracodes are present. A few thin and rather
strongly marly layers, which because of weathering appear as grooves,
contain laminar stromatoporoids.
The talus mantle around the reefs can be studied in some of the
exposures between Snabben and Sysne-udd, especially in connection with a
reef about 1 km south of Snabben. The bulk of this talus is formed by
stromatoporoid colonies, which are not in their life orientations and by
fragments of stromatoporoids. At the north-northeast side of the reef, about
80% of the sediment consists of stromatoporoid material; corals and crinoid
remains are relatively scarce. Although the nature of the rock leaves little
2 08 T H E HOLMHXLLAR R E E F T Y P E
doubt that it represents a talus mantle, there is no apparent stratification i n

this reef talus. Only at a distance of about 3-5 m from the outer boundary of
the reef limestone, where the talus zone passes into limestone with reef
debris, constituting less than 50% of the total volume, does stratification
generally appear, though sometimes inconspicuously. More data about this
sediment will be given in Chapter M.
Sediments with reef detritus which overlie the reef limestone, can also
be studied i n the above-mentioned coastal a r e a between Snabben and Sysne-
udd. From the environment of Snabben, two profiles have been described by
Hede (1929, p.40). These are of interest because they give an impression of
the interrelations between the sediment types found there. Comparable
sediments a r e found in a number of other raukar. The upper boundary of the
reef limestone varies between rather undulous and rather smooth, but is
generally distinet. The overlying reef debris shows reef builders and frag-
ments of these in a matrix of crinoid breccia. Upwards it becomes less
coarse and passes into a crinoid limestone which is more thinly and faintly
undulously stratified. P a r t of the debris may be rounded.
About 0.7 km south of Snabben, it has been estimated that between
0-0.6 m above the reef surface, reef debris constitutes approximately
50-25% of the s.ediment (for the method of estimation, see Chapter IX).
Some layers a r e richer in debris than others. Upwards, coarse remains
decrease in number. At a height of 0.6 m above the reef, the length of the
largest reef fossil measured 17 cm; at a height of 0.8 m, only 7 cm. The
total volume of reef debris at 0.75-1.50 m above the reef limestone is on the
o r d e r of 15-7.5%. The cross-section studied was not situated at the place
where the reef is presumed to have reached i t s maximum thickness.
Unfortunately the exposures did not permit studying the relationships
between the reef debris and i t s source.
THE FORMATION OF RAUKAR
Although, in fact, a discussion on the formation of raukar does not

actually belong in a chapter on Middle Palaeozoic reefs, these erosion forms
on the other hand are s o characteristic of the reef-limestone exposures,
which have been described in the previous pages, that the present author,
with Hadding (1941, p.79), feels that a chapter on these reef limestones
would not be complete without a few words on raukar formation.
During the Late Quaternary Period, large p a r t s of Gotland were
inundated by the Baltic. Fossil beaches dating from the Ancylus and LittoTina
time can be found all over the island.
It was during this post-Glacial time that the raukar of Gotland were
formed by processes that a r e still continuing. Among these, wave action is
foremost. In Holmhallar, waves and storms have removed not only the
stratified sediments around the reef but also the reef margins and large
parts of rock with a relatively softer constitution that have been present
within the reef. It does not seem to be an exaggeration to estimate the total
amount of reef limestone that has already been broken down as 200,000 m3.
Similar amounts may be assumed for the raukor fielcb on Heliholm and at
Hammarshagahallar. Several raukar which now lie in the sea have already
been partly undermined, and a number of them appear to have been recently
THE FORMATION OF RAUKAR 209
deprived of their pedestals and now lie offshore as loose blocks. Large
amounts of broken reef limestone cover the shore in and around the raukar
fields.
Some geologists to whom the present author showed pictures of the
raukar fields of Gotland, were inclined to explain these a s due to
karstification. It should be admitted that, at first glance, these may
correspond strikingly to some typical k a r s t phenomena. Nevertheless, the
data mentioned above suggest that this explanation is untenable. The
destruction of the HolmhPllar reef took place around sea level. The p a r t s of
Holmhtllar indicated with blue on the enclosed map, as well as the parts
covered with eroded debris, possess a basis of reef limestone, which was
eroded down to s e a level. Whereas all softer reef parts have disappeared
around sea level, some have been preserved in the higher parts of the raukar.
Especially the higher parts should have formed suitable points of attack by
karstification.
Under the climatic circumstances that prevailed in Gotland,
karstification would have taken place slowly. Moreover, an a r e a as
Holmhallar has presumably never been covered with a vegetation cover
which in true k a r s t a r e a s may largely increase the (202-content of the water.
In view of the fact that the raukar must have been formed during a rather
short interval of time1, chemical solution can only have been responsible for
the removal of a small fraction of the limestone which has actually been
demolished.
Extensive limestone plains ("alvars") a r e found in several places
inland in Gotland, such as west and east of Sundre (see the blue portions on
the map given by Munthe et al., 1925, tavl. 5, facing p.40), but none of these
shows k a r s t phenomena.
Apart from the localities with Holmhallar-type reefs, raukar a r e also
found in the Hogklint Beds (Lickershamn), the Slite Beds (Solklint, LPnnaberg,
Spillingsklint, Bogeklint, Tjelders, Asunden, etc.) and on Stora and Lilla
Karlso. Sometimes an isolated rauk is found, such as Jungfrun, south of
Lickershamn (the largest rauk of Gotland), but generally they occur in great
numbers together in the well-known raukar fields. All these localities, like
those exposing Holmhallar-type reef limestone, were subjected to coastal
erosion at one time o r another during the post-Glacial period.
Raukar made of stratified limestones are exceptions. An example is
Hoburgsgubben (Hoburgen, Hamra-Sundre Beds), included among the raukar
by Swedish authors (e.g., Munthe, 1921a,b) though it hardly deserves that
name, since it is only a higher portion of the third hillock in the Hoburgen
complex. In a few other raukar, stratified limestones may be found together
with the reef limestone, such a s is described from Sjausterhammar.
In conclusion it can be summarized:

(1)Although raukar are most characteristically developed i n the reef
limestones of HolmhPllar type, they a r e also found in other reef limestones.
( 2 ) Raukar made of stratified limestones a r e exceptions.
( 3 ) Since reef limestones a r e more massively built than stratified
limestones and Holmhallar-type reef limestones a r e generally more massive
lDuring -
LittoTina time that is about 7000 years B.P. - the areas which at present
expose the major raukar fields, like Holmhdlar, Heliholm, Hammarshagahiillar,
Ljugarn and Filgelhammar, were still below sea level.
than reef limestones of Hoburgen type, it seems that the most-massive

limestones a r e most suited to raukar formation.
( 4 ) The formation of raukar is explained by Recent marine erosion, not
by karstification.
SYNTHESIS
On the basis of what has been said earlier in this chapter, it may be
concluded that the reefs of Holmhallar type developed in shallbw, though not
very shallow, water. The reef limestones present several data which show
that the reefs developed above effective wave base. Of these the most
important are:
(1) The shape of the reefs has most probably been determined by the
dominating wave direction.
(2) Much reef and crinoid debris has been formed which was deposited
both around the reefs and in depressions within the reef surface; in the latter,
the debris layers may show a certaiv degree of sorting. Negro-head-like
blocks were torn from the reef edge and tossed onto the reef surface.
(3) Calcareous mud, locally affecting the composition of the reef fauna,
was presumably mainly derived from the reef o r i t s immediate environment
and was s t i r r e d up by wave action.
(4)Interruptions in reef growth suggest attacking and demolition of the
higher reef portions by storm waves.
Now that it has been shown that Holmhillar-type reefs developed in
shallow water, is it possible to estimate the maximum water depth?
In both composition and size, the reefs of Holmhallar type a r e more
closely related to those of the Hoburgen type than to the Upper Visby reefs.
The latter may have grown in deeper water than did the reefs of Holmhallar
type-
Deposition of fine silt off the New England coast is possible at depths
exceeding 60-70 m (Stetson, 1936). It is very likely that this critical depth
was situated l e s s deep in the epicontinental Baltic basin of Palaeozoic times.
The erosive action of normal waves presumably reaches only a few metres
below sea level, but that of storm waves to several dozens of metres. In the
English Channel, shells are occasionally injured by the movement of gravel
at depths of 70 m, and on the east coast, when ballast foreign to the region
is dumped in water 20-35 m deep, the shore after a storm is strewn with
these pebbles (Kuenen, 1950, p.228). Since more energy is needed to destroy
portions of a growing reef than to displace gravel, development of the
Holmhallar reefs i n water of less than 40 m depth is most likely.
The important role played by Algae in the construction of the Holmhallar-
type reefs is also evidence of formation in shallow water. Even if it is taken
into account that the reefs were little influenced by deposition of terrigenous
debris, hampering light penetration, it is unlikely that water depth exceeded
40 m. Several Algae receive their optimum illumination at about 15 m depth,
but have their normal habitat about 15-25 m below low water (Moore, 1958,
p.51).
In conclusion, formation of Holmhallar-type reefs in water shalllower
than 40 m is most probable.
Was any minimum water depth required for the formation of Holmhallar-
type r e e f s ?
SYNTHESIS 211
Although in their shape the Holmhallar-type reefs show a relation to

the contemporaneous shoreline, no reefs of this type have been observed that
originated in such extremely shallow water immediately off the coast, as did
the Hoburgen-type reefs which developed a t the time that the Hamra algal
limestone w a s formed. The exposures in the environment of Snabben suggest
that in water which is becoming shallower there is a tendency to pass into
reef limestone of Hoburgen type.
In their shape, the l a r g e r Holmhallar-type reefs in particular are

comparable to the cuspate reefs among the present-day shelf reefs (cf.
Maxwell, 1968, p.99). These modern reefs a r e particularly found along the
shelf edge, taking maximum advantage of little polluted, andnutrient- and
carbonate-rich oceanic water. Their landward expansion is restricted by the
partial insulation of the backreef a r e a s from the open sea. Consequently these
reefs generally elongate parallel with the shelf edge. However, when they
become longer, and particularly when the ends of adjacent reefs approach
one another, the reef ends tend to project backward. These landward a r m s
a r e narrower than the main, seaward section.
Behind the outer s e r i e s of scattered cuspate reefs, on modern shelves
oval-shaped o r elongated platform reefs may develop which generally a r e
smaller than the outer reefs.
Both in the Hemse Beds and in the Hamra-Sundre Beds, reefs of
Holmhallar type a r e found southeast of reefs of Hoburgen type. This suggests
that the former developed at some larger distance from the coast than these
Hoburgen-type reefs. This would agree with the picture presented by the
modern shelf reefs.
It is probable, therefore, that reefs of Holmhallar type for their develop-
ment required a set of environmental conditions which was not realized in
extremely shallow water. It is difficult to specify what the minimum water
depth w a s in which these reefs still could develop. Since several factors were
involved (including depth, wave action, currents, degree of water pollution,
nutrient supply), this will probably not have been a sharp depth limit. It may,
however, be a reasonable guess that the minimum water depth was on the
order of perhaps 10-15 m.
A logical final question is whether Holmhallar-type reefs are

characteristic for a water depth between 10-40 m o r whether other factors
also made them what they a r e .
In the range from relatively deep water in the Lower Visby Beds to
very shallow water in the Upper Hogklint Beds, no interval occurred in
which reef limestone of HolmhLllar type was formed. Thus it cannot be
concluded that reefs of this type a r e , as a matter of course, characteristic
of a certain depth zone.
It has been noted that reef limestone of Hoburgen type generally formed
under changing environmental conditions, more especially during decreasing
o r increasing water depth (Chapter VII). Available evidence of the most
characteristic HolmhiUlar-type r e e f s points to a rather even set of conditions.
The HolmhLllar-type reefs in the Hemse Beds a r e somewhat older than the
majority of Hoburgen-type reefs in that stratigraphical unit. The Lower
Hemse Beds, except for the lowermost ones, suggest deposition in a shallow
sea of rather constant depth (p.386). The Holmhallar-type reefs in the
Hamra-Sundre Beds a r e presumably somewhat younger than the Hoburgen-
212 TH E H O L MH X LLA R R E E F T Y P E
type reefs of that stratigraphical unit and may have formed synchronously
with the Sundre limestone in the southeast of the southern peninsula of
Gotland. The latter deposit also reflects a deposition while water depth
remained roughly the same (p.422). It thus appears that in both cases the
l a r g e r Holmhallar-type reefs may have formed in an interval of time when
the epicontinental sea was not affected by epeirogenetic movements. It may
have been this latter factor which was in fact of decisive importance in the
formation of reefs of Holmhallar type.
The occurrence of, or absence of, epeirogenetic movements seems not
only to have determined the character of the reefs which developed, but also
-
- i f reefs of more than one type originated the order in which their growth
started. We have seen already, in the previous two chapters, how a continued
decrease in water depth in Late Visby and Early Hbgklint time led to a
replacement of Upper Visby-type reefs by Hoburgen-type reefs, A s said
above, in Early Hemse time Holmhgllar-type reefs originated in water of
rather stable depth. A transition from these r e e f s of the Holmhtillar type to
reefs more of the Hoburgen type occurred when water depth began to
decrease (area between Snabben and Sandviken). While the water depth was
fluctuating, Hoburgen-type reefs developed between the existing Holmhxllar-
type reefs and the coastline. In the case of the Hamra-Sundre Beds, a change
in water depth first occurred. This was an increase in depth. When the
environmental situation stabilized again, Holmhgllar-type reefs developed
at the seaward side of the existing Hoburgen-type reefs.
213
Chapter IX
REEF DEBRIS
In the descriptions of the reef types of Gotland in the preceding three

chapters, attention was also paid to the sediments around these reefs, and
on the reef debris occurring in them. In the present chapter this debris i s
the subject of some further discussion. Emphasis will be laid on the
distribution of reef debris and on the directions of dip that can be measured.
DISTRIBUTION OF REEF DEBRIS
Following the information that reef debris is found in the sediments

around the reefs, a logical question is how much of this debris is present,
expressed, f o r instance, as a percentage of the total rock volume, at various
distances and directions away from these reefs. Fortunately, the exposures
in Gotland are such that at least a partial answer can be given to this question.
Approximation methods
To ascertain the percentage of the total volume of sediment which is

made up of reef debris, an approximation method was used, which could be
applied in the field. A vertical surface varying between 400 and 2500 cm2
was mapped as carefully as possible on millimetre paper, at a scale of 1:l
o r 1:2.5. All pieces of rock which, macroscopically, could be expected to be
reef debris, were drawn in on the map. Crinoid remains were not included
among the reef debris. The number of square millimetres which the pieces
of debris together occupied was counted. The percentage which this sum
TABLE XIII
Approximation of number of pieces of reef debris per cubic decimetre
Size group Measured data (400 cm2) Calculated data
Number of Average longest Represen- Number of
pieces dimension (cm) tative pieces per d m 3
volume (cm3 )
0.5-1 28 0.7 280 100
1-2 11 1.4 560 20
2-3 4 2.4 960 4
3 4 2 3.4 1360 ca. 1.5
4-5 1 4.6 1840 ca. 0.5
>5 2 5.8 2320 ca. 1
Total 48 127
2 14 R E E F DEBRIS
constituted of the total surface that was mapped, was considered to be

representative of the volume percentage. Before mapping some surfaces
needed to be treated with diluted hydrochloric acid. The size of the surface
which was mapped was determined by the nature of the exposure and by the
coarseness of the exposed debris. The coarser the latter, the larger the
surface that was used, if possible.
A more rapid, but l e s s accurate method could be used if it was judged
sufficient to have an impression of only the number of pieces of reef debris
i n a unit volume of sediment (generally a cubic decimetre). The longest
dimension of all macroscopically recognizable pieces of reef debris w a s
measured. Generally 5 mm was taken a s the lower boundary. The figures
obtained were arranged in a number of size groups ( s e e the example in
Table XIII). Each size group was considered representative of a rock slice
of the same thickness as the average size of that group. By multiplying the
surface of the a r e a studied by the average size of the pieces of debris, a
volume is found for which the observed number of pieces was more or less
representative. On the basis of this, the number of pieces per unit volume
can be estimated. By adding up the figures obtained i n this way for each size
group, an approximation is obtained of the total number of pieces of debris
in a certain rock volume. O f course, this method is rather rough, but if used
consistently, it gives some impression of the variations in the distribution
of macroscopically-recognizable reef debris. It has been used particularly
in studying the debris distribution in vertical successions.
Distribution of reef d e b r i s in a vertical direction
In order to obtain some impression of the distribution of reef debris

in a vertical section, some well-representative exposures had to be studied.
A s such Slite IV Beds of the Solklint (Slite) and the Bogeklint o r Klinteklint
(Boge Parish) which a r e found about 10 m away from the nearest reef, were
selected (Fig.92). The rocks exposed there a r e irregularly stratified crinoid
limestones with reef debris, and a matrix of crinoid sand and some marl.
The size of the debris varies greatly, from very small fragments to com-
plete colonies of massive corals o r stromatoporoids. Debris material of all
sizes occurs randomIy together in several layers; in some other layers the
debris is both coarser and more abundant than is the average for the
exposed succession. Examination of thin sections shows that the crinoid
material has also been subjected to varying degrees of sorting. Apparently
occasional variations in water mobility operated during the development of
the reefs. With increasing distance from the reef, the sorting of the material
in such layers becomes increasingly less noticeable.
Leaving apart the variations between successive layers, which may be
ascribed to varying wave strength, the general trend is that of an increase
in the amount of reef debris going upwards, until some distance below the
level of the top of the reef, when a decrease s e t s in. The explanation seems
to be obvious. During reef growth the reefs gradually came to extend further
over the surrounding s e a floor and r o s e higher. Such larger and higher
obstacles were more strongly attacked by water movements. After reef
growth ended, the elevation of the reef over the surroundings decreased
again and thereby also the effect of the destructive action of moving water
on the reef.
DISTRIBUTION O F R E E F DEBRIS 215
L 10 20 30 4 0 50 60 70 80
Number of pieces of r e e f debris

> 5 m m , p e r dm3 of sediment
Fig.92. Number of pieces of reef debris (larger than 5 mm) per cubic
decimetre of crinoid limestone with reef debris, in a succession of strata.
The data were collected in the Solklint (Slite) and Bogeklint (Boge), Slite IV
Beds. The graph is representative for a deposit found at the southeast side
of the Slite IV reefs, at a distance of about 10 m from a reef. The graph
starts about 1-1.5 m above the level of the reef base and ends about 1 m
below the level of the top of the reef. On the average there is a gradual
increase i n the amount of reef debris upwards, until about 2.3 m below the
level of the reef top.
2 16 R E E F DEBRIS
In the example of Fig.92, the reversal of debris increase to debris

decrease occurs at about 2.3 m below the level of the top of the reefs. These
reefs a r e probably about 7.5 m thick. The vertical distance between the level
of quantitative reversal in debris deposition and the level of the top of the
nearest reef limestone may be an indication of the height of the reef over its
direct surroundings at the end of reef growth. The reefs of the Slite IV Beds
developed in water which became shallower (cf. Chapter XI). In reefs of
comparable thickness which grew in gradually deepening water, the elevation
over the contemporaneous s e a floor presumably was somewhat greater (e.g.,
the Hoburgen reefs of the Hamra-Sundre Beds).
A s soon a s a young reef extended somewhat over the surrounding s e a

floor, it was apparently attacked by destructive forces. A s mentioned in
Chapter VII, the stratified limestone underneath the peripheral parts of the
reefs of Hoburgen type, generally shows a distinct increase in the amount of
reef debris in upward direction. In the uppermost part of it, the debris may
even become the dominant rock constituent, so that reef expansion often took
place over a thin layer of reef debris. The debris layer has no sharp lower
boundary and, i n several instances, also no sharp upper boundary with the
overlying reef limestone.
Reef destruction by moving water seems to have continued until an
entire reef was buried. Crinoid limestones which overlie reef limestone,
e.g., in Hoburgen, generally still contain reef debris. The size of this debris
is smqller than in the deposits lateral to the reefs. Within a distance of a
few decimetres upwards from the reef limestone, both the size and quantity
of the reef debris in the crinoid limestone usually decrease rapidly.
Around reefs of Holmhallar type, the vertical distribution of reef debris

is more o r l e s s similar. This can be studied, for instance, about 0.3 km
north of Sysne-udd, i n deposits belonging to the Hemse Beds. The exposures
are found along the present coast. Close to the reef limestone and lateral to
it, much very coarse debris is present. About 1 m below the level of the top
of the reef limestone, debris material up to 70 cm long is present. A few
metres away from the reef limestone, most debris is smaller than 20 cm,
but coarse fragments up to that size remain rather common i n the reef-
surrounding sediments up to some tens of metres distance. In an upward
direction, there is a decrease in the volume and coarseness of the debris,
both close to the reef and at greater distance. The crinoid limestone which
overlies the reef limestone still contains much debris, but by f a r the major-
ity of the pieces is smaller than 2 cm; pieces larger than 10 cm a r e rare.
Reef limestone covered by crinoid limestone is also exposed between
Sysne-udd and Sysne. There it can be observed that in places the uppermost
part of the reef limestone itself shows a distinct increase in reel debris and
crinoid remains. The covering crinoid limestone also contains reef debris,
which decreases rapidly in abundance and size in an upward direction.
Together with the decrease in debris volume, the crinoid limestone, i n up-
ward direction, shows an increasingly more distinct stratification, which
then also becomes smoother.
The sediment found about 0.7 km south of Snabben (cf. Chapter VIII,
p. 208)was presumably deposited on top of a lower, peripheral part of a reef.
0.6 m above the reef limestone, the debris still constitutes about 25% of the
total volume of rock and the largest piece of debris measured 17 cm. About
DISTRIBUTION O F R E E F DEBRIS 217
1.5 m above the reef limestone, only small fragments a r e present, but still
with a total volume of about 7.570. The high volume of reef debris in this
vertical succession makes it most unlikely that the material i s laid down
over the highest reef part.
Horizontal distribution of d e b r i s around s o m e Hoburgen-type r e e f s
A s appears from the preceding section, care should be taken that the
distribution of reef debris in a horizontal direction is studied everywhere
at about the same distance above the level of the base of the reef which
supplied the debris. In Fig.93, twenty-nine approximate volume percentages
of reef debris are given, obtained from a level which generally was slightly
above half-way up the reef. Since sufficient data could not be obtained from
only one reef, figures are given from the surroundings of a number of
.-nL
n
P
c
!!
c
Dlstance from the reef limestone (m)
Fig.93. Percentage of reef debris (larger than 5 mm) in crinoid limestone

at the southeast (A) and south side (B) of some reefs of Hoburgen type, which
developed in comparatively shallow water. At the time of formation of the
debris the reefs extended probably 2-3 m above the surrounding sea floor.
The approximations of the debris volumes were made in the following
localities: A: 1-8. Solklint, Slite; 9-11. Bogeklint, Boge Parish; 12-13.
Stora Vede, Follingbo Parish; 14. Endre Backe, Endre Parish; 15. north of
Norrbys farm, Follingbo Parish (in all these localities sediments belonging
to the Slite Beds are exposed); 16-18. Lindeklint, Linde Parish, Hemse Beds.
B: 1. Klinteklint, Gammelgarn Parish, Hemse Beds; 2-9. Lindeklint, Linde
Parish, Hemse Beds; 10-11. about 0.7 km southeast of Fole Church, Slite
Beds.
218 R E E F DEBRIS
different reefs. All of these a r e assumed to have developed under more o r

l e s s similar environmental conditions.
From the two graphs of Fig.93, it appears that more debris is present,
very close to the reefs, at the south side of the reef than at the southeast side.
This means more debris against the shorter lateral sides of the reefs than
against the long edge at the seaward side. However, the decrease in the
volume of debris is more rapid at the south side. The volume percentages
a r e most strongly influenced by larger pieces of reef debris. The graphs thus
mainly illustrate that coarser material was deposited at the places where the
water passed along the reef. This appears to be the case even when there i s
no question of a passage between two neighbouring reefs. However, in such
a passage the presence of coarser material is more pronounced (Fig.74).
In the central part of Fig.96, data such as those from the graphs of
Fig.93 a r e generalized to a distribution map. Data for the landward side of
the reef are also added. There, close to the reef, the debris volume is higher
than anywhere else. The decrease in the amount of reef debris with increasing
distance from the reef is very rapid. Apparently much debris was washed off
the reef surface and deposited directly at the lee side.
The distribution pattern of reef debris is simplest where reefs a r e
regularly spaced and separated from each other by a distance which is
several times their own length. The closer the reefs occur together, the
more complicated the picture becomes. This is particularly true if, in
addition, the reefs are randomly distributed over a wide zone. The author
does not have sufficient data for discussion of such complicated distribution
patterns of reef debris.
It is often difficult to determine the exact distance between a vertical
section through crinoid limestone with reef debris and the nearest reef lime-
stone. This distance is generally not one that can be measured along an
exposed cliff wall, because these walls a r e usually not perpendicular to the
boundary between reef and stratified sediment. The exposures present on the
plateau of a cliff may be of some help. However, the boundary was generally
not vertical. This implies that the estimated distances from a reef may be
in e r r o r with one o r sometimes even a few metres. The influence of this
e r r o r on the general distribution pattern as given i n the map of Fig.96,
however, is negligible.
A s mentioned in the general description of the Hoburgen reef type, a

number of reefs, particularly in Hoburgen itself, have a distinct mantle of
reef talus directly around them. Good examples are found i n the third hillock
(Fig.67, 68) and in the north of the western cliff of the Storburg of Hoburgen
(Fig.59). In both localities, large blocks of tumbled reef rock a r e included
in the talus mantle. These blocks stand at all angles. At the site of such
blocks the volume percentage of the reef debris if, of course, 100. Since such
extreme values a r e very local phenomena, they have been excluded from the
distribution map in Fig.96. A narrow talus mantle without such blocks i s
exposed at the northeastern end of the fourth hillock of Hoburgen. Such a
talus mantle was found in connection with only one of the reefs which
produced the data on which Fig.93 and 96 are based. This is the Klinteklint
in Gammelgarn Parish, where it was found at the south side.
DIRECTIONS O F DIP IN R E E F DEBRIS 219
Horizontal distribution of debris around some Holmhallar-type veefs
A s mentioned in Chapter VIII, some impression of the sediments which

were formed around reefs of Holmhallar type can be obtained in the coastal
area between Snabben and Sysne-udd (see also Fig.94). Directly against the
reef limestone a deposit is present which can best be described a s a talus
mantle. It may contain as much as 80% reef debris. Over a distance of some
metres this passes into a limestone with crinoids, which is still extremely
rich in reef debris. Initially this limestone is only vaguely stratified, but
with increasing distance from the reef limestone, the stratification becomes
clearer. Marl may occur on the bedding planes, with very fine reef debris
embedded in it. Generally, at a distance of about 25 m from the reef, the
stratified limestone still consists for about 25 % of macroscopically
recognizable reef debris.
By mapping surfaces of 625-2500 cm2 in fifteen different places,
approximations were made of the percentages which the reef debris takes
up of the total volume of reef-surrounding sediment. The rough distribution
pattern shown in the central part of Fig.97 is based on the values obtained.
At the seaward side of the reef flanks, slightly more reef debris was
deposited than at the middle of the seaward side of a reef of this kind. Only
two approximations of the volume percentage of reef debris could be made
at the concave side, that i s the original landward side. These figures suggest
that most of the debris found a t that side is less coarse than that found at the
seaward side and takes up a somewhat lower percentage.
A comparison of Fig.97 with Fig.96, shows that at least at the original
seaward side, in the surroundings of the reefs in the Snabben - Sysne-udd
area, much more debris was laid down than in the surroundings of the
Hoburgen-type reefs in the Slite and Upper Hemse Beds.
It is not easy to give a satisfactory explanation of the significant
differences found in the amount of reef debris at the seaward side of the two
groups of reefs. A possible cause may be that the Holmhlllar-type reefs i n
the Snabben - Sysne-udd area did not develop under their most favourable
conditions (cf. Chapter VIII). There are transitions to the Hoburgen reef type
Moreover, the latter reefs, particularly those found somewhat more north-
wards along the coast northeast of the harbour of Herrvik and near Kuppen,
are surrounded by more reef debris than is normal for Hoburgen-type reefs.
Perhaps under the transitional environmental conditions, the reefs were less
solidly built, or the destructive agents may have been much stronger.
At any rate, it is clear that different kinds of reefs and different
environmental conditions may have led to notable differences in the amounts
and distribution of reef debris found around the reefs. No generally valid
rule can be produced on this subject.
DIRECTIONS OF DIP IN REEF DEBRIS
Among the reef debris there a r e generally several flat pieces,

particularly fragments of stromatoporoid latilaminae. Some of these flat
pieces'of reef debris are found in an about horizontal position, whereas
others show a certain dip. In a number of exposures, the directions of these
dips have been measured.
Two examples a r e given in the two lefthand diagrams of Fig.95. Both
220 R E E F DEBRIS
C D
DIRECTIONS O F DIP IN R E E F DEBRIS 221
Fig.95. Directions of dip shown by flat pieces of reef debris larger than 1 cm
in diameter ( A and B) and crinoid columnals longer than 2 em ( C )at the
south to somewhat south-southeast side of a reef of Hoburgen type.
A . Bogeklint, Boge Parish, Slite Beds, deposit formed about 6 m away from
the nearest reef limestone and about 3.5 m below the level of the top of that
reef. B and C. Solklint, Slite, Slite Beds, deposit about 6 m away from and
about 3 m below the level of the top of the nearest reef limestone.
show the dip directions found in debris deposited south to somewhat south-
southeast of a reef. A fair proportion of the pieces of debris show a direction
of dip away from the reef. Dips in other directions also occur, but only few
pieces dip in the direction towards the reef limestone. It is understandable
that several pieces dip in a n about southeastward direction. This is a kind
of compromise direction between a dip away from the reef and a dip against
the main direction of water movement directly around the reef, which may
generally have been away from the middle of the seaward side of the reef and
towards and along the peripheral parts. That there also a r e many pieces
which dip more in a southwest to westerly direction is l e s s easy to under-
stand. The positions of these pieces wer-e l e s s stable with respect to the
assumed main direction of water movement. Perhaps a rather uneven debris-
covered s e a floor close to the reef has also played an important part.
The righthand diagram of Fig.95 shows the directions of dip which were
found'in crinoid stem fragments of 2 cm and longer, at the same side of the
reef limestone. The scattering in dip directions is greater here. Particularly
there are several fragments which dip in a direction about perpendicular to
the dip down from the reef. The greater variation in the direction of dip may
have various reasons. Crinoids may have lived both on the flanks of the reef
and in the a r e a where they a r e found. Stem remains of crinoids which grew
on the reef flank may rather have rolled down than have slipped down i n
their length direction. The remains of stems which disintegrated on the spot
Fig. 94. Reef limestone of Holmhallar type and surrounding debris deposits.
Between Snabben and Sysne-udd, Hemse Beds. A. Horizontal exposure of
reef limestone, with large stromatoporoids partly liberated through erosion,
diameter of the stromatoporoid elevations about 15-50 cm. B. Vertical
section through reef limestone at the southeastern periphery of a reef.
C. Reef debris about 2.5 m away from the southeast side of a reef.
D. Indistinctly stratified limestone with much reef debris, about 25 m away
from the southeast side of a reef.
222 R E E F DEBRIS
Q m
DIRECTIONS OF DIP IN R E E F DEBRIS 223
will have fallen down in even m o r e random orientations. Finally water move-
ment may have modified the positions also in the c a s e of the crinoid stem
fragments. Probably all these causes have played a p a r t , but perhaps rolling
down and displacements by moving water have been the two most important
ones. At any r a t e it is c l e a r that the dips found in flat pieces of t r u e reef
debris and in crinoid columnals should not b e united in one diagram.
In s e v e r a l m o r e places, the directions of dip shown by flat pieces of
reef debris were measured. These a r e combined into the diagrams of Fig.96
and 97. The main direction appears everywhere to be one that is roughly
perpendicularly away from the reef margin.
One diagram deserves special attention, that of Fig.97C. This is based
on reef debris in a filled depression. The main dips a r e inadirectiontowards
the convex (original seaward) side of the reef. This may suggest that most
of the debris found in this depression came from the southwest. It may be
recalled here, that t h e r e is an indication that m o r e reef debris was deposited
a t the convex than a t the concave side of the reef. These two indications
together may again suggest that during their growth, the reefs of Holmhallar
type, as found in the Snabben - Sysne-udd a r e a , had an upper surface which
sloped towards the open sea. Perhaps this was the result of some seaward
expansion of these r e e f s over their own debris. In this connection reference
is also made to the paragraph on stromatoporoids, early in Chapter VII. It
was mentioned there, that in some places in the original-seaward periphery
of the Ljugarn reef, tabular stromatoporoids w e r e seen to be dipping
moderately reefdownwards (p.183).
For each group of r e e f s , which belong to the s a m e type and developed
under r a t h e r s i m i l a r environmental conditions, a map showing the distribution
of reef debris around them would be useful. In the c a s e of s i t e s which expose
a reef-debris containing sediment, but whose positions with r e g a r d to the
nearest reef cannot be located from direct observation, such a map would
nevertheless permit a reasonable delimitation - provided that the amount
of macroscopically recognizable reef debris and the directions of dip therein
a r e determined a t these sites.
Fig.96. Map, showing the abundance of reef debris l a r g e r than 5 mm, in

percentages of the total volume of sediment, around a reef of Hoburgen type.
The reef is schematized. The distribution pattern of the debris is mainly
representative for reefs which developed in water which gradually became
shallower, such as those found in the Slite IV and Upper Hemse Beds. At the
time of formation of the debris the r e e f s presumably extended 2-3 m above
the surrounding sea floor. Five diagrams give an impression of the directions
of dip which flat pieces of reef debris display a t various places around the
reef. The diagrams a r e based on data from the following localities: A. old
quarry in the northeast of the Solltlint, Slite, Slite Beds; B. southeastern part
of the Lindeklint, Linde P a r i s h , Hemse Beds; C. southern part of the
Lindeklint; D. west wall of the Solklint; E. northeastern part of the
Klinteklint; Gammelgarn P a r i s h , Hemse Beds.
224 R E E F DEBRIS
\.Lj
Fig.97. Map, showing the abundance of reef debris larger than 5 mm, in
percentages of the total volume of sediment, in sediments at the seaward
side of a reef of Holmhallar type. Nine diagrams illustrate the directions of
dip found in flat pieces of reef debris in the reef-surrounding sediments and
in a filled depression within the reef. All data were collected in the a r e a
between Snabben and Sysne-udd, Ostergarn Parish, Hemse Beds.
225
Chapter X
STRATIGRAPHY AND REEFS OF KARLSOARNA
INTRODUCTION
Karlsbarna (the C a r l Islands) comprise two small islands, Stora Karlsb

and Lilla Karlsb, 2.5 and 1.39 km2 large, respectively. The islands a r e
located west of Gotland, in the Baltic, about 16.5 and 11 km southwest of
Klintehamn, respectively, with which harbour they have a boat connection
during the s u m m e r months. Administratively they both belong t o Eksta Parish,
Gotland. Stora K a r l s b is the property of the ''Karlsi) Jakt- och Djurskydds-
fbrenings Aktiebolag" , generally called "Karlsoklubbenltf o r short. Lilla
K a r l s b is owned by the I' Svenska Naturskyddsfbrening" . Both organizations
w e r e kind enough t o permit m e t o live and study on their islands for a few
weeks.
The reef limestones of Karlsaarna present s e v e r a l problems. T h e s e
include their mode of formation, their exact position within the stratigraphy
of the Silurian, their relationships t o the fossil r e e f s of Gotland, their fauna
and environmental significance, and their relation to the general pattern of
sedimentation of the region in which they occur.
In the Late Quaternary both islands were partly submerged in the Baltic.
Abraded coastal slopes a r e found from the Arzcylus and Littorina t i m e s , with
caves formed by the s e a at those times. The often vertical cliff walls present
the best exposures of both the stratified and reef limestones. Close to the
precipices, remains of disappeared reefs stand in the form of "raukar" .
STRATIGRAPHY OF STORA KARLSO
In the following pages the stratified sediments of Stora Karls6 will be

described f i r s t , in a n attempt t o get some impression of the geological nature
of the island (cf. Table XV on p.275).
A t the base of Stora Karlsb, sediments a r e exposed which a r e known as
the L e r b e r g Marlstone. T h i s is overlaid by limestone, which the present
author proposes t o subdivide into the Spangiinde Limestone and the Austerberg
Limestone.
A list of fossils found in the stratified sediments of both Karlsbarna is
given in Table XIV.
The positions of the m o r e important localities, to be mentioned in the
following descriptions, a r e shown in Fig.98.

226 STRATIGRAPHY AND REEFS OF KARLSOARNA
TABLE XlV
F os s i l s found in Stora and Lilla Karlsij
Fos s i l s I Stora KarlsO
-
I Lilla Karlsl
al
0
u
v)
=B
-
HYDROZOA
Chthrodictyon striutellum (d'orbigny)

Unidentified stromatoporoids- + t t
+ +
t +
+
Rhizophyllum Kotla?rdicum (Roemer)-- t
Sc hlolheiiii 0ph.v1luni s p .
Sy viiiguxoir c f . s ilurieizse (McCoy )- -__- +
ANTHOZOA TABULATA
Aiilopora sp.
Fuiiosites gothlundicus L a m a rc k
Hulysiles culriiirluris (L.).
-+ +
t
t
+
+ +
+
t
+
S.vririgopo ru sp. - + +
Thoiiriloporu sp. _____-_- t
Heliolites iiiterstiirctus (L.)------ + + i

Heliolites spp.- + t +
Plusmoporu p e t u l l ~ f u r ~ ~( L i ios n s d a k - +
Plusnroporu scitu Edwards et Haime + ?
Unidentified cor al s ____-- + t t + +
A NNE LIDA
Covrirrlites s p . __- t t
Scolecodonts - +
CRINOIDEA
Unidentified crinoid re m a ins + t + + +
BRYOZOA
Feiieslelh sp. + +
Unidentified bryozoans + + + + +
BRA CHIOPODA
A ? ~ p h i srophiu
l j i r i i icir kilo (McCoy +
+ + +
Atrspa reticrtluvis ( L . ) + + + +
STRATIGRAPHY O F STORA KARLSO 227
TABLE XIV (continued)

Fossils
BRACMOPODA (continued)
Camarotoechia borealis (Buch) + I +

Chilidiopsis pecten (L . ) +
Conchidium biloculare (Hisinger) +1
Conchidium sculptum (Walmstedt) + +
Cyrtia exporrecta (Wahlenberg) +
Delthyris elevata Dalman +
Dicaelosia biloba ( L. ) + + +
Dolerorthis cf. mstica (J. de C. Sowerby) +1
Eospirijer cf. interlineatus (J. tie C . Sowerby)- + +1
Eospirijer radiatus (J. de C . Sowerby) i
Glassia obovata (J. de C. Sowerby) + +
Gypidula cf. galeata (Dalman) + +
Howellella elegans (Muir-Wood) +
Leptaena rhomboidalis (Wilckens) + + + + +
Meristina obtusa (J. Sowerby) +
Nucleospira pisum (J. de C . Sowerby) +
Orbiculoidea mgata (J. de C. Sowerby) +2
Pentamerus gotlandicus Lebedev + i
Plectatrypa imbricata (J. de C. Sowerby) + I
Plectatrypa m argina lis (Dalman)

Plectodonta transversalis lata (Jones) + + I +
Rychopleurella bouchardi (Davidson) + I -c
Resserella elegantula (Dalman) t
Resserella sp. +
Rhynchotreta cuneata (Dalman) +
Skenidioides acuta (Lindstram) +
Sphaerirhynchia wilsoni c f. sphaeroidalis (McCoy)- +
"St rophom e m " rugata Lindst r Om +
?Whitfieldella s p. + +
GASTROPODA I I
Euomphalopterus alatus (Wahlenberg)
Platyceras comutum Hisinger + + + +-
Platyceras spiratum (Sowerby) +
Pleurotoma ria limata +
Poleumita globosum (Schlotheim) +
Poleumita sculpturn (J. de C. Sowerby)
Trochus mollis LindstrOm +
CEPHALOPODA
I I I I I 1
"Orthoceras" sp.
TRILOBITA
Bumastus sp.
Calymene sp.
Proetus s p .
Scutelhm polyactin (Angelin)
Sphaerexochus scabridus Angelin
228 STRATIGRAPHY AND R E E F S OF KAR LSOARNA
TABLE XIV (continued)

Fossils
OSTRACODA
Craspedobolbina (Mitrobeyrichia) clavata

(Kolmodin )
Cruspedobolbanu (Mitrobeyrichia) insulicola
Martinsson
Leperdifia sp.'
Unidentified ostracodes
;From the uppermost Lilla Karls6 Limestone

From sandy limestone in the northeast of Lilla karlsa
Fig.98. Map of Stora Karlsb. Directions of dip in the stratified limestones a r e

added. RR = raukar.
Lerberg Marlstone
The oldest sediments exposed in Stora KarlsB belong to the Lerberg

Marlstone. This is a bluish grey to brownish grey, sometimes greenish
coloured marlstone, which is dense, rather soft, and generally very thinly
foliating. The marlstone layers alternate with thin layers or lenses of marly
limestone, which is harder, finely crystalline and of a light-grey colour.
The Lerberg Marlstone i s exposed along the west, northeast and east
shores of the island. Along the west coast it forms in the north the so-called
" Lerberg" (Swedish: l e r a = clay), the lower part of the VPsterberg, where it
reaches a thickness of about 15 m. In this locality it can be followed from
SpangPnde southwards until Klev, generally showing an approximately
horizontal stratification. Further south, three consecutive "folds" may be
seen, which, though gentle, a r e easily observed. The extra weight of the over-
lying reefs presumably caused the sagging of the layers here, as well a s some
plastic flow of material in lateral directions. Of these "folds" the southern
one is the largest. Close to and a little south of Ramraur it reaches a height
of about 25 m above sea level; further southwards the upper boundary of the
Lerberg Marlstone descends gradually to a lower level and at StPurnasar it
disappears below sea level. South of StPurnasar the Lerberg Marlstone ap-
p e a r s again at the base of the cliff, but there it only reaches a relatively
slight elevation. It can then be followed along the shore to directly north of
Brygge, sometimes lying horizontally, sometimes faintly undulating. Along
the northeastern and eastern shores of the island, the Lerberg Marlstone
occurs in the foot of the cliff and along the beach from directly west of Utfall
eastwards, where it reaches an exposed thickness of 10-15 m, and further to
the south-southeast. In the latter direction the layers in main lines gradually
dip away, finally disappearing below sea level a t Ktiupru. Along this shore
the layers also manifest a faintly undulating pattern.
A s a rule, the Lerberg Marlstone is very rich in fossils, especially in
corals, stromatoporoids (tabular and flat lenticular) and brachiopods. Less
common a r e bry ozoans, crinoids, gastropods, ostracodes and trilobites.
Lamellibranchs a r e not found.
The occurrence of corals in the Lerberg Marlstone is particularly
characterized by the extreme abundance of only one or a few species i n a
number of special horizons. Among these Ketophyllum sp. (in earliek litera-
ture Omphyma subturbinata and 0. turbinata) a r e the most important. These
horizons can be partly considered a s biostromes. Often the solitary corals
found there still occupy the same positions a s they did on the Silurian sea
bottom. At the foot of Spangande, some coral beds with Cystiphyllum sp. a r e
beautifully exposed. The Ketophyllum Zone is very striking in the Lerberg,
containing a large number of individuals with relatively large dimensions,
of up to 33 cm long and 13 cm in diameter. The Ketophyllum Zone consists
of a number of coralliferous layers lying closely on top of each other and
extending to a total thickness of about 1.25 m. The base of the Ketophyllum
Zone is situated about 1 m above sea level in the Lerberg; at SpangPnde it
is found around sea level. Apart from Ketophyllum spp. a number of other
corals are a l s o represented(Ha1ysites catenularius, Heliolites sp.; other solita-
ry forms), but these a r e much l e s s abundant. Other fossils, such a s a few brachio-
pods and stromatoporoids occur only scarcely. TheKetophyllum andCystiPhyllum
beds apparently represent localized conditions which were s o favourable to coral
growth that other organisms were mnre or l e s s excluded. Individual solitary cor-
als a r e also found in almost all other exposures of the Lerberg Marlstone.
Spangande Linz estone
T h e SpangPnde Limestone is exposed in s e v e r a l places in Stora Karlsi3,

generally as a stratified crystalline limestone, surrounding the m a j o r reefs
of the island and consequently very fossiliferous. Very common are fossils
such as crinoid remains, bryozoans, c o r a l s and a l s o stromatoporoids;
brachiopods are a l s o common, and actually m o r e so in t h e s e flanking beds
than in the reef limestone. T h e colour of the rock is generally bluish grey t o
red-mottled. T o some extent t h e r e is a direct relationship between the thick-
n e s s of the l a y e r s and the purity of the limestone of which they consist.
A t SpangPnde the lower l a y e r s are thin and separated by thin l a y e r s of
marlstone. A s a r u l e the l a y e r s are about horizontal. Higher up in the section,
the l a y e r s are thicker and the limestone somewhat purer. T h e r e they show
a strong dip, directed roughly towards the north-northwest. Both the l a y e r s
a t the bottom of the cliff and those exposed higher (as is shown by l a r g e
blocks that have come down) are very fossiliferous. The stronger dip of the
higher l a y e r s and the reef-detrital nature of the rock suggest deposition close
t o a l a r g e reef (cf. Fig.98).
Sediments as those exposed a t SpangBnde can be followed from t h e r e
southwards, in the higher p a r t s of the Viisterberg. About 150 m south of the
lighthouse, the dip is 15-25O t o the southwest, but further south the dip is
directed m o r e t o the west. Downward from the plateau a t R a m r a u r the dip is
maximally about 25' but d e c r e a s e s away from the M a r m o r b e r g reef (Fig.99).
Fig.99. R a m r a u r , Stora Karlsb. Stratified sediments deposited around the

M a r m o r b e r g reef show a dip which gradually d e c r e a s e s with increasing
distance from the reef.
STRATIGRAPHY OF STORA KARLSd 231
Fig.lOO. Detail of Fanterna, Stora Karlss, seen from the south. In the fore-
ground, thin-layered marly SpangPnde Limestone. Behind it, reef limestone
of Fanterna type.
The limestone there is greyish white t o red-mottled and middle crystalline.

In the steep cliff which extends from slightly south of Ramraur to south
of Stlurnasar, the limestone at the bottom is predominantly thin-layered,
finely crystalline, partly very marly, grey or bluish grey to red-mottled in
colour, and enormously rich in crinoid fragments, corals, bryozoans and
stromatoporoids. Higher in the wall the rock has thicker layers and a lighter,
yellowish grey to red-mottled colour, and is coarser crystalline and less
marly than in the lower parts; it remains highly fossiliferous.
At StPurnasar the stratified limestone alternates with unstratified reef
limestone. Small reefs also occur at Vinglu. A t the time of deposition of the
lower SpangPnde Limestone the sea bottom must have been particularly ideal
for the existence of corals, especiallyHalysites , of which many large colo-
nies a r e found.
From Stlurnasar southwards, the stratified limestone described above
shows directions of dip which differ quite a bit from one place to another.
In the southwest it passes into thick-layered limestone, which is finely to
middle crystalline, and of a light-grey colour. Of this limestone the beach
slope at Brygge is built up. This limestone is especially characterized by
the occurrence of the brachiopod Pentamerus gotlandiczcs. In the north at
Brygge, the layers show a strike and dip of 90°/5-loo; 50 m further south
these are about 295O/5O; and another 50 m further south 110°/5-100; there-
after the layers a r e mainly horizontal.
2 32 STRATIGRAPHY AND REEFS OF KARLSOARNA
Laup-hargi, the raukar field near Brygge, is mainly built up of grey,

dense to finely crystalline, stratified limestone. In its lower parts this lime-
stone is marly and the thin layers alternate with thin layers which a r e strong-
ly marly. In an upward direction the layers are thicker, the limestone l e s s
marly, and finally even rather pure. In its uppermost part it is a little sparry.
The lower layers a r e rather rich in fossils. Among these fossils crinoids,
bryozoans and stromatoporoids should especially be mentioned, as well as
the corals Favosites sp.; Heliolites interstinctus and Syringaxon cf. siluriense ,
and the brachiopods Atrypa reticularis , Camarotoeckia borealis , Dicaelosia
biloba, Leptaena rhomboidalis and Plectodonta transversalis lata. Higher up
in the section the number of species is not as plentiful, although Pentamerus
gotlandicus is manifest in a great wealth of individuals.
In between the stratified limestone, a remnant is seen here and there
of the Laup-hargi reef limestone, which may be considered as being about
synchronous with the SpangPnde Limestone. The dips which a r e found in the
stratified limestone of the raukar field are most probably connected with the
reef-limestone occurrence. The dips a r e mainly directed landwards. Devia-
tions from this direction may be related to unevennesses in the topography
of the reef and its surrounding talus. Moreover, it is also quite possible that
some of the larger rauk-like rock masses a r e loose blocks rather than solid-
rock exposures.
Stratified limestone is also found between Laup-hargi and Xske. In the
middle of a range of exposures in Suderslatt, an exposure slightly east of
Xlmar shows an alternation of layers of a hard and generally rather strongly
recrystallized marly limestone with thinner layers of a softer and much more
marly sediment. The bedding planes a r e strongly rugged. The limestone is
bluish grey or grey to red-mottled in colour and locally contains several
crystals of calcite. The sediments a r e very rich in fossils. Solitary and so-
cial corals, crinoids, bryozoans (generally small), stromatoporoids and a
number of brachiopods can be found. The sediments show a strongly reef-
detrital character. Also in this exposure the marliness of the rock decreases
upwards. Strike and dip of the layers a r e about 6Oo/1O0, some tens of metres
further east-southeast even dips of 1 2 O and 1 7 O a r e found in about the same
direction; west-northwest of the described exposure the dip varies somewhat,
but is on the average 5-10° to the south-southeast or east. Occasionally, e.g.,
directly west of Almar, the stratified limestone is overlaid by a small occur-
rence of reef limestone.
Between SpangLnde and NorderslPtt, including the localities Millsnabb

and the Norderhamnsberg, similar stratified limestone is found a s at
SpangLnde.
The lower part of Hassli, along the east shore of Stora Karlsii, is built
up of stratified, dense to finely crystalline limestone which is grey to red-
mottled, but partly rather marly and then more bluish in colour. In the lowest
part of the steep cliff near Buckkliv Pentamerus gotlandicus and Conchidium
sculptum a r e rather common, but such fossils a s crinoids, bryozoans, corals
and - to a l e s s e r extent - stromatoporoids are also abundant. A t KLupru a
thin-layered finely crystalline limestone is found, alternating with marly
layers. Pentamems gotlandicus occurs there a s well.
The dip in the Spangande Limestone in Hassli is small; the overlying
Austerberg Limestone shows greater dips. Presumably this is due to the
further growth of the Riijsuhajd reef, The margins of this reef a t the end of
STRATIGRAPHY OF STORA KARLSO 233
the time of deposition of the SpangPnde Limestone were closer to the place
of the present cliff than before and its height over the surrounding sea bottom
may then a l s o have been greater. The marly facies of the SpangPnde Lime-
stone shows a dip of up to l o o to the south-southeast.
At Fanterna the SpangPnde Limestone is overlaid by the SvarthPllar
reef limestone (Fig.lOO). The Austerberg Limestone, which a little further
north is found at the same level as the Svarthillar reef limestone, is com-
pletely replaced by this reef limestone a t Fanterna.
The thickness of the SpangPnde limestone varies and may reach 30-35 m.
Generally it is much thinner. These differences in thickness probably a r e
mainly related to the distance and direction away from the large reefs and
consequently t o the amount of reef-debris deposition.
A breccia and an unconformity
In the north of the beach horn of M u p r u , at the bottom of the cliff, a

.
breccia is exposed, containing Pentamems gotlandicus In a marly matrix
fragments occur of layers of marly limestone which originally alternated
with the marl; also embedded a r e stromatoporoids and corals and fragments
of these, brachiopods and other fossils. The whole is a completely disorderly
mass, but the disturbance is greatest at the top of the breccia. A t its bottom,
limestone slabs may still have an approximately horizontal position and often
Fig.101. Breccia of Spanglnde Limestone near Kiiupru, Stora Karls6. At the

base still indistinct remains of the original stratification. On top of the brec-
cia stratified limestone in undisturbed position. The breccia is probably
caused by a down-slipping flank reef.
2 34 STRATIGRAPHY AND R E E F S OF KARLSOARNA
Fig. 102. Unconformity in SpangPnde Limestone between Kiiupru and Stiudden,

Stora KarlsB.
occur next to each other, reminding one slightly of the original layers (Fig.101).
Underlying the breccia is a badly exposed alternation of layers of marl-
stone and of marly limestone. They show a dip of about 8-loo east-southeast-
wards. The thickness of the breccia is 1 m. It is overlaid by an up to 1 cm
thick layer of marl, followed by stratified limestones. The latter contain some
material which is presumably reef debris. They show slightly rugged bedding
planes which a r e covered with some marl. These stratified limestones have
a dip of about 8 O towards the east-southeast.
A t Fanterna a similar, but thinner, breccia is found, which is overlaid
by reef limestone, The origin of the breccia will be explained in the discus-
sion at the end of this chapter.
Between KLupru and Stiudden, low in the cliff, an obvious unconformity
is found (Fig.102). A t the bottom there is a stratified, highly marly sediment.
This rock is very fossiliferous. Its layers dip, on the average, about '7 to-
wards the northwest. Overlying it, but dipping about 8 O southeastwards, is an
alternation of harder and more calcareous, and softer and more marly layers,
These sediments are also very fossiliferous. Except that some fossils a r e
larger, there is no difference in fossil content with the sediments underlying
the unconformity: corals, coral fragments, bryozoan remains, brachiopods,
ostracodes, and only a few smaller stromatoporoids can be found. The origin
of the unconformity will be discussed a t the end of this chapter, in conjunc-
tion with that of the Pentamerus gotlundicus breccia.
Austerberg Limestone
The steep cliff a t the northwest of the Austerberg is mainly built up of

distinctly stratified limestone. T h i s sediment is finely crystalline, sometimes
nearly dense, yellowish white t o white grey, locally somewhat marly and
t h e r e bluishly coloured, and generally very r i c h in bryozoans. In the north-
east of the Austerberg, especially n e a r Utfall, the rock is enormously rich
in bryozoan fragments. Corals and, t o a lesser extent, stromatoporoids are
a l s o present, but it is highly probable that most of these are not on their
place of growth in the Austerberg Limestone, but belong t o reef debris. At
HPstkliv, the sediment is somewhat m o r e marly. T h e r e is a r a t h e r strong
dip, which is about 15' towards the northeast between Stora F o r v a r andUtfal1.
At the top of Hassli a s i m i l a r stratified limestone is found as in the
Austerberg;it overlies the SpangPnde Limestone.
T h e reef limestone, exposed along the southeast s h o r e from Fanterna
t o west of Xske, is thinner at both ends than in the centre. At Xske, slightly
m o r e inland, stratified limestone still occurs above the raukar field. In view
of the height a t which is is found this limestone has probably, in a s i m i l a r
development, partly overlaid the reef limestone whereas other l a y e r s will
have abuted against the reef limestone. T h e stratified rock is a finely crystal-
line limestone, grey t o greyish white, sometimes yellowish grey, r a t h e r thin
layered in l a y e r s of about 1-10 cm thick, with very rugged bedding planes.
A s fossils, brachiopods, c o r a l s , bryozoans and a n occasional crinoid w e r e
observed in it. The direction of dip varies; sometimes the l a y e r s are almost
horizontal, sometimes they dip south; locally even a slight northern dip will
occur.
Thus, at Fanterna the whole thickness of the reef limestone is syn-
chronous with the Austerberg Limestone. Also in the southwest of SvarthPllar
this stratified limestone abuts against the reef limestone (Fig.103). At some
Fig.103. Svarthtillar, Stora KarlsiS, seen from the west. At the right, reef
limestone of Fanterna type; at the left side, l a y e r s of stratified limestone are
seen, which abut against the reef limestone.
distance from both ends of Svarthiillar, however, the thickness of the reef
limestone increases. In some localities, in vertical section stratified lime-
stone alternates with reef limestone. A short distance from the shore more
inland the reefs a r e locally covered by finely crystalline limestone which is
grey coloured and usually very thin layered. This rock is strongly recrystal-
lized but in some exposures an abundance of small crinoid fragments can
still be observed in it. The dip varies in degree and direction, but is general-
ly a few degrees to the southeast. It also happens that in an exposure this
stratified limestone is overlaid by reef limestone. F o r the major part, the
Svarthallar reefs can in all likelihood be considered as having been formed
synchronously with the Austerberg Limestone. In view of the great thickness
in the centre of SvarthPllar, the higher p a r t s of the complex of SvarthPllar
reef limestones and the stratified limestones alternating with them are pre-
sumably younger than the Austerberg Limestone occurring further north in
Stora Karlsb.
The raukar and rauk-like exposures at Gjaus-ha11 a r e built up of a hard

limestone, finely t o middle crystalline, greyish-white to grey and thin
layered, which presumably corresponds in age t o the Austerberg Limestone.
The bedding planes a r e rugged. Due to a strong recrystallization and a recent
overgrowth of weathered surfaces by lichens, the fossil content of the rock
is not always easy t o determine. However, in a few less-overgrown parts, as,
e.g., the undersides of overhanging layers, a wealth of fossils can be ob-
served. These include coral colonies (Favosites, Heliolites, and others),
solitary corals, bryozoan fragments, brachiopods (Atrypa reticularis ,
Conchidium sculptum, Leptaena rhomboidalis, Plectodonta transversalis lata,
and others), crinoid remains and an occasional strornatoporoid. Crystals of
calcite a r e very common. The distance from the large reefs to Gjaus-ha11 i s
rather great, and presumably for that reason the layers lie fairly horizontal-
ly. There a r e no overlying smaller r e e f s of the Fanterna type (cf. p.243).
STRATIGRAPHY OF LILLA KARLSO
The oldest sediment exposed in Lilla KarlsB, is called Pentamerus

gothndicus Limestone, according to Hede (1927, pp.43-50, Pentamerus
gotlandicus-fBrande kalksten). This local stratigraphic unit .is overlaid by a
sedimentary complex, with a maximum thickness of about 55 m , which the
present author will refer t o as Lilla Karlso Limestone. T o further subdivide
this Lilla Karlso Limestone would be unrealistic, Not only is it difficult t o
study the rock in sufficient detail, since it is almost entirely exposed in
vertical cliff walls, but it was a l s o laid down as a detrital reef-surrounding
deposit of a strictly local character (Fig.113).
The present author, in accordance with Rutten (1958, pp.380-381), as-
sumes that the interior of the island consists of the Central Lilla Karlsb reef
limestone. On its mantle deposits flank reefs developed.
In the following sections of this chapter, the Pentamerus gotlandicus and
Lilla KarlsiS Limestones will be described. After the reef limestones have also
been discussed in later sections, such problems will be touched on, at the end of
the chapter, as the correlationwithStoraKarlsiSandwithGotland, andthe environ-
ment of deposition of the Lilla KarlsiS sediments.
The position of localities in Lilla KarlsiS i s shown in Fig.104.
STRATIGRAPHY OF LILLA K A R L S ~ 237
N
\ 4
Veitc
Aulre n
%I
pa Suder Vagnhus
I att \\ \
- c
’ b f t .1..--
/I -
0
Fig.104. Map of Lilla Karlso. Directions of dip in the stratified sediments

soon
around the Central Lilla Karls6 reef a r e shown. The assumed positions of the
Norderslxtt and Suderslltt reefs a r e also indicated. RR = Raukar.
Pentamerus gotlandicus Limestone

The Pentamerus gotlandicus Limestone is a clearly stratified marly
limestone, generally with layers of 2-10 cm thickness, which sometimes,
however, approach up t o 20 o r 30 cm. These limestone layers a r e separated
by thin layers of a bluish grey, dense and soft marlstone, usually less than
2 cm thick. The limestone is light grey t o bluish o r brownish grey, normally
finely crystalline but sometimes middle crystalline. The individual beds often
show great variations in thickness over short distances, and can even com-
pletely thin out (Fig.105). Usually the rock is enormously rich in fossils,
especially crinoids, bryozoans and corals; a l s o brachiopods and some tabular
stromatoporoids a r e present. No lamellibranchs were found. Among the fos-
s i l s observed, Pentamerus gotlandicus is the most important for stratigraph-
ical correlation.
The best outcrops of this limestone a r e found in the west of the island.
There it is found along the beach from southwest of Stalen to Trldgsrden and
in the lower beach cliff a t Veite Auren and northwards, to a little t o the
north-northeast of the cave Norder Vagnhus. Some small exposures a l s o oc-
c u r in the northwest and northeast of the island. T h e thickness above sea
level differs greatly from one place t o another; in the south of Veite Auren,
i t reaches up t o about 10 m above sea level, but generally i t s upper boundary
is lower. T h i s phenomenon is connected with the fact that in s e v e r a l places
and a t varying heights the stratified Pentamerus gotlandicus Limestone i s
overlaid by a Pentamerus gotlandicus breccia of varying thickness, which in
i t s t u r n generally f o r m s the b a s i s of flank reefs of Fanterna type (Fig.106,
107,108). Where no reefs occur, as in several places of the lower p a r t of the
high wall between Suder and Norder Vagnhus, the alternation of marly lime-
stone l a y e r s with thinner marlstone l a y e r s continues until about 10-12 m
above s e a level. Generally t h i s succession shows an increase in the thickness
of the limestone l a y e r s upwards and a corresponding d e c r e a s e in the thick-
n e s s of the marlstone layers. Sometimes the limestone l a y e r s remain thin,
generally 2-10 cm, but then they are m o r e numerous because of the thinner
marlstone layers. In such cases the boundary with the overlying Lilla Karlsi)
Limestone is r a t h e r blurred. T h i s is the m o r e t r u e as it is likely that the
name-giving fossil, Pentamerus gotlandicus, is not abundant and possibly
does not even occur in the sediments higher than about 4 m above present
s e a level. Because of the generally very steep walls, however, t h i s cannot
be proven.
Fig. 105. Pentamerus gotlandicus Limestone, VPsterberget between Norder

and Suder Vagnhus, Lilla Karlsi). Limestone l a y e r s alternating with thinner
marlstone l a y e r s . Some limestone l a y e r s thin out; the bedding planes a r e
i r r e g u l a r and rugged.
STRATIGRAPHY OF LILLA KARLSO 239
Fig.106. T h e coast of Lilla K a r l s a near Norder Vagnhus, showing how a t

varying level the stratified Pentamerus gotlandicus Limestone (foreground)
is overlaid by reef limestone.
About 75 m north of Triidggrden, along the beach, a discordance of bed-

ding is found in the Pentamerus gotlandicus Limestone (Fig.109). The alterna-
tion of limestone and marlstone, there partly abuts against a bluish grey to
grey crinoid limestone, which is thicker bedded, hard, s p a r r y and r a t h e r
poor in fossils other than crinoid remains. A s h o r t distance further north the
crinoid limestone again disappears from the exposure. I t apparently rep-
r e s e n t s the result of local conditions so very favourable t o crinoid develop-
ment, that their remains built a slight elevation on the s e a floor. The lower-
most l a y e r s of the overlying normal limestone a r c h over it. A somewhat
s i m i l a r exposure is found at the bottom of the exposure in the south of
Triidghrden.
Pentamerus gotlandicus breccia

Directly underlying most of the flank r e e f s of the Central Lilla Karls6
r e e f , is found a breccia of Pentamems gotlandicus Limestone (Fig.107,108).
T h i s breccia consists of a marly matrix in which fragments a r e embedded
of the marly-limestone l a y e r s , which originally alternated with the marl-
stone layers. The limestone slabs show a great variety in orientation. Local-
ly the breccia a l s o contains some fragments of reef limestone.
T h i s Pentamerus gotlandicus breccia shows great differences in i t s
thickness underneath the various reefs. It does not always occur at the same
height in the stratigraphical column of Lilla Karls6.
A t some other places the Pentamerus gotlundicus Limestone shows

bucklings, which a r e caused by lateral compression (Fig.110).
A little north of Suder Vagnhus is found a flank reef with stratified
sediment dipping upwards against it at its present landward side, which i s
the side directed towards the Central reef. This stratified sediment is a m a r l y
limestone, grey to greyish brown in colour, with rugged beddingplanes; the rock
is very fossiliferous and also contains reef debris. Hardly any bedding i s left
close to the reef. There, a completely unorganized mixture of fossils, fossil
fragments, marly limestone and a marl matrix is found.
Lilla Karlso Limestone
The northwest cliff of the island is almost entirely built up of stratified

limestone, which i s light brownish grey, dense to finely crystalline, partly
finely oolitic, with layers generally varying in thickness from a few centi-
metres to about 15 cm. The fossil content of the sediment varies; most com-
mon a r e corals, bryozoans and stromatoporoids, which presumably belong
in part to the outwash of the Central Lilla Karls6 reef, brachiopods (e.g.,
Leptuena rhomboidulis, Atrypa .p.eticuluris),ostracodes (Leperditia Sp. and
others) and trilobites (Proetus sp., Encrinurus punctatus-).
Comparable sediments a r e found in the high and steep cliffs in the
southwest, west, northeast and east of the island. The bedding planes a r e
Fig.107. Lilla KarlsB, about 50 m south of Tradgirden. A t the base, stratified

Pentamerus gotlundicus Limestone; on the top, reef limestone; in between
both, an unstratified breccia of Pentamerus gothndicus containing sediment.
STRATIGRAPHY OF LILLA KARLSO 241
Fig.108. Lilla KarlsB, about 30 m south of TradgArden. The section of Fig.107

can a l s o partly be seen in the right of this photograph, It shows how the thick-
ness of the Pentamerus gotlundicus breccia under one reef differs from that
under a'nother reef.
generally rugged and often covered by a film of marl. A s a result of weathering the
rock often falls t o pieces easily, building high s c r e e s at the foot of the walls. This
is especially well demonstrated, e.g., betweensuder andNorder Vagnhus. The
amount of reef debris which the sediment contains varies. Exposures of flank reefs,
which developed on the slopes of the Central reef (Fig. 121),a r e intercalated. In
more marly parts of the stratifiedlimestone, caves have developed. None of these
i s excavated in reef limestone. The best-known caves a r e Suder Vagnhus, over 20 m
deep, over 10 m high and close t o 20 m broad, and Norder Vagnhus, 31 m deep, 10-1 m
high and generally 4-6 m broad. Both a r e formed by the Ancylus lake, as a r e a t least
sixteen smaller caves in the west of the island. A few other small caves date from
the Baltic Ice Sea.
Because of the steep walls, it is difficult to gainaccess to the LillaKarlsi)
Limestone for detailed observations. It can be well studied at Trappliigru (staircase),
about 0.2 km southwest of Bodarna, the place where boats dock in Lilla KarlsiS. There
the deposit is developed as a marly limestone, dense t o finely crystalline, with a
bluishgrey, sometimes red-mottled colour, whichalternates with thin layers of
bluish grey marlstone. The limestone is r i c h i n crinoids, bryozoans, stromato-
poroids and corals. I t s layers have a south-southwestward dip varying from 25-32O
at the plateau side toabout 20° at the seaside. The occurrence of marlstone in this
section is notable, since it does not seem to be as common in other sections through
the Lilla KarlsB Limestone, except locally in the uppermost parts.
,242 STRATIGRAPHY AND REEFS OF KARLSOARNA
REEF LIMESTONES OF STORA KARLSG
Several reefs a r e assumed to have contributed towards the shaping of

Stora KarlsB. In the west a r e the Marmorberg reef, the reef limestone of
Stzurnasar, and some remains of reef limestone a t Laup-hargi. In the main
they a r e probably of the same age as the SpangLnde Limestone.
The Rajsuhajd reef in the east is also mainly synchronous with the
SpangPnde Limestone, although in its uppermost part it is perhaps more so
with the Austerberg Limestone. The latter is suggested by the high content
of the surrounding Austerberg Limestone in bryozoan fragments and other
reef debris,and by the rather strong dips in the lowermost Austerberg Lime-
stone.
The Svarthsllar reef limestones in the southeast may be considered to
be, in the main, of the same age as the Austerberg Limestone, although in
their centre, where they reach a rather great thickness, the upper parts a r e
probably still younger. Some other, smaller reefs, which in their appearance
a r e comparable to the SvarthPllar reef limestones, a r e most likely older.
The descriptive names for the various reefs a r e partly introduced here
for the first time, but Rutten (1958) has already pointed out that the interior
of Marmorberg and RBjsuhajd should consist of reef limestone.
The reef limestones of Stora Karlsa a r e not well exposed in all cases.
Poor exposure may occur either because the reef limestones a r e still mainly
enveloped by stratified sediments or because they have mainly been eroded.
Fig. 109. Discordance of bedding in Pentamems gotlundicus Limestone, about

75 m north of Tradggrden, Lilla K a r b o . The discordance is caused by a local
deposition of crinoid limestone.
REEF LIMESTONES OF STORA KARLSd 243
Fig.110. Buckling in Pentamerus gotlandicus Limestone, about 90 m south of

Tradgarden, Lilla KarlsB.
A s will be shown, there a r e some significant differences with the reefs

of Gotland proper. Therefore, the present author proposes t o classify them
into two new reef types,to be known as the Smurnasar and the Fanterna types.
The reefs of the Stsiurnasar type a r e relatively large. They a r e in their
generally not very well exposed lower p a r t s presumably built up mainly by
huge coral colonies; in their higher p a r t s by stromatoporoids and corals to-
gether. The ratio between greatest thickness and greatest diameter will be
in the order of 1/10; at the time of greatest extension, they may have covered
an area of more than 100.000 m2.
The Fanterna reef type is named after Fanterna, in the east of the is-
land (Fig.lOO). The reefs a r e built up mainly by bryozoans and corals in a
nearly pure calcareous matrix. Branched bryozoans occur in intact colonies
measuring to over 1 m in all directions, but especially in an abundance of
small fragments. The fauna of the Fanterna reefs is poorly known in detail.
Because of strong recrystallization, the fossils a r e more altered and difficult
t o collect from the generally hard and splintery limestone. A weathered sur-
face of Fanterna-type reef limestone is massive and often strongly brec-
ciating. A number of the reefs a r e not very large. Presumably they developed
as flank reefs, but some of the younger ones managed to survive the main
reef and became strongly extended.
Western reef limestones
In the western half of Stora Karlsil exposures of what a r e at least

presumably three large reefs a r e found, which all developed about syn-
chronously with the Spanglnde Limestone and which a r e grouped here to-
gether as Western reef limestones.
StGumasar reef limestone
A t Stsurnasar, in the west of Stora Karlso, the steep cliff along the
shore shows a very beautiful exposure of reef limestone, up to a thickness
of about 20 m locally. The reef limestone r e s t s almost directly over the
Lerberg Marlstone. The lower part of the reef is built up almost exclusively
by huge colonies of Halysites catenularius. These colonies a r e on the average,
about 70 cm in diameter and 100 cm thick. The colonies practically occur
I' shoulder to shoulder" over a thickness of several metres. In between the
corals a few tabular stromatoporoids a r e found. The matrix i s formed by a

bluish grey to brownish grey marly limestone, which also fills nearly all the
Halysites colonies. A t some places there is hardly any space left in between
the colonies for a matrix. Evidently the corals were able to multiply rapidly
and to colonize some a r e a s to the nearly complete exclusion of other organ-
isms. Succeeding generations used the skeletons of their predecessors as a
substratum. Most coral colonies a r e wonderfully well preserved and little
seems to have happened to the reefs after the death of its builders.
In the upper part of that same St4urnasar exposure, the predominance
of Halysites in the reef limestone is considerably less; colonies of other
coral genera a r e also present there. Moreover, several more stromato-
poroids occur. These generally formed tabular colonies which a r e rather
thin and show undulating surfaces. The matrix of the reef limestone is l e s s
marly and constitutes an important portion of the total rock volume. Over the
full height of the section the weathered surface of the reef limestone is rather
massive.
Some tens of metres south of the above exposure, the reef limestone
shows a distinct subdivision into zones. A t the bottom, 1.70 m of the reef
limestone consists almost entirely of Halysites catenulurius. This zone is
succeeded, without a perceptible transition, by reef limestone built up by
tabular and flat-lenticular stromatoporoids, in between which only an oc-
casional coral colony can be found. Then again, a sudden change-over to a
second.Halysites limestone zone takes place. This zone can be followed up-
wards over several metres, In the top of the reef the number of tabular and
flat-lenticular stromatoporoids increases again, now gradually replacing the
corals.
The sudden end of coral growth at the bottom of this section was prob-
ably due to increased sedimentation, causing the stifling of the Halysites
colonies. These colonies stand very close against each other and more mud
is found in the colonies (in the tubes and between the walls of tubes) than in
between them. With an increase in sedimentation there was little opportunity
to remove the extra amount of sediment coming down on the corals to places
where it could do little harm. The lowest centimetres of the overlying
stromatoporoid zone a r e very marly and the stromatoporoids there a r e
extremely thin. In the whole stromatoporoid part, the matrix constitutes an
important part in the volume of the rock, but at the bottom and locally a t the
R E E F LIMESTONES OF STORA KARLSO 24 5
top of the zone, the matrix volume is highest. Thus, the transition to the
second Halysites part may probably also be explained by stifling, in that case
of the stromatoporoids, making place for a new period of colonization by the
corals. The fact that over the full height of the section those stromatoporoids
which occur remained very thin suggests that life conditions for them were
marginal at all times.
Since this subdivision into zones is only a local phenomenon, its causes
must also have been of a local rather than a general nature. This excludes,
for instance, a temporary increase in water depth.
In the second Halysites zone in this section a saucer-like depression
was found to have developed between Halysites reef limestone found left and
right of it. At the bottom of this depression a layer of marly limestone i s
found, containing tabular stromatoporoids and a few small Halysites colonies.
The latter generally lie upside down. The depression was probably formed
through an occasionally greater influx of mud than could be bypassed, which
overwhelmed a local part of the reef, causing the death of the corals there.
Upwards, Halysites colonies again replace the stromatoporoids, which are,
in their turn, higher in the section over the entire reef and a r e replaced anew
by stromatoporoids. There the depression fades away in the reef. It is also
likely that the greater zonal division described above from this part of the
cliff represents a reef portion which developed in a depression in the reef
surface. This part then acted as a mud trap and, moreover, did not grow up-
wards at the same rate a s the surrounding reef surface, These two factors
together may have resulted in the higher matrix volume. Temporarily more
favourable conditions following the last greater influx of mud gave the corals
a chance to build up the depression to the level of the surrounding reef por-
tions.
The StPurnasar reef limestone a s a whole shows an orderly nature.
Notably, the great predominance of corals especially in the lower part of the
reef and the increase in stromatoporoids upwards in the reef make it differ
from all three reef types found in Gotland and give reason to consider it a
separate type of reef formation.
In the south, stratified limestone with a varying content of reef debris
buckles down under the StPurnasar reef.
Marmorberg reef limestone
It is most likely that the heart of the Marmorberg, in the northwest of

Stora Karlsil, consists of reef limestone. Indications in favour of this sup-
position a r e :
(1) Locally both in the surrounding cliffs and on top of the plateau of the
Marmorberg, reef limestone i s exposed.
(2) The rather strong dips shown by the stratified sediments exposed
in the Marmorberg (Fig.99,111). A l l around the hill the dip is generally di-
rected away from its centre. With increasing distance from the centre of the
Marmorberg, the dip decreases. The Middle Palaeozoic strata of Gotland and
Karlsoarna were never subjected to a general folding o r to other powerful
tectonical disturbances. Glacial pressures during the Pleistocene Ice Ages
can not have brought about this phenomenon either.
( 3 ) The reef-detrital character of most of the surrounding sediments.
(4) The occurrence of crinoid limestone aroundand on top of the
Marmorberg ("Karlsi) marble", the SpangPnde Limestone is also often
246 STRATIGRAPHY AND R E E F S O F KARLSOARNA
Fig.111. StoraKarlsb; the most southwesternpart of theMarmorberg, seen from

the southeast. Flank deposit of the Marmorberg reef, with a decreasing dip
of the layers away from the reef.
red-mottled). Everywhere on Gotland crinoid remains a r e extremely abun-

dant in the immediate environment of fossil reefs (cf. the " Hoburg marble"
covering the reefs at Hoburgen, as mentioned in Chapter VII).
Exposures of Marmorberg reef limestone a r e rather scarce. They a r e

found on top of the Marmorberg, in the higher parts of the VLsterberg cliff,
high in the section exposed a t Spang-Xnde, in the Norderhamnsberg and in the
southeast of the Marmorberg. The exposure found at StPurnasar and de-
scribed above most likely belongs t o another reef and not to that of the
Marmorberg. On the plateau of the island it can be seen that StPurnasar forms
a hill, separated by a valley from the Marmorberg proper. The highest part
of the StPurnasar hill is situated at the edge of the cliff. The great sag i n the
underlying Lerberg Marlstone, which dips from a height of about 25 m at
Ramraur to below sea level under StHurnasar also indicates a separate reef,
Except from the steep cliff, information about the exposures in the
Viisterberg can also be derived from loose blocks lying on the beach at the
foot of the cliff. These blocks a r e especially common northwest of the
VLsterberg. Three types can be distinguished, viz. blocks of reef limestone
with stromatoporoids and corals, blocks of bluish grey limestone very rich
in crinoid-stem fragments which a r e generally red coloured, and blocks
which consist partly of this crinoid limestone and partly of limestone very
rich in reef builders. The latter blocks probably originate from the very out-
side of the reef.
The stromatoporoids in the reef limestone a r e mainly tabular forms
with a thickness of l e s s than 1-1.5 cm in many instances. The thickest
R E E F LIMESTONES OF STORA KARLSO 247
stromatoporoid was a bullet-shaped colony of 25 cm thick and 10 cm in diam-
eter, found in crinoid limestone. The corals generally form larger colonies.
A few observed colonies of Halysites catenulurius had a diameter of 7 5 cm
and a thickness of 30 cm, and an exceptional giant measured not l e s s than
190 cm in diameter and was 80 cm thick. The other Halysites colonies seen
were smaller. This applies still more to the massive, lens-shaped coral
colonies.
Generally stromatoporoids a r e more abundant in the reef limestone
than corals. However, the latter also contributed essentially to reef building
and some portions of the reef, up to a few cubic metres, consist almost ex-
clusively of Halysites colonies. Bryozoans did not play an important part.
The recrystallization of calcium carbonate in the stromatoporoids and in
most of the lens-shaped corals was generally s o strong that it blotted out
the finer microstructure. This obstructs not only specific or generic
identification of the colonies but even the distinction between the two groups.
The matrix of the reef is a marly limestone which usually forms a rather
important percentage of the total volume of reef limestone. The weathered
surface of reef limestone is rather smooth, not conglomeratic or brecciated
to such an extent as in many of the reef-limestone exposures in Gotland. For
this reason it is very difficult, when standing on the narrow beach, to distin-
guish between reef and stratified limestone in the upper part of the cliff wall.
Some of the blocks found a t the foot of the Vasterberg a r e very rich in
solitary corals; others show a transition from reef limestone to the reef-
detrital SpangPnde Limestone through its disorderly nature, as well a s
through the presence of many fragments of reef-forming organisms and more
crinoid remains.
The small and weathered outcrops of reef limestone in the
Norderhamnsberg and the southeast of the Marmorberg do not present any
new information. Tabular and flat-lenticular stromatoporoids and some
coral colonies a r e recognizable in this rock. The general nature of the reef
limestone is similar to that found in some of the blocks on the beach at
Vasterberg. The reef limestone in the southeast is surrounded by a light-
grey crinoid limestone, which is red-mottled. It contains, in addition to the
many usually small crinoid remains, several stromatoporoids and corals,
many of which a r e not in their position of growth. The rock is comparable
to the crinoid limestone at SpangPnde.
The reef character of the limestone which is found in a few small out-
crops on top of the Marmorberg is vague. The many crinoids in it suggest
that this reef limestone belongs to the very top of the reef.
At SpangSLnde, the reef limestone in the cliff is inaccessible; on the
plateau it is overlaid by crinoid limestone.
If one realizes that all exposures of the Marmorberg reef limestone
belong to the higher parts of the reef, it becomes probable that the
Marmorberg reef may be of similar type to the StHurnasar reef. The latter
shows a comparable composition at its top. Through its more orderly nature,
more and larger i o r a l colonies, and smoother surfaces, this kind of reef
limestone as found in the higher parts of the Marmorberg and Staurnasar
reefs differs from that of the general Hoburgen reef type of Gotland. A s has
been demonstrated before, the difference between the lower parts of the
StPurnasar reef and the Hoburgen-type reefs is very pronounced.
In some places on top of the Marmorberg, such as east of Myren and
southeastwards from there, a red-mottled, grey to white-grey crinoid
limestone is found, which is very rich in predominantly small crinoid frag-

ments. It also contains some small remains of corals, brachiopods and
stromatoporoids. This rock is known as “Karls6 marble”. The limestone is
rather strongly recrystallized, finely to middle crystalline and usually very
thickly, sometimes also irregularly bedded. The strike and dip vary; east of
Myren the dip is towards the northwest; north and northeast of SuderslPtt it
dips i n a south-southeast or southeast direction. The plateau of the
Marmorberg shows distinct fluctuations in height. The dips mentioned above,
a r e connected with one of the elevations of this plateau, situated southeast of
Myren and a r e similar to the topographical slopes. The same situation i s
found around other elevations on the plateau. This situation suggests that the
upper surface of the Marmorberg reef limestone is rather strongly uneven.
Laup -hargi Teef limestone
In the raukar field Laup-hargi, in the southwest of the island, a small

remnant of reef limestone is preserved between the SpanglInde Limestone.
In all likelihood the very greatest part of the reef was situated further sea-
wards and has been removed by erosion (Fig.112). Indications of this a r e the
large depression, faintly saucer-like, which i s found in the stratified sedi-
ments exposed around sea level off the shore, and the dips in the reef-sur-
rounding stratified limestones in this region, which a r e mainly directed in-
land. The size of the basal depression and the strong dips suggest a rather
large reef, even if the dips in the overlying rocks a r e somewhat exaggerated
by differential compaction of the sediments. In all likelihood the reef
Fig.112. Laup-hargi, Stora Karl&, seen from the north-northwest. Stratified

sediments, dipping seaward, suggest that the centre of the Laup-hargi reef
has been completely removed by erosion and only some parts of the very
periphery have remained.
REEF LIMESTONES OF STORA KARLSO 24 9
Fig.113. Laup-hargi, Stora KarlsB. Rauk, showing reef talus with an abun-
dance of fossils, fossil fragments and also with parts of layers of crinoid
limestone; the whole is embedded in a matrix of marly limestone. A t the top,
crinoid limestone.
was synchronous with the SpangLnde Limestone.

The reef limestone which is preserved, contains corals (Favosites,
Heliolites, Acervularia, Cystiphyllum cylindricurn, and others), stromato-
poroids, bryozoans, crinoid remains (generally small) and brachiopods
(Pentamems gotlandicus, Atrypa reticularis, Camarotoechia borealis, and
others). Brachiopods a r e rather common, although nowhere abundant. Corals,
occurring in both solitary forms and colonies, outnumber the stromatoporoids.
The latter almost never reach large measurements. The matrix of the reef
is a marly limestone, which forms an important element of the total rock.
Fragments of fossils and colonies that a r e not in their growth positions a r e
very common. It is likely that at least part of the exposed reef sediment i s
reef talus rather than true reef limestone. This holds true especially for
those parts in which the matrix contains an abundance of crinoid remains to-
gether with a large amount of relatively small bryozoan fragments.
In these talus-like parts a vague and very lumpy stratification can be
observed locally. This kind of deposit also contains slabs of hard crinoid lime-
stone layers, with a length of up t o 25 cm and with an average thickness of
3 cm, showing a strong variation in orientation. The dip of fourteen of these
slabs in one of the raukar, close to the southeast end of the raukar field
(Fig.1131, showed an average direction to the north-northeast.
The number of exposures in Laup-hargi i s too few and the exposed reef
250 STRATIGRAPHYANDREEFS OF KARLSOARNA
limestone too vague to reliably classify the reef in one of the generalizedreef
types. There is a resemblance t o the reefs of the Hoburgen type of Gotland
but the dominance of corals over stromatoporoids is a characteristic which
it has in common with the upper part of the StPurnasar reef.
Rlrjsuhajd reef limestone
The same reasoning a s applied to the Marmorberg can be used to argue

that the heart of Riljsuhajd a l s o consists of reef limestone. Exposures of this
limestone, however, a r e exceedingly scarce. Some small and weathered out-
crops a r e found on the plateau of Rbjsuhajd. The weathering makes it dif-
ficult t o distinguish these outcrops from those of stratified limestone. The
only reliable statement which can be made about this Rbjsuhajd reef lime-
stone is that it is comparable to that exposed in the Marmorberg and the
higher parts at Staurnasar, but seems to contain more bryozoans.
Since exposures of reef limestone a r e found in the plateaus of both the
Marmorberg and Rbjsuhajd, it seems likely that the Rbjsuhajd reef is thicker
than its western equivalent, because R6jsuhajd reaches about 8 m higher.
There is a remarkable crack, about 25 em wide, which is found on
Riljsuhajd some tens of m e t r e s southeast of Linn6s Ask. It has an orientation
about east-northeast - west-southwest, and is partly filled up with some
vertical layers, consisting of a grey to white-grey limestone, which is hard
and finely crystalline. Locally a fossil can be observed in this limestone, or
it may be red-mottled a s a result of small crinoid fragments. The sur-
rounding rock is a hard, grey to red-mottled limestone with crinoids, and
intercalated small exposures of reef limestone. The crevice has a somewhat
sinuous course and can be followed over some tens of metres before it dis-
appears under vegetation. Presumably this crack formed during compaction
of the sediments; its formation would have been favoured by the dips in the
stratified sediments arching over the Rajsuhajd reef. Similar cracks of
smaller measurements a r e found in the southeast of Norderslatt, in a light
grey to brownish grey, dense limestone with stromatoporoids and crinoid
remains.
General discussion on the older reef f o m a t i o n s
The Western reefs and presumably also the Rbjsuhajd reef started to
grow from a muddy bottom in the upper part of the Lerberg Marlstone or at
the latest, a t about the transition from Lerberg Marlstone to SpangPnde Lime-
stone. Although studies of Recent reefs have shown that most of them started
growing on hard bottoms, a consolidated platform is not essential for a reef
foundation. Observations of present-day reefs have proven that a relatively
small number of them definitely rose from unconsolidated bottoms. The large
reefs of the two Karlsaarna presumably present fossil examples of this.
Nowhere is there any evidence that a hard substrate for reef growth has been
present within this region. A s has been shown, a marlstone or perhaps a
marly limestone acted as the foundation for reef building. Reef-forming
organisms, nevertheless, require a solid surface for attachment, and, in the
absence of a suitable flatform especially hard skeletal remains a s , e.g.,
coral colonies o r solitary corals, may have served a s objects for attachment
R E E F LIMESTONES OF STORA KARLSC) 251
of the pioneer populations. The extra weight of the reefs upon the underlying
sediment caused a plastic deformation, a s the bucklings in the Lerberg Marl-
stone indicate.
When the reefs were built up to slightly above the surrounding sea bot-
tom, formation of reef debris began, which became embedded in the sediment
deposited directly around it. Since during their growth the water presumably
became shallower (cf. the discussion a t the end of this chapter) and because
the reefs became higher as their growth rate exceeded that of sediment ac-
cumulation in their environment, gradually more reef debris was produced.
The growing obstacles on the sea bottom caused increased water turbulence.
Debris, formed in the first place directly around the reef, was reworked and
redeposited on the surrounding bottom. In part the skeletons of the reef
builders and reef-surrounding fauna disintegrated post mortem into skeletal
sands. A l l possible intermediates from fine reef sand to complete colonies
can be observed in the flank deposits. The percentage of still recognizable
reef-derived debris in the flank beds generally ranges from a common figure
of l e s s than 5-1076 to a r a r e maximum of about 40%.
A s described above, the sediments deposited marginally to the r e e f s
incline from the reefs with angles of about 2 5 O close to the reef, gradually
decreasing with increasing distance from the reef, to an approximately
horizontal stratification at some hundreds of metres from its centre (Fig.99).
The dips a r e about the same on all sides of the reef mass, indicating that the
main form was a dome, situated at some distance from the shore. There is
no field evidence from which this distance can be reliably deduced, but 5 km
or more might be a reasonable guess.
A s the top of the Marmorberg reef suggests, in the course of reef
development a number of smaller growth centres on the reef could lead to a
rough surface. A l l the elevations probably had the form of smaller domes.
They, too, were enveloped by stratified sediments, dipping away from the
centre of the dome, although the angles a r e smaller than with the main reef.
Originally the dips in the flank deposits may have been smaller than
they a r e at present. Later compaction of the reef-surrounding deposits may
have exaggerated the difference in level between a given reef surface and its
contemporaneously accumulating flank sediments. The structure developed
by the building of the framework-forming organisms clearly had great rigid-
ity and did not undergo any important change in volume under the weight of
any overburden placed upon it. Lime muds, deposited in connection with the
reefs, on the other hand, will have been filled with water at the time of de-
position. A s this water was expelled, compaction took place and the original
dips increased. After reef building came to a close, sediments were deposited
over the reefs. These arch over them in the form of domes. On all margins
they have dips approximately equal to the underlying sediments that drape
around the reefs. These additional deposits produced a further compaction
of the bordering sediments and a consequent intensifying of the inclination
of the layers.
Even if the occurrence of a large compaction factor is assumed to
compensate for the present exaggerated difference in levels, an ultimate
height of these reef masses of about 10 m, or perhaps 15 m, above the con-
temporaneous topography of the normal sea bottom may be posited. After the
death of the reef it became slowly buried under younger sediments, but still
projected upwards through several metres of these deposits, a s can be ob-
served on the plateau of Rfijsuhajd.
2 52 STRATIGRAPHY AND R E E F S O F KARLSOARNA
Sr la vtlza 1 la Y ye e j lini e s tones
In the south of Stora KarlsiS, a t Xske, a n elongated r a u k a r field begins,

which can be followed over a distance of about 1.3 km east-northeastwards
till Fanterna. T h e raukar a r e built up by a hard and splintery reef limestone,
which contrasts sharply with the stratified sediment in i t s surroundings. In
these reefs vertically extended reef-forming organisms, mainly bryozoans,
but a l s o a few branched c o r a l s , as well as m o r e horizontally expended reef
builders, especially lenticular and tabular c o r a l colonies, occur. T h e r e are
practically no stromatoporoids. Among the reef dwellers brachiopods are most
common. T h e reef builders occur in such a n alternation with each other and
with other m a t e r i a l that the reefs as a whole p r e s e n t a massive s t r u c t u r e
without any distinct building pattern. The stratified limestones s a g under the
reef limestone.
Fig.114. Reef, in the south of Svarthgllar, Stora KarlsB. At the base, a n

alternation of hard limestone l a y e r s with l a y e r s of a m o r e marly composition;
t h i s is overlaid by about 0.5 m of reef d e b r i s and on top of that a reef of
Fanterna type, about 6 m thick.
R E E F LIMESTONES O F STORA KARLSd 253
A s this type of reef limestone cannot be directly compared with any of

the three types distinguished in Gotland, the author proposes to give it a name
of its own, the Fanterna reef type, after the locality in the east of StoraKarlsb.
Both a t Xske and in the west of SvarthLllar, in the direct environment
of the reefs, stratified limestones still occur. These partly come to a dead
end on the reefs. Earlier perhaps they have also covered the reef limestone
to some extent. The reef limestone here has a maximum thickness of about
9 m; further northeast, however, the thickness increases considerably. P e r -
haps there the top of the reef limestone is younger than any stratified sedi-
ment in the island, but in the opinion of the present author there is no reason
to consider the whole complex of Svarthallar reef limestones as younger, a s
Hede (1927b, p.42) supposed.
The usually very crumbly weathering sometimes leads to a pseudo-
stratification of the reef limestone, A real, but vague stratification is found
at some places a t the top of raukar a t the edge of the raukar field. P a r t s of
reef limestone, located further inward in the reef-limestone occurrences,
which a r e very rich in bryozoans, sometimes show a kind of weathering
reminiscent of an industrial slag. Due to the very strong recrystallization,
the organic constituents of the reefs a r e often barely recognizable in the
exposed solid rocks. However, the reef builders can be very well studied in
some loose blocks on the beach that a r e selectively eroded by the waves. In
most instances these show a dominance of bryozoans, directly followed by
coral colonies. Solitary corals a r e also very common; brachiopods a r e less
numerous. After some searching a few small stromatoporoids were also
found. The bryozoans occur in large colonies, which a r e up to 0.8 m in dia-
meter and 1.15 m thick. Most bryozoans, however, have apparently fallen
apart into an abundance of small pieces under the disintegrating action of
contemporary waves and currents on the somewhat elevated reefs. These
pieces play a dominant part in the reef matrix. This matrix is probably com-
posed to a very high degree of autochthonous material, since it is remarkably
pure for a reef limestone and leaves practically no residue after solution in
cold dilute acid. It is dense to finely crystalline. Calcite crystals, up to 1 cm
large a r e very common. In comparison to other reefs, the matrix does not
occupy a high part of the total reef-limestone volume, generally l e s s than 20 %.
Just before the southwest end of SvarthLllar, the rocks underlying the
SvarthLllar reef limestone a r e also exposed (Fig.114). These consist of an
alternation of 1-5 cm thick layers of hard limestone of bluish-grey, grey to
brownish-grey colour, with thicker layers, generally 2-13 cm, of a more
marly limestone, greyish blue to bluish grey in colour and splitting into very
thin flakes. Both types of sediment a r e enormously rich in fossils, such as
solitary and social corals, bryozoans, brachiopods, crinoids, and a n occa-
sional c ephalopod.
A t the top of the sequence, a number of layers of the hard limestone oc-
cur, with a combined average thickness of about 0.5 m, in between which the
flaky, marly limestone is nearly missing. The rock consists mainly of reef
debris, particularly bryozoan fragments with corals in between. Sometimes
a certain sorting to size of the reef debris can be observed; there a r e layers
with only bryozoan fragments, layers with bryozoan remains, fragments of
coral colonies and some solitary corals, and layers which also contain com-
plete coral colonies. This sorting is presumably brought about by wave action
on the reefs and was also dependent upon the distance from the reef to the
place of deposition. Upwards the coarseness of the reef debris generally
2 54 STRATIGRAPHY AND REEFS OF KARLSdARNA
increases somewhat. The boundary between this debris-rich limestone and

the overlying reef limestone is not sharp. Lowermost in the reef limestone,
debris is still very common in between corals which a r e found in their posi-
tions of growth. Over a short distance upwards, the number of these corals
increases rapidly, whereas at the same time the percentage of debris de-
creases. In the lowermost part of the reef a vague stratification can be seen
locally.
A weathered surface of the reef limestone is massive in appearance, in
part crumbling. Locally, where the rock is l e s s recrystallized, bryozoans
and corals show a different reaction to weathering. Parts rich in bryozoanu
weather massively o r like industrial slag; coral colonies are partly liberated
between them a s lenses. Where many lenticular corals occur together, thej
sometimes cause a kind of stratifiation. Colonies of Favosites a r e often filled
with limestones only in their outermost few millimetres; for the entire re-
mainder the polyparia a r e empty. This gives the rock a porous nature locally.
The reefs of SvarthXllar and rather similar reefs found in Lilla KarlsG
a r e the strongest and most uniformly recrystallized of all reefs found in
Gotland and both Karlsi3arna. This may be a consequence of the rather pure
nature of the matrix, which is a dense calcite cement with hardly any in-
organic clastic material. Probably recrystallization has also partly been
stimulated by the occurrence of the above-mentioned corals which escaped
internal cementation and thus retained their natural porous, cellular struc-
ture. In this way they permitted access to invading fluids and rendered the
rock liable t o diagenetic action. Comparable observations were made by
Fig.115. Detail of an intercalation of crinoid limestone within a reef. Xlmar,

Stora Karlsi3.
REEF LIMESTONES OF STORA K A R L S ~ 2 55
Henson (1950) in some rudist reefs of northern Iraq. There, patchy alteration
generally followed the distribution of the porous rudist colonies; elsewhere
in the same outcrop, where these organisms were tightly cemented inside and
outside, the whole rock was unaltered.
The reefs of Holmhlllar type, too, are rather pure, but nevertheless
they a r e l e s s strongly recrystallized than the reefs of Svarthtillar. This may
have been caused by the fact that between the stromatoporoid colonies, which
a r e their main reef builders, Algae generally occur. These assisted in the
building of the framework that holds the reef together, are much finer in
texture, a r e l e s s liable to attack, and a s a result a r e generally relatively
l e s s altered.
Still much less altered a r e reefs of other types in Gotland, which have
too high a percentage of clastic terrigenous material in their matrix, which
acted against uniform recrystallization.
In addition to the reefs in the Svarthallar area some other, isolated and smaller reefs
occur elsewhere in Stora Karlso. These will be briefly described below. They probably
belong t o the same type of reef.
Directly west of Xlmar, in the southwest of Stora Karlso, the Spangande Lime-
stone is overlaid by a small reef, comparable to the Svarthallar reef limestones. The
reef limestone is a hard and splintery limestone in which many bryozoans and com-
pound and solitary corals are recognizable; also an occasional stromatoporoid is
present, generally small and very flat. The reef reaches a thickness of up to about 5 m.
It apparently was too small t o show faunal differentiation on i t s various sides. With
the other reefs of Fanterna type it shows a remarkably uniform fauna over the whole
reef, a uniformity which in this reef type can also be noted in widely separated reefs.
In the Xlmar reef an 1.20 m long intercalation of crinoid limestone i s well ex-
posed, with a strongly concave lower boundary and a faintly convex upper boundary;
in the centre the thickness is about 70 c m , at the margins about 30 cm. The whole
presumably represents a small depression in the reef surface, which at a l a t e r stage
was again overgrown by the reef builders. At the bottom of the depression, some
relatively large fragments of reef limestone w e r e observed, 10-30 c m in diameter.
The rest of the filling material is of smaller size. Cr+oid-stem fragments a r e strong-
ly dominant. These are,on the average, 1.5 c m in diameter and about 3.5 c m long, with
the longest remains measuring about 11 c m (Fig.115). Small crinoid remains a r e r a r e .
In between the crinoid material a r e solitary c o r a l s and remains of reef-frame builders.
The whole i s embedded in a matrix of faintly marly limestone.
The stratified limestone directly underlying this reef is very rich in small, red-
coloured remains of crinoids, which give the rock as a whole a red-mottled appearance.
In the reef limestone itself crinoid fragments are l e s s numerous, but of greater meas-
urements, with stem fragments of up t o 2 c m in diameter and 5 cm long.
Also on top of the reef some strongly recrystallized crinoid limestone occurs,
in lumpy l a y e r s of 1-3 c m thick. In addition to the many crinoid-stem fragments, which
often f a l l apart into c r y s t a l s of calcite, some corals and brachiopods a r e found.
Some tens of m e t r e s northwest of the ‘Almar reef described above, another reef
of the s a m e type, but slightly l a r g e r , is exposed (Fig.116). No stratified limestone is
seen actually overlying and underlying the reef. However, both northeast and southwest
of the reef, stratified sediments incline t o disappear under the reef. The greyish white
reef limestone reaches a thickness of about 6 m. Locally, especially at the top, it is
red-mottled by crinoid fragments. Together with the vague stratification, which locally
begins t o occur higher in this reef,this may be an indication that the reef has not been
much thicker than is now exposed. The reef limestone i s very strongly recrystallized,
both the fossils and the matrix, which is a r a t h e r pure limestone; tC= weathering is
crumbling and breccia-like. Crystals of calcite, generally small, are common. Among
the reef builders some stromatoporoids are also found, a few of which a r e rather large;
Fig.116. Reef of Fanterna type, exposed some tens of metres northwest of

Xlmar. Stora Karlsa.
Fig.11'7. Vinglu, Stora Karls6, seen from the south. Reef of Fanterna type,
exposed just above the boundary between Lerberg Marlstone and Spangande
Limestone. A t the right-hand margin of this photograph, a second reef is
found.
REEF LIMESTONES O F STORA KARLSb 257
Fig.118. Rauk gate, named Hesselby LPde, Stora KarlsB. The gate has been
excavated by the Ancylus lake; the height of its opening is about 9 m.
the largest one observed was a "tower" of about 50 cm high and at its base 20 cm in
diameter, built up of very strongly convex latilaminae.
At Vinglu, a small reef is exposed with stratified sediments sagging under it

(Fig.117). The lowest part of these enveloping sediments belongs to the Lerberg Marl-
stone, the higher parts to the Spang'hde Limestone, Near to the reef, crinoid lime-
stone is found, rich in thick and long crinoid-stem fragments. The reef limestone is
of about the same nature as that at Svarthkllar. A few, thin stromatoporoids were ob-
served in it.
A short distance southeast of this reef, another similar reef is located. It is
separated from the stratified sediments by a breccia, 2-1 m thick, which was formed
from the stratified rocks. Thus, in all likelihood, the reef has slipped down from an
originally higher position. The reef is now found close to the boundary between Lerberg
Marlstone and Spang'hde Limestone. It is, therefore, more likely that it developed
synchronously with the Spang-hde Limestone than with the Austerberg Limestone.
It appears from the discussion of both the larger and the smaller reefs
258 STRATIGRAPHY AND REEFS O F KARLSOARNA
of Stora KarlsB that although stromatoporoids a r e present in most of them,

and in some parts of them may even be dominant, they generally play a sub-
ordinate part. Actually, only in the higher parts of the StPurnasar reef type,
a r e they generally the main reef builders. It is, therefore, difficult to under-
stand Hadding (1941, p.30), when he writes: “the reefs on Stora KarlsB a r e
built up essentially in the same manner as other Gotland reefs of correspond-
ing type. The stromatoporoids form the bulk of the reef-building organisms.
Their form is as a rule tabular. The reef structure is similar to that found
in other places where stromatoporoids of this type dominate! In reality there
a r e quite distinct differences with the reefs of Gotland, a s pointed out in the
previous pages, and the present author considers it justified t o classify the
reefs of Stora KarlsB in two special types.
REEF LIMESTONES OF LILLA KARLSO
Also for Lilla Karlsb it is assumed that the nucleus of the island con-
s i s t s of reef limestone of relatively great thickness. Compared to this
central reef m a s s the other reefs in the island are smaller. Remains of reefs
of rather large extension a r e found in NorderslPtt and Suderslltt, but it is
very unlikely that they had a thickness comparable t o the Central Lilla KarlsB
reef. Because the reef limestone is generally more resistant to weathering
and erosion than the overlying and surrounding stratified sediments, frag-
ments of the reefs may still be preserved when the other sediments have
Fig.119. Raukar southwest of Smijjge, Lilla Karlsa. Remnants of the

Norderslatt reef.
R E E F LIMESTONES O F LILLA KARLSO 259
already been removed. This applies especially to the Norderslgtt reef, of
which only a great number of erosional remnants (raukar, stone giants) a r e
still present, especially along the shore between Norder Vagnhus and Janedi
(Fig.119). Also almost all of the reef limestone of the SuderslPtt reef has
already been eroded.
The centres of the three major reefs of Lilla Karls6 form the angular
points of a triangle. The plan of the Central Lilla Karlsi) reef is about c i r -
cular. This suggests that the three reefs probably formed too f a r offshore
to bear any special relationship to a shore line.
In the steep cliffs of Lilla Karls6 small reefs crop out, which must have
developed on the flank deposits of the Central Lilla Karlsi) reef. In some
p a r t s of the island, such as between Suder and Norder Vagnhus, the flank
reefs a r e exposed in sections crossing the reefs in various directions. A good
idea of the characteristics of the flank reefs can be obtained by combining
the data from these various outcrops.
Central Lilla Karlso reef limestone
About the same arguments as were used to show the existence of the
Marmorberg reef in Stora Karls6 can be advanced for the assumption that
in the centre of Lilla Karlsi) a comparatively large reef is present. This
Central reef, however, is only scarcely exposed. It is not impossible that
some small outcrops a r e to be found on the plateau of the island, but they a r e
very indistinct anddonotpermit any statement about the type of reef to which
they belong. Corals, bryozoans and stromatoporoids were presumably the
chief reef builders. The reef limestone on the plateau is surrounded by a
grey to white-grey, locally red-brown crinoid limestone. The surface of the
plateau shows a slight accidentation.
Already in the Pentamerus gotlundicus Limestone, indications a r e found
which suggest that the Central Lilla KarlsB reef was growing strongly. These
indications include local small dips, the occurrence of fossil remains which
may be reef debris and the presence of an abundance of crinoids. The dips
in the Lilla Karlsi) Limestone a r e , a s a rule, much steeper than those in the
Pentamerus gotlandicus Limestone. This greater dip might have been caused
partly by settling of these deposits, but partly by deposition at a l e s s e r dis-
tance from a higher reef (Fig.120). It is difficult to establish when growth
of the Central reef came to an end. If indeed the small exposures on top of
the island belong to this reef, it may have continued growing during almost
the entire time in which sedimentation of the stratified Lilla Karlsi) Lime-
stone took place.
The sediments surrounding the Central reef show a reef-detrital char-
acter. They contain bryozoan fragments, corals and stromatoporoids,
brachiopods, trilobites and other fossils. Remains of crinoids are the dom-
inant constituents of the rocks. Many corals and also several stromato-
poroids appear to have been tumbled over and redeposited. Together with
most of the bryozoan colonies from which the fragments a r e found, they
presumably once belonged to the reef community. Only a small percentage
of corals and stromatoporoids is definitely found in their positions of growth.
Yet the percentage of reef builders in the sediments surrounding the Central
reef is rather insignificant; the remains of bryozoans, corals and stromato-
poroids usually make up l e s s than 5% of the total rock volume.
Fig.120. Lilla Karl& Limestone, dipping away from the centre of the island,
a s a result of its being the mantling deposit of the large Central Lilla Karlsb
reef. Photograph taken from the south of the plateau of Lilla Karlso. In the
background, the plateau of Stora Karls8, inclining southward.
The detrital limestones almost everywhere dip away from the centre
of the island. In all likelihood they were mainly correlative with the growing
reef, as is the case with many present-day reefs. The original topography
of the reef sides and the direct environment of the reef became gradually
buried and to a certain degree levelled off by the debris accumulation.
Locally on this mantling deposit, reef-forming animals seem to have been
able to establish themselves, in some of the cases giving r i s e to smaller
reef bodies. Hard skeletal remains probably served as objects for attach-
ment of the pioneer populations. In these detrital limestones several individ-
ual coral colonies, especially Favosites, were also observed to be attached
t o older colonies, to solitary corals o r even to fragments of crinoid stems.
During the formation of these smaller flank reefs, the mantle deposit
of the Central reef presumably was rather unconsolidated, a s can be seen
from the position of the upper of the two reefs shown in Fig.126 and 127. On
the other hand, the well-developed bedding planes show that the deposit was
not very pappy and there were enough hard remains to serve a s a substratum.
Under such conditions an unstable bottom was evidently not a hindrance to
luxurious reef growth, as the number of flank reefs and the sizes of the in-
dividual reefs indicate.
REEF LIMESTONES OF LILLA KARLSO 26 1
Nordersliitt reef limestone
The raukar field in the northwest of Lilla Karls6 is presumably the

remnant of a large reef, comparable in its original extension to the Central
Lilla KarlsB reef. In the centre, reef limestone occurs down to below present
s e a level. Southwest of the raukar field, stratified sediments a r e exposed up
to 5-6 m above sea level. These sediments were presumably deposited close
t o the reef and have also been overlaid by reef limestone. The stratified sed-
iments show an alternation of layers of marlstone with layers of harder mar-
ly limestone. The latter increase upwards in thickness and number and
gradually pass into crinoid limestone which occurs in layers of generally
2-15 cm thick, separated by thin layers or films of marl. Apparently the reef
produced little debris, for these stratified sediments rather close to the reef
usually contain only a relatively small amount of such debris. This may sug-
gest development in rather calm water.
In the north the reef limestone of the last raukar shows a tendency to
stratification. It was probably formed close to the lateral boundary between
reef and surrounding sediments. The southeast boundary df the Nordersl'btt
reef may be sought at over 0.4 km further southwest. This distance is a
peripheral section through the reef and its diameter at the time of maximum
expansion may, therefore, be supposed to have measured 0.5 km or more.
In a northwest - southeast direction, reef limestone i s exposed over a dis-
tance of up to 0.15 km. A l l the reef limestone farther off the coast has been
demolished by the destructive action of the present Baltic Sea.
In the northeast the highest raukar reach about 10 m above present sea
level; in the southwest of the Nordersl'btt reef, the reef limestone occurs up
to about 1 7 m high. In this area, in the top of the rauk-like formations, local
interruptions in reef growth a r e represented by rather horizontal planes
which sometimes give the reef limestone a thick to very thick stratified ap-
pearance.
Since the reef limestone at present thus reaches from below sea level
at one place t o about 17 m above sea level elsewhere, the thickness of the
reef in its centre has presumably been more than 20 m.
The reef limestone consists substantially of coral colonies. Massive
colonies a r e about five times a s abundant as branched colonies. However,
because the latter a r e often much larger (often more than 0.5 m in diameter
and thickness) they a r e more conspicuous. Some colonies of Acervularia
ananas showed a diameter of about 1.5 m. Also many bryozoan colonies a r e
present, often intact and of large diameter. Some reached a great thickness,
others remained thin; thus an almost massive colony of Ptilodictya lanceolata
was seen with a diameter of about 1.40 m , but a thickness of not more than
12 cm; the branches grew s o closely next to each other that hardly any space
was left for the reef matrix,
The matrix in the reef is practically alike in all exposures and consists
of a fine-grained or dense limestone which is only faintly marly. In this
matrix fragments of bryozoan branches a r e abundant. The relative pureness
of the matrix is notable, since m a r l is a common component of the Pentamerus
gotlandicus Limestone. The fossils a r e strongly recrystallized; this often
deleted the finer structural features and thus makes a study of the fossils
more difficult.
The many large and intact colonies of the delicate bryozoans and
branched corals suggest that the NorderslPtt reef has not been subjected to
262 STRATIGRAPHY AND R E E F S OF KARLSOARNA
much disturbance by contemporary wave action o r currents. In modern reefs

(e.g., the Great B a r r i e r reef, Maxwell, 1968) there is often an inverse rela-
tionship between the abundance of branched bryozoans and the strength of
water movement. Out of 240 coral colonies in the Norderslatt reef, 76% were
found to be in their growth orientation, about 12% were distinctly not in their
growth orientation and the remaining 12 % were presumably tilted during com-
paction under the influence of differences in pressure caused by the over-
burden. Thus it seems likely that the position of not less than 88% of the coral
colonies was not seriously affected by water movement. A s will be further
discussed in Chapter XII, this is an indication of formation in relatively deep
water, The great scarcity, and in part of the exposures even complete ab-
sence of stromatoporoids may further support this conclusion. In summary,
it may be said that the composition of the Norderslltt reef limestone is in-
dicative of reef development in rather calm, clear and not very shallow water.
Sudersliitt reef limestone
South and southeast of Stalen, exposures of solid rock a r e found at

about present sea level, both along the shore and in the sea, up to about 75 m
offshore. In the foot of these exposures, thin-bedded limestone is found,
containing crinoid remains. Between the limestone layers thin layers of marl-
stone a r e present. At the surface of sections through this deposit the marl-
stone layers have been excavated by erosion for some depth. This deposit is
overlaid by a thin complex (up to 0.5 m ) of true crinoid limestone with reef
debris; this rock i s hardly stratified. On top of this crinoid limestone, re-
mains of the lowermost part of a reef a r e found.
The preserved fragments of this Suderslatt reef consist mainly of coral
colonies, with a contribution by branched bryozoan colonies. Among the coral
colonies, branched forms a r e most conspicuous because of their large sizes
of up to 1 m in diameter and thickness; massive forms a r e more abundant
but generally smaller. The underlying stratified sediments show dips in
varying directions, with the result that in one place stratified limestone is
found at present sea level, in another vaguely stratified crinoid limestone,
and in a third reef limestone; all within a short distance of each other. The
three rock types together can be found over a length of about 0.3 km along
the shore. West of Stalen, the reef limestone is exposed offshore to a height
of just over 3 m above sea level. West-southwest of StaIen in the coastal a r e a
a few raukar-like exposures of reef limestone a r e also found. The rock of
these exposures has perhaps also formed part of the Suderslatt reef. Slightly
west of Myren, five raukar-like exposures present reef limestone up to 5 m
above s e a level; this almost certainly belonged to this major reef.
The great distance over which traces of the Suderslittt reef can still be
followed i n a northwest - southeast direction makes it clear that this reef
must have had a relatively great horizontal extension. Nothing can be said
about i t s original thickness, except that it must have been more than 5 m.
Almost all of the reef has been destroyed by erosion. The present beach
around i t s remaining fragments is a typical rubble beach as is also found in
the raukar fields of Gotland proper.
R E E F LIMESTONES OF LILLA KARLSO 263
Flank reefs
It has already been mentioned that the alternation of marlstone and lime-
stone, which forms the lower part of the exposed stratified sediments of Lilla
KarlsB, shows a gradual increase upwards in the thickness of the limestone
layers and a corresponding decrease in those of the marlstone. Debris from
the Central reef may have contributed to this increase in limestone deposi-
tion in the reef environment. The presence of well-defined stratification
planes indicates that these reef-surrounding sediments were not very pappy.
The same can be said of other similar deposits in the a r e a of Gotland. How-
ever, in general contrast to these, on the mantle of stratified material around
the Central Lilla Karlsb reef, reef builders settled in several places, giving
r i s e t o smaller reefs. With continuing growth of the Central reef the amounts
of debris produced by it became greater and consequently the slope of the
surrounding deposit increased. This increased slope is reflected in the shape
of the younger flank reefs, which reached their greatest thickness at their
seaward side, whereas towards the side closest to the Central reef a gradual
thinning can be observed (Fig.124). At this inner side the flank reef some-
times interfingers with the stratified sediments. Further within the reef local
lenses o r layers of stratified sediment a r e only rarely found, indicating that
once such a flank reef was growing well, it was not easily overwhelmed by
mud and by the debris of the major reef. The lower and upper boundaries of
the flank reefs a r e generally sharp, whereas the lateral boundaries a r e some-
times sharp and in other cases rather vague.
The length and width of the flank reefs generally do not surpass 25 m
and many a r e smaller. Along the east coast between Bodarna and Janedi
proportionally large reefs occur. Access to them is difficult and they a r e
most easily visible from a boat on sea. The stratified sediments neigh-
bouring them show dips in varying directions (Fig.121). Relatively large flank
reefs also crop out between Stalen and Suder Vagnhus in the southern half of
the west cliff.
Weathered surfaces of the flank reefs a r e usually massive in structure,
in several instances irregularly crumbling. The unstratified masses general-
ly contrast strongly with the surrounding stratified sediments.
The flank reefs which occur lowest in the stratigraphical column a r e
faunistically characterized by a great profusion of corals, especially tabulate
corals, and bryozoans. Stromatoporoids a r e rather rare and small. Higher
up in the succession of deposits they a r e more common, but never did they
contribute to reef formation to such an extent as they did in the reefs of
Hoburgen type in Gotland. The occurrence of several intact colonies of
branched bryozoans and corals in the oldest flank reefs, especially in the
west, indicates that these reefs did not suffer very much damage by wave
action o r currents. In the higher reefs, a notable part of the branched reef
builders is replaced by massive forms. Studies of recent corals (e.g.,
Vaughan and Wells, 1943) have shown that branching forms retreat in favour
of massive forms when the water becomes rougher. While not all ecological
data for recent organisms can positively be applied to related extinct taxa,
it is likely that the reactions to rough water would be similar even in un-
related groups of similar forms. Thus the faunal composition of the flank
reefs suggests that in the course of time the water became shallower. This
deduction is further supported by the fact that the higher reefs a r e more dis-
orderly in appearance.
Fig.121. Cliff wall north of Bodarna, Lilla KarlsB, with flank reefs exposed
between the stratified limestone.
Fig.122. Sketch of the cliff near Bodarna, Lilla Karlso, showing outcrops of
six flank reefs, of which the lowest one is the l argest .
Fig.123. Coastal cliff of Lilla Karlsb near Bodarna. Compare Fig.122.
Weathering results in that some bryozoan-rich parts, especially in the

reefs in the west, show a structure reminiscent of industrial slag.
A s can be seen directly on arrival in Lilla KarlsB at Bodarna the
younger flank reefs a r e generally smaller than the older ones (Fig.122).
Compared with the flank reefs elsewhere in Lilla Karlsil, the reefs in
the southern cliff a r e usually smaller; they a r e also l e s s abundant than in the
east and west. In the southwest the reefs get larger. A short distance east of
Kuren a comparatively large one occurs, some tens of metres broad and
about 8 m high. Southeast of the rauk Stalen the reef of Fig.128 is found.
Stalen itself is also mainly built up of reef limestone; only at the very top is
some stratified limestone present. Between Stalen and Suder Vagnhus the
cliff shows mainly reef limestone. The flank reefs there a r e on the average
distinctly larger than those at the southeast and south side of the Central
Lilla Karlsb reef. This applies to both the older and the younger flank reefs.
Between Suder and Norder Vagnhus outcrops of stratified sediments and flank
reefs alternate, both in a horizontal and vertical direction. In the cliff wall
from Norder Vagnhus to slightly west of Janedi only stratified limestones a r e
exposed. Along the east coast, between Janedi and Bodarna, relatively large
reefs crop out, especially lower in the wall. These latter reef-limestone oc-
currences do not form part of the Central Lilla Karlsb reef, a s Rutten (1958,
p.381) supposed, but belong to flank reefs, surrounded by stratified sedi-
ments, as can be seen in indentations in the cliff wall.
The stratified sediments that a r e found between Norder Vagnhus and
Janedi a r e sparry, grey to light-brownish coloured limestones, very rich in
fossils, especially bryozoans, corals, stromatoporoids and brachiopods. P a r t
of these almost certainly came from the Central reef. Perhaps the narrow
passage between the Central Lilla Karlsb reef and the NorderslPtt reef made
the environment l e s s suitable for the development of flank reefs. The passage
between the Central and the SuderslPtt reef was not s o narrow, and there
some reefs developed on the flanks of the Central reef, but they a r e more
disorderly than the flank reefs which a r e found elsewhere in Lilla Karlsll.
266 STRATIGRAPHY AND REEFS OF KARLS~ARNA
It is notable that the largest flank reefs a r e found in the east and west,
at the latter side especially in the a r e a about 350 m north of the SuderslPtt
reef, whereas the reefs in the south and southeast a r e smaller and l e s s in
number. It may be that a s a result of the water becoming more shallow, a
relationship to a shore line began gradually to make itself felt and that water
movement a t the seaward (southern) side increasingly worked against settle-
ment of reef builders. In this way the occurrence of the highest number of
reefs, their larger size and the large branched colonies in the oldest of these,
a s found in the southern half of the western side, can be explained from
development a t the calm-water side of the Suderslatt reef.
Several of the flank reefs, especially in the west, overlie Pentamerus
gotlundicus breccia and seem to have slipped down on the dipping mantle of
the Central Lilla Karlsb reef. This phenomenon will be further discussed
later in this chapter (pp.273-275).
In the following pages a few outcrops of flank reefs will be discussed in more
detail.
Fig.122 and 123 a r e asketch and a photograph of the r e e f s which crop out near
Bodarna. Reef A is exposed lowest in the wall. It i s built up by bryozoans and corals,
embedded in a matrix which is generally rather pure but locally faintly marly. The
reef shows some vague stratification, is strongly recrystallized and weathered s u r -
faces crumble irregularly.
At a level directly above that of reef A, several smaller reefs a r e found. Of
these the one overlying reef A, reef 2, is the most important. At i t s right side,
stratified limestone is found, very rich in reef debris, and dipping north-northeast.
Close t o the reef, the layers show a kind of kink; the transition from reef t o debris-
r i c h stratified sediment is very gradual there. In contrast to this, the boundary at the
left side is very sharp; there the stratified limestone dips south-southwest. Between
r e e f s 1 and 2 a depression is found, containing stratified limestone rich in reef debris.
Below the depression both reefs touch each other. Reefs 3 , 4 and 5 are smaller than
the other two. The south-southwest boundary of reef 4 with the stratified deposits is
a ls o r a t h e r sharp. Almost everywhere in the environment of these r e e f s too, the
stratified sediments are rich in reef debris; they are somewhat marly. The bedding
planes are generally irregular and rugged and often covered by a film of marl. Behind
reef A, between A and 1, a very disorderly m a s s of extremely marly limestone is
found, exceedingly rich in crinoid remains and with a varying amount of reef debris,
including an occasional stromatoporoid. Reef 1 has a more marly matrix than reef A.
This also holds f o r the other higher-exposed reefs. These reefs.contain a number of
stromatoporoids, of small size but not r a r e l y of r a t h e r round shape. Weathered sur-
faces generally a r e irregularly crumbling, sometimes rather smoothly massive.
The stratified limestone exposed near Bronsalderrose, northeast of Myren, is

light brown, s p a r r y , contains some reef debris, shows m a r l films on i t s bedding planes
and dips south. Intercalated in this sediment is the flank reef of Fig.124 and 125, and
i t s surrounding crinoid limestone. The most common reef builders are compound
corals (Halysites, Favosites, and others); bryozoans a r e numerous but usually l e s s
conspicuous. Some stromatoporoids a r e also present, generally tabular forms of
r a t h e r great extension and up to a few centimetres thick. Often these thin stromato-
poroids a r e secondarily broken. Some stromatoporoids a r e lens-shaped. The reef
matrix is marly and constitutes a high portion of the total reef volume. Embedded in
the matrix a r e several crinoid stem fragments. The reef as a whole is of a rather dis-
orderly appearance. It i s highly recrystallized, but because of the marly matrix, not
homogenously so; c r y s t a l s of calcite, up to a few centimetres large, a r e not r a r e . The
weathered surface of the reef is more brecciated than it is conglomeratic. Locally the
reef shows a vague stratification; the nature of these planes suggests that this
R E E F LIMESTONES O F LILLA KARLSO 267
Fig.124. Sketch of a flank reef, exposed in the southern cliff of Lilla Karlsb
n e a r Brons&lderrose.
Fig.125. Flank reef, exposed in the southern cliff of Lilla KarlsB near
Brons%lderrose. Compare the sketch in Fig.124.
NW SE
I".^."d reef limestone

E
M
not exposed
q 1 , * 3 + p
metres L".l reef debris
-Fig.126. Lilla Karlsii, southern cliff about 0.1 km west of Bronszlderrose. Two flank reefs a r e sketched. Note
how settling of the stratified sediments caused a subsidence of the lateral parts of the top reef.
R E E F LIMESTONES OF LILLA KARLSO 26 9
Fig.127. Photograph of the two reefs sketched in Fig.126. Lilla Karl&, about
0.1 km west of Brons%lderrose.
originated due to lateral compression during an attempt to slip down. Also the dip in
the stratified limestones at the top at the south side may be intensified by this. The
reef at this south side wedges out between crinoid limestone. The stratified limestone
at the north side inclines down under the reef; it is rather rich in Halysites colonies
and solitary corals.
The crinoid limestone in the environs of this flank reef is thin bedded with marl
films on the bedding planes. The latter a r e generally rugged. The rock is bluish grey,
grey to brownish grey in colour. Through weathering it usually first becomes brownish,
later turning more greyish. The sediment is very fossiliferous, containing some
trilobites, brachiopods (Howellella elegans, Camarotoechia borealis, Dicaelosia
biloba, Rhynchotreta cuneata, Ptychopleurelkz bouchardi, Chonetus striatellus,
and others) ,. some gastropods, stromatoporoids, Fenestella sp. and other bryozoans,
an enormous amount of crinoid fragments including some bases of crinoid calyces, and
solitary corals. The crinoid remains a r e partly red, partly grey-white in colour.
Typical for this deposit a r e colonies of Favosites sp., attached to older colonies of
the same coral (both may o r may not be in their growth position), to solitary corals,
and even to crinoid remains. On the coral colonies Fenestelkz sp. has also often
settled.
About 0.1 km west of Bronsaderrose, two reefs occur above each other (Fig.126,
127). The lower of these shows a vague stratification. It is built of a light-greyish reef
limestone with bryozoans, corals and a few stromatoporoids. In between both reefs
there is a very marly and fossiliferous rock, o r an alternation of limy and thin marly
layers, both with irregular bedding planes, especially at the northwestern side. The
upper reef has a somewhat more marly matrix and the weathered surface is more
crumbling. Corals (Favosites, Halysites, and others) and bryozoans are the main
reef builders. There are some more stromatoporoids than in the lower reef, but they
still play a subordinate part. In the upper reef is a rather large intercalation of debris
in a strongly marly matrix; fossils and fossil fragments occur in all possible orienta-
tions.
In the northwest the upper reef a s it were comes down from the lower one. It
apparently started growth on a rigid foundation that hardly changed volume under the
weight placed upon it. Through lateral spreading it came to rest on a soft limestone
bottom. The weight of the reef caused a compaction of that sediment and with it the
reef sank down. The stratified limestone is thin bedded with marl films on the rugged
bedding planes.
The large block of reef limestone at the foot of the cliff about 0.15 km southeast
of Stalen probably is not in its original position.
Near the rauk Stalen, Lilla Karlso-from the beach inland-shows the following
picture: a low cliff, then a gradually mounting topography with some raukar, the main
cliff of the island, and finally its upper plateau. In the main cliff directly southeast of
Stalen, the reef of Fig.128 is exposed.
The reef limestone is rather uniform, light grey in colour, a little marly, as a
whole recrystallized, finely crystalline, with a flaky or splintery weathering surface.
NW SE
I =reef limestone stratified limestone not exposed

I
Fig.128. Sketch of a flank reef and i t s overlying deposits, as exposed south-
east of Stalen, Lilla Karlsa.
REEF LIMESTONES OF LILLA KARLSO 271
Fig.129. Cliff wall south ,of Suder Vagnhus, Lilla Karlsb. Stratified Lilla
K a r l s o Limestone a n d two outcrops of flank reefs.
The fauna consists of c o r a l s , bryozoans, an occasional stromatoporoid, some brachio-

pods and cephalopods and crinoid remains. Locally there is a pocket of a somewhat
m o r e marly sediment.
The reef is overlaid by stratified limestone rich in reef debris. Some layers a r e
rather strongly marly. The bedding planes a r e often rugged. Fossils include large
c o r a l colonies (Acervuhrza a m n a s , and others), some stromatoporoids and many
brachiopods. P a r t of the stromatoporoids a r e tabular f o r m s of generally less than
2.5 cm thick, but often some tens of centimetres in horizuntal extension; most of these
a r e found in their position of growth. Another p a r t of the stromatoporoids is flatly
lens-shaped; these colonies generally lie oblique. The layers of this debris-containing
deposit dip about 5O towards the centre of the island. Together with the crinoid lime-
stone overlying this deposit this is an indication that probably not the central reef but
the flank reef itself has supplied most of the debris.
Stratified limestones dipping up against a flank reef can also be seen in the cave
Suder Vagnhus. The transition to the crinoid limestone, also very fossiliferous, i s
gradual. In the northwest (top left in Fig.128) a rather massively-built part is included
in this deposit.
The reef limestone of the rauk Stalen itself occurs at the same level as the reef
limestone described above and i s of the same general nature.
In the main cliff south of Suder Vagnhus, a reef crops out which i s shown in
Fig.129. It consists of dense, light-grey reef limestone with bryozoans, corals
(Fuvosites, and others), and some trilobites and orthoceratids, in a slightly marly
matrix. At the south side of this reef the boundary with the stratified limestone is not
very sharp. This stratified rock is a light-grey, grey to greyish-brown limestone with
a little m a r l on its bedding planes. This limestone contains crinoid-stem fragments
and some stromatoporoids, a few of which show rather round forms. Higher up the
sediment becomes more sparry and contains comparatively more stromatoporoids.
At the bottom the layers dip towards the reef after having arched over a small reef
at the south side of the larger flank reef. This small reef contains corals, most of
which are small and partly also rather thin, and also bryozoans, crinoids, brachiopods
and an occasional stromatoporoid. At the north side of the larger reef, the stratifica-
tion of the adjacent rock is in part difficult to perceive, especially at close quarters.
This sediment is a brownish, marly limestone, sparry, with many corals (Favosites,
Halysites, ffeliolites,and others). On top of the reef is crinoid limestone.
DISCUSSION
Correlation between Stora and Lilla KarlsB
The Lerberg Marlstone, exposed in the west, northeast and east of Stora
Karlst) has no exposed equivalent in Lilla Karlsi3.
The SpangPnde Limestone of Stora Karlsb is characterized, especially
in i t s lower part, by the brachiopod Pentamerus gotlandicus. This fossil gives
i t s name to the Pentamerus gotlandicus Limestone of Lilla Karlsb. These two
deposits may, therefore, be correlated.
It is not certain whether the boundary between SpangPnde and Austerberg
Limestone and between the Pentamerus gotlandicus and Lilla KarlsSl Lime-
stone correlate; probably the latter is older than the Stora Karlsb boundary.
The Lilla Karlsb Limestone then, correlates with the uppermost
SpangPnde Limestone and the Austerberg Limestone. However, the greater
height of Lilla Karlsi3 makes it likely that the upper part of the Lilla Karlsb
Limestone is younger than any of the Stora Karlsb deposits.
A tentative sketched correlation is presented in Table X V .
Environment of formation of the various sediments
The sequence of Lerberg Marlstone and SpangPnde Limestone in Stora

KarlsO probably represents a period of slowly decreasing water depth. In the
shallower water, wave action a t the bottom was stronger and, therefore,
terrigenous clastic material had more difficulty in settling and was kept
floating to a higher degree. This, together with an increasing production of
limestone debris from the developing reefs, ledto ashift from marlstone
deposition to formation of marly limestone. The faunistic succession in the
Western reef limestones, especially the SpangPnde reef, also suggests a
change in environment during the time of growth, most likely a shallowing
of the water. The remains of the NorderslPtt and SuderslPtt reefs contain
several large and intact colonies of branched reef builders, suggesting slight
disturbance by wave action. A significantly high percentage of reef builders
in these latter two reefs a r e found in their growth orientations; this is in-
dicative of relatively deep water (cf. Chapter XII, p.437). The higher parts
of the major reefs in Stora Karlsa a r e closer in appearance to the Hoburgen-
type reefs of Gotland, thus pointing to shallower water.
Because of a combination of the shallowing of the water and the upward
growth of the reefs, their tops approached the water surface. This did not
take place at precisely the same time for the Western and Rbjsuhajd reefs
DISCUSSION 273
of Stora Karlsb and the NorderslPtt and Sudersliitt reefs of Lilla KarlsG, but
the time intervals were probably not very long. It is possible that the de-
c r e a s e in water depth was temporarily stronger.
Of the major reefs of Karlsbarna only the Central Lilla Karlsb reef
seems t o have survived the shallow-water stage suggested above. Unfortu-
nately there a r e no exposures in this reef which can be studied for indica-
tions of its subsequent stages of development. The fact that it could continue
growing suggests that the very-shallow-water period must have been of only
short duration. The strong development of the Svarthtillar reefs which took
place mainly thereafter indicates that the water soon became rather deep
again, for in their composition the SvarthXllar reefs a r e much more com-
parable to the Norderslstt and SuderslPtt reefs of Lilla Karlsb than to the
common Hoburgen-type reefs of Gotland.
Downward-slipping phenomena
The occurrence of the Pentamerus gotlundicus breccia in Lilla Karlsa
underneath reefs suggests a relationship between the two, such that the
breccia was formed when reefs slipped downwards over the stratified sedi-
ments, consisting of an alternation of marlstone and marly limestone layers.
Also the bucklings found in the Pentamerus gotlandicus Limestone, caused
by lateral compression, could well be caused by such a moving flank reef.
The breccia and the upward dipping sediments which a r e found against
the reef north of Suder Vagnhus suggest that blocks of stratified sediments
have also probably moved down over a marly surface in the sedimentary se-
quence dipping down from the Central reef.
Close to Suder Vagnhus another reef has apparently come down together
with about 1.5 m of its underlying stratified sediments. Underneath this com-
bined mass, Pentamerus gotlundicus breccia is found, thinning out seawards
between it and the stratified sediments exposed at the base. The latter a r e
assumed to still be in their original place. The displaced stratified rocks
show a distinctly greater dip in seaward direction than the basal sediments.
The question now is whether these downward slippings occurred during
the Silurian o r later,
Slightly southwest of TrPdg%rden, in Lilla Karlsa, there is a displaced
reef-limestone mass, overlying Pentamems gotlandicus Limestone., which is
exposed to a thickness of 4 m. Of these, the lower 3.5 m a r e normally strat-
ified, but the upper about 0.5 m is strongly brecciated. The reef limestone
has apparently come down from a higher and more central position in the
island. The high cliff facing the displaced reef limestone shows a distinct
indentation. This is strongly indicative of a relatively recent displacement
of the reef limestone.
Another argument for this is provided by the large reef exposed at
TrXdggrden. A short distance north-northeast of TrPdg%rdenthe reef lime-
stone has i t s base about 6 m above present s e a level. A vague stratification
can be observed, which is approximately horizontal. In a huge block, north-
east of Trtidgarden (D in Fig. 130B), this vague stratification dips distinctly
seawards. The reef limestone together with an amount of stratified sediment
annexed t o it discordantly overlies the normal alternation of Pentamerus
gotlundicus marlstone and marly-limestone layers. In between the block and
its underlying sediments a breccia has developed. In the south the lower
2 74 STRATIGRAPHY AND REEFS OF KARLS~ARNA
x
Reef
limestone fl
/ l i n e of fault
Fig.130. Sketch illustrating the origin of Triidghden, in the west of Lilla
Karlsb. The heavy reef limestone at the top of the sedimentary complex
caused the wall to sag laterally. S t r e s s made the reef limestone fault and tilt.
At a certain moment, the south of the detached reef limestone slipped down
and a catapult effect caused Trxdgarden to be displaced furthest from its
original position.
boundary of the reef limestone has disappeared below sea level. It seems
likely that TradgQrden itself, a large reef-limestone block, now forming a
small island just off the shore, was once connected with the large onshore
block. The two together were again connected with the reef limestone a s is
exposed in raukar at the landward side. These raukar mark with their west
sides an approximately straight line, which may be assumed to represent the
line of fault.
It can now be explained how the situation at Trldg%rdenhas developed
(Fig. 130). In the wall of Lilla Karlsb, heavy reef limestone overlaid stratified
limestone. The weight of the reef limestone caused lateral displacement of
the underlying sediments. The movements in the lower part of the wall
caused s t r e s s e s in the reef limestone and at a certain moment the reef-
limestone m a s s was faulted open, with the seaward part of the reef limestone
starting to tilt downwards. A t a certain stage gravity led to a d6collement of
the southern part of the block and a catapult effect caused the Trldghrden
block to become detached from block D and to be moved furthest away from
its original position. In the north of block D only the fault was opened further.
A similar phenomenon as explained above for west Lilla Karlsb can
still be seen in development on a smaller s c a l e a t Hoburgen, southern Gotland,
where a Large block of the plateau of Storburg is in the process of being
separated from the remaining top of the hillock along a widening fissure,
caused by a gradual lateral sagging of the underlying sediments.
In Stora and Lilla Karlso the dip in the sediments mantling the large
reefs and the occurrence of m a r l in the lower part of the sedimentary se-
quence have certainly facilitated a downward slipping of rock masses. The
heavy reef limestones of the flank reefs were especially prone to slip down,
DISCUSSION 275
but as has been said before, masses of stratified sediment could go that way
too. This explains the unconformity between K h p r u and Stiudden in Stora
KarlsiS (Fig.102). The breccia north of Kiiupru (Fig.101) may be caused by
either type of sediment moving down, but not improbably by stratified lime-
stones as a r e now found overlying it.
The example of Hoburgen teaches that downward slipping can still occur
today. The slippings in Stora and Lilla Karlsa may also be of a very recent
date. However, it can be imagined that especially suitable conditions for these
phenomena existed during and following the Pleistocene Ice Ages. Plucking
of the southwards moving land ice may have caused rock displacements.
Further a suitable situation for such phenomena occurred at the time of
melting of the ice of a glaciation. During an Ice Age, the high walls of the
island were enveloped and supported by the land ice, a s is demonstrated by
the presence of erratic blocks on top of the island. When the ice melted, the
walls lost their support, great amounts of water became available, the rocks
unfroze and became wet throughout and the soft marlstones at the base of the
sedimentary complex presented ideal lubrication layers.
Correlation with Gotland
Pentamerus gotlandicus Lebedev is in Gotland characteristic of the

Slite IV Beds. This suggests that the Spangiinde Limestone and Pentamerus
gotlandicus Limestone correlate with the Slite IV Beds and the Lerberg
Marlstone probably with the Slite In Beds.
Whereas in the east of northern Gotland, Slite limestone is found t o ex-
tend southwards over the Slite marlstone, in the west of central Gotland, be-
tween Djupvik Fiskltige, Frtljels FisklPge and VPte, the Slite marlstone is
overlaid by thick sandy limestone t o limy sandstone, of a maximum thickness
of 3 m. Moreover, the lowermost part of the Halla limestone in that area
contains rounded sandstone pebbles and ripple marks. This suggests that an
increasingly stronger shallowing of the water occurred at the time of their
formation when going westwards.
Stora Karlsl) Lilla KarlsB Gotland

Stratified Reef Stratified Reef
sediments limestones sediments limestones
v- _ _ -- -
- Beds
Lilla KarlsB Flank
Halla-
Limestone reefs
Austerberg reef Central Mulde
Limestone limestones
ROjsuhajd
Lilla
_ _ _ _ _ - - -- KarlsB
reef
--_--
Beds
Western reef Pentamerus NorderslPtt and limestone

SpangSLnde reef
limestone gothndicus SUderslatt reef Slite
Limestone limestones=
Limestone limestones Beds
This period of shallowing of the water may have been the same as the
one which probably contributed t o the end of the growth of almost all the
major reefs of Karlsoarna. This phenomenon should have taken place then in
Karlsoarna a t about the time of the transition from deposition of the Slite
Beds to formation of the Halla-Mulde Beds.
The shallowing of the water did not lead to a break in the deposition of
stratified sediments. The discordances which a r e mentioned from both
KarlsBarna by LindstrBm (1882a) and Hede (1925a,p.20) a r e only local phe-
nomena, identical with the phenomena which the present author described
above a s being due to the downward slipping of flank reefs.
A s will be pointed out in the discussion of the Halla-Mulde Beds in
Chapter XI, there a r e strong indications that during Halla-Mulde time, water
depth soon increased again in western Gotland, even though in northeastern
Gotland a decrease in water depth continued. This must have been caused by
a change in the direction of the hinge line of epeirogenetic movement of the
basin floor, which resulted in a relatively strong increase in water depth in
the a r e a of Karlsoarna.
The Central Lilla Karlsi) reef was probably not yet elevated high enough
above the sea floor to have its growth terminated by the Late Slite - Early
Halla-Mulde shallowing of the water and, therefore, managed to survive,
growing again more rapidly when the water became deeper again. The
SvarthPllar reefs benefited even more from the increasing water depth. Being
still small reefs a t the more unfavourable time, growingat the foot o r on the
flanks of large reefs, they thereafter developed into an extensive reef-lime-
stone complex. In their composition they bear witness to formation in rela-
tively deep water in the later period,
During Late Halla-Mulde time the water began to become shallow again.
This is evidenced by the sediments in Gotland and also by the characteristics
of the highest parts of the Lilla Karlso Limestone (more marl, more stroma-
toporoids, l e s s bryozoans).
The presence in the uppermost Lilla Karlso Limestone of such fossils
as Conchidium biloculare, Dolerorthis cf. rustica, Eospirifer cf. interlineatus
and Plectatrypa marginalis might suggest that these youngest sediments of
KarlsBarna correlate with the lowermost Klinteberg Beds (cf. Hede, 192713,
p.50).
277
Chapter XI
STRATIGRAPHY OF THE SILURIAN OF GOTLAND
INTRODUCTION
In the following pages, the stratigraphy of Gotland will be discussed.

The system of Hede (1921 and later), with some modifications proposed by
the present author, will be used. A short survey of the stratified sediments
of each unit will f i r s t be given. Thereafter, the more important exposures
of reef limestone and directly related sediments will be briefly described,
as far as this has not been done in earlier chapters. These reviews of reef
localities may be helpful to future students of the reefs of Gotland, in
preparing excursions o r research programmes. Concluding the treatment
of each stratigraphical unit will be a section discussing the environment of
deposition of the various sediments, the stratigraphical implications of the
study of the reefs and related deposits, and similar subjects.
F o r a correlation between the stratigraphical units distinguished by
Hede and those of earlier authors, the reader is referred to Table IV and,
for more detailed information, to Munthe et al. (1925).
VISBY BEDS
Stratified sediments
At the base of the exposed Silurian of Gotland, Hede distinguished two

units. Both consisting predominantly of marlstone, Hede called these two
units the Lower Visby Marlstone and the Upper Visby Marlstone. Bath a r e
relatively thin units, if compared to such units as the Hiigklint, Slite:
Klinteberg o r Hemse Beds. There is no distinct lithological boundary
between the two. A gradual decrease in the amount of m a r l upwards in the
profile can be noted, which, however, continues throughout the entire Upper
Visby Beds and even in the lowermost Hogklint Beds. Except particularly
some ostracodes, only a few fossils seem to be restricted to the Lower Visby
Beds, and still fewer a r e known to occur only in the Upper Visby Beds
(Table XVI). A greater number seems to be restricted to the two Visby units
together. In all these cases, it is likely that part of the fossils are facies,
rather than index fossils. F o r instance, on the basis of the literature,
Holophragma calceoloides (Lindstrom) should be a fossil from only the
Visby Beds, but the present author also found it in the Hemse marlstone.
The author prefers to consider the Lower and Upper Visby Beds
together as the Visby Beds with a lower and upper subunit. This is more in
agreement with the subdivision applied to some of the other stratigraphical
2 78 STRATIGRAPHY O F T H E SILURIAN O F GOTLAND
TABLE XVI
Fossils which in Gotland are found onlv in the VisbY Beds
1 1
Phylum, Species Lower Uppei
classis, or Vishy Visby
subclassis Beds Beds
Anthozoa Catenipora escharoides Lamark + +
Clisiophyllum (Dinophyllum) involutum Edwards et Haime- + +
Goniophyllum Pyramidale (Hisinger) + +
Lykophyllum tabulatum Wedekind - + +
Phaulactis angusta (Lonsdale) +
Pholidophyllum tabulaturn Schlotheim + +
Pla a l v e o l i t e s fougti (Edwards et Haime), + +
Thecia hisingeri (Jones) + +
Porpites (Palaeocyclus).porpita (Linnaeus) +
Bryozoa Ceramopora lindstrOmi Hisinger +
Crepipova lunnviato Hisinger +
Mesotrypa suprasilurzca Hisinger +
Brachiopoda Brachyprion walmstedti (Lindstrom) +
Eospirifer marklini De Verneuil +
ffesperorthis (Orthis) davidsoni @e Vemeuil) +
Liljevallia gotlandica Hedstrom +
Plectodonta (Sowerbyella) transversalis (Dalman) +
Resserella vzsbyensis (Lindstram) + +
Rhynchonella exigua Lindstrom + +
Stricklandia livata J. de C. Sowerby +
Gastropoda Callonema obesum Lindstr6m + +
Callonema scalariforme Lindstrom + +
Cyclonema delicatulum Lindstram t +
Cyclonema giganteum Lindstrom + +
Poleumita roemeri (Lindstrom) + +
Cephalopoda Phragmoceras convolutum Hecistram +
Phragmoceras costatum liedstram +
Trilobita Encrinurus laevis (Angelin) + +
Ostracoda Apatobolbina simplicidorsata Martinsson +
Aputobolbina tracuspidata Martinssm +
Barymetopon infantile Martinsson +
Beyrichia hirsuta Martinsson, +
Craspedobolbina juguligera Martinsson + t
Leperditia hisingeri Schmidt +
Leptabolbina hypnodes Martinsson +
Novibortia simbliciuscula Martinsson
units of Gotland. It should be emphasized, however, that this is purely a

formal procedure. The distinction made by Hede remains essentially
una, cred.
Lower Visby Beds
The Lower Visby Marlstone is the oldest Silurian sediment exposed in

Gotland. It is found along the northwest coast from Stavsklint (Tofta Parish)
in the south to Hallshuk in the north. Its maximal thickness above sea level
is about 10 m, but usually less. It generally f o r m s the lowermost part of the
cliffs which are found along this coast.
The rock consists of thin bedded, rather soft marlstone of bluish grey
colour, which alternates with harder marly limestone which is dense to
finely crystalline, light grey in colour, and which often contains crystals of
pyrite. This limestone occurs partly a s thin layers of restricted horizontal
extension and partly as knolls o r thin lenses. If occurring as knolls o r lenses,
these often also lie in special horizons. In such horizons the limestone knolls
o r lenses occur either closely together o r up to some decimetres apart.
Their thickness varies generally from 2 to 4 cm, but in exceptional cases
may reach 15 cm. The limestone layers are 1-4 cm thick, but with a majority
in the group of 1-2 cm thickness. The marl layers are 2-10 cm thick.
VISBY BEDS 279
The fossil content of the Upper Visby Beds is high, especially in corals
(many solitary corals, Halysites, heliolitids, favositids) and brachiopods.
Lamellibranchs, ostracodes (some Beyrichiidae and large Leperditia sp.),
trilobites, bryozoans, crinoids and stromatoporoids are rather scarcely
represented. The occurrence of the brachiopod Stricklandia lirata
(J. de C. Sowerby) is notable; it is not common in several horizons, but is
particularly abundant i n others. A thin layer very rich in this fossil also
approximately marks the boundary between the Lower and Upper Visby Beds
in several places.
Upper Visby Beds
The Upper Visby Marlstone can be followed along the northwest coast
from GnisvPrds Fisklage (Tofta Parish) in the south to again Hallshuk in the
north. It is generally found in the lower part of the coastal cliffs. Seen on a
large scale, the layers show a faintly wavy course, especially in the northern
part of their area. At least in part, this was caused by the differential com-
pression exerted by the overlying rocks. The thickness of the Upper Visby
Beds varies somewhat. It is on the average about 10 m, but may locally
reach up to 15 m. This variation in thickness may also be caused by the
overburden, more particularly the Hogklint Beds. The Upper Visby Beds a r e
often thinner underneath Hogklint reef limestone masses than under stratified
HGgklint sediments. Hadding (1956, p.3) stated: "There is reason to believe
that the marly mud originally had a comparatively even surface which was
Fig.131. Halysites biostrome with some Omphyma sp. Upper Visby Beds,
south side of Ihrevik.
280 STRATIGRAPHY OF THE SILURIAN O F GOTLAND
deformed later on. The compact reef bodies must have pressed the marly
mud downwards and outwards-upwards, a t the same time locally elevating
the limestone sediment deposited on the marl." Moreover, the fact that the
boundary with the Hogklint Beds is not very easy to determine and probably
is not always laid at exactly the same stratigraphical height, should also be
recognized. This problem will be discussed further when treating the
HOgklint Beds (pp.282, 311).
The Upper Visby Beds consist of thin layers of rather soft bluish grey
marlstone which alternate with harder marly limestone. The latter is dense
to finely crystalline and light grey in colour. Lithologically, therefore, there
is little difference between the Upper Visby Beds and the underlying Lower
Visby sediments. The limestone occurs partly a s small elongated knolls o r
thin lenses and partly as thin layers which thin out in the m a r l after varying
distances. The lenses and knolls are found particularly in the lower part of
the Upper Visby Beds. The number of limestone layers increases upwards,
as well as their thickness, which increases from about 2 cm to sometimes
15 cm at the top of the unit. Thicker than normal limestone layers a r e found
in the environment of several Upper Visby reefs. The bedding planes of the
limestone layers are often rugged. Together with the upward increase in
thickness of the limestone layers in the profile, the marlstone layers
decrease in thickness. In the marly limestone, pyrite is found locally in
isolated crystals o r in groups of crystals. The pyrite cubes a r e generally
of the order of a millimetre of less, but locally the crystals have edges of
more than half a centimetre.
In the higher parts of the Upper Visby Beds, small reefs also occur.
Over 140 of these have been observed in the mentioned coastal cliff. Details
about these reefs have been given in Chapter VI.
Except for the reefs, the Upper Visby Beds almost everywhere present
a similar overall lithological and palaeontological picture. The rocks a r e
more fossiliferous than those of the Lower Visby Beds. Bedding planes often
present r e a l "zoos" of fossils. Only very few fossils have been observed that
were embedded in their position of growth. This might indicate that sedimenta-
tion did not take place at a high rate. Neither in the marlstone, nor in the lime-
stone have tracks o r burrows been found. Corals (many solitary species,
favositids, Halysites heliolitids, and occasionally Syringopora sp.) and
)
brachiopods (many Dicaelosia sp., Leptaena spp.) Atrypa spp. Rhynchonellidae,

)
and occasionally aIso spiriferids) play an important part among the fossil
content, and bryozoans and crinoids are rather common. Stromatoporoids
(e.g. Stromatopora discoidea (Lonsdale)) a r e not particularly abundant, but
)
increase in number upwards in the profile. Trilobites and graptolites are

scarcely represented, and Algae a r e still absent. The primitive thick-shelled
brachiopod Dinobolus davidsoni (Salter) can be rock forming in some lime-
stone layers. The coral Halysites is also occasionally found in extreme
abundance, in some cases forming biostromes (Fig.131). Often a cap of
curious stromatoporoids is found on the shell of the common gastropod
Po leum ita yo em eri (Lindstrbm).
Discuss ion
The Visby Beds present a number of characteristics which indicate a

gradual decrease in s e a depth during the time of their deposition, such as
HOGKLINT BEDS 281
the upward decrease in the amount of marl, the increase in the amount of
limestone in that same direction, the fact that stromatoporoids become more
abundant in the higher parts of the Upper Visby Beds and the occurrence
there of the oldest, though small, reefs of Gotland.
During Early Visby time (deposition of the Lower Visby Beds), the s e a
floor likely was generally uninfluenced by wave action; a depth of more than
50 m at that time is very likely (Hadding, 1941,p.66).
When the lower Upper Visby Beds were laid down, wave action
presumably began to periodically influence the s e a floor and this was
permanent in middle and late Late Visby time when the reefs developed.
The fauna of these reefs needed current water refreshment, whereas water
movements also strongly contributed to the formation of the limestone
mantles around part of the reefs. Hadding (1941) also explained the formation
of the lenses and layers of marly limestone through wave action which
removed the surface layer of the s e a floor and washed out the fine continental
debris, but left behind the coarser fossils and fossil fragments. Hadding
(1941,p.67) stated: "These a r e found in the s e r i e s as thin limestone beds
filled with mostly well preserved, slightly worn calcareous brachiopods,
corals, bryozoan branches, crinoidal fragments, and the like. In places where
these limestones are abundantly present within the s e r i e s the sedimentation
took place at s o slight depths that strong waves o r occasional currents could
influence the bottom deposits. The depth was, however, still so great that
clayey mud was deposited under normal conditions." The present author does
not consider this theory of Hadding to be fully satisfactory. Among others,
the rather random alternation of marlstone and marly limestone in both
horizontal and vertical directions, is not easily understood in the reasoning
of Hadding. The problem of the mode of formation of the Visby Beds is worth
to be studied in detail using modern geological and geochemical methods,
including detailed analyses of the insoluble fractions.
HOGKLINT BEDS
The Hogklint Beds derive their name from the well-known hill and cliff
of Hogklint about 6.5 km southwest of Visby. The beds concordantly overlie
the Upper Visby Beds. The Tofta limestone is considered by the present
author to be a facies of the Hijgklint Beds.
The Hogklint Beds a r e found in the northwest of the island. Exposures
occur mainly in the cliff coasts formed by the Ancylus lake, the Littorina s e a
and the present Baltic. Of these, the latter two a r e by far the most important.
The dominant exposures in the present coastal cliff a r e those at Hogklint and
along the long coastal stretch between Nyhamn and Hallshuk. Unfortunately,
most of the walls are s o steep that in general only the lowermost parts can
be directly studied; the uppermost parts, moreover, a r e usually strongly
weathered.
The Littorina sea, which reached heights above the present s e a level
around Gotland of about 14 m in the south and 27 m in the north, has also
produced important exposures. These are found especially at Snackgardsbaden,
but also at Brissund, Kinner (southeast of Nyhamn), Lickershamn (with
raukar) and Hallshuk (Hjannklint). The Littorina cliffs often show a s c r e e of
huge blocks at their feet, which is much larger than usually found at the foot
of the present coastal cliffs.
The f r e s h water of the Ancylus lake reached to a height of maximally

19 (southern Gotland)-45 m (northern Gotland) over the present s e a level.
At that time, Gotland w a s only about 1,300 km2 large, compared to its size
of about 1,900 km2 in Littovina time and about 3,100 km2 now. The cliffs left
by the Ancylus lake a r e usually of little importance. They a r e the oldest out-
crops in Gotland and the rock is generally very strongly weathered. Among
others, some walls of the Galgberg (north of Visby) owe their origin to the
Ancylus lake.
Earlier, quarries also presented a great number of good exposures.
The once frequent lime kilns, however, have disappeared and the walls of
their many quarries a r e strongly weathered, overgrown, or (especially i n the
Visby a r e a ) levelled. Nowadays, only a few quarries in Gotland a r e occasion-
ally worked for other purposes and the total number of valuable exposures
of this kind is but a fraction of what it used to be.
Stratvied sediments
The author proposes a subdivision of the Hdgklint Beds into two sub-
units, the Lower and the Upper Hogklint Beds. The sediments discussed in
the descriptions to the geological maps of Gotland a r e assigned to these sub-
units a s follows:
Lower Hogklint Beds: Hede (1933),HGgklint-kalksten, ledet a , b; Hede (1940),

Hogklint- kalksten, pp.20-24.
Upper HogkZint Beds: Hede (1933),Hagklint-kalksten, ledet c, Tofta-kalksten; Hede
(1936),Hogklint-kalksten; Hede (1940),Hogklint-kalksten, pp.24 (De o v e r s t a
delarna. . . .)-27 (. . ..1 a 1,5 km fr%nkusten), Tofta-kalksten.
The Hogklint Beds originated in a period of continuous sedimentation,

during which reef growth also took place. Consequently, the boundary between
the Lower and Upper Hdgklint Beds is not very distinct. This is even true f o r
the boundary between the Visby and Hogklint Beds. The very great majority
of fossils continues over such an artificial boundary. Local conditions,
especially the development of reefs and their influence on their direct
environment, played an important part in obscuring stratigraphical
boundaries. Even during Late Visby time, certain places of the sea bottom
apparently were more favourable than others for the growth of a great many
organisms. In these places, more limestone was laid down, wedging out
laterally in a marlier environment. Such a limestone lens might have been
overlaid by a marlstone layer, but if favourabIe conditions continued, two o r
even several limestone lenses formed on top of each other o r reef building
began. This situation is reaIized around the transition from Visby to Hogklint
Beds. The latter a r e often regarded to begin at the f i r s t thicker limestone
layers that can be followed over distances of at least some hundreds of
metres. But this is not always at exactly the same level; differences of some
decimetres to sometimes a metre o r more occur. Reefs which began their
growth in late Late Visby time, when the uppermost Upper Visby Beds were
laid down, partly continued their development during Hogklint time. In this
way, these reefs and even more the crinoid limestones enveloping them
obscure the boundary between the two stratigraphical units.
This is already the situation at the boundary between these two units,
HOGKLINT BEDS 283
and it applies even more to the subdivision of the Hogklint Beds, a unit s o
rich in reefs. Therefore, when speaking about Lower and Upper Hogklint
Beds, one may not expect to find a sharp boundary. Nevertheless, the t e r m s
a r e of use to help describe some variations in the character of the rocks
belonging to the Hogklint Beds and in the conditions under which they were
deposited.
Because of the general occurrence of bioherms in the Hogklint Beds,
they show a great variety of sediments, to a total thickness of maximally
about 35 m, including the Tofta limestone. The stratified rocks a r e in the
majority.
The stratified sediments of both subunits will now be shortly described.
Lower Hogklint Beds
The Lower Hogklint Beds are exposed particularly along the northwest
coast of Gotland, to a thickness of 15-20 m. Due to the general slight south-
eastward dip of the Silurian s t r a t a of Gotland, only a few exposures of Lower
Hogklint sediments occur in the inland direction; they a r e not at all exposed
in F l r o .
More o r less marly limestone is dominant in the Lower Hijgklint Beds.
This sediment is dense to finely crystalline o r occasionally somewhat fine
sandy; the colour of the rock is grey to bluish or brownish grey and the
thickness of the layers generally varies between 2-20 cm. The individual
limestone layers thin out after varying distances and, therefore, the layers
from one exposure generally cannot be directly correlated with those in
another locality. Thin layers o r films of bluish grey to dark brown marl a r e
often interbedded between the limestone layers; these m a r l layers a r e
thickest (up to maximally 3 cm) in the lowermost Hogklint Beds. Locally,
lenses of a stronger marly limestone are also found there.
Especially the lower part of the Lower Hogklint is very fossiliferous;
bedding planes a r e often irregular and rugged. Bryozoans, corals, stromato-
poroids and brachiopods (many Leptaeqa spp., rhynchonellids and spirif erids)
a r e common; Algae occasionally occur i n special layers, but a r e rarely
abundant. The generally small coral colonies which are found embedded in
the stratified limestone i n part of the localities a r e not restricted to
particular horizons. They a r e often surrounded by a few limestone layers
which either bend under and over them o r abut against them. A coral colony
is commonly directly overlaid by a thin layer of marlstone. Generally the
colonies are in their positions of growth and show no indications of distortion.
Crinoid remains are usually abundant only in the environment of reefs.
In the higher parts of the Lower Hogklint Beds, the fossil content varies
in abundance, whereas the rock is sometimes finely oolitic, Especially in the
south of the a r e a where the Lower HSgklint Beds a r e exposed, the rock is
often thin, sometimes thick bedded, dense to finely crystalline, finely oolitic
in many places, and apparently relatively poor in fossils. Locally there a r e
more fossiliferous parts and small, indistinctly bedded reef-like develop-
ments generally occur, together with some real reefs. The true, large
Hogklint reefs generally began their growth already during the first part of
Early Hogklint time, but usually continued their expansion in the later part
of the Early Hogklint and often also during part of Late Hogklint time.
Further north, exposures without reefs often show a n alternation of
finely crystalline limestone and somewhat coarser limestone. Little
284 STRATIGRAPHY O F THE SILURIAN O F GOTLAND
regularity can be found in this alternation. The coarser limestone is

dominantly light grey in colour. Due to strong recrystallization of most of
the fossils, only "shadows" are visible; among these, tetracorals and
brachiopods a r e most common. Locally calcareous Algae occur, but only
rarely in great numbers. Fossils a r e relatively best distinguishable on
bedding planes, where they sometimes are in part liberated from the
enveloping sediment. This coarser limestone is irregularly bedded; on the
bedding planes, there i s often a film of marl. The weathered rock often falls
apart in irregular pieces. The finely crystalline limestone generally falls
apart through weathering i n more regular, rectangular pieces. This lime-
stone is more yellowish brown in colour. The layers, on the average a few
centimetres thick, a r e usually thinner than those of the coarser limestone,
whereas internally these layers often also show a millimetre-thin lamination.
The rock i s poor in fossils; locally some brachiopods are found. Locally
(e.g., in the southeast of Hallshukklint and in the Hjannklint, not f a r from
there) the bedding planes of the finely crystalline limestone layers a r e rugged,
with hummocks up to 5 cm high. These hummocks may have originated
through wave action. On the rugged bedding planes, a film of marl is often
found. Another indication of wave action is cross-bedding in some of the
coarser layers. In the northwestern part of Hallshukklint, it was found that
an apparently homogeneous coarse layer really consisted of a cross-bedded
alternation of layers of coarser and finer limestone.
Upper Hogklint Beds
The Upper Hogklint Beds a r e very commonly exposed. The Tofta lime-
stone in the south, which forms an independent stratigraphical unit in H a l e ' s
stratigraphy, is also assigned to the Upper Hogklint by the present author.
In the north, the Tofta limestone is absent and the Hiigklint limestone, in
Hede's definition, is directly overlaid by Slite sediments. New r e e f s occur
only sporadically in the Upper Hogklint, and those which a r e present are
generally of small size. Well developed wave-ripple marks were described
by Hede (1936, p.14) from 0.9, 1.1 and 1.2 km north of Lauterhorn (about in
the centre of the west coast of F&-o), with a direction of strike of the c r e s t s
of respectively 60°, about 4 5 O and about goo. The thickness of the Upper
Hogklint is about 20-25 m.
The Upper Hogklint is built of generally thin-bedded, but sometimes
thick-bedded, light-grey limestone, which is almost dense to finely crystal-
line, and sometimes finely oolitic. A s a rule, the rock is very fossiliferous,
with especially calcareous Algae playing an important part. The Upper
Hogklint Beds differ from the Lower Hijgklint Beds especially in this way.
Also, bryozoans, stromatoporoids, crinoids and corals occur. Locally
stromatoporoids a r e abundant and may have given rise to indistinctly bedded
reef -like developments. Stylolites a r e not rare.
Locally in the lower part of the Upper Hogklint, l e s s fossiliferous parts
also occur. In several places films o r thin layers of greenish m a r l are found
on the bedding planes. Locally the limestone is hard and breaks shell-like.
In certain limestone layers, the fossils a r e rounded and strongly worn. This
often gives the rock a conglomeratic appearance. One of the best developed
conglomeratic layers (thickness generally 2-10 cm, but locally up to 30 cm)
is the one which Hede took as his stratigraphical boundary between Hogklint
and Tofta limestone. It shows a great many fossils, especially calcareous
HOGKLINT BEDS 285
Algae, crinoids and bryozoans, and to a l e s s e r degree also corals, the
majority of which are rounded and worn. In this specific layer the fossils a r e
generally embedded in greenish grey marlstone i n stead of in limestone.
The upper part of the Upper Hogklint Beds consists of generally well-
bedded, often somewhat marly limestone, which is dense to finely crystalline,
and sometimes finely oolitic. The content in calcareous Algae varies from
place to place, but is generally high. Stromatoporoids occur especially in the
southeast, and occasionally in vaguely bedded reef -like developments. Hede
ascribed these sediments in the southeast to the Tofta limestone, which he
gave the rank of an independent stratigraphical unit. The present author
considers the Tofta limestone to be only a facies. A still accessible exposure
of this limestone is in the quarry behind the Galgberg (north of Visby), where
the mentioned layer of marlstone with strongly rounded fossils can also be
observed, although it is thin there. The Tofta limestone is often cross-bedded.
The stromatoporoid colonies a r e generally not large and were sometimes
tilted during growth, presumably by wave action. The tilting appears from
the fact that the latilaminae a r e all much thicker at one side than at the other.
Generally, the larger the stromatoporoid colony, the l e s s rounded it is. The
rock is very rich in tuberiform colonies of calcareous Algae of various sizes,
which may give it an oolitic, pisolitic o r conglomeratic appearance.
Brachiopods are notably poorly represented. A s a rule, the difference
between the Tofta limestone and the other sediments of the Upper Hogklint
Beds is small.
In a few places, such a s at Gutevagen (Visby), faults occur in the Upper
Hogklint Beds, with vertical displacements from a few centimetres up to a
few metres. Their strike varies from 55 to 85O. Their origin is presumably
linked with differential compaction of the various underlying sediments, and
especially with a difference in settling between stratified and unstratified
sediments. The fact that epeirogenetic movements perhaps made the Hbgklint
sediments r i s e above s e a level a few times, during Middle Silurian times,
may have further promoted compaction and thus have made the differences
in volume decrease between the various sediments more pronounced.
Reef limestones and related sediments
A survey will now be given of the main occurrences of reef limestone

of Hbgklint age.
The hillock Hogklint (Fig.2), from which the name of the stratigraphical
unit has been derived, is from the point of view of reef study not the most
valuable of the exposures showing rocks of that age. The best exposure is
the cliff at the seaward side, which is, however, too steep and high to be
accessible for detailed studies. The reef limestone is of the common
Hoburgen type, grey to greyish white. Stromatoporoids were the main reef
builders, but also a great variety of other fossils is present; among these
solitary and social corals, bryozoans, crinoids and brachiopods a r e the
most apparent. In between the reef limestone, parts are present of a
distinctly to vaguely stratified nature, measuring from a few decimetres to
several metres. At the very top of the exposed reef limestone, this shows
locally a tendency to stratification o r it is covered by crinoid limestone,
suggesting that the reef has not reached much higher there than the present
topography. Underneath the Hogklint reef, in the Upper Visby Beds, some
286 STRATIGRAPHY O F THE SILURIAN OF GOTLAND
small reefs a r e found and it seems fairly likely that the Iiogklint reef itself
began i t s growth already at the end of Upper Visby time. At that time,
conditions for reef growth were favourable and several began development.
About at the place where the coastal cliff turns from a south-north to a
west-east direction, a small reef is found in the lowermost Hiigklint Beds.
It is only a few metres large, and covered by some stratified limestone,
over which the main Hogklint reef expanded.
Some parts of the stratified Hsgklint Beds close to the reef limestone
a r e extremely rich in crinoid remains of generally reddish colour; these
parts remind one of the well-known "Hoburg marble" of southernmost Gotland.
N- NE 5-sw
0 , , lpm a r e e f limestone mstratified limestms
Fig. 132. P a r t of the Ancylus cliff between Galgberget and Snackgardsbaden

Hotel; taken about 0.5 km south of the hotel. Four parts of reef limestone are
shown, separated by stratified sediment, indicating how closely reefs locally
followed after another in a north - south direction. Further south in the cliff
the distance between successive reefs is generally larger.
F E D C 0 A
'beach level \sea level

r e e f limestone
@ stratified limestone
ma rlst one with intercalated

thin lenses of marly limestone
0 M m
/. N-
Fig. 133. Schematic summarizing drawing of the exposures found at

Snackgardsbaden.
HOGKLINT BEDS 287
N C
mass just left of the middle of the drawing is known as " P ~ e d i g s t o l e ~(the
tt
pulpit). It consists of reef limestone overlying stratified limestone; the
boundary between the two is not very distinct because of the only gradually
disappearing stratification. The part of the wall south of "Predigstolen" i s
shown in more detail i n Fig.135.
=reef debpis
0 5 lorn =Strotifled limestone
Fig. 135. Snackgardsbaden, Hogklint Beds. Detailed drawing of the southern

part of Fig.134, from A (Fig.133) at the right to "Predigstolen" at the left.
South of the rock gate at the right some reef limestone. Underneath and
especially left of this gate stratified crinoid limestone with increasing
crinoid contents upwards; also the number of colonies of calcareous Algae
increases upwards. Northwards the crinoid limestone is followed by an
unstratified to very vaguely stratified body of reef limestone with many
stromatoporoids, solitary corals and crinoid remains. Underneath the reef
limestone a small cave with slightly folded layers of stratified limestone.
They belong to the limestone occurrence which separates the above-named
reef body from the reef at the left, of which it apparently forms the flank
deposit. It contains remains of reef builders but also lumps of reef lime-
stone of identical nature to that of the reef north of it.
Nothing in particular needs to be described from the Hijgklint reef limestone

exposed in the Korpklint, southwest of HBgklint.
Also in the Stavsklint the Upper Visby Beds a r e overlaid by Hijgklint Beds, both
stratified and reef deposits. At the southwest side, two layers of the adjacent stratified
limestone penetrate into the reef limestone over a horizontal distance of about 5 and
8 m , respectively. The latter, which occurs highest in the r e e f , shows a distinct rise
reef-inwards. In addition to stromatoporoids and c o r a l s , the reef limestone, especially
locally, is also r i c h in bryozoans. Several reefs appear to have contributed to the reef
limestone m a s s of Stavsklint. It reaches a thickness of up to about 8 m and is in many
places overlaid by stratified crinoid limestone.
IN sI
Fig.136. Northern half of the cliff wall AB of Fig.133. At the base some
small reef-limestone bodies. The southern one of these consists of hard
unstratified limestone in which a s fossils mainly some light grey stromato-
poroid colonies a r e recognizable. It r e s t s over hard sparry limestone rich
in heliolitids and favositids, which generally occur in their attitudes of
growth, solitary corals, stromatoporoids and many crinoid remains. Down-
wards the sediment is more marly. Some of the layers sag under the over-
lying weight of the reef limestone. North of this small southern reef body a
larger reef-limestone unit. There is a characteristic difference in the
positions of the coral and stromatoporoid colonies in the reef and stratified
limestone. In the stratified sediment under the reef they occur all with their
largest diameter parallel to the stratification, in the reef limestone they a r e
found in all possible orientations. The boundary between stratified and un-
stratified limestone follows an irregular course, when seen in closer detail,
but is distinct. The reef limestone contains pockets of marly sediment of
which the layers have been in part deformed by differential compression
within the rock complex. The overlying stratified sediment is less thick than
over the lower reef south of it. Further north stratified limestone also occurs
a s mantles around parts of the higher reef limestone, thus leading to a
complex reef-limestone massif a s also found in several other places in the
Hogklint Beds. The individual units a r e roughly lens-shaped. The stratified
mantles become upwards increasingly indistinct. Stromatoporoid develop-
ment in the higher reef portions was more vigorous.
SnXckgZLrdsbaden. HOgklint Beds.
H ~ G K L I N TBEDS 289
Fig.137. Snackgardsbaden. Photograph of cliff wall BC of Fig.133. Reef lime-

stone overlies stratified limestone. On top of the reef limestone locally again
some covering stratified limestone. Hogklint Beds. The locality of the reef
of Fig.138 is at the left in this photograph.
N-NE 5-sw
P.
...
? l
D met Ilmestono stratlfied limestone
alternation of marly lim8stone and marlstone
Fig.138. Small body of reef limestone in the lowest of the Hogklint Beds in
section BC (Fig.3.33). The body is found just southwest of C, and is built of
hard limestone rich in stromatoporoids and coral colonies. In its normal
development the basal Hogklint bed consists of hard stratified limestone with
crinoids. However, about 28 m northeast of B it passes into an alternation
of layers of marly limestone and marlstone, characteristic more for the
underlying Upper Visby Beds. This deposit also covers the reef -limestone
body, but at its base and in its lateral environs it is replaced again by hard
At Axelsro, reef limestone is exposed over quite a large horizontal

surface, but the thickness in the cliff wall does nowhere exceed 6 m. The rock
is of the common grey Hoburgen type. Underlying the reef limestone is
crinoid limestone with an increasing content of crinoid remains and reef
debris in an upward direction. In all, about 6-7 m stratified Hogklint lime-
stone is found in between the Upper Visby Beds and the Hogklint reef lime-
stone at Axelsro and it should be noted that the Visby-Hogklint boundary
continues underneath the reef mass at the same level a s in the environs of
Axelsro.
The Hogklint reef limestone at Kneippbyn is exposed over an a r e a of
about 200 m long and about 50 m broad and in the coastal cliff to a thickness
up to about 25 m. The longest axis of the reef-limestone a r e a is about
2 90 STRATIGHAPHY OF THE SILURIAN O F GOTLAND
northeast - southwest. Reef growth began very early in Hbgklint time o r

probably even earlier. In the wall some small reefs a r e also found that grew
at about the Upper Visby-Hbgklint transition.
The boundary between the Upper Visby and Hogklint Beds, which is
generally laid at the f i r s t thicker limestone layers which can be followed
over a reasonable long distance, occurs distinctly lower underneath the
Kneippbyn reef. Locally it is as much as about 5 m lower than at some
distance north or south of Kneippbyn. In addition to the causes mentioned
while discussing the stratified sediments (p.282), the wealth of crinoid
growth here in the close environments of the reef and the deposition of reef
debris also will have contributed to an early development of thicker lime-
stone layers. Further differential compression of the Upper Visby Beds may
have been of importance. The enormous weight of the reef m a s s made it
subside into the comparatively soft s e a floor, together with the limestone
deposit directly around the reef, causing the marly sediment underneath to
compress and to move outwards-upwards, in the latter way also leading to
some elevation of the limestone layers covering the Visby Beds further away,
around the reef. The dips i n the Upper Visby Beds i n the Kneippbyn a r e a
support this thesis of central subsidence and peripheral elevation of the
str atigr aphi cal boundary.
Fig.139. Part of Korpklint, Snackgardsbaden (section DC of Fig.1331, with

reef limestone and stratified limestone, belonging to the Hogklint Beds. In
the stratified limestone at the right upthrust faulting occurs possibly caused
by gravitational sliding in the reef-limestone m a s s towards the main
(southwest - northeast) cliff at the right. (After Manten, 1962, fig.18.)
HOGKLINT BEDS 291
1 N-NE 0 20m
I="*) r u t limestone r e e t debris stratitied limestone vegetation
Fig.140. The cliff south of Brissund. A is a reef, belonging to the Hogklint

Beds, with some Upper Visby marlstone at i t s base. This marlstone is also
found at B, where it shows cross-bedding. C is reef-like limestone. D is
well-stratified marly limestone, rich i n crinoid fragments, but also containing
some reef debris. It is overlaid by reef limestone ( E ) with a brecciated
structure, which is locally rich in calcareous Algae. F is stratified limestone,
which is richer in reef debris than D; going upwards the stratification
becomes l e s s distinct. G is strongly-weathered reef limestone, which is
rooted at H in the underlying marlstone (Fig.141). J is again reef limestone,
dense, with stromatoporoids and calcareous Algae. The rock shows several
stylolites, with a n amplitude of up to 5 cm and a length of a few metres,
which also intersect the Algae and stromatoporoids. The reef limestone
rests over crinoid limestone with reef debris. At the northwest side of the
reef limestone, debris (K) has been deposited between this reef-growth
centre and its northern neighbour. This detrital deposit contains remains
of stromatoporoids, favositids and calcareous Algae. Intact crinoid calices
suggest a rather quiet environment. The northern reef (L)overlies stratified
crinoid limestone (M) and is overlaid by variably-well-stratified limestone
with crinoids. Where not otherwise stated the sediments belong to the
Hijgklint Beds.
Thefirstexposures of Silurian rocks north of Visby are some. old and mainly
levelled q u a r r i e s behind the ruins of St. Goran Church. In fact only p a r t s of their
northern walls are still there, but these are all strongly weathered. They consist of
stromatoporoid reef limestone. These northern quarry walls occur in the southern
slope of the Galgberg, a hillock on which in e a r l i e r times public death sentences were
c a r r i e d out. Around this hillock solid rock can be seen at a number of places,
comparatively well in the south of the west side and on the north side. In the f i r s t
locality, the boundary between Upper Visby and HEgklint Beds is exposed. The Hogklint
Beds are represented by both stratified crinoid limestone and unstratified reef lime-
stone. Along the staircase in the north it can be observed how the reef limestone m a s s
is composed of smaller reef units. On the average, the reef limestone higher upwards
shows l a r g e r and rounder reef builders. Notable a r e the, in p a r t , very large
stromatoporoid knolls, up to 2 m in diameter; in between them occur head-size
acervularians and favositids. No differences were observed in the species composition
of the fauna in the reefs and the stratified sediments. Apparently the reefs were too
small t o lead t o any significant faunal differentiation. At the top of the hillock mainly
crinoid limestone i s present. None of the exposures is particularly valuable as far as
reef study is concerned.
2 92 STRATIGRAPHY O F THE SILURIAN OF GOTLAND
The west wall of Galgberget f o r m s p a r t of the A ? ~ c y l ucliff.

. ~ This cliff can be
followed north of Galgberget, over a distance of about 2 km until the Snackgardsbaden
Hotel. This cliff will here be called "Galgberg Extension". It shows cross-sections
through several reefs, which generally a r e not of great length. The average is about
25-60 m; only a small number of reef-limestone exposures i s longer. Northwards the
average distance between successive reefs decreases and in the l a s t kilometre, there
is,h several c a s e s , only a triangle of stratified material between adjacent reefs,
which then a r e in direct contact in the upper p a r t of the exposure. The sides of the
Fig.141. Stratigraphical succession at H in Fig.140. From base to top: Upper

Visby marlstone; massive limestone; inter stratification of marl and lime-
stone layers; massive limestone; a limestone layer; massive limestone with
favositids and several stromatoporoids; marl; massive limestone; marl;
massive limestone ( G in Fig.140). Apparently the beginning of reef growth
was rather difficult, so that horizontal expansion of the reef was four times
interrupted by periods in which the reef builders were repelled to a smaller
territory. Brissund.
Fig.142. Map showing the location of the Kinnertorpklint. a, b and c indicate

the positions of the sections shown i n Fig.143, 144, and 145, respectively.
HOGKLINT BEDS 293
triangle make an angle with the base varying between 20-60°. In other instances, a
broader zone of stratified sediment occurs between two reefs. Generally, fossiliferous
marly limestone i s present, in layers of 1-15 c m , with interbedded m a r l films, which
may sometimes, however, become real m a r l l a y e r s of up to 1-2 cm thick. It i s evident
that not all r e e f s a r e sectioned alike; in some r e e f s , the centre i s still hidden in the
solid rock east of the wall, in others the main p a r t must have been present somewhat
further westwards and has been removed by erosion. A small p a r t of the wall i s shown
in Fig.132.
5rn reef limestone vegetation

I
Fig.143. Reef exposed in the Kinnertorpklint, about 45-65 m south of the
northern end of this cliff (a in Fig.142), Hijgklint Beds. At the right and the
left crinoid limestone. At the very left, below, the crinoid limestone is
replaced by very fossiliferous marlstone. Within the reef limestone some
large parts of more o r l e s s well-stratified crinoid limestone.
One of the classical exposures of reef limestone in the Hijgklint Beds

is formed by the cliff walls at Snackgardsbaden, a well-known bathing
locality about 3 km north-northeast of Visby. A summary view of that
locality is given i n Fig.133. Some parts of the exposure a r e shown in more
detail in Fig.134-139.
In section BC (Fig.137), it can be seen how the boundary between Upper
Visby and Hogklint Beds east of the reef-limestone m a s s (which is the same
as is to be seen in the left of section AB) moves upwards in a flexure-like
way. A phenomenon as shown in Fig.138 further complicates the drawing of
an exact stratigraphic a1 boundary.
The Hogklint reef limestone section BC (Fig.137) shows no subdivision
into smaller reef-limestone units, but this can be observed in the northern
part of AB (Fig.1361, disappearing again southwards in that section.
The most interestingpart of the cliff south of Brissund, approximately 9 km

north-northeast of Visby, has already been described e a r l i e r (Manten, 1962,
fig.9-11). A summarizing drawing of this cliff is given in Fig.140. Fig.141
2 94 STRATIGRAPHY O F T H E SILURIAN OF GOTLAND
N-NE s-sw
m
m r e e f limestone B r e e f debris v v vegetation Q l,m
Fig.144. Detail of the exposure in the north-northeast trending cliff wall in

the Kinnertorpklint, located 7-14 m before the northern end of this cliff
( b in Fig.142). In the south at the top reef limestone, underlaid by a m o r e
debris-like deposit (A). This contains many crinoids, s o m e brachiopods, thin
stromatoporoids and halysitids. Towards the b a s e it is increasingly m o r e
marly. Northwards it ends against a lump of massive limestone (B), which
is very rich in crinoid fragments, but also contains the remains of several
reef builders. At the top this lump is surrounded by thin fossil colonies and
detrital layers, which partly follow the surrounding of the massive lump.
At the b a s e of i t and behind it a s m a l l cave, which shows somewhat c r o s s -
bedded marlstone l a y e r s with interstratified m o r e calcareous layers. The
marlstone l a y e r s a r e r i c h in heliolitids and favositids. Close to the lump B
the l a y e r s a r e strongly plicated. The whole makes it likely that the lump was
in i t s entirety detached from a reef and moved downwards: At the top left and
north of the lump (C) a n agglutinated m a s s of c o a r s e remains of stromato-
poroids and corals, with crinoids and s m a l l e r solitary corals in between.
On top of it a m o r e regular accumulation of fossils in a calcareous matrix,
which is vaguely stratified (D). This stratification lacks in the overlying reef
limestone. Towards the north the reef debris in the detrital deposit C
becomes less coarse. At the left in the drawing it is replaced by a thick
layer of crinoid limestone ( E ) with some favositids, stromatoporoids and
thick solitary corals. At the b a s e of it an interstratification of marlstone and
m o r e calcareous l a y e r s (G) is found, which is s i m i l a r to the one that has
been mentioned from underneath and behind B. The fact that this deposit is
overlaid by limestone with reef debris shows that the beginning of reef
growth was synchronous with the deposition of the marly sediment. The
crinoid limestone layer E has apparently been deposited in r a t h e r quiet
water. It was found to contain a flat fan of solitary corals, descending of one
ancestor, of which the successive generations descended through budding.
The longest chain comprised seven successive generations.
H ~ G K L I N TBEDS 295
Fig.145. Section of the north side of the Kinnertorpklint ( c in Fig.142).

Hogklint Beds. The reef limestone at the right shows a great number of
stromatoporoid colonies which a r e not i n their growth orientations.
Presumably this rock has been formed at the northwestern margin of the
reef. Seen the fact that in some parts the orientation of the colonies is
remarkably alike it s e e m s possible that these parts represent blocks of reef
rock that were detached from the reef by storm waves and deposited i n their
entirety at the lee side. Also a few pockets with crinoid limestone are found.
Upwards the number of marl pockets increases. The reef limestone is over-
laid by rather thick layers of coarse-spathic crinoid limestone. Towards the
east the reef limestone is less detrital in character. Over a short distance
in the exposed cliff the reef limestone is replaced by stratified limestone,
which at the base i s a coarse crinoid limestone, but upwards becomes more
marly and then contains longer crinoid stem fragments. In the left the
crinoid limestone is again overlaid by reef limestone, which is rich i n
crinoid remains. Other recognizable fossils a r e stromatoporoids, halysitids
and small algal balls. At the top a layer of crinoid limestone. East of the
drawn section the cliff is hidden behind a Recent s c r e e slope.
shows how the beginning of reef formation during Hogklint tlme w a s not
always very easy. Also elsewhere in the Brissund cliff, the reef limestone
shows, in its lower parts, portions with intercalated stratified sediment.
Sagging of the stratified sediments underlying the reefs and bucklings of the
stratified material intercalated in the reefs a r e witnesses of differential
compressions during later stages of reef development. Main reef builders
were the stromatoporoids, but also corals of various kinds have contributed,
as well as calcareous Algae. The cliff north of Brissund is exposed over a
length of about 0.6 km, but presents no new data on Hijgklint reef formation.
In the south, mainly stratified limestone is exposed, after a short distance
being replaced by reef limestone. The latter weathers to various remarkable
forms, including niches and dome-shaped roofs. Water seepage occurs at the
boundary of stratified and reef limestone at the foot of the cliff i n several
places.
The next most important exposure, northwards, is the cliff wall at Kinnertorp
(Kinner's croft). Its location is shown in Fig.142. T h r e e p a r t s of the wall are pictured
and described in Fig.143-145.
F r o m Nyhamn Fisklage north-northeastwards, a great many good exposures a r e

found in the present coastal cliff. Of these, several have already been described in
Chapter VII (in geographical o r d e r : Fig.51, 48, 44, 52, 49, 54, 55, 56, 37). A few others
a r e shown in Fig.146 and 147.
The reef limestone in the cliff about 0.5 km west of Stuguklint reaches
a thickness of up to about 30 m. Intercalated over generally the full exposed
length, however, a r e approximately horizontal zones of stratified limestone,
of about one to a few metres thick. These stratified intercalations seem to
suggest alternating expansion and retreat of the growing reef surface. The
stratified limestone which bounds the reef at the northeast side shows sliding
phenomena.
Sliding within the reef limestone has taken place in the cliff a few
hundred metres west of Stuguklint. On its west side, the reef limestone is
underlaid by a brecciated zone of one to a few decimetres thick, which has
been formed through shattering of thin-layered marly limestone. The
brecciated zone is distinctly discordant with the normal stratification. The
cause of these phenomena will have to be sought in the action of gravity upon
the rock masses which a r e no longer supported at the seaward side.
Just north of the largest reef-limestone occurrence in the last-
mentioned cliff, stratified limestone is found in which many longer crinoid-
stem remains a r e present, up to 12 cm in length.
Fig.146. Hogklint reefs, approx. 0.45 km north-northeast of Lundsklint. At

the base of the section the uppermost Upper Visby Beds a r e exposed. The
oldest reef, at the left in the drawing, is already surrounded by stratified
Hogklint limestone. At the southwest side of the main reef a small one, which
probably could not compete in vigour with its strongly expanding neighbour.
Fig.147. Southern part of a reef limestone complex, about 0.18 km long, approximately 0.7-0.9 km north of
Lundsklint. Hogklint Beds. At the foot of the cliff in which it is exposed an impressive amount of loose blocks,
caused by cliff fall, is found. At the left is a small Upper Visby reef. The boundary between the Upper Visby and
Hogklint is about 1 m above the top of this reef. This shows that the lowest parts of the HQklint reef mass, to the
right of the Upper Visby reef must have originated during Late Visby time. They rest over layers of hard, marly
limestone. The HGgklint reef limestone is subdivided into smaller units, due to intercalated stratified limestone
of varying thickness. (After Manten, 1962, fig.13.)
Fig. 148
Fig. 149
Fig. 150
HOGKLINT BEDS 2 99
Stuguklint i s the l a s t large exposure of Hijgklint reef limestone before the rauk
Jungfrun is reached. At the southeast side, the main reef shows a r a t h e r steep and
interfingering contact with the stratified limestone. A small dome of detrital stratified
limestone separates this reef from a smaller one west-northwest of it.
Jungfrun, in the west of the southern shore of the Bay of Lickershamn,

is the largest rauk ( s e a stack o r stone giant) of Gotland, 11.5 m high (Manten,
1962, fig.14). It consists of reef limestone. Lenticular stromatoporoids were
the main reef builders, but social and solitary corals and bryozoans have
also contributed.
South of Lickershamn, an extensive, elevated raukar field is found with
raukar of fairly large size (Fig.148). They a r e built of Hoburgen-type reef
limestone similar to the reef limestone occurring elsewhere i n the Hogklint
Beds, but in contrast to the raukar of reef limestone in the Hemse and Hamra-
Sundre Beds. In the Lickershamn raukar there a r e several intercalations of
stratified limestone (Fig. 149). Depressions i n the reef were filled mainly
with crinoid remains; in between these, there a r e reef builders and fragments
of reef builders (Fig.150). The crinoid limestone is usually thin and
irregularly bedded. Generally the depressions once filled became again
covered by reef limestone.
Three of the exposures east-northeast of Lickershamn a r e drawn i n

Fig.46, 151 and 152.
At several places the reefs in the Hogklint Beds do not occur in a single
belt parallel to the Silurian coast line of that time, but in a distinctly wider
belt, with also in a direction perpendicular to the coast, the one reef having
followed after the other. They influenced each other in their development and
thus created a rather complicated environmental pattern. This pattern is
often difficult to reconstruct only from direct field observations, since
generally only the cross-sections of the coastal cliff present good exposures.
F o r the Lickershamn area, the direction parallel to the coast line of Hogklint
time was presumably around 45' (cf. p.311) and thus the north-south inland
row of exposures east-northeast of Lickershamn is particularly valuable
since it presents some of the few cross-sections at a distinct angle to the
trend of the Hogklint reef zone.
Fig.152 gives an illustration of how reefs were competing. The three
reefs exposed at the base of the section a r e all overgrown by reefs which
developed southeast of them. The reefs closest to the open s e a presumably
were most vigorous; the others grew at their lee side, and moreover had
(Text continues on second halfofp.301)
Fig. 148. Raukar of Hogklint reef limestone at Lickershamn.
Fig.149. Lickershamn. Hogklint Beds. Part of a rauk with some stratified

limestone with crinoid remains and reef debris intercalated between the reef
limestone. The intercalated rock is l e s s compact than the reef limestone and
stronger attacked by weathering.
Fig.150. Depression within reef limestone, filled with a crinoid breccia in

which reef debris is inbedded. The rock is somewhat more liable to
weathering and erosion. Raukar field at Lickershamn, Hogklint Beds.
N S
reef llmestone stmtlfled limestone I’..:.Irectdebrls marl a

scree
Fig.151. Section about 2 km east-northeast of Jungfrun, at the northeast side

of the sand and gravel plain of Lickershamn, about at the place where the
cliff wall, which further northeastward lies parallel to the present coast line,
has bent inland.
A = Alternation of 1-4 cm thick layers of marly limestone and 0.2-2 cm
thick marlstone layers, characteristic of the Upper Visby Beds. The rock is
very fossiliferous. Directly south of the drawn part of the exposure the
stratification is about horizontal, but soon it dips again down under another
occurrence of reef limestone.
B = Light brownish to bluish grey marly reef limestone with stromato-
poroids, corals and some bryozoans; most characteristic is the very high
number of solitary corals. In between the reef builders also some crinoid
remains and brachiopods a r e found. The reef builders are generally rather
flat; about 25% of them a r e not in their orientations of growth; in the lower
half meter the number of colonies is not high and those present a r e on the
average only about 5 cm in diameter and 1.5 cm thick.
C = Crinoid limestone, overlying the sediments described under A. At
the base some 5-10 cm thick layers, covered by a thicker one, which in the
south of the drawn section is about 1 rn, increasing northwardstoabout1.5 m;
internally this layer shows a somewhat vague bedding, further fading north-
wards, towards the reef limestone. In addition to the abundant, especially
small, crinoid remains there a r e some solitary and social corals and also
some reef debris is present. Because of i t s rather homogeneous nature the
rock distinctly contrasts to the marlstone and the reef limestone.
D = Crinoid limestone of a less homogeneous nature, more distinctly
stratified, richer in reef debris, which partly is rather coarse.
E = Crinoid limestone, distinctly stratified, overlying the reef lime-
stone. The rock is extremely rich in crinoid remains; some stem fragments
reach to 8 cm in length.
F = A small outcrop of reef limestone in between B and C, separated
from reef B by a narrow zone of irregularly and partly vaguely stratified
rock, in which much reef debris and a number of mainly small potential reef
building colonies in their growth positions a r e observed. Probably a small
flank reef formed at the south to southwest side of reef B. In its lowermost
part i n the south the reef limestone F passes without distinct boundary into
a reef debris deposit, which thins out in the crinoid limestone C.
HOGKLINT BEDS 301
Fig.152. Section about 2 km east-northeast of Jungfrun, at thenortheast side of

the sandand gravel plain of Lickershamn, about where the cliff, which
further northeastwards l i e s parallel to the present coast line, has bent inland.
The section shown 3s that of the fourth exposure, going inland. Remains of
three reefs (A, B, C) are shown, which from the southeast were overgrown
by three other reefs (D, E, F). In between a varying amount of stratified lime-
stone with reef debris. The reef D did presumably not extend much further
northwestwards than the place of the present cliff. Especially in its lower
part, but locally also at the top, it shows clear transitions to stratified
sediment; that much m a r l was deposited there in between the reef builders
is reflected by several fissures and small caves which recent erosion has
caused. Most of the reef builders are relatively small and flat and quite a
number of them a r e not i n their positions of growth.
The exposed parts of the older reefs a r e also marly and full of m a r l
nests. The stratified limestone varies between almost pure crinoid limestone
to a rock very rich in reef debris, which in some places is rather coarse.
The sediment exposed underneath reef F is an Upper-Visby-like alternation
of layers of marlstone and marly limestone; except for the uppermost 20-25 cm
below the reef almost as much marlstone is present as marly limestone,
which is more than is normal for the uppermost Upper Visby Beds. The
sediment has presumably been laid down at the northwest side of the oldest
part of reef F; it is rich in fragments of coral colonies (especially Halysites sp.),
crinoid stem fragments and solitary corals.
more to suffer from the deposition of continental debris (much marl in the
left of the section underneath reef F).
Consequently the number of growing reefs decreased in the course of
Early Hogklint; but the distribution of the exposures of reef limestone shows
that also in the later situation, when l e s s but larger reefs were present, the
general pattern of a zone of reefs, rather than a single belt was maintained.
Northwards from the place where the cliff is again parallel to the present coast
line, in the lower p a r t of the exposed wall Upper Visby Beds occur in outcrops. The
upper boundary is distinctly lower where Hijgklint reef limestone overlies the Visby
Beds; the difference in level may be up to 2 m or more. Slightly north of the curve in
the direction of the cliff, a small reef is present high in the Upper Visby Beds; it is
covered by stratified limestone. Solitary c o r a l s in the latter, which are cut by thin
calcite s e a m s , indicate that vertical displacements in the o r d e r of magnitude of 0.5 cm
have taken place also after consolidation of $he sediment, presumably because of the
weight of the overlying Hijgklint reef m a s s . In the lowermost p a r t of that reef lime-
stone, many of the reef builders a r e not in their growth orientations; the great majority
of them is relatively small and flat, the only l a r g e r c o r a l colonies w e r e of
Halysites catenulatus (Martini). T h e r e a r e many solitary corals and brachiopods,
both in the matrix and in the several s m a l l m a r l nests (5-30 ern wide, 2-10 ern high).
In the stratified limestone enveloping the Hogklint r e e f , the amounts of reef debris a r e
comparable t o those found around other reefs of the Hoburgen type (see Chapter M ) .
Further northwards, the Hogklint Beds present the usual lateral alternation of
stratified and reef limestones. Where no r e e f s a r e present: the wall i s not s o steep
and usually less well exposed. The r e e f s are generally not longer than 75 m with a
maximum thickness of 20 m , but as a rule not m o r e than 15 m. T h e r e a r e several
intercalations of stratified sediment and also horizontal planes (exposed as lines) of
one o r a few m e t r e s in length which may reflect local interruptions in reef growth.
Of several extensive patch r e e f s found along the shore from Ihreviknorthwards,

two have been presented in Fig.47. Fig.153 is a detail taken from one of these r e e f s ,
showing vaguely stratified reef limestone on top of massive, unstratified reef lime-
stone. A notable exposure, somewhat further northwards in this a r e a , is the one
represented in Fig.155, where stratified sediment and reef debris occur in the lower-
most p a r t of a r e e f , surrounded and overlaid by reef limestone. A drawing of the
entire reef-limestone exposure i s given in Fig.154.
Several details of the Hjannklint, southwest of Halls Fisklage, have

already been given in Chapter VII (Fig.35, 62, 66). Another detailed section
is that of Fig.156, in which a notable contact between stratified limestone and
overlying reef debris and reef limestone is shown. About 1 2 m south-
southwest of the locality of Fig. 156, within the predominantly stromatoporoid
limestone, part of that rock consists almost entirely of branched coral
colonies. This part is almost 6 m high and 4 m broad. Directly south of it,
I u
,
Fig.153. Detailed section through reef limestone, about 0.9 km south of

Sigsarvebodar, in the east of Ihrevik. The lower part consists of massive reef
limestone, mainly built by stromatoporoids in a matrix of marly limestone.
The m a r l content is highest in the north. In m a r l pockets crinoids, small
algal balls, brachiopods, solitary corals and an occasional gastropod a r e
found. In the upper part of the section reef limestone is found, which is
vaguely stratified. The matrix volume and the marl content of this matrix
a r e higher. More tabular reef builders are present.
HOGKLINT BEDS 303
IN S.
Fig. 154. Hogklint reef limestone south of Sigsarvebodar. The rectangle at

the left marks the position of Fig.155. Over its entire thickness the reef
limestone shows a vague stratification, which is, however, strongest at the
top, where it may show dips up to 20; e.g., in the northern of the raukar.
The boundary with the underlying crinoid limestone is undulous and suggests
that the reef had several roots (indicated by arrows). At the right part of a
reef limestone occurrence found about 50 m landinward is drawn. Also this
reef limestone is vaguely stratified; moreover it is stronger marly and
contains reef debris, all suggesting formation at the periphery of a reef;
this interpretation is further strengthened by the presence of a block, about
.1 x 1 m, in which all tabular stromatoporoids a r e in about vertical positions,
and which block has likely as a whole been loosened elsewhere from the reef.
corals a r e also common, but their number decreases further southwards.

At the base of the coral limestone is reef limestone with tabular stromato-
poroids, an occasional large stromatoporoid and colonies of Halysites.
North-northwest of the locality of Fig. 156, the reef limestone is strongly
dominated by stromatoporoids, several of which a r e large; a size of 90 cm
in horizontal and 60 cm in vertical diameter is not exceptional. Locally, they
a r e roughly arranged in layers. Since in some places layers of fragment
limestone also a r e intercalated, the reef limestone has in p a r t s a vaguely
stratified appearance.
Two p a r t s of the Hallshukklint a r e drawn in Fig.63 and Fig.70.
The Norsklint, about 2 km southwest of Hallshuk shows mainly reef limestone
of the genefal type. Only in the south is it seen t o be underlaid by stratified limestone,
which over some distance is gradually replaced. Locally, however, it appears again
at the base of the exposures, thus suggesting that the Norsklint reef began i t s
development in a number of growth c e n t r e s , which in the course of their expansion
united to form a patch reef, that reached a thickness of about 8-10 m . In general
stromatoporoids, but locally corals were the main reef builders. Intercalations of a
stratified nature are not r a r e , especially in the lower p a r t s of the reef limestone.
A survey of the fossils which occur in the Hijgklint reef limestones and
surrounding crinoid limestones is given in Table XVII.
304 STRATIGRAPHY OF T H E SILURIAN OF GOTLAND
The stratigraphical position of the Tofta limestone
Some r e m a r k s a r e needed here with regard to the stratigraphical

position of the Tofta limestone.
When Hede (1921) published his stratigraphy of Gotland, he included the
Tofta limestone a s an independent stratigraphical unit. Later investigators
have questioned the correctness of this.
Hadding (1956, p.18) especially, was of the opinion that the Tofta lime-
stone may be regarded a s ''a local, extreme-shallow-water facies of the
uppermost part of the Hogklint group and the lowest part of the Slite group".
Also Martinsson (1962a, 1967) doubted the independency of the Tofta

limestone a s a stratigraphical unit. Because the Upper Hogklint Beds a r e
poor i n marlstone, Martinsson (1962a) could sample these only very badly
in his study on the beyrichiid ostracodes. Nevertheless, he found three
species ( Craspedobolbina uncilifeya Martinsson, Beyrichia halliana
Martinsson, and 23. hystricoides Martinsson) in both the Hdgklint Beds sensu
Hede and the Tofta limestone. Beyrichia bicuspis Kiesow occurs i n Hogklint,
Tofta and Slite Beds. Two species a r e shared by the Tofta limestone and the
m r e e f limestone a reef debris stromatoporoids
=stratified limestone r//lnot exposed Holysites
Fig. 155. Drawing, showing an intercalation in reef limestone of stratified

sediment and reef debris. The intercalation occurs at the base of a reef.
South of Sigsarvebodar. Hogklint Beds (cf. Fig.154). The dash-dot line marks
the boundary of a shallow cave. At a, reef limestone is present mainly built
by stromatoporoid covers in a matrix of middle-coarse limestone with
crinoids; b and c indicate unorganized reef limestone with stromatoporoids
of various form; d is stratified marly crinoid limestone, with upwards an
increasing amount of reef debris, at e passing into reef limestone rich in
solitary corals and colonies of Halysites; f marks a few thin (on the average
1.5 cm) layers of crinoid limestone in which some small stromatoporoids
a r e found in their positions of growth; g is stromatoporoid reef limestone
with intermixed still some reef debris; h is stratified crinoid limestone
exposed directly above the shallow cave, which deposit contains relatively
long crinoid stem fragments and also some calices.
305
1 I
Fig.156. Hjannklint, detailed section, about 1.4 km southwest of Halls Fisklage.

Hogklint Beds. Contact between stratified limestone, reef limestone and reef
debris. The stratified limestone is cross-bedded. The small body of reef
debris in the centre is at all sides surrounded by the stratified sediment.
It contains an intact coral colony in growth orientation. At the base within
the l a r g e r intervening debris body a number of coral colonies, which a r e
generally not in their attitudes of growth. The lines within the larger debris
p a r t s and between the debris and the reef limestone a r e grooves, brought
out by weathering. At the left a layer with parallel arranged remains of
branched corals and bryozoans, crossing both the reef limestone and the
debris deposit.
Slite Beds (Craspedobolbina mucronulata Martinsson, and Beyrichia ponderosa

Martinsson), plus one (Craspedobolbina percurrens Martinsson), which occurs
in the Tofta limestone, the Slite Beds and the Halla-Mulde and Hemse Beds.
Three species, finally a r e known only from the Tofta limestone (Clintiella
bingeriana Martinsson, Bzngeria zygophora Martinsson, and B . cyamoides
Martinsson); their presence is presumably palaeoecologically determined.
There a r e , thus, connections of the Tofta limestone with both the Hogklint
and the Slite Beds. Martinsson (1967) felt inclined to consider the ties with
the lower parts of the Slite Beds (his Slite unit 1, o r Slite 1-111 of the present
author. s e e p.312) strongest. Limestones containing the Craspedobolbina
mucronulata fauna of the Tofta limestone were found by Martinsson also
northeast of the pinch-out of the Tofta limestone a s supposed by Hede, and
these in addition contain some of what Martinsson considered as transient
Slite faunistic elements.
Because of the difference i n expressed opinions and the importance of
the Tofta limestone in the interpretation of the stratigraphical succession
and the palaeogeographical and palaeoecological history of the Gotland
Silurian, the position of the Tofta limestone with respect to the Hogklint Beds
and the Slite Beds needs to be discussed also at this place.
3 06 STRATIGRAPHY OF T H E SILURIAN O F GOTLAND
TABLE XWI
Fossils found in the reef limestones and surrounding crinoid limestones of the Hbgklint Beds of Cotland
1 Litholoay I Reef limestone
~~
rinoid
- - limestone
- -
1 -- t -
-
c
n B
3P i 3 3 2 39
13 Y
E
n
!
a
i
s
:
a
i 2
P ?b
i4
2
- - i -f 3 3
-
a i
- -
i
ALGAE
Rothpletzella sp. + + +
So lenopora got landica Rothpletz + + + c c + b
Unidentified calcareous Algae c t
HYDROZOA
Actinostroma astroites (Rosen) +
Actinostroma sp. t t
Chthrodictyon cf. variolare Rosen +
Clathrodictyon cf. uesiculosum Nicholson et Murie +
Labechia conferta(Lonsda1e) + + c + +
Stromatopora discoidea (Lonsdale) + c t
Unidentified stromatoporoids t + c t t t + t c
Acervularia ananas (L.) + + t +

Aceruularia breviseptata Weissermel t +
Acervularia sp. + c
Calustylis denticulata (Kjerulf) c
Cystiphyllum cylindricum Lonsdale +
Diploepora grayi (Edwards et Haime) t
Dokophyllum hogbomi Wedekind +
Hedstroemophyllum articulatum Wedekind i c
Hedstroemophyllum sp. t
KodonophyllzLm truncatum (L,) c + +
Lykophyllum hisingeri Wedekind +
Omphyma sp. t
Polyorophe glabra Lindstram t t + t
Po lyorophe lidstri7m i Wedekind t
Rhabdophyllum striatum Wedekind i t
Rhegmaphyllum conulus (Lindstrom) t t
Schlotheimophyllum patellatum (Schlotheim) t
Syringaxon dalmani (Edwards et Haime) t + t t t + t
2elophy 1lum interm ed ium Wedekind t
ZeloPhyllum spinosum Wedekind -
ZeloPhyllum hogklinti Wedekind -
ANTHOZOA TABULATA
Aulopora sp. t + t
Favosites asper d'Orbigny t
Favosites gothlandicus Lamar& + t I I
Favosites sp. + t i + I t t t
Halysites catenularius (L.)
Halysites catenulatus (Martini) + + t + t
Planalveolites fougti (Edwards et Haime) t t
Roemevia kunthiana Lindstrom i
Striatopora halli Lindstram + t + + i t
Striatopora stellulata Lindstrbm +
Thamnopora lamellicornis (Lindstrom) + +
HOGKLINT BEDS 307
TABLE XVII(continued)
lrinoid limestone
Lithology -
Reef-limestone
E C
n
s3 2 I4
9
9n 9 k 2
3
8d
0
s"
?
:
1 !j 5
3
P
s
k
e
- - 3 - n
-
r-i 5-
Helzolites interstinctus ( L . ) t + + + t
+
Helzolites sp. +
+ +
+ t t
Unidentified corals + + + + + + t
ANNELIDA
Conchicolites s p . + +
Cornulites sp. +
Spirorbis sp. + +
CRINOIDEA
Cyathocrinus s p . + +
Eucalyptocrinus granulatus Lewis t
Euspirocrinus spivalis Angelin t
Gissocrinus sp. t
Hypanthocrinus sp. +
Polypeltes s p . +
Unidentified crinoid remains + + + + + + +
BRYOZOA
Fenestella mobergi Hennig +
Fenestella reticulata (Hisinger) + + + + + +
Fenestella sp. + + + +
Fistulipora sp. +
Helopora lindstromi Ulrich + +
PhaenoPora lindstrbmi Ulrich +
Ptilodictya lanceolata (Goldfuss) + + +
Ptilodictya triangularis Hisinger +
Unidentified bryozoan remains + + + + + + +
BRACHIOPODA
Atrypa reticularis (L.) + + + + + + +

Atrypina angelini (Lindstram) + +
Camarotoechia borealis (Buch) + + + + +
Camarotoechia nucula (J. de C. Sowerby) + +
Chilidiopsis pecten (L.) + +
Chonetes sp. +
Cliftonia lindstromi Ulrich et Cooper +
Delthyris elevata Dalman + +
Dicaelosia uerneuilana (LindstrBm) + + + + +
Dz'ctyonella capewelli (Davidson) +
Eospirifer radiatus (J. de C. Sowerby) + + +
Howellella elegans (Muir-Wood). + + + +
308 STRATIGRAPHY O F T H E SILURIAN O F GOTLAND
TABLE XVII (continued)
-
Lithology Reef limestone -
:rim limestone
-
-
n B rn
.
. Localities
2 1 2
:
\
>d i I s
i i 2 I -,
Fossils d
i Ei z
3-
9
s;
akl
3-
Leptaena lov&ni D e Verneuil t

Leptaena rhom boidalis (Wilckens) + t 1 1 t +
Linoporella punctata @e Verneuil) t +
Platystrophia sp. + t c +
Plectatrypa imbricata (J. de C. Sowerby) t c
Plectodonta transversalis lata (Jones) c
Protoathyris sp. t
Resserella basalis (Dalman) ~- t 1
Resserella elegantula (Dalman) +
Resserella sp.
Rhipidomella hybrida(J. de C. Sowerby) c c c +
Rhynchotreta cuneata (Dalman) + 1 1 t c +
Sphaerirhynchia wilsoni (J.Sowerby) +
Stropheodonta semiglobosa (Davidson) 1 +
“Strophomena” testudo Lindstrom in muse0 t +
Trimerella sp. c
Unidentified brachiopods + t c 1 c +
LAMELLIBRANCHIATA
Conocardium sp. ~
c +
Cypricardinia sp. +
Rhombopteria sp.
Unidentified lamellibranchs + t
GASTROPODA
Cyclozema turritum LindstrGm t c

Euomphaloptevus alatus (Wahlenberg) + t
Holopea applanata Lindstrom c
Oriostoma ataturn Lindsti%m t
Oriostoma angulatum (Wahlenberg) +
Oriostorna contrarium Lindstrom t
Platyceras comutum Hisinger + i i t i +
Pleurotomaria aequilatera Wahlenberg t
Pleurotomaria claustrata LindstrOm t i
Pleurotomaria limata Lindstrom
Poleumita discors (J. Sowerby) t +
Poleumita globosum (Schlotheim) t +
Pilina unguis (Lindstrom) t t
Subulites uentricosus Hall (according t o HedstrOm, 1923) - t
Trochus gotlandtcus Lindstrom
Trochus incisus Lindstrom +
Trochus visbyensis Lindstrom +
Trochus sp. +
Tryblidium reticulaturn Lindstrom + i
Unidentified gastropods t i +
TENTACULITIDA
Tentaculites sp. i
HOGKLINT BEDS 309
TABLE XVII (continued)
-
tone :rinc :one
7 7
CEPHALOPODA
Dawsonoceras annulaturn (J.Sowerby)

Orthoceras sp. +
Unidentified cephalopods
TRILOBITA
Arctinurus ornatus (Angelin)

Arctinurus sp.
Bumastus sp.
Calymene tubercukzta (Briinn) +
Calymene sp.
Encrinurus Punctatus (Wahlenberg)
Proetus sp.
Warburge1 la rum losa ( Lindst ram)
Unidentified trilobites +
OSTRACODA
Beyrichia sp.
Leperditia sp.
Unidentified ostracodes +
Hede (1940) assumed two stratigraphical hiatuses in the Visby area, the
one between the Hijgklint and Tofta limestone, the other between the Tofta
and Slite limestones. Towards the north of Gotland, the Tofta limestone
gradually wedges out and the two hiatuses finally should unite to one large
hiatus. Hadding (19561, on the other hand, thinks it likely that the hiatuses in
the Visby area a r e a local phenomenon, connected with deposition of the
sediments in shallower water. In north Gotland the stratigraphical sequence
was thought to be complete.
On the basis of data a s shown below, the present author defends a more
than local importance of the upper hiatus. This implies that the Tofta lime-
stone should as a whole be included in the Hijgklint Beds.
In those places in the Visby area where the contact between Tofta lime-
stone and Slite Beds is o r has been observable, indications for a hiatus a r e
usually found, e.g., about 1.2 km north-northeast of Stora Hastnas (Visby
Parish), south-southwest of Bingerskvarn (Visby Parish) and especially
about 1 km southwest-westsouthwest of Suderbys (VIsterhejde Parish). The
Tofta limestone there is formed by a dense, marly limestone, rich in Algae
(Spongiostroma holmi Rothpletz), together with corals, crinoids, etc. The
upper side generally is irregular, often with elevations where fossils a r e
embedded. In the softer parts, up to 4-5 cm deep holes and rills a r e present,
filled with Slite sediment. The uppermost 0.5 mm o r l e s s of the Tofta lime-
stone is coloured rusty brown by limonite.
In these exposures in the Visby a r e a , the Tofta limestone is overlaid
by limestone belonging to the f i r s t stage of the Slite Beds. This Slite I
gradually thins out towards the northwest and seems to be completely lacking
northwest of the line Snickgardsbaden-Kappelshamn-F&-o. With some doubt
with regard to the stratigraphical position, Hede (1940, p.41) mentions two
small exposures about 3 km east-northeast of Lummelunds-bruk. He felt
himself compelled to ascribe the layer, only a few centimetres thick, of
finely crystalline to finely oolitic limestone, which is exposed there, to the
base of the Slite Beds because it directly overlies the Tofta limestone, rich
in Algae, with a sharp boundary. For faunistic reasons, however, he states
that resemblance to a zone, higher in the profile - and included by the
present author in the Slite I1 Beds - is much greater than to that forming the
base of the Slite Beds further southwards. A hiatus, also present there, may
be the solution to the problem. Moreover, the fauna of the lowermost Slite
sediment at Lummelunda is partly rather fragmentary and possibly deposited
there secondary.
Strong indications of an absence of the Slite I Beds is also provided by
the exposure about 0.5 km east-southeast of Vialms, on the coast of Firosund,
a s described by Hede (1933, p.34). There, Hogklint reef limestone is exposed,
showing a very rugged upper side (erosion?), filled with thinly stratified,
light-grey, crystalline limestone of the Slite I1 Beds. That this limestone
actually belongs to the Slite 11 is indicated by the fact that, according to
Hede (1933), at a level about 4-5 m higher, the base is found of the
Ilioma prisca-Megalomus Zone, which according to the experience of both
the present author and others (cf. Hadding, 1956, p.12) i s a good key bed,
shortly below the top of the Slite 11. Unfortunately the present author could
not personally visit this exposure, since it is at the present time situated
on military ground.
Thus there a r e distinct indications of the presence of a stratigraphical

hiatus between the Hogklint Beds (including the Tofta limestone) and the
Slite Beds. The Tofta limestone is generally found there, where the Hogklint
Beds, otherwise to about 35 m thick (Hede, 1940, p.191, show a smaller
thickness, such as near Visby only 20 m (Hadding, 1956, p.15, fig.12).
Moreover, in the north, e.g., on F b o , where the Tofta limestone is missing,
the Upper Hogklint shows a limestone, rich in Algae, that is deposited in
somewhat deeper water, and that stratigraphically corresponds to the Tofta
limestone.
Discuss ion
Such facts a s l e s s marlstone deposition, the occurrence of larger reefs

and the presence of more and larger stromatoporoids and of Algae, suggest
that the Lower Hogklint Beds, highly presumably, were deposited during a
period of gradually shallowing water. This decrease in depth was a continua-
tion of the trend notable during Late Visby time. At the end of Upper Visby
time and in very early Hogklint time, several small reefs developed on the
s e a floor, i n a broad zone with a general direction which presumably was
SLITE BEDS 311
about parallel to the contemporaneous coast line. With further expansion,

they became heavy competitors. Those closest to the open s e a had better
chances of survival and may have caused the deaths of their direct landward
neighbours. They oftenovergrew them, o r fused with them. Fusion could also
take place with reefs occurring near both ends of their longest axis, leading
to the formation of elongated patch reefs. Thus only part of the reefs present
at the beginning of Hbgklint time reached large size in the course of that
period; but the pattern of a broad zone of reefs rather than a single belt
remained. During deposition of the Upper Hagklint Beds the sea was
probably always very shallow. Small shifts of s e a level occurred; during a
few of these the sea floor at the place where the Hbgklint Beds a r e now
exposed probably temporarily emerged dry. During the Late HSgklint, there
was little reef growth. Almost no new reefs began development, but some
already in existence continued growth.
For the first time in the Silurian of Gotland in the Hogklint Beds
stromatoporoids and Algae became abundant. Both appear to have had a
distinct preference for shallow water with not too much pollution by
continental debris. Consequently they a r e often found together. In the Lower
Hogklint they are more common in the reefs than in the stratified deposits,
but in the Tofta facies, a s well a s elsewhere in the uppermost Hogklint, they
are abundant also in the normal sediments.
It was shown that the fixing of the boundary between the Visby and
Hogklint Beds at the first longer and thicker limestone layers is not very
exact, since favourable conditions for increased limestone formation did not
begin simultaneously at all places (p.282). Nevertheless differences i n the
level of the boundary at various localities are not great under normal condi-
tions. Great differences in level are restricted to places where close to the
boundary the stratified sediments are overlaid by large Hbgklint reefs
(Hogklint, Kneippbyn, north of Lickersharnn); crinoid and debris deposits
caused extra limestone deposition there and the heavy reefs led to extra
compaction and outwards-upwards movement of the underlying Visby
sediments (pp.156, 290).
If we draw a line along the points where a stratigraphical boundary
(Visby - Hogklint o r Hogklint - Slite) is found at the same topographical
height, a somewhat curved line is obtained with a direction of 40° in the
south (Visby, Lummelunda) to 55' in the north (FLro). The course of this line
is probably more o r l e s s parallel to the coast line of HogkIint time.
In the lower parts of the Lower HSgklint Beds a dip of about 0°.30', o r
slightly more, in a southeastward direction, can be deduced in the a r e a s of
Lickershamn and Halls Fisklage. During or more likely preceding the shallow
water phase of the Upper Hogklint, a slight epeirogenetic movement seems
to have taken place, since the boundary Hogklint - Slite only dips about
OO.20' -Oo .2 5'.
SLITE BEDS
The Slite Beds constitute the stratigraphical unit which has the
greatest geographical distribution in northern Gotland. It occurs in a strip,
often about 15 km wide, from the east coast (between the northeastern point
of F%roand a place about 8 km south of Slite) to the west coast (between
Tofta and Klintehamn) (Fig.11). In the southwestern part of this strip, Slite
marlstone is present, whereas the northeastern part shows mainly lime-

stones. The topographical height of the limestone a r e a varies between 20 and
70 m, with an average around 40 m; the marlstone area is much lower,
generally l e s s than 15 m above s e a level.
Most exposures of the Slite Beds a r e found inland. There a r e a number
of large, rather b a r e plains (e.g., File Haidar, Hejnum Hgllar). Most of the
exposed cross-sections through parts of the Slite Beds were formed by the
Littorina s e a (Bogeklint, Graunsklint, Gisslauseklint, Spillingsklint, Bara-
backe), but an occasional one was made by the Ancylus lake (Patvalds).
The name of the Slite Beds is derived from the village of Slite, on the
east coast, in Othem Parish. Initially Slite was just the harbour of Othem,
but now it has expanded and overtaken the original village, mainly because
of its good seaport and cement industry.
The total thickness of the Slite Beds is about 100 m.
Stratified sedzments
To treat the thick complex of Slite Beds as one unit would imply that
no detailed picture could be obtained of the evolution of Gotland during the
time that these beds were laid down. On the other hand a reliable
stratigraphical subdivision of the Slite Beds is difficult to make, since there
is rather a great variety in the rocks constituting these beds and the age
relations between the sediments found in the various outcrops a r e still far
from clear. Most important for our purpose is an insight into the
stratigraphical succession of the limestone deposits. With some reservations,
a subdivision into four subunits is presented here. The rocks described by
Hede (1927a, 1928, 1933, 1936, 1940) presumably should be divided into these
four stages as follows:
Slitt? I Beds: Hede (1927a), pp.23-24 (Lagrets aldsta del . . . .); Hede (1940), pp.37-41
(ledet a), pp.42-43 (contact Tofta-Slite), pp.43-45 (ledet b).
Slite IZBeds: Hede (1927a), p.25 (Tomtmyr); Hede (1928), p.14 (kalksten, karakterisered
av bl. a , Ilionia prisca och Megalomus); Hede (1933), pp.31-37, Hede (1936),
pp.19-2Q, 21-22 (tunnlagrad . ... finkristallinisk eller finoolitisk kalksten) ?;
Hede (1940), p.41 (p&tvenne stallen i Lummelunda), pp.45-47 (Iedet c ) , pp.47-49
(ledet d).
S i t e III Beds: Hede (1927a), pp.26-28 (en serie kalkstenar, vilka . . . .); Hede (1928),
p.15 (kalksten, i regeln synnerligen r i k pg stromatoporider), p.16 (kalksten,
sfallvis ratt r i k p l leperditior; en av lagrad kristallinisk kalksten och revkalksten
bestlende skiktserie), pp.17-20, pp.20-24 (Slite margelsten); Hede (1933),
pp.38-39, pp.46-53 (Slite-margelsten); Hede (1936), pp.22-23 (en upp till
omkring 5 m maktig skiktserie; Kalbjerga-kalksten), p.24 (tunnlagrad . . . .
tihnligen starkt marglig kalksten), pp.25-28 (en intill c:a 2 m maktig skiktserie),
pp.29-33 (Slite-margelsten); Hede (1940), pp.49-50 (ledet e).
Slite IV Beds: Hede (1927a), pp.31-32 (sandkalksten); Hede (1928), pp.24-43
(kristallinisk kalksten och revkalksten); Hede (1933) ;pp.40-45, p.53 (contact
Slite marlstone/Slite IV Beds), p.54; Hede (1936), p.32 (Ryssnas-kalksten),
pp.34-36 (lagrade kalkstenar och dem ekvivalerande revkalksten) , pp.36-39
(tunnlagrad . . . . finkristallinisk, stallvis finoolitisk kalksten); Hede (1940),
pp.51-58 (lagrade kristalliniska kalkstenar och dem ekvivalerande revkalksten).
In each of the four stages, a gradual change i n the character of the

sediments can be observed in the direction from about southeast to northwest.
SLITE BEDS 313
These changes a r e , as a rule, most apparent in the east of Gotland (geological

map sheets Slite and Kappelshamn).
Martinsson (1962a)) made a provisional subdivision of the Slite Beds
into three units. His unit (1) comprises the Lower Slite Beds, up to and
including the beds with Conchidium tenuistriatum (now also called Rhipidium
tenuistriatum), and i s thus equivalent to the Slite I-111 proposed here, plus
the Conchidium tenuistriatum Zone, which is taken by the present author as
the base of the Slite IV Beds. Martinsson's unit (2) comprises the marlstone
belt and his unit ( 3 ) corresponds to the Slite IV Beds except for the
Conchidium tenuistriatum Zone.
Slite I Beds
Sediments formed during the first phase of Slite time only occur i n part
of the area where Slite Beds are found, viz., southeast of the line Korpklint
(Snackgardsbaden)-Kappelshamn-F%ro. Northwest of this line, sediments of
this age seem to be lacking.
The northwesternmost site where rocks that definitely belong to the
Slite I Beds, a r e exposed, is located about 1.4 km east-northeast of Stora
Hastnas (in the northeast of Visby Parish). A s mentioned while discussing
the Tofta limestone, the present author considers the rocks of two small
exposures about 3 km east-northeast of Lummelunds-bruk (Hede, 1940, p.41)
to belong to the Slite I1 Beds.
The basis of the Slite I Beds is exposed in several, generally small
exposures, especially in the parishes of Vasterhejde, Tofta, Triikumla and
Stenkumla. It consists of generally thin bedded, more or less marly limestone,
dense to finely crystalline, concordantly overlying the Tofta limestone. The
lower part of the Slite I Beds (zone a of Hede, 1940; maximal thickness about
3.5 m) is fossiliferous and contains some small reef-like parts (e.g., near
Bjars in V i t e r h e j d e Parish, near Martille and F o r s e in Stenkumla Parish,
about 0.25 km northwest of Liksarve in Tofta Parish), which do not, however,
generally constitute true reefs. The upper part of the Slite I Beds (zone b of
Hede, 1940; maximal thickness about 3 m) is poorer in fossils. Occasionally
the rock is finely oolitic (e.g., at Liksarve), but as a rule, it is rather marly.
In the north, at Stora HPstnas (Visby Parish), the sediment is, in part, more
fossiliferous and somewhat bituminous. In the south of the Slite limestone
a r e a , the m a r l content of the sediment is distinctly higher (e.g., Norrgsrde
in Tofta Parish), until this finally passes into the Slite marlstone (Vallve,
north of Paviken, in Eskelhem Parish).
The thickness of the Slite I Beds decreases northwestwards.
Slite 11 Beds
North of Tomtmyr, in Stenkumla Parish, a limestone complex, up to
10 m thick, occurs, which is considered to constitute the Slite I1 Beds.
Stratified limestone alternates with reef limestone. The stratified sediment
is brownish grey to greyish white, finely crystalline to dense, often finely
oolitic and, as a rule, rather hard. The fossil content is moderate, with
mainly bryozoans, stromatoporoids and Algae. The layers a r e usually thin.
The reefs alternating with these layers a r e small.
Slightly south of the above locality, the thickness of the limestone
complex decreases, the m a r l content increases, and the whole is, within a
short distance, replaced by marlstone and strongly marly limestone.

Northwards, no other reefs of the Slite I1 Beds a r e known. The stratified
limestones there, will be described in short in the following paragraphs.
In the south and southeast of the Slite limestone area, the Slite 11 Beds
rest, presumably everywhere, on Slite I Beds. Exposures in these Slite I1 a r e
found, among others, in the a r e a of Hallbro Slott, near Martille (Stenkumla
Parish), east of Visby, between Osterby, Katrinelund and Stora HastnHs.
Further northwestwards, the Slite I1 Beds r e s t directly over the Hogklint
(incl. Tofta) Beds. The latter is the case, among others, in exposures 0.9 km
north of Nors in Fleringe Parish, and east of Vialms, also in Fleringe Parish.
The boundary between the Hbgklint and Slite I1 Beds is generally very sharp,
the Tofta facies generally being absent there. A most interesting exposure
is the one about 0.5 km east-eastsoutheast of Vialms, along the coast of
F%rosund,described by Hede (1933, p.34). There, Hogklint reef limestone is
exposed, which before deposition of the Slite I1 Beds, had been subjected to
severe erosion, against which only the most solid parts of these Hogklint
reefs have resisted. A s a result, a very irregular surface developed. On top
of these reef remains and in between these, later Slite 11 Beds were deposited,
in the form of thin-bedded, light-grey, crystalline limestones, which generally
are rather loosely granular and rich in fossils.
That this limestone belongs to the Slite 11 Beds is apparent from the
fact that in this area, at a level only about 4-5 m higher, the basis is found
of an Ilionia prisca - Megalomus Zone, which constitutes a good marker zone
slightly below the top of the Slite II Beds. Similar exposures a r e reported by
Hede (1936, p.19) from 0.6 km east-southeast of Lansa, 0.9 km southeast of
Lautur, 1.2 km north of the northern farm of Broskogs, directly west of
Kalbjerga, and 1 km northwest of the northwestern end of Aiketrask; all these
localities are i n F%ro.
In general the lower part of the Slite I1 Beds consists of a complex, up
to 8 m thick, of thin-bedded, grey limestone. In the southwest, this sediment
is dominantly finely oolitic, sometimes almost dense o r finely crystalline.
In the north, the basal 3 m a r e often dense o r almost dense and rather
strongly marly; further upwards, the rock becomes somewhat l e s s marly,
and is there, as in the south, dominantly finely oolitic, sometimes dense o r
very finely crystalline. The rock is almost always rich in fossils. Crinoids
and bryozoans a r e especially abundant. Upwards, an increasing number of
stromatoporoids is added, whereas calcareous Algae and several other
fossils a r e also found. The bedding planes a r e usually uneven and rugged.
The above complex is overlaid by 2-4 m of limestone which is
dominantly dense to finely crystalline; in the south it is only rarely, but in
the north more frequently, though always locally, finely oolitic. The bedding
planes a r e usually uneven also there; the thickness of the layers varies
generally between 3 and 10 cm. The limestone is more o r less marly and
generally rich in fossils, especially in the more marly parts. Especially
characteristic among the fossils a r e Ilionia Prisca (Hisinger), which seems
to be absent in the lawer 8 m of the Slite 11 Beds, and "Megalomus" sp. Of
these two fossils, llionia is most common in the marlier parts, whereas
"Megalomus" s e e m s to be found mostly in l e s s marly limestone.
In the a r e a of the geological map sheet Slite, this uppermost Slite 11
zone is the oldest sediment, found exposed, of the Slite Beds. Only some
small outcrops a r e known in the environs of the line between Lokrume
Church and Tingstade Church.
SLITE BEDS 315
Slite III Beds
Sediments ascribed to the Slite I11 Beds are found mainly in a strip,
running approximately southwest-northeast, from Vasterhejde to Vialms i n
the northeast of Fleringe Parish, and from there continuing over part of
western FPro. This strip is broader in the middle than in the southwest and
northeast. Exposures occur, among others, near Vasterhejde, south to south-
west of Gallungs in Vaskinde Parish, west of Suderbys in Bro Parish, in an
extensive area in the parishes of Fole, Hejnum, Tingstade and Othem, near
Uppgards i n Larbro Parish, near Malnars in Fleringe Parish, south of
TrPlgar and Vialms i n Fleringe Parish.
The lowermost part of the Slite 111Beds consists generally of stratified
limestone of light grey to brownish light grey colour, usually very rich i n
stromatoporoids. Exposures have been found, among others, in the a r e a
between Vidmyr and Tingstade Trask, in the environs of the country road
northwest of Tingstade, at the base of a quarry about 1 km southeast of
Traggrds in Tingstade Parish and of a quarry 0.45 km south-southwest of
Lauks in Lokrume Parish, west of Stora Ryftes i n Fole Parish and about
0.6 km east-northeast of File in Othem Parish. The rock is generally finely
crystalline and locally finely oolitic. The bedding planes a r e generally rather
irregular, sometimes smoother. Fossils a r e abundant: stromatoporoids,
corals, crinoids, bryozoans, Algae; also present a r e lamellibranchs, brachio-
pods, cephalopods, gastropods and some ostracodes. In several localities
cross-bedding has been observed. Hede (1928, p.15) reported faint ripple
marks from a locality 1 km west-northwest of Tingstade Church; the ridges
of the marks strike about 170O. The maximum thickness observed for this
zone is just over 4 m.
In some places in the Tingstade-Lokrume a r e a , it can be seen how the
stromatoporoid-rich limestone, described above, is covered by a thin layer
of thin bedded, dense limestone, rich in LePerditia sp. The rock is greenish
o r brownish light grey and also contains small stromatoporoids, some
lamellibranchs and gastropods and some other fossils.
The upper part of the Slite 111 Beds is exposed primarily in the a r e a
between the churches of Tingstade, Fole, BB1 and Othem. It consists
predominantly of thin bedded, sometimes thick bedded, limestone of light
grey to faintly greenish o r brownish light grey colour, sometimes red-
mottled through red crinoid remains. The limestone is, as a rule, rather
pure and finely crystalline, sometimes finely oolitic. In the north, it is
locally somewhat bituminous (e.g., in the large quarry of Storugns i n Larbro
Parish). Interbedded between the limestone layers often are films o r thin
layers of marl. Generally the lower limestone layers a r e thicker than those
higher in this zone. This decrease in the thickness of the limestone layers
and consequent increase in the number of m a r l layers may be connected
with a northwestward shift of the sedimentation belts in Slite 111time, due to
a temporary somewhat greater water depth in this part of the basin. Deeper
water provided more chances for terrigenous debris €0.be laid down. The
northwestward shift also concerned the deposition a r e a of the Slite marl-
stone, the northwestern boundary of which was, at the end of Slite I11 time,
i n the southwest about 6 km further northwest than during Slite I time, in the
east and northeast perhaps even somewhat more. ( S e e also pp.329, 334).
The bedding planes of the Upper Slite III Beds are often rugged o r
knobby. This may be partly due to the fossils embedded in the layers, but
316 STRATIGRAPHY OF THE SILURIAN OF GOTLAND
partly it must have another reason, possibly related to water depth. Among
the fossils present, brachiopods, stromatoporoids and crinoids dominate, but
also corals, bryozoans, Algae and lamellibranchs (of which especially
“Megalomus I ’ sp. is characteristic) a r e anything but rare, and gastropods,
cephalopods, ostracodes and trilobites a r e represented as well. The maximum
thickness of this zone is about 6 m; the total thickness of the Slite 111 Beds
is about 10 m.
In some places, reef limestone is found to occur in the Slite 111 Beds,
such a s southeast, east and northeast of Fole, southeast and east of Graute
i n Hejnum Parish, and southwest of Othem. In the surroundings of reefs, the
stratified limestone can be rich in calcite veins, up to 7 cm wide, and in
stylolites, e.g., in the large quarry in File Haidar.
The m a r l zone, which during Slite I11 time expanded from the southeast
over the limestone area, consists generally of an alternation of usually thin
layers of marlstone and thin layers or lenses of strongly marly limestone.
Presumably close to the northwesternmost line reached by the Slite m a r l a r e
the exposures directly north of Bunge Church and near Utbunge, about 3.2 km
east to slightly east-southeast of Bunge. There the m a r l zone consists of a
dense o r quite dense, marly limestone, which, in part, is rather strongly
sandy (sandy limestone). The m a r l zone there is not very thick. Somewhat
further southeast, for example along the coast near Enenas (Grundudden),
about 3.5 km southeast of Bunge, thin m a r l layers also occur, although there
are, a s well, some layers which a r e of a somewhat fine sandy nature.
S i t e IV Beds
During Slite IV time, the stratified limestone expanded in i t s turn over

the marlstone. This can be seen, among other places, in the Bogeklint and
the klint of Tjeldersholm, about 4.5 and 8 km, respectively, south of Slite;
both show a basis of marlstone with interbedded layers of marly limestone.
From the base of the Slite IV Beds upwards a decrease in marl content can
be established, e.g., in the Bogeklint and in Kvarnbacken o r Lotsbacken
(south of Slite harbour).
In the southwest, from a few fundred metres north of Sion (2.4 km west-
northwest of Triikumla Church) south-southwestwards, the basis of the
Slite IV Beds is formed by a 2-6 cm thick layer of light grey, finely crystal-
line limestone which is rich in fossils; in particular Conchidium tenuistriatum
(Walmstedt) is very abundant.
The most common stratified sediment in the Slite IV Beds is light grey,
very finely to middle crystalline limestone in layers of varying thickness.
In the lower part of this unit, between the limestone layers, films of bluish
o r greenish marl often occur. In the higher parts, the rock is purer; oolitic
members also occur there. The limestone is very rich in fossils.
”Megalomus” sp. occurs regularly, but especially characteristic of the
Slite IV Beds is Pentamems gotlandicus Lebedev. Crinoid remains often give
the limestone a red-mottled appearance. The thickness of the Slite IV Beds
reaches more than 30 m.
From two localities in Fflro, which expose sediments from the lower
part of the Slite IV Beds, Hede (1936, p.33, 36) reported well-developed
ripple marks. These a r e 1.8 km west-southwest of the Holmudden Lighthouse
(strike of the ridges 20’ and 60’) and 0.9 km north-northeast of Ryssnas
(strike of the ridges 50O).
SLITE BEDS 317
Because of the frequent occurrence of reefs of various size, there a r e

many local facies differences in the Slite IV Beds. Consequently, one should
be very careful in drawing stratigraphical conclusions from the occurrence
of a similar rock type in different localities. The fossil-rich crinoid lime-
stone of the Tjeldersholmklint and the fossil-rich limestone of Ytterholmen
a r e not s o definitely synchronous as Hede (1928, p.41) presumed, despite the
fact that both contain abundantly Atrypa reticularis (L.). Both kinds of rock
were formed in the vicinity of reefs and they owe their similar development
in the first place to this situation.
Slite marlstone
The southeastern half of the a r e a where Slite sediments occur at the

surface, shows mainly marlstone. Close to the limestone a r e a , this marlstone
varies somewhat lithologically, but south of the line which roughly runs from
Vastergarn to Slite, the marlstone is rather uniformly developed, bluish grey
to brown grey, dense, distinctly stratified, very fossiliferous, with inter-
bedded thin layers o r lenses of harder, finely crystalline, grey marly lime-
stone. The marlstone is beautifully exposed, to a great thickness, in the large
quarry of the Skanska Cement A.B. in Slite (Fig.157). The thickness of the
marlstone complex i s at least 6 8 m. In the Slite quarry, this thickness of
marlstone is overlaid by stratified limestone (Fig.158) with intercalated reef
limestone.
The mineralogical composition of the upper 30 m of Slite marlstone in
the Slite a r e a is a s follows: 60-70% calcite, 13-17% dolomite, 7-8% quartz,
5-6% feldspars, 2-3% mica and illite, 2-370 kaolinite, and traces of iron
hydrate and oxide. Carbonate-free, the figures are: 38-449 quartz, 28-3376
feldspars, 11-17% mica and illite and 11-17% kaolinite.
The chemical composition of glowed rock of these upper 30 m is:
62-70% CaO, 18-23% Si02, 4.4-5.8% Al2O3, 3.5-4.5% MgO, 2.3-3.34 Fe2O3,
1.2-1.4% K 2 0 , 0.7-1.0% S and 0.1% o r less Na20. The CaC03 content of the
unglowed rock is 76-83%. Large samples were taken, comprising both marl-
stone layers and interbedded marly limestone. The CaC03 content of the
marlstone alone is about 70-7876.
An index zone is found in the Slite marlstone complex at a depth of
about 43-51 m below the top of the marlstone, which in the Slite area is
about 35-43 m below sea level. It consists of a zone with anly 43-50% CaO
and as much as 30-34% SiQ2 at a depth of 49-51 m, overlaid by a zone which
is much richer in CaO (65-7376) and poorer in Si02 (16-20%) at a depth of
43-48 m. Below this double index zone, the average CaO content is 50-58%,
directly above it 53-60%. Above this, f o r a thickness of about 1 0 m, the
values develop, with fluctuations, in the direction of the percentages given
before for the upper 30 m.
Perhaps the index zone corresponds with the lower part of the Slite I1
Beds in the limestone area.
In this section, a review will be given of the more important-reef lime-

stone occurrences within the Slite Beds. Observations of general value will
be shortly described. Most of the reef limestone is of the Hoburgen type.
Fig.157. Quarry of Skinska Cement A.B. in Slite, showing Slite marlstone

of great thickness, overlaid by Slite limestone.
Fig.158. Detail of the SkPnska Cement A.B. quarry in Slite, showing Slite
limestone.
S C r E BEDS 319
Fig.159. Raukar of reef limestone, belonging to the Slite Beds. Solklint, Slite.
Fig.160. Raukar, consisting of reef limestone belonging to the Slite Beds, on

the Lihnaberg in Slite. The planes crossing parts of the reef limestone form
the basis of shallow local depressions which one occurred on the surface of
the reef. At these levels growth probably was temporarily interrupted. Such
depressions may have been present in about the same part of the reef during
various stages i n its development.
Unless otherwise stated, the reef limestone exposed in the localities

mentioned in the next paragraphs, belongs to the Slite IV Beds.
Bogeklint o r Klinteklint (Boge), about 2 k m south-southeast of Boge

Church is one of the most interesting localities of Slite reef limestone.
Although the highest local point of this hillock is approximately in the centre,
the area with the greatest average height p a r t is in the north of the klint.
In the northeast a r e some raukar, consisting of reef limestone. The s a m e
reef is also exposed in the northern part of the east wall of the klint, in the
north wall and in the northern p a r t of the west wall. The reef limestone is
grey and weathers mainly in a brecciated way. Stromatoporoids dominate.
As in most Slite reefs, c o r a l colonies a r e commonly found and occasionally
reach great sizes. Some local stratified intercalations occur with dips of up
to 25' in various directions. Marly pockets of a few square centimetres t o
a few square decimetres are common and usually leave holes after weathering.
The m a r l contains crinoid remains, solitary corals, brachiopods and a few
s m a l l e r coral colonies.
This northern reef presumably has not been much higher than is
exposed. In a number of places on top of the northern part of the klint,
crinoid limestone is found, the reef limestone present in the highest part
often showing a tendency towards stratification. Also a zone of at least 5 m
length, containing several pockets of crinoid limestones embedded in the
Fig.161. Rauk on the Lannaberg in Slite, showing reef limestone of a

brecciaceous nature. Slite Beds.
SLITE BEDS 321
Fig.162. Exposure at the exit of the quarry of the Skanska Cement A.B. in
Slite, south of the Lannaberg. At the top a rauk of reef limestone. This rock
has its base at the level of the land as shown at the left of the photograph.
The reef limestone overlies stratified limestone. At the base of the section
marlstone i s exposed.
reef limestone, about 1.5 m below i t s present top, suggests decreasing

vigour in reef development. Nowhere is the base of this reef limestone
exposed. The maximum thickness of this reef can thus be estimated to be at
least 12 m. The original shape of the reef cannot be established since parts
of it, especially in the northeast and north, have been removed by erosion.
A northeast-southwest major axis seems likely.
Southeast of this reef, there is another occurrence of reef limestone,
but of l e s s e r thickness, and overlying crinoid limestone with reef debris
which probably belongs to the northern reef. Southwards, the base of the
southeastern reef limestone is on an increasingly higher level, suggesting
southeastward expansion of reef growth.
Observations on the plateau of the klint and in the corresponding west
wall, indicate the possibility that the reef limestone of the middle part of
Bogeklint belongs to a number of smaller and thinner reefs.
In the southern and lowest part of Bogeklint, only stratified limestone
is present, showing decreasing marliness upwards. At the bottom, marl
pockets and thin marly layers a r e not exceptional.
No faunistic differences between the smaller reefs and the northern

reef were found.
Solklint, west-northwest of Slite, is a hillock, which is about 250 m long

in a north-south direction, and about 175 m broad in an east-west direction.
In the northeast, a number of raukar a r e found (Fig.159); from thereon raukar
also occur on top of the Solklint in a southwest direction. On the west to north
side of the hillock, reef limestone is exposed, the east to southwest side shows
stratified limestone with reef debris. With increasing distance from the reef,
the sizes and amount of reef debris decrease and a r e least in the southeast.
Since most of the reef limestone is found in an about northeast-southwest
direction and the hillock in this direction is higher than elsewhere, it seems
very likely that this is the orientation of the original major axis of the reef.
Its present length is about 150 m and i t s breadth about 100 m; the observed
thickness of the reef limestone is 7 m. In view of the occurrence of several
raukar in the northeast, which a r e , on the average, only 3 m high, it may be
assumed that the northeast part of the reef has been eroded and that the reef
length has been more than the present 150 m.
Lunnabevg is a hillock of reef limestone north of Slite. On the north and

east side of it, a group of large raukar is found (Fig.160, 161). The reef
limestone i s a mass of stromatoporoids and corals, crinoid-stem fragments
and some bryozoans in a matrix of marly limestone. Most reef builders a r e
rather small. Other fossils, such as brachiopods and lamellibranchs are
relatively r a r e . The general character of the rock in these raukar is rather
different from that in the raukar of Holmhiillar o r Ljugarn, where the
Fig. 163. Detail of Kvarnbacken, Slite, showing reef limestone, enclosing a

m a r l pocket which has been eroded to some depth.
SLITE BEDS 323
average reef builders are much larger, the matrix purer, the number of
coral colonies smaller.
Dips, up to about 20°, but only perceptible for a short distance (usually
l e s s than a metre), can be seen in some places in the reef limestone. These
a r e caused by the positions of the reef builders. Upwards, within a thickness
of a few decimetres, the colonies may gradually return to a horizontal
position. This suggests that in these places the reef builders have
straightened out unevennesses in the topography of the growing reef surface.
It seems likely that the LPnnaberg and i t s raukar a r e the remains of
one reef, slightly oval in plan, approximately 250 m long and with its longest
axis about northeast-southwest. The thickness has been 10 m or more. The
lowermost parts of the deepest exposed raukar show a more marly and
vaguely stratified matrix, which may be an indication that these parts were
formed in an early stage of reef growth.
At the south side of the hillock and reef, some reef debris is exposed,
which was deposited rather close to the reef. It is notable that there a r e few
large reef builders nor larger fragments of these. Crinoid remains and
small fragments (up to a few centimetres) of stromatoporoids, bryozoans and
corals a r e dominant. Bedding is irregular, becoming more distinct as the
distance from the reef increases.
In between the Lannaberg in the north and the cement factory in the
south, a raukar field is present, which will be called the cement-factory
raukar field. On the south side, in an exit of the cement-factory quarry, the
base of the reef limestone is exposed in the form of 5.5 m stratified lime-
stone, underlaid by Slite marlstone (Fig.162). This stratified.limestone is,
in its lower parts, a normal kind of limestone with some crinoid remains,
but passes upwards into crinoid limestone with reef debris.
About 60 m north of this exposure, the base of the reef limestone is
situated about 7 m lower. Underlying it is crinoid limestone of unknown
thickness. 75 m further north, the reef base is another metre lower. This
shows that the contact of Slite marlstone and Slite limestone is not a
horizontal surface. There a r e two possibilities: (a) reef formation began
immediately after deposition of the Slite marlstone was replaced by lime-
stone sedimentation and the non-horizontal contact is caused by differential
compression of the marl; (b) reef formation began already during the time
in which in the close environment still the uppermost Slite marlstone was
formed. The exposures present no conclusive evidence but to judge from
their general nature possibility (b) seems the most likely.
A s f a r as can be established, all reef limestone belongs to one reef.
The exposed thickness reaches about 8 m; for the centre of the reef a
thickness of 10-12 m may be assumed.
Kvarnbacken (Lotsbacken). This hill is situated directly south of the

harbour of Slite. On its east side, along the beach, a section is exposed.
This section shows three successive zones.
At the base is a zone with many irregular limestone lenses in a matrix
of bluish grey marl. The lenses a r e 1-4 cm thick. The limestone is dense
to finely crystalline and marly; locally it contains some pyrite. The marl
bands between the limestone lenses a r e generally less than 1 cm thick; only
occasionally a specific m a r l band can be followed for a distance of more than
10 m. Most wedge out after only a short distance. This zone is moderately
fossiliferous. It is exposed around and directly above present sea level, up

to a visible thickness of between 1 m and a little more than 2 m. The
sediments of this zone a r e l e s s resistant to erosion. In consequence, the
zone r e t r e a t s underneath the two overlying ones.
The second zone, 0.1-0.8 m thick, consists of marly limestone with
marly intercalations. The limestone is finely to middle crystalline, light
grey to faintly bluish grey, weathers to brownish grey to yellowish brown
and is more fossiliferous. It occurs in lenses, 1-12 cm thick and one o r a
few m e t r e s long; some are of greater extension and have the character of
t r u e layers. Marl is mainly concentrated in pockets. Marl bands also occur,
generally l e s s than 1 cm thick and only extending slightly.
The upper part of the section shows crinoid limestone, which is middle
crystalline, light grey but through weathering bluish grey, highly fossiliferous
(crinoids, bryozoans, corals); very small crystals of pyrite occur. The layers
vary in thickness between 1 cm and several decimetres. Locally thin marl
bands are interstratified. The thicker limestone layers often contain larger
fossils than the thinner ones.
The third zone of these three is most resistant against erosion. All
three show dips in varying directions and degrees (up to a maximum of
about 2 0 O 1.
Further towards the north, marly reef limestone is exposed (Fig.163)
for a distance of more than 100 m. Stromatoporoids predominate, several
of which have grown strongly in an upward direction. Coral colonies a r e
common. South of the harbour, sediments, comparable to those of the lower
zone in the east of the hill, a r e exposed.
Around the mill (Swedish: kvarn) marly reef limestone is exposed,
belong to a reef other than that along the east coast. This central Kvarnbacken
reef is larger and presumably also a little younger.
Slottsbacken. This hill, about 1 0 m high, is situated south of Slite, on an

isthmus between the Baltic and Bogeviken (Boge Bay). It consists almost entirely of
grey reef limestone, which is best exposed in a number of raukar in the east. The reef
limestone is strongly weathered. Locally it shows parts with a more o r less vague
stratification, which parts a r e up to 2 dm high and a few metres long, and show dips
of 0-20°. At the very top of the hill, there a r e a few very small outcrops of crinoid
limestone.
Along the western shore of Hydeviken, in the south, sediment is exposed,

up to 2 m above sea level, which belongs to the uppermost Slite marlstone. It is
similar to the rock at the base oi Kvarnbacken and high in the quarry of the Slite
cement factory and consists of lenses o r thin local layers of limestone within a softer
marlstone. At a height of 5 m above sea level, stratified, crystalline, marly limestone
is exposed, A little further north, it can be seen that the limestone has its base about
3 m above sea level. It overlies a transition zone of about 0.5 m thick, consisting of
somewhat irregular layers of marly limestone, 0.5-5 cm thick, alternating with softer
marlstone layers, which upwards decrease in number and thickness. Some marlstone
layers can also be noted in the lowermost part of the overlying limestone. Both the
marlstone and the limestone of the transition zone a r e very fossiliferous.
Further northwards, about 0.6 km south of the north side of the bay, another
exposure i s found. In the highest part of the marlstone, a local, large limestone lens
is found, up to 50 cm thick. The marlstone is also rich in colonies of
Halysites catenulatus (Martini), up to 120 cm long and 40 cm thick. The gradual
transition zone from marlstone to limestone varies in thickness from 20 cm to about
2 m. A number of raukar occur here, partly consisting of stratified limestone with
crinoids and partly of weathered reef limestone. The base of the exposed reef lime-
SLITE BEDS 325
stone descends f r o m south to north, from about 7 m to about 3 rn above s e a level,
which i s only about 1.5 m o r less above the top of the marlstonq. The exposed reef
limestone is not thicker than 3.5 m . However, the original thickness should have'been
at least 7.5 m , judging from a comparison between the raukar situated a t the highest
and lowest levels in this a r e a .
On and around Graunsklint, northeast of Larbro, only little reef limestone i s

exposed. Most of the exposures show pormal stratified limestones o r stratified
limestones with crinoids and reef debris. The distribution of the sediment types and
the topography of the surface of the hillock make it likely that a number of small
reefs are present. Nowhere is reef limestone exposed thicker than 5 m , but the t r u e
thickness of the r e e f s may have been somewhat m o r e .
The hillock of Patvalds, about 3.5 km southeast of Larbro, shows grey reef
limestone and some stratified crinoid limestone with reef debris, exposed in some
p a r t s of a low cliff around the hillock and in several places on its surface. Nowhere
is the observed thickness of the reef limestone more than 3 m. It seems very likely
that a number of reefs played a p a r t here.
Gisslauseklint, about 3 km e a s t of Othem, shows exposures in a low and inter-

rupted wall and scattered on top of the klint. Reef limestone, reef debris and stratified
limestone with reef material crop out. The reef limestone is traversed by vertical and
subvertical cracks (see p.152). About 160 m northeast of the road Othem-Hellvi, on
the east side of the hillock, a contact of reef limestone and the surrounding sediments
is exposed. At the contact, a number of coral colonies a r e found, up to 25 c m in
diameter, apparently in their positions of growth. Some of the stromatoporoids, most
of which a r e lenticular in shape, a r e not in their growth positions. Very close to the
reef, there are several large washed-out reef builders and fragments of these. At a
distance of 1.5 m away from the r e e f , the debris i s already r a t h e r fine. with only a
few elements of 5-10 c m , embedded in stratified limestone with crinoids.
Spillingsklint (Othem Parish) i s a r a t h e r extensive hillock with expysures in

a low and interrupted cliff wall and in some raukar. In the north and e a s t , reef lime-
stone is dominating. It s e e m s likely that reef growth began in several places, but that
in expansion, p a r t of the reefs united. In the south of the southeast wall, thick bedded
limestone with reef debris is found. Since the angle between the southeast boundary
of the reef limestone and the position of the exposed wall is very small, the sediment
in the wall, southwestwards, shows clearly, how the amount and size of the reef debris
decreases with gradually increas,ing distance from the reef.
The plain of File Haidar shows badly exposed Slite I11 reef limestone in'between
scattered vegetation. T h e r e i s only one quarry, made in stratified limestone. When
visited in 1959, it showed a vaguely bedded intercalation, about 4 m thick and 6 m long.
consisting of crinoid remains with some stromatoporoids and a number of coral
colonies, most of which were not in a position.of growth. The stratified l i q e s t o n e s
abuted against it and deposition apparently took place very close to a reef;
The reef limestone of Hejnum Htillur, too, is l e s s suitable for detailed studies
since it i s only exposed in horizontal outcrops in between the vegetation. It belongs to
the Slite 111 Beds. Normal grey reef limestone, occasionally red-mottled. dense,
strongly recrystallized, occurs. Stromatoporoids a r e the main reef builders. but c o r a l
colonies are common. About one third of the latter a r e not in their position of growth
(see also Chapter XII, p.436). The reef limestone is traversed by vertical fissures
(see p.152).
Sfiinnbjersbucke. This is a very low hill, situated north of Tjelders, o r 6 km

south of Boge Church. T h r e e raukar a r e a s are found there. Of these, the northem one.
possesses only two raukar: a northern rauk of about 5 m and a southern raulc of about
2 m high. The central raukar field i s the largest one, with raukar up to about 4 m high.
STRATIGRAPHY OF THE SILURIAN OF GOTLAND
The three fields represent the remains of a t least three fossil reefs. A l l raukar consist
of stromatoporoid reef limestone, which is greenish grey and dense. In their lower
p a r t s tower-shaped colonies of stromatoporoids occur, up t o 25 cm high, and consist
of a pile of inverted basin-shaped latilaminae, 5-10 cm in diameter. Most of these a r e
not in their positions of growth. Coral colonies, too, a r e common in the lower parts.
Higher in the raukar, dome-shaped stromatoporoids grew close together and united
into covers with dome-shaped elevations. Also thin colonies of large horizontal
extension occur. Pockets with m a r l o r crinoid limestone a r e found locally. Horizontal
or concave lines of limited extension, which suggest interruptions o r retardations in
reef growth, a r e also seen in some raukar.
The sediment underlying the reef limestone is exposed in the north of the hill,
not far away f r o m the northern raukar field. This is a stratified marly limestone,
finely crystalline, light grey. with l a y e r s of on the average 1-4 c m thick and bedding
planes which are often irregular and knobby. Some m a r l pockets occur, which as a
result of weathering, often leave holes. The maximum height over which this sediment
is exposed is 2.5 m. A t the base, the fossil content is moderate, but this increases
upwards, with crinoid and bryozoan fragments, solitary and social corals, stromato-
poroids, brachiopods. T h i s increase in the number of fossils suggests reef develop-
ment not far away. Also the slight topographical elevation of Spinnbjersbacke i s
indicative of the presence of reef !imestone. The top of the 5 m high rauk in the
southern field contains some crinoid limestone, which might indicate that the f o r m e r
reef has not been much higher. Altogether, an original thickness of about 7-8 m seems
likely for the reefs at Spinnbjersbacke.
TjeZders. In the forests west, southwest and south of Tjelders, some slight
elevations a r e found, with small exposures of reef limestone. 0 . 2 5 km south of Tjelders.
an isolated rauk i s found and 0.6 km west of Tjelders, a few raukar occur together.
All show weathered reef limestone of Hoburgen type. Another few, very small outcrops
show crinoid limestone with a varying content of reef debris.
Tjeldersholm. This is a promontory, about 0.3 km long and 0.5 km broad,

east-northeast of Tjelders. In the northeast. a section i s exposed from s e a level up
to a height of 6-7 m at maximum. This shows predominantly marly crinoid limestone.
which through weathering has become yellowish brown to brownish grey in colour.
The layers a r e generally 0.5-5 c m thick; bedding planes are irregular and rugged.
Dips of a few degrees, in various directions. are common. The sediment i s very
fossiliferous. with crinoid remains, solitary and social corals, stromatoporoids,
bryozoans, brachiopods, gastropods, trilobites. P a r t of the fossils a r e certainly in
secondary positions and presumably a r e reef debris. Bryozoans, corals and
stromatoporoids a r e also represented by several fragments, p a r t of these being
somewhat rounded. In general, the sediment is most marly in i t s lowest 2.5-3 m.
About 4 m above present s e a level beddfng becomes somewhat. more regular. The
content and coarseness of recognizable reef debris decreases. The section is cut by
several joints, most of which a r e filled with calcite.
North of the two best exposures of crinoid limestone in the Tjeldersholm a r e a .
two outcrops of reef limestone are found, the largest of which measures about 3.5 m
in hight and 6 m in length. Since this section is cut through the reef periphery. and
the reef limestone descends below the present s e a level, the original dimensions of
the reef must have been larger. That much m o r e reef limestone has been present in
Tjeldersholm than is found there now, i s also indicated by the amount of crinoid lime-
stone and the dips within this sediment, and by the large amount of reef-limestone
fragments on the shore.
The lower part of the exposed solid reef limestone is very marly. Next to the
stromatoporoids, many c o r a l colonies are found, several of which a r e relatively thin.
Barabacke is a low. elongated hill, west of B a r a Odekyrka, which shows reef

limestone for a distance of more than 0 . 5 km and a visible height of about 7 m maximum.
The reef limestone i s very weathered. The reef grew at the end of Slite time and
SLITE BEDS 327
possibly also still at the very beginning of Halla-Mulde time. In the south. the reef
limestone is surrounded by the Bara oolite, which forms p a r t of the Halla limestone.
An i teresting small hill is found about 1.4 km n o r t h - n o r t h e a s t of Bara

&ekyrka'. In the north, this hill is cut by a road. Exposures a r e up to 2.5 m
high. North of the road, stratified limestone is exposed with layers of on the
average 2-15 cm thick. The sediment is finely to partly middle crystalline,
light-grey coloured, through weathering light brownish grey. At the base, it
is extremely rich in small fossils and fossil fragments (bryozoans, crinoids,
brachiopods, corals, stromatoporoids). Higher up, the fossil material is
much coarser, whereas loose blocks show that in the highest part, some reef
limestone has been present. Reef limestone also forms the central part of
the exposure at the south s!de of the road. The dimensions of the hill and the
distribution of sediments suggest that the reef has not been longer than
approximately 60 m and in breadth was still somewhat smaller. Weathered
outcrops in the east and south of the hill show reef limestone with a maximum
thickness of about 1 m, underlaid by stratified limestone. In i t s centre, the
reef may have bee? thicker, but presumably did not exceed 4 m even there.
The stratigraphical position of the reef is about at the top of the Slite Beds.
Slight differences in the amount of reef debris present in the stratified
limestone around the reef suggest that most debris was deposited east and
south of the reef. On the southeast side, the amount of debris is slightly less
and the average size of the fragments slightly smaller. North of the reef,
there is again somewhat l e s s and smaller debris.
In the environment of this hill, a number of other similar elevations
occur, which also owe their origin to the presence of fossil reefs, which a r e ,
however, b,adlp' exposed.
The f a r m Simun.de, 0.7 km northeast of B a r a (Idekyrka, is situated on a low
hill, which r i s e s .about 4-5 m above its surroundings. The hill consists predominantly
of reef limestone, which is, however, badly exposed. On the south s i d e , some stratified
limestone i s present.
Directly southwest of the f a r m Hommunds, 0 . 2 5 km northeast of Simunde, a

s i m i l a r hill is Pound. It contains a reef, which in a northeast-southwest direction
m e a s u r e s about 45 m and in a direction perpendicular to it about 30 m. The maximum
visible thickness of the reef limestone i s 3 m; in the centre of the reef. the thickness
may be expected to be about 5 m . In two old q u a r r i e s in the south of the hill, stratified
crinoid limestone is ,exposed, which also contains some reef debris. The .amount and
coarseness of this debris decrease from the top to the bottom of the sections and also
in horizontal directions away from the reef.
;, I IT
1.6 km south'southttest of ( f o r m e r ) Sirnunde Station,which i s 2.25 km

west-southwest of B a r a bdekyrka, a 4-5 m high elevation i s present. whose origin i s
a1s.o connected with a fossil, reef. A section exposed in the west of this hill i s inter-
esting; it shows stratified sediments that have been deposited a t the northwest, i.e..
leeside, of the reef. At the base, finely crystalline limestone i s found. which is thin
bedded and strongly marly. It alternates with thin bands of bluish grey m'arl. Within
the limestone small pockets of m a r l occur. The limestone is very fossiliferous.
especially in small fragments of crinoids and bryozoans. Upwards the limestone i s
. ^ 1
1 .
lThe.Swedish word Odekyrka denotes a church which i s not longer used and, therefore,
has fallen into disrepair.
less marly, the marl bands disappear and the amount and coarseness of reef debris
increase. This reef debris also includes now colonies of corals and stromatoporoids.
The general picture indicates deposition at a gradually decreasing distance from the
reef. Reef limestone, finally forms the top of the section. Reef limestone i s exposed
for a thickness of about 2 m. In the centre, the reef is presumably 4-5 m thick.
Near Lillfole, 1,7 km southwest of Fole, a reef limestone a r e a is present,

which appears a s a topographical elevation of little height. No important exposures
a r e found here.
Southwest, east and northeast of Fole Church, reef limestone is present,

which belongs to the Slite I11 Beds. Only small and weathered horizontal outcrops are
found. Stratified sediments alternate, horizontally, with reef limestone, suggesting the
presence of several reefs in this area. The reef limestone is rich in stromatoporoids,
most of which a r e dome shaped and seem to be in their positions of growth. Coral
colonies a r e r a r e . The reef limestone i s cut by a number of fissures, with a general
direction of llOo (E Z O O S ) .
Close to the cross-roads, about 0.7 km southeast of Fole, an old quarry shows
stratified limestone. containing reef debris. At the top of the low section, which is
exposed, the recognizable reef debris constitutes approximately 13.5% of the total
rock volume. This sediment seems to have been deposited at the south-southeast side
of a reef, at a distance of about 20 m. The size of the reef could not be established.
In a few places, cross-bedding is found, directed away from the reef. The rock about
1.5 m lower in the section, has presumably been deposited at a somewhat greater
distance from the reef and contains about 7.5-10% macroscopically recognizable
reef debris.
Between Stora Hellvigs and Lilla &'jells, about 2 km east-northeast of

Endre, a reef limestone area is found, about 0.4 x 1.2 km in size, which is orientated
northeast-southwest. The reef limestone is badly exposed and of the general type.
A few fissures have been observed, directed 140° (E 50° S). An exceptional fissure i s
perpendicular to this direction.
The hill of Endre, Endre Backe, consists in its centre and north almost
entirely of reef limestone. In the south, stratified limestone with reef debris is
present. No particularly valuable observations were made.
In between the farm Norrbys and the sanatorium, along the Yoad StOYa Vede-
Follingbo, is a wall which shows stratified limestone with reef debris. Close to
Stora Vede, a former railroad crosses underneath the road. It is mainly cut in reef
limestone. Neither locality presents anything of special interest.
A list of fossils found in the Slite reef limestones and the crinoid lime-
stones adjacent to these, is given in Table XVIII. The reef limestone i n
column 1 is from the Slite I Beds; the locality is 1.2 km north-northwest of
Tofta Church. The fossils mentioned in column 2 a r e from reef limestone
in the Slite I Beds, occurring southwest of Suderbys in Vasterhejde Parish.
To the Slite III Beds belongs the reef limestone from west of Gardrungs,
Stenkumla Parish, of which the fossil content is given in the 3rd column.
Columns 4-11 give fossils from SIite IV reef limestone; the locality given
as Simunde is 1.6 km south-southwest of the former railway station of
Simunde ( o r 3.2 km south of Kallunge Church).
The f i r s t crinoid limestone column lists fossils found in the Slite I
Beds 0.25 km northwest of Liksarve in Tofta Parish, the second column
shows which fossils have been noted from Slite 111 crinoid limestone south-
southwest of Gardrungs (or about 2 km south-southwest of Stenkumla Church).
SLITE BEDS 329
The further crinoid limestone sites a r e i n the Slite IV Beds; the one listed
as B a r a is 1.4 km north-northeast of Bara Odekyrka, the one listed as
Simunde being the same a s that in which the reef fossils of column 10 were
observed.
Discuss ion
From the data in the preceding sections on the Slite sediments, one can
now attempt to compose a rough picture of what has happened in the course
of Slite time.
Deposition of the Slite I Beds followed the strong decrease in water
depth at the end of Hogklint-Tofta time. The beds a r e missing, apparently,
in the north of the Slite limestone area. During Slite I time, water depth
presumably fluctuated somewhat, but was shallow, with during the f i r s t part
perhaps some increase in depth and during the second some slight decrease.
The initial increase in water depth is suggested by the fact that after the
deposition of the Tofta limestone in very shallow water there is again a
beginning of reef growth. The next decrease i n depth i s thought likely from
the observations that the just started reef growth ends again, whereas there
was locally deposition of oolitic limestone and elsewhere of somewhat
bituminous marly limestone.
During Slite I1 time, the a r e a of sediment deposition expanded north-
westwards and Slite I1 Beds a r e found over the entire Slite limestone area;
water depth increased, probably with fluctuations.
The increase in water depth presumably continued during Slite 111 time,
i n which a north and northwestward extension of the a r e a of marl deposition
took place.
The Slite IV Beds reflect a retreat of the a r e a of marl sedimentation
southwestwards. Presumably a new epeirogenetic movement had occurred,
which initially influenced the water depth and the distribution of the
sedimentation belts rather significantly. Thereafter, a more gradual shal-
lowing of the water is assumed. Intercalated in these beds a r e most of the
Slite reefs and also the most important ones.
During the entire Slite Period, m a r l deposition took place southeast
of the a r e a where the limestones were laid down; that is, at larger distance
from the coast. Marl sedimentation was faster than limestone formation;
about 70 m of marlstone corresponds to about 30 m of limestone (Slite 1-111
Beds). Marl deposition undoubtedly took place in deeper water than that i n
which the limestones were laid down. In comparison to the Slite limestones,
the marlstone lacks cross-bedding, ripple marks o r the presence of Algae.
Within the Slite Beds fossils such as Cyrtia exporrecta (Wah1enberg)and
Dicaelosia biloba (L.) were only found in the marlstone, and Plectodonta
transversalis (Da1man)was foundmore commonly in this deposit than in the lime-
stones. Ziegler (1965),working on the Silurian of Wales, considered these three
fossils as belonging to the Clorinda community, the deepest-water com-
munity of the five which he could distinguish.
Slight variations i n water depth caused shifts of the a r e a of marl
sedimentation, suggesting that water depth during Slite 111 and the beginning
of Slite IV was about a t effective wave base; i n FPro, ripple marks a r e found
in limestone directly overlying marl.
It is difficult to give absolute figures for the variations that took place
TABLE XVm
F o ssils found in the reef limestones Id surroundine crinoid limestones of t h e Site Beds of Gotland
Reef limestone
- -0
m
E! 2
ia
c
Localities
5 Y
a
f.: $ 9
u -3
3 i
2
i! 3 h
a
Fossils
B $- -5 Y
i %
- - 4
-
i-
L
ALGAE
Rothpletz$lla sp. + +
Solenopora sp. + t
Unidentified calcareous Algae ~ + +
HYDROZOA
Actinostroma sp. +
Clathrodictyon striptellum
' (d'0rbigny)-
Unidentified stromatoporoids ~ + + + t t +
Aceruularia ananas (L.) t

Aceruularia sp. + + t
Cystiphyllum cylindricum Lonsdale. t
Diploepora grayi (Edwards et Haime + t t t
Entelophyllum fasciculatum Wedekin t
Hedstroemophyllum articulatum
Wedekind - i
Lykophyllum hisingeri Wedekind - t
Omphyma sp. t t
Rhegmaphyllum conulus (Lindstram: + + +
Stauria fauosa (L.) t
ANTHOZOA TABULATA
Airlopara s p . t t + + i
Favosites asper d ' O r b i g n y L
Eavos ites goth landicus Lam a rc k - t t + + i
Eatlosites sp. t i t t t + i
.
Ha lvs ites cat enu larius ( L ) _ _ +
Halysites catenufatus (Martini) ~ +
Halysites sp. t t + t t + 4
Planali~eolitesfougti
(Edwards et Haime)-
Roenieria sp. i
Syringopora sp. i i i + +
Heliolites bawandei Penecke - + +

Helioliles interstinctus (L.) - i i i + t + +
Heliolites paruistelEa rerd. Roeme! i + + +
Heliolites sp. i +
Plaswopora foroensis Lindstram - i t + +
Plasniopora petallifonnis
(Lonsdale),
Plasniopora m d i s LindstrUm'- i +
Plaswopora sp. i
Pvopora sprciosa Billings ~
Thecia sif~i~iderniana (Goldfuss)- i + +

Unidentified cor al s ______ t i i t t + t
SLITE BEDS 331
TABLE XWII (continued)
\[ Localities
f-
8
c
4
g g
it
-
”
9
-
B
1
1
-
W
I
3
Lj
h
g
I
-
z!a
L
8-
tc
-
3
d
9
t-
E
c
0
E
9
Ly
+-
d
n-
al
C
s
;j
-
ANNELIDA
Conchicolites sp. +
Cornulites scalariformis Vine +
Cornulites serpularius Schlotheim -
Cornulites sp. t + t +
Spirorbis sp. + +
Unidentified annelid remains +
CRINOIDEA
Barrandeocrinus sceptrum Angelin-
Eotryocrinus sp.
Calceocrinus sp.
Cyathocrinus sp. +
Euspirocrims spiralis Angelin __
Gissocrims sp. +
Herpetocrinus sp.
Pisocrinus sp.
Promelocrinus sp,
Streptocrinus crotalurus (Angelin)-
Unidentified crinoid remains + + + + + + + + + +
BRYOZOA
Coenites repens (Wahlenberg) + + +

Coenites sp. + + + +
Fenestella mobergi Hennig +
Fenestella reticulata (Hisinger)- + + + + t
Fenestella sp. + + + t +
Eistulapora sp. + +
Ptilodictya lanceolata (Goldfuss)- + + + + +
Unidentified bryozoan remains __ t + + + + + + t +
BRACHIOPODA
t
Atrypa reticularis ( L . ) + + + + + + t + t
+ t + + + + + + t
t t + + t +
t
Camarotoechza sp. +
t + i
+ i
+
+
t
+I + + t
Delthyris eleuata Dalman 4 t +
Dictyonella sp.
(J.de C. Sowerby) +
TABLE XVm (continued)
Reef limestone
- - ~ ~
I I Crinoid
- -
Iimestone
- - - - -
W n
E u E c
3 3 ;
.: 3
.3 3
c d
2 a5
Y 9 Q
h
0
g
a
-5 -k! -F8 % 2
c h
C .c Q
n
-
.A
3
.d
m
a
- -
9
; 5
i
- -
D E
-
C
$
-
9
p
-I
-
d
8
-
2
5-
Eospirifer globosus (Salter) ~ +

Eospirifer grandis (Hedstrom) +
Eospirifer interlineatus
(Hedstrom, non J. de C. Sowerby)-
Eospirifer sinuosus (Hedstr6m)- + t
Eospirifer s p . + + + + + t
Gypidula galeata (Dalman) + + + + t
Leptaena vhomboidalis (Wi1ckens)- + + + + + + t
Linoporella punctata (De Verneui1)-
Meristina obtusa (J.Sowerby) - + + +
Orbicubidea sp.
Pentamerus gotlandicus Lebedev- + + +
Platystrophia biforata (Sch1otheim)- + + +
Platystrophia sp.
Plectatrypa imbn’cata
(J. de C. Sowerby)- + + + + + + +
Plectatrypa lamellosa (Lov6n) - +
Ptychopleurella bouchardi
(Davidson)- + + + t + +
Resserella elegantula (Dalmanl- + + + + + + + + +
Resserella sp. + + + + + +
Rhipidomella hybrida
(J. de C. Sowerby)- i
Rhynchotreta cuneata (Da1man)- + + + + + + +
Sphaerirhynchia wilsoni
(J. Sowerby)- +
Stropheodonta s em i g bbos a
(Davidson)- + + + + + + + +
”Strophomena” sp. + + +
Trimerella lindstromi (Dal1)-
Trimerella sp. + + +
Unidentified brachiopods + + + + + + +
LAMELLIBRANCHIATA
Conocardium sp. + + t + +
Cypricardinia s p .
“Megalomus” sp.
Mytilarca acuta Lindstrom in museo-
Pterinea sp.
Unidentified lamellibranchs ~
PTEROPODA
Conularia laeuis Lindstrom ~
GASTROPODA
Bellerophon sp. +
Craspedostoma elegantulum
Lindstram- +
SLITE BEDS 333
TABLE XVm (continued)
.\ Lithology
-. I Reef limestone linestone
-
m
2 E
.3
Localities
-
e
Y c
E 0 c
Fo8si1s
y$ is
-
8
-
R
-
m
d
i;
Craspedostoma sp. +
Cyclonema sp. +
Euomphalopterus alatus
(Wah1enberg)- +
Hormotoma sp. + +
Lophospira bicincta (Hall.) +
Murchisonia imbricata Lindstrom- +
Oriostoma acutum Lindstrom +
Oriostoma angulatum (Wahlenberg)+ +
Platyceras cornutum Hisinger- t t
Platyceras cyathinum L i n d s t r o m 4
Platyceras enorme Lindstrom- +
Pleurotomaria limata Lindstram- +
Poleumita discors (J. Sowerby)- +
Poleumita globosum (Schlotheim)_ +
Poleumita sp. t + +
Trochus incisus Lindstrom +
Trochus sp. t
Unidentified gastropods +
TENTACULITIDA
Tentaculites multiannulatus Vine __

Tentaculites sp. + +
CEPHALOPODA
Ascoceras fistula Lindstrom

Ascoceras lagena Lindstrom
Ascoceras sp. +
Choanoceras mutabile Lindstram- +
Ophidioceras reticulatum Angelin - +
Ophidzoceras sp. +
Orthoceras sp. + t t
Phragmoceras inflemm Hedstrom - t
Phragmoceras sp. t
Unidentified cephalopods +
TRILOBITA
Arctinurus ornatus (Angelin)

Bumastus sulcatus Lindstrom t
Bumastus sp. +
t
Calymeue sp. t t
t 1.
Proetus uerrucosus Lindstrom
Proetus sp. t
Sphaerexochus sp.
c k
OSTRACODA
Beyrichia sp. t
Cvaspedoholbina clauata (Kolmodin) t
Leperditin baltica (Hisinger) c t
Unidentified ostracodes t c
334 STRATIGRAPHY OF T H E SILURIAN O F GOTLAND
in water depth. An attempt, however, can be made f o r the depth increase

during Slite 111, on the b a s i s of the distance over which the northwestern
boundary of the area of m a r l deposition moved and the assumption that the
slope of the sea floor amounted to slightly l e s s than half a degree. An
increase in water depth in the o r d e r of 25 m s e e m s likely then. Estimated
in a s i m i l a r way, the d e c r e a s e in water depth during Slite IV time would have
been about 30 m. The r e e f s then developed in water deeper than that in which
the Slite I and 11 Beds were laid down, about equally deep as that in which the
southeastern Slite I11 Beds formed and less deep than the water in which
m a r l sedimentated.
If we connect the locations of the northwesternmost outcrops where
Slite marlstone is found, a line is obtained whkch in all likelihood was a
depth contour of that time. This line runs from Liksarve (1.7 k m north-
northeast of Tofta) in the southwest, via Hejdeby and Othem, to Bunge in the
northeast, with a s t r i k e of about 55O. This might indicate that the coast-line
direction at that time was about northeast-eastnortheast-southwest-
westsouthwest.
HALLA-MULDE BEDS
Halla limestone
The Halla limestone is best developed in the e a s t of Gotland, where it

reaches a thickness of approximately 15 m. There, i t s lower part consists
partly of oolite, partly of dense to finely crystalline limestone. The oolite
is, among others, exposed immediately south of Barabacke (west of B a r a
Odekyrka), and from t h e r e the name B a r a oolite is derived. It is a light-grey
sediment, weathering brownish to yellowish grey, with only a moderate
fossil content. At i t s base, the limestone is generally finely oolitic. Upwards
the oolite s t r u c t u r e becomes c o a r s e r and t h e r e ooids occur of a millimetre
or m o r e in diameter. Interbedded a r e l a y e r s which a r e only finely oolitic
o r in which the oolite s t r u c t u r e is completely lacking. The thickness of the
oolite may amount to about 5 m. It is partly overlaid by, partly equivalent
to, an other stratified limestone, which generally is dense, sometimes finely
crystalline o r finely oolitic, moderately to faintly marly and locally r a t h e r
bituminous.
Towards the southwest, the lower Halla limestone thins out. In the
west, i t is only about a few decimetres thick. No t r u e B a r a oolite occurs
there, but mainly the dense to finely crystalline or oolitic limestone variety.
F r o m the environment of Klintebys, Munthe ( I 915b) has described rounded
sandstone pebbles and ripple marks, occurring in the lowermost part of the
Halla limestone, close above the calcareous sandstone of the Slite Beds.
The upper part of the Halla limestone is built in the east by a stratified,
grey limestone, which is dense to sometimes finely crystalline and m o r e or
less marly. Sometimes t h e r e is an alternation of limestone l a y e r s with thin
l a y e r s of marlstone. The limestone is r i c h in Algae and stromatoporoids;
the l a t t e r are predominantly small. The m a r l content d e c r e a s e s towards the
top. This top, in the east of Gotland, is developed as a distinct erosion level,
e.g., about 1.5 k m east-southeast of Bryggans Fisklage. This erosion level
normally shows a smooth surface, in which fossils are cut off straight, to
HALLA-MULDE BEDS 335
the level of the surrounding rock, suggesting that the sediment had already
undergone a certain consolidation before this erosion took place, The upper-
most few millimetres of limestone in these eroded a r e a s a r e generally more
or l e s s strongly oxydized and red o r red-brown in colour.
The upper Halla limestone may reach a thickness of about 10 m. This
thickness decreases towards the southwest, where the upper Halla is
generally developed as dense, occasionally finely crystalline, marly lime-
stone, locally rich in Algae and small stromatoporoids.
Mulde marlstone
The Mu1d.e marlstone, distinguished a s an individual stratigraphical

unit by Hede (1921, and later, under the name of Mulde margelsten), is built
up by an alternation of marlstone layers with layers of marly limestone.
The marlstone is a bluish grey to brownish grey, soft and dense sediment.
The limestone is harder, finely crystalline and has a bluish grey colour
which weathers brownish grey. In general, the Mulde sediments a r e very
fossiliferous. The name has been derived from a comparatively large and
well-known quarry, Mulde Tegelbruk (Frojel Parish) from which many fos-
sils have been collected and described o r listed. This quarry is now
abandoned and dilapidated and at present the Mulde sediments a r e not
clearly exposed.
The Mulde marlstone does not contain reefs.
In west Gotland, the Mulde marlstone reaches a maximum thickness
of 20-25 m. It thins out towards the northeast, and disappears in Hejde
Parish, still in the western half of central Gotland.
The reef of Barabacke, which grew during Late Slite time, is enveloped,
especially at its southern side, by the Bara oolite of the lowermost Halla Beds.
This gives reason to presume that the reef continued growth during the very
beginning of Halla time, for it is l e s s likely that the reef had grown s o high
over its surroundings that all of the Bara oolite should be regarded as a
subsequent deposit.
Also in the northeast of the Halla Beds, some small reefs occur in the
Bara oolite and the limestones which a r e partly synchronous with, partly
overlie this oolite. Growth of these reefs soon came to an end and most of
the Halla succession in the east is devoid of reef limestone. Thus, the
decrease in reef size, notable in the upper part of the Slite IV Beds, goes on
in the Halla Beds and in this respect, too, the Halla Beds in the northeast are
a normal continuation of the Slite IV Beds.
Further southwest in the Halla Beds, reefs a r e larger. They a r e found
especiayy in the area of Vate and Viklau (cf. Hede, 1927a, p.34) but the
exposures are poor. East of the road Hejde - Vate - Atlingbo, hardly any
reef limestone is exposed in the surroundings of Vate, but on the west side
some marly reef limestone with corals and stromatoporoids occurs in out-
crops near Rovalds f a r m in the region known as Kvie Grane. It is possible
that most o,r all of the hill on which the mill is built, consists of such reef
limestone, but there are too few outcrops to establish this with certainty.
3 36 STRATIGRAPHY OF THE SILURIAN O F GOTLAND
If this presumption is c o r r e c t , the reef should have reached a length of about

150 m. Some reef limestone is found in two other localities between Vate and
Kvie, which may represent two s i m i l a r r e e f s , but the outcrops h e r e a r e even
s c a r c e r and poorer.
In the surroundings of the northern two Vikare f a r m s , about 2 k m north
of Viklau, exposures a r e also few and poor. Generally crinoid limestone with
reef debris is found, with occasionally s o m e marly reef limestone. In this
a r e a , Hede (1927a) noted a greatest reef-limestone thickness of about 6.5 m.
A list of fossils found in the Halla reef limestone and directly s u r -
rounding sediments is included in Table M (pp.60-67).
Discuss ion
In the interpretation of the Halla and Mulde Beds, the following points
need to be taken into account:
(1) The oolite a t the base of the Halla Beds is l e s s well-developed in
the southwest than in the northeast. Oolite formation in the southwest also
took place during a s h o r t e r time.
(2) Erosion levels a t the top of the Halla Beds are found only in the
northeast.
( 3 ) The Upper Halla Beds in the southwest a r e m a r l i e r than those in the
northeast.
(4)Whereas reefs in the northeastern part of the Halla Beds a r e a only
occur i n the lowest part, and a r e small, they occur through most of the
profile in the southwest and t h e r e a r e also l a r g e r , have a higher m a r l
content and a g r e a t e r contribution from corals.
(5) The Halla Beds decrease in thickness southwestwards, whereas the
Mulde Beds increase in thickness in the s a m e direction.
( 6 ) The Lower Klinteberg Beds, which follow over the Mulde Beds,
shows in part very marly limestone in the southwest.
(7) The Austerberg and Lilla Karlso Limestones of Karlsoarna, which
are mainly synchronous with the Halla-Mulde Beds of Gotland, show
characteristics of deposition in relatively deep water.
Summarizing, there a r e strong indications that during deposition of the

Halla-Mulde Beds, water depth in the northeast of central Gotland decreased,
whereas simultaneously water depth in the southwest increased. This may
have been caused by a change in the direction of the coast line from about
southwest-northeast to r a t h e r west-east. This will again have been due to
a change in the direction of the hinge line of epeirogenetic movement of the
basin floor. In view of the shallowness of the basin and the flatness of the
bordering land at its northwest, relatively s m a l l movements are already
sufficient to account f o r this. Palaeogeographically, in eastern Gotland the
coast line thus moved southwards, in western Gotland northwards. As was
generally the c a s e in the Silurian Baltic basin, deeper water allowed the
deposition of m a r l and, therefore, in the southwest of central Gotland m a r l
was laid down (Mulde marlstone, marlstone in the Lower Klinteberg Beds)
whereas in the northeast, limestone formation went on (Halla limestone).
A s a result, t h e r e is reason to a s s u m e that Halla limestone and Mulde marl-
stone a r e contemporaneous deposits. Thus, they should b e regarded as
belonging to one chronostratigraphical unit, the Halla-Mulde Beds.
KLINTEBERG BEDS 337
KLINTEBERG BEDS
The Klinteberg Beds occur, in central Gotland, i n a wide s t r i p which

narrows in the west. The name is derived from the Klinteberg, a hillock of
up to 52.5 m high, situated in Klinte Parish. This hillock is one of the best
exposures of rocks belonging to this unit.
In theKlinteberg, it can be seen how limestone belonging to the lower-

most Klinteberg Beds conformably overlie the Mulde marlstone. The lime-
stone is marly, predominantly thin bedded, dense to finely crystalline, partly
finely oolitic, light grey in colour and when weathered, brownish to yellowish
light grey. The rock alternates with reef limestone and detrital crinoid lime-
stone related to it. Of the fossils which a r e present, Conchidium conchidium (L.)
needs especially to be mentioned; it is considered by Hede (1925a, p.22) to
be quite characteristic of the Klinteberg Beds.
In Hejde Parish, in a somewhat younger part of the Klinteberg Beds,
thin bedded, finely to middle crystalline, somewhat marly limestone which
is rich in Conchidium conchidium (L.), alternates with thin bedded, dense to
finely crystalline, rather hard limestone, i n which Spongiostroma holmi
Rothpletz and stromatoporoids a r e abundant. The latter, Spongiostroma-rich
rock can be followed from there further northeastwards, in a zone which is
about 5 m thick and is exposed, among others, northeast of Guldrupe Church,
east-northeast of Viklau, northwest of Sjonhem, about 2.5 km northeast of
Sjonhem and northeast of Ganthem. Locally, in between the layers of this
limestone, thin layers a r e interbedded of greenish grey, calcareous marl-
stone. In addition to Spongiostroma, Rothpletzella is rather common.
The next zone in the stratigraphical succession, is especially
characterized by the presence of the lamellibranch Ilionia prisca (Hisinger)
and the almost complete absence of the Algae, which were common in the
preceding zone. The limestone of the Ilionia prisca Zone is thin bedded,
predominantly dense, but locally very finely oolitic and sometimes finely
crystalline, varying marly and often containing pyrite. The bedding planes
are often irregular and rugged. This zone is about 10 m thick. The rock i s
by f a r the best developed in the east of the a r e a where the Klinteberg Beds
a r e found. There, it constitutes the solid rock of large parts of the parishes
of Sjonhem, Ganthem and Norrlanda. It is rather closely comparable to the
limestone of the overlying zone, which is only a few metres thick, and does
no longer contain Ilionia prisca. The rock of that zone is thin bedded, finely
oolitic o r finely crystalline and l e s s marly. It is especially to be found i n
the north of Norrlanda Parish.
The Upper Klinteberg Beds, finally, consist of a succession of
generally thin, sometimes thick limestone layers of up to about 40 m thick.
The sediment is as a rule dense, but sometimes finely crystalline or finely
oolitic; it is usually rather hard. The colour is light grey, on a weathered
surface often brownish light grey.Locally scattered small crystals of pyrite
are present. Compared to other deposits in Gotland, the fossil content of the
limestone is rather moderate; stromatoporoids a r e relatively the most common.
Adding up, the presumable total thickness of the Klinteberg Beds is
approximately 65 m.
338 STRATIGRAPHY OF T H E SILURIAN O F GOTLAND

Although Klinteberg r e e f s a r e best exposed in the west of Gotland, in
the Lower Klinteberg Beds, e.g., in the Klinteberg and at Klintebys, they do
occur through most of the Klinteberg Beds. Reef limestone is f o r instance
found in limestone rich in Spongiostroma in a canal about 3 km west of
Bjerges Station (a f o r m e r railway station between Viklau and Vange), with
the stratified Spongiostroma limestone doming over (Hede, 1927a, p. 44). It
is a l s o found about 3.7 k m southwest of Vange. Elsewhere in this Spongiostroma
limestone the rock is locally r a t h e r marly and also usually r i c h in crinoid
fragments and a varying amount of fossil remains which could b e reef debris;
the bedding planes a r e i r r e g u l a r and somewhat rugged; all this may be taken
as an indication of reef development that will have taken place close to where
these deposits w e r e laid down.
In the Ilzonia prisca limestone, indications of reef development are
found in B j e r s ' Hallar, southeast of Guldrupe, whereas also the crinoid
W EI N 51 W EIN s
. I I
~~~
W-NW E-SE I N-NE s-sw.
____. __ I
reef limestone E l vegetation

3 stratitled limestones unexposed
0 5m
Fig. 164. Reef -limestone exposures in the south of the Klinteberg, found close
to each other and presenting in the two above sections and the right half of
the lower section (which is the northern of the three) reef limestone belonging
to the s a m e reef-limestone body. The lower boundary of the reef limestone
shows fluctuations, which leads to the presumption that reef development
probably began independently in a few close by places, with a fusion taken
place through further expansion.
KLINTEBERG BEDS 339
0 0.5 lm
Fig.165. Detail of the exposed wall in the central part of the west wall of the
Klinteberg. In the crinoid limestone many coral colonies a r e found close to
each other and generally in their positions of growth, but without building a
reef.
limestone which is found at Fjale in Anga P a r i s h (Hede, 1929, p.21) in close

connection with Ilionia-containing rock, can be seen as an indication that i n
that environment reef limestone should be present.
In the Upper Klinteberg Beds, reef limestone is found about 2 km
southeast of Guldrupe, east-northeast of Kraklingbo and i n the hill about
0.7 km north-northwest of Kr3klingbo. In the latter locality, the reef lime-
stone is covered partly by stratified sediments, belonging to the lowermost
Hemse Beds, which a r c h at all sides over it.
A list of fossils found in the Klinteberg reef limestones and directly
surrounding sediments is included i n Table IX (pp.60-67). The great
majority of fossils identified from this stratigraphical unit came from the
Klinteberg itself.
The more important exposures of reef limestones and related
sediments of the Klinteberg Beds a r e described briefly in the following pages.
Describing the Klinteberg from south to north, one f i r s t encounters the

reefs described in Fig.40-43. A few reefs which are found north of these
consist of similar marly reef limestone with mainly flat reef builders. At
their north or northwest side, they a r e bordered by a very marly limestone
which i s thin and often irregularly bedded with some marl on the bedding
planes. The high fossil content comprises crinoids, bryozoans, brachiopods
and also some solitary and social corals. The southern boundary of the reefs
is generally steeper than that in the north and northwest; the stratified
sediment there is l e s s marly and thicker bedded.
Next follows the reef drawn in Fig.164. Possibly the uneven lower
boundary of the reef limestone is caused by the beginning of reef growth in
this a r e a simultaneously in a few places; rapid horizontal expansion may
soon have led to a fusion into one larger reef. There are several inter-
calations of stratified crinoid limestone. These, together with the marly
matrix and flat reef builders, give the reef limestone, locally, a vaguely
stratified appearance. The crinoid limestone at the north-northeast side of
the reef is generally thin, occasionally also cross-bedded. The direction of
dip of the layers shows small variations from one place to the other, which
presumably a r e also mainly synsedimentary. Part of the rock is rather rich
i n reef debris.
Only a short distance north of the reef of Fig.164, another one is found,
of which the southernmost part can still be seen in the left half of the lower
section in Fig.164. This reef is exposed over a distance of about 150 m and
to a height of 3-9 m. It is likely that this reef limestone body, which is very
N-NE s-s w
reef limestone I--”I stratified limestone marl scree
Fig.166. Sketch of a reef-limestone exposure in the central part of the west

wall of the Klinteberg, a couple of metres north of the place where the coral
colonies of Fig.165 are found. About 7 m north-northeast of the right margin
of the drawing the following sedimentary succession is found:
1.1 m stratified brownish grey crinoid limestone
0.9 m unstratified reef limestone with stromatoporoid and Halysites
colonies in a marly matrix; the weathered rock shows a brecciaceous
structure
0.6 m distinctly but irregularly bedded crinoid limestone, grey to brownish
grey in colour
0.75 m indistinctly bedded marly limestone with crinoid remains, brownish
coloured
0.7 m very vaguely stratified limestone, l e s s marly, rich in very strongly
recrystallized stromatoporoids
1.5 m brownish grey crinoid limestone
KLINTEBERG BEDS 341
Fig. 167. Klinteberg, stratified sediments.
large for the Klinteberg Beds, also originated through the fusion of a number
of neighbouring centres of reef growth. In parts of this large reef, the reef
limestone nature of the rock is vague. At i t s north side, crinoid limestone
is exposed again.
About 50 m north of the large reef within the irregularly bedded crinoid
limestone, there is a part which i s very rich in coral colonies, almost all of
which seem to be in their growth orientations. A detail of this is shown in
Fig.165. North of this locality is the reef of Fig.166. The reef limestone
reaches its lowest position in the wall near its southwestern side, suggesting
that reef expansion during development took place northeastwards, whereas
a southwestward expansion occurred only during one stage of the life time
of the reef. The layers of the crinoid limestone southwest of the reef decrease
upwards in thickness.
In a northwest - southeast orientated wall north of the above mentioned
reef, the crinoid limestone is again overlaid by vaguely stratified reef lime-
stone over a distance of 7 m.
The next 250 m a r e badly exposed, except for an old quarry in stratified lime-
stone. Then there a r e about 40 m of crinoid limestone, thick bedded at the base,
upwards thinner bedded and in that direction containing more marl and less crinoid
remains (Fig.167).
The sections of Fig.168 and 169 a r e about perpendicular, but do not connect,
E-SE W-NW
stratified limestone scrrza

Holyrites colony
Fig.168. Sketch of an exposure in the north of the east wall of the Klinteberg,
showing in the west a succession of thick and thinner bedded limestone, east-
ward abuting against o r arching over a body of indistinctly bedded, very
marly limestone with many corals, especially Halysites, and flat-lenticular
stromatoporoids. This body appears to form part of a reef, which is found
to be better developed in the exposure shown in Fig.169.
N-NE s-sw
reef Itmestone stratified limestone
Halysites cdony E l scree

Fig.169. Exposure of very marly and vagueIy stratified reef limestone in the
Klinteberg, shortly north and about perpendicular to the exposure of Fig. 168.
KLINTEBERG BEDS 343
since in the angle between the two there is a high cone of rubble. The reef which they
show was certainly not an example of vigorous growth. For the part drawn in Fig.168
it is even difficult to recognize it as belonging to a reef. Fig.169 shows how the
stratification in the surrounding sediments abuts against the reef, whose vague
stratification does not correspond with it. In the reef, several thin layers of marl
occur and also areas, up to 0.5 m2 in cross-section, of crinoid limestone. The matrix
is marl, reef builders a r e corals and stromatoporoids, the latter generally flat-
lenticular in shape and in a smaller number that i s usual for Hoburgen-type reefs.
S-SE N-NW
0 5m
1
reef limestone
lnnl scree
Fig.170. Section in an old quarry in the north of the east Klinteberg. Two
reefs, in the northwest only vaguely separated by a vaguely bedded transition
form of reef limestone and crinoid limestone.
,
NE
Elr e e f limestone scree

stratitied limestone (.Ls.lrl vegetation
Fig.171. The same two reefs as drawn in Fig.170. They a r e well-separated
here. The upper reef shows a strong expansion northwards.
Coral colonies, dominantly Halysites s p . , can be large, up t o 1.3 m with a height of

0.9 m , and s e e m t o be partly in their orientations of growth. Underneath, above and
northeast of the reef, marly limestone occurs with m a r l films on its rugged bedding
planes; the beds a r e generally 2-10 cm thick. Northeastwards, this rock is replaced,
starting both at the base and top of the wall, by thick and smoothly bedded marly lime-
stone in which small c o r a l s , brachiopods and crinoid fragments are found, often
surrounded by an algal crust. This deposit can be followed northwards for about 80 m ,
with a decrease in Algae in that direction.
The exposure in the north of the Klinteberg has already been dealt with in
Chapter VII, Fig.39.
On the east side of the Klinteberg is a quarry of a f o r m e r lime kiln. In this the
sections of Fig.170 and 171 are drawn. Two reefs a r e found above each other,
separated over most of their extension by some layers of crinoid limestone, which is
also exposed underneath and lateral to the reefs. In the north, the boundary between
the two r e e f s fades. The crinoid limestone shows cross-bedding (Fig.172).
J u s t south of the wall of Fig.172, the section of Fig.173 is found, which
illustrates, once again, how small the difference between stratified sediments and
reef limestone in the Klinteberg Beds may be.
The road Klinte - Hemse c r o s s e s the extension of the Klinteberg close

to i t s beginning in Klinte. On the e a s t side of the road, a wall about 75 m long
and with a maximum height of 6 m is found, mainly exposing very marly reef
Fig.172. Crinoid limestone in an old quarry in the northern part of the east
Klinteberg, showing cross-bedding.
KLINTEBERG BEDS 345
Fig.173. Sketch of the succession of sediments only a short distance south

of Fig.172.
1 = thick-bedded crinoid limestone, dipping slightly northwestwards;
2 = thin-bedded marly limestone with interbedded very thin layers of
marlstone or clayish marlstone; the whole thinning out northwestwards;
3 = in the southeast crinoid limestone which passes northwestwardsj
especially in its lower and upper part, into a reef-like limestone with coral
colonies (Halysites sp., Acervularia ananas), some stromatoporoids,
bryozoans, brachiopods and some m a r l lenses with crinoid fragments; this
zone strongly increases in thickness northwestwards;
4 = rather thin bedded crinoid limestone with thin marlstone layers
interbedded; together arching over 3;
5 = thick bedded, somewhat brownish grey limestone with crinoid
remains.
limestone rich in flat-lenticular stromatoporoids, but also containing corals,

brachiopods, crinoid remains and orthoceratids. All fossils a r e strongly
recrystallized. The colour of the rock is light brownish grey to bluish grey.
There a r e a few intercalations of crinoid limestone in the reef limestone.
The whole reef is traversed by several calcite veins and also nests of calcite
crystals are common. The reef is overlaid by marly crinoid limestone, with
a rather irregularly wavy boundary between the two. The crinoid rock is
brownish grey, irregularly bedded and very rich in reef debris.
The hill at Klintebys represents an extension of the Klinteberg. Outcrops of

stratified sediments and reef limestone occur there, of the same character as in the
Klinteberg itself, but the exposures a r e not so good. The stratified deposits are
predominantly crinoid limestone o r even crinoid breccia, generally containing reef
debris and are often cross-bedded (Fig.174). The sediments exposed in Klintebys
quarry, on the west side of the hill, a r e shown in Fig.175.
Fig.175.
KLINTEBERG BEDS 347
Fig.176. Frojelklint, Klinteberg Beds. Two large stromatoporoid colonies,

the one overlying the other, with on top of these still a third, but smaller
colony.
Fig.174. Cross-stratified crinoid limestone with reef debris, Klinteberg

Beds, Klintebys.
Fig.175. Reef in the Klintebys quarry, Klinteberg Beds. Note how the
boundary between reef limestone and crinoid limestone at the north side is
much steeper than at the south side. The amount of reef debris in the crinoid
limestone is distinctly higher at the north side. Attached to the reef debris
several roots of crinoids were found. The crinoid limestone, in places rather
a crinoid breccia, is locally cross-bedded. In the reef limestone stromato-
poroids and corals are the main organogenic constituents.
Prastklint, 0 . 8 km north of Frojel Church, is only exposed over its uppermost

few metres. At about the highest p a r t of the exposed wall, the following sediments are
found:
1.70 m + Reef limestone of Hoburgen type.
1.65 m Dense to finely crystalline stromatoporoid limestone. marly, light brownish
grey, in layers of generally 1-6 c m thick and with very irregularly rugged
bedding planes.
0.30 m (average thickness) Marly limestone very rich in small crinoid fragments,
brownish grey, bedding planes less rugged than in the stromatoporoid
limestone.
1.10 m + Stromatoporoid limestone, as above.
The upper stromatoporoid limestone is thicker locally, reaching a maximum of
2.05 m , and is then covered by grey to brownish grey crinoid limestone with a varying
content of reef debris and in layers of generally 5-15 c m thick. In the environment
of reef limestone, this crinoid limestone shows faint dips.
The Frojelklint shows predominantly thinly bedded marly crinoid lime-

stone, which in several places is so rich in crinoid fragments that it should
rather be called a crinoid breccia o r crinoid coquina. The bedding planes a r e
irregularly rugged. The deposit often contains some debris, increasing in
amount and size towards the reefs, making the bedding planes even more un-
even. Locally some cross-bedding is found. Here and there a stromatoporoid
o r coral colony is found embedded in the crinoid limestone, probably in the
position where it grew. Some are large. One of the stromatoporoids observed,
measured 80 cm long and 50 cm high. A few such large colonies together may
f o r m a reef -like development (Fig.176) with the stratified sediment layers
sagging under it, abuting against it o r arching over it, just a s with a normal
reef. Close to the true reefs the sediment layers may show dips of l - l O o .
In one place the stratified limestone underneath a reef was very rich in
tabular stromatoporoids.
The reefs exposed in the Frojelklint a r e generally small, and nowhere
a r e they thicker than 4 m. They are rather unorganized and in some cases
partly vaguely stratified. Small, flat stromatoporoids are in the majority,
but larger, rounded colonies a r e also common. The matrix is marly.
'
B j e r s HUZZUY is a low hill, with at several places at i t s edge and in some
places on the plateau, small exposures of one to a few square metres. Most of these
show stratified limestone, generally dense to finely crystalline, thin, but somewhat
irregularly bedded, light brownish grey, rich in crinoid remains and locally also with
a high volume of reef debris. Some marly stromatoporoid reef limestone also occurs.
This rock presumably constitutes the nucleus of the hill.
A topographic elevation about 2 k m southwest of Hejde Church possesses in

the north a s m a l l quarry in stratified crinoid limestone with some reef debris, some
p a r t s of which show signs of rounding. Similar sediment is also found in the wall, a
few m e t r e s high, which bounds the hill on its north side. The crinoid limestone there
is partly m a r l i e r , more irregularly bedded and often with m o r e and c o a r s e r reef
debris. Some marly stromatoporoid limestone is exposed, it is light brownish to bluish
grey in colour, brecciates r a t h e r irregularly upon weathering, is unorganized in
c o m p o s i t i p and is laterally bounded by crinoid limestone r i c h in reef debris. Similar
rock is also found in pockets between the reef builders,
T y r v a l d s Bakke, 2.7-4.4 km northeast of Klinte Church exposes in an old

quarry and at i t s north and northwest sides in a 2-5 m high wall, over quite a distance,
crinoid limestone with reef debris, the latter increasing upwards in amount and size.
The sediment is marly, generally brownish grey in colour but occasionally bluish grey
to white grey. Locally there is some cross-bedding.
HEMSE BEDS 349
Discussion
If one ignores the small a r e a with marlstone i n the very southwest of
the territory where the Klinteberg Beds a r e found, then there are no differ-
ences of any great importance between the stratified sediments which together
build this stratigraphical unit. In almost the entire succession Algae a r e
common, the only exception being the Ilionia prisca Zone. Stromatoporoids
are common throughout. Cross-bedding is frequently boserved. Around reefs
there is much reef debris, part of which is rounded. All data available suggest
that during Klinteberg time, no important variations in s e a depth occurred.
The entire limestone succession seems to have been laid down at slight depth,
presumably in somewhat shallower water than that in which most of the other
limestone complexes of Gotland were deposited. This opinion was also
expressed by Hadding (1941, p.71). Also the generally small and thin reefs
suggest formation in relatively very shallow water. The marlstone in the
extreme southwest is believed to belong to the Upper Klinteberg Beds and
forms a natural transition to the overlying Hemse marlstone. Its deposition
may reflect the beginning of a new period with somewhat stronger epeiro-
genetic movements; this will be discussed further when dealing with the
Hemse Beds.
HEMSE BEDS
The Hemse Beds, which like several others of the stratigraphical units
in Gotland, owe their name to the parish in which they a r e most extensively
exposed, appear either at the surface or underneath a cover of Quaternary
sediments in quite a substantial part of southern Gotland. The petrological
and palaeontological characteristics of the deposits belonging to this unit vary
considerably. A s appears from the maps (cf. F i g . l l ) , in the northeast mainly
limestones are found, whereas in the south and west of the a r e a of the Hemse
Beds, marlstone is present at the surface. The limestone a r e a is wide in the
east, but gradually narrows westwards, to disappear completely in western
Gotland. The bipartition is also apparent in the topography. The limestone
a r e a lies higher (on the average 50 m above sea level) and shows hillocks and
klintar. The marlstone a r e a generally presents a flat o r very faintly undulating
surface with only a slight (less than 15 m) height above s e a level.
It is difficult to draw a sharp geographical boundary between the two
areas. This is partly due to the often thick cover of Quaternary material in
the boundary area, which prevents detailed mapping. But in addition to this
practical difficulty, there is the penetration of both main rock types in each
other’s territories and the existence of gradual transitions. Roughly the line
between the marlstone and limestone a r e a s runs as follows: Pejnarve in
-
Levede P a r i s h - south of Lindeklint - Allmungs in StPnga Parish directly
-
south of Rotarve in Lye Parish BBnde in Lau Parish - Ekmyr the -
northern end of Lauviken.
Limestones
In order to have some impression of the sedimentary succession in

which the Hemse reefs a r e intercalated, a survey of the stratified limestones
of the Hemse Beds will be given in some detail.
In the northernmost part of the a r e a where Hemse sediments a r e found

in east Gotland, the oldest deposit present is a limestone characterized by
the lamellibranch "Megalomus" gotlandicus Lindstrom. The zone reaches a
thickness of only a few metres. The rock is a finely crystalline, partly finely
oolitic, pure limestone, light grey to brownish light grey in colour, sometimes
almost white. The fossil content consists of stromatoporoids, crinoids,
bryozoans, corals, brachiopods and some cephalopods and ostracodes, as
well a s the alga Solenopora The index fossil for the zone is only locally
common; elsewhere, especially in the parts rich in stromatoporoids, it is
only scarcely represented. Some of the stromatoporoid-rich parts a r e reef-
like developed or indistinctly stratified; elsewhere the rock shows distinct
layers of 2-15 cm thick.
-
In the area of Kriiklingbo Ostergarn, this limestone is overlaid by a
generally dense, occasionally very finely crystalline, more o r less marly
limestone, which i s thinly stratified and light grey to faint-brownish grey o r
bluish light grey in colour. Often it is found alternating with thin layers of
dense, bluish grey marlstone. The deposit is very fossiliferous; brachiopods
and ostracodes a r e most strongly represented, not only i n the number of
different species, but also, and especially, in the number of individuals. The
total thickness of this zone is not more than 1-1.5 m. It is poorly exposed.
In the section at the beach, about northeast of the bay at Djupviks
Fisklage (east of L. Hammars, K r a l i n g b o Parish), described by Hede (1929),
this limestone, which is strongly marly there, is covered by 30 cm of dense
and hard marly limestone, in which remains of Euryptems fischeri Eichwald
(of the extinct group of the Gigantostraca) have been found. The rock is thin
bedded (1-2 cm), light grey and locally rich in ostracodes. No other
exposures of similar nature and age a r e known.
The limestone found at the top of the above section is thinly stratified,
grey to faint-brownish grey in colour, poor i n fossils, almost dense to finely
crystalline and marly. It was most likely deposited synchronously with the
Ilionia prisca-containing limestone which in the environment as well a s else-
-
where i n the Kriiklingbo Ostergarn a r e a directly overlies the very
fossiliferous marly limestone, described above.
In the a r e a of Ala Parish Zlionia prisca (Hisinger) was apparently
present already earlier. This lamellibranch is found there stratigraphically
for the first time, and in a number of exposures, in marly limestone, which
directly overlies the "Megalomus"got1andicus limestone. Moreover, this
limestone is both lithologically and palaeontologically closely similar to the
-
fossiliferous marly limestone of the Kriiklingbo Ostergarn area. The
"Megalorr2usf'gotlandicuslimestone in the Ala a r e a occurs in layers of
2-10 cm thick, is mainly finely oolitic, locally, however, finely crystalline,
and very fossiliferous. At one place it shows a weak anticlinal structure,
most likely connected with an occurrence of reef limestone; this is also
suggested by the fact that the rock there is rich in crinoids. The covering
limestone, which thus is the oldest in which Ilionia prisca is present in the
Hemse Beds, is rather marly, dense to partly very finely crystalline, bluish
HEMSE BEDS 351
to brownish light grey in colour, very fossiliferous, and has layers of about
2-10 cm thick.
The Ilionia prisca limestone of the Kr5klingbo - Ostergarn a r e a and
elsewhere, which covers i n the Ala a r e a the above-described deposit, is
generally thin bedded (on the average 1-2 cm). The rock is more o r less
marly, dominantly dense to almost dense, partly finely crystalline and some-
times finely oolitic. The colour is generally light grey o r brownish light grey
to greyish brown, that of a fresh surface bluish light grey. In some instances
the limestone is reef-like and indistinctly stratified. Locally it contains some
pyrite. The rock is very fossiliferous and i n i t s higher parts locally
bituminous. Exposures of this deposit are found, among others, along the
beach between Grogarnshuvud and Herrviken. The thickness of the deposit is
up to about 15 m. Upwards Ilionia prisca disappears from the limestone.
Apart from the Hemse Beds, Ilionia prisca is also known in Gotland,
from parts of the Slite, Klinteberg and Hamra Beds. Thus, it is not a r e a l
index fossil. Its restricted occurrence i n the profile of the Hemse Beds may,
therefore, be caused by a preference for an environment fairly limited in
range. Where the required conditions occurred, the lamellibranch would in-
vade the a r e a and spread over the s e a floor during the time that the environ-
ment remained within the limits required. When at a certain moment, the
conditions were no longer a s ideal, the animal ceased living there and either
became locally extinct or migrated to a more favourable area. The behaviour
of Ilionia prisca is one of the appealing problems for palaeoecological study
which the Silurian fauna of Gotland presents, and there are many others.
After the disappearance of Ilionia prisca, the lithological character of
the limestone remains about the same. Among others, exposures a r e found
in the lower part of the north of the Grogarnsberg, the lowermost parts of
Gannberget, Torsburgen, Kaupungsklint and Petsarveklint, and in several
places in Ardre Parish.
The upper part of the Hemse limestone succession is an alternation of
more or l e s s distinctly stratified limestones and reef limestones. This part
reaches a thickness of up to 30 m. In connection with the general occurrence
of reefs, the character of the stratified sediments varies greatly in both
horizontal and vertical direction. There is a great number of exposures.
The youngest sediment is presumably the Millklint limestone of, among other
places, Millklint and Torsburgen: a finely crystalline, partly finely oolitic,
stratified marly limestone (Hede, 1929).
As in the Slite Beds, the total thickness of the limestone succession is
distinctly less than that of the m a r l succession in the same unit.
Marlstone
The Hemse marlstone, found in the south and west, is petrologically

a very uniform sediment. Generally it is grey to bluish grey in colour, when
weathered often brownish grey; it is soft, dense and usually more o r l e s s
thinly stratified, and often foliated. Thin bands o r lenses of dense to finely
crystalline, grey, marly limestone are often interbedded.
Hede (1927b, p.24) has pointed out that the macrofossil content of the
Hemse marlstone differs in the lower and upper part of the deposit. At the
surface, the boundary between the two follows approximately the line
-
Kvinnglrde in Havdhem Parish Stora Vasstade in Hablingbo Parish -
-
Mullvalds in Hemse P a r i s h 1.5 km southeast of St%nga Church.
In his study of the ostracodes of the family Beyrichiidae, Martinsson

(1962a, pp.53-54, 60-62) found a similar faunistic boundary, which runs
consistently very slightly to the east of that based on the macrofauna. He
leaves the question open a s to whether the boundary is a time o r facies one.
Martinsson also found that the picture of the Hemse marlstone is still more
complicated. There is an important overlap of several faunistic elements,
and the faunal successions show some compositional differences between the
northern and the southern a r e a of the northeastern facies o r time unit.
The uppermost part of the Hemse marlstone is a zone of less than 10 cm
thickness, known a s the Dayia flags. The rock is a generally very fossiliferous,
hard, grey and dense limestone. Characteristic and very common is the
brachiopod Dayia navicula (J. de C. Sowerby); also common is "Strophornena"
impressa Munthe. The zone is easily recognizable and occurs over quite an
extensive area, thus constituting a good marker zone.
The total thickness of the Hemse marlstone may be estimated to be
about 100 m.
The Hemse Beds contain reef limestones of both the Hoburgen and the
Holmhallar types. The first a r e by far the most common. Most exposures of
the Hoburgen reef type are found inland. The ancient cliffs a r e formed partly
by the Ancylus lake (e.g. , Gannberg, Klinteklint, Kaupungsklint), partly by the
Littorina s e a (e.g. , Grogarnsberg, Guffrideklint). An occasional outcrop is
found along the present coast (Herrvik).
All exposures of Holmhallar-type reef limestones a r e situated around
s e a level along the east coast.
Hoburgen-type reef limestones
The best exposures of Hoburgen-type reef limestones and its sur-

rounding sediments in the Hemse Beds a r e found in b t e r g a r n Parish. Of
these, the Gannberg should be mentioned first.
Directly south of the Ganne f a r m , in the north of the Gannberg, reef
limestone of a very unorganized and marly nature is exposed, s o that from
the f i r s t impression one might even question whether this represents a fossil
reef. However, there a r e reasons to consider it reef limestone. These
reasons are: a rather high content of reef-building colonies, the almost
entire lack of stratification, the sagging of the layers underlying it, the
abutting of the lateral deposits against it and the occurrence around it of
stratified limestone, very rich in crinoid remains.
Typical of the exposure is that the reef limestone occurs in very
extensive, but thin patches, often one above the other (Fig.177). They may
then be separated by some stratified limestone with reef debris, especially
abundant in i t s lower part; sometimes by not much more than a single layer
of such debris. The covering stratified limestone may, moreover, contain
many tabular stromatoporoids of itself. The boundary between reef and over-
lying rock, therefore, is not always very distinct. It is notable that the sur-
face of such a reef patch generally is flatly horizontal over long distances.
The main organic component of the reef limestone is formed by
strongly recrystallized stromatoporoid colonies. Flat forms a r e most
S N
r e d limestone reef debris stratified limestone a unexpased

__
Fig.177. Gannberg, Ostergarn. Thin patches of reef limestone occur on top of each other, separated by a thin zone
of stratified limestone very rich in reef debris. Hemse Beds.
1","1 reef limestone I=""lreef debrls stratified ItmeStOneS 0 . prn

~-~-.
Fig.1'78. One of the walls of the large quarry in the Gannberg, Ostergarn. Hemse Beds. A reef mainly composed
of tabular stromatoporoids contains also a depression filled with, among others, the remains of many branched
reef builders.
w
UI
w
3 54 STRATIGRAPHY OF THE SILURIAN OF GOTLAND
Fig.179. Gannberg, about 0.5 km southwest of the western Ganne farm; reef
debris and stratified limestone. Hemse Beds.
common but rounder colonies also occur, locally up to 0.5 m o r more in

diameter. Such large round stromatoporoids a r e often found locally in
several colonies together. A s a general rule, the rounder colonies a r e least
represented in the lower parts of a reef, most common in the central parts
but also present in the higher parts. Tabular stromatoporoids, occurring
throughout the reefs, but most common in the lower part, may show a wavy
surface. Coral colonies a r e also common. The matrix of the reef limestone
is marly. In it specially brachiopods a r e found; and crinoid remains often
occur assembled in pockets. Portions of intercalated m a r l of stratified lime-
stone occur, varying in size from only a few square centimetres to over 0.5 m 2 .
The colour of the rock is grey to brownish o r bluish grey, depending on the
m a r l content. Locally it is red to reddish brown, generally because the outer
few millimetres of the fossils show this colour. Further inside, these same
fossils are brownish grey to grey. This red colour should not be confused
HEMSE BEDS 355
I",slreef limestone areef debris stratified limestones I$$*lvegetotion
Fig.180. Part of the wall of Kyrkberget, Hemse Beds, showing reef limestone,
covered by stratified limestone containing?reef debris, with at the top reef
limestone of a younger reef. From the older reef at both sides a zone of
reef debris extends into the stratified limestone.
with a red weathering colour, locally found, which usually comes off and is
restricted to the surface of the rock.
The lateral boundary with crinoid limestone is distinct. Where locally
also larger fossils occur, the stratification in this sediment is l e s s well
developed than usual. Where the crinoid content is moderate, a marly matrix
of the rock is well recognizable and bedding planes appear often to be rugged,
without any directly apparent reason. The l a r g e r the amount of crinoid
fragments in the rock, the stronger this is recrystallized. The crinoid
remains a r e relatively strongly brecciated.
In the middle of the north side of the Gannberg, only a short distance
east of the cross-roads, there is a large quarry. If one approaches this
quarry from the east, along the wall parallel to the road, an important reef
limestone exposure is found where the wall turns sharply into the quarry
(Fig.178). This reef consists substantially of more o r less wavy tabular
stromatoporoids, and some lenticular colonies of the same, with in between
these, colonies of branched and massive corals which a r e not so flat. The
matrix is strongly marly. In it several kinds of fossils are found, such as
crinoid remains (often in nests), brachiopods and bryozoan fragments.
In the quarry a filled depression in between two parts of the reef can
be seen. This depression is not observable in the wall a t the side of the road,
although it is approximately parallel to the exposure in the quarry. This
illustrates the local nature of the depression. The filling material consists,
mainly, of colonies of branched corals and bryozoans, varying in size
between a few centimetres and about half a metre. There are also many large
and small pockets with rather unsorted crinoid remains, quite a number of
fragments of tabular stromatoporoids but few intact colonies of these,
solitary corals and brachiopods; the whole is embedded in a strongly marly
matrix. Most of the colonies of branched reef builders, found in the depression,
Fig.181. Gannberg, ostergarn, Hemse Beds. Photograph taken about 0.5 km
from the south-southeastern end of the wall. Three banks of reef limestone
in vertical succession, but separated by stratified sediment.
Fig.182. Gannberg, about 0.4 km from the south-southeast end. Reef lime-
stone with intercalated horizontal bands of stratified marly limestone.
Hemse Beds.
HEMSE BEDS 357
a r e not in their positions of growth, but some, especially of the larger ones
presumably a r e . This suggests that the majority of them were washed off the
surrounding reef surface into the depression, where the colonies remained
intact, whereas some of them apparently also continued to grow there. At the
reef surface itself, water movement must have been strong to have been able
to break and wash away even large colonies. Strong water movement may
also explain the predominance of tabular colonies among the stromatoporoids,
which could of course better resist wave action than more rounded ones.
The marly matrix of the depression filling indicates deposition of t e r r e s t r i a l
material over the reef and the local updomings in the tabular stromatoporoids
can be regarded as a reaction to this; by rising somewhat over the sur-
rounding reef surface, the mud is more easily washed off from these up-
domed parts which thus could keep alive.
The boundary between reef and surrounding stratified crinoid limestone
is rather distinct. The flat top of the reef is overlaid by stratified limestone.
Elsewhere in the quarry crinoid limestone is exposed, locally containing
several solitary corals, brachiopods and small colonies of stromatoporoids
and branched and massive corals. There is occasional cross-bedding. In one
place, size sorting of crinoid fragments i n layers of approximately 1 cm
thickness was observed. There a r e many well-developed stylolites.
-
Starting f r o m the cross-roads ( b t e r g a r n Katthammarsvik - Kraklingbo -
Gammelgarn) southwestwards, one reaches an interesting p a r t of the Gannberg wall
some tens of m e t r e s southwest of the f i r s t f a r m on the southeast side of the road to
Gammelgarn. Low in this wall. t h e r e i s reef limestone. which locally shows some
vague banking. Its matrix is very strongly marly. The top of the reef limestone i s
uneven, with in the middle a local continuation of reef development. a t the southwest
side interfingering with stratified limestone. a t the northeast side with a more
gradually sloping boundary. The stratified sediment overlying the main reef and
enveloping the s m a l l reef outgrowth is very rich in tabular stromatoporoids. so that
the difference between reef and non-reef rock i s not great.
About 0.5 km southwest of the above f a r m very unorganized reef-like sediment
i s exposed over a distance of some tens of m e t r e s . It shows some stratification.
Layers of limestone which are up t o 10 c m thick and poor in fossils are intercalated.
It i s most probably debris, depositedvery close t o a reef (Fig.179). The transition tonormal
stratified limestone is gradual, through a decrease in reef material and an increase
in limestone layers, both upwards and sidewards. At the south-southwest side the
transition is m o r e gradual than at the north-northeast side.
Further southwest the wall shows several reefs which need not be
described in detail. It is, however, interesting to note that reef limestone
of two different appearances occurs. In the f i r s t place, there is the more
common Hoburgen type with stromatoporoids of varying forms, at the base
generally lenticular, higher up also more semispherical and spherical
colonies; after weathering, this reef limestone shows generally a brecciaceous
o r conglomeratic structure. The other kind of reef limestone consists almost
entirely of tabular stromatoporoid colonies and, therefore, gives a more
massive impression; it weathers generally as rather smooth walls. The
present author calls this the Gannberg variety of the Hoburgen reef type.
The normal Hoburgen type is usually exposed in the lower part of the north-
west and west wall of the Gannberg, the Gannberg variety higher i n these
same sections.
The eastern part of the Gannberg is better known as Kyrkberget. After

m
03
HEMSE BEDS 359
what has been said about the Gannberg proper, it is not necessary to describe
the exposed wall in detail.
In about the middle of the east wall some zones are found in the
stratified limestone, which a r e rich in reef material (cf. Fig.180). They can
be up to about 75 cm thick and originate in the reef limestone, at about the
boundary between this and the overlying stratified limestone. They may
extend into the stratified limestone to a few tens of m e t r e s from the exposed
lateral boundary of the reef limestone, although gradually thinning out.
These debris zones have a marly matrix and after weathering appear as
conglomeratic interbeddings in the more massive stratified limestone.
Over a flatly truncated reef surface, another flat reef limestone occur-
rence may follow, which i n i t s turn may even be again the fundament for a
third reef zone, e.g., about 0.5 km before the south-southeastern end of the
east wall (Fig.181). The top of the section is then usually formed by stratified
limestone. Such reef limestone zones, with an almost horizontal and extensive
basis and a flatly cut top surface approach in their appearance the biostromes.
About 0.4 km before the southeastern end of the east wall there is a
good exposure of reef limestone, which originated through the f a l l of a huge
block. The reef limestone is marly and brownish yellow to light grey i n
colour. Over almost the entire length of the exposure, three thin (2-10 cm)
zones of stratified marly limestone can be observed in the reef limestone
(Fig.182). These zones are relatively poor in fossils. The variety i n forms
of the stromatoporoids in the reef limestone is very great. Small oblique
p a r t s within the reef limestone indicate that internal displacements have
taken place i n the reef.
Another interesting range of exposures is found in the wall surrounding

the Grogarnsberg i n the northeast of Ostergarn Parish.
The west wall exposes, in its southern part, stratified limestone with reef
debris. The latter increases in abundance northwards until reef limestone of Hoburgen
type crops out over a distance of about 10 m. Within the reef limestone, intercalations
of stratified limestone, 2-15 cm thick and often over 1 m long a r e found.
Over several hundreds of metres northwards, stratified limestone is found.
Reef limestone occurs about 0.3 k m north of a fenced-off military area, over a height
of about 6 m and a length of approximately 30 m. Slightly north of its northern
boundary with the surrounding stratified limestone, the wall retreats over a few
metres, thus again bringing reef limestone to the surface. This rock is an unorganized
accumulation of some larger stromatoporoids, many smaller lenticular colonies of
these, tabular stromatoporoids and many fragments thereof, large and small coral
colonies, some solitary corals, crinoid remains, brachiopods, ostracodes; this all
embedded in a very marly and often thinly parting matrix which constitutes a quite
Fig.183. North side of the Grogarnsberg. Hemse Beds. At the base relatively
soft marlstone with lenses of marly limestone. This deposit is overlaid by
reef debris. On top of this reef limestone, interrupted by another occurrence
of reef debris.
Fig.184. Section in the north of the Grogarnsberg, Hemse Beds. Three stages
of reef-limestone formation, interrupted by a somewhat wavy plane, eroded
out as a cleft and by a zone of debris material. The such exposed reef-
.limestone banks are biostromal in appearance but should still be regarded
as parts of reefs (bioherms).
HEMSE BEDS 36 1
considerable portion of the total rock volume (often 40% o r more). Locally there are
some small intercalations of Stratified limestone. Some of the fossil fragments show
indications of rounding. The exposure i s likely a t the northwestern (landward)
periphery of a reef. Directly north of it, over some m e t r e s , irregularly stratified
limestone very rich in reef builders, followed and also overlaid by more normal
stratified limestone, is found.
Only a short distance northwards, reef limestone is again found. In the exposed
cross-section i t s southern contact with the stratified limestone lateral to it i s some-
what remarkable. Low in the wall, over a distance of several m e t r e s , the reef lime-
stone is seen to r e t r e a t under the overlying stratified sediment. It may reflect a local
stage of decreasing reef growth. Then the reef limestone expands in i t s turn at an
angle of about 30° over the stratified limestone, t o a height of approximately 1.5 m.
Higher up, the boundary becomes obscured because it passes into a zone of vaguely
stratified reef-detrital limestone.
The reef limestone can now be followed over a distance of several hundred
m e t r e s , until the Grogarns f a r m is reached. The average height of the wall is 5 m .
In the lower half of the exposed reef limestone section, rounder colonies are more
common among the stromatoporoids than in the upper half. T h e r e many tabular
colonies and even piles of such tabular stromatoporoids a r e abundant, together,
particularly locally, with many flat-lenticular colonies. Some of the depressions
which developed in the reef surface have been filled with stratified limestone containing
some reef debris, some other depressions dominantly with such reef debris.
Occasionally, the exposed reef limestone is of a talus-like nature, or is r e a l debris
exposed over the full height of the wall, c o a r s e and very disorderly at the base,
becoming finer in an upward direction and with a g r e a t e r contribution of limestone.
The base of the reef limestone can be seen about 0.6 km south of the
f a r m Grogarns. The wall there has the appearance of the underside of a
staircase. Deepest eroded at the base, there is a relatively soft marly
sediment with many limestone lenses, and solitary and social corals a s the
dominant fossils. The next step is a zone, about 1.25 m thick, of harder rock,
very rich in reef debris, which upwards gets increasingly coarser; it also
contains many crinoid fragments. The uppermost 20 cm of this zone is very
marly and is eroded to some depth, leaving a horizontal cleft i n the exposed
wall. The hardest and most protruding rock is the reef limestone of the third
step. At the base it is of the common Hoburgen type, upwards, the reef
builders, however, get distinctly flatter.
Shortly before the northwest wall of the Grogarnsberg reaches the
coast, the section of Fig.183 is found. At the base, there i s marlstone, thinly
parting, with lenses (5-90 cm long, on the average 6 cm thick) of very hard,
somewhat marly limestone. Overlying this marlstone is 55 cm of reef debris,
comprising in particular many colonies of stromatoporoids and corals,
together with solitary corals, the whole being embedded in marl; in the lower
Fig.185. Herrviken. Hemse Beds. Reef limestone of the Hoburgen type with
an intercalated 1 m-thick zone of reef limestone of i t s Gannberg variety.
In the lower Hoburgen reef limestone a breccia-like zone, with in this and
the directly overlying reef limestone several stromatoporoid colonies,
including large ones, which a r e not in their positions of growth.
Fig.186. Herrviken. Hemse Beds. Reef talus, passing upward into stratified
limestone, with on top of this again reef talus. Note in the latter several
stromatoporoid colonies which a r e not in their growth positions; the arrow
indicates one of the l a r g e r colonies.
part there a r e still a few limestone lenses. The fossils are sometimes
covered by a network of Aulopora. Upwards the debris becomes distinctly
coarser, with many complete colonies present. Next is 33 cm of a protruding
hard rock, probably true reef limestone. On top of this, again about 50 cm of
reef debris, passing upwards into reef limestone. Here, too, the higher parts
of the reef are very rich in extensive tabular stromatoporoids, thus forming
an intermediate step between the normal Hoburgen reef type and i t s Gannberg
variety. The dominant flat reef builders sometimes cause a somewhat
stratified appearance. The reef matrix is marly.
A comparable development in reef formation can be observed also in
the north wall of the Grogarnsberg (Fig.184). The reef limestone which is
exposed shows distinct signs of interruptions in i t s formation. At the base
of the section, there is about 2.5 m of reef limestone with many round reef
builders and some flatter colonies. This rock is cut off by a somewhat wavy,
approximately horizontal plane and overlaid by about 3 m of reef limestone
in which comparatively more flat-lenticular and tabular reef builders a r e
present. On top of this is about 1 m stratified reef debris, with a strong
decrease in the amount of debris upwards. The upper 2 m of the section show
reef limestone of the Gannberg variety.
These three stages of reef development can be followed over the entire
north wall; the debris zone disappear gradually eastwards.
In the northern p a r t of the e a s t wall of the Grogarnsberg, there is also a
succession of normal Hoburgen-type reef limestone in the lower p a r t and Gannberg-
variety reef limestone higher in the section, the two being separated by a detrital zone.
In both instances, the reef limestone is marly. The approximately horizontal boundary
between the two can be followed f o r a great distance. Southwards the wall becomes
lower and consequently the Gannberg variety disappears f r o m the section. A distinct
interruption in reef formation can be seen for quite a distance; locally there are also
further interruptions. The plane marking the interruption may be covered by a layer
of debris material.
About 0.8 km south of Grogarnshuvud, stratified limestone appears again in the
wall, about 0.5 m thick, and a l s o underlying and overlying reef limestone. Though for
some distance again entirely replaced by reef limestone, it remains generally exposed
southwards and f r o m about 1.1km south of Grogarnshuvud is the predominant sediment
in the wall.
The reef limestone close t o the beach about 0.7 km northwest of Herrvik is of
the normal Hoburgen type, with at the base 50 c m of middle-coarse debris. At the base
and top of the section i s stratified limestone. The rauk-like exposures further south
also show Hoburgen reef limestone.
Directly northeast of the harbour of Herrvik, cliff fall has brought

enormous blocks down, i n which reef material occurs between thick banks
of stratified limestone. This reef material is very unorganized; in part it
may be reef limestone belonging to the very periphery of a reef, partly it
may represent reef talus. Somewhat further northeast more normal reef
limestone is found exposed to a thickness of 4-5 m; it can be regarded as
belonging to the Hoburgen type. Overlying it is stratified crinoid limestone.
At the base of the reef limestone, very hard and splintery limestone crops
outinlayers of 2-15 cm thick, often separated by thinner layers of softer
marly sediment. The reef limestone overlies this stratified deposit sub-
horizontally. In the lower part of the reef, however, several intercalated
layers of this splintery limestone still occur, up to a local thickness of 18 cm.
In the reef limestone, flat colonies of reef builders a r e more common than
HEMSE BEDS 36 3
rounder forms. Locally the reef consists mainly of tabular stromatoporoids.

These p a r t s show up after weathering because the wall there is smoother,
i n contrast to the mainly conglomeratic appearance of the reef rock. The reef
limestone can be followed northeastwards for more than 100 m. Then again
a great amount of debris is exposed. The following vertical succession can
be observed there: At the base, again the above-named splintery limestone
in layers of about 10 cm thick, but with interbedded thinly parting marly
limestone in layers of up to 10 cm, very locally even 17 cm thick. Overlying
these sediments is about 2 m of reef debris, with intercalated several layers
of the splintery limestone, most common and thickest in its lower part. Next
i s about 1 m of reef limestone with some embedded debris. This is covered
by a second occurrence of reef debris, about 2 m thick, in which layers of
stratified limestone a r e increasingly common upwards. Northeast of this
section, the reef limestone is replaced by debris and the thus united debris,
occurrence gradually thins out between stratified limestone. The debris as
exposed, is presumably formed close to the north side of a reef. ,
Further northeast, occasionally reef limestone of Hoburgen type is
exposed, with local transitions into the Gannberg variety. Fig. 185 shows such
an intercalation of Gannberg reef limestone in more general Hoburgen-type
rock. Also here the different appearance after weathering is distinct.
Fig. 186 presents another exposure of reef debris apparently deposited
very close to a reef.
Along the north and northeast coast, near Kuppen, the wall exposes
mainly reef limestone of about Hoburgen type, with also debris deposits o r
stratified limestone. The sediment overlying the reef limestone is rather
strongly recrystallized, marly crinoid limestone of grey o r sometimes red
to reddish brown colour.
The slight accidentation of the plateau between Herrvik and Kuppen i s
presumably due to an alternation of reef limestone and stratified sediments.
The sediments 'which a r e exposed in Torsburgen and its direct environ-

ment (including Millklint and Herrghdsklint) a r e presumably partly some-
what younger than the other rocks in the northeastern part of the Hemse Beds
a r e a , for the other part, synchronous with the higher parts of Gannberg and
Grogarnsberg.
Millklint, directly south-southeast of Torsburgen,, consists of light bluish grey
stratified limestone, mainly finely crystalline, partly finely oolitic: The layers vary
in thickness between 1-12 cm, but a r e generally less than 5 c m , in between the layers
a r e films of marl. This generally fossiliferous rock i s called by Hede (1929) Millklint
limestone. No reef limestone was observed.
Torsburgen, in Kriiklingbo Parish, is especially interesting because of

i t s stratified limestones, extremely rich in stromatoporoids. In the western
part of the north wall and in the west wall of this hill, these can be well
observed. A lower and an upper stromatoporoid limestone can be distinguished.
The lower stromatoporoid limestone has a biostromal character. All
stromatoporoids a r e strongly recrystallized; they are embedded in marly
limestone which is softer than the fossils arel with the result that through
weathering, the rock has a strongly conglomeratic to somewhat brecciated
appearance. Most of the stromatoporoids are very flat lenticular, but in the
lower part of the lower stromatoporoid limestone, somewhat rounder colonies
are also found locally. The largest one seen measured 60 cm long and 23 cm
thick. In between the layers which a r e so very rich i n stromatoporoids, there
a r e some others, especially high in the lower deposit, of bluish to brownish
grey marly limestone, dense to finely crystalline, relatively poor i n fossils,
and with bedding planes which vary from very rugged to sometimes almost
smooth. The thickness of the stromatoporoid layers alternating with these
limestone layers decreases upwards.
Neither the transition from lower to upper stromatoporoid limestone,
nor that between the upper stromatoporoid limestone and i t s overlying
Millklint limestone can be considered a reliable time boundary, mainly
because of the occurrence of reefs.
The upper stromatoporoid limestone is generally thick bedded, locally
thin bedded; there a r e no distinct boundaries between these two, both forms
passing into each other. Usually, the rock is finely crystalline and strongly
marly. Stromatoporoids, mainly in flat-lenticular and tabular colonies, a r e
the dominant fossils, but bryozoans, crinoids and some brachiopods also
occur. In an upward direction, the upper stromatoporoid limestone passes
into a rock lithologically similar to the Millklint limestone.
Reefs occur in Torsburgen mainly in the upper stromatoporoid lime-
stone. They often began growth at, or slightly above, the boundary between
lower and upper stromatoporoid limestone. Their matrix is marly, most of
i t s stromatoporoids are flat, but some a r e rounder.
The finely crystalline to finely oolitic Millklint limestone is remarkably
poor in reefs, compared with the other Silurian limestone deposits in Gotland.
Its maximum observed thickness is 7 m. Upwards, its layers are often thinner
than at i t s base.
The above-described succession is well exposed at Tjangvide-lucka
(about 0.15 km east of the topographical height 68.1 with the belvedere). At
the base 3.5 m lower stromatoporoid limestone is found, partly thin, partly
thicker bedded. In between the beds there is often some marl; the bedding
planes a r e often very strongly rugged. The extremely abundant stromato-
poroids of this zone a r e dominantly flat lenticular.
The overlying upper stromatoporoid limestone, which contains many
tabular stromatoporoids, is relatively l e s s fossiliferous than the lower one.
The deposit is partly well bedded, partly vaguely bedded with beds of 1 m and
more in thickness; the bedding planes a r e faintly rugged. The limestone is
harder than the lower stromatoporoid deposit and weathers more massive.
Locally this upper deposit contains reef limestone, e.g., directly at
Tjangvide-lucka itself. The exposed base of the reef limestone is slightly
more than 2 m above the boundary between lower and upper stromatoporoid
limestone. The reef is marly. Stromatoporoids abound; they differ from those
in the stratified limestone mainly because there are so many round colonies
and even quite a number with greater vertical than horizontal dimensions,
such as bullet and tower-shaped forms. There a r e some intercalations of
stratified limestone. The reef is exposed for a length of about 20 m and a
height of about 2 m; it i s overlaid by about 2 m Millklint limestone, poor in
fossils.
West of this reef another is found, about 15 m long, followed by a still
smaller one. Both of these reefs contain f a r l e s s roundish fossil colonies
and have a more distinct and steeper boundary with the stratified limestone
at their northwest than at their southeast side. Again 20 m further west, a
reef-limestone exposure of about 4 m long and 1 . 5 m high i s found. This
HEMSE BEDS 36 5
reef rock is rich i n marly limestone and contains mainly rather round
stromatoporoids. This section presumably represents the west o r northwest
periphery of a reef.
Another example of a reef is found in the most western part of the north
wall, where at a low level in the upper stromatoporoid limestone, a reef is
found of about 10 m long and i n its centre 2.5 m high. It mainly consists of
many flat-lenticular and faintly wavy tabular stromatoporoids in a marly
matrix. There a r e only a few other fossils. The m a r l also occurs in pockets
and since it is softer than the reef builders a r e , it is eroded away in many
places, leaving holes in the exposed wall.
In the north wall, east of Tjiingvide-lucka, reef limestone exposures
a r e also found, especially in i t s western part. In these, flat stromatoporoids
a r e more abundant than rounder forms, which a r e relatively commoner in
the lower and middle parts. Also bryozoans and coral colonies contributed
to reef formation, the f i r s t in colonies of up to 60 cm broad and 35 cm thick.
Intercalations of stratified limestone and m a r l pockets a r e found in the reefs.
The latter reach thicknesses of up to approximately 6 m. Of the exposed
boundaries between reef limestone and surrounding sediments, the east
boundary is almost vertical; the south one is sloping and generally sharp,
although the highest reef part may contain a large amount of matrix and also
reef debris. The northwest boundary is always sloping, with the reef lime-
stone extending over the stratified sediments, but the reef limestone there
is usually very unorganized and marly and layers of the surrounding lime-
stone may penetrate one o r more metres into the reef. Since in all likelihood,
the exposed east and south boundaries of reef limestone represent the sea-
ward side of the reefs, it can be concluded that the seaside of the reefs was
steeper and more solidly developed than the landward side. The reef s u r -
rounding sediments a r e usually rich in crinoid and bryozoan fragments i n
the environment of the reefs.
Hewg6rdsklint (Gammelgarn Parish) i s subdivided into an eastern and a

western part. The l a t t e r consists of Millklint limestone. The west-northwest wall of
the eastern p a r t shows stratified stromatoporoid limestone, partly detrital. It p a s s e s
a t the northern end of the wall into reddish brown to grey stromatoporoid reef lime-
stone. T h i s has a marly matrix, the stromatoporoids a r e mainly lenticular in shape;
corals (Heliolites, Favosites, Halysites, Aulopora),bryozoans and brachiopods
are also present, as well as some crinoid remains, gastropods, orthoceratids and
trilobites (Bumastus sp.). In the e a s t wall, the reef limestone can be followed for
some hundreds of m e t r e s , after which it p a s s e s into stratified stromatoporoid lime-
stone. The latter sediment i s seen to overly stratified marly limestone with inter-
bedded thin layers of m a r l ; the limestone layers a r e up t o 10 c m thick, the rock is
dense o r nearly dense and brownish grey to brown in colour and l e s s fossiliferous
than the overlying limestone.
Klinteklint , in Gammelgarn Parish, possesses a particularly

interesting northeast and east wall. In the northeast of this klint, it can be
seen how a reef expanded over i t s own debris. At the base of the section,
indistinctly stratified fossiliferous limestone is exposed. This is overlaid
by reef debris of an usually unorganized nature, with many fragments of
fossils and many fossils in orientations other than their natural ones. The
deposit is least unorganized where almost all the fossils and fragments a r e
of a very flat form. Dips in a great many directions can be observed, but
with some preference for a west-northwest dip. A large part of debris with
a uniform dip of the fossils of about 20' to the south-southwest probably

became detached from the reef a s one single block ( s e e also Chapter VII,
p.163). Over this talus deposit, the reef expanded. Low i n the reef limestone
a r e many tabular and flat-lenticular colonies, which may give the rock a
vaguely stratified appearance and may lead to more massively eroded
surfaces. Upwards, rounder colonies become more common and since the
matrix is marly, weathered surfaces a r e often of a more conglomeratic
appearance. When the exposed surface in this part is smoother, this is often
due to relatively recent cliff falls along joint planes. In the middle and higher
parts of the reef limestone, several stromatoporoids were observed of about
70 x 30 cm, spherical colonies of a diameter up to 40 cm, also a few tower-
shaped piles of stromatoporoid latilaminae of 25-30 cm high, at the base
about 15 cm, at the top about 10 cm in diameter. At the top of the reef lime-
stone, flat colonies again become more common. This is also true i n the east
wall, where at the top flat reef builders and a somewhat higher matrix
volume locally lead to a vague stratification in the reef limestone. The
maximum exposed reef thickness never exceeds 8 m. Probably the reef has
not been much thicker than this, despite its great horizontal extension of
presumably 250-300 m.
The zone with flat reef builders low in the reef limestone in the north-
east of this klint, varies in thickness over very short distances, between less
than 1 m to about the entire exposed height of reef limestone. It may also
contain rounder forms, sometimes only locally o r in a particular horizon.
Also, intercalated layers of stratified limestone are found in it, up to 10 cm
in thickness and 5 m in length. Locally, this zone with flat colonies can also
be interrupted by a debris layer of 10 cm to over 1 m in thickness. Such a
debris generally is l e s s resistant to erosion and may, therefore, give lead
to undercutting of wall parts o r to cave formation. Flat reef builders may
also predominate locally in reef parts which otherwise a r e characterized
by rounder colonies. In several places rounder colonies not in their growth
positions a r e rather common. The entire picture of reef formation is that
of a great variation in reef vigour, with alternatingly reef expansion o r r e -
treat. All these phenomena probably took place in the more coastward part
of the reef.
The east wall of Klinteklint presents a north - south section through
the reef. The orientation of this reef probably w a s about north-northeast -
south-southwest. This means that going southward the more central part of
the reef is exposed, followed by the seaward side. In the wall, it can be seen
how the talus floor and the lower zone with flat and tabular reef builders,
described from the northeast wall, gradually disappear from the section
while going south. Large reef builders of round shape become abundant.
Loose blocks at the foot of the cliff indicate how the reef originally reached
further east. Under an overhang low in the wall, a n almost horizontal marly
layer a few centimetres thick and of several metres extension crops out,
with around it reef limestone showing smaller and flatter reef builders.
However, this is a local phenomenon and away from this layer, the fossils
again increase in size. In the last part of the exposed reef limestone, the
fossils again become, on the average, distinctly smaller and the rock obtains
a more debris-like appearance. At the top of the wall stratified crinoid lime-
stone begins to occur. The rather sharp boundary between the reef limestone
and the overlying sediment dips about l o o . The lateral boundary is less
sharp, with limestone layers penetrating to several metres into the reef.
HEMSE BEDS 367
The last part of the east wall is taken up by the crinoid limestone, which i s
bluish grey, grey to brownish grey and often red-mottled.
Northwest of the section described in the f i r s t paragraph of this
description of the Klinteklint, the reef debris and limestone can be followed
for about 20 m, then being replaced by crinoid limestone. Some tens of m e t r e s
further northwest again reef limestone of a conglomeratic nature crops out,
resting over talus-like reef material with mainly much flatter colonies.
Locally this reef limestone is replaced by reef rock which contains a high
volume of marly matrix and predominantly flat fossils, the whole showing
some stratification, It probably represents a pool in the reef surface. Via
a part with many flat fossils, the reef limestone passes northwestward again
into stratified limestone. This limestone further builds most of the north
wall of the klint. At the place where this wall turns south into the west wall,
a few small occurrences of very marly reef limestone with mainly flat
stromatoporoids are found.
On the basis of the exposures described above, it seems likely that ar.
the landward side of the main Klinteklint reef, another, but smaller reef
developed, with northwest of this again a few subordinate attempts towards
reef formation.
The west wall of the Klinteklint shows in the north stratified limestone
with some reef limestone exposures; then a long stretch showing reef lime-
stone, in i t s southern part traversed by an oblique zone of crinoid limestone,
and in the south of the west wall again stratified limestone.
Petsarveklint, in Ardre Parish, shows only stratified limestone in a few small

outcrops. The sediment is generally very thin bedded with irregular bedding planes,
brownish light grey to greyish white in colour, finely crystalline, and very fossiliferous
(crinoid remains, some flat and lenticular stromatoporoids, solitary corals, bryozoans,
the large lamellibranch "Megalomus r r gotlandicus Lindstrgm). The rock shows much
similarity to the thin-bedded crinoid limestone of Kaupungsklint. No reef limestone
has been observed, though it is presumably present in the klint.
The rocks of Kaupungsklint can be studied in a long wall of varying height,

from less than 1 m to locally about 3 m. The rocks found in this wall. have been
described already in Chapter VII, p.134.
It seems likely that most of the hillock of Kaupungsklint consists of one o r more
reefs, presumably not very thick. The rocks observed in the wall then, a r e either
deposits from the reef surroundings or represent the periphery of the reef itself.
Aikse Bakke, the hillock south of Aikse farm, Ardre Parish, consists
predominantly of stromatoporoid reef limestone of the Hoburgen type. It is exposed
in a wall about 2 m high, a few hundred metres south-southeast of Aikse, in the
terrain around there, in a very large quarry south of Aikse and in an old quarry
directly south of the large one. Overlying crinoid limestone with reef debris is found
in the two quarries. In the eastward facing slope in the northeast of the hillock, the
reef limestone can be seen to overlie stratified stromatoporoid limestone, which is
brownish grey, marly and finely crystalline.
Visneklint, situated east of Bofrideklint (to be described next), is best exposed

in a wall of a few metres height and several tens of metres long, along the country
road at the east side of the klint. In the southeast of this klint, the section has been
observed which has been described in Chapter VII,pp.134-135.
Bofrideklint, in Alskog Parish, about 1.5 km north-northeast of Bofride farm,

shows a variety of sediments. In the first place there is stratified limestone of a
brownish white-grey colour, which i s finely crystalline and s p a r r y , and rather poor
in fossils. The bedding planes a r e somewhat i r r e g u l a r , the layers generally 1-5 c m
thick; locally there is some cross-bedding. Upwards this limestone may contain an
increasing amount of reef debris, which in several c a s e s shows indications of rounding.
It may in its turn be overlaid by stromatoporoid reef limestone. Elsewhere at the
height of the first-named limestone, t h e r e i s stratified limestone, with foliaceous
l a y e r s of l e s s than 1 c m thick, which is greenish grey, dense to finely crystalline and
contains some stromatoporoids and solitary corals. In some places, it i s overlaid by
a reef-like stromatoporoid limestone, also containing corals, bryozoans, brachiopods
and some gastropods, which shows some rugged stratification, generally due to inter-
calated thin layers of stratified limestone o r some reef debris material. The thin
layered, dense limestone is a l s o found locally in between two m a s s e s of reef limestone.
At the top of the hillock, reef limestone i s locally overlaid by a finely crystalline
stratified limestone of light-grey t o greyish-white colour, which contains "Megalomus"
gotlandicus Lindstrom.
About 3.5 km north-northeast of Alskog Church, west of the road, a wall
is found, up to 1.5 m high, which shows grey stromatoporoid reef limestone with a
marly matrix. Further northwards, e a s t of the road, finely crystalline stratified lime-
stone i s found, o r thin, but somewhat irregularly bedded crinoid limestone, often with
reef debris. Slightly southeast of the wall, in the f o r e s t , a small exposure is found,
in which the crinoid limestone abuts against stromatoporoid reef limestone. The
r a t h e r flat top of this reef limestone is overlaid by vaguely stratified detrital lime-
stone with crinoids. Upwards, the reef-debris content decreases. The r a t h e r irregular
distribution of stratified limestone, stratified crinoid limestone and crinoid limestone
with reef debris is undoubtedly influenced by the r a t h e r irregular distribution of the
reefs in this a r e a .
Guffrideklint, about 1.1 km east-southeast of Garde Church, presents only

scattered exposures, one to several square m e t r e s in size. In the majority of these,
reef limestone crops out, and others show crinoid limestone. Very close to the reef
limestone, the crinoid rock i s very rich in reef debris. The vague and somewhat
irregular bedding planes dip 12-17O down from the reef. Within a distance of some
m e t r e s , the coarseness of the reef debris strongly decreases, but finer debris still
remains present for quite a distance.
Directly northeast of the three-forked c ro ss -roads to Etelhem, Garde

and L ye, a quarry is found. In a 2-3 m high vertical wall there, crinoid lime-
stone is exposed, which is locally cross-bedded and upwards shows an in-
creasing number of stromatoporoids, and fragments of these, presumably
indicating deposition close to an expanding reef.
In another quarry, mainly in Quaternary rocks, but penetrating into the
Hemse Beds, the sediments underlying the crinoid limestone a r e visible for
a thickness of 1.5 m. These a r e limestone and interstratified marlstone
layers of on the average 1 cm thick. The lower exposed limestone layers a r e
a few centimetres thick, but upwards their thickness increases and finally,
the limestone passes into the crinoid limestone in which no marlstone layers
are present. The limestone layers contain already many crinoid remains,
though not in such enormous quantities and also somewhat l e s s coarse than
in the crinoid limestone. Reef debris is abundant; most of the fragments by
far, have a size of l e s s than a few millimetres, but l a r g e r remains, up to a
few centimetres a r e commonly intermixed. Many fossil remains are
enveloped by an algal crust varying in thickness from l e s s than 1 mm to
sometimes close to 1 cm. In the crinoid limestone, the reef debris is
increasingly coarser upwards and also complete colonies of stromatoporoids
HEMSE BEDS 36 9
occur there; at the top of the section, the rock even becomes reef-like.
About 0.1 km northwest and west of this exposure, some small surface
exposures of stromatoporoid reef limestone a r e found in the field.
About 0.5 km east of Sigvalde-trask, where the road makes a curve of

about 90°, an exposure occurs which shows stromatoporoid reef limestone.
The rock is strongly unorganized; larger and especially smaller intercala-
tions of stratified limestone a r e common. It probably represents the outer
part of a reef. South-southwestwards, stratified sediments gradually replace
the reef limestone from below in an upward direction.
In the south-southwest of the section, a crinoid breccia is exposed at
the base, well stratified, with layers of a few centimetres thick and with
somewhat rugged bedding planes; locally there is cross-bedding. Some reef
debris is enclosed. Upwards, the amount of reef debris strongly increases,
the stratification becomes irregular and vague and locally the rock is almost
entirely reef debris, though interfingering with crinoid limestone or having
this sediment interbedded. Some of the reef fragments in the crinoid breccia
are enveloped in an algal crust.
Sigvalde-trask klint. The klint south of the eastern p a r t of Sigvalde-trask,

shows at i t s base stratified marly limestone, r a t h e r r i c h in fossils: which partly are
reef detritus. A f t e r a p a r t with no exposures, marly reef limestone, overlying the
stratified sediment, is found in a 3.5 m high wall. Higher exposures indicate that the
reef limestone reaches a thickness of at least 6 m. Locally the reef limestone is
vaguely bedded, elsewhere intercalations of normal limestone occur, up to 2 m long
and on the average 7 c m thick. Stromatoporoids vary in s i z e , but hardly anywhere i s
their thickness more than half their horizontal dimension.
The higher p a r t s of the klint are r a t h e r badly exposed. Along the remaining
southern bank of the t r a s k , reef limestone is also found, vaguely stratified or not at
all. P r e s e n t as well is some overlying stratified limestone.
Triisk klintar. In the environment of Etelhem - Lojsta, a number of klintar

occurs, rising directly from o r closely t o a little lake (Swedish: t r a s k ) , e.g., south of
Sigvalde-trtsk, south of Hagby-trask, south and west of Bro-trask, south of Ramtrask,
e a s t of Hemtrask and southeast of Mort-trask.
The stratified sediment in Hagby-trask klint is a bluish to brownish grey lime-
stone, dense t o finely crystalline, somewhat marly, containing crinoid remains and
reef-building organisms, the latter increasing in number towards the reef. The reef
limestone varies in colour f r o m reddish browh o r r u s t brown with light-grey coloured
fossils, through lighter colours to grey o r light bluish grey. Stratified intercalations
in the reef occur, especially in the lower p a r t s .
Similar reef limestone is also found in the other klintar and may be surrounded
by stratified limestone. The latter sometimes is seen dipping away f r o m the reef, e.g.,
in Hagby-trask klint (Fig.187) and Bro-trask klint (cf. Hede, 192713, fig.15, 16).
Tonnklint, southeast of Lojsta Church, mainly exposes crinoid limestone with

a varying amount of crinoid remains, stromatoporoids and corals. Occasionally, it
shows a reef-like development. Some t r u e reef limestone also occurs, especially in
the northern p a r t of the klint.
Ausarveklint shows a great number of s m a l l e r outcrops, which present marly

reef limestone, dense to finely crystalline, reddish brown crinoid limestone (which is
seen in the northeast t o overlie the reef limestone), and greyish marly limestone.
often thinly stratified, but very rugged, due t o a high fossil content of tabular
stromatoporoids, compound and solitary c o r a l s , crinoids and brachiopods. The
distinction with the reef limestone i s not always clear.
Fig. 187. Hagby-trask klint. Hemse Beds. Stratified limestone dipping down
from a reef.
Fig.188. Lindeklint. Hemse Beds. Detrital limestone in the southeast of the

klint.
HEMSE BEDS 371
Lindeklint. The east wall, some hundreds of metres long and 1-7 m
high, shows in the south strongly weathered stratified crinoid limestone and
in the north reef limestone, also strongly weathered and generally of a
brecciaceous nature. Theboundary between the two is usually rather distinct.
The reef limestone is very similar to that in Hoburgen, with stromatoporoids
as the main reef builders and a minor contribution of corals. The majority
of stromatoporoids is relatively flat. In the marly matrix, such fossils a s
crinoids, brachiopods, solitary corals, ostracodes and orthoceratids, occur.
At the top the matrix volume increases, and the reef builders are flatter than
elsewhere in this wall. In several places, these flat reef builders cause this
uppermost reef limestone to show a vague pseudo-stratification. Gradual
transitions from the reef limestone into stratified limestone, generally a
crinoid limestone to a crinoid breccia or coquina, occur locally.
In the southeast, stratified marly limestone with a very high reef-
debris content (about 35-50% of the total rock volume) is exposed (Fig.188).
Flat and tabular stromatoporoids and especially fragments of these, strongly
dominate. In several places, imbrication indicates that deposition of the
debris took place downreef (see also Chapter IX, p.223): The thickness of the
layers varies. On the average, the fossils and fossil fragments in the thicker
layers a r e coarser. The limestone in which the debris is embedded, is light
grey to brownish grey, finely to middle crystalline and marly.
In the south of the Lindeklint, similar limestone is found, but with a
smaller content of reef debris. It alternates locally with more normal
The wall at the north and northwest side is steep. In the northwest on
the plateau of the hill, generally thin bedded, grey to brownish grey and marly
crinoid limestone and hard, grey to bluish grey, marly stromatoporoid reef
limestone are exposed.
The northwest wall, locally over 10 m high, consists entirely of reef
limestone. Apart from the dominant stromatoporoids, coral colonies a r e
common and both often reach large sizes. Stromatoporoids were observed
with a horizontal length of up to 1 m; colonies of about 50 cm long, and in
their centre 20 cm thick, are common. Colonies of Halysites measured up
to 70 cm, with a thickness of 40 cm, and colonies of Acemularia 65 cm with
a thickness of 35 cm. Several colonies are not in their orientation of growth.
The matrix is marly, but its total volume there i s somewhat below the
average for Hoburgen-type reef limestone. Locally there a r e small inter-
calations of stratified limestone. The colour of the reef limestone is
generally grey to light grey, locally brownish grey; as a result of weathering
it is often reddish to reddish brown (elsewhere in the Lindeklint, the colour
of the weathered reef limestone is usually bluish grey, grey to greyish white).
Since the matrix weathers more quickly than the reef builders, weathered
surfaces appear coarsely conglomeratic. In one place in this wall, a
depression in the reef surface was observed, containing much debris, in
between which some stromatoporoids and several corals, belonging to at
least five different genera, are found, probably in their positions of growth.
Upwards, the depression merges again into reef limestone of average faunal
composition.
The wall at the north side of Lindeklint is closely surrounded by forest.
It exposes mainly thinly bedded, marly crinoid limestone and crystalline
limestone, which is hard, indistinctly bedded and bluish grey to grey i n colour.
Sandarve Kulle is a hillock, about 1 km north of Fardhem Church. It i s r,,ainly

covered with g r a s s and f o r e s t ; a number of small t o very small exposures of mainly
grey reef limestone occur h e r e and there. In the west and southwest, there is a wall.
a few m e t r e s high and about 150 m long, with thin-bedded crinoid limestone, which is
light grey, m a r l y , and comparable to that in the Lindeklint. It contains reef debris.
Where this is smaller than a few centimetres, bedding i s thinner than where the debris
is c o a r s e r and more abundant. This sediment p a s s e s laterally into or is covered by
very fossiliferous reef limestone, which is r a t h e r marly, greenish grey or reddish
brown, and dense. Stromatoporoids, crinoids, bryozoans and corals are found in it,
and also gastropods, cephalopods, lamellibranchs, brachiopods and trilobites. The
centre of the hillock consists presumably of reef limestone.
Table XIX gives a survey of fossils found in the Hemse reef limestones
and crinoid limestones. The locality given as East Sigvalde is the one
described on p.369 as being situated 0.5 km east of Sigvalde Trask, the
locality Etelhem is the one close to the cross-roads south of Etelhem,
mentioned on p.368.
Holmhallar-type reef limestones
The Hemse Beds a r e the lowest stratigraphical unit in Gotland, which

also contains reef limestone of the Holmhallar type. The relevant localities
where this is exposed a r e mentioned here from north to south. All a r e
situated along the east coast.
Interesting exposures a r e found along the coast between Herrvik and

Sandvik. They a r e the main source of information on the debris production
of Holmhallar-type reefs and i t s distribution around these reefs (Chapter IX,
pp.219, 223).
Around Snabben stratified limestone is exposed, which is thinly bedded,
very rich in crinoid remains, and mostly grey in colour. North of Snabben,
a number of raukar are found, some of which show how reef limestone is
overlaid by crinoid limestone with reef debris (Fig.189). Upwards the debris
becomes finer and the sediment passes into the stratified limestone,
containing some reef debris, already mentioned*from Snabben (see Chapter VIII,
p.208).
Going southwards from Snabben, two small capes a r e reached. The
northern one is built up by reef limestone very rich in stromatoporoids,
severaI of which a r e very large. Also present are corals, Algae, some
crinoids and an occasional brachiopod o r cephalopod. The reef has a horse-
shoe shape with the opening directed west-northwestwards. Locally, the reef
limestone is overlaid by reef debris, which partly shows indications of
rounding. The contact between reef and debris shows that the upper surface
of the reef was uneven. The debris deposit shows a thickness of 30 cm o r
more and passes upwards into a crinoid limestone very rich in small crinoid
fragments. In the second cape, erosion has caused that not Vuch reef lime-
stone is present any longer, but the debris and crinoid limestone a r e still
well exposed.
Passing a smaller outcrop, in a southward direction, one reaches,
about 1 km south of Snabben, a place where much reef limestone is exposed,
both around sea level and i n a number of raukar. The reef limestone can be
classified as to be of Holmhallar type. However, the relatively high
percentage of the rock volume taken up by the matrix, and the occurrence of
HEMSE BEDS 373
Fig. 189. Reef limestone, overlaid by reef debris and crinoid breccia.
Between Kuppen and Snabben. Hemse Beds.
Fig.190. In the middle of the southwest coast of the peninsula at Sysne

remains are found of a reef which presumably had a diameter of less than
10 m. It is surrounded by reef debris, which dips away from the reef lime-
stone. Hemse Beds.
comparatively many lenticular and tabular stromatoporoids indicate a

tendency towards the Hoburgen type of reef limestone. This holds true for
several exposures i n this area. The reef shows a crescent shape, with the
opening about west-northwestwards. Some small occurrences of stratified
limestone around it indicate that this is actually the original shape of the
reef. At the side of the opening, the reef limestone is different from that at
the outer side. The rock at the side of the inner curve contains reef debris
and the number of thin stromatoporoids is much greater. Most of these a r e
in their attitudes of growth. On the outside of the reef, the number of large
stromatoporoids is above average.
Continuing southwards along small exposures, another large outcrop
of reef limestone is reached. It s e e m s likely that three or more small reefs
occur there. These a r e circular to oval i n shape, but together are arranged
in a crescent pattern with an opening towards the west-northwest.
Several other exposures follow further southwards, but they present
no additional information of great importance to that described in
Chapters VIII and M.The distribution of the reef limestones and surrounding
deposits has in all likelihood contributed to the present course of the coast
line in this area, which shows an average direction of about N30°E.
Also along the southwest coast of the small Sysne-udd peninsula, reef
limestone, reef debris and stratified limestone a r e exposed. Interesting to
s e e is a small reef, which presumably measured not more than 10 m in
diameter. Remains of this reef a r e exposed about half-way along this coast
(Fig.190, see also-Chapter VIE, p.190). The debris found around it is much
finer than around other reefs in this area. Not many pieces a r e larger than
1 cm. West of it, the remains of a larger reef a r e found, which measured at
least 50 m in chord length and which is surrounded by coarser debris. It is
followed by a third reef, which is much larger again, and is exposed up to
the Fisklage.
In the northwest of this peninsula, stratified limestone is exposed
mainly southeast of the country road. The limestone contains reef debris and
thin marly layers a r e interbedded.
Going further south, the next exposures are found along the coast nortk-
west and west of Sandviken. Where the road Ostergarn Church - Sandviken
reaches the coast, a coastal cliff of an average height of'1.7 m is found. In
this cliff and directly landwards of it, reef limestone occurs, which is of
Holmhallar type, with sometimes a tendency towards the Hoburgen type. In
some places, crinoid limestone is found between o r overlying the stromato-
poroids, suggesting that it is the top of the reef limestone which is exposed.
The original shape of the reef and some other reefs i n this a r e a cannot be
determined with certainty, but an elongated form in about north-northeast -
south-southwest orientation seems to be most likely.
Continuing along the coast southwestwards, crinoid limestones, which
a r e rich in reef debris, a r e also found, a s well as more normal stratified
limestone, which is grey and macroscopically not very fossiliferous. The
f i r s t sediment type consists of a limestone extremely rich i n crinoid remains,
in which many - usually small - fragments of stromatoporoids and coral
colonies a r e embedded, with solitary corals, bryozoan fragments and
brachiopods. There a r e transitions to a more normal looking stratified lime-
stone. In detailed inspection the latter appears to be partly a limestone rich
HEMSE BEDS 375
in smaller crinoid fragments, which is various degrees have obscured during
recrystallization.
At Brandkers-udd, reef limestone is found, which represents
presumably only a peripheral part of a reef of which all the r e s t has already
been eroded. Stromatoporoids were the main reef builders, but in between
these, colonies of branched and massive corals a r e found, varying in size
from a few centimetres to a horizontal size of almost 1 m. In some approx-
imately 1 m high vertical sections, it can be seen how the reef limestone
passes rather gradually into the overlying limestone with reef debris.
Close to Grynge-udd Fisklage, there is a large and beautiful exposure
of reef limestone, overlaid locally by crinoid limestone with reef debris
which upwards decreases rapidly in average size. About 20 cm above the
reef limestone, the sediment passes into more normal stratified limestone.
Almost all of what should be reported about the area of S j a u s t e v h a m m a r ( F i g . 1 9 1 )
has already been said in Chapter VIII. In the north-northeast, the exposures occur
whichare describedonpp.189-190. Slightly southofthis i s thenext reef, which i s l e s s
distinctly exposed, but a crescent shape is likely. In the north and south, stratified
sediments dip away under the reef limestone. In the north this i s strongly recrystal-
lized crinoid limestone. In the south, very thinly cleaving calcareous slate i s found,
rich in reef debris, which i s locally very coarse. A few l a y e r s of about 1 cm thick of
hard, splintery limestone are interbedded; it is brownish grey and very poor in fossils.
The calcareous slate is underlaid by normal, g r e y , fossiliferous limestone.
Next, in a southward direction, a r e some hundreds of m e t r e s where, around s e a
level, mainly limestone with reef debris is found; locally some m o r e normal stratified
limestone o r some reef limestone. This is followed by the exposures described in
Chapter VIII, pp.206-207. One of these exposures i s shown in Fig.192.
The southernmost cape of Sjausterhammar shows mainly stromatoporoid lime-
stone, the majority of which can be considered as being of reef-detrital origin.
deposited very close to a reef. It occurs as a kind of ring, of which the west side i s
missing. The sediments which were present in the centre. have been eroded. The ring
is overlaid by a complex of thin bedded, finely crystalline limestone. with a maximum
thickness of 30 cm. The rock is brownish light grey t o greyish white in colour, and
remarkably r i c h in "MegaLomus ' I gotlandicus Lindstrom. This sediment a r c h e s
as a flat dome over the underlying stromatoporoid limestone. This structure. which
is thus closely connected with reef formation, was wrongly interpreted by Munthe
(1910, p.1433) as being of tectonic origin ("a somewhat folded a r e a at Sjausterhammar").
F6gelhamrnar actually comprises two raukar fields, Fsgelhammar

North and Fagelhammar South. Of these, the southern field (Fig.i93) i s the
largest, and raukar reach a height of up to about 6 m (Fig.194). In many
aspects, it is comparable to Holmh5llar. This is particularly true as far as
the reef builders, their size, their growth forms and their distribution a r e
concerned (Fig.196). The reef shows the shape of a crescent. Fissures a r e
present, both in a radial direction and perpendicular to this. Within the reef
limestone, there are in several places small slickensides, which indicate
small internal displacements during consolidation of the reef limestone.
In between the two, there is a s t r i p of about 25 m where no raukar a r e
present and exposures only occur at beach level. The coast line shows a
westward curve there.
The reef of FBgelhammar North is also of crescent shape. The opening
is towards the northwest. It is smaller than the FAgelhammar South reef and
the raukar are on the average also smaller. Stromatoporoid development
during reef growth was l e s s luxuriant. The average size of the stromatoporoids
3 76 STRATIGRAPHY OF T H E SILURIAN OF GOTLAND
--
EZJ reef limestone
Fig.191. Sketch map, showing the distribution of reef limestone and stratified
limestone (Hemse Beds) along the coast at Sjausterhammar.
HEMSE BEDS' 377
Fig.192. Section at Sjausterhammar. Hemse Beds. Reef limestone occurs a t

the top of the succession. It overlies 0.70 m stratified marly limestone,
0.30 m very fossiliferous limestone, which probably is a reef-debris zone,
and at the base of the section a calcareous slate, relatively poor in fossils.
is smaller. Locally some stratified limestone is intercalated (Fig. 197). The

percentage of the rock taken up by the matrix is higher. This causes, in some
cases, a vague stratification of the reef limestone.
A few hundred metres south of Fdgelhammar South, some remains are
still present of an almost vanished raukar field, which is east-northeast - south-
southwest orientated. The points situated farthest seawards, show, when connected,
a sickle-shaped bent line. The raukar reach only little above sea level, the highest
measured a height of about 1.5 m. They consist of Holmhallar-type reef limestone.
The boundary of this sediment at the side of the land is not exposed.
The raukar field north of the harbour of Ljugarn, is a good example of

a reef of Holmhallar type. The raukar a r e less closely together than in
Holmhallar, but the field as a whole is larger. Measured along the coast, the
length of the Ljugarn raukar field is approximately 750 m. The raukar are
on the average also lower; most of them reach less than 2 m above sea level.
The highest one measured is 2.30 m. This may explain why the number of
preserved pools and debris-filled depressions is smaller than in Holmhallar.
There are also fewer planes of interrupted reef growth. In view of the fact
that there a r e only few loose blocks, which originated through undercutting
of large raukar, it seems possible that the Ljugarn reef was not much higher
than the top of the highest raukar. Nothing can be said about the total thickness
3 78 STRATIGRAPHY OF T H E SILURIAN OF GOTLAND
Fig.193. Map, showing the distribution of the raukar in Fggelhammar South.

Almost all raukar consist of reef limestone, belonging to the Hemse Beds.
The line a-b marks the position of the vertical section shown on the insertion,
which illustrates a local occurrence of stratified sediment; c and d indicate
fissures; e is a military pill box.
HEMSE BEDS 379
Fig.194. The raukar field of Fdgelhammar South. The raukar consist of reef
limestone belonging to the Hemse Beds.
A B
Fig.195. F%gelhammarSouth. Details of the left part of section a-b in Fig.193.
Stratified marlstone to very marly limestone i s overlaid by reef limestone.
B shows the stratified sediment in closer view.
TABLE XM
Fossils found in the reef limestones and surrou np crinoid limestones of the Hemse Beds of Gotland
Reef limestone !rinoid limestone
Hoburgea type
-a
k wound
6
-
E-
9
E
5 E
4 8
!iJ 34 43
3- - 1
-
ALGAE
Rothpletzella sp. t t
Solenopora sp. t
Unidentified calcareous Algae c F t
HYDROZOA
Labechia conferta (Lonsdale)
Unidentified stromatoporoids t c e
Acervularia ananas (L.) e t
Cyathophyllum bisectum c
Cyathophyllum sp. t
DiploZpora grayi (Edwards et €hime)-
Entelophyllum fasciculatum Wedekind ~
Hedstroemophyllum sp. b
Rhegmaphyl lum coturlus ( Lindstram )
ANTHOZOATABULATA
Aulopora roemeri Foerste t

Aulopora sp. t
Favosites gothlandicus Lamar& t t c
Favosites sp. t e
Halysites catenularius (L.) t
Milleporites madreporqooimis Wahlenberg -
Roemeria kunthiana LindstrOm t
Syringopora sp. t t
ANTHOZOA HELIOLI'MDA
Heliolites barrandei Penecke
Heliolites interstinctus (L.) t t
Heliolites pamistella Ferd. Roemer
Heliolites sp. t t
Plasmopora heliolitoides Lindstram
Plasmopora rosa Lindstrom t
Plasmopora &is Lindstrom t
Plasmopora suprema Lindstrsm +
+ + t
HEMSE BEDS 381
TABLE XIX (continued)
~~

\ 1 Hoburgen type Around
reefs
- - - - -
I r)
! 2 ; Ya
33 8E
W
d 3 s
2 E E ! 2
9 3
3 P
c
$ b 4 4
B
>
5 44
P
5 2 1 2- !!
- - - 3- i-
ANNELIDA
Autodetus calyptratus (Schrenk) 1

Conchicolites sp. t +
Conzulites serpularius Schlotheim t t
Spirorbis lewisi Sowerby t t
Spirorbis sp. + c t t
Unidentified annelid r ema ins +
CRINOIDEA
Calceocrinus sp. t
Gissocrinus sp. t
Pisocrinus s p .
Unidentified crinoid r e m a ins + + t t 1 t + + t t
BRYOZOA
Berenicea consimilis (tons da le )

Coenites repens (Wahlenberg) t t
Coenites sp. + + + t
Fenestella reticulata (Hisinger) t
Fenestella sp. t +
Fistulipora sp. + t
Ptilodictya lanceolata (Goldfuss)
Unidentified bryozoan re m a ins + t t t + + + t
BRACHIOPODA
Atrypa veticularis (L.) + + + + + + + + + +

Camarotoechia diodonta (Dalman)
Camarotoechia nucula (J. de C. Sowerby)
Chonetes striatellus (Dalman) + + +
Conchidium conchidzum (L.) +
Conchidium knighti (J. Sowerby) + + +
Conchidium sp.
Craniops implicata (J. de C. Sowerby) + + +
Dayia navicula (J. d e C. Sowerby) +
Delthyris elevata Dalman + + + + + + + + + +
Dicaelosia biloba (L.) +
Dinorthis rigida (Davidson) + + + + + + + + + +
Dolerorthis rustica (J.de C . Sowerby)
Eospirifer interlineatus
(Hedstram, non J. de C. Sowerby)- + +
Eospirifer schmidti (Lindstram) + & + + + I
Gypidula galeata (Dalman) +

Leptaena rhomboidalis (Wilckens) + + + +
TABLE X M (continued)
T--
Lithology Reef limestone rinoid limestone
Hoburgen type
Localities
\
Localities -
-B
0
+
P -
i
F o ssi l s
\ 3?
5 Y
'c
3-
5s
rn
- -
Leptaenoidea silurica Hedstrom ?

Leptostrophia i m g e s s a , ( L i n d s t r o m )
Leuenea canalicu f a (Lindstrbm) t t
Lingula lewisi J. de C. Sowerby c
Lissatrypa sp. e c
Nucleospiru pisum (J.de C. Sowerby)
Orbiculoidea sp.
"Orthis" tubulata Lindstrom t
Plectatrypa margrnalis (Dalman) c c
Protoathyris didyma (Dalman) ~ _ t _ t t
Ptychopleurella bouchardi (Davidson) t
Rhipidomella hybrida (J. de C. Sowerby) ~
Rhynchospivina buylei (Davidson) t

Sphaertrhynchia wilsoni (J. Sowerby)
"Spirifer" insignis Hedstrom t t
"Strophomena" concinna Lindstrom i n museo-
Trimerella sp.
Unidentified brachiopods t t t
LAMELLIBRANCHIATA
Actinopterella sp. t
Conocardium sp. t t t
Cyprzcardinia exornata Lindstrom in muse0 ~ t
Goniophora cymbaejormis (J. de C. Sowerby)-
Ilionia prisca (Hisinger)
"Megalomus gotlandicus Lindstrom
I'
Pterinea nodulosa Lindstrom in museo ~ t t

Rhombopteria sp. +
Unidentified lamellibranchs + +
GASTROPODA
Bellerophon gemma Lindstrom +

Bellerophon taenia Lindstram + t
Craspedostoma elegantulum Lindstrom ~
+
Craspedostoma glabrum Lindstrom +
Cyclonema adstrictum Lindstrom +
Cyclonema apicatum Lindstram +
Cyclonema cancellatum Lindstram + +
Cyclonema distans Lindstrtim +
Cyclonema perversum Lindstrtim +
Cyclonema zonatum Lindstram * +
Cyclonema sp. +
Euchrysalis laneokzta Lindstrom + +
Euomphalus walmstedti Lindstrom +
HEMSE BEDS 383
TABLE XIX (continued)
Lithology Reef limestone ‘rinoid limestone

Hoburgen type .round
eefs
-s
al
+
I
?
4 ij
i
.l rn
- -
Holopea m x LindstrBm t
Holopella minuta Lindstrom +
Loxonema fasciatum Lindstram +
Loxonema strangulatum Lindstriim +
Machrochilina bulimina Lindstrom +
Machrochilina cancellata LindstrBm +
Murchisonia attenuata (Hisinger) +
Murchisonia cancellata Lindstrom +
Murchisonia cochleata Lindstrijm +
Murchisonia compressa Lindstrom ~
Murchisonia crispa Lindstram +

Murchisonia deflexa Lindstram +
Murchisonia imbricata Lindstrom +
Murchisonia paradora Lindstrom k
Onychochilus cochleatum Lindstrijm +

Onychochilus reticulatum Lindstrbm +
Oriostoma coronatum LindstrBm + +
“Oriostma” nilidissimum Lindstrom b +
Palaeacmaea solarium LindstrBm +
Platyceras cornutum Hisinger t +
Platyceras spiratum (Sowerby) +
Pleurotomaria bicincta (Hall) +
Pleurotomaria cirrhosa Lindstram + c +
Pleurotomaria glandifomis Lindstrom 1 +
Pleurotomaria gradata Lindstrom c +
“Pleurotomaria” linnarssoni Lindstrom 1 +
Pleurotomaria lloydi Sowerby +
Pleurotomaria planorbis (Hisinger) +
Pleurotomaria vohta LindstrBm +
Pleurotomaria sp. + b
Poleumita discors (J. Sowerby) + t
Poleumita globosum (Schlotheim) c +
Pycnomphalus acutus Lindstrom +
Tremanotus compressus LindstrSm +
Trochus cams LindstriSm t +
Unidentified gastropods + c +
CEPHALOPODA
Ascoceras cucumis Lindstrom +
Ascoceras decipiens LindstrBm t +
Ascoceras manubrium Lindstram c +
Ascoceras pupa Lindstrtim c +
Ascoceras reticulatum Lindstram +
Ascoceras sipho Lindstram t +
Ascoceras sp. ~ ~~ -.
~ ~ t
384 STRATIGRAPHY OF THE SILURUN OF GOTLAND
TABLE XIX (cont.inued)

Hoburgen type Around
reefs
Localities - -
rn
.-
Y
.?I
;
0
A
Fossils 8
.3
4
- -
CEPHALOPODA (continued)
Glossoceras gracile Barrande +

Gomphpceras s p .
(according to Hedstrom, 1923)- +
Ophidioceras reticulatum Angelin +
Ophidioceras rota Lindstrom +
Orthoceras sp. + +
Phragmoceras praecurvum Hedstrom ~
Phragmoceras sp. + +
Unidentified eephalopods +
TRILOBITA
Bumastus sp. + +
Calymene spectabilis Angelin
Calymene sp. +
Dalmanites obtusus (Lindstrsm) +
Encrinurus punctatus (Wahlenberg) +
Proetus conspersus (Angelin) +
Proetus sp. + +
Sphaerexochus laciniatus Lindstrom +
Sphaerexochus sp. + +
Unidentified trilobites
OSTRACODA
Hemsiella maccoyana (Jones) +

Leperditia gigantea Roemer
Leperditia gregaria Kiesow
Leperditia phaseolus (Hisinger)
Neobeyrichia nodulosa (Boll) +
Neobeyrichia s p .
Unidentified ostracodes
-
of the reef limestone since it is not known how deep this limestone reaches
below s e a level.
Stromatoporoids a r e the dominant element in the reef limestone. Their
development s e e m s to have been even more luxuriant than in the type area,
especially in the centre of the reef. In between them a r e Algae, some
colonies of branched and massive corals, cephalopods, and some solitary
corals, brachiopods and lamellibranchs. Also present a r e crinoids, which
HEMSE BEDS 385
Fig. 196. Figelhammar South. Reef limestone rich i n large stromatoporoid

colonies. Hemse Beds.
Fig.197. Detail of a rauk in Figelhammar North, with stratified sediments

intercalated i n the unstratified reef limestone. Hemse Beds.
contributed to the matrix, especially at the edges of the reef, as can be seen
particularly in the north and south. The shape of the reef is that of a crescent,
with the opening about westwards.
A survey of fossils found in the Holmhallar-type reef limestones of the

Hemse Beds, in FHgelhammar and Ljugarn, and in the reef-detrital limestones
between Snabben and Sysne is presented in Table XIX.
D i s c u s s ion
It is clear that the deposition of the Klinteberg Beds must have been
followed by an increase in water depth. This is particularly demonstrated
by the presence of the wide strip of Hemse marlstone (which is comparable
to that of the Slite marlstone) but to some extent also by changes in the
nature of the limestones. Perhaps the lowermost limestones reflect a
deepening of the water that may have taken place at the time of their
deposition. In the remaining part of Early Hemse time the depth of the water
may have remained more o r less the same.
In the second half of Hemse time, the water became shallower again.
The best developed reef of Holmhallar type, that of Ljugarn, is found around
present s e a level close to the boundary between the limestone and marlstone
areas. Reefs found close to this boundary, inland, occur at a higher
topographical and stratigraphical level, and a r e of the Hoburgen type
(Lindeklint, Guffrideklint). The decrease in water depth is further reflected
by the nature of part of the Hoburgen-type reef limestone exposures,
particularly in the Ostergarn area. At the very end of Hemse time, the rate
of this drop of water depth, became more rapid (deposition of the Dayia flags).
Whereas during Klinteberg time, the depth contours in the a r e a of
central Gotland might have shown a tendency to return to a more northeast -
southwest orientation, in the course of Hemse time, their direction became
again more east - west, most presumably due to the same epeirogenetic
movements which caused the variations in water depth. This, then, will
explain the direction of the boundary between the Hemse limestone and
marlstone areas.
The occurrence of the Holmhallar-type reef belt in a direction of about
55O may indicate that this was approximately the direction of the depth
contours at the time when these reefs began their development. But whereas
the reefs at Ljugarn and F k e l h a m m a r could develop into large, typicaI
reefs, that of Ljugarn being the largest, the reefs further northeast along
the coast between Snabben and Sysne especially remained smaller and l e s s
typical of Holmhallar type, even showing some signs of transition to the
Hoburgen type. This suggests that the change in the direction of the depth
contours took place roughly at the time of formation of the Holmhiillar-type
reefs. Also, similarly the somewhat younger reef limestone at Herrvik is
not of the characteristic Hoburgen type.
Again somewhat younger a r e the reefs of Grogarnsberg and Gannberg,
in Ostergarn Parish. They a r e the most northern of the several Hoburgen-
type reefs in the Upper Hemse Beds. It is just these which show the most
distinct signs of formation in shallow water. This indicates that by that time,
the direction of coast line and depth contours was about east - west.
EKE BEDS 387
EKE BEDS
The parish of Eke, after which the Eke Beds have been named, is i n the
middle of a strip, with a maximum width of about 5 km, in which the beds a r e
either exposed o r form the solid rock directly underneath a cover of
Quaternary material. The s t r i p extends from N t u d d e n in the southwest, over
parts of the parishes of Nas, Havdhem, Gratlingbo, Eke, Alva and Rone, to
Hummelbosholmen i n Burs Parish in the northeast. Some further exposures
a r e found northeast of this strip, in the parishes of Nlr, Lau and Burs. Only
i n the latter a r e a do reef limestones occur.
The thickness of the Eke Beds is about 14 m in the west of southern
Gotland and about 10 m in the east.
In most of the area where Eke Beds occur, they a r e built up by bluish
grey marlstone, which after weathering is often somewhat brownish. The
rock is often somewhat micaceous and sandy and rather hard; stratification
is not always very apparent and the fossil content is high. Northeastwards
the content of calcareous matter increases.
Marly limestone is only found in the northeast, e.g., in the higher parts
of Lau Backar, along the coast between Nyudden and Nabbens Fisklage in the
northeast of Nar Parish, north of Osterviken in the east of N a r Parish, and
in a few small islands off the coast of Lauviken (Lau Holmar). In general,
this rock is distinctly stratified, bluish o r brownish grey in colour, rather
hard; the m a r l content varies.
Included in the stratified marly limestone are some reefs.
One of the best exposures of Eke reef limestone is found in an old

quarry, west of the road Lau - Gunnor, about 0.7 km south-southwest of Lau
Church. Best exposed is the northwest wall (Fig.198, 198), which shows the
basal part of a reef, which in all likelihood, was originally quite large, to
judge from the rather strong dips in the stratified limestone close to the
reef (generally about l o o , locally up to 2 5 O towards the reef). This stratified
limestone is so rich in large and small remains of crinoids that it should
rather be called a crinoid coquina; also present in it a r e some brachiopods,
bryozoans and corals; the matrix i s marly. The stratification is rather
distinct; in a few places there is cross-bedding. The boundary with the reef
limestone is comparatively distinct.
The reef limestone is strongly marly and contains many flat-lenticular
colonies of reef builders, which give the reef a vaguely stratified appearance.
Corals and stromatoporoids a r e the most common; the latter do not dominate
as strongly as in other reefs of comparable (Hoburgen) type, and the majority
of their colonies a r e relatively small. Bryozoans a r e also very common.
Algae a r e present. In the matrix, crinoid remains and brachiopods dominate,
but the former a r e not nearly as abundant there a s they a r e in the reef-
surrounding rock. Marl pockets are common but generally small; usually
they show a very thin stratification. The reef as a whole gives a less
Fig.198. Drawing of the exposures in the northwest wall of an old quarry

about 0.7 km south-southwest of Lau Church, at the west side of the country-
road Lau - Gunnor. A photograph of the right two-thirds of this wall is
shown as Fig.199.
unorganized impression than the majority of Hoburgen-type reefs, even

though reef builders out of their growth orientations a r e rather occasionally
found.
In the southwest wall of the same quarry, only stratified crinoid lime-
stone is exposed, dipping slightly towards the reef. The northeast wall also
shows such crinoid limestone, locally passing upwards into reef limestone
of the same nature as in the northwest wall (Fig.200).
On the east side of Lau Backar, a section of a few metres high is found
west of Hallsarve, 1.25 km east of Lau Church. The lowest part is hidden
behind s c r e e material. The higher parts show stromatoporoid reef limestone
with a very marly matrix, brownish in colour through weathering. Also
present in the reef limestone are several corals, and bryozoans, crinoids and
brachiopods. Locally, the reefs show a vague and irregular stratification; in
these parts crinoid fragments are distinctly more abundant. The exposed
thickness of the reef limestone is 1-3 m. Laterally the rock passes into
stratified crinoid limestone with a varying content of crinoid remains and
reef debris, generally rather rich in brachiopods; the colour of the sediment
is brownish grey to light violet grey. Underlying the reef limestone is 3-4 dm
of finely to middle crystalline, light grey to brownish light grey limestone i n
layers of an average of 1 cm thick. In its upper part, that limestone is poor
in fossils; in the lower part, brachiopods, bryozoans and crinoids a r e
represented. The sediment slightly sags under the reef limestone. Underneath
this stratified limestone, locally the Duyia flags, the uppermost Hemse Beds,
crop out, with on top of these, a thin, dark layer of phosphorite with glauconite.
Northeast of the previous locality, reef limestone can be seen in a few
other exposures. About half-way between Hallsarve and Botvide, crinoid lime-
stone crops out to a thickness of about 4 m. It is a greyish white rock,
extremely rich in crinoid fragments, and with a varying content of marl,
which locally, through weathering, gives the rock a brownish colour. In some
parts, the stratification is very distinct, but in others, very vague. Locally
EKE BEDS 389
Fig.199. Reef limestone overlying stratified limestones, as exposed in a n old

quarry about 0.7 k m south-southwest of Lau Church. This picture shows part
of the northwest wall of the q u a r r y (cf. Fig.198).
Fig.200. Reef limestone and stratified limestones of the Eke Beds, as

exposed in the northeast wall of a n old quarry, about 0.7 km south-southwest
of Lau Church, along the countryroad Lau - Gunnor.
it can be seen that this crinoid limestone occurs in close connection with reef
limestone.
At Botvide, i n the northeast of Lau Backar, the exposed wall is divided
into two parts. The upper part is some tens of metres west of the road. In a
number of outcrops, 1-7 m high, reef limestone is predominantly found,
brownish to bluish grey in colour and with a rather strongly marly matrix;
i t brecciates under the influence of weathering. In addition to stromatoporoids,
which a r e generally thin, corals and bryozoans also occur a s reef builders.
The rock is rather unorganized, with several colonies not in their positions
of growth. Marly crinoid limestone is intercalated as pockets in the reef
limestone.
Locally the reef limestone i s covered by light grey to light brownish
grey, thin and very irregularly stratified limestone, extremely rich in
crinoid fragments. The lower 30-40 cm a r e often also very rich in reef
debris, which is partly coarse. The maximum observed thickness of this
crinoid limestone is about 2 m.
The lower part of the wall i s found along the road. At the base, lenses
of marly limestone in a bluish grey m a r l a r e exposed. This deposit belongs
to the top of the Hemse marlstone. It is overlaid by a 5 cm thick layer of
hard, dense, splintery limestone, very rich in Dayia navicula (J. de C. Sowerby);
the colour of the rock is blue to bluish grey; after weathering it is often more
brownish. Locally the layer is divided into two layers, with an interbedded
m a r l film. The overlying Eke Beds a r e represented by marly reef limestone,
exposed to a thickness of up to about 1.5 m, alternating with irregularly
stratified marly crinoid limestone. The Dayia layer sags underneath reef
limestone occurrences.
Along the coast about 0.5 km u,est-southuiest of Nyudden, stromatoporoid
reef limestone i s found. in an exposed thickness of only 1-2 dm. It overlies stratified
limestone rich in reef debris (remains of stromatoporoids and bryozoans) and crinoid
fragments.
A s i m i l a r thin remnant of reef limestone has been described by Munthe (1902,
p.263) f r o m the beach about 1 km west-southwest of Nyudden. Fig.201, taken from the
detailed map of that area given by Munthe. shows the distribution of reef and stratified
limestone at that locality. Presumably all reef-limestone exposures formed p a r t of
the s a m e r e e f , which then was a t least 12.5 m long and 4 m wide. The stratified lime-
stone is marly and partly splintery. It s a g s in the shape of a basin under the reef lime-
stone, with dips of up to as much as about 3 5 O .
r e e f limestone @ stratitied limestone

Fig.201. Map, showing the distribution of reef and stratified limestone
(Eke Beds) on the beach approx. 1 km west-southwest of Nyudden (Nar Parish).
Presumably all reef limestone formed part of one reef with a somewhat
undulating basis.
EKE BEDS 391
Along the coast of Hammaren, in the e a s t of Nar P a r i s h , and close to s e a level,

distinctly stratified grey, splintery limestone is found, which is generally very rich
in fossils. Within short distances (order of magnitude of metres) it shows strong
variations in the direction of dip, presumably caused by an e a r l i e r coverage by reef
limestone. Roundstones on the beach, which are in places large, and consist of remains
of coral colonies, may represent the last remnants of these reefs. The exposed
stratified limestone is locally rich in crinoid fragments, bryozoans, corals and Algae;
these p a r t s are l e s s well stratified and may have been formed close to the reefs.
Large exposures, also showing reef limestone, are not found in this a r e a .
Sediments comparable t o those of Hammaren are also found in the environs

Of the Maldes f a r m s , about 1-4 km southeast of Nar Church. At the base the Dayia
flags are exposed, representing the top of the Hemse Beds. Next i s a very thin layer
of phosphorite. The lowermost Eke Beds consist of a zone pf stratified crystalline
limestone, about 1 0 c m thick, very rich in fossils which a r e partly worn. This rock
i s very s i m i l a r to the limestone cropping out at Hammaren. Here, however, this rock
is overlaid by reef limestone, locally up t o just over 1 m thick. Originally the reef
limestone must have been thicker; much has been eroded.
A list of fossils found in the Eke reef limestones and directly s u r -

rounding sediments is included in Table IX (pp.60-67). All fossils which
have been identified, came from Lau Backar and the old quarry south-
southwest of Lau Church.
Discussion
The Eke reef limestone, which in east Gotland, follows almost directly
over the Hemse marlstone, seems to have been formed i n shallower water.
In the Lau - N a r district (e.g., in the environment bf the Maldes farms), the
Dayia flags, concluding the Hemse Beds, a r e covered by a thin layer of
phosphorite with glauconite, which is believed to represent a stratigraphical
hiatus (Spjeldnaes, 1950). Since both phosphorite and glauconite are assumed
to form slowly on the s e a bottom, the occurrence of a thin layer of these in
the Lau - N5r a r e a may identify a rather long non-sedimentary interlude
not related to emergence o r erosion. On the basis of graptolite distribution,
the top of the Hemse Beds is placed somewhere i n the zone of Monograptus
scanicus; the Burgsvik Beds a r e certainly of Upper Ludlowian age. Thus, i n
between the Hemse and Burgsvik Beds, sediments should occur representing
a long time interval, comprising a major part of the upper Lower Ludlowian
(part of the zone of Monograptus scanicus and the entire zone of Monograptus
tumescens), the entire Middle Ludlowian and the beginning of the Upper
Ludlowian. Since the Eke Beds do not themselves indicate a slower r a t e of de-
position than the other sedimentary complexes in Gotland, the presence of
a long break in the stratigraphical sequence is indeed likely. It would be
illogical then to assume that the break might only be a local phenomenon in
-
the Lau Nar district, as was suggested by Spjeldnaes (1950). In the west
the thickness of the Eke Beds i s only slightly more than in the east. No
indications of a hiatus have so far been found in the west, however, and the
problem of the geographical and time extension of the hiatus noted in the
Lau area has at this stage to be left open.
That one o r more breaks should be present within the Eke Beds is
most unlikely.
Reefs a r e restricted to the Lower Eke Beds. These and the marly
3 92 STRATIGRAPHY OF T H E SILURIAN O F GOTLAND
limestones equivalent to them were presumably formed in deeper water than

the somewhat arenaceous and micaceous marlstone occurring in the west and
in the Upper Eke Beds in the east. This might suggest that the direction of the
depth contours a t the beginning of Eke time was probably north-northeast -
-
south-southwest; at the end of Eke time, m o r e northeast southwest. In the
east, this resulted in a decrease in water depth during the time of formation
of the Eke Beds.
BURGSVTK BEDS
Burgsvik, after which the Burgsvik Beds have been named, is a harbour
and adjoining settlement in the northwest of the southern peninsula of Gotland,
belonging to Oja Parish.
The Burgsvik Beds a r e exposed on the surface, o r a r e overlaid by only
a thin cover of Quaternary material, in l a r g e p a r t s of Gratlingbo Parish.
They also occur in a usually r a t h e r broad zone, going from t h e r e southwards,
e a s t of the eastern beach of Burgsviken (the bay on which the harbour Burgsvik
is situated), down to Fide. There it shows an eastward extension towards
Tubode. F r o m Burgsvik this zone runs westwards, to Valar and from t h e r e
again, in a generally narrow belt along the coast, southwards, down to slightly
south of Hoburgen.
F r o m a petrographical point of view, the Burgsvik Beds present a rather
heterogenous picture. The main component is an even- and very fine-grained
calcareous sandstone, rich in mica. Often, particularly in the Lower Burgsvik
Beds, the sandstone is shaly. Locally the sandstone contains lenses of harder,
m o r e strongly calcareous material. In addition, the Burgsvik Beds also
comprise clayish marlstone and claystone, while in the uppermost part of the
unit a pure limestone o c c u r s as well. The l a t t e r is normally developed as an
oolite, and in part a l s o contains conglomerates.
Between the sandstone, the clayish marlstone and the claystone, several
transitions occur, the s a m e being t r u e f o r between the sandstone and the oolite.
In the west, the Burgsvik Beds r e a c h a thickness of about 47 m. Towards
the e a s t they thin out r a t h e r rapidly. The maximum thickness cannot be
established by any direct observation. It is known f r o m two deep borings, the
f i r s t being the well-known boring a t Burgsvik (Table m),the other a l e s s e r -
known boring at Vamlingbo. The latter was a boring f o r water, c a r r i e d out
early in this century near the shop, about 0.5 k m north-northeast of
Vamlingbo Church. There, first about 40 m of the so-called "kopphlill" (Hamra
limestone) w e r e bored through, after which "sandstone with clay" was found
to a thickness of a t least 40 m , whereupon the boring was stopped. At a depth
of about 70 m below the surface (or about 55 m below present sealeve1)in the
sandstone an unusually hard layer, 0.3 m thick, was found, which presumably
was a lense of "flinta" (very hard, strongly calcareous sandstone). F r o m the
above information, i t s e e m s probable that the Burgsvik Beds also beneath
Vamlingbo reach a thickness of m o r e than 40 m and have their boundary
with the Hamra-Sundre Beds at a depth of about 25 m below present s e a level.
A few m o r e borings have actually been c a r r i e d out in the Burgsvik Beds,
but not to great depths; nowhere did these borings reach the b a s e of the
Burgsvik Beds.
F o r the sake of convenience, the present author will divide the Burgsvik
Beds into t h r e e subunits, based mainly on the r e s u l t s of the boring at
Burgsvik (Table XXI).
BURGSVIK BEDS 393
TABLE XX
The Burgsvik Beds in the core drilling at Burgsvik
Stratigraphical unit Lithology Thickness (m)
I
typical Burgsvik sandstone 0.33
somewhat oolitical sandstone 0.24
argillaceous, shaly sandstone 2.07
Upper Burgsvik Beds finely-oolitical limestone 0.38
claystone and clayey shales 0.60
gap in the core 1.01
claystone 0.05
oolite 1.96
Middle Burgsvik Beds 0.04
argillaceous, shaly sandstone
clay stone 0.12
I
clay stone 0.12
Lower Burgsvik Beds claystone and clayey shales 0.07
"flinta" (hard, very calcareous sandstone) 0.20
47.22
TABLE XXI
1
Summarized lithological composition of the Lower, Middle and Upper Burgsvik Beds ..
Subunit Claystone Argillaceous Sandstone Oolite Total
shaly sandstone .
thickness
Upper Burgsvik Beds 0.65 2.07 1.05 2.34 7.11
Middle Burgsvik Beds 0.12 0.91 20.88 - 22.71
Lower Burgs* Beds 4.34 12.16 0.20 - 17.40
'All thicknesses are given in metres.
The succession of strata within the Burgsvik Beds in the west of

southernmost Gotland is rather constant in main lines, but varies strongly
in detail.The shaly sandstone is characteristic of the Lower Burgsvik Beds,
the sandstone for the Middle Burgsvik Beds and the alternating occurrence
of shaly sandstone, sandstone and oolite for the Upper Burgsvik Beds. The
latter also contain some claystone. The Upper Burgsvik Beds are much more
commonly exposed than the two other subunits. Good exposures a r e found
particularly in the west of the southern peninsula. Within these Upper
Burgsvik Beds, the strata, with the exception only of the uppermost oolite
horizon, thin out laterally and a r e replaced by other sediments. Sandstone
often plays a more important part in the Upper Burgsvik Beds than it does
in the succession found i n the Burgsvik boring, whereas claystone is only
scarcely represented o r even com-pletely lacking in some localities.

Some students of the geology of Gotland have correlated the Burgsvik Beds
with the Upper Whitcliffe Flags in the English type succession, which a t that time
were considered to represent the uppermost Silurian (Upper Ludlowian) (Hede,
1921; SWe-Sbderbergh, 1941). Murchison (1846, p.27)considered the sandy and
calcareous sediments, now collected under the name of Burgsvik Beds, to
represent a passage from the Silurian into the Devonian. When White (1950)
redefined the Silurian - Devonian boundary in England andplaced this a t the
b a s e of the Ludlow Bone-Bed, Spjeldnaes (1950), drew the consequences of
this f o r Gotland and rejuvenated Murchison's view by drawing the boundary
Silurian - Devonian between the Middle and Upper Burgsvik Beds. The inter-
national Devonian symposium, held in Calgary in Canada in 1967, moved the
Silurian - Devonian boundary up to the basis of the Monograptus uniformis
Zone. The consequences of this was that the Burgsvik Beds, and also the
Hamra-Sundre Beds, of Gotland now have to be considered again as belonging
to the Silurian.
Sandstone
The typical Burgsvik sandstone, particularly as found in the Upper

Burgsvik Beds, is a fine-grained, calcareous quartz sandstone. On a f r e s h
surface the rock has a bluish-grey colour; a weathered surface often is m o r e
o r l e s s greyish brown.
Quartz constitutes over 90% of the typical Burgsvik sandstone, the
grains being usually angular o r only slightly rounded. The size of the grains
is generally between 0.05 and 0.1 mm; grains exceeding 0.2 mm are r a r e .
The calcareous cement generally constitutes about 7 4 % of the Burgsvik
sandstone (Munthe, 1921b). Dispersed through the sandstone a r e grains of
feldspars, which are of the s a m e s i z e as the quartz grains. Flakes of mica,
both mmcovite and biotite, a r e common, particularly on bedcling planes.
Very locally r a t h e r l a r g e c r y s t a l s of pyrite w e r e observed.
Locally, the Burgsvik sandstone contains l e n s e s of hard and m o r e
calcareous material. On a weathered surface, they appear as lumps, e.g.,
a t the foot of Hoburgen. The people of Gotland call these "flinta". According
to Munthe (1921b), these concretions contain about 40% CaC03.
The thickness of the sandstone l a y e r s v a r i e s greatly. At one place
some l a y e r s of 1.5 m thick may be found, without lamination; in other places
such l a y e r s may show lamination; and elsewhere the sandstone has l a y e r s of
only 1-4 cm thick. A great variation in the thickness of the layers,
particularly in a vertical direction, may even b e found within one c r o s s -
section.
The typical Burgsvik sandstone may, in the Upper Burgsvik Beds, pass
into deposits of a m o r e mixed nature. Thus, l a y e r s a r e found with such a high
calcium-carbonate content that the rock is r a t h e r an arenaceous limestone.
In general, the content in clay is very small. Certain layers, however, a r e
s o rich in clay that transitions to arenaceous marlstone and claystone occur.
The more-argillaceous l a y e r s often show a shaly character.
Oolite
The oolites of the Upper Burgsvik Beds are r a t h e r hard limestones,

light white grey o r greyish white in colour. The rocks a r e distinctly
BURGSVIK BEDS 3 95
stratified, with layers varying i n thickness from some decimetres up to a few

metres. The oolites are.exposed at several places, e.g., over a rather large
a r e a south and north of Oja Church and in a number of larger and smaller
vertical sections which occur along the western shore of the southern
peninsula. Locally, however, the oolites may also be absent, e.g., i n the
western part of Grotlingbo-udd and near Rommunds (northeast of Fide Church).
The CaCO3 content of the oolites varies between about 90 and 96%.
The uppermost oolite horizon, forming the top of the Burgsvik Beds, is
found i n the great majority of the outcrops, which expose rock of this age.
For this reason, it is mentioned in the older literature (e.g., Munthe, 1910)
as a separate stratigraphical unit. The other oolite layers a r e not continuous,
but wedge out laterally, a s is the case with the claystone.
The ooids of the Burgsvik oolites show a great diversity in size and
form. In general, they have a diameter of 1-4 mm, but ooids of only micro-
scopic size also occur. Often the ooids a r e more o r l e s s rounded in shape,
with a concentric o r a radial structure, o r they form rosette-like balls,
"twins", "triplets" and "multiplets", which a r e together enveloped by a
common oolitic mantle. Moreover, also other, larger ooids of a more
elongated o r more irregular shape a r e common. Some of these possess only
a very small nucleus of foreign material, such as a quartz grain, but some
may have relatively large fragments of shells, corals o r bryozoans a s a
nucleus. The latter often show more the character of incrustations than that
of ooids. If the size of the enclosed fossil o r fossil fragment is much greater
than the thickness of the enveloping oolitic crust and, moreover, the nucleus
has a form diverging from that of a sphere, this form may be recognizable
also, through the oolite mantle, in the final product. These larger incrustations
of fossils a r e clearly distinguishable from the true, more o r l e s s round, egg-
shaped o r even somewhat elongated ooids. Thus, at f i r s t sight, one may tend
to consider them as quite different formations. In reality, however, there a r e
many transitions which make it impossible to draw a boundary between both
types. This is all the more difficult because both show the same structure.
The ooids a r e generally sorted in layers according to size. Thus, e.g.,
the more typical oolites and those incrustating larger objects are often not
found together in one layer, but may well occur immediately above each other.
The dimensions of the individual ooids may be a standard for the mobility of
the water (Cayeux, 1935).
Although the ooids generally have only one nucleus, specimens with two
or more a r e also found. In most of these cases, ooid formation had started
around one grain o r fossil fragment. When other grains came into contact
with the f i r s t one, they may have become surrounded a s well. In a similar
way, two developing ooids may have united laterally to become one final ooid.
In both cases, such a growing together had i t s influence on the form of the
final product. In other instances, with single ooids, the thickness of the
successive laminae is not the same everywhere. This has also led to
divergences i n shape. The deviations from a spherical shape, however, a r e
not so great and not so common a s in the quiet-water oolites described by
Freeman (1962) and Davis (1966). The latter a r e characterized by a not more
than low to moderate sphericity, by eccentric nuclei and by laminae which
abut against the nuclei. A further difference between the agitated-water
oolites, such a s found i n Gotland, and the quiet-water oolites is that the
latter a r e not o r at best moderately sorted, whereas, as stated, the former
can clearly show a certain sorting to size.
In addition to the m o r e o r less pronounced concentric lamination, the

ooids often also show a radial structure, which presumably is not of primary
but of secondary character. It may have been caused by recrystallization
(Cayeux, 1935, p.224). The radial structure reveals itself in the arrangement
of the calcite crystals. In general, however, this s t r u c t u r e is not as c l e a r as
the spheroidal lamination, and i t is often only to be seen with difficulty. The
radial s t r u c t u r e may be found both in the normal ooids and in the larger
incrustations.
In between the ooids f r e e g r a i n s and fragments of fossils a r e also found.
These may be either rounded o r angular, and do not differ in their shape in
any way from the surrounded grains. Compared to those which served as
nuclei, however, the f r e e grains a r e , on the average, of s m a l l e r size. The
s a m e was found by B e r s i e r and Vernet (1956) of oolites in the molasse of the
Alps. They measured an average of 0.27 mm f o r the diameter of 100 ooid
nuclei against an average diameter of only 0.14 mm in 100 f r e e grains. This
is reminiscent of the formation of crystals. There, too, larger ones grow a t
the cost of the s m a l l e r ones, as a result of surface tension. The g r e a t e r
average s i z e of the ooid nuclei is, therefore, a strong argument in favour of
oolite formation through chemical precipitation.
The Burgsvik oolites partly occur in close connection with algal balls.
The latter, however, reached their maximum development in the algal lime-
stone which overlies the uppermost oolite horizon and which represents the
lowermost p a r t of the next stratigraphical unit, the Hamra-Sundre Beds. The
similarity between ooids and algal balls may be s o great as to b e hardly
discernible in the field. In microscopic slides, however, the c o a r s e r
organogenic structure of the algal balls makes the latter easily distinguish-
able from the ooids. Like the ooids, the algal balls often show a nucleus of
foreign material and a tendency to develop a spheroidal shape. With them,
too, the final form was greatly influenced by the shape and s i z e of the nucleus
and the thickness of the mantle. In his limestone classification, Wolf (1960)
united ooids and Algae-encrusted g r a i n s with pisolites and Foraminifera-
encrusted grains under the collective name of "coated grains" (cf. Bissell
and Chilingar, 1967, p.96).
The occurrence of ooids and algal balls close together suggests a
preference f o r a s i m i l a r environment of formation. Under suitable conditions
Algae may even have promoted oolite formation. Goldberg (1957) and Holland
et al. (1 963) found that oolites may contain a higher Sr/Ca ratio than normal
sea water. Higher Sr/Ca ratios are also found in calcareous green Algae
(Odum, 1957). Associated with their metabolism are l a r g e diurnal pH changes
which cause solution and precipitation. This may cause a higher Sr content.
If rapid precipitation is required f o r oolite genesis, the very great vital
activity of Algae (photosynthesis) may also in this respect be partly
responsible (Odum, 1957). High Sr/Ca ratios may be a palaeoecological
indication of algal photosynthesis (Wolf et al., 1967, p.89).
Cayeux (1935) and Newel1 et al. (1960) list, as favourable environmental
conditions f o r oolite formation: a warm sea, supersaturated with calcium
salts, and with water that is pure, very shaIlow and strongly agitated.
Further studies showed that the causes of oolite formation a r e still m o r e
complex and that chemical f a c t o r s play a m o r e important p a r t with respect
to physical factors than was originally thought. The above-mentioned
possible influence of pH changes caused by algal photosynthesis is an
example of this. Further, Usdowski (1963) demonstrated that also the Mg/Ca
BURGSVIK BEDS 397
ratio and the salinity a r e of influence on oolite formation: the Mg/Ca ratio
should be between 2/1 and 8/1; the lowest limit of salt content lies some-
where between 3.6 and 0.5% (cf. also Wolf et al., 1967, pp.97-98).
On the other hand i t can be questioned whether all conditions which a r e
generally listed in literature as being required for oolite formation, a r e
really essential. Although the present author is convinced that the Burgsvik
oolites were formed in agitated water, the studies by Freeman (1962) on
oolites presently being generated in Laguna Madre, Texas, and by Davis (1966)
on Ordovician oolites of Minnesota, have shown that at least some kind of
oolite can form in a low-energy environment. With respect to Gotland,
another traditionally listed condition is questionable, viz. whether the water
in which the Burgsvik oolites were formed, was really pure. It is t r u e that
the oolites present themselves as rather pure limestones. But this may also
have been caused by the fact that during the time of their formation small
clay particles, which were present i n the water, did not have the opportunity
to settle because of the strong agitation of the water. The presence of clay-
stone as local lenses in the Upper Burgsvik Beds shows that there was a
supply of such fine terrigenous debris, which, however, only settled where
the water was more quiet. Moreover, if oolite samples are dissolved, a
small fraction, generally 1-2%, of insoluble material may remain.
The CaC03 which forms the matrix of the oolites, has perhaps been
chemically precipitated directly from the water to a hard and compact lime-
stone. That is to say, not as a detrital lime mud. An indication of this is
found in the fact that higher in the oolite layers, rounded pebbles a r e found
which consist of oolite limestone, both ooids and matrix. Apparently these
pebbles were worked loose from lower parts of the layer in question. The
time between the formation of the first oolitic limestone and the inclusion
of pebbles thereof higher in the same layer must have been relatively short
and completely inadequate for the compaction and hardening of a mud under
normal subsea conditions. Similar oolite pebbles have also been described
as "des morceaux de calcaires oolithiques remani6s" by Cayeux (1935, p.2251,
who classified these among the so-called pseudo-oolites, and by Bersier and
Vernet (1956, fig.lO), as "fragments polyoolithiques remanies". Purdy and
Imbrie (1964), working on Recent sediments of the Great Bahama Bank,
consider it likely that subaerial exposure also played an important part when
lithification of a carbonate deposit took place within a very short interval of
time. Newel1 et al. (1960) state that waters l e s s than 6 ft. deep a r e optimum
for oolite formation. With such slight depth small environmental changes may
indeed have lead to temporary subaerial exposure. However, no other
evidence for subaerial exposure has been found in the Upper Burgsvik
oolites; in contrast to the uppermost Burgsvik sandstone.
A s said before, almost all oolite occurrences in the Upper Burgsvik
Beds a r e local and thin out laterally. Probably they were formed in those
p a r t s of the s e a where the water was most strongly agitated. Only the upper-
most oolite deposit is found over most of the a r e a where the Upper Burgsvik
Beds occur at, o r closely to, the present surface of Gotland. It seems that at
the time of i t s formation, the water was strongly agitated over a large area.
Unevennesses which occurred in the sea floor, such as offshore b a r s (see
later) were buried by this deposit, which forms a good index horizon.
3 9% STRATIGRAPHY OF T H E SILURIAN OF GOTLAND
Other stratified sediments
As was said while discussing the sandstone, in the Upper Burgsvik Beds
the l a t t e r sediment may p a s s laterally into arenaceous marlstone and clay-
stone. In the Lower, and to a much l e s s e r extent, aIso in the Middle Burgsvik
Beds, claystone may b e found as a m o r e independent element in the
stratigraphical succession. It then f o r m s continuous layers. In the Upper
Burgsvik Beds, the claystone is found r a t h e r in local lenses of greatly
varying s i z e , and in local thin layers.
Generally, the argillaceous marlstone is a r a t h e r loose rock, with
distinctly lower average grain size than the sandstone. It contains mica.
The calcium-carbonate content is about the s a m e as that of the sandstone
(Munthe, 1921b). The claystone is usually a somewhat h a r d e r rock, very
fine-grained and very poor in sandy or calcareous material.
It should be noted, that, with a great variety of mixed sediments
occurring, nowhere a r e transitions between claystone and oolite found.
Even oolite underlying o r overlying claystone is rare compared to oolite
resting upon o r being overlaid by sandstone. Marlstone takes an intermediate
position in this respect. When the mobility of the water decreased, c o a r s e
terrigenous detritus settled first.
The absence of a mixed form of claystone and oolite, thus, suggests
that deposition of both sediments took place under different circumstances.
The claystone is believed to be a quiet water deposit, while the oolite is a
sediment from agitated water.
The present author a s s u m e s that the claystones found in the Burgsvik
Beds represent deposits from two different environments:
(1) Claystones laid down in water deep enough f o r their normal
sedimentation. To this belong the claystones and argillaceous sandstones of
the Lower and Middle Burgsvik Beds. They form a normal succession to the
Eke marlstones.
(2) Claystones laid down on flats, in the littoral zone, either in local
sheltered depressions within these flats, or on higher places which were only
inundated periodically (e.g., at flood tides). Most of the claystone found in the
Upper Burgsvik Beds may have been deposited under such conditions.
Sedimentary characteristics
It has already been mentioned that the claystone of the Upper Burgsvik
Beds generally occurs in the form of local lenses of greatly varying s i z e o r
in local thin layers, and was probably formed in very shallow water. Also
the formation of oolite gives s o m e indications about the environment in
which the Upper BurgsvikBeds a r e laid down. In this section, some further
characteristics of the environment of deposition of these beds will be
presented.
Cross -bedding, discordant bedding. In some localities, cross-bedding

can be seen in the Upper Burgsvik sandstone. Cross-lamination within sand-
stone l a y e r s (Fig.202) is m o r e common.
Occasionally the boundary between a sandstone and an oolite layer shows
discordant bedding. There is no evidence to suggest that such an unconformity
may result from by-passing o r lack of sedimentary deposition for some time.
Therefore, i t is most likely that the discordant bedding is produced by the
BURGSVIK BEDS 399
Fig.202. T r a n s v e r s e section through Upper Burgsvik sandstone, quarry

Hans6n and Co., Valar. Cross-bedding in an alternation of light and dark
grey lamellae. The cut-of indicates that the upper part probably belonged to
the filling sediment of a s m a l l depression in a beach. At the top an erosion
level. (After Manten, 1966a, fig.3.)
erosive action of moving water in a very shallow environment. A s will be

s e e n f r o m s o m e of the f u r t h e r c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s t o be described, t h e r e are
a l s o other indications that strong erosion alternated with sedimentation.
Ripple m a r k s . F o s s i l ripple m a r k s w e r e observed in the Upper

Burgsvik sandstone, very close to the beach of a s m a l l bay just slightly
north of the peninsula Killingholmen, and about 1.9 k m southwest of Valar.
The m a r k s w e r e regular, parallel ridges, having a symmetrical shape and
with s h a r p depressions between them. The distance between successive
c r e s t s was about 4 cm. The orientation of the crests was north-northeast -
south-southwest. The m a r k s may be considered as oscillation ripples.
Similar ripple m a r k s have been found by Hadding (1929) on a sandstone
l a y e r a t Burgsvik. The c r e s t s t h e r e had an east - west orientation.
Offshore b a r s . In a chapter "Some r e m a r k s as to the tectonics",

Munthe (1913) mentioned a "folding of the solid rock" f r o m the environment
of Burgsvik. This "folding" is still exposed fragmentarily in the surroundings
of the pond Kroksteats Brye. It a p p e a r s in the field as a s m a l l pseudo-
anticline, formed by a single oolite layer. Munthe assumed a post-Silurian
tectonic origin of this structure. Since, however, in Gotland, no other distinct
indications of folding w e r e observed, t h i s s t r u c t u r e n e a r Burgsvik h a s been
examined m o r e closely. It h a s been found than, that the oolite layer in this
area wedges out f r o m a thickness of 1.5 m at the lower flank t o a t the most
0.5 m a t the top. This shows that the oolite has been sedimented over an
uneven surface. Therefore, the s t r u c t u r e cannot be of a tectonic origin (Fig.203).
The a x i s of the s t r u c t u r e h a s an e a s t - west direction.
A second "fold" has been reported by Munthe from a locality some

kilometres northward, west of Fide; in this case with a north - south
directed axis. The occurrence i n one, restricted a r e a of two similar
structures with axes that are perpendicular to each other is further proof
that these structures a r e non-tectonic.
A third example has been found by the present author at Uddvide, 3.3 km
north of Fide Church. During the summer of 1956, in a quarry i n this locality,
a claystone layer was observed, which wedged out from a thickness of at
least 35 cm to a minimum of about 5 cm on top of a "fold-like" structure.
The axis of this structure quite probably had an approximately north-northwest -
south-southeast direction.
There can, thus, be little doubt that in all these three cases, deposition
took place on an uneven surface, and that the unevennesses in these surfaces
were of sedimentary origin. The most likely explanation is that these were
offshore bars. Seawards of most sandy coasts of the present day, offshore
b a r s a r e found, in an orientation parallel to the coast. All conditions required
for the formation of the offshore b a r s of the present day, were present in
southern Gotland too: a coast with shallow water, wave action, sufficient
sandy material and a flat s e a bottom. The dips of modern offshore b a r s
(about 6-10°) agree perfectly with those found in the Burgsvik Beds of
Got1and .
Distribution of fossils. The great majority of the Burgsvik Beds is

very poor i n fossils. This certainly holds for the Middle Burgsvik Beds and
the lower Upper Burgsvik Beds, which only locally contain one or a few
fossils.
In sharp contrast to these beds, the uppermost sandstone, the oolite
horizon at the top, and the transitions between these sandstone and oolite,
a r e generally very fossiliferous. Altogether remains of 85 different species
were found in these deposits. Among these fossils, there a r e 23 species of
brachiopods, 19 species of lamellibranchs, 14 gastropode species, 5 species
of ostracodes and,5 species of trilobites. Particularly the lamellibranchs
N
Kroksteats Brye
Fig.203. Two views on the "folding" near Burgsvik. Above the interpretation
of Munthe (1910), as a tectonic structure. Below the interpretation of the
present author, showing how an oolite layer thins over an uneven surface,
presumably representing a fossil offshore bar.
BURGSVIK BEDS 401
and some brachiopods a r e present in a great number of specimens. Many of
the lamellibranchs have thick shells.
The distribution of fossils in the Burgsvik Beds may be compared to
that in very shallow parts of the s e a s of the present day. The deposits of
these very shallow marine facies a r e the terminal products not of one
uninterrupted phase of sedimentation, but of a long-lasting succession of
alternate sedimentation and erosion. Every time a certain amount of
sediment is reworked, it goes together with a separation of the material
according to grain size. The shells tend thereby to become concentrated on
the beach, whereas they a r e very s c a r c e elsewhere.
If applied to the Burgsvik Beds, this suggests deposition in very shallow
water, of decreasing depth, until the uppermost deposits were laid down very
close to the shore line.
Rounded pebbles. In addition to grains of oolite and quartz, the transi-

tions between sandstone and oolite also often contain rounded fossils. The
latter a r e in many cases surrounded by a calcareous film. As already
mentioned when the Burgsvik oolite was described, rounded pebbles of oolite
may also be found. These a r e sometimes enveloped by a thin cover of algal
tissue. The rounded fossils and oolite pebbles together may give the oolitic-
sandstone layers a somewhat conglomeratic character.
Oolite pebbles may also be found in normal oolite layers. The presence
of such pebbles suggests that the sea must have been very shallow during
the deposition of the Upper Burgsvik Beds. Wave action was so strong that
material already deposited could be worked loose again, to be embedded i n
slightly younger layers. Rounded material is found up to and in the upper-
most oolite horizon.
At the level where the fossiliferous, uppermost sandstone passes into
the oolite horizon, locally a layer of a few centimetres thick is found in
which fossils are sorted according to size.
Bu.rrows. The author has observed only one trace of a burrowing

organism in the Upper Burgsvik Beds of Gotland.
Most s e a bottoms seem to have supported a variety of burrowing and
scavenging animals. Evidence of burrowing and organic disturbance of
sediment is found in deposits of many ages. They occur particularly in
marine shales and fine-grained sandstones. In deposits which wer.e laid down
on an open shore, they a r e , however, very r a r e .
Erosion channels. In several cross-sections through Burgsvik sand-

stone, channels have been seen (Fig.204). They may be up to several metres
wide and have a depth of several decimetres, and may cut entirely through
from two to several layers of sandstone. A s the channels a r e all exposed in
vertical sections, it could not be ascertained whether their course was
straight o r sinuous, neither could their length be determined. The main
direction of the channels is west - east and their sides a r e usually smooth.
The channel filling is generally structureless o r horizontally stratified.
Pothole-like excazlations. In a few places, the Upper Burgsvik sand-

stone was found to contain shallow filled-in excavations (Fig.205). These
excavations may be circular o r irregular in outline and generally have
diameters of 7-30 cm. They a r e filled with thin layers of sandstone which
N S
Fig.204. Channel in a cross-section through the Upper Burgsvik Beds at the

foot of the second hillock of Hoburgen, near the south of the west wall of this
hillock.
Fig.205. P a r t of the bottom of a layer of Upper Burgsvik sandstone, showing

the filling sediment of pothole-like excavations which were present in the
surface of the underlying layer. Quarry Hanskn and Co., Valar. (After Manten,
1966a, fig.4.)
usually follow the contours of the excavation. Very occasionally the upper
bedding plane of such a layer is vaguely rippled.
The s t r u c t u r e s probably originated on an open beach, under the influence
of interference of water c u r r e n t s (A.H. Bouma, personal communication, 1965).
Flute marks. F u r t h e r erosion phenomena are the flute marks, which

were observed in a quarry n e a r Burgsvik and a t the foot of Hoburgen. These are
discontinuous bulbosities of an elongated form. They may have been produced
by eddies resulting from currents, flowing over the s e a floor, where these
m e t a small original irregularity in the floor o r by a chance scour of a
softer patch of sediment.
BURGSVIK BEDS 403
Mud cracks. At the foot of Hoburgen, mud-cracked surfaces were
occasionally seen in layers of Upper Burgsvik sandstone. Generally such
layers a r e a few centimetres thick. The cracks a r e up to some millimetres
wide at the top and narrow downwards. They a r e usually not visible on the
bottom side of the layers. The roughly polygonal pattern of the cracks shows
no discernible preferred orientation. This indicates that a s t r e s s pattern
larger than the local s t r e s s e s acting centripetally within the polygonal cells,
was absent.
Mud cracks a r e generally the result of shrinkage due to subaerial
dehydration. The Burgsvik sandstone layers which show these cracks were
probably exposed and dried between tides, or during longer periods.
Rill marks. Rill marks were twice found in the Upper Burgsvik Beds,
again at the foot of Hoburgen (Fig.206). They form a dendritic aattern of marks,
1-16 mm wide. The wider marks have a more o r less median groove, which is
1-2 mm deep compared t o i t s direct surroundings. This groove excluded, the rill
marks a r e 1-4 mm deep, and their main direction is from west to east.
The marks were presumably formed by currents on a beach which period-
ically fell dry.
Fig.206. P a r t of a dendritic pattern of rill marks in the bottom plane of a

layer of Burgsvik sandstone, south of the second hillock of Hoburgen, about
1 m below the top of the Burgsvik Beds. A = surface of bottom plane; B =
c r o s s section. (After Manten, 1966a, fig. 5 . )
Fig.207. Structure found in Upper Burgsvik sandstone, south of the second
hillock of Hoburgen, about 1.30 m below the top of the Burgsvik Beds. The
structure consists of collections of small and shallow (1-2 mm) grooves
which may occur en-echelon in a belt (A), irregularly distributed (B),
roughly parallel (C) or in a fan-like pattern (D). The grooves a r e found in
the top surface of sandstone layers, in parts of one to a few square
decimetres large, and a r e not r a r e . In cross-section the grooves are, on the
average, symmetrical. The structure represents presumably not true rill
marks (cf. Fig.206), which show a somewhat different pattern and have a
median subgroove, which occurs nowhere i n the above marks. Perhaps,
however, these grooves a r e the earliest stages in rill-mark formation.
(After Manten, 1966a, fig.6.)
NE
locm
sw
Fig.208. Remarkable lumps, found in a Iayer of Burgsvik sandstone, 6 cm

thick, south of the second hillock of Hoburgen, about 1.50 m below the top of
the Burgsvik Beds. The boundaries of the lumps a r e of similar nature a s the
stratification planes northeast and southwest thereof. There is no lithological
difference between the rock of the lumps and of other parts of the same layer.
No other structures of this kind have been seen. The mode of origin of the
structure is unknown. (After Manten, 1966a, fig.?.)
--
BURGSVIK BEDS 405
NE ia cm sw
--
-
w W7
-
- -e
/
-
/ /
Fig.209. Lens-like intercalation within thinly parting shaly sandstone, Upper

Burgsvik Beds, south of the second hillock of Hoburgen, about 1.60 m below
the top of the Burgsvik Beds. The lens shows a very thin lamination. In
composition the lens is slightly more clayish than the surrounding shaly
sandstone, but the difference i s not great. No indications were found for
deposition in a somewhat sheltered environment; the origin of the structure
is still problematic. (After Manten, 1966a, fig.8.)
Some Problematic structures. In addition to the structures described

above, three structures were also observed, which the present author is
unable to explain (Fig.207, 208, 209). However, if one studies sedimentary
features in present-day littoral environments, one is struck by the great
variety of patterns which can form. Great variability of the bottom i s found
there even in a r e a s where no differences could be ascertained in wave
regimes, currents, bottom topography o r sediment types. Consequently, no
speculations are made with regard to offering specific explanations for
structures as drawn in Fig.207-209.
Only a few subordinate outcrops of reef limestones a r e found within

the Burgsvik Beds. These occur in Burgen and in Narsholm, and belong to
the Upper Burgsvik Beds.
In Burgen, the reef limestone shows a bluish to brownish-grey colour
and a vague bedding. It has a somewhat unorganized character and i s
strongly marly. Among the remains of reef builders, fragments of bryozoans
play an important and conspicuous part. The compound stromatoporoids 2nd
corals are also present and presumably were more important as frame
builders. Most stromatoporoids a r e rather flat. The exposures a r e usually
small and do not give much information about the original dimensions of the
reefs.
Between the reefs, there is a sediment extremely rich in crinoid
remains. Part of it even forms a crinoid coquina. This limestone is usually
brownish, the colour being caused by weathering in combination with the
high m a r l percentage. It is clearly stratified; the individual layers generally
being between 5 and 30 cm thick. The bedding planes a r e somewhat wavy and
rugged. In the upper parts a coarse cross-bedding occurs, with dips in
varying directions, but the majority pointing towards the northwest (Fig.210).
Within these layers, a finer cross-bedding sometimes also occurs. Locally
a certain sorting a s to size of the crinoid material can be seen. The sediment
is very rich i n reef debris; mainly fragments of bryozoans, corals and
stromatoporoids. This debris is especially abundant in the higher parts; i n

part it is clearly rounded. Solitary corals are also common.
This reef growth continued into the lower parts of the Hamra Beds.
In Narsholm, a grey reef limestone is exposed in a few small outcrops

on the beach, around sea level, and in a few raukar, situated southeast of the
lighthouse. The reef limestone shows a marly matrix. A s reef builders,
stromatoporoids, corals and bryozoans occur. The stromatoporoids a r e found
locally in remarkably large colonies, always wider than they are thick.
Bryozoans a r e usually represented by masses of small fragments. Intact
colonies a r e r a r e ; the largest one observed was 0.80 m thick with a maximum
width of 1.42 m. Crinoid stem remains are also extremely common, both in
larger and smaller pockets, in between the reef-forming organisms, and
scattered in the matrix.
Enormous amounts of Recent debris are found along the present shore.
Among this there is a wealth of pebbles, cobbles and boulders derived from
crinoid limestone and reef builders. This makes it likely that formerly much
more reef limestone was present in that area. Perhaps the faint vaulting in
the topography, upon which the lighthouse is situated, hides an unexposed reef.
Compared to the reefs in Burgen, those in Narsholm show character-

istics of formation in slightly deeper water. The matrix contains l e s s
Fig.210. Cross-bedding in crinoid limestone, Burgsvik Beds, Burgen.

BURGSVIK BEDS 407
terrigenous debris and the stromatoporoid colonies a r e larger, as a r e also

the rare intact colonies of branched bryozoans. The reefs in Narsholm may
have been larger too. Finally the cross-bedding and sorting as to grain size,
as found in the reef-surrounding sediments in Burgen, a r e also indications
of deposition in shallower and more agitated water.
The Narsholm reefs seem to have formed entirely in Burgsvik time,
while the Burgen reefs a r e enclosedby Upper Burgsvik and by Lower Hamra-
Sundre Beds (Hamra limestone). This suggests that reef growth started
somewhat later in a westward direction. Still further west, i n the a r e a of the
present west coast of the southern peninsula, reef formation began still later,
viz., in the algal limestone, which represents the lowermost Hamra-Sundre
Beds.
Discussion
On the basis of the information presented in the previous pages, it seems

most likely that during deposition of the Burgsvik Beds, the water became
somewhat shallower. This reached i t s culmination in Late Burgsvik time.
The Upper Burgsvik Beds, a s found in the west of the southern peninsula,
evidently were laid down in extremely shallow water, very close to the shore
line, i n a littoral zone which faintly sloped towards an open sea. The occur-
rence of dessication (mud) cracks and rill marks suggests that at least parts
of the sea floor fell dry from time to time, between tides o r for longer periods.
The Upper Burgsvik Beds in the east (Narsholm, Burgen) were
presumably laid down in slightly deeper water. From that direction, reefs
began to develop again at the end of Burgsvik time, forming the onset of the
reef formation as this took place in Hamra-Sundre time. A real deepening
of the water only started again with the uppermost oolite horizon.
It is interesting to note that the few oscillation ripples and the few
offshore bars, found in the Upper Burgsvik Beds, show similar orientations,
e a s t - west in some places and north - south in others.
Symmetrical transverse ripples define a line of transport o r movement,
perpendicular to the strike of their crests. In very shallow water close to the
shore, water movement is generally perpendicular to the coast line. This
makes it likely that the strike of the c r e s t s of the ripples roughly indicates
the direction of the coast line during Late Burgsvik time.
A s said before, offshore b a r s a r e generally parallel to the coast as well.
A combination of the directions found in the oscillation ripples and
offshore b a r s might thus suggest that the Late Burgsvik coast line ran about
south-southeast - north-northwest from Hoburgen to north of Valar, then
bent eastwards, but after a short distance returned to an about south - north
direction (Fig.211).
This direction of the Late Burgsvik coast l i n e also helps to understand
the direction of the present west coast of the southern peninsula of Gotland,
including the bay Burgsviken. All along this coast the Upper Burgsvik Beds
a r e exposed around sea level. The beds have a primary strike in a north - south
direction, parallel to the coast line of Late Burgsvik time, and a slight primary
dipperpendicular to the coast line of deposition, that is also perpendicular to the
present coast line. The waves of the present Baltic Sea a r e broken on the protruding
ends of the Burgsvik sandstone layers.
sholrn
Beds
10 krn
I
Hbburgen
Fig.211. Map of the southern peninsula of Gotland, showing the distribution

of the Burgsvik Beds and the supposed direction of the coast line during
Late Burgsvik time.
HAMRA-SUNDRE BEDS
As already mentioned in Chapter 111, the present author does not accept
the boundary which Hede drew between his Hamra and Sundre limestones.
Especially at Hoburgen it is obvious that the red crinoid limestone, which
Hede considered to be the basal Sundre limestone, is a facies directly
related to the Hamra reefs. It is nevertheless probably true that part of
what Hede reckoned to be the Sundre limestone is younger than the Hamra
limestone, but the present author did not manage to find an acceptable
stratigraphical boundary between the two which could replace that proposed
by Hede and, therefore, rather presents the two together a s the Hamra-Sundre
Beds.
HAMRA-SUNDRE BEDS 409
Strat vi ed s ed irn ent s
Hamra limestone
The Hamra limestone is the next to youngest unit in Hede's stratigraphy.

The name is derived from Hamra Parish, in the east of the southern penin-
sula of Gotland. The unit consists of a number of different sediments, such
as rather pure to faintly-marly limestone (the typical Hamra limestone),
marly limestone, sometimes alternating with layers of marlstone o r
argillaceous marlstone, marly reef limestone and crystalline limestone.
All these sediments can occur at the same stratigraphical height and pass
laterally into each other.
Also taken with the Hamra Beds is an algal limestone at the base of the
unit. This deposit has been hescribed in the literature as Girvanelia o r
Sphaerocodium limestone. Hede considers this algal limestone to be
petrographically nearer to the Hamra limestone than to the Burgsvik oolite,
even though he admits that this oolite can also show transitions to algal
limestone. The present author would favour drawing the stratigraphical
boundary still somewhat lower, viz., between the Burgsvik sandstone and the
upper oolite level. He admits that neither is this boundary sharp, since the
two a r e rather closely connected and present transitions and alternations.
But it w a s shown in previous pages that the Upper Burgsvik sandstone shows
a number of characteristics indicative of deposition during a period of shal-
lowing water, which shallowing presumably ended at the time of formation
of the above petrographical boundary. The upper oolite is found over nearly
the whole a r e a where the Upper Burgsvik crops out and probably was
deposited when the shallow water gradually began to deepen again. This
deepening of the water continued during formation of the overlying Hamra
limestone. Genetically, therefore, the drawing of the boundary below the
upper oolite horizon would be more appropriate.
The Hamra Beds occur on the surface over a rather large a r e a of
southernmost Gotland, east of the line from- Ytterholmen in the northeast,
via the southern part of Griitlingbo-udd to Oja Church and from there farther
over Valar to south of Hoburgen. In the southeast of the southern peninsula
it is overlaid by sediments, which Hede ascribed to the Sundre limestone.
It should be noted, however, that even southeast and south of the Sundre lime-
stone, outcrops of Hamra Beds can be found, e.g., along the beach northeast
and southwest of Klehammars-udd.
Only i n the southwest can the total thickness of the Hamra Beds be
assessed by direct observation. This is in the steep cliffs of Marbardshue
and Hoburgen, where it reaches a height of 20-25 m. A boring near the shop
north of Vamlingbo Church, mentioned by Munthe (1921b))resulted, however,
in a much greater thickness. There about 40 m of "kopphall" was bored
through before sandstone was struck. In Gotland "kopphall" is a somewhat
nodular limestone. This must have been Hamra limestone, presumably rich
i n stromatoporoids. Since no Sundre limestone i s known from that locality,
the Hamra Beds must have a thickness there of about 40-45 m.
The thickness of the algal limestone varies somewhat, ranging on the

average between a few decimetres and about 1.25 m. A s a rule it overlies,
the Burgsvik oolite and is covered by the Hamra limestone. Between the
former and the latter; it can also be developed a s an intermediate form
between oolite and clayish limestone, which joins in rather closely with the
Hamra limestone proper. Finally it occurs locally in a reef-like development.
The algal limestone crops out mainly in the northern part of the a r e a
in which the Hamra Beds a r e found at the surface. It is usually found there
a s a more o r l e s s narrow belt between the oolite and the Hamra limestone,
o r , where the former is missing, between the Burgsvik sandstone and Hamra
limestone. In the environment of Grotlingbo Church, this belt broadens some-
what, while from there an eastern offshoot extends to Grotlingbo-udd and
Grotlingbo-holm. South of this belt the algal limestone can mainly be
observed i n some places where more o r l e s s vertical sections a r e exposed.
The problem of the true nature of the algal remains has been touched
on in Chapter V. The balls include Rothpletzella, with some Giruanelta,
alternating layers of Spongiostroma-like material and even some encrusting
bryozoan material (cf. pp.73-74).
The algal balls a r e nearly always developed around one o r other nucleus,
which is surrounded on all sides by algal tissue. Anything could act as a
substratum. Knolls of widely different shapes a r e formed, according to the
nature of this nucleus. More or l e s s spherical balls are most common. If,
on the other hand, the nucleus was more elongated, as, for instance, part of
a colony of the bryozoan Ptilodictya lanceolata, then more longdrawn
concretions were formed. A s a rule, the surrounding algal tissue is not very
thick, the maximum being about 1.5 cm. Their external form is often
reminiscent of certain knolls of Lithothamnium. On a fracture surface an
irregularly concentric structure is often recognizable even with the naked eye.
The Hamra algal limestone is usually very fossiliferous. In certain
parts, the algal balls, together with a number of other fossils, occur s o
profusely that the rock acquires the character of a biogenic conglomerate.
Locally a more o r l e s s clayish, reef-like limestone is found a s a n
equivalent of the Hamra algal limestone. The character of this rock is
defined by the presence, together with algal balls, of great numbers of
stromatoporoids and corals.
An example of such a reef-like development is found near Kettelviken,
in the southwest of Vamlingbo Parish. There, the normal algal limestone
overlies the Burgsvik oolite and passes upwards into the mentioned reef -like
variety. Both forms of the algal limestone together reach a thickness of 1-2 m.
Farther northeast such a reef-like development has been observed at
Grumpevik. It r e s t s there on crinoid limestone, which shows an oolitic
character close to the Burgsvik sandstone.
Munthe (1921b, pp.46-47) described clayish and reef-like algal lime-
stone, in a thin biostromal development, from a quarry near the country road
south of Uddvide (Grotlingbo Parish). There, it is more o r less clearly
inserted between the oolite and algal limestone which'is still rather rich in
ooids. Munthe gave the following section:
0.10 m dense'to finely-oolitic limestone
0.08 m algal limestone, oolitic
0.05 m stromatoporoid reef limestone, argillaceous
0.09 m oolite
1.30 m+ argillaceous marlstone, alternating with sandstone layers
This section thus shows a close connection between the various types
of sediment. The reef-like variety of the algal limestone is even able to
replace oolitic limestone, in the same way as elsewhere oolite, sandstone
and argillaceous marlstone can replace each other.
Finally, still another variety of the algal limestone should be mentioned.
This is reported by Hede (1921, p.76) from, among others, the southern
beach of Grotlingbo-udd. There algal balls occur only scarcely, and are
nowhere characteristic of the deposit, whereas other fossils play a very
prominent part.
The typical Hamra limestone is more o r less clearly bedded and, on a

fresh fracture, dark grey to bluish grey in colour. In a weathered condition,
it is grey to sometimes brownish grey. Usually it is only slightly contaminated
with marl. The calcium-carbonate content ranges generally from 84 to 94%.
The rock is often slightly bituminous. Fossils, especially shells of ostracodes,
a r e common. The typical Hamra limestone is mainly found in the east of the
southern peninsula.
Different developments of the Hamra limestone a r e found in the west
of the peninsula of south Gotland, where facies differences within the Hamra
Beds a r e most strongly developed. In contrast to the typical Hamra lime-
stone, in which the author observed neither cross-bedding nor rounded
fossils, these were found i n a number of places in the west. There, the lime-
stone is generally also more marly.
In the western and southwestern parts of the parishes of Vamlingbo and
Sundre, sediments a r e found which a r e no doubt synchronous with the typical
Hamra limestone. In some places, they appear as beds of normal Hamra
limestone, a few centimetres thick, alternating with layers of argillaceous
marlstone. This is the case, e.g., in extensive parts of the area between
Vastlands and Kvarna (Vamlingbo Parish). In other parts, it is developed as
marlstone o r m a r l shales with limestone bands in between. A s such it i s
mainly found in the 20-30 m high cliffs between Kettelviken and Hoburgen,
as w e l l as in nearly the whole of the southern wall of Hoburgen, underneath
the "Hoburg marble". The calcium-carbonate content of the marlstone is
generally about 50-55%. The sediment is usually very fossiliferous, and a
certain amount of these fossils may presumably be considered a s reef wash.
The other varieties of the Hamra limestone will not be discussed here
individually. The reader is referred to the description of the geological map
Burgsvik by Munthe (1921b).
Sundre limestone
The Sundre limestone is the youngest unit i n Hede's stratigraphy of

the Palaeozoic of Gotland. The name is derived from Sundre, the southern-
most parish of the island, i n which the sediments of this unit have their
largest distribution.
In some places the Sundre limestone is seen to overlie Hamra limestone,
e.g., in Storburg (Hoburgen), where the Sundre limestone is developed a s a
red crinoid limestone, the so-called "Hobwg marble". The contact is
concordant and indistinct.
Since no deposits other than those of the Quaternary overlie the Sundre
limestone, the original thickness of the unit can not longer be determined.
Where Hede (1921) speaks of a thickness of a few metres up to about 10 m,
this is an indication only of the thickness remaining after erosion.
Exposures of Sundre limestone are found mainly in the southeast and
south of the southern peninsula of Gotland, southeast of the line between
Faludden i n the northeast and Sundre in the southwest. Locally occurrences
a r e a l s o found northwest. of this line, e.g., west of H am ra Church and in

Vamlingbo P a r i s h.
Munthe (1921b) distinguished four subunits in the Sundre limestone, viz.
(a) a r e d crinoid limestone ("Hoburgsmarmor", "Hoburg marble"); (b) a grey
limestone with s om e crinoid fragments ("gr3 krinoidkalk"); (c) a grey lime-
stone, which contains crinoid r em ai ns , but al so colonies of c o r a l s and
stromatoporoids (''grg revkalk"; gr ey reef limestone; it will be shown that
this is no t r u e reef limestone); (d) red-brown reef limestone ("rodbrun
revkalk"; this is a t r u e reef limestone, described by the present author as
reef limestone of Holmhallar type).
"Hoburg PnaYble" is known mainly f r o m Hoburgen, where, however,

much of it h a s been quarried, especially in the f i r s t hillock. It is st i l l present
mainly on top of the high, vertical cliffs. Another well-known occurrence is
a t Hallbjans, where i t is s t i l l periodically quarried.
The rock is a s p a r r y limestone, built up by numerous crinoid rem ai ns
in a limestone matrix. Other f os s i l s are poorly represented. The crinoid
f r ag me n ts a r e generally strongly recrystallized; in both t ransversal and
radial sections, they show a fine net-like porosity. The colour of the "Hoburg
marble" is r e d, caused by a thin film of Fe2O3 covering the walls of the
numerous p o r e s paces i n the crinoid material. The m at ri x is fi ner and not
porous and is grey in colour.
The "Hoburg marble" is usually very thickly bedded. It is often
t r a v e r s e d by broad vertical cr acks , which give rise to the formation of large
blocks. At the e a s t and southeast side of Storburg, several of these have
loosened and have fallen down.
Th e grey crinoid Limestone is generally a grey and middle c o a r s e lime-

stone, distinctly poor er i n crinoid r em ai ns than the "Hoburg marble". Other
f o s s ils are r a t h e r poorly represented. Occasionally sm al l cryst al s of pyrite
are found, or yellowish-brown spots where such cryst al s w ere weathered.
Exposures are found, e.g., i n the b a r r e n plains west of Sundre, near Enviken
and south of Stockviken.
Generally the rock is m o r e o r less distinctly stratified. Locally t here
is s o me cross-bedding, exposed, e.g., in weathered walls such as those
bounding c r a c k s in the plains near Sundre. T here, occasionally stromato-
poroid o r co r a l colonies w er e found which w ere somewhat ground and
rounded. Also s m al l insertions of a clayish c h a r a c t e r are found there.
Eastward, the sediment is pur er . According to Munthe (1921b), the calcium-
carbonate content of the gr ey crinoid limestone in the east is on the average
95-9896.
The stratification is generally horizontal with local dips of a few
d e g r e es occurring, however. Munthe (1921b) m easured the following
examples: south and southeast of Skoge (Sundre P a r i s h ) dips of 4-5' to the
south-southwest; southeast of this, locally a s i m i l a r dip in a west-southwest
direction; south of H am r a Church, dips of a few degrees t o the southeast or
south-southeast; south of the southern Sallmung f a r m (H am ra Pari sh), 5-6'
eastward; southeast of Faludden Lighthouse 10-1 5' west-southwestward;
west of the western Sibbenarve f a r m on Faludden 10' i n about the s a m e
direction. On the southern beach, south of Bringes f a r m , a slight arching of
the l a y e r s was observed. It may be possible that these slight dips are connected
with accumulations of reef builders underlying the exposed grey crinoid limestone.
In the opinion of the present author, the grey reef limestone of Munthe (1921b)
i s a variety of the grey crinoid limestone described in the preceding
paragraph. The difference between the two is that the "reef" limestone also
contains such fossils as stromatoporoids, corals and bryozoans. They a r e
generally not abundant and certainly a r e not characteristic of the rock.
Only in a few restricted localities is the number of stromatoporoids and
other potential reef builders much larger; there, they created a rock of real
unstratified reef-limestone character. An example is found northeast of
Marbardshue, where the reef limestone overlies the "Hoburg marble".
In general such reef developments a r e an exception. The great majority of
Munthe's grey reef limestone is thickly bedded. Bedding planes usually
appear horizontally, but in a few instances slight and local deviations a r e
found, e.g., in the plains east and west of Sundre. They may be caused by
small reef -like developments, which a r e not yet exposed.
Reef 1im estones and Ye lat ed sed irnents
Two kinds of reef limestone a r e found in the Hamra-Sundre Beds, viz.

of the Hoburgen and of the HolmhLllar type.
Ho burg en -type ye ef 1im es t on es
Exposures of Hamra reefs a r e found mainly in the west of the southern

peninsula of Gotland, in a number of steep cliffs close to the shore. The most
important of these a r e the cliffs of Hoburgen. The reef limestone which these
show has already been discussed in Chapter VII; only little needs to be added
to that i n this chapter.
Other exposures a r e situated near Kettelviken, and a little more land-
ward in the cliff near the farm Juves (Sundre Parish) which i s known as Klev.
This cliff forms part of the highest erosion level of the Littorina sea. In
Burgen, farther to the north, reefs occur i n the lowermost part of the Hamra-
Sundre Beds.
The great weight of the reef limestone masses led, in most cases, to
the formation of faintly basin-shaped depressions in the sediments underneath
the reefs. This can be observed very clearly at Hoburgen, where these down-
ward bucklings occur not only underneath the present hillocks, but also i n
p a r t s of the Burgsvik sandstone exposed more seawards (Fig.212). This
indicates that in former times, reefs must have been present there as well.
Similar faint and local depressions in the Burgsvik sandstone a r e found,
among others, on the western beach of Killingholmen (in the north of
Vamlingbo Parish) and i n the northeastern part of GriStlingbo-udd, where
nothing of the reefs themselves is present any more.
The dimensions of the reefs in Hoburgen are generally moderate.
The thickness of the exposed reef limestone is generally l e s s than 20 m,
very often even less than 10 m. The thickest exposures a r e found i n the west
wall of the first hillock (Storburg), where the wall reaches locally up to 25 m
in height (Fig.212). Usually, however, not the whole section consists of reef
limestone or of the material of only one reef. It is unlikely that any of the
reefs, exposed i n that hillock, has ever been much thicker than the reef lime-
stone which is present. The surface of the Storburg is faintly accidentated,
the higher parts being probably determined by the occurrence of reefs.
b P
I-
&
z
!2d
5
5%
>
w
X
rc
0
r
e
z
M
Fig.212. Hoburgen, Storburg, western cliff. Reef limestone and stratified limestone, belonging to the Hamra-Sundre
Beds. At s e a level Burgsvik sandstone is exposed. Note the dip in this sandstone, caused by differences in the P
C
weight of the younger sediments, particularly by the heavier reef limestones.
Fz
Where reef limestone is exposed, it can be seen in several places how the
stratified sediments from all sides advanced over the reef. Locally the
uppermost reef limestone shows a vaguely stratified character caused by a
predominance of flat-lenticular reef builders and a comparatively high
volume of matrix; many crinoid are present there, both scattered in the
matrix and in intercalations of crinoid limestone. Crinoid limestone directly
on top of the reefs shows much reef debris, but about 30-50 cm higher only
little such debris i s found any more in the crinoid limestone. All these data
suggest that the surface of the hillock represents about the end of the reefs.
Similar situations can also be found in a number of places on the other hillocks.
The fact that in Hoburgen hardly any indications of interruptions i n reef
growth affecting the entire surface or a major part of a reef a r e found (Fig.217),
indicates that the water in which the reefs developed was always deep enough
to prevent erosion of the reef surface. More local interruptions in reef growth,
represented by intercalated parts of stratified limestone do, however, occur
(Fig.213).
It was already demonstrated in Chapter VII that i n several places in
the Hoburgen a r e a a number of reefs may have started growth close to each
other, leading to severe competition during the later stages of their develop-
ment and frequently to the end of some of the reefs.
In the south of the west cliff of the second hillock of Hoburgen, a reef-
limestone part is found almost entirely built up by stromatoporoids (Fig.214).
Not f a r from the northern end of the Storburg (Fig.77), a part is seen which
is quite a massive coral section. Generally the composition of the reef lime-
stone is that of the varied and rather unorganized rock described in
Chapter VII. In crinoid limestone underneath the reefs exposed in the
Storburg, several roundstones and rounded fossils were observed.
The second burg of Hoburgen (Fig.215) contains a peculiar and r a t h e r complex
example of reef development. showing how different various p a r t s of one reef can be.
The reef limestone in the short southwest-facing cliff n e a r the southern end of
this second hillock i s characterized by the presence, at the bottom of that cliff, of
many distinctly dipping stromatoporoids (see p.164; Fig.69). A little of the reef lime-
stone in which these stromatoporoids occur, i s also exposed in the main westward
facing cliff, around the c o r n e r , north of the small cliff. T h e r e it i s found to be overlaid
by stratified marly limestone, containing a number of flat compound corals and
stromatoporoids, particularly in a few of the layers. This stratified sediment is again
overlaid by reef limestone. The latter i s very marly and unorganized in its lower
p a r t s , with many fossil fragments and fossils not in their growth orientations, and
also with a 3 m long marlstone lens which i s about 1 0 cm thick in i t s centre. Higher
upwards, reef growth s e e m s t o have met with more favourable conditions. The reef
surface then split into two or perhaps even more centres of growth. One of these was
almost completely built by stromatoporoids, as illustrated by Fig.214; locally in
between the stromatoporoids there a r e a few small c o r a l s o r bryozoans or a little
m a r l with solitary c o r a l s , brachiopods and an occasional crinoid fragment may also
occur. Southwards the rock p a s s e s into gradually less massive reef limestone. with
smaller reef builders, some of which dip or lie upside down.
Between this growth centre and a second, exposed in the short northwest -
southeast wall, there is a depression which contains red-mottled, s p a r r y c r i n o i d
limestone ("Hoburg marble"). The second growth centre is represented by very
unorganized reef limestone. which partly approaches the charaater of reef talus, with
many f o s s i l s out of their growth positions, many fossil fragments and much m a r l .
Nevertheless it i s reef limestone, although it remains difficult to believe that it w a s
formed synchronously with the stromatoporoid rock described above and even formed
part of the s a m e reef. In the course of its development, this centre of reef growth
Fig.213. Intercalations of stratified limestone within a reef. Photograph

taken to the south of the western cliff, Storburg, Hoburgen. Hamra Beds.
Fig.214. Reef part almost entirely built by large stromatoporoids. Hoburgen,

second hillock. The photograph was taken at a locality about 9 m from the
reef part drawn at the right margin of Fig.215. Hamra-Sundre Beds.
N S
5 10m
1"x'*I reet limestone reef debris stratified limestone
Fig.215. The western cliff of the second hillock, Hoburgen. Hamra-Sundre

Beds. At the left a cave, known as "Hoburgsgubbens Skatkammare" (the
t r e a s u r e chamber of grandfather Hoburgen). The reefs A, B and C
presumably grew more o r less synchronous, probably together with a fourth
reef (D), which was more eastward, behind the three which a r e drawn. It
seems likely that D started growth somewhat earlier, and supplied the debris
found in between A and B. The latter two reefs rather soon died, perhaps
under the influence of D. Reef C kept on growing and filled a small depression
in the surface of B with its debris. This debris consists of colonies and
fragments of stromatoporoids, in random positions, inbedded i n a matrix of
marly limestone with a few crinoid remains. Also part of the surface of B
itself became buried under debris of reef C. However, much more debris
w a s supplied by the west-northwestward expanding reef D. Little true reef
limestone of this reef is exposed. The top of the cliff consists of stratified
crinoid limestone.
The southern part of this western section is also mainly built by reef
limestone. Details are shown in Fig.53 and 69.
moved its a r e a of maximum growth somewhat to the southeast; initially it was situated
in the left of this small wall, but at the end of reef growth about in the middle of that
wall. The thickness of the reef limestone is at its maximum 6 m. In the southeast
where this growth centre directly overlies the older reef with the dipping stromato-
poroids (Fig.69) this younger reef limestone interfingers somewhat with stratified
limestone.
The reef limestone at Kettelsgrd is comparable to that in Hoburgen. The best

exposure is at the west side, where a lenticular reef about 7 m long and, in its centre.
3 m thick i s found (Fig.218). Almost all reef builders are comparatively thin and the
matrix is marly. Most other reefs a r e thicker, Much crinoid limestone i s exposed in
this site.
Reefs belonging to the oldest part of the Hamra limestone a r e found i n

Burgen. They already started growth during Late Burgsvik time. The char-
acter of the reefs is even more unorganized than in Hoburgen and the matrix
i s very marly. Among the reef builders, bryozoans played an important part,
but stromatoporoids and compound corals were the main f r a m e builders.
The reef limestone often shows a vague stratification and there a r e many
intercalations of marly limestone rich in crinoid fragments. The exposures
Fig.216. Hoburgen, west side of the third hillock. Hamra Beds.
N s w E
I"**.1reef limestone
Fig.217. Hoburgen, the west and south side of the fourth hillock, exposing
reef limestone which over most of its exposed surface shows intersection by
a m o r e o r l e s s horizontal plane, which may represent a level a t which reef
growth over most of the reef surface was interrupted (cf. Chapter VII, p.131).
This is the only presumed interruption in reef growth of this extent known
f r o m Hoburgen.
a r e generally s m a l l and no complete sections through r e e f s have been seen.

It s e e m s most likely, however, that the dimensions of the reefs were small,
l e s s than of those in Hoburgen. They presumably formed in shallower water
than the r e e f s at Hoburgen. Surrounding the bluish to brownish-grey reef
limestone in Burgen is an irregularly-stratified crinoid limestone, which is
often r i c h in reef debris. Several crinoid fragments and p a r t s of reef debris
a r e clearly rounded and the sediment shows c o a r s e cross-bedding.
Holmhallar-type reef limestones
The reef limestone found in the raukar field of Holmhiillar, about 6.8 km
e a s t of Sundre Church, at the east coast has been discussed in detail in
Chapter VIII. Nothing need be added here. A few further exposures of
comparable nature should, however, be described briefly here. All a r e found
in the e a s t of the southern peninsula of Gotland.
Roughly 0.75 k m northeast of Holmhallar, in the t e r r i t o r y of Hamra
P a r i s h , is the raukar field of Hammarshagahallar. The similarity to
Fig.21.8. Reef, surrounded by stratified limestones. Hamra Beds. K e t t e l s h d .
Fig.219. Raukar of HolmhLllar-type reef limestone i n the forest near Austre.

Sundre Beds.
420 STRATIGRAPHY O F T H E SILURIAN OF GOTLAND
Holmhallar is striking. The red-brown variety of the reef limestone

dominates; i n several places red and greyish green reef limestone occur in
great confusion. Calcite-filled veins a r e common, generally of restricted
length and of varying thickness, though rarely thicker than 1 cm. A s i n
Holmhallar, there a r e debris-filled depressions, pools with a different fossil
content, fissures, lines indicating interruptions in reef growth, etc. The
number of crinoid remains seems to be slightly higher than i n Holmhallar.
The highest raukar reach to about 8 m above present s e a level, suggesting
that the thickness of the reef in the centre must have been at least 10 m.
Reconstruction of the reef leads to a crescent shape also there.
The small island of Heliholm (Vamlingbo Parish), about 0.6 km south-
southeast of Holmhallar presents raukar in a great variety of forms and
contains niches, rooms, caves, gates, etc. (Fig.78, 85, 87, 88). With the
exception of a part at the north and northeast side, the entire island is
surrounded by raukar, together constituting a zone of 15-50 m, on the
average 30 m wide and about 2 km long. The highest raukar reach about 6 m
above present s e a level; the largest raukar are found in the south. All
features found in the Holmhallar reef a r e also found in Heliholm.
Southeast of Rems, near Austre, 1.2-1.8 km west of Holmhallar, a
smaller raukar field is found in the forest, partly hidden by wind-driven
sand (Fig.219). The raukar a r e smaller and more scattered than in the three
previously described raukar fields; they have been excavated by the Littorina
sea. Detailed study of the reef limestone in the field is hindered by the
brecciation which has taken place and by the patina which covers the
weathered rock. There seems to be much similarity with the reef limestone
of Holmhallar.
The reef limestone in the small island of Skaret, east of the bay
Enviken, has not been seen by the author.
In the southeast of Faludden (uja Parish), reef limestone is exposed
around s e a level. It contains large stromatoporoids and coral colonies. The
military authorities who operate a radar observation station there, did not
allow detailed studies of these outcrops.
A moving trough ?
In 1956, F.P. Agterberg paid the author a visit of some weeks in Gotland.
While familiarizing himself with the geology of southern Gotland, Agterberg
became much impressed with the differences in thickness which some of the
stratigraphical units there seem to exhibit. He attempted to explain these by
assuming a north - south orientated trough, which gradually moved eastwards
during the time that the youngest Palaeozoic beds of Gotland were deposited.
This moving trough could be the reflection, at the surface, of viscous matter,
presumably magma, flowing at great depth below Gotland, on account of a
difference in load between the a r e a around the basin and the basin centre
(Agterberg, 1958).
The present author is unable to share the conclusions reached by
Agterberg.
In the first place, the observed differences i n thickness of the
stratigraphical units in southern Gotland, as f a r as these a r e realistic, can
be explained i n a simpler way.
The thickness of the Eke Beds which is about 10 m in the east and
about 14 m in the west, does not show abnormal differences.
The Burgsvik Beds, about 50 m thick in the west of the southern
peninsula, thin out rather rapidly towards the east, and in the Burgen area
this thickness does not amount to more than a few metres. It should be noted,
however, that the Burgsvik Beds were laid down under rather special con-
ditions, partly very close to the coast. Moreover, the conditions at the time
of deposition, were not identical in Burgen and, e.g., Hoburgen. The boundary
between the Eke and Burgsvik Beds strikes about N 50° E and it dips about
O O . 2 5 ' . During Burgsvik time, epeirogenetic movements seem to have taken
place, as discussed i n Chapter IV. These were similar to those which a r e
assumed to have influenced the depositional pattern also of part of the older
stratigraphical units in Gotland, as indicated in a few places earlier in this
chapter. The boundary between the Burgsvik and Hamra Beds strikes about
N 30° E and has an average dip of about OO.30'. Whereas Burgen remained
at about the same distance from the coast during the whole of Burgsvik time,
Burgsvik and Hoburgen came to lie closer to the beach; the latter alteration
of environment no doubt also influenced the sedimentation of the Burgsvik
rocks in that area.
The differences in the thickness of the Hamra limestone, a s described
in earlier literature, a r e disputable, because the upper boundary of the
Hamra Beds, a s defined by Hede, is not a time boundary. It was mentioned
that in Hoburgen, this boundary is drawn between the grey and red crinoid
limestone, both of which, no doubt, are facies related to the reefs. In other
places, such red crinoid limestone was also assumed to represent the basal
Sundre limestone. Consequently it may very well be that there are no r e a l
differences in the thickness of the Hamra Beds, but that these were only
suggested by the absence i n certain a r e a s of red crinoid limestone.
Although the data which led Agterberg to his theory a r e l e s s puzzling
than he supposed and certainly do not need such a far-fetched explanation,
the question may also be put whether a flow of material in the depth is at all
plausible under the given conditions.
Agterberg referred to the squeezing out of salt towards a "salt pillow",
as Trusheim (1957) assumed to have taken place in northwestern Germany.
The situation there, however, was not directly similar: salt i s a material of
low specific weight and it flowed at a depth of only a few kilometres. The
magma flow, as supposed by Agterberg, must, a s he himself stated, have
taken place at greater depth. Moreover, the specific gravity of the material
that probably flowed below Gotland must have been higher and its viscosity
lower.
The Silurian basin, a s is evident from several data presented earlier
in this book, must have been a large and shallow-bottomed s e a bordered by
low-elevation continents. The load differences must thus have been very
small and at great depth this can hardly have played a part of any importance,
a s the following reasoning illustrates.
Let us assume that in the centre of the Silurian basin, water depth was
200 m and the height of the borderland at some distance from the coast was
50 m. If we take the specific gravity of the continental rock to be as high as
2.9, at a de th of 200 m below s e a level there will have been pressures of
5
72.5 kg/cin below the land and 20 kg/cm2 at the floor of the basin centre.
Let us further assume that on the continent, heavy crystalline rocks (sp. gr.
2.9) constituted the entire succession, whereas underneath the basin centre,
1 km of sediment (sp. gr. 2.4) and further only lighter crystalline rocks
(sp. g r . 2.7) a r e present. At a level of 10 k m below s e a level, which is the

least which will have to be assumed f o r a flow of material such as assumed
by Agterberg, the p r e s s u r e s will then have been 2,914.5 and 2,636 kg/cm2,
respectively. With a horizontal distance of 100 km, the difference in load
could not have been m o r e than 2.785 kg/cm2/km, o r only about 0.1%. If, as
is m o r e likely, the crystalline rock that constituted the continent and the
basement under the basin centre, had a s i m i l a r specific gravity, the differ-
ence in load would have been only about 0.074%.
In summarizing, therefore, the present author s e e s neither a need nor
a sound b a s i s f o r assuming a flow of viscous material in the depth below
Gotland during the time that the Eke, Burgsvik and Hamra-Sundre Beds were
deposited.
Discuss ion
The stratified Hamra limestone and the varieties thereof suggest that
the deposits found in the west were laid down in somewhat shallower and
m o r e agitated water than the rocks f a r t h e r to the east. The stratigraphical
succession in Hoburgen, from the uppermost Burgsvik Beds, via the algal
limestone, to the Hamra limestone with the reefs and the surrounding and
covering crinoid limestones makes i t most likely that during most of the time
that the majority of the sediments found at Hoburgen w e r e deposited, the
water became gradually deeper. In the sediment a t the foot of the Storburg,
rounded fossils a r e much m o r e common than in the younger crinoid lime-
stone and the reef debris embedded therein is often angular. The reefs a l s o
show the likelihood that the water depth slowly increased; the thickness of
the r e e f s in proportion to the horizontal extension suggests this, but also the
fact that growth interruptions of some extent a r e hardly found. At any rate,
a d e c r e a s e of the water depth during the time of their formation, as supposed
by Hadding (1933, pp.49-50), s e e m s very unlikely. This even more, when we
compare the reefs of Hoburgen with those in, e.g., the Hemse Beds, which
the present author a s s u m e s to have developed in shallowing water and which
b e a r s e v e r a l characteristics of such an environment. It is m o r e difficult to
draw any conclusions from the youngest deposits, such as the Sundre lime-
stone in the southeast, as to alterations in water depth, but it is not unlikely
that the depth remained roughly the s a m e during the time i t was laid down.
The distribution of both the Hoburgen and HolmhLllar-type reef lime-
stones suggest a roughly south-southwest - north-northeast course of the
depth contours at the time of their formation, in the north probably turning
slightly to a m o r e northeastward direction.
423
Chapter XII
PALAEOECOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ON SOME

FOSSILS AND FOSSIL GROUPS
FOSSILS OF GOTLAND IN THE LITERATURE
Fossils from Gotland have been actively collected and distributed all
over the world ever since naturalists discovered this fascinating island. A
great many publications have resulted from the study of a part of these
fossils. Much of this literature is useful f o r scientists who a r e more than
superficially interested in the Palaeozoic history of Gotland. It may, there-
fore, be of value to open this chapter with a short index to these publications.
Plants
Algae: Andersson (1895), Hadding (1939, 1950, 1956, 1959), Rothpletz (1908,
1913), Stolley (1896, 1897).
Psilophytales: Halle (1920).
Hys trichosphaeridae
Eisenack (1954a, 1958).
Protozoa
Foraminifera: Eisenack (1954b), Smith (1915).
Chitinozoa: Eisenack (1955, 1962, 1964a), Taugourdeau and De Jekhowsky
(1964).
Porifera - Spongiae
Dames (1874), Rauff (1893-1894), Schliiter (1884).
Coelenterata
Anthozoa: Dybowski (187’3-18741, Lindstrom (1865, 1866, 1868, 1870a,b,c,
1873, 188213, 1896, 1899), Manten (1960c, 1961a), Minato (1961), Tripp
(1933), Wedekind (1927).
Annelida and other worn phyla

Bergenhayn (1955), Hinde (1882), Martinsson (1960b).
Art hropoda
Crustacea: Aurivillius (1892), Boll (1862), Botke (1916), Chapman (1901),
Hedstrbm (1923a), JaanussonandMartinsson (1956), T.R.Jones (1887,1888),
Jones and Woodward (1888), Kolmodin (1869, 1879),.Krause (1877, 1889,
1891, 1892), Kuiper (1916), Kummerow (1924), Lindstrom (1885a),
Marrinsson (1955, 1956, 1960a, 1962a, 1966a,b), Reuter (1885),
Spjeldnaes’(l951), Von Kiesow (1888).
424 PALAEOECOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ON FOSSIL TAXA
Arachnoidea: Thorell and Lindstrijm (1885).

Hexapoda: Holm (1892).
Mo llusca
Amphineura: Bergenhayn (1943, 1955).
Gastropoda: Lindstrom (1884).
Pteropoda: Lindstrijm (1884).
Lamellibranchiata: Soot-Ryen (1964), Walmsley (1962).
Cephalopoda: Hedstrom (1917al, Lindstrijm (1890), Troedsson (1931, 1932).
Tentaculata
Bryozoa: B a s s l e r (1911), Borg (1964), Eisenack (1964b), Hennig (1905-1908),
Martinsson (1964).
Brac h iopoda
Bbger (1968), Boucot '(1957, 1962), Davidson and King (1874),DeVerneuil
(1848),Hedstrbm (1917b, 1923e), Lindstrbm (1860), Wright (1965).
Echinodermata
Crinoidea: Angelin (1878), Bather (1893), Manten (1970), Springer (1920),
Ubaghs (1956a,b, 1958).
Pelmatozoa non Crinoidea: Regnkll (1945, 1956).
Asteroidea: Rasmussen (1952).
Echinoidea: Regnkll (1956).
Hemichordata
Graptolithina: Hede (1919a, 1942), Holm (1890), Linnarsson (1879), Wiman
(1897b).
Chordata
Pisces: G r o s s (19681, Lindstrllm (1895), Martinsson (1966a), SPve-Sbderbergh
(1941), Spjeldnaes (1950).
PERSISTENT FOSSILS AND GUIDE FOSSILS
When examining in s o m e detail the distribution of the Palaeozoic fossils

of Gotland, two main groups can be distinguished.
One group is formed by those taxa whose distribution s e e m s to be
r e s t r i c t e d to one particular type of sediment o r to closely related sediments.
Several of the fossils a r e real facies fossils; these will be mentioned in the
next section of this chapter. Many other taxa may seem to fall in this f i r s t
group only because their distribution in the s e r i e s of strata of Gotland is not
yet sufficiently studied.
The second group consists of taxa which are found in several lithofacies.
The best guide fossils a r e to be sought in this group, which comprises
primarily the remains of organisms that ranged widely when living, so that
their remains became naturally entombed in the various lithofacies of a set
of contemporary sediments. This is particularly important in Gotland,
because of the great variety in environmental conditions which generally
existed while the Middle Palaeozoic sediments were being laid down.
PERSISTENT FOSSILS AND GUIDE FOSSILS 425
Therefore, attention will first be given in this chapter to fossils with a wide
palaeoecological range. It will be seen that this group is not very large.
Moreover, several of these have a vertical range which is too long to be
useful for a close determination of the relative age of the s t r a t a i n Gotland.
Persistent fossils
Persistent fossils with a wide palaeoecological range a r e the tabulate
corals Favosites gothlandicus Lamarck and Aulopora sp. (Aulopora cf.
roemeri Foerste), the heliolitid coral Heliolites interstinctus (Linnaeus),
the bryozoans Fenestella reticulata (Hisinger) and Ptilodictya lanceolata
(Goldfuss), and the annelid Comulites serpularius Schlotheim. Among the
brachiopods, fossils with a wide horizontal and vertical range are species
like Atrypa reticularis (Linnaeus), Camarotoechia diodonta (Dalman),
Camarotoechia nucula (J. de C . Sowerby), Delthyris elevata Dalman,
Howellella elegans (Muir-Wood), Leptaena rhomboidalis (Wilckens), Craniops
implicata (J. de C . Sowerby), Rhipidomella hybrida (J. de C . Sowerby) and
Sphaerirhynchia wilsoni (J. Sowerby). T-he second, third and fourth
named species a r e not known from the Visby marlstones. The lamellibranchs
Conocardium and Cypricardinia also have a wide distribution in both
directions. Persistent fossils among the gastropods are Euomphalopterus
alatus (Wahlenberg), Platyceras comutum Hisinger and Tremanotus
longitudinalis Lindstrbm. Also the trilobites Calymene tuberculata (Briinn)
and -Encrinurus @nctatus (Wahlenberg) may be mentioned here, even though
these two species a r e not known to the author to occur in the Lower Visby
marlstones and in the Burgsvik and Hamra-Sundre Beds.
Guide fossils
The number of fossils with a wide palaeoecological range and a

restricted vertical range is small in Gotland.
Among the brachiopods which fulfil the above requirements, there a r e
two which are only known from the Slite Beds. These a r e Atrypa lamellosa
(Lov6n) and Conchidium tenuistriatum (Walmstedt). The stratigraphical range
of Camarotoechia borealis (Buch) in Gotland extends from the Lower
Visby until the Klinteberg Beds. In the English Silurian, this species does
not seem to occur in deposits younger than lowermost Ludlowian (Squirrel
and Tucker, 1960, p.174). "Atrypa" N s i l l a (Hisinger) is only present from
the Eke Beds onwards.
Ostracodes which occur in various lithofacies and which have a
vertical range of probable stratigraphical importance, include Leperditia
hisingeri Schmidt, of the Lower Visby Beds, Leperditia baltica (Hisinger),
of the Slite Beds, Leperditia phaseolus (Hisinger) and Primitia mundula
(Jones), both of which occur from the Halla-Mulde Beds onwards, and four
species which are found from the Hemse Beds upwards, viz. Beyrichia
buchiana (Jones), B. maccoyiana (Jones), B. nodulosa Boll, and Cytherellina
siliqua (Jones). Several of the ostracodes which a r e more o r less restricted
to the marlstone facies may also have a vertical distribution of stratigraph-
ical value (cf. Martinsson, 1962a). They cannot, however, be used to correlate
the various lithofacies within a supposed time-stratigraphical unit, which is

such a n important aspect of the geology of Gotland.
Fossils with a vertical distribution of stratigraphical importance -
though being facies fossils - also occur in other groups. Thus, Porpites
porpita (Linnaeus) i s a common coral in the Lower Visby marlstones, which
is rare in the Upper Visby marlstones and unknown from the marlstones in
the Slite, Halla-Mulde, Hemse and Eke Beds.
Further fossils which a r e facies fossils but which nevertheless a r e of
particular value, especially for the correlation with deposits elsewhere in the
world, a r e the graptolites (Hede, 1919a, 1942). Monograptus spiralis (Geinitz)
is found in the Upper Visby Beds, M . flemingi (Salt.) occurs in the Slite Beds,
M . dubius (Suess) is known from the Slite and Mulde marlstones. Also present
in the Mulde marlstone i s Gothopaptus nassa (Holm). Dictyonema sp. is
found in the Mulde and Hemse marlstones. Furthermore, also Monograptus
bohemicus (Barrande), M . chimaera(Barrande1, M . nilssoni (Barrande) and
M . varians Wood are known from the Hemse Beds.
FACIES FOSSILS
Many of the Palaeozoic fossils in Gotland are facies fossils. If fossil

finds are sorted out according to the lithofacies i n which they were made, it
appears that several have exclusively o r predominantly been collected from
one kind of sediment.
The marly facies

The marlstones of Gotland particularly contain a great number of
fossils which a r e not o r only occasionally found in other sediments, even if
these were deposited more o r l e s s contemporarily with the marlstones. All
graptolites belong to this group of facies fossils, but also many corals,
bryozoans, brachiopods and ostracodes; other groups of organisms also had
representatives with a distinct preference f o r a muddy environment.
A great many tetracorals a r e characteristic of a marly environment.
Some of these have only been found in the marlstones of Gotland, others also
occur in the marly matrix of some reefs, more especially those of the Upper
Visby and Lower Hogklint Beds (cf. Table IX)(see also Manten, 1961a). The
following species are examples of tetracorals that had a preference for a
muddy environment: Aeropoma prismaticurn (Lindstrom), Aulacophyllum
angelini Wedekind, Au. linnarssoni Wedekind, Calostylis denticulata (Kjerulf),
Clisiophyllum involutum Edwards et Haime, Cystiphyllum cylindricum Lonsdale,
C . siluriense Lonsdale, C . tenue Wedekind, C. visbyense Wedekind, Dinophyllum
hisingeri (Edwards et Haime), Goniophyllum Dyramidale (Hisinger),
Hedstroemophyllum articulatum Wedekind, Holophragma calceoloides
(Lindstrom), Ketophyllum annulaturn (Wedekind), K . elegantulum Wedekind,
K . hoegbomi (Wedekind), K. subturbinatum (Edwards et Haime),
Kyphophyllum conacum Wedekind, Phaulactis angusta (Lonsdale),
Ph. irregulare (Wedekind), Ph. tabulatus (Wedekind), Polyorophe glabra
Lindstrom, Porpites (Palaeocyclus)porpita (Linnaeus), Rhegmaphyllum
slitense Wedekind, Rhizophyllum elongatum Lindstrom, R . gotlandicum (Roemerj
FACIES FOSSILS 427
Schlotheimophyllum patellatum (Schlotheim), Syringaxon dalmani (Edwards

et Haime), Zaphrentis vortex Lindstrbm.
Several tabulate corals from Gotland, of which Favosites spp. and
Halysites spp. a r e the most well-known also seem to have had a preference
f o r an environment with muddy water. Especially typical for the marlstones
a r e Catenipora escharoides Lamarck, Roemeria kunthiana Lindstrom and
T hamnopora lame 11i cornis (Lind str bm ).
Eight species of heliolitid corals a r e characteristic for the marlstones,
viz. Cosmiolithus halysitoides Lindstrom, C , ornatus Lindstrom, Heliolites
repletus Lindstrom, H . spongodes Lindstrijm, Plasmopora calyculata
Lindstrom, P. petalli.formis (Lonsdale), Propora conferta Edwards et
Haime and P. tubulata (Lonsdale). Most common in marlstone, but occurring
also i n marly limestones are: Heliolites barrandei Penecke, H . interstinctus
(Linnaeus) (occasionally even found in rather pure limestones), H . pariiiste12a Ferd.
Roemer, PlasmoPora scita Edwards et Haime, and Propora eurycantha
Lindstrbm.
A s could be expected, annelid remains have been reported mostly from
the marlstones although marly limestones and the Burgsvik sandstone and
oolite have also yielded some. They have been classified in the genera
Autodetus, Conchicolites, Cornulites, and Spirorbis.
Of the bryozoan genera that a r e represented in the Middle Palaeozoic
of Gotland, only three have a distribution of some importance also outside
the marlstones, although even they showed a preference for an environment
in which marl could be deposited. Coenites sp. has been found also in several
reefs; Fenestella spp. a r e common in marlstones, reefs and stratified marly
limestones, as is Ptilodictya lanceolata, which in addition is also common i n
the Burgsvik sandstone and oolite. Ten other genera a r e almost exclusively
known from marlstones. They include the following species: Berenicea
consimilis (Lonsdale), Ceramopora lindstromi Hisinger, Corynotrypa cf.
dissimilis (Vine), Crepipora lunariata Hisinger, Cycbtrypa inflata (Hisinger),
Fistulipora rnembranacea Hisinger, F . mutabilis Hisinger, Helopora
lindstromi Ulrich, Mesotrypa suprasilurica Hisinger, Phaeizopora lindstrom i
Ulrich, and Stomatopora minor Hisinger. It will appear from Table lX that
the above-named species of Berenicea, Helopora and Phaenopora have also
been observed in a few reefs and related deposits. When in their original
position, they a r e found there in m a r l nests between the actual reef builders.
This occurrence, therefore, does not exclude them from the group of fossils
typical of the marlstones.
Among the brachiopods, several species are typical for m a r l deposits.
To these belong Antirhynchonella linguifera (J. de C . Sowerby), Chilidiopsis
pecten (Linnaeus), Dayia navicula ( J . de C . Sowerby), Dicaelosia biloba
(Linnaeus) and D . verneuilana (Lindstrom),Eospirifer plicatellus (Linnaeus)
var. interlineatus (Lindstrom) and E. radiatus (J. de C . Sowerby). Glassia
compressa ( J . de C . Sowerby) and G . obovata(J. de C . Sowerby), Isorthis
l o v k i (Lindstrom), Leptaena Eaevigata (J. de C . Sowerby), L . lou&i De
Verneuil, Lingula lewisi J. de C. Sowerby and L . striata J. de C . Sowerby,
Nucleospira pisum (J. de C . Sowerby), Orbiculoidea mgata (J. de C . Sowerby),
Pentamems gotlandicus Lebedev and P. sphaera Lindstrom, ? Plectambonites
inconstans (Haupt) and P. segmentum (Angelin), Plectatrypa imbricata
(J. de C . Sowerby) and P . marginalis (Dalman), Plectodonta transversalis
(Dalman) and P. transversalis var. lata (Jones), Skenidiozdes acuta (Lindstrom),
Scenidium lewisi (Davidson), Protoaeuga bicarinata (Angelin). Also Cyrtia is

a genus from marlstones and marly limestones. C. exporrecta (Wahlenberg)
is reported from the Upper Visby marlstone, marly limestones of the Lower
Hogklint Beds and the Slite marlstone; C . trapezoidalis (Hisinger) from the
Mulde marlstone and the Klinteberg Beds, while it is not impossible that it
also occurs in the Hemse marlstone. Gypidula galeata (Dalman) is mainly a
species from the marlstones (Slite, Mulde, Hemse), but also occurs in marly
limestones from the Klinteberg and Hemse Beds and in the Burgsvik sand-
stone. The same applies to Strophonella euglypha (Hisinger). Amphistrophia
funiculata (McCoy) is known from the Slite, Mulde and Hemse marlstones,
but also from marly Slite and Klinteberg limestones. Ptychopleurella
bouchardi (Davidson) is noted from the Slite, Mulde, Hemse and Eke marl-
stones and from marly limestones in the Slite and Klinteberg Beds.
Chonetes spp. also seem to have had a certain preference for a marly
environment. C . cingulatus Lindstrom is known from the Slite sandy lime-
stone in the south (see p.275) and the Mulde marlstone; C. gotlandicus Hede
occurs in the Slite and Mulde marlstones and in marly limestones of the
Klinteberg Beds. L e s s restricted to the marlstones is C . striatellus (Dalman)
which, although known from the Hemse and Eke marlstones, also has been
found in marly limestones and limestones of the Lower Hogklint, Hemse and
Hamra Beds, and i n the Burgsvik sandstone and oolite. Whether Chonetes sp.
which is found in the Slite limestones and marlstone may also be attributed
to C. striatellus can not be stated with certainty. Resserella too, i s a genus
that is most common in marlstones, even though R . elegantuZa(Da1man) may
also be found in Hogklint and Slite limestones. Some of the persistent
brachiopods, though occurring in several lithofacies, also showed a
preference for a marly environment. Examples a r e Atrypa reticularis
(Linnaeus), Craniops implicata (J. de C. Sowerby), Leptaena rhomboidalis
(Wilckens) and Rhipidomella hybrida (J. de C. Sowerby).
It is not surprising that many ostracode species of the Middle
Palaeozoic of Gotland a r e mainly or completely restricted to the marlstones.
Only some will be mentioned here. Aechmina bovina Jones and Beyrichia
spinzgera Boll occur in the marlstone and marly limestones in the Slite Beds,
the Mulde m a r l and the Lower Klinteberg Beds. Primitia ualida Jones et Holl
is known from marlstones i n the Slite, Mulde, Lower Klinteberg and Hemse
Beds. Thlipsurella discreta (Jones) occurs in both the Slite and Mulde marl-
stones. Leperditia baltica is not uncommon in both the marlstones and lime-
stones of the Slite Beds; both species may be of stratigraphical importance.
Colpos insignis Moberg, Entomis migrans Barrande and Leperditia grandis
Schrenck are found i n the Hemse marlstone, Beyrichia steusloffi Krause
occurs in both marlstones and marly limestones of this stratigraphical unit.
Craspedobolbina clavata (Kolmodin) is found in marlstones, but also marly
limestones, from the Hogklint to the Hemse Beds, Beyrichia lauensis Kiesow
in the Hemse and Eke marlstones. Many other ostracode species could
easily be added to this list. Thus Martinsson (1962a), in his monograph on
the Beyrichiidae of Gotland, reports that already of this family alone not less
than 114 different species occur in marly sediments i n Gotland.
A s far a s can be judged from the observations that have been recorded,
the fdlowing species of lamellibranchs seem to have a distribution that is
mainly o r exclusively limited to the marlstones: Ambonychia punctata
Lindstrom, Comellites damesi (Philippi), C. sowerbyi (McCoy),
PALAEOECOLOGYOF CORALS 429
Ctenodonta sulcata (Hisinger), Folmanella duplicata (Lindstrom in museo),

Nucula anglica (d’Orbigny) (known also from the Burgsvik sandstone and
oolite), Posidonomya glabra Miinster, Rhombopteria cf. mira Barrande (also
known from the Burgsvik oolite) and Salweyia cf. striata (3. de C. Sowerby).
About 175 different species of gastropods from Gotland have been
described, especially by Lindstrom. Unfortunately after he had published his
fundamental monograph (Lindstrom, 1884), little attention was paid to the
distribution and palaeoecology of the many genera and species. No doubt
several of them have their distribution mainly in the marlstones, more
especially species of the genera Bellerophon, Cyclonema, Loxonema,
Pleurotomaria a?d Subulites.
Pellet-like bodies and t r a c e s of borings, as were observed in some
places in the reef limestone, were only very occasionally seen in the marl-
stones. This may be simply because the author has paid comparatively l e s s
detailed attention to these deposits. The usually high organic content of the
muds provided a rich food supply also in that environment. But because of the
fine texture of the mud and presumably often high colloidal content, there was
little circulation of interstitial water. This lack of circulation, together with
the organic content, may have led to local and post-depositional anaerobic
conditions (as also suggested by the local presence of pyrite) with consequent
limitations on the fauna able to inhabit these deposits.
The limestone facies
Compared with the marlstone facies, the limestone facies in Gotland

presents only few fossils which are restricted to this lithofacies. It is not
unexpected to find that the Algae, found in the Middle Palaeozoic of the island,
are predominantly restricted to the limestones. Among the corals the tetra-
coral Acervularia, the tabulate coral Striatopora and the heliolitid Thecia
swinderniana (Goldfuss) seem to have thrived much more abundantly in clear
than in muddy water. The same holds f o r the brachiopods Dinobulus davidsoni
(Salt.), Linoporella Mnctata (De Verneuil) and Platystrophia. In the group of
the lamellibranchs Ilionia prisca (Hisinger) and ‘Megalomus” a r e typical for
the limestone facies.
The reef facies
There is no evidence of fossils occurring only in the reef limestones

and their directly-surrounding sediments. The occasional specimens of the
brachiopod Cliftonia lindstr6mi Ulrich et Cooper and the trilobite Bumastus
sulcatus Lindstrom that were observed, were found in reef limestone, but it
is likely that additional observations will reveal their presence also in other
kinds of deposits. Of the more common fossils, none was found to be
restricted to the reef environment.
PALAEOECOLOGYOFCORALS
Several kinds of studies on the palaeoecology of corals can be made on

the basis of the rich fossil fauna of Gotland. Although the author has made a
number of observations on this subject, he has not gone into it in great detail,
however tempting this might have been. A number of observations will be
reported in the next few pages. Thereafter, opening the section on

stromatoporoid palaeoecology, a short discussion will also be presented on
the competition between corals and stromatoporoids. Palaeoecological data
which are relevant to both the corals of Gotland and the reefs in Gotland in
general, will be summarized in Chapter XIV.
Some observations on solitary corals
It is somewhat amazing that Woodford (1965, p.42) wrote that most

corals are outstanding examples of facies fossils, being restricted to clear
and shallow seas. Particularly the preference for clear water is untrue. In
fact modern solitary corals are remarkable for their powers of removal of
surface sediment. Fossil solitary corals a r e commonly found associated
with such rocks as marlstones and shales. A s mentioned earlier in this
chapter, in Gotland, too, several solitary corals were found to be character-
istic for such lifhofacies. It will be discussed later in this chapter that also the
fossil compound corals present evidence that they thrived well in muddy water.
It is significant to mention here a s well that the reefs in which solitary
corals were found to be most abundant, in both number of species and number
of individuals, a r e those with the highest volume and highest degree of
impurity of the matrix; specifically the Upper Visby reefs and some reefs i n
the Lower Hjgklint Beds.
A particularly interesting coral in this connection is Schlotheimophyllum
patellaturn (Schlotheim). This tetracoral is characterized by a narrow and
deep calyx, with axial twisting of the septa, surrounded by a broad reflected
rim, which is formed by the deposition of a large stereozone. Sections through
this r i m show successive layers, partly separated by films of marl. A s the
fossil is always found in a marly lithofacies, the impression is gained that
the coral was repeatedly covered with mud. Only by retreating into i t s deep
calyx could it escape complete suffocation. From there it thereupon expanded
again over its own r i m and the sediment cover laid down upon it.
Solitary corals which occur in the stratified marlstone deposits often
show a horn-like bent shape, whereas those in the limestone layers and also
the majority of those found in reefs possess subcylindrical forms. The curved
forms generally broaden rapidly, the basic angle is rather large. The plane
of the edge of the calyx is oblique to the axis of the polyps. The growth form
can be explained by disturbance of equilibrium of corals which were attached
to small objects lying on a soft sea floor. They became tilted, together with
their substratum, when they grew heavier, until the resistance from the sea
floor led again to a restoration in equilibrium. Corals growing on a larger
substratum enlarged and strengthened their attachment and thus developed
their characteristic subcylindrical forms.
Influences of mud sedimentation and growth rate on the growth f o r m of colonies
Vaughan (1915a,b, 19191, Marshall and O r r (1931) and Yonge (1935) have
shown, both through observations in nature and through experiments, that
round coral colonies a r e better adapted to an environment with mud
sedimentation than flat forms. Flat colonies, especially those with small
polyps, have to rely on the movement of the water to remove sediment from
their upper surfaces. Similar observations were made by Motoda (1940a).
PALAEOECOLOGYOFCORALS 431
He found that young specimens of Gonzastrea aspera Verrill started with the
formation of an irregular, flat colony on the top surface of their substratum,
after which they increased their growth upwards until a globular o r semi-
globular shape was reached.
These data help to explain growth f o r m s found in heliolitid corals i n
Gotland (Manten, 1960c, 1961a). In rather strongly marly facies the Heliolites
colonies are frequently either small and relatively flat, o r larger and
rounded. In the less marly facies, also the larger colonies often have a
distinctly stronger horizontal than vertical extension. In strongly marly
deposits and in reef debris, some extreme forms were also observed that
approached the shape of a mushroom.
Coral colonies which started growth in a period of comparatively little
mud sedimentation and which later had to cope with increased sedimentation
were often faced with serious difficulties. In many cases, they had developed
flat colonies and then were confronted with changed conditions under which
a round form would be more advantageous. But owing to their age, they were
unable to completely change the form of the colony.
Stephenson and Stephenson (1933) showed that the growth r a t e of some
corals decreased in inverse proportion to their size and age. Goreau (1961)
found that colonies of Manicina areolata weighing approximately 0.05 g
deposited calcium nearly one hundred times faster, per unit of tissue
nitrogen, than did colonies weighing 150 g.
Several Heliolites colonies in Gotland apparently found a way out of
coping with increased sedimentation during a later stage of their existence.
Being unable to change the entire form of the colony to a rounder one, they
developed semi-globular knobs and finger-like extensions on their surface
(Fig.220), thus reaching at least partly the more suitable form (cf. Manten,
1960c, p.159,1961a, fig.3, 1962, fig.7). Similar observations were made on the
Fig.220. Heliolites sp. from an Upper Visby reef at Kneippbyn, Vasterhejde

Parish. Note the knobby outgrowths in the upper part of the colony which have
presumably been caused by an increase in mud sedimentation during the
development of the coral colony. (After Manten, 1962, fig.7.)
tabulate coral Planalveolites fougti (Edwards et Haime). The transformation

of the form of the colony will presumably have been comparatively easiest
when the rate of sedimentation increased gradually. It is known that many
recent organisms can tolerate a greater range of variation in a given
environmental factor if the change takes place slowly than if the change is
rapid.
Worth mentioning at this point is also the influence which sedimentation
may have had onthe form ofbranchedcorals.Inac1assicpaper;F.W. Jones (1907)
already reported that in parts of such corals which were exposed to
sedimentation, the mouth fields were often small, the theca extended above
the surface of the colony and the coenenchym was somewhat sculpted.
Similar observations have been made on fossil branched corals of the Gosau
Formation in Austria (Kuhn, 1925), and from Gotland (Manten, 1 9 6 0 ~ )The
.
conditions under which the branched corals developed were also susceptible
to changes. In this case an increase o r decrease in sedimentation was best
recorded by corals which had been damaged. The regenerated part could then
adapt itself to the new conditions and in this way be different from the older
part of the colony.
Some differences between reef edge and cove
In part of the reefs, particularly in north and middle Gotland, some

faunal differences can be observed between the edge of the reef and the reef
core.
One of the examples is provided by the coral Heliolites parvistella Ferd.
Roemer. In the centres of several reefs, a branching form thereof can be
found, which is known a s the variety caespitosa. At the same time, the mas-
sive form of this coral species is observed to be more common around the
margins of some reefs. Laminar colonies with a few knobs on their surfaces
suggest that the branched and laminar forms a r e no genotypical varieties.
Another example is presented by the heliolitid coral, Thecia swinderniana
(Goldfuss). In the great majority of cases, this coral occurs in a massive,
laminar growth form in the marginal regions. Thin laminar expansions of
this coral may also locally be found in the stratified rocks immediately
around the reefs. Occasionally, however, small branching forms or otherwise
vertically attenuated forms may be observed, but then generally in the more
interior parts of the reefs. Similar behaviour is displayed by the stromato-
poroid Labechia conferta (Lonsdale).
It is more than likely that environmental factors have been responsible
for the development of massive growth forms a t the reef margins. The effect
of waves, in particular, in inhibiting branching has been described by several
authors. They have also shown that even slight differences in position might
produce large effects in the growth form. The classic example is that of a
log, chained beneath the surface of the water, where the coral colonies on its
upper surface were flattened bosses, and on its lower side showed delicate
branching forms of the same coral (F.W. Jones, 1907,p.536). Thus, even the
distance of part of the circumference of a t r e e trunk is sufficient to lead to
a significant variation in growth form.
The question which of the growth forms is to be regarded as "normal",
if indeed the word can be used in this connection, and which is the
PALAEOECOLOGY O F CORALS 433
, Icm
Fig.221. Two bands (1 and 2) of a rhythmic growth pattern in an unidentified

tetracoral from the Upper Visby marlstone, Hdgklint. Each band consists of
a part with minute, densely crowded and thickened dissepiments o r vesicles
(a), followed by a layer which possesses larger, l e s s crowded and not
thickened dissepiments o r vesicles (b); in general the alternating layers show
rather imperceptible transition from one to another, but sometimes the up-
ward gradation from a layer with minute elements to another with larger
ones is more o r less abrupt; h = polyp cavity. (After Manten, 1961a, fig.5.)
modification brought about by environmental factors is, therefore, academic.

This is clear in the case of Heliolites. In the examples of Thecia and Labechia,
one might be inclined to consider the massive form a s "normal" because it
occurs so much more abundantly. But how f a r is this due to the generally
small size of the reefs of Gotland and how would the ratio between massive
and branched forms be under another set of environmental conditions?
Rhythmic growth patterns
In the nineteen-thirties, Ma (1933, 1934, 1937) found that many

invertebrate skeletons exhibit rhythmic growth patterns. These a r e
particularly common in corals, both recent and ancient. Also corals i n
Gotland show such rhythmicity (Fig.221). The rhythmic banding strongly
recalls the rhythmic growth of t r e e rings. Ma, therefore, drew the conclusion
that the invertebrate fossils which show such banding also developed in
seasonal climates. However, Fischer (1963) argued that at least in the case
of the corals, this climatological explanation is not satisfactory. In the dis-
cussion of Fischer's paper, Durham pointed out that rhythmic growth patterns
in other organisms do not always seem to be related to d i m a t e either, and
Lowenstam said that, of the modern corals growing off Bermuda, those
growing offshore seem to show no rhythmic growth, whereas those from the
restricted inshore environment do show such a rhythmic growth banding. In
contrast to these views is the observation which Wells made in that same
year. He counted in Devonian corals on the average 400 fine bands within a
supposed annual band. This figure agrees with the number of days in the
Devonian year as obtained from calculations on the effect of tidal friction
(Wells, 1963). Independently of Wells, Scrutton (1965) made the observation
that some corals also have monthly bands. With Middle Devonian corals he
found evidence for 13 months per year, with an average of 30.6 days per
month. Also Runcorn and co-workers a r e of the opinion that the banding in
certain corals can be regarded as palaeontological clocks (Runcorn, 1966).
Probably related to the above-named rhythmic growth patterns is the
phenomenon of "layered" coral colonies. Several colonies, particularly of
HeLioLites and Favosites show growth forms which can best be described a s
a pile of discs separated by constrictions (Fig.222). The thickness of the
discs within one colony is rather constant. Between the various colonies
which show this pattern the thickness of the discs varies between 8 and 20 mm.
The rhythmic growth patterns in coral skeletons, mentioned before, show
band thicknesses of 12-25 mm in the corals of Gotland. Both phenomena thus
a r e in the same order of thickness. The author considers it possible that
(seasonal?) fluctuations in the supply of continental debris may have been a
major reason causing the observed growth forms of these coral colonies.
Worth mentioning in this respect is a Favosites colony found in the reef
limestone at Spinnbjersbacke (6 km south of Boge Church, Slite Beds). The
reef limestone around the coral colony contained a local layer, about 1 cm
thick, of marlstone. Around the upper surface of this layer, the Eavosites
colony showed a constriction, about 1.5 cm thick and some centimetres deep.
TO
Fig.222. Layered coral colonies from marlstone deposits. Left: Eavosites

gothlandicus Lamarck from Hemse marlstone, Petesviken, Hablingbo Parish;
right: Halysites sp. from Upper Visby marlstone, Luseklint, Lummelunda
Parish. (After Manten, 1961a, fig.4.)
Percentage of coral colonies in life orientation
In almost every reef, coral colonies in position (orientation and

possibly also place) of growth are found together with colonies which
distinctly are not in their original position. If the percentage of the coral
colonies which a r e found in life orientation is calculated, it appears that
there are notable differences. In Table XXII the observations within
individual stratigraphical units are taken together and the percentages from
the various units are then arranged in four groups, according to the supposed
water depth in which the reefs, in which the corals were found, have
developed. Coral colonies, of which it could not be determined with any
certainty whether they were in growth orientation or not, have been left out
of consideration. This does not significantly influence the percentages
obtained. The highest number of doubtful cases was met in the four localities
in the Slite IV Beds (32 out of a total of 159). If these are counted as having
been either all in life orientation o r not, respectively, the percentage of
coral colonies in original position would have been 60 o r 40. In other words,
even the highest extreme value does not yet reach the average value found
f o r the next group. Similarly, for the coral colonies in one of the reefs of
Lilla Karlso (23 uncertain cases of a total of 223), extreme percentages of
83 and 73, respectively, are obtained.
Another restriction that was made is that only the massive coral
colonies were considered. There a r e no indications that for branched
colonies of corals and bryozoans significantly different percentages would
be found, but with these colonies it is often l e s s easy to determine whether
they are in orientation of growth. In two localities comparatively good
observations, however, could be made on branched corals. One was Galgberg
extension (Middle Hogklint Beds), with 24 colonies of which 10 were in growth
orientation, 10 were not and 4 were doubtful cases; percentage of colonies in
life orientation was 50% of the certain cases. In the raukar in the northwest of
Lilla Karlso 40 branched colonies were observed, of which 31 were in growth
orientation, 4 were not and 5 were doubtful cases; percentage of colonies in
original orientation was 89% of the certain cases.
In order to eliminate the influence of the position of the colonies within
the reefs from the final result (e.g., possible differences between the
marginal and more interior parts of the reefs), the observations were spread
as much as possible over the total reef bodies.
Considering other factors which could have influenced the orientations
of the observed colonies, three deserve special attention: (1) pressures
within the reefs; (2)the shape of the colonies; (3)destructive action by
moving water.
In at least part of the cases which were considered as of uncertain
orientation, as well as in a number of colonies which were found i n an oblique
position, it is likely that they still were in about their place of growth, but
that the corals had been tilted after their death. This tilt may have been
caused by differential pressures which originated within the reefs when these
grew higher. That such p r e s s u r e s occurred and led to small displacements
is proved by phenomena like small slickensided surfaces (generally 100-250 cm2)
and bucklings in local stratified intercalations within the reefs.
It is worth mentioning in this respect that in some reefs an increase in
the percentage of colonies in original orientation can be found while going
TABLE Xxn *
0
0-2
Percentage of massive coral colonies found in growth orientation in reef limestones
Stratigraphical unit Kind of reefs Localities Total number Total number Percentage
of colonies in orientation in orientation
of growth of growth
Upper Visby Beds Upper Visby reef type North of Kneippbyn 50 40 80
? Slite IV Beds 7Stllurnasar reef type Raukar of Norderslztt, in 200 162 81
(lower part) the northwest of Lilla Karlsl)
Hemse Beds HolmhalNr reef type Figelhammar 37 30 81
Lowermost HBgklint Beds Hoburgen reef type About 0.7 km north of 56 42 75

Stenkyrkahuks F y r
Upper Slite HI Beds Hoburgen reef type Hejnum H U a r 25 17 68 0
Slite N Beds Hoburgen reef type Lannaber g, 127 64 50

Solklint,
Patvalds ,
Stora Vede
0
Middle HOgklint Beds Hoburgen reef type Lickershamn, I00 46 46 z
Galgberg extension
Hemse Beds Hoburgen reef type Gannberg 36 21 58 r

upwards in the reef. This can be the fact even i n a rather small reef. An
example is provided by a Lower Hogklint reef, about 4 m long and 2.5 m thick,
whichis found approximately 0.7 km north of Stenkyrkahuks Fyr. In the lower-
most metre of this reef, 1 4 out of 21 specimens (67%)of the massive coral
colonies were found in growth orientation against 28 out of 35 colonies (80 %)
in the uppermost 0.5 m. Many of the colonies which were not in their original
orientation, particularly those in the lower part of the reef, were found to lie
obliquely, with the axis of the colony generally making an angle of 30-50°
with the vertical.
The shape of the coral colonies can certainly have played a part in
determining the position in which the colonies were found fossilized.
Particularly in the fourth group (last three values in Table XXII) it could be
noted that the flat colonies were more frequently found in original orientation
than the rounder colonies. This was particularly true in Galgberg extension.
F o r the branched colonies in that locality this was l e s s evident, probably
because the latter grew in more sheltered places. In the reefs of the Upper
Visby Beds, the shape of the colonies may also have been of influence, but
not to a significantly stronger degree than in the reefs of the fourth group.
Neither can the influence of the shape of the colonies explain the high
percentage of colonies that were found in their proper position in
Fsgelhammar and in Lilla Karlso, where the great majority of colonies dis-
played great vertical dimensions.
Thus the conclusion remains that the major factor which determined
the final position of the coral colonies must be something other than those
which have been thus far discussed. This major factor must have been the
movements of the water.
In the stratified limestone very close to the reef which is found about
0.7 km north of Stenkyrkahuks Fyr, the percentage of corals which occurred
in a position that could have been their growth position was 48% (22 of 46
specimens). This percentage i s low compared with both the figure found for
the corals in the reef (67%) and with that for corals found in the stratified
deposits of the Lower Hogklint Beds at some distance from the reefs (around
85%). This observation makes it likely that a large number of the colonies
present in the reef-surrounding sediment came from the reef. They may
have been washed off the reef after their death, but to some this may have
happened during their life. In some colonies in reef-surrounding deposits the
corallites were oblique in the lower part and roughly vertical in the upper
part.
Coral colonies in various orientations may also be found in filled
depressions within the reefs. The majority of these were apparently washed
in from elsewhere on the reef surface. Such depressions a r e in sharp
contrast to pools in the reef surface where clearly many colonies lived in a
sheltered environment and where the percentage of colonies in growth
orientation generally is equal to o r higher than elsewhere i n the reef (cf. the
figures obtained for branched colonies).
zf, thus, water action could cause the detachment and displacement of
coral colonies, it is also logical to assume that loosened colonies could
remain lying somewhere on the reef surface.
A reef surface growing at a water depth of only one o r a few metres
will have been more strongly subjected to the destructive action of agitated
water than one developing at a depth of some tens of metres. This may be the
4 38 PALAEOECOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ON FOSSIL TAXA
main explanation of why decreasing percentages of corals in growth

orientation a r e found if the observations a r e arranged in an order of
assumed decreasing water depth (Table XXII).
PALAEOECOLOGY O F STROMATOPOROIDS
With so many stromatoporoids preserved in the Middle Palaeozoic rocks

of Gotland, it i s inevitable that something should also be said here about their
palaeoecology. This is even more desirable since, compared with other groups
of organisms, not much has s o far been written on the subject, and what has
been written is, moreover, somewhat confusing. The best paper on
stromatoporoid palaeoecology, known to the present author, is by Fliigel
(1959, pp.233-246).
Competitiori between corals and stromatoporoids
There has been some discussion in literature on the environmental

factors which influenced the ratio between stromatoporoids and corals in a
reef part. In a well-known study of Frasnian (lower Upper Devonian) reefs
in the Dinant basin (Belgium), Lecompte (1958) found a notable faunal suc-
cession i n the l a r g e r reefs (1-4 km in diameter, 200-250 m thick). At the
base there is a zone of lamellar corals. This is followed by a thin inter-
mediate zone of lamellar stromatoporoids. A thick upper zone, forming the
main part of the reef, is built essentially of massive stromatoporoids and,
i n an accessory role, large subglobular corals. Lecompte's interpretation
was that progressive subsidence was the controlling factor of the faunal
changes, the most notable of which is the absence of stromatoporoids
beneath the zone of turbulence. He assumed (Lecompte, 1956a, 1958) that
corals and stromatoporoids could coexist in the zone of turbulence. Corals
could attain great size there, but they suffered greatly in competition with
the stromatoporoids, which dominate in the reef parts formed in this zone.
Beneath the zone of turbulence, according to Lecompte, only corals were
capable of building reefs, not because they thrived best there, but on the
contrary because there they did not have to compete with the stromatoporoids.
Lecompte's opinion that the waning of importance of the stromatoporoids
is caused by an increase in depth is, however, in the opinion of the present
author, open to serious criticism. An earlier publication by Lecompte (1951,
p.53) already indicates that another factor was of great influence on the
development of the stromatoporoids, viz. mud tolerance. In that paper, he
described how stromatoporoids a r e abundant in limestones, seldom found in
shales, and are apparently more affected by mud than the corals.
In the Niagaran (Middle Silurian) reefs of Illinois, stromatoporoids also
decrease in importance as reef builders in the direction of increase of the
muddy impurities (Lowenstam, 1950, p.483, 1957)) that is from the clastic-
f r e e belt, across the low-clastic belt to only a subordinate contribution at the
southern border of this belt (see also the section on the North American reefs
in Chapter XIII, pp.458-463).
Therefore, it is much more likely that the degree of muddiness, and
not primarily water depth, has been the fundamental determining factor in
PALAEOECOLOGY OF STROMATOPOROIDS 439
the occurrence of stromatoporoids. Increase in muddiness, leading to a

waning i n dominance of the stromatoporoids, may be but is not necessarily
correlated with an increase in depth. The English Wenlockian presents mud
but should, nevertheless, be considefed a shallow-water deposit.
Gotland produces several facts which further support the conclusion
reached about stromatoporoid palaeoecology.
First, there is the stratigraphical succession of the Upper Visby Beds
with i t s small reefs, dominated by corals, and the Hijgklint Beds with l a r g e r
reefs of Hoburgen type, in which stromatoporoids a r e the predominant reef
builders. Thus, a gradual decrease in water depth, leading to a succession
of marlstones by marly limestones and limestones, is accompanied by a
replacement of corals by stromatoporoids as the main reef-forming
organisms. Together with the stromatoporoids, the Algae become more
common. A s is well-known, the distribution of Algae is strongly governed by
the illumination of the water, and the latter is again strongly influenced by
the degree of muddiness.
There is also a correlation between the average size of the stromato-
poroids and the lithofacies in which they a r e found. Those which a r e found
in very marly limestone a r e generally small, and those in rather pure lime-
stone large. This rule also holds for lithofacies found in close vicinity to
each other, where there has not been any question of significant differences
in water depth.
The Hamra algal limestone shows intercalations of more o r less clayish,
reef -like limestone, containing fossilized stromatoporoids, corals and algal
balls a s major organogenic constituents. However, both the number and
average size of the stromatoporoids are significantly smaller in these reef-
like intercalations than in the Holmh5llar-type reefs of the Hamra-Sundre
Beds, the matrix of which is notably purer. No doubt these Holmhzllar-type
reefs formed in deeper water than the algal limestone. Thus, a similar effect
in stromatoporoid development is reflected here as in the Upper Visby -
Hogklint succession, but with an opposite trend in water depth.
Next, there a r e several examples of corals which settled on a living
stromatoporoid, but which were overgrown by the latter. In stromatoporoids
collected from rather pure limestone many examples can be found of such
overgrown corals, but generally these corals remained very small and are
only visible in polished sections. Thus a few stromatoporoids from HolmhXllar-
type reefs in Ljugarn (Hemse Beds) and Holmhallar (Hamra-Sundre Beds)
were found to contain on the average 65 corals per 100 c m 2 of vertical
section through stromatoporoid colonies. The average size of the sagittal
sections through the corals was not more than 10 mm2. In stromatoporoids
collected in more marly limestone, the number of corals fully enclosed by
the stromatoporoid is much smaller. A stromatoporoid, about 75 cm long,
and in i t s centre around 30 cm thick, collected in the Spillingsklint (Othem
Parish, Slite Beds), showed in a full cross-section only three overgrown
favositid corals, which were several square centimetres large. From strongly
marly limestones, no examples of corals which became completely enveloped
by a stromatoporoid are known to the author. In the marly reefs of Upper
Visby type, one example was found. This was in a rather exceptional reef,
with some large stromatoporoids, that occurs north of Kneippbyn (cf.
Chapter VI, p.108). One of the stromatoporoids enclosed a Favosites colony
a few centimetres in size. It should be pointed out that the above-mentioned
Fig.223. Rauk of about 1 m high, in the raukar field of Fsgelhammar South,

Hemse Beds, reef of Holmhlllar type. The entire rauk consists of the
remains of one stromatoporoid colony.
envelopments of corals by stromatoporoids should not be confused with

symbiotic occurrences of corals and stromatoporoids, such as are known
under the name "Caunopora" (cf. Fliigel, 1959, p.240).
Also of great palaeoecological value is the fact that stromatoporoids
a r e most abundant and largest (Fig.223) just in those reefs in which also
Algae reached their richest development, the reefs of Holmhallar type.
Many further observations of value for the understanding of stromato-
poroid palaeoecology have been made in the reefs of Holmhallar type. These
a r e of special importance because variations in stromatoporoid abundance
o r in the size and shape of the colonies within one reef can not be ascribed
to any significant difference in water depth. Other differences in environ-
mental conditions must than have played a part; variations in the purity of
the water seem again to have been the most prominent ones.
Stromatoporoids in Holmhallar-type reefs
In the reefs of Holmhlllar type the stromatoporoids a r e more dominant

reef builders than in the other types of reefs (cf. Chapter VIII). The colonies
usually also reached large dimensions there. Generally they a r e separated
by thin layers of calcareous mud o r Algae. The volume of reef rock
consisting of stromatoporoids is more than inversely proportionate to the
amount of reef matrix. This i s the case even though the matrix in the
Holmh&llar-type reefs is purer than in the average reef of Hoburgen type.
Near the distal ends of the reefs the contribution made by the stromato-
poroids to the total amount of reef limestone is distinctly smaller than in the
more central reef parts.
PALAEOECOLOGY O F STROMATOPOROIDS 441
\A
\B
P Z l reef limestone
Fig.224. Detail of the map of the Holmhiillar raukar field with the observation
points 159-165 and the supplementary observation points a-t. Data from
these points together form the basis of the curves in Fig.225.
In sheltered pools within the growing reef surface, where somewhat

more mud and also fine reef debris were deposited, apparently several
stromatoporoids died and were replaced by corals and bryozoans (Fig.225).
At the observation points 161 and 162 in Holmhallar (see the map of this
raukar field) a higher matrix volume was noted, which was also reflected by
the fact that the stromatoporoids do not occur in the usual large and massive
colonies. A similar situation was met at observation point 171, where locally
the stromatoporoids are smaller and flatter; more matrix is present than in
the surroundings, where stromatoporoids had-built so compact a reef lime-
stone that the individual colonies could hardly be recognized.
At observation point 182, in the bottom part of the rauk, a zone was
found which contained comparatively more corals and less stromatoporoids
Fig.225. Composition of the reef limestone of Holmhallar along the line AB

in Fig.224. The right part of the graph gives the composition of the "normal"
reef limestone, the left part that of the rock formed in a large pool within the
reef. The crinoid percentage is exaggerated by a factor of two. Even though
the amount of terrigenous mud deposited in the pool was small, the fact that
it was laid down in rather stagnant water was apparently sufficient to make
many stromatoporoids give place to corals and bryozoans.
than the remaining parts of the rauk. This zone could also be recognized in
point 181, although it is l e s s distinct at that place. In point 180, the zone was
no longer developed in the same way; the rock there is again very rich in
stromatoporoids, but among these there a r e notably many which a r e "tower
shaped" (latilaminae strongly bulging upwards in places); some others are
tabular in shape. This zone may reflect less favourable conditions for
stromatoporoids, leading to a decrease in their number or to aberrant
growth forms. Where stromatoporoids retreat corals replace them.
Around planes, which seem to represent interruptions in reef growth
(cf. Chapter VIII), an inverse relation between stromatoporoid volume and
amount of reef matrix could be established also in several cases.
Any theory on the subject of palaeoecology must admit a certain flex-
ibility. Exceptions to the general rule may be found. Thus, in observation
point 121, a high contribution by corals to the reef limestone was observed,
even though the matrix volume was low. Also the reverse, many stromato-
poroids in places comparatively rich in matrix, was observed in a few
instances. It may have been possible, however, that the surfaces of stromato-
poroid colonies were kept f r e e of sediment by moving water in a similar way
a s the surfaces of stones on a recent sand beach a r e continuously washed
clean.
In almost all cases where the matrix sedimentation was very great,
however, the stromatoporoids distinctly gave way. In the observation points
161 and 162, where the matrix volume was estimated to comprise about 50%
of the total rock volume, against about half that percentage in the close sur-
roundings, the stromatoporoids constituted only about 10% of the reef -1ime-
stone volume, against about 40% in the direct surroundings and about 60% at
some greater distance.
Different growth forms
In reef limestones both of Holmhallar and of Hoburgen type, different

growth forms a r e exhibited by the stromatoporoids. The main types have
been described in Chapter V. On a soft s e a floor the nature of the weak sub-
stratum often forced a development i n the form of covers o r thin lenses. In
the reefs, however, where a solid substratum was generally present, upward
growth was easier. There one often gets the impression that sedimentation
stimulated such upward growth, particularly in the interior parts of the
reefs, where moving water contributed less to keeping the colonies clear of
sediment than at the reef edges. In a Hamra-Sundre reef in the south of the
second hillock of Hoburgen at three different places ten specimens of
stromatoporoids were measured. The reef section was northeast - south-
west. At the northeast side, close to the reef margin, the average length of
the stromatoporoids was 41 cm and the average thickness 9 cm. At the same
level, about 3 m from the reef margin, these measurements were 34 cm and
11 cm, respectively. In the reef core, which in this case was about 6 m from
the margin, the measurements were 27 cm and 13 cm, respectively. From
reef margin to reef core, the thickness/length ratio thus was found to increase
from 0.22 to 0.48. In the small reefs i n the Klinteberg Beds the difference in
size between stromatoporoids in the reef margins and core is much less. In
a few Upper Visby reefs where measurements of this kind were made, no
significant differences were found at all.
A few examples of different stromatoporoid growth forms are shown in
Fig.226.
A stromatoporoid limestone of reef-detrital character, occurring at
Sjausterhammar, has been mentioned in the discussion of the debris floor and
talus mantle of Holmhallar-type reefs, in Chapter VIII. Some of the stromato-
poroids found there, may have grown at the place where they a r e found. In a
few thin and relatively more-marly layers low in sections through the
stromatoporoid limestone, laminar stromatoporoids a r e present. Higher up,
in a section at the south side of the reef, some stromatoporoids a r e apparently
also in their original positions. Part of these show a high and narrow growth
form, somewhat comparable to torpedos (cf. Fig.226 J,M), which is probably
caused by the high sedimentation rate, due to reef-debris deposition. Still
higher in the section, t r u e reef limestone is exposed, indicating complete
colonization of the area by the stromatoporoids. In the basal part of the reef
most stromatoporoids have flat shapes; upwards the colonies become rounder.
This example shows how different growth forms may be found even in one
restricted locality.
The author has insufficient data to be able to say in how f a r the different
growth forms a r e genotypical differences and in how far they a r e to be
attributed to environmental factors. However, it seems probable that both
factors have been atwork. The example of Labechiais recalled here (cf. p.432).
This genus occurs typically in a laminar growth form in the marginal regions of
the reefs, but may be found occasionally in a branched form in more
sheltered places. Environmental factors may have modified the growth form
of some taxa and may also have made a certain environment more favourable
for other taxa which normally developed the growth form most suitable for
life in that part of the reef o r reef environment.
Fig.226. Some growth forms exhibited by stromatoporoids in reefs of

Holmhallar type. A. Heliholm, Hamra-Sundre Beds; B-E. Holmhallar,
Hamra-Sundre Beds; F-L. F k e l h a m m a r South, Hemse Beds; M. Herrvik,
Hemse Beds.
Poss ib 1e explanation of stromatoporoid Palaeoecology

There is no direct apparent explanation f o r the intolerance of mud on
the part of the stromatoporoids. However, Colter (1957, p.260) presented two
hypotheses which a r e worth mentioning here.
One reason may be similar to that postulated f o r the predominance of
solitary corals in extremely muddy conditions, namely the size of the polyp.
The smaller a coral polyp, the l e s s able it is to cope with mud. Whatever the
form of the stromatoporoid individuals has been, they have obviously been
extremely small. Consequently it is likely that they will have been unable to
remove sediment which has fallen onto the colony.
Another possible reason for the intolerance of mud displayed by the
stromatoporoids may have been connected with feeding habits. Yonge (1940,
pp.362-363) has shown that those corals with small polyps which have
adapted their ciliary systems for feeding a r e l e s s able to cope with sediment
than those whose cilia can be used for the removal of sediment. The feeding
habits of the stromatoporoids a r e not known, but if they were ciliary feeders,
then they will have met the same difficulties as the ciliary-feeding small
coral polyps.
Finally, in spite of all the emphasis laid in the preceding pages on the
great susceptibility of the stromatoporoids to mud sedimentation, caution is
still advised. Considering the importance of this aspect of stromatoporoid
palaeoecology, the last word on that subject as a whole has certainly not been
said. Recent ecological work has demonstrated that only rarely is a particular
variation in environmental conditions the single cause or probable cause of
animal behaviour. Also, that more than one factor may, under different con-
ditions, produce the same effect. Much more work on the palaeoecology of
stromatoporoids needs to be done, particularly much detailed work.
Wherever possible, this should go together with taxonomic studies.
Latilam inae
As has been mentioned in Chapter V, several stromatoporoids show

latilaminae. These a r e layers, generally 1-20 mm thick (Fig.227), which a r e
composed of many laminae o r cysts. The latilaminae are best seen in
weathered specimens, and in rather pure and massive reef limestone may
Fig.227. Stromatoporoid colony, falling apart along latilaminar planes.

Gannberg, Ostergarn Parish, Hemse Beds.
446 PALAEOECOLOGICAL OBSERVATION§ ON FOSSIL TAXA
make the stromatoporoids distinguishable in the field from the matrix o r the
algal growths. Even within one and the same species, specimens may or may
not show latilaminae and consequently they a r e of no taxonomic importance.
Their development s e e m s to be connected with pauses in growth, reproductive
o r perhaps seasonal pauses. In this connection it is noteworthy that some
corals also show a kind of coarsely-laminated structure; this phenomenon i s
more common and more-distinctly developed in localities where,
comparatively, the stromatoporoid latilaminae a r e also best developed.
PALAEOECOLOGY O F CRINOIDS
After the discussions on the palaeoecology of the two main groups of

reef builders, some space needs also be devoted to the most important group
of associated organisms, the crinoids. A s mentioned in Chapter V, there is
hardly a reef in Gotland in which crinoid fragments a r e not found. But far
more abundant than in the reef matrix are crinoid remains occurring in the
deposits which surround many of the reefs. In many instances these deposits
deserve the name of crinoid limestone o r even crinoid breccia.
Occurrence of crinoids in reef-surrounding sediments
The crinoid limestones a r e generally built up, for the main part, of
small and large, disarticulated crinoid-skeletal remains and a calcareous
mud which fills the interspaces and cements the whole. Embedded in the
deposit, there is generally a varying amount of reef debris. The l a r g e r
crinoid fragments, generally strongly recrystallized, have retained their
original forms. In both transverse and radial sections the remains may show
a fine porosity, a net-like structure. Crinoid sand i s also a very common
constituent of the crinoid limestones. It is generally most abundant at the
original seaward side of the reefs, i.e., usually the southeastward side.
Around the reefs of Hoburgen type, crinoids developed on all sides. The
crinoid limestone which they built is found directly around the reefs o r , where
these are surrounded by a talus mantle, directly against this mantle. The
most characteristic of the crinoid limestones is a real crinoid breccia. This
is usually best developed around the higher parts of a reef. Around the lower
parts and also around the crinoid breccia higher up, the more usual crinoid
limestone with reef debris o r otherwise a limestone with crinoids and reef
debris is generaIly present. Around several reefs, the crinoid breccia is
missing. Only the two latter sediments envelop the reef limestone there.
In a crinoid limestone with reef debris in the Bogeklint o r Klinteklint
(Boge Parish, Slite Beds), the vertical distributions of the larger crinoid
stem fragments have been studied (Fig.228). It appeared that there is a rough
correlation with the number of pieces of reef debris in the same rock. At the
base of the section, neither is abundant and at the top, both decline. Crinoid
material of smaller size remains abundant there, but the larger stem frag-
ments decrease in number.
In the Solklint (Slite, Slite Beds) the distribution of the larger crinoid
remains along a horizontal line was studied (Fig.229). It w a s found that
directly adjacent to the reef their number was highest and it rapidly
decreased with increasing distance from the reef.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF CRINOIDS 447
Reef debris Crinoid stem fragments

>2cme r0.5cme >0.5cme
Number of pieces per dm3 of r o c k
Fig.228. Vertical distribution of reef debris and crinoid stem fragments in

a section through crinoid limestone with reef debris in the Bogeklint, Boge
Parish. Only the material with a size, resp. diameter, of more than 5 mm
has been counted. An additional curve shows the number of pieces of reef
debris l a r g e r than 2 cm. The section is about 4 m high. The rock has been
deposited at the southwest side (lateral) of a reef, the material exposed at
the base presumably a t 4-5 m distance from the reef, the material at the top
at 6-7 m from the reef. The highest part of the reef extended about 1.5 m
above the top of the crinoid-limestone section. (After Manten, 1970, fig.2.)
f
E
e
"f'..,
so '\
I
10 20 30 40 50 60
Distance from the r e e f (In)
Fig.229. Number of crinoid-stem fragments with a diameter of more than

5 mm, per cubic decimetre of sediment deposited in the vicinity of a reef.
The curve is based on the reef-surrounding deposits found in the Solklint
(Slite, Slite Beds). Note that the number of larger crinoid remains rapidly
decreases with increasing distance from the reef.
Both the crinoid breccia and the crinoid limestone with reef debris a r e
generally thick-bedded. In some instances they a r e cross-bedded and in a few
cases they show evidence of wave sorting.
In the Upper Visby Beds no crinoid limestones are found to envelop the
reefs. Around the reefs of Holmhkllar type they were also present, but in
Recent time they were eroded from most of the localities where these reefs
are exposed.
In the stratified limestones and marly limestones which were deposited
at greater distances away from the reefs, crinoid remains are found scattered
at random through the sediment, together with other marine invertebrates,
such a s brachiopods, bryozoans, corals and occasional molluscs.
In conclusion, the distribution of crinoid remains in the limestones of
Gotland shows that these organisms could grow almost everywhere on the
sea floor at the time that these rocks were laid down but that they were only
abundant in the direct vicinity of reefs. When reef growth ended in a particular
locality, apparently the conditions for crinoid development also became less
suitable.
Occurrence of crinoids in reef limestone
The sediments surrounding the reefs of Hoburgen type always contain

many more crinoid fragments than the reef limestones themselves, which
may even be poor in such fossils. Comparatively speaking, the most common
are crinoids represented in the reef limestones within the Klinteberg and
Eke Beds.
Generally the r e e f s of HolmhLllar type contain many more crinoid
remains than those of Hoburgen type (cf. Chapter Vm). In the central parts
of the r e e f s they may canstitute 1-6% of the total volume of the reef lime-
stone. Towards the periphery this percentage increases, and close to the
margin crinoid remains may form 10-25% of the rock volume. The highest
percentages a r e found towards the distal ends of the larger, crescent-shaped
reefs. In the surface of the developing reef depressions occurred which were
either filled with debris o r became pools in which a different fauna developed,
particularly corals and bryozoans. In some of the debris-filled depressions
crinoid stem fragments are extremely abundant; i n others they are much less
numerous. In general, there seems to be a certain relationship between the
amount of crinoid remains i n a depression and the distance of the depression
from the reef margin.
In the reefs of Hoburgen type debris-filled depressions can also be
found, but there they are generally less characteristically developed and
nowhere do they contain large amounts of crinoid remains.
A s will be discussed in more detail on p.452, the above-outlined
distribution of crinoid remains in the reef limestones suggests that crinoids
lived on the reef flanks rather than on the reef top.
Average diameter of crinoid stem fyagments
There are notable differences in the size of the crinoid stem remains
found in the various localities. In an attempt to investigate whether some
general l i n e s could be detected in crinoid development, average diameters
ShlgrODhK~l Average thickness ot crmoid stern tragmentr (mm)

succession
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
i
Hamra-Sundre
Burgsvik Beds
Eke Beds P X-Q
Hemse Beds
X a &
Klinteberg Beds + XY+ +a 0 0
Halla-Mulde
Slite Beds u * a m 0
Visby Beds x x
x reef limestone, Hoburgen-type I& fllled depression within Holmhhllor-type reefs

X reef limestone. Holmhallar-type o crlnoid limestone amund Hoburgen-type reef5
@filled depression within Hoburgen-type reefs t limestone with reef debrls around Hoburgen-type reets
Fig.230. Graphic representation of variations in the average diameter of

crinoid-stem fragments over the stratigraphical units in Gotland. (After
of stem fragments were determined. A total of 84 samples was studied and

p e r sample 100 diameters were measured. The average values which were
found are shown graphically in Fig.230 and a r e summarized in Table Xxm.
The size-frequency distribution per sample was found to be rather normal.
The main conclusions are:
( 1 ) The average diameter is larger in crinoid stem fragments found in
depressions within the reefs than in those found scattered in the reef lime-
stone proper, and presumably also than in those found in the crinoid lime-
stones around the reefs.
(2) The average diameter of crinoid stem fragments is distinctly larger
in crinoid limestones than in the reef limestone which they enclose o r in lime-
stone with reef debris which often occurs somewhat farther away from the
reefs than the real crinoid limestones.
(3) There is no significant difference in the diameters of crinoid stem
fragments found in reef limestone and in limestone with reef debris.
( 4 ) In reef limestone of Holmhallar type the crinoid stem fragments a r e ,
on the average, thicker than in reef limestone of Hoburgen type.
(5) From the Upper Visby Beds up to the Hamra-Sundre Beds the
crinoid stems tend to attain greater average thicknesses. From the Hemse
Beds upwards, this trend is more pronounced in the figures from the reef-
surrounding sediments than in those from the reef limestones.
(6) The averages found for the thickness of crinoid stem fragments in
the Klinteberg Beds are below the values that would be expected on the basis
of the increase noted under (5). ( A s argued in Chapter XI, the Klinteberg
Beds were, however, deposited in shallower water than the majority of Slite
and Hemse Beds.)
TABLE XXIII
Variations in stem diameter in crinoids of Gotland
Stratigraphical unit Kind of reefs Average diameter of crinoid stem fragments (mm) and
number of samples (in brackets)
A
Reef limestone Depression Crinoid Limestone with
within reef limestone reef debris
Hamra-Sundre Beds HolmhalBr reef type 7.14 (7) 9.58 (3) -
Hamra-Sundre Beds Hoburgen reef type' 6.84 (5) - 10.25 (5) 8.07 (3)
Eke Beds Hoburgen reef type 7.86 (1) - 7.79 (2) 7.72 (2) v
M
Hemse Beds Holmhalltir reef type 7.27 (8) 9.80 (3) - - i02
0
r
Hemse Beds Hoburgen reef type 7.15 (5) 8.32 (1) 7.55 (3) 6.87 (7) 0
;
k
r
Klinteberg Beds Hoburgen reef type 6.46 (2) - 7.55 (3)
Slite Beds Hoburgen reef type 6.61 (3) - 7.80 (4)
HBgklint Beds Hoburgen reef type 4.60 (2) 5.46 (1) 4.91 (4) 4.62 (2) 0
z
Upper Visby Beds Upper Visby reef type 5.03 (2) - -

kl
lAlso two samples of stratified algal limestone with crinoid remains, found directly underneath reef limestone with
a n average diameter of the crinoid stem fragments of 7.16 mm. ti>
(7) The difference in average crinoid diameter i n reef limestone and
in surrounding deposits is greatest in the Hoburgen-type reefs i n the Hamra-
Sundre Beds. (This may be caused by the origin of the samples; the reef-
limestone samples were collected low in the reef-sections of Hoburgen,
except f o r one with an average diameter of 7.38; the samples from the
surrounding deposits are of younger age; a s shown in Chapter XI, during the
formation of these reefs, the water depth, initially very shallow, increased.)
(8)The average diameter of crinoid stem fragments in the reef lime-
stone is closest to that in the surrounding sediments with the small reefs in
the Eke Beds.
(9) The difference between the sample with the highest and that with the
lowest value of average crinoid stem diameter, as obtained from the reef
limestones, is greater for the reefs of Holmhdlar type than for the nearest
comparable reefs of Hoburgen type (in horizontal plane the latter generally
a r e smaller). In the Hemse Beds these differences amount to 2.25 and 0.85,
respectively, in the Hamra-Sundre Beds to 1.84 and 1.26.
Additional observations on crinoid-stem diameters are:

(10) In the deposits which envelop the reef limestone, the average dia-
meter of crinoid stem fragments is, as a rule, somewhat smaller at the
original seaward side of the reefs than at the original landward side.
(11)The average crinoid diameter in the reef-surrounding deposits
generally decreases with increasing distance from the reef.
(12)Crinoid remains with notably large diameters (over 20 mm) occur
in scattered fashion from the Slite Beds upwards. They a r e most common in
the crinoid limestone of the Hamra-Sundre Beds ("Hoburg marble") and in
the filled depressions within the reefs of Holmhallar type.
Factors which influenced crinoid distribution and size

An attempt will now be made to determine the various factors which
have influenced the development of the crinoids found in the Palaeozoic
deposits of Gotland. Only those factors which a r e of specific value in under-
standing the observed differences in crinoid distribution and size will be
discussed here. Environmental conditions which influenced more generally
both reef growth and crinoid development will be dealt with in Chapter XIV.
Different crinoid taxa

A major problem in the study of crinoids is the loosely articulated
skeletal structure of the living animal. Minor agitation of the water over the
s e a floor has presumably already resulted in major disarticulation of the
skeletal parts of defunct individuals. Well-preserved crowns a r e rarely
found in the reefs o r on their flanks. Some are found locally in limestone
with crinoid remains and reef debris, which was laid down a s inter-reef
deposits. The taxonomic information which the author has obtained from
these crowns is rather scattered and one-sided. Therefore, he is unable to
prove whether some o r all of the variations found in crinoid development
should be attributed to the occurrence of different taxa. That different taxa
have been present, however, is certain (Table IX)and that the ecological
requirements and average sizes of each of these were identical is unlikely.
Taxonomic identifications of crinoids can not be made on the basis of

stem fragments alone. There are some morphological differences between
the stem remains, even within one sample, but it is known that these may
occur even within one species. Thus the generally cylindrical columnals of
Crotalocrinus species passed into somewhat more pentagonal forms down
the stem. (In earlier literature, these pentagonal Crotalocrinus stem frag-
ments a r e incorrectly described a s Cyathocrinites pentagonalis Goldf. 1.
For the Niagaran (Middle Silurian) reefs in the North American Great
Lakes region, Lowenstam (1948, 1950, 1957) found that in the development
from the quiet to the semi-rough and rough water stages of reef development,
more and more camerate crinoids, with their massive box-like calices,
began to occur in addition to the more fragile inadunate crinoids (see also
the section on the North American reefs in Chapter XIII).
Linkage to the reef environment I

:
In Middle and Upper Palaeozoic times crinoids were generally
associated with reef structures (Laudon, 1957, p.961). In Gotland it is only L
in very close connection with reefs that crinoids appear to have lived in
tightly-knit gregarious coenoses.
E
The question can be put here as to whether the crinoids lived !
predominantly on the reef surface, on the reef flanks o r in the immediate
reef surroundings.
The author believes that it is the second environment which has been
the most important. If the majority of crinoids lived on the reef surface, one
would expect to find many more crinoid remains in the matrix of the Hoburgen-
type reefs. The different hydrodynamic properties of the crinoid remains, due
to the very porous nature of the crinoid skeletons, compared to other fossil
material of comparable size, should, of course, be taken into account. But
where other, smaller fossils could be embedded in between the reef builders,
together with terrigenous debris, why should not many more crinoid frag-
ments have been preserved in reef interstices, if many crinoids had grown
and become disarticulated on the reef surface?
The fact that the average diameter of crinoid stem fragments is larger
in the crinoid limestones around the Hoburgen-type reefs than in the reef
limestones also suggests that the crinoid limestones a r e not formed by the
washing off of crinoid material from the reef surface.
The increase in crinoids from the central parts of the Holmhallar-type
reefs towards the margins suggests that also these crinoids were by far the
most abundant on the reef flanks, even though several may also have been
growing on the surface of these larger reefs.
On the other hand, the presence of the most characteristic crinoid lime-
stones directly against several reefs of Hoburgen type, o r in some cases
against their talus mantles, shows that the densest communities of crinoids
must have been located very close to the reefs. Much reef debris even moved
down from the reef over the crinoid thanatocoenoses to a final position
somewhat further away from the reef. In the further reef surroundings also
many crinoids presumably grew, but nowhere do they seem to have been s o
particularly abundant as on the reef flanks, irrespective of whether these
flanks consisted of the reef frame proper o r of a mantle of coarse talus
material deposited around the actual reef.
PALAEOECOLOGY O F CRINOIDS 453
The crinoid curve in Fig.228 suggests that the conditions f o r crinoid
development became l e s s favourable with the death of the reef around which
they grew.
The typical situation of a reef with forests of crinoids on i t s flanks,
developed particularly in the case of the l a r g e r reefs. The smaller the reefs
were (Klinteberg Beds, Eke Beds), the less distinction there apparently was
between the fauna of reef surface and reef flanks.
W a t e r depth
AS has been shown in the Chapters VI, VII, VIII and XI, all fossil reefs
of Gotland developed in shallow water. In contrast to most crinoids of the
present day, which a r e deep-water forms, Palaeozoic crinoids thus flourished
abundantly in shallow water. Even in very shallow water deposits crinoid
remains a r e found in large numbers.
One of the most characteristic crinoid limestones of Gotland is the
"Hoburg marble", which is linked to the Hoburgen-type reefs of the Hamra-
Sundre Beds in southwestern-most Gotland, particularly to the younger p a r t s
of these reefs. It was there that the highest average crinoid stem diameters
were found. There are indications that these younger reef parts were formed
i n slightly deeper water than the older p a r t s of these reefs and than most of
the other Hoburgen-type reefs.
The next-largest average stem diameters a r e found in the reefs of
Holmhallar type. Crinoids are also much more abundant in these reefs than
in the other reefs of Gotland. It is likely that at least some of the most
characteristic reefs of the Holmhallar type developed in somewhat deeper
water than the majority of Hoburgen-type reefs.
There a r e , thus, some indications that in comparatively deeper shallow
water (probably'deeper than 10-15 m), the crinoids became larger and
presumably also more abundant than in very shallow water. It may be
assumed that the fragile crinoids must have been extremely sensitive to
water agitation. At relatively greater depth, water mobility on the average
may have been somewhat less. That may have been a greater influence on
this facet of the crinoid distribution pattern than water depth itself.
Mobility of the w a t e r
There a r e several further indications that the crinoids grew larger in

l e s s agitated water than in strongly agitated water. The larger average
diameters of crinoid stems at the original landward side of the reefs a s
compared to the original seaward side, and in filled-in depressions within
the reefs a s compared to the reef matrix, no doubt a r e functions of water
mobility. This also holds for the greater abundance of crinoids at the distal
ends of the crescent-shaped reef of Holmhallar compared to the seaward
side (cf. Chapter VIII). The same may be true for the greater variation found
in crinoid diameters within reef limestone of Holmhallar type. In larger
reefs there is more variation in local environmental conditions between the
various parts of the developing reef.
The presence of unusually large amounts of crinoid columns in the
reef environments and the marked scarcity of skeletal remains of the crowns
of crinoids in these places may perhaps also be attributed to the destructive
action of agitated water. Another possibility is that predators fed on the

crowns of the crinoids, allowing only the other skeletal p a r t s to accumulate
on the s e a floor.
Sediment content of the water

Against the widespread belief that crinoids could only live in a c l e a r
sea, Ager (1963, p.132) demonstrated that a t least s o m e crinoid taxa could
a l s o thrive very well in muddy seas. He observed that in the Mississippian
of Indiana (U.S.A.) autochthonous crinoid remains (long s t e m s , calices,
holdfasts) a r e commonly found embedded in shales.
The fossil crinoids of Gotland, however, belong to taxa which preferred
relatively c l e a r water. Some crinoid remains are found in stratified marl-
stone deposits but a r e only randomly scattered. In stratified limestones in
r e e f l e s s a r e a s crinoid remains a r e m o r e commonly found than in the m a r l -
stones, though they are never abundant t h e r e either. The stratified deposit
in which they a r e most common is the algal limestone at the base of the
Hamra-Sundre Beds. The marly to somewhat clayish matrix of s o m e reef-
like intercalations in this algal limestone indicates that there was a certain
supply of terrigenous debris. On the other hand the general abundance of
Algae in the algal limestone suggests that this deposit has been laid down
while the water was not truly muddy. At least not to such a degree that a silt
o r clay deposit sedimentated f r o m it, such as was the case in the Mississippian
of Indiana.
A s far as the r e e f s of Gotland are concerned, the matrix of the reefs
of Hoburgen type, too, generally shows that the water in which the reefs grew
contained terrigenous debris, but the mobility of the water prevented a
substantial deposition of this material. Crinoids are distinctly least common
in and around the reefs with the strongest marly matrix, those of the Upper
Visby type. The reefs with the purest matrix, those of the Holmhallar type,
are the richest in crinoids.
Better adaptation to the environment in the course of time

It is difficult to give a satisfactory explanation f o r the increase in
average diameter of the crinoid s t e m s in the course of geological time, as
found in Gotland (Manten, 1970). A s this trend does not directly continue in
Devonian and younger formations in other areas, it is apparently a regional
phenomenon. The r e e f s of the Upper Visby Beds a r e the f i r s t which formed
in the west part of the Baltic Sea of Palaeozoic times. In the following
younger geochronological unit, the Hogklint Period, crinoids began to occur
in crowded communities around reefs. F r o m Hbgklint time onwards, the
crinoids appear to have become increasingly better adapted to the reef
environment, as appears f r o m both their increase in s i z e and in abundance.
It would be interesting to know whether this development took place within
the s a m e taxa, o r whether in the course of t i m e new taxa evolved in the a r e a
which were m o r e specialized towards this environment, o r whether perhaps
other taxa migrated into the area from elsewhere, to find in the reef environ-
ment their optimum living conditions. The author is unable to answer this
intriguing question at his present stage of knowledge.
455
Chapter XIII
COMPARISON OF THE REEFS OF GOTLAND WITH

REEFS IN SOME OTHER AREAS
GREAT BRITAIN
Whereas conditions suitable for the establishment of reefs occurred

several times during the deposition of the Silurian rocks of the Baltic area,
reef growth in the British Wenlockian w a s generally confined to the time of
deposition of one sequence of bedded limestones of approximately 30 m
thickness, alternating in part with thin marly layers. This sequence is under-
laid by marl shales with nodules o r lenses of marly limestone, and is
generally overlaid by a sequence of crinoid beds, about 30-45 m thick.
Within the limestone sequence reef building could apparently s t a r t and finish
at any time, depending upon local conditions. Some reefs started quite near
the bottom of the sequence and continued until deposition of the overlying
crinoid limestones took place. Murchison (1839, p.211) recorded a reef lime-
stone 80 ft. (approx. 25 m) thick, and Crosfield and Johnston (1914, p.200)
listed various quarries which might, at one time, have contained reef masses
with a vertical extent of 50-60 ft. (approx. 15-18 m). At the time of these
publications, however, these reefs were nowhere higher than 30-40 ft.
(9-12 m), with smaller reef masses of approximately 4 m high occurring
commonly. According to Colter (1 957, p.7), the lateral extent of any single
reef exposed at that time did not exceed 100 ft. (30 m), and many were only
a few tens of feet across.
It appears from these brief descriptions that the Wenlockian reefs of
Great Britain compare the best with the Upper Visby reefs of Gotland. The
stratified Wenlockian sediments may sag beneath and arch over the reefs,
and laterally they may dove-tail irregularly into them. Laminar organisms
may also spread out over the surrounding sediments, and this fact, together
with the often gradual transition from reef to stratified limestone, shows
that the reefs generally r o s e gently from the s e a floor. Exceptions, where
steeply-dipping laminar stromatoporoids at the reef edge indicate steeper
reef flanks, a r e also found i n the British Wenlockian.
The most important reef builders i n the Wenlockian reefs a r e the
tabulate corals, and among these, probably the most important single species
is Heliolites parvistella Ferd. Roemer, which occurs in both branched and
massive forms (Colter, 1957). In the Upper Visby reefs of Gotland, corals
play an even more important part than stromatoporoids and other fossils, in
contrast to the l a r g e r reefs of Hoburgen type in which stromatoporoids
prevail. Branched corals, however, do not belong to the prominent reef
components in the Upper Visby Beds, as they do in the Wenlockian, even
though their colonies a r e known in the reefs of Gotland. Algae a r e present
i n both the Upper Visby and the Wenlockian reefs, but they a r e not as common
456 COMPARISON WITH REEFS ELSEWHERE
as in the r e e f s of Hoburgen and Holmhillar type. In general, m a s s e s of

Solenopora sp. and incrustations of Rothpletzella spp. a r e common in the
Wenlockian, where they s e e m to be better developed than in the Upper Visby
reefs, but much l e s s so than in the other r e e f s of Gotland.
According to Crosfield and Johnston (19141, 87.5-97.5% of the favositids,
stromatoporoids and cyathophyllid c o r a l s in the Wenlockian r e e f s are in
positions of growth, against only 7.5-30% in the reef-surrounding sediments.
Since these figures a r e obtained in a somewhat different way from that of the
percentages in Chapter XII, they a r e not directly comparable, but the general
tendency s e e m s to be the s a m e as that in the Upper Visby reefs (Table XXII,
pp.435, 437). F r o m the great difference in percentages, Twenhofel (1950) drew
the conclusion that the Wenlockian r e e f s s e e m to have grown under conditions
not favourable f o r lateral expansion.
A tentative conclusion which may b e reached from the comparison
between the British Wenlockian sediments and those of Gotland, is that the
facies of the Wenlockian falls between that of the Upper Visby Beds and the
limestone deposits of Gotland, f o r both its stratified and unstratified rocks.
Its stratified sediments a r e impure limestones, but not as rich in m a r l as
in the Upper Visby Beds. In the reefs, c o r a l s are usually dominant, but
stromatoporoids a r e also important.
The stratified stromatoporoid Tofta limestones may be compared to
stromatoporoid limestones found at Dudley (Colter, 1957, p.261). Both, no
doubt, represent shallow water conditions, but the occurrence of branching
f o r m s at Dudley suggests still water. The l a r g e Spongiostroma balls, which
a r e associated with the stratified stromatoporoid rocks of the Tofta facies,
s e e m to have no directly comparable equivalents in the Wenlockian limestone.
ES THONIA
As is apparent from the review of the Esthonian Palaeozoic in

Chapter 11, r e e f s occur in Esthonia at seven different stratigraphical levels.
These levels are the Vasalemma Stage in the uppermost Middle Ordovician,
the Pirgu Stage in the Upper Ordovician, the Porkuni Stage in the lowermost
Llandoverian, the Hilliste member of the Tamsalu Stage in the Middle
Llandoverian, the Raikkiila Stage in the upper Middle Llandoverian (locally),
the Lower Jaagarahu Stage in the Middle Wenlockian, and the Adla member
of the Paadla Stage in the Lower Ludlowian.
Although reef development thus already occurred during the Ordovician,
this took place much m o r e commonly during the Silurian. At the end of the
Ordovician, the Taconic phase of the Caledonian orogeny occurred
simultaneously with a general regression of the sea. The transgression,
which began during the middle of Porkuni time, did not bring the sea as far
as before. In the Esthonian a r e a , the s e a remained shallow during the whole
of the Silurian, thus contributing to favourable conditions f o r reef growth.
Reefs a r e especially abundant in Esthonia in the Jaagarahu strata,
where they form lentoid aqd irregularly shaped bodies which a r e clearly
distinguishable from the surrounding rock. They are the best exposed along
the northern s h o r e of the islands of Saaremaa (&el) and Muhu (Moon). The
reef dolomites a r e found in the upper p a r t s of the eminences, whereas the
stratified dolomites and marlstones lie b a r e in the lower parts. Due to the
hardness of the biohermal rock, the r e e f s frequently stand out from the
ESTHONIA 457
surrounding rock a s a consequence of the action of the land ice, and erosion
and abrasion by the post-Glacial Baltic Sea. They form isolated eminences
o r cliffs, which a r e often steeply terraced and irregular in shape.
The Jaagarahu Stage reefs occur in both the Kesselaid dolomite and the
Jaagarahu limestone. The main reef builders in the former a r e calcareous
Algae (Stromatolithi and others)and bryozoans ( Coenztes repens (Wahlenberg));
corals a r e l e s s common and a r e mainly represented by Rugosae, to a l e s s e r degree
by Fauosites sp. and locally by Halysites sp. In the Jaagarahu limestone,
dominant reef builders a r e stromatoporoids and rugose corals, each mainly
represented by only one species, viz., Stromatopora typica Ros. and
Eauosites m irandus Sok.
It is likely that the deposit, described by Hoppe (1932, p.49) as a
stromatoporoid reef built up by unluted, angular stromatoporoid fragments
of various dimensions, originates from the fore-reef facies rather than from
the reef proper.
The diameter of some reefs attains several kilometres and they may
be up to 16 m thick. However, most of them a r e smaller, with a diameter
between some metres and a few hundred metres. The larger reefs a r e
mainly found in the islands.
There is an apparent connection between the increase in reef size in
the western direction and the organic composition of the reefs. The dolomites
with algal and bryozoan reefs occur in the east of the Jaagarahu Stage
(cf. Chapter 11). Towards the west, limestones a r e found and corals and
stromatoporoids increase in importance as reef builders; Algae remain
present but a r e l e s s abundant i n the west. It is supposed that the basin
increased in depth westward, although the Algae are an indication that the
depth was not more than some tens of metres at any one place.
The Jaagarahu reefs occur i n a belt parallel to the coast line of that
time, which was north of the reefs. There is great similarity between these
and the reefs of the Hogklint and Slite Beds of Gotland, with one of which the
Jaagarahu reefs may correlate and probably even form one belt. Martinsson's
(1958) study on the submarine morphology of the Baltic (see also Fig.3) sug-
gests a correlation with the Hogklint klint complex, although that author had
to admit (p.23) that in Saaremaa the klints lie higher in the sequence than
the coast klint of Gotland.
The Jaani Stage i n Esthonia consists in its lower part of marlstone and
clayey marlstone, passing upwards into fossiliferous marly limestone with
marlstone. In view of this lithological sequence and also of the relatively
great thickness (up to 56.5 m), it may well represent the equivalent of the
Visby and Hiigklint Beds of Gotland, a s has already been supposed by, e.g.,
Luha (1930).
It is interesting to note that Aaloe (1956, p.94) assumed that since the
Jaani - Jaagarahu boundary i n the Esthonian a r e a the water depth in the
Silurian basin gradually and slightly increased, thus leading to favourable
conditions for reef growth. In the second half of Jaagarahu time, water depth
decreased again, reef development came to an end, a n terrigenous com-
ponents became more common, a s well a s calcareous Algae. The latter
locally formed algal biostromes, which can be considered the very-shallow
water equivalent of a reef facies. In Kaarma time in the Esthonian mainland,
deposits of a lagoon-like facies were laid down. This sequence of events
4 58 COMPARISON WITH R E E F S ELSEWHERE
appears to be s i m i l a r to that which happened in Gotland in Slite time and the

Halla element of Halla-Mulde time.
The stromatoporoid-coral r e e f s of the Paadla Stage in Esthonia

probably correlate with the Hemse reef belt of Gotland. These Esthonian
reefs are found in the southwest of Saaremaa. Northeastwards, the reef-
containing Adla limestone p a s s e s into a somewhat marly, c o a r s e detrital
limestone without reefs. Similar sediments also overlie the reef member.
The whole is suggestive of water that gradually became shallower, and a
moving down of the coast line in an approximately southwesterly direction.
Deposits from the last two Silurian stages in Esthonia, the Kaugatuma and
Ohesaar Stages, are found still f a r t h e r southwest and, thereafter, a hiatus
in the stratigraphical column of Esthonia occurs until in the Middle Devonian.
NORTH AMERICA
It has already been mentioned in Chapter V, that Silurian r e e f s are

extensively distributed in the eastern half of North America. They have been
especially well studied in the Great Lakes a r e a of the United States
(Chamberlin, 1877; Carozzi and Zadnik, 1959; Cumings, 1930a,b, 1932;
Cumings and Shrock, 1927, 1928a,b; Fenton, 1931; Ingels, 1963; Lowenstam,
1948, 1949, 1950, 1952, 1957; Pinsak and Shaver, 1964; Shrock, 1929, 1939;
Textoris and Carozzi, 1964; Textoris, 1966). Silurian reefs in the adjacent
Canadian a r e a , and further north and east of this, have been described by
Bell (1886), Savage and Van Tuyl (1919), Thorsteinsson and F o r t i e r (1953)
and Twenhofel (1927).
Great Lakes area
In the Great Lakes a r e a , reefs occur in the Niagaran, which is roughly

equivalent to the Upper Llandoverian and the Wenlockian of the European
stratigraphical column. In that a r e a , the Niagaran comprises t h r e e broad
sedimentary belts, in the trend southwest - northeast. F r o m northwest to
southeast, these a r e the elastic-free belt, the low-clastic belt and the high-
clastic belt (Lowenstam, 1949, 1950). The f i r s t two contain reefs, the last
one does not.
The r e e f s vary in form a c r o s s the s t r i k e of the sedimentary belts.
According to Lowenstam (1950), the water in the northwest, in the clastic-
f r e e belt, was very shallow. Reefs formed t h e r e a r e lenticular in vertical
section and lack steeply-dipping flank beds. They a r e presumed to have risen
only a little above the surrounding s e a floor (Shrock, 1939, p.555).
Towards the southeast the water became deeper. Reefs developing
there could r i s e to considerable heights above their surroundings, until they
entered the turbulent surface waters.
Distribution of these two types of r e e f s in the two sedimentary belts is
a good general rule, and not quite without the exceptions that are needed to
prove a good rule (Lowenstam, 1949, p.28).
The reefs of the first type, those from the clastic-free belt, are small
in area, being no m o r e than 30 m o r so in diameter (Lowenstam, 1949, p.29,
1950, p.478). Vertical expansion was limited by the shallowness of the water
NORTH AMERICA 459
over most of the area, hence the development of low-lying, lenticular to

tabular reefs. They stood only a metre or so - definitely less than 3 m -
above the surrounding s e a floor (Lowenstam, 1957, p.226).
The reefs in the Great Lakes area are dolomitized, but corals and
stromatoporoids can still generally be recognized. The fauna of the reefs is
comparable in composition to that in the surrounding stratified sediments,
differences being more in degree than in kind. A s there was generally little
change in environment between the initial and final stages of reef growth,
there are little, if any, differences in reef builders and reef-dwelling
populations between the lower and higher parts (Lowenstam, 1957, p.226).
In the clastic-free belt, the substrate of the reefs, as a rule, consisted
of sand-sized calcareous bioclastics with negligible amounts of terrigenous
material.
The surrounding stratified sediments of the reefs a r e said to show
signs of deposition in shallow water and of the reworking of material swept
off the reef. The absence of talus flanks around the reefs of this type i s
explained by the debris being swept away from the reef a c r o s s the s u r -
rounding s e a bed, which was only a little deeper than the reef surface itself.
In the southernmost part of the clastic-free belt, some reefs with
detrital flank beds a r e present. These reefs a r e comparatively small, ranging
approximately from 10-300 m in diameter and their water depth is presumed
to have been generally greater than that farther inside the belt. Their faunal
characteristics differ little from the inter-reef bottoms, except for the
presence of reef builders. A large admixture of reef-derived, skeletal
material tends to obscure further any minor differences than may have been
present initially.
The reefs of the low-clastic belt could reach a size of up to several
kilometres in diameter and almost 300 m in thickness. Spacial configuration
of the reefs is known only in a few instances and indicates circular,
ellipsoidal, hemispheroidal, cuboidal, mound o r ridge shapes. The Marine
reef in the subsurface of Madison County, Illinois, is the largest one known
in this region, and has an a r e a of more than 1.5 km2. Its surface outline in
its final growth stage is horseshoe-shaped, with the convex side facing south,
which illustrates the moulding effect of the prevailing southerly winds
(Lowenstam, 1957, p.223). No other reefs of this shape have been recorded
from the American Silurian.
In certain instances, closely spaced growth centres probably coalesced
to form composite reef bodies, but in the main sites, the reefs have main-
tained their individuality. Subsidiary growth centres developed on the talus
slopes of some reefs, but they were generally short-lived owing to burial
by debris from the main reef.
Reef building in the low-clastic belt also, always occurred on
unconsolidated bottoms. In many instances the substrate consisted of sand-
sized, calcareous bioclastics; others have been found rooted in argillaceous,
carbonate muds and calcareous siltstones (Lowenstam, 1957, p.219). A
number of reefs have settled into the argillaceous bottom deposits.
Stages of reef development
Following a study of the reefs of northeastern Illinois and northern

Indiana, Lowenstam (1957) presented a survey of the vertical differentiation
460 COMPARISON WITH R E E F S ELSEWHERE
of environment and the composition of the reef fauna. He distinguished a

quiet water stage, a semi-rough water stage and a rough water or watte-
resistant stage.
The quiet water stage comprised the time between initial colonization
and the building of a solid reef framework upward to the effective wave base.
According to Lowenstam (1957) the first organisms to settle were almost
exclusively Syringopora colonies. These built the initial reef surface, together
with colonies of Favosites, which were the first to join them. Unfortunately,
dolomitization is extensive, making recognition of reef builders rather
difficult. In a reef at Wabash, Indiana, and i n others elsewhere, Lecompte
(1938) noticed the occurrence of structures resembling the problematical
Stromatactis of the Belgian Devonian. These structures present themselves
as cavities, with a relatively flat bottom and digitated top, filled with sparry
calcite (Textoris, 1966). Although Lowenstam is not certain whether the
structures represent stromatoporoids o r Algae, he considers these as the
builders of a loose network, together with favositids. According to Lowenstam,
this network should have acted a s the framework of the developing reef.
Textoris and Carozzi (1964) indicated a fistuliporoid bryozoan control of the
Stvomatactis cavities. These authors were able to discover some non-
dolomitized to partly-dolomitized outcrops of reefs in Indiana. On the basis
of these they were able to establish six ideal stages of reef development, a s
opposed to the three stages of Lowenstam. The first three stages compare
with the quiet water stage. They consisted of the development of a mound of
calcisiltite containing crinoid, bryozoan, and ostracode bioclastics and
Stromatactis, but notably enough, essentially no stromatoporoids o r corals.
These three stages of development include the Wabash reef. Living locally
on and within the reef frame, in addition to crinoids, bryozoans, and
ostracodes, were trilobites, brachiopods and sponges. The fauna of the quiet
water stage was characterized by a low population density and a small
number of species of both the reef builders and the reef dwellers. A s a
result of this, the reef framework was mainly filled with inorganic,
terrigenous sediment. The reef flank may have consisted of inclined-bedded
core-type rock with only a subordinate amount of bioclastic material
(Lowenstam, 1950). The contrast between the reef fauna and that of the s u r -
rounding stratified sediments was not as marked in the quiet water stage a s
it is i n the next two stages, as distinguished by Lowenstam.
During the semi-rough water stage (stage 4 of Textoris and Carozzi,
1964), the reefs were subjected to the action of storm waves, remaining i n
this stage until the surf base was just about reached. Lowenstam believed
that the reef frame in this phase was built of Stromatactis -like structures
and stromatoporoids, the latter having considerably increased in proportion
over the former. However, Textoris (1966) found that in the best exposure
thusfar known of reef limestone from this stage, the organisms which capped
the quiet water mounds, thus allowing them to continue to evolve into more
agitated environments, were not encrusting stromatoporoids but spongio-
stromid Algae. Corals were represented in the semi-rough water stage by
such genera as Eauosites, Halysites, Heliolites and Syringopora, but were
not of great importance. Reef dwellers, i n order of their relative abundance,
were crinoids, brachiopods, bryozoans, trilobites, sponges, cephalopods,
gastropods and Iamellibranchs. In comparison to the f i r s t stage, the
population density and the number of species in the reefs had increased.
The reef frame was now filled mainly with detritus.
NORTH AMERICA 46 1
In the rough water stage (stage 5 of Textoris and Carozzi, 1964), the
number of species and the population density were considerably higher, which
was true for both the reef builders and the reef dwellers. Stromatactis-like
forms were still present, but stromatoporoids now irrefutably participated
in reef formation and dominated among the reef builders. Corals too, were
very abundant; they were now represented by other genera, such a s
Arachnophyllunz , Thecia, Alveolites , Eletcheria and Coenites , and actively
participated in frame building. Among the reef dwellers some new groups
had appeared, viz. inarticulate brachiopods, cystoids, blastoids and conularids.
Material swept from the reef by water turbulence rolled down the slope into
the deeper water, where it was not subjected to wave action. As a result,
steeply-dipping talus layers were formed, possessing a synsedimentary
inclination, in contrast to the result of differential compaction (Shrock, 1939).
The final phase in reef building is represented by the subsurface Marine
reef, which b e a r s on i t s upper side, an accumulation of bioclastic debris,
interpreted by Lowenstam (1950) to be material deposited on the reef surface
by the winds prevailing at the time of the emergence of the reef. Growth was
then restricted to a narrow zone on the windward side.
Crinoids
Crinoids were always the most important contributors to the debris,

as this is found in both the reef limestone itself and in the flank deposits.
In the quiet water stage, reef dwellers including crinoids were sparingly
represented; in the semi-rough water stage, they were much more abundant,
making up the bulk of the debris. Locally, however, the brachiopods increased
in reef-flank deposits to proportions close to those of the crinoids. In the
rough water stage, crinoids were by far the most common element among the
reef dwellers.
A marked pattern of change has been noted in the crinoid group
(Lowenstam, 1957, p.239). At the initial stage of reef development, the
Inadunata were the sole crinoid representatives. They were first accompanied
by Camerata at the intermediate upgrowth stage; and by the terminal upgrowth
stage, the Inadunata had become only a subordinate faunal component, a s
were the Flexibilia. More than 75% of the crinoids at that stage were
camerates. Morphologically, they were particularly conditioned to occupy
the rough water niches successfully, not only those on the reefs but also
those of the inter-reef and open shelf habitats.
P a r t of the crinoid remains were stabilized on the reef surface, but by
far the most were on the flank of the reefs. In the flank-free reefs of the
clastic-free belt, much crinoid debris was carried away from the reefs and
scattered over the inter-reef bottoms (Lowenstam, 1957, p.241).
Comparison with Gotland; the criterion of wave resistance
In conclusion, it can be stated that the reefs in the Niagaran of eastern

North America show a greater variety of composition and of size than those
in Gotland. Of the two main classes, distinguishable in the Niagaran, those
of the clastic-free belt a r e the most comparable to the reefs of Gotland, in
that they developed in a shallow sea, with no chance to grow up to a great
462 COMPARISON WITH R E E F S ELSEWHERE
height above the surrounding s e a floor. They correspond in s i z e and form,

and in their relation to the stratified sediments around them. There a r e
generally no well-developed, m o r e o r l e s s steeply-dipping flank beds, but the
material swept f r o m the reefs was distributed over the surrounding s e a floor.
Lowenstam (1950) a l s o compared the flankless r e e f s of the clastic-free
belt with those of Gotland, the reef nature of which he had surprisingly
denied e a r l i e r in the s a m e paper. Following Ladd (1944), Lowenstam
considered wave resistance as the most important criterion by which reefs
shouId be judged. Even though he admitted the existence of a "grading
spectrum of allied habitats", he insisted on the maintenance of a rigid
separation of wave-resisting s t r u c t u r e s from those that a r e not wave-
resisting ( Lowenstam, 1950, p.435). Lowenstam admitted that the structures
of Gotland show f r a m e building and sediment binding, and that they developed
above wave base, as is shown by the presence of bioclastic debris, swept off
them, in the stratified sediments. However, i t is Hadding's belief that the
s t r u c t u r e s of Gotland developed not immediately below the ebb level, but at
a depth estimated to be g r e a t e r than 5 m (Hadding, 1941, p.75) which is taken
by Lowenstam (1950, p.438) as indicating that they w e r e not actually wave
resistant.
By a strange coincidence, in the s a m e i s s u e of the journal in which
Lowenstam advanced his opinion, Hadding (1950, p.405) showed that the water
around the r e e f s was restricted in s o m e places and had f r e e play in others,
resulting in the deposition of muddy sediments alongside pure limestones.
This is evidence of "reef -induced turbulence", which Lowenstam considers
as an indication of wave resistance.
It is with approval, that the present author quotes Colter (1957, p.233),
who opposed the view that wave resistance is some universal constant by
means of which a s t r u c t u r e may be measured, in o r d e r that it might be
accepted o r rejected as a reef. Colter then points out that "the depths of
wave action and the b r e a k e r zone vary considerably with s i z e and form of
local waves, and a s t r u c t u r e which resisted the action of b r e a k e r s in one
environment might well crumble before the onslaught of l a r g e r waves.
Similarly, a s t r u c t u r e might well develop in quite shallow water, but be
beneath the local b r e a k e r zone". Even if i t were true that the r e e f s of Gotland
did not grow in water shallower than 5 m - and the present author indeed
believes that it is not t r u e - this is not an adequate criterion by means of
which the reef character of these s t r u c t u r e s may be denied. The application
of such a standard takes no account of the variation in composition and
potential which is possible in organic structures. As Colter (1957, p.234)
states, there "is probably no gap o r clean-cut distinction in nature between
s t r u c t u r e s which a r e wave-resisting and those which a r e not, m o r e
especially as the very properties necessary f o r wave resistance are
variable, and the standard applied inconstant". Acceptance of a structure as
a reef should also take into account such factors as the associations of
organisms responsible f o r it and the relationships of the s t r u c t u r e to the
environment.
CONCLUSIONS
The observations and views quoted on Silurian r e e f s of a r e a s outside

Gotland put reef development in Gotland into r a t h e r b e t t e r perspective, and
CONCLUSIONS 463
a l s o confirm a number of conclusions which w e r e drawn in earlier chapters
f o r the reefs of Gotland:
(1)Reefs begin to occur much lower i n the stratigraphical column of
the east Baltic area than in the west.
(2) The succession of s t r a t a in the B ri t i sh Wenlockian shows that
sedimentation of argillaceous m at t er should b e below a cert ai n limit to
p e r mit reef growth. This is in agreement with the picture presented by the
Upper Visby Beds of Gotland.
( 3 ) Reef building generally took place on unconsolidated sea bottoms.
(4) Not every one of the reef bel t s of Gotland corresponds with a
s i m i l a r development in the eas t Baltic area. Only during two of the five main
periods of reef formation in Gotland (presumably Slite and Hemse) did reefs
develop als o in the eas t of the basin.
( 5 ) The distribution of reefs in eas t er n North A m eri ca shows that water
depth is the m o r e important factor in determining the dimensions of the
reefs, provided that the w at er is not ver y muddy, which would cause a
p r ematu r e destruction of the reefs (cf. the reefs in the middle Upper Visby
Beds of Gotland).
(6) In shallow water reefs generally r o s e not m o r e than a few m e t r e s
above the surrounding sea floor. Under such circumstances, differences
between the fauna of the reefs and that of t h ei r surroundings everywhere,
are m o r e in degree than in kind. Within the reefs t h e r e is no apparent
vertical zonation in faunistic composition. However, a deviating fauna and
vertical zonation are found in reefs which grew in deeper water. In Gotland,
the reefs of the main island al l c o r r e l a t e with shallow-water reefs elsewhere,
but the large reefs of K ar l s oar na are r a t h e r of the deep-water type.
( 7 ) Th e facies of the reef-bearing sequence in the British Wenlockian
is intermediate between that of the Upper Visby Beds and the HGgklint Beds.
The contribution of stromatoporoids t o the Wenlockian reefs is a l s o inter-
mediate between that of the reefs in the two stratigraphical units of Gotland.
This mak e s a correlation of stromatoporoid development with decreasing
deposition of inorganic detritus m o r e likely than a correlation with shallower
water.
(8) In the Niagaran of North America, stromatoporoids i ncrease in
number with a decr eas e in water depth, but the s a m e is t r u e f o r the corals.
Lowenstam (1950, p.483, 1957, p.240) has a l so found that the stromatoporoids
d e c r e a s e in importance as reef builders f rom the clastic-free belt a c r o s s
the low clastic belt, and are subordinate at the southern border of this region.
This decline coincides with an i ncr eas e i n the muddy impurities. These
observations al s o suggest that a decrease in sedimentation w a s of g r e a t e r
influence on th ei r expansion than preponderance in t hei r competition with
the reef -building cor al s in shallower water.
(9) Water turbulence was of gr eat influence on the type of sediment
surrounding the reefs. In deeper w at er , m at eri al swept from the higher
p a r t s of the reefs rolled down and f or m ed steeply-dipping t al us l ayers. In
shallow wate r , where the bottom was al s o under the influence of wave action,
reef-derived m at er i al was to a l a r g e extent swept a c r o s s the surrounding
sea bed. The lat t er situation is found i n Gotland, with the possible exception
of the l a r g e reefs of Karlsoarna.
(10) Reef growth everywhere is generally accompanied by a strongly-
increased development of crinoids. The m arked pattern of change observed
in the large reefs of the Alnerican low clastic belt, indicates that the
464 COMPARISON WITH REEFS ELSEWHERE
taxonomic composition of the crinoid community there was linked with the
depth of the growing reef surface, which suggests that the crinoids grew on
the reef. Whether they were more common high up on the reef flanks, o r on
the upper side of the reef, is difficult to judge on the basis of the available
literature. Where small reefs developed (clastic-free belt in North America;
British Wenlockian) crinoid remains a r e found also most abundantly i n the
immediate environment of the reefs.
46 5
Chapter XIV
GENERAL CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THEREEFS

OF GOTLAND FORMED
Together with the discussions of the various reef types of Gotland,

including Karlsoarna, of the stratigraphy of the island, and of the
palaeoecology of some groups of fossils, much information has already been
given on the conditions under which the reefs of Gotland formed. A few
additional remarks on this subject, of a general rather than of a specific
nature, will be added in this chapter.
WATER TEMPEFUTURE
In the assessment of ancient climatic conditions, reliance may be

placed on some general comparisons of ancient life with i t s modern
equivalents.
Both ancient and recent reefs show a great variety of organisms with
calcareous parts. Over half a century ago, Vaughan (1911) argued that the
physiology of organic calcium-carbonate precipitation is governed by
physico-chemical processes which have probably remained similar over
the years.
Although the details of the carbonate system in s e a water a r e not yet
fully known, in general calcium-carbonate precipitation occurs more
readily under conditions of high temperature, high salinity, and low carbon-
dioxide concentration. Such conditions a r e typical of tropical shallow waters,
away from the influence of fresh water, where evaporation r a i s e s the
salinity and active plant growth reduces the C 0 2 content.
Most papers on modern reefs stress the fact that reef building takes
place in warm and shallow water. The high r a t e of calcium-carbonate pre-
cipitation in stromatoporoids, corals, crinoids, calcareous Algae, and other
contributors to the reefs of Gotland, suggests that also these reefs developed
under shallow and warm-water conditions, similar to those which occur in
tropical regions of the present day.
Oolites are present in various stratigraphical units of Gotland. They
also indicate a warm climate and a shallow s e a during their deposition.
Probably even a second comparison between present and ancient
marine life may be made. Most marine organisms display absolute-
temperature l i m i b of distribution. Generally these are not lethal tempera-
tures; but mechanisms such as feeding, reproduction, and general activity
are often modified already a t temperatures less extreme than those at
which immediate o r rapid death occurs. In the warmer seas, it is generally
466 GENERAL CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH T H E R E E F S FORMED
the summer maximum which determines the possibility of survival, whereas

the winter minimum determines the possibility of breeding (Moore, 1958,
p.19). Temperature-tolerance ranges are usually smallest for developing
eggs and larvae, and tend to increase a s the organism grows older. Early in
this century, Mayer (1914) already showed that forms inhabiting warm
waters predominantly live closer to their upper limiting temperature than
to their lower limit. Several later studies have confirmed this. Particularly
for reef building, which requires the regular addition of new organisms, a
temperature minimum well above the lower limit for breeding is extremely
important.
It may, thus, be assumed that the reefs of Gotland developed in water
with temperatures similar to those in at least the subtropical, if not tropi-
cal, s e a s of the present day.
WATER DEPTH
In several of the preceding chapters evidence has been produced

suggesting that the reefs of Gotland developed in shallow water (e.g.,
pp.176-177, 210-212, 311, 336, 462-463). This evidence came both from the
organic and general features of the reefs themselves and from the nature
of the surrounding sediments. Some additional r e m a r k s will be made here
aboutthe role played by Algae.
Most papers on modern reefs s t r e s s the association between Zooxan-
thellae and reef corals. This association is vital to the former, but not to
the individuals of the latter. Nevertheless, it may be an essential factor in
the attainment of the high rates of metabolism which a r e necessary for the
establishment and maintenance of the coral-reef community. Moreover,
photosynthesis assists in increasing the calcium content of s e a water. The
photosynthesis connected with the association is one of the main reasons
why present-day reef building is confined to shallow water.
Unfortunately, there is no evidence of an association between
Palaeozoic Algae and corals. However, if there were not such an associa-
tion, the economy of the reef must have been different from that of their
modern counterparts.
Yonge (1940, p.368) suggested that present-day reef corals also rely
very strongly on the Algae for the removal of certain waste products;
particularly phosphoric and probably also nitrogenous excretory products
(cf. also Moore, 1958, p.328). If the Palaeozoic corals and stromatoporoids
were not associated with symbiotic Algae, it must be assumed that these
ancient reef builders were able to take c a r e of this waste removal alone.
In conclusion, if the Palaeozoic reef builders contained no Zooxan-
thellae, they must have been more efficient reef builders than the modern
reef corals. In itself this is not impossible, but a symbiosis of Algae and
reef builders in Palaeozoic times is more likely.
In addition to the possible presence of Zooxanthellae, the reefs of
Gotland also contain other Algae. Calcareous Algae of the genus Solenopora
a r e fairly well represented in several reefs. The genus may have belonged
to the red Algae. Rothpletzella, which precipitated lime from calcium-rich
water, w a s a genus of blue-green Algae.
Cloud (1952a) believed that a depth of not more than 30 m is likely f o r
the formation of any rock, deposited under marine conditions, in which
WATER AERATION 467
blue-green Algae are common. The red Algae a r e unable to use blue light.
Although light of this wave length also decreases exponentionally with
depth, it is able to penetrate to greater depths than visible light of other
wave lengths. Nevertheless, Cloud stated that branching and nodular
coralline red Algae a r e also rarely abundant below 30 m.
Calcareous Algae a r e common in the reefs of Hoburgen and Holmhallar
type in Gotland. In several of the Upper Visby reefs, they a r e not found at
all and occur only rarely in some others. Perhaps conditions for their
development were marginal i n these reefs. However, the fact that some a r e
present suggests that the Upper Visby reefs cannot have developed below the
lower depth limit of algal growth. This is even truer if the corals i n these
reefs should indeed have lived in symbiosis with Zooxanthellae. The presence
of marlstones in the Visby Beds suggests that the water i n which the Upper
Visby reefs developed must have been frequently rather muddy. This would
have cut down the penetration of sunlight over the reefs considerably.
In conclusion, it is likely that all the reefs of Gotland developed in
water l e s s than 50 m deep (if not a t even shallower maximum depth). For
the reefs of Hoburgen type a water depth of l e s s than 30 m may then
generally be assumed. The characteristic Holmhallar-type reefs grew i n
rather clear water and may have had a slightly deeper limit, but probably
not more than 40 m.
As discussed, e-g., while describing the Hoburgen-type reefs, several
reefs grew during periods in which the water gradually became shallower
o r deeper. This had i t s effect on the lateral and vertical extension of the
reefs. The growing parts will have always remained within the depth zones
which were suggested in the previous paragraphs.
WATER AERATION
The general characters of the reefs of Gotland and their associated

sediments, combined with the high density of organisms in both, show that
the water i n which the rocks were formed and in which the organisms lived
was well aerated. The water must have usually been in movement. It is true
that most attached-living animals produce some water currents by them-
selves. Generally, however, they benefit from a more general movement
of water past them, even though they a r e liable to mechanical damage from
such water movement. The latter ensures the supply not only of oxygen, but
also of their food. It also assists in the removal of waste products. With the
abundance of benthos in the reefs of Gotland, and i n their surroundings, it
may be assumed that there has been a general movement of the water during
at least a major part of the day.
Occasional heavy movements of the water were generally not beneficial
to the reef builders. A s several of the reefs show, these movements damaged
the more-fragile reef builders and detached more-massive colonies; or , i n
severe cases, even damaged larger parts of the reef.
A s discussed in Chapter VII, when treating the interrelations between
Hoburgen-type reefs developing in a particular reef zone, the reefs growing
furthest toward the side of the open s e a may have met with more favourable
conditions for a rapid and healthy development than those with a position
closer to the coast.
On the s e a floor also, oxidizing conditions will have prevailed. The
468 GENERAL CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH T H E R E E F S FORMED
presence of pyrite in some of the stratified deposits does certainly not

indicate general reducing conditions at the sediment - water interface. The
pyrite was presumably formed diagenetically under reducing conditions
developing only after the burial of the sediment in which the pyrite is found.
RATE OF REEF GROWTH
It is very difficult to make a reliable estimate of the rate of upward

growth of the reefs of Gotland, but nevertheless, an attempt will be made
at this point.
The growth r a t e of coral colonies in recent reefs varies strongly in
different colonies of the same species and within the same habitat. One of
the main reasons for this may be a decrease in growth r a t e with increasing
age of the colony. Furthermore, it appears that growth of corals takes place
intermittently. An average annual upward growth of about 1 cm may be
assumed (cf. Moore, 1958, p.332).
The same figure may be a reasonable approximation for the upward
growth of the coral and stromatoporoid colonies in the reefs of Gotland.
F o r the total reef surface, however, the rate will have been lower. Living
and dead colonies will have alternated. On the various parts of the reef
surface, conditions for reef growth were different, very favourable in one
place and submarginal in others.
Along with addition to the reef by growth, there has been loss by
various causes, Water turbulence damaged the reef builders and washed
both fragments and complete colonies off the reef. In reefs growing in very
shallow water, even the entire reef surface o r major parts thereof, may
temporarily have been subjected to erosion (Upper Higklint Beds, Upper
Hemse Beds). P r e s s u r e exerted by the younger reef parts on the underlying
reef parts caused compaction. Locally, the mechanical strength of the reef
f r a m e may also have been further weakened by boring organisms (cf. p.76).
Taking all these factors into consideration, the average annual growth
of the reefs in upward direction may have been not more than about 1 mm.
F o r the development of a reef of 10 m thick, a period of 10,000 years may
consequently have been required.
Field observations make it likely that a living reef of that thickness
did not extend more than about 2-4 m above i t s surroundings. The total
weight of the reef m a s s caused a sagging of the underlying stratified
sediments. If this is assumed to have caused a subsidence of the central
part of the reef of about 0.5 m, then in the 10,000 years which reef develop-
ment took, about 6 m of stratified sediments must have been laid down i n
the a r e a around the reef. This is an average of 60 cm per 1000 years.
In the present Moluccan area, where there is both a high productivity
of lime-secreting organisms and a fair amount of detrital-lime supply by
rivers, about 20 cm of calcium carbonate is deposited per 1000 years
(Kuenen, 1950, p.379). This seems to be one of the highest figures for lime
sedimentation that has been established.
The continent bordering the epicontinental s e a in which the reefs of
Gotland formed, probably consisted for a major part of crystalline rocks.
A s the shift of the successive reef zones of Gotland towards the southeast
shows, the Palaeozoic Baltic basin was constricted in the course of time.
The continental a r e a closer to the coast may, therefore, have consisted of
RATE O F R E E F GROWTH 469
elevated Cambrian and Ordovician sedimentary deposits, consisting in part

of limestone. Nevertheless, the supply of l im e from the continent will
presumably have been distinctly lower than in the case of the MoIuccan area.
This the m o r e so as the relief on the continent bordering the Palaeozoic
Baltic basin presumably was much lower. T here is no reason to assum e that
the productivity of lime-secreting or gani s ms in reefless areas in Gotland
h a s exceeded the high productivity of the Moluccan a r e a ; it has rat her been
lower. Therefore, with r e g a r d to areas on the Silurian sea floor which w ere
devoid of reefs, a total l i m e accumulation (organogenic-detrital and
terrigenous-detrital) of 10-11 c m p e r 1000 y e a r s may perhaps be a real i st i c
assumption. Adding to this the contribution of the terrigenous mud to the
mar ly limestone, the total figure f o r normal sedimentation may have been
in the o r d e r of magnitude of 1 2 c m p e r 1000 years. Considering furt her that
the stratified sediments in the reef environment consist f o r about 8056 of
crinoid and reef debris, a total figure for these p a r t s of the sea floor of 60 c m
p e r 1000 y e a r s may have been possible.
In conclusion, average upward growth of the reefs of Gotland will
presumably not have exceeded 1 m p e r 1000 y e a r s in absolute sense o r
0.40 m p e r 1000 y e a r s with r es pect to the surrounding sea floor. In the
initial stage of reef development, this figure was presumably higher,
wh e r eas in a late stage of reef growth it was distinctly less. This conclusion
is in agreement with Moore (1958, p.333), who stated that many modern
reefs maintain m o r e o r less a balance between growth and loss.
471
Chapter X V
CONCLUDING REMARKS AND SUMMARY
This chapter is to end the monograph on the Silurian of Gotland, but the
author r ealizes that it is not a satisfactory end. Several subjects t reat ed in
the preceding pages still need a m o r e thorough and detailed study. Many
other subjects which have hardly been touched upon o r not at all in the
p r e s en t work are equally intriguing. However, one has to make a break
somewhere, just to cr eat e o r d e r in the collection of information which has
been brought together and to define one’s position. The end of this book is
only such a break, certainly as far as the study, in a general way, of the
Silurian deposits of Gotland is concerned. The author hopes that f o r him
personally it is al s o only a break. T h e r e are very few places i n the world
which enchant him m o r e than this Baltic island. He would be glad to be
enabled t o r etu r n t her e f r om t i m e to t i m e to l e a r n m o r e about i t s geological
and historical past, and about i t s pr es ent development.
In the next sections, a s hor t s um m ar y will be given of the main
conclusions reached in the work that has been presented here.
STRATIGRAPHY O F THE MIDDLE PALAEOZOIC O F GOTLAND
The stratigraphical subdivision a r r i v e d at by the present author is

shown in Table XXIV. Compared to the stratigraphy drawn up by Hede (1921,
1925a), t h e r e are four modifications: (1) The Lower and Upper Visby m a r l -
stones are united in one main unit; the subdivisions proposed f o r other main
units by the present author are often thicker than the Lower or Upper Visby
Stratigraphical unit Main lithology Maximum thickness ( m )

Hamra-Sundre Beds limestones, reef limestones 50
Burgsvik Beds sandstone, claystone, oolite 50
Eke Beds marlstone, marly limestone, reef limestone 15
Hemse Beds limestones, reef limestones, marlstone 100
Klinteberg Beds limestones, reef limestones 65
Halla-Mulde Beds limestones, reef limestones, marlstone 25
Slite Beds limestones, reef limestones, marlstone
Hogklint Beds limestones, reef limestones
Visby Beds alternating marlstone and marly limestone 20
472 CONCLUDING REMARKS AND SUMMARY
Beds, but they remain subunits. Moreover, as the names Lower and Upper
Visby Beds already suggest subunit rank, and t h e r e is great similarity also
in lithological composition, i t is only logical t o bring them together in one
main unit. ( 2 ) The Tofta limestone is included as a f a c i e s in the (Upper)
Hogklint Beds. (3) The Halla limestone and Mulde marlstone are considered
to be synchronous deposits, and are, therefore, united in the Halla-Mulde
Beds. (4) The Hamra limestone and Sundre limestone are united in the
Hamra-Sundre Beds, because the boundary between the two, as drawn by
Hede, is distinctly a facies boundary, and no satisfactory time boundary
could be fixed.
The present author has not done any work himself on the correlation
of the succession of s t r a t a of Gotland with the English Silurian succession.
A correlation based on l i t e r a t u r e data is given in Table VI (p.43).
OCCURRENCE O F TRUE FOSSIL REEFS
In each of these stratigraphical units reef limestones are found, some-

t i m e s as a conspicuous component and sometimes only very subordinate.
Although a universal definition of "organic reefs" is very difficult or
even impossible to give, t h e r e can b e little doubt that the word "reef" may
be used f o r the s t r u c t u r e s constituting the reef !imestones in the Silurian
of Gotland. They have formed in a shallow epicontinental basin, through the
joint activities of various kinds o r organisms, among which t h e r e were
colonial f r a m e builders. The s t r u c t u r e s grew up above the surrounding sea
floor and induced water turbulence. They a l s o provided material swept off
t h e i r surface which contributed to the formation of surrounding detrital
deposits.
GENERALDEVELOPMENTOFTHEREEFSOFGOTLAND
The Visby Beds were laid down in a sea gradually decreasing in water
depth. This was presumably caused by small epeirogenetic movements of the
basin floor. The shallowing of the sea led t o a d e c r e a s e in marlstone
deposition and an i n c r e a s e in the sedimentation of m a r l y limestone towards
the top of the Visby Beds. As a result, the situation on the sea floor was also
modified, but not uniformly over the entire area. During middle Late Visby
time, the alteration in environmental conditions r a n ahead of the general
trend in s o m e r e s t r i c t e d o r very r e s t r i c t e d parts. More organisms populated
these areas. Their remains contributed t o extra limestone deposition and
provided suitable places f o r the settling of sedentary organisms. Among
these were many potential reef builders, which, in s e v e r a l c a s e s , started
the formation of s m a l l reefs. These are the reefs of the Upper Visby type.
Corals, in a r a t h e r great variety of species and f o r m s , strongly dominate
the organic element in these reefs. The reef matrix is voluminous and
strongly marly. The deposition of this m a r l apparently made the conditions
f o r the stromatoporoids r a t h e r unfavourable and this applied even m o r e
strongly to the calcareous Algae. Mantles of stratified limestone are present
around many of the reefs, but t h e r e are no crinoid limestones.
With a continued d e c r e a s e in water depth and consequent gradual
alteration of other environmental conditions a l s o towards the end of Visby
GENERALDEVELOPMENTOFTHEREEFS 473
time, reef development was increasingly favoured. The foundations were thus
laid f o r much richer reef growth in the next, the Hogklint Period. A number
of Hogklint r e e f s have their roots i n the Upper Visby Beds. Moreover,
several new r e e f s began to grow early in the Hogklint Period. Together they
formed a broad reef zone.
The reefs of the Hogklint Beds a r e the f i r s t , in Gotland, of the Hoburgen
reef type. These reefs a r e larger than those of the Upper Visby time.
Stromatoporoids were the dominant reef builders, with corals taking second
place and Algae also being common. The average size of the reef builders
i s larger. On the reef flanks and directly around the reefs crinoids usually
grew abundantly. Their remains contributed significantly to the crinoid lime-
stones with reef debris which were often formed around the reefs.
During Early Hogklint time, the gradual decrease i n water depth
presumably continued. While the Upper Hogklint Beds were being laid down
the s e a was probably very shallow. These Hogklint Beds include theTofta
limestone a s a facies. Small alterations in s e a level occurred, and a few
times the s e a floor probably even temporarily fell dry. Almost no reefs
began to develop, but in comparatively somewhat deeper parts of the Late
Hogklint sea some reefs already in existence continued growth.
The limestones of the Slite I Beds were deposited in very shallow water;
these beds a r e missing in the north of the present Slite limestone area.
During Slite I1 time, water depth increased, probably with fluctuations.
Slite I1 Beds a r e found over the entire present Slite limestone area. A further
increase in water depth took place during Slite I11 time, whereas Slite IV
time was again characterized by a gradual shallowing of the water. During
the entire Slite time m a r l was laid down in a zone at the seaward side of the
marlstone zone.
During Slite I11 time, and, to a much stronger degree, during Slite IV
time, there was a second main period of extensive reef formation. Reefs of
the Hoburgen type developed.
Halla-Mulde time is characterized by a change in the direction of the
hinge line of epeirogenetic movement of the basin floor, from about
southwest - northeast to about w e s t - east. This caused a decrease in water
depth i n the northeast and an increase in depth in the southwest. Towards
the southwest, limestone was depqsited in water of increasing depth, until
limestone sedimentation was followed by marlstone deposition. In the a r e a
of limestone formation, reef growth continued, with only small reefs in the
northeast, and reefs of larger size towards the southwest.
The fluctuations in water depth during Slite III, IV and Halla-Mulde
time were most pronounced in the a r e a of Karlsoarna. In Slite 111 and IV time
large reefs grew in that area. They a r e called reefs of the Staurnasar type.
The lower parts of these reefs were presumably mainly built by huge coral
colonies, while the upper parts contain stromatoporoids and corals together.
In Lilla Karlso one of these large reefs continued growth in Halla-Mulde
time. On the flanks of the large reefs smaller ones developed. They have
been named reefs of Fanterna type. These smaller reefs were mainly built
by bryozoans and corals. Some of the younger reefs of Fanterna type seem
to have been able to survive the main reefs on whose flanks they began to
grow, and became strongly extended.
During Late Halla-Mulde time the water began to shallow again. The
Klinteberg Beds were laid down in a s e a of slight depth. Presumably water
4 74 CONCLUDING REMARKS AND SUMMARY
depth was less than that in which most of the other limestone complexes of
Gotland were deposited.
Small reefs, roughly of Hoburgen type, occur throughout most of the
Klinteberg Beds, and r e p r e s e n t a third period of reef development in the
area of Gotland.
During Late Klinteberg t i m e and very Early Hemse time the water
depth again increased. In the remaining p a r t of Early Hemse time i t may
have remained m o r e o r less the same. In Upper Hemse time a renewed
gradual decrease of the water depth occurred in the east. The epeirogenetic
movements which caused the alterations in water depth during Klinteberg
and Hemse times probably went together with alterations in the direction of
the hinge line. This is reflected by the assumed directions of the depth
contours. During Klinteberg t i m e these had a tendency to r e t u r n to a m o r e
northeast - southwest direction. In the course of Hemse time their direction
again became m o r e east - west.
Reefs are particularly common in the Upper Hemse limestones. These
w e r e formed during a fourth period of reef development. Probably as a
result of an alteration of the direction of the depth contours, Hemse reefs
only developed in the e a s t , where the water became shallower. In the west
the water remained deeper and mainly marlstone formation took place.
Reefs of the Hoburgen type a r e the most common, but in the e a s t reefs of
another, the Holmhallar type, are a l s o found, as well as transitional f o r m s
between both reef types. The typical reefs of Holmhallar type are r a t h e r
l a r g e , often crescent-shaped in ground plan and consist very predominantly
of very l a r g e stromatoporoids. T h e r e are many Algae and the m a t r i x consists
of r a t h e r pure limestone.
In the east, the Hemse and Eke Beds are separated by a stratigraphical
hiatus. Such a hiatus may probably also have been present in the west, but
this could not, s o far, be proved.
During Eke time also, s m a l l epeirogenetic movements of the sea floor
took place, resulting in variations in water depth, together with alterations
in the direction of the depth contours. At the beginning of Eke time, the latter
probably r a n north-northeast - south-southwest and a t the end of Xke time,
m o r e northeast - southwest. This resulted particularly in a d e c r e a s e in the
depth of the water in which the Eke Beds in the e a s t w e r e laid down. Some
comparatively s m a l l reefs are present in the e a s t e r n Lower Eke Beds. In
the area of Gotland, however, Eke time was not a period of extensive reef
formation.
During deposition of the Burgsvik Beds a shallowing of the water took
place, which reached i t s culmination in Late Burgsvik time. The Upper
Burgsvik Beds in the west w e r e laid down in extremely shallow water, very
close to the s h o r e line, in a littoral zone which gently sloped towards the
basin centre.
An i n c r e a s e in water depth s e t in with the formation of the uppermost
oolite horizon of the Burgsvik Beds and continued well into Hamra-Sundre
time, whereafter t h e r e was presumably a m o r e constant sea depth.
Formation of Hoburgen-type reefs began in Late Burgsvik time in the east
and extended f r o m t h e r e westward in Hamra-Sundre time. L a t e r in the
Hamra-Sundre Period and further e a s t than the Hoburgen-type reefs,
characteristic reefs of Holmhallar type developed.
SUMMARY 475
MAIN PERIODS O F REEF FORMATION
Summarizing, Gotland contains the r e m a i n s of five main periods of

extensive reef formation.
I. Upper Visby Beds - Lower HGgklint Beds.
11. Slite 111 and IV Beds - Halla-Mulde Beds, including Karlsoarna.
In. Klinteberg Beds.
IV. Upper Hemse Beds.
V. Upper Burgsvik Beds-Hamra-Sundre Beds.
The reefs often occurred randomly distributed in a zone of varying width
(Fig.74), r a t h e r than in a single row (Fig.75).
The alternation of periods with and without reef formation was mainly
determined by generally s m a l l epeirogenetic movements of the basin floor,
causing variations i n water depth. Alterations in the direction of the hinge
line of these movements led to alterations in the direction of the depth
contours, and therewith to variations in orientation of the various reef zones,
and to variations in the length of the reef zones.
477
REFERENCES
Aaloe, A.O., 1956. The reef facies in the Jaagarahu Horizon of the Silurian of Esthonia.
Esti N.S.V. Teaduste Akad., Geol. Inst. Uurimused, 1: 89-94 (in Russian).
Aaloe, A.O., 1958a. Jaagarahu lademe pangad. Eesti Loodus, 1958: 14-18.
Aaloe, A.O., 1958b. Stratigraphy of the Juuru (GI) and Tamsalu (GII) Stages. Eesti
N.S.V. Teaduste Akad., Geol. Inst. Uurimused, 3: 81-98 (in Russian; Esthonian
and English summaries).
Aaloe, A.O., Mark, E.J., Mannil, R.M., Miiiirisepp, K.K. and Orviku, K . K . , 1958.
Review of the stratigraphy of the Palaeozoic and Quaternary deposits of the
Esthonian S.S.R. Izv. Akad. Nauk Est. S.S.R., Inst. Geol., 1958: 3-42 (in Russian).
Adamczak, F . , 1966a. On kloedenellids and cytherellids (Ostracoda Platycopa) from
the Silurian of Gotland. Stockholm Contrib. Geol., 15(2): 7-21.
Adamczak, F . , 1966b. Morphology of two Silurian metacope ostracodes from Gotland.
Geol. Foren. Stockholm F a r h . , 88: 462-475.
Ager, D.V., 1963. Principles of Paleoecology, McGraw-Hill, New York, N.Y., 371 pp.
Ager, D.V., 1965. The adaptation of Mesozoic brachiopods to different environments.
Palaeogeography, Palaeoclimatol., Palaeoecol., l ( 2 ) : 143-172.
Agterberg, F . P . , 1958. An undulation of the rate of sedimentation in southern Gotland.
Geol. Mijnbouw, N. Ser., 20: 253-260, 449.
Andersson, G . , 1895. Om n%grav’5xtfossil f r h Gotland. Geol. Faren. Stockholm Forh.,
Sci., Holmiae, 64 pp.
Angelin, N.P. et Lindstrijm, G . , 1880. Fragmenta Silurica e dono Caroli Henrici
(Opus postumum). Edited by G. Lindstrom and S. Lovirn. Roy. Swedish Acad.
Sci. Holmiae, 64 pp.
Angelin, N.P. e t Lindstrom, G., 1880. Fragmenta Silurica e dono Caroli Henrici
Wegelini. Stockholm, 60 pp.
Arkell, W.J., 1933. The J u r a s s i c System in Great Britain. Clarendon P r e s s , Oxford,
b8l pp.
Arkell, W.J., 1935. On the nature, origin, and climatic significance of the coral r e e f s
in the vicinity of Oxford, England. Quart. J. Geol. SOC.London, 91: 77-110.
Aurivillius, C.W.S., 1892. u b e r einige obersilurische Cirripeden aus Gotland. Bihang
Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl., 18 (IV, 3): 1-24.
Badgley, P.C., 1965. Structural and Tectonic Principles. Harper and Row, New York,
N.Y., 521 pp.
B a s s l e r , R.S., 1911. The Early Paleozoic Bryozoa of the Baltic Provinces. U.S. Natl.
Museum Bull., 77.
Bather, F.A., 1893. The Crinoidea of Gotland, P a r t I. The Crinoidea Inadunata. Kgl.
Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl., 25(2): 1-200.
Bather, F.A., 1914. Note on some reef-structures in Gotland. In: M.C. Crosfield and
M.S. Johnston, 1914. A study of ballstone and the associated beds in the Wenlock
limestone of Shropshire. P r o c . Geologists Assoc. London, 25(3): 193-228.
Bekker, H., 1922. A new brachiopod (Leptesliu)f r o m the Kuckers Stage in Estonia.
Geol. Mag., 59: 361-365.
Bekker, H., 1924. Stratigraphical and paleontological supplements on the Kukruse
Stage of the Ordovician rocks of Eesti (Estonia). Publ. Geol. Inst. T a r t d , 1:s - 1 9 .
478 REFERENCES
Bell, A., 1886. Reef structures on the Attawapiskat River. Geol. Surv. Can., Ann.
Rept., 2: 27CF-28G.
Bergenhayn, J.R.M., 1943. Preliminary notes on fossil Polyplacophoras f r o m Sweden.
Geol. Foren. Stockholm Forh., 65: 297-303.
Bergenhayn, J.R.M., 1955. Die fossilen schwedischen Loricaten nebst einer
vorlaufigen Revision d e s Systems d e r ganzen Klasse Loricata. Lunds Univ.
A r s s k r . , N.F., Avd.2,51 (8): 2-47. Also: Skrifter Mineral. Paleonto1.-Geol. Inst.
Lund, 22: 3-47.
B e r s i e r , A. et Vernet, J . P . , 1956. Un c a s d'oolithisation en facibs ddtritique. Bull. Lab.
Geol. Mineral. Geophys. Musee GBol. Univ. Lausanne, 116.
Bissell, H.J. and Chilingar, G.V., 1967. Classification of sedimentary carbonate rocks.
In: G.V. Chilingar, H . J . Bissell and R.W. Fairbridge (Editors), Carbonate
Rocks, A. Origin, Occurrence and Classification. Elsevier, Amsterdam,
pp .87- 168.
Boger, H., 1968. Palaookologie Silurischer Chonetoidea auf Gotland. Lethaia, 1: 122-136.
Bohlin, B., 1949. The Asaphus Limestone in northernmost Oland. Bull. Geol. Inst.
Univ. Uppsala, 33: 529-67G.
Bohlin, B., 1955. The Lower Ordovician limestone between the Cerutopyge shale
and the Platyurus limestone of Boda hamn. With a description of the micro-
lithology of the limestones by Valdar Jaanusson. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala,
35: 111-173.
Boll, E . , 1862. Die Beyrichien d e r norddeutschen silurischen Gerolle. Arch. Verein.
Freunde Naturgesch. Mecklenburg, 16: 114-115.
Borg, F . , 1964. A comparative and phyletic study on fossil and recent Bryozoa of the
suborders Cyclostomata and Trepostomata. Arkiv 2001. Kgl. Svenska
Vetenskapsakad., 17(1): 1-91 (on cover dated 1965).
Botke, J . , 1916. H e t geslacht Aechmina Jones et Holl. Verhandel. Geol. Mijnbouwk.
Genoot. Ned. Kolonien, Geol. Ser., 3: 21-30.
Boucot, A.J., 1957. Revision of some Silurian and Early Devonian spiriferid genera
and erection of Kozlowskiellinae, new subfamily. Senckenbergiana Lethaea,
38: 311-334.
Boucot, A.J., 1962. The Eospiriferidae. Palaeontology, 5(4): b82-711.
Carozzi, A.V. and Zadnik, V.E., 1959. Microfacies of Wabash reef, Wabash, Indiana.
J. Sediment. Petrol., 29: 164-171.
Cayeux, L., 1935. L e s Roches Sddimentaires de France. Roches Carbonatdes (Calcaires
e t Dolomies). Masson, P a r i s , 463 pp.
Chamberlin, T.C., 1877. Geology of Wisconsin. Wisconsin Geol. Surv., 2: 360-371.
Chapman, T . , 1901. On some fossils of Wenlock age f r o m Mulde, near Klinteberg,
Gotland. With notes by Prof. T . Rupert Jones and D r . F.A. Bather. Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist., Ser. 7 , 7 : 141-160.
Chilingar, G.V., Bissell, H.J. and Fairbridge, R.W. (Editors), 1967a. Carbonate
Rocks, A. Origin, Occurrence and Classification. Elsevier, Amsterdam, 471 pp.
Chilingar, G.V., Bissell, H.J. and Fairbridge, R.W. (Editors), 1967b. Carbonate
Rocks, B. Physical and Chemical Aspects. Elsevier, Amsterdam, 413 pp.
Cloud, P.E., J r . , 1952a. Facies relationships of organic r e e f s . Bull. Am. Assoc.
Petrol. Geologists, 36: 2125-2149.
Cloud, P.E., J r . , 195213. Notes on stromatolites. Am. J. Sci., 240: 363-379.
Colter, V . S . , 1957. The Palaeoecology of the Wenlock Limestone. Thesis, Univ.
Cambridge, 315 pp. (unpubl.).
Crosfield, M.C. and Johnston, M.S., 1914. A study of ballstone and the associated
beds in the Wenlock limestone of Shropshire. With note on some reef-structures
in Gotland,, by F . A . Bather. P r o c . Geologists Assoc. London, 25(3): 1 9 j 2 2 8 .
Cumings, E.R., 1930a. List of species f r o m New Corydon, Kokomo, and Kenneth
Formations of Indiana, and f r o m r e e f s in the Mississinewa and Liston Creek
Formations. P r o c . Indiana Acad. Sci., 39 (1929): 204-211.
Cumings, E.R., 1930b. Silurian r e e f s near Tiffin, Carey and Marseilles, Ohio. Proc.
Indiana Acad. Sci:, 39 (1929):199-204.
REFERENCES 479
Cumings, E.R., 1932. Reefs o r bioherms? Bull. Geol. SOC.Am., 43: 331-352.
Cumings, E.R. and Shrock, R.R., 1927. The Silurian c o r a l reefs of northern Indiana
and their associated s t r a t a . P r o c . Indiana Acad. Sci., 3b: 71-85.
Cumings, E.R. and Shrock, R.R., 1928a. Niagaran coral r e e f s of Indiana and adjacent
states and their stratigraphic relations. Bull. Geol. SOC.Am., 39: 579-620.
Cumings, E.R. and Shrock, R.R., 1928b. The geology of the Silurian rocks of nort'
Xndiana. Indiana Dept. Conservation, Div. Geol., Publ., 73: 226 pp.
Cuvillier, J. e t Sacal, V., 1963. Prksence de tintinnoldiens dans l e Dkvonien supkrieur
du Sahara septentrional. Rev. MicropalBontol., 6 ( 2 ) :7 3 .
Dames, W., 1874. Uber Spongien von Gotland. Z . Deut. Geol. G e s . , 26: b13-614.
Dames, W., 1890. Uber die Schichtenfolge d e r Silurbildungen Gotlands und ihre
Beziehungen zu obersilurischen Geschieben Norddeutschlands. Sitz. Ber. Kgl.
P r e u s s . Akad. Wiss., Phys. Math. Kl., 42: 1111-1129.
Davidson, T. and King, W., 1874. On the Trimerellidae, a Palaeozoic family of the
Palliobranchs o r Brachiopoda. Quart. J. Geol. SOC. London, 30: 124-173.
Davis, R.A., Jr., 1966. Quiet-water oolites f r o m the Ordovician of Minnesota.
J. Sediment. P e t r o l . , 3b(3): 813-818.
De Sitter, L.U., 1956. Structural Geology. McGraw-Hill, New York, N.Y., 551 pp.
De Verneuil, E . , 1848. Note s u r quelques brachiopodes de 1We de Gothland. Bull. SOC.
Gal. France, 2 Ski-., 5: 339-347.
Dybowski, W., 1873-1874. Monographie d e r Zoantharia sclerodermata rugosa aus der
Silurformation Estlands, Nord- Livlands und der Insel Gotland. Arch. Naturk.
Liv-, Esth- und Kurlands, Ser.1, 5(3): 257-414, 5(4): 415-531.
Eisenack, A . , 1954a. Hystrichospharen aus dem baltischen Gotlandium.

Senckenbergiana Lethaea, 34: 205-211.
Eisenack, A,, 195413. Foraminiferen aus dem baltischen Silur. Senckenbergiana
Lethaea, 35: 51-72.
Eisenack, A , , 1955. Neue Chitinozoen a u s dem Silur des Baltikums und dem Devon
d e r Eifel. Senckenbergiana Lethaea, 3ti: 311-319.
Eisenack, A., 1958. Tasrnanites Newton 1875 und L e i o s p h a e r i d i a n . g . als Gattungen
der Hystrichosphaeridea. Palaeontographica, A , 110: 1-19.
Eisenack, A,, 1962. Chitinozoen aus Sedimenten Gotlands (Vorlaufige Mitteilung).
Neues Jahrb. Geol. Pal'aontol., Monatsh., 19ti2(4): 218-219.
Eisenack, A , , 1964a. Mikrofossilien aus dem Silur Gotlands. Chitinozoen. Neues
Jahrb. Geol. Palaontol., Abhandl., 120(3): 308-342.
Eisenack, A., 196413. Mikrofossilien a u s dem Silur Gotlands. Phosphatische Resten.
Palaontol. Z . , 38: 170-179.
Elles, G.L. and Wood, E.M.R., 1914. A monograph of British graptolites, 10.
Monographs Palaeontogr. SOC. (London), 1913: 487-526.
F b h r z u s , L.E., 1967. Upper Ludlovian deposits of Gotland defined by means of

conodonts. Geol. Foren. Stockholm Forh., 89: 219220.
Fenton, C.L., 1931. Niagaran stromatoporoid reefs in the Chicago Region. Am.
Midland Naturalist, 12: 203-212.
Fischer, A.G., 1963. Growth patterns of Silurian Tabulata as palaeoclimatologic and
palaeogeographic tools. In: A.E.M. Nairn (Editor). Problems in Palaeo-
climatology. Interscience (Wiley), London, pp.609617, 641.
Flugel, E . , 1959. Die Gattung Actinostroma Nicholson und i h r s Arten
(Stromatoporoidea). Ann. Naturhist. Museums Wien, 63: 40-273.
Frebold, H., 1926. Z u r Gliederung des Obersilurs in Gotland und i m Ostbaltikum
nebst Beschreibung eines neuen ostpreussischen Obersilurgeschiebe. Centr.
Mineral. Geol., B, 9: 297-313.
Freeman, T . , 1962. Quiet-water oolites f r o m Laguna Madra, Texas. J. Sediment.
Petrol., 32: 475-483.
F r o m , E . , 1943. Havsbottnens morfologi utanftr Stockholms s b d r a skarggrd.
Geograf. Ann., 1943 (3/4): 137-169.
480 REFERENCES
Goldberg, E. D. , 1957. Biogeochemistry of t r a c e m et al s. In: J . W . Hedgpeth (Editor),

T r e a t i s e on Marine Ecology and Palaeoecology, 1. Ecology - Geol. Soc. Am.,
M em . , ti7: 345-358.
Gorbatschev, R., 1962. Deep boring on Gotska SandBn, 2. Th e p r e- Cam b r i an sand-
stone of the Gotska Sandon boring core. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala,
39(11): 1-30.
Go r eau , T . , 1961. P r o b l e m s of growth and c a lc iu m deposition in reef corals.
Endeavour. 20: 32-39.
G r o s s , W.. 1968. F r a g l ic h e Actinopterygier-Schuppen au s dem Silur Gotlands. Lethaia,
1: 184-218.
Hadding, A . , 1927a. T h e pre-Quaternary sedimentary r o c k s of Sweden, 1. A survey of

the pre-Quaternary sedimentary r o c k s of Sweden. Lund Univ. f t r s s k r . N .F .,
Avd.2, 23(5): s - 3 9 . Also: Kgl. Fysiograf. Sallskap. Lund Handl., 38(5): 3-39.
Also: Medd. Lunds Geol. Mineral. I n s t. , 3 2 : 2-39.
Hadding, A , , 1927b. T h e pre-Quaternary sedimentary r o ck s of Sweden, 2. The
Paleozoic and Mesozoic conglomerates of Sweden. Lund Univ. A r s s k r . , N.F.,
Avd.2, 23(5): 4 S 1 7 1 . Also: Kgl. Fysiograf. Sallskap. Lund Handl., N .F., 38(5):
42-171. Also: Medd. Lunds Geol. Mineral. Inst., 32: 42-171.
Hadding, A , , 1929. T h e pre-Quaternary sedimentary r o c k s of Sweden. 3 . T h e
Paleozoic and Mesozoic sandstones of Sweden. Lunds Univ. A r s s k r . , N . F . ,
Avd.2, 25(3): Z 2 8 7 . Also: Kgl. Fysiograf. Sallskap. Lund Handl., N.F., 40(3):
5 2 8 7 . Also: Medd. Lunds Geol. Mineral. Inst., 41: 3-287.
Hadding, A . , 1932. T h e pre-Quaternary s e d i m e n t ar y r o c k s of Sweden. 4. Glauconite
and glauconitic r o c k s . Lunds Univ. A r s s k r . , N .F., Avd.2, 28(2): 3-175. Also:
Kgl. Fysiograf. Sallskap. Lund Handl., N.F., 43(2): 3-175. Also: Medd. Lunds
Geol. Mineral. Inst., 51: 3-175.
Hadding, A., 1933. T h e pre-Quaternary sedimentary r o c k s of Sweden, 5. On the
organic r e m a i n s of the li m e s t o n e s . Lunds Univ. A r s s k r . , N .F., Avd.2, 29(4):
3-93. Also: Kgl. Fysiograf. Sallskap. Lund Handl., N .F., 44(4): 2-93. Also:
Medd. Lunds Geol. Mineral. Inst., 55: 3-93.
Hadding, A, , 1939. Observations on Teicholite, an algal limestone with stromatolitic
s t r u c t u r e . Kgl. Fysiograf. Sallskap. Lund FBrh., 9(4): 1-9. Also: Medd. Lunds
Geol. Mineral. Inst., 75: 1-9.
Hadding, A , , 1941. T h e pre-Quaternary s e d im e n t ar y r o ck s of Sweden, 6 . Reef lime-
s t o n es . Lunds Univ. l r s s k r . , N . F . , Avd.2, 37(10): 1-137. Also: Kgl. Fysiograf.
Sallskap. Lund Handl., N . F . , 52(10): 1-137. Also: Medd. Lunds Geol. Mineral.
Inst., 90: 1-137.
Hadding, A, , 1950. Silurian reefs of Gotland. J . Geol., 58: 40&409.
Hadding, A . , 1956. T h e lithological c h a r a c t e r of m a r i n e shallow w at er limestones.
Kgl. Fysiograf. Sallskap. Lund F o r h . , 26(10): 1-18, Also: Sk r i f t er Mineral.
Paleontol. Geol. Inst. Lund, 33: 1-18.
Hadding, A , , 1958a. Origin of the lithographic l im est o n es. Kgl. Fysiograf. Sallskap.
Lund F o r h . , 28(4): 21-32. Also: Publ. Inst. Mineral. Paleontol. Quatern. Geol.
Univ. Lund, 41: 21-32.
Hadding, A , , 1958b. Hidden h i a t u s e s and r e l a t e d phenomena. Some lithological
p r o b l em s . Kgl. Fysiograf. S u l s k a p . Lund F o r h . , 28(17): 159-171. Also: Publ.
Inst. Mineral. Paleontol. Quatern. Geol. Univ. Lund, bO: 159-171.
Hadding, A., 195%. T h e pre-Quaternary s e d i m e n t ar y r o c k s of Sweden, 7. Cambrian
and Ordovician li m e s t o n e s . Lunds Univ. Arsskr., N.F., Avd.2, 54(5): 1-262.
Also: Kgl. Fysiograf. Sallskap. Lund Handl., N F . , ti9(5): 1-2b2. Also: Publ.
Inst. Mineral. Paleontol. Quatern. Geol. Univ. Lund, 50: 1-262.
Hadding, A., 1959. Silurian algal l im e s to n e s of Gotland. Lunds Univ. A r s s k r . , N.F.,
Avd.2, 56;(7): 1-26. Also: Publ. Inst. Mineral. Paleontol. Quatern. Geol. Univ.
Lund, 70: 1-26.
Halle, T.G., 1920. Psi2ophyton ?hedein. s p . , probably a land-plant f r o m t h e Silurian
of Gothland, Svensk Botan. T i d s k r . , 14: 258-260.
REFERENCES 481
Hede, J . E . , 1917. Faunan i lcalksandstenens margliga bottenlager soder om Klintehamn

pP Gotland. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.C, 281: 1-32. Also: Sveriges Geol.
Undersokn., Arsbok, l l ( 2 ) : 1-32.
Hede, J . E . , 1919a. Om nagra nya fynd av graptoliter inom Gottlands Silur och d e r a s
betydelse far stratigrafien. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.C. 291: 1-31. Also:
Sveriger Geol. Undersokn., Arsbok, 1 2 (1918) (8): 1-31.
Hede, J.E., 1919b. Djupborrningen vid Burgsvik pa Gottland, 1915. Paleontologisk-
stratigrafiska resultat. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn.. Ser.C. 298: 1-59. Also:
Sveriger Geol. Undersolcn., Arsbok, 13(7): 1-59.
Hede, J.E., 1921. Gottlands Silurstratigrafi. Sveriges Geol. U n d e r s o l a , S e r . C ,
3G5: 1-100. Also: Sveriger Geol. Undersokn., Wrsbok, 14 (192b) (7): 1-100.
Hede, J.E., 1923a. Svar p i H. Hedstroms inlagg i frhgan om Gottlands Silurstratigrafi.
~
Geol. Foren, Stockholm Forh., 45: 198%8.

Hede, J . E . , 1923b. Genmale till H. Hedstrom med anledning av hans inlagg
"Ytterligare om Gottlands Silurstratigrafi". Geol. Foren. Stockholm FBrh.,
4 5 : 849-353.
Hede, J . E . , 1925a. Beskrivning av Gotlands Silurlager. In: H. Munthe, J . E . Hedd och
L . von Post, Gotlands Geologi. en Oversikt. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn.. Ser.C,
3.31: 1J-30. Also: Sveriges Geol. Undersokn. Arsbok, 18 (1924) ( 9 ) : ld-30.
Hede; J.E., 1925b. Berggrunden (Silursystemet). In: H. Munthe, J . E . Hede och L. von
P o s t , Beskrivning till kartbladet Ronehamn. Sveriges Geol. UndersEkn., Ser.Aa,
156: 14-51.
Hede, J . E . , 1927a. Berggrunden (Silursystemet). In: H. Munthe, J . E . Hede och
G. Lundqvist, Beskrivning till kartbladet Klintehamn. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn.,
Ser.Aa, 160: 12-54.
Hede, J . E . , 1927b. Berggrunden (Silursystemet). In: H. Munthe, J.E. Hede och
L. von Post, Beskrivning till kartbladet Hemse. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn.,
Ser.Aa, lti4: 1 F - 5 6 .
Hede, J . E . , 1928. Berggrunden (Silursystemet). In: H. Munthe, J . E . Hede och
G. Lundqvist, Beskrivning till kartbladet Slite. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn.,
Ser.Aa, 169: 13-65.
Hede, J . E . , 1929. Berggrunden (Silursystemet). In: H. Munthe, J . E . Hede och
G. Lundqvist, Beskrivning till kartbladet Katthammarsvik. Sveriges Geol.
Undersokn., Ser.Aa, 170: 14-57.
Hede, J . E . , 1933. Berggrunden (Silursystemet). In: H. Munthe, J.E. Hede och
G. Lundqvist. Beskrivning till kartbladet Kappelshamn. Sveriges Geol.
Undersokn., Ser.Aa, 171: 10-59.
Hede, J . E . , 1936. Berggrunden. In: H . Munthe, J . E . Hede och G. Lundqvist,
Beskrivning till kartbladet F a r o . Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.Aa, 180: 11-42.
Hede, J . E . , 1940.Berggrunden. In: G. LundqGst, J.E. Hede och N. Sundius,
Beskrivning till kartbladen Visby och Lummelunda. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn.,
Ser.Aa, 183: 9-68.
Hede, J.E., 1942. On the correlation of the Silurian of Gotland. In: G . Regn611 e t 10 al.,
Lunds Geologiska Faltklubb 1892-1942. C a r l Bloms Boktryckeri, Lund,
pp.20~+229. Also: Medd. Lunds Geol. Mineral. Inst., 101: 205-209.
Hede, J . E . , 1958. [The Silurian articles]. In: Lexique stratigraphique international,
l(2c) Susde-Sweden-Sverige. Publ. sous l'dgide du Congr. Gdol. Internat. par
l e s soins du Comm. Franqais de Stratigraphie. Centre Natl. Rech. Sci., P a r i s ,
498 pp.
Hede, J.E., 1960. The Silurian of Gotland. In: G. RegnGll and J.E. Hede, The Lower
Palaeozoic of Scania; the Silurian of Gotland. Excursion Guide 21st Intern.
Geol. Congr., Copenhagen, 1960, pp.44-89.
Hedstrom, H., 1904. Detaljprofil fran skorpionfyndorten - Pterygotus lagret - i
Siluren s t r a x soder om Visby. Geol. Foren. Stockholm FBrh., 26: 93-96.
Hedstrom, H., 1910. The stratigraphy of the Silurian s t r a t a of the Visby district.
Geol. Foren. Stockholm Forh., 32 (Congr. guide): 1455-1484.
Hedstrom, H., 1912. Om grundvattens firh%llandenai trakten af Visby. Sveriges
Geol. Undersokn., Ser .C, 239: 1-70.
482 REFERENCES
Hedstrom, H., 1917a. Uber die Gattung Phragmoceras in der Obersilurformation

Gotlands. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.Ca, 15: 1-35.
Hedstrom, H., 1917b. Uber einige mit der Schale befestigte Strophomenidae aus dem
Obersilur Gotlands. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.C, 276: 1-14. Also:
Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Arsbok, 10 (1916) (2): 1-14.
Hedstrom, H., 1929a. Om Leperditia phaseolus (His.) fr8.n Visbytrakten. Geol.
Foren. Stockholm Forh., 45: 335-336.
Hedstrom, H., 1923b. Till fr%gan om Gottlands Silurstratigrafi. Geol. Foren.
Stockholm Forh., 45: 167-168.
Hedstrom, H., 1923c. Ytterligare om Gottlands Silurstratigrafi. Geol. Foren.
Hedstrom, H., 1923d. Remarks on some f o s s i l s from the diamond boring at the Visby
Cement Factory. Preliminary report. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.C., 314:
1-26. Also: Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Arsbok, 16 (1922) (4): 1-26.
Hedstrom, H., 1923e. Contributions t o the fossil faunas of Gotland, 1. Sveriges Geol.
Undersokn., Ser.C, 316: 1-24. Also: Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Xrsbok,
16 (1922) (6): 1-24.
Hedstrom, H., 1928a. Om asfaltit och ndgra andra mineral f r h Gottlands Silurlager.
Hedstrom, H., 192813. Om ett fosforitkomglomerat p%Gotland. Geol. Foran. Stockholm
Forh., 50: 429-435.
Hennig, A., 190fr-1908. Gotlands Silur-Bryozoer, 1-3. Ark. Zool., 1905, 2(10): 37 pp.;
1906, 3(10): 6 2 pp.; 1908, 4(81): 64 pp.
Henson, F.R.S., 1950. Cretaceous and T e r t i a r y reef formation and associated
sediments in Middle East. Bull. Am. Assoc. Petrol. Geologists, 34(2): 215-2383.
Hermes, J . J . , 1966. Tintinnids f r o m the Silurian of the Betic Cordilleras, Spain. Rev.
MicropalBontol., 8(4): 221-214.
Hessland, I., 1953. Studies in the lithogenesis of the Cambrian and basal Ordovician
of the Boda Hamn sequence of s t r a t a . Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 35:
35-109.
Hinde, G . J . , 1882. On the annelid remains f r o m the Silurian s t r a t a of the i s l e of
Gotland. Bihang Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl., 7(5): 28 pp.
Hisinger, W., 1798. Minerographiske anmiirkningar ofver Gotland. Kgl. Svenska
Vetenskapsakad. Handl., 1798: 2 7 e 2 8 7 .
Hisinger, W . , 1826. Gotland geognostik beskrifvit. Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad.
Handl. Reprinted in a hardly altered form in: Hisinger, W., 1828. Anteckningar
i Physik och Geognosie under r e s o r uti Sverige och Norrige, Vo1.4, Stockholm.
Hodgson, R.A., 1961. Regional study of jointing in Comb Ridge-Navajo Mountain a r e a ,
Arizona and Utah. Bull. Am. Assoc. Petrol. Geologists, 45: 1-38.
Holland, C.H., Lawson, J.D. and Walmsley, V.G., 1959. A revised classification of the
Ludlovian succession at Ludlow. Nature, 184: 1037-1039.
Holland, H.D., Bodine, M.W., Borcsik, M., Collins, P., Kirsipu, T.V.., Rosenberg, P.E.,
Sawkins, F . J . and Tsusue, A., 1963. The coprecipitation of metallic ions with
calcium carbonate. Ann. Rept. Princeton Univ., Princeton, N.J., Contract AT
(30)-1-2266, 57 pp.
Holm, G., 1890. Gotlands graptoliter, Bihang Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl.,
16 (IV,7): 32 pp.
Holm, G., 1892. (Forevisar i Geol. For. i Stockholm en i P a h e o p h o n u s - l a g r e t vid
Visby af v. Schmalensee funnen insekt.) Geol. Foren. Stockholm Forh., 147(14):
559.
Holm, G., 1893. Sveriges Kambrisk-Siluriska Hyolithidae och Conulariidae. Sveriges
Geol. Undersiikn., Ser.C, 112: III-M, 1-173.
Holm, G., 1901. Uttalande om Gotlands lagerfaljd. In: Upplysningar till geologiska
ofversiktskarta ofver Sveriges berggrund, upprattad och utgifven af Sveriges
Geologiska Undersokning. Sveriges Geol. Undersiikn., Stockholm.
Holmsen, P., 1958. Alkalisyenitter av Oslo-feltets eruptivstamme i Danmarks dypere
undergrunn. Medd. Dansk Geol. Foren., 14: 61-62.
REFERENCES 483
Hoppe, K.H., 1932. Die Coelolepiden und Acanthodier des Obersilurs d e r Insel Oesel
Palaeontographica, 76: 35-94.
Ingels, J . J . C . , 1963. Geometry, paleontology, and petrography of Thornton Reef

complex, Silurian of northeastern Illinois. Bull. Am. Assoc. Petrol. Geologists,
47: 4 0 5 4 4 0 .
Jaanusson, V., 1944. Ubersicht d e r Stratigraphie d e r Lyckholm-Komplexstufe. Bull.

Comm. GBol. Finlande, 132: 92-100.
Jaanusson, V., 1945. Uber die Stratigraphie der Viru-Serie in Estland. Geol. Foren.
Stockholm FBrh., 67: 212-224.
Jaanusson, V., 1955. Description of the microlithology of the Lower Ordovician
limestones between the Cerutopyge shale and the Platyurns limestone (Boda
h a m ) . Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 35: 153-168.
Jaanusson, V., 1957. Unterordovizische Illaeniden aus Skandinavien. Mit Bemerkungen
iiber die Korrelation d e s Unterordoviziums. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 37:
79-165.
Jaanusson, V., 1960. On the s e r i e s of the Ordovician System. Intern. Geol. Congr.,
Zlst., Copenhagen, 1960, Rept. Session, Norden, 7: 70-81.
Jaanusson, V . and Martinsson, A , , 1956. Two hollinid ostracodes f r o m the Silurian
Mulde m a r l of Gotland. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 36: 401-410. Also: Publ.
Palaeontol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 13: 401-410.
Jaanusson, V. and Strachan, I., 1954. Correlation of the Scandinavian Middle Ordovician
with the graptolite succession. Geol. Faren. Stockholm Farh., 76: 684-696.
Jones, F.W., 1907. On the growth f o r m s and supposed species in corals. Proc. Zool.
SOC.London, 1907: 518-566.
Jones, T.R., 1887. Notes on some Silurian Ostracoda f r o m Gothland (Including a table
of stratigraphical distribution by G. Lindstrom). Stockholm, 8 pp.
Jones, T.R., 1888. Note on the Palaeozoic bivalved Entomostraca. On some Silurian
Ostracoda from Gothland. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser.6, 1: 395-411.
Jones, T.R. and Woodward, H . , 1888. On some Scandinavian Phyllocarida. Geol. Mag.,
5: 96-100, 146-147.
Jonker, H.G., 1905-1906a. Bijdragen tot de kennis der sedimentaire zwerfsteenen in
Nederland, 1. De Hondsrug in de provincie Groningen. 2 . Bovensilurische
zwerfsteenen - E e r s t e mededeeling. Zwerfsteenen van den ouderdom d e r oost-
baltische zone G. Kon. Akad. Wetensch. Amsterdam, Verslag Gewone Verga-
deringen Wis- en Natuurk. Afdeel., 13: 5 4 9 5 6 5 .
Jonker, H.G., 1905-1906b. Bijdragen tot de kennis der sedimentaire zwerfsteenen in
Nederland. 1. De Hondsrug in de provincie Groningen. 2. Bovensilurische
zwerfsteenen - Tweede mededeeling: Zwerfsteenen van den ouderdom der
oostbaltische zonen H en I. Kon. Akad. Wetensch. Amsterdam, Verslag Gewone
Vergaderingen Wis- en Natuurk. Afdeel., 13: 758-770.
Jux, U . , 1957. Die Riffe Gotlands und i h r e angrenzenden Sedimenfationsraume.
Stockholm Contrib. Geol., 1: 41-90.
Kaljo, D. and Sarv, L . , 1966. Orr the correlation of the Baltic Upper Silurian. Eesti
N.S.V. Teaduste Akad. Toimetised, 1 5 (Fiiusika- Matem. Teknik. Ser.2). (in
Russian).
Kaufmann, R . , 1931. Die Klufttektonik des Kambrosilurs von Gotland, tJland und dem
Kalmargebiet. Geol. Rundschau, 22: 292-306.
Kiaer, J . , 1908. Das Obersilur im Kristiania-gebiete. Videnskapsselskapets Skrifter,
I. Mat. Naturv. Kl., Kristiania, 1908.
Kiesow, J., 1888. Uber Gotl’hdische BeyrichSn. 2. Deut. Geol. Ges., 4011): 1-16.
Kolmodin, L., 1869. Bidrag till kannedomen om Sveriges Siluriska ostracoder. Inaug.
Dissertation, Univ. of Upsala, Upsala, 22 pp.
Kolmodin, L., 1879. Ostracoda Silurica Gotlandiae. ‘Clfvers. Kgl. Svenska
Vetenskapsakad. Forh., 1879(9): 13F-139.
484 REFERENCES
Krause, A., 1877. Die Fauna d e r sogen. Beyrichien- oder Choneten-Kalke d e s nord-
deutschen Diluviums. Z. Deut. Geol. Ges., 29: 1-49.
Krause, A., 1889. Beyrichien und verwandte Schalenkrebse in markischen Silur-
geschieben. Sitz. Ber. G e s . Naturf. Freunde Berlin, 1889: 12-14.
Krause, A., 1891. Beitrag zur Kenntniss d e r Ostrakoden-Fauna in silurischen
Diluvialgeschieben. 2. Deut. Geol. Ges., 43: 488-521.
Krause, A., 1892. Neue Ostrakoden aus markischen Silurgeschieben. 2. Deut. Geol.
Ges., 44: 383-400.
Kuenen, Ph.H., 1950. Marine Geology. Wiley, New York, N.Y., 588 pp.
Kiihn, O., 1925. Variationsuntersuchungen an rezenten Korallen und i h r e Anwend-
barkeit auf die Fossilen. Verh. 2001. Bot. Ges. Wien, 1925: 129-134.
Kuiper, W . N . , 1916. Eene nieuwe ostracode uit de bovensilurische merge1 van Mulde
op Gotland. Verhandel. Geol. Mijnbouwk. Genoot. Ned. Koloni6n, Geol. Ser.,
3: 119-121.
Kummerow, E . , 1924. Beitrage zur Kenntnis d e r Ostracoden und Phyllocariden aus
nordischen Diluvialgeschieben. Jahrb. P r e u s s . Geol. Landesanstalt (Berlin),
44 (1923): 405-448.
Ladd, H.S., 1944. Reefs and other bioherms. Rept. Comm. Marine Ecology as related
t o Paleontology, 1943-1944, Natl. Res. Council, Washington, D.C., 4: 26-29.
Laudon, L.R., 1957. Crinoids. In: H.S. Ladd (Editor), T r e a t i s e on Marine Ecology and
Paleoecology, 2. Paleoecology - Geol. SOC.Am. Mem., 67(2): 961-972.
Lawson, J.D., 1960. The succession of shelly faunas in the British Ludlovian. Intern.
Geol. Congr., Zlst., Copenhagen, 1960, Rept. Session, Norden, 7: 114-125.
Lecompte, M., 1938. Quelques types de "r6cifs" siluriens e t dBvoniens de 1'Amerique
du Nord. Essai de comparaison avec les rBcifs coralliens actuels. Bull. Museum
Hist. Nat. Belgique, 14(39): 1-51.
Lecompte, M., 1951. L e s stromatoporoides du DBvonien moyen e t superieur du Bassin
de Dinant. P r e m i e r e partie. M6m. Inst. Sci. Nat. Belgique. 116/117: 1-215.
Lecompte. M., 1952. Les stromatoporoides du DBvonien moyen e t sup6rieur du Bassin
de Dinant. Deuxierne partie. MBm. Inst. Sci. Nat. Belgique, 116/117: 216-369.
Lecompte, M., 1954a. Quelques donnBes relatives a la genese e t aux c a r a c t e r e s Bco-
logiques d e s "rBcifs" du Frasnien de 1'Ardenne. Volume jubilaire Victor Van
Straelen, Inst. Roy. Sci. Nat. Belg., Bruxelles, 1: 153-181.
Lecompte, M., 195413. DonnBes relatives ti l a genhse e t aux c a r a c t e r e s Bcologiques des
recifs du Frasnien de 1'Ardenne. Compt. Rend. Congr. GBol. Intern., Alger,
13: 315.
Lecompte, M., 1956a. Quelques precisions s u r l e phBnomhne rBcifal dans le D6vonien
de 1JArdenne et s u r l e rythme sedimentaire dans lequel il s'integre. Bull. Inst.
Sci. Nat. Belgique, 32(21): 1-39,
Lecompte, M., 195613. Nouvelles donnBes s u r la genese des rBcifs du D6vonien de
1 'Ardenne belge. Resumenes de 10s Trabajos presentados, 20 Congr. Geol.
Intern., Mexico, p.234.
Lecornpte, M., 1956c. Le rythme sedimentaire du D6vonien moyen et supBrieur de
I'Ardenne belge. Resumenes de 10s Trabajos presentados, 20 Congr. Geol.
Intern., Mexico, p.265.
Lecompte, M., 1956d. Stromatoporoidea. In: R.C. Moore (Editor), T r e a t i s e on
Invertebrate Paleontology, p a r t F, Coelenterata. Kansas Univ. P r e s s , Lawrence,
Kans , , pp. 107-144.
Lecompte, M., 1957. Les r6cifs dBvoniens de l a Belgique. Bull. SOC.GBol. France,
70: 1045-1068.
becornpte, M., 1958. Les rBcifs palBozoiques en Belgique. Geol. Rundschau, 47:
384-401.
Lecompte, M . , 1959. Certain data on the genesis and ecologic character of Frasnian
reefs of the Ardennes. Intern. Geology Rev., l ( 7 ) : 1-23.
Lindblom, A , och Svahnstrcm, G., 1959. G o t l h d s k a Stenmastare. Allhem, Malmo,
167 pp.
REFERENCES 485
Lindstrom, G., 1857. T i l l Gotlands geologi. Ufvers. Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad.

Forh., 1857: 33-34. Also: Gotl. Lans. Tidning, 1851 (33, 34, 40).
Lindstrom, G., 1860. Bidrag till k’bnedomen om Gotlands brachiopoder. ‘Clfvers. Kgl.
Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Forh., 1860: 337-382.
Lindstrom, G., 1865. Nagra iakttagelser Gfver Zoantharia rugosa. Kgl. Svenska
Vetenskapsakad. Forh., 22: 271-294.
Lindstrom, G., 1866. Some observations on the Zoantharia rugosa. Geol. Mag., 3:
356362, 406414.
Lindstrom, G., 1867. Nomina Fossilium siluriensium Gotlandiae. Stockholm.
Lindstrom, G., 1868. Om tvenna nya ofversiluriska koraller fr8.n Gotland. ‘cjfvers.
Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Forh., 1868: 419-428.
Lindstrom, G., 1870a. A description of the Anthozoa perforata of Gotland. Kgl. Svenska
Vetenskapsakad. Handl., 9(6): 1-12.
Lindstrom, G., 1870b. Om operkularbildningen hos n%gra nytidiga och Siluriska
koraller. Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Forh., 1870(9): 921-926.
Lindstrom, G., 1870c. On some operculated corals, Silurian and Recent. Geol. Mag.,
8(1871): 122-126.
Lindstrom, G., 1873. NBgra anteckningar om Anthozoa tabulata. ’Clfvers. Kgl. Svenska
Vetenskapsakad. Forh., 1873(4): 3-20.
Lindstrom, G., 1882a. Anteckningar om Silurlagren pa Carlsoarnw. Ofvers. Kgl.
Vetenskapsakad. Forh., 30: 5 3 0 .
Lindstrom, G., 1882b. Om de Palaeozoiska formationernas operkelblirande koraller.
Bihang Kgl. Vetenskapsakad. Handl., 7(4): 1-92.
Lindstrom, G., 1884. On the Silurian Gastropoda and Pteropoda of Gotland. Kgl.
Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl., 19(6): 1-250.
Lindstrom, G., 1885a. Forteckning pB Gotlands Siluriska crustac6er. Ufvers. Kgl.
Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Forh., 42(6): 37-99.
Lindstrijm, G., 1885b. List of the fossils of the Upper Silurian Formation of Gotland.
Palaeontol. Dept. Swedish State Museum (Nat. Hist.), Stockholm, 20 pp.
Lindstrom, G., 1888a. Uber die Schichtenfolge des Silur auf d e r Insel Gotland. Neues
Jahrb. Mineral. Geol. Petr.-Kunde, 1: 147-164.
Lindstrom, G., 188813. List of the fossil faunas of Sweden, 2. Upper Silurian. Palaeontol.
Dept. Swedish State Museum (Nat. Hist.), Stockholm, 29 pp.
Lindstrom, G., 1890. The Ascoceratidae and the Lituitidae of the Upper Silurian
Formation of Gotland. Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl., 23(12): 1888-1889.
Lindstrijm, G., 1895. On r e m a i n s of a C y u t h a s f i i s f r o m the Silurian s t r a t a of Gotland.
Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl., 21(3): 1-15.
Lindstrom, G., 1896. Beschreibung einiger obersilurischen Korallen aus der Insel
Gotland. Bihang Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl., 21 (Afd.4, no.7): 1-50.
Lindstrom, G., 1899. Remarks on the Heliolithidae. Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad.
Handl., 32(1): 1-140.
Lindstrom, M., 1963. Sedimentary folds and the development of limestone in an Early
Ordovician Sea. Sedimentology, 2: 243-292.
Linnaeus, C. (Carl Linnaei), 1745b. Olandska och Gotl‘bdska R e s a p8 Riksens
Hogloflige St‘Znders befallning f a r r a t t a d ahr 1741. Partly reprinted as:
Gotl’kdska R e s a f l r r a t t a d 1741. Natur och Kultur, Stockholm, 1957, 187 pp.
Linnaeus, C. (C. von LinnB), 1745a. Corallia baltica. Dissertatio, Univ. Upsala, 40 pp.
Linnarsson, G., 1879. Om Gotlands graptoliter. ‘cjfvers. Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad.
Forh., 1879(5): 3-11.
Lowenstam, H.A., 1948. Biostratigraphic studies of the Niagaran interreef formations
of north-eastern Illinois. Illinois State Museum Sci. P a p e r s , 4: 1-146.
Lowenstam, H.A., 1949. Niagaran reefs in Illinois and their relation to oil accumula-
tion. Rept. Illinois Geol. Surv., Investigation 145, 36 pp.
Lowenstam, H.A., 1950. Niagaran reefs of the Great Lakes area. J. Geol., 58:
430-487.
Lowenstam, H.A., 1952. Some new observations on Niagaran reefs in Illinois.
Illinois Acad. Sci. T r . , 45: 100-107.
486 REFERENCES
Lowenstam, H.A., 1957. Niagaran reefs in the Great Lakes area. In: H.S. Ladd (Editor),
T r e a t i s e on Marine Ecology and Paleoecology, 2. Paleoecology - Mem. Geol.
SOC.Am., 67(2): 215248.
Luha, A., 1930. u b e r Ergebnisse stratigraphischer Untersuchungen in Gebiete d e r
Saaremaa- (Osel-)Schichten in Eesti. Acta Commentationes Univ. Taftuensis
(Dorpatensis), A, 18(6): 1-18.
Luha, A., 1938. Muhu pangad. The cliffs of Muhu. Looduskaitse, 1: 1-8.
Luha, A., 1940. Kesselaid. Looduskaitse, 2: 1-8.
Lundquist, G. (RedaMer), 1940. Gotland. Svenska Turistfijren. Arsskrift 1940, 394 pp.
Ma, T.Y.H., 1933. On the seasonal change of growth in some Palaeozoic corals. Proc.
Imp. Acad. Japan, 9(8): 407-409.
Ma, T.Y.H., 1934. On the seasonal change of growth in a reef c o r a l , Fauzu speciosa
(Dana), and the water temperatures of the Japanese seas during the latest
geological times. P r o c . Imp. Acad. Japan, 10: 353-356.
Ma, T.Y.H., 1937. On the seasonal growth in Palaeozoic Tetracoralla and the climate
during the Devonian Period. Palaeontol. Sinica, Ser.B, 2: 1-106.
Magnusson, N.H., Lundqvist, G. och Granlund, E., 1957. Sveriges Geologi. Scandinavian
University Books, Svenska Bokfiirlaget/Norstedts, Stockholm, 557 pp.
M a i l l i e u , E., 1933. Les r6cifs siluriens de l'lle de Gotland. Bull. SOC.Belge GBol.,
43: 206208.
Manten, A.A., 1958. Een Gotlandse zwerfsteen. Grondboor Hamer, 1958(6/7): 143-147.
Manten, A.A., 1959. Heiligen en Duivels. Op den Uitkijk, 1959-b0(3): 118-121.
Manten, A . A . , 1960a. Het Cambrium van het Zweedse Oostzeegebied. Grondboor
Hamer, 196012): 29-37.
Manten, A .A., 1960b. De Ordovicische afzettingen in het Zweedse Oostzeegebied.
Grondboor Hamer, 1960(2): 41-56.
Manten, A.A., 19bOc. De groeivormen van koralen als milieu-indicatoren.
Grondboor Hamer, 1960(5): 145-165, 203.
Manten, A.A., 1960d. Een getuigenis van vroomheid uit het verleden. De Spiegel,
1960(29): 34-37.
Manten, A.A., 196la. Korallengestalth a l s Kennzeichen des Milieus. Geol. Rundschau,
51: 663-671.
Manten, A.A., 1961b. Gotland, de schone slaapster. De Kern, 31(2): 64-71.
Manten, A.A., 1962. Some Middle Silurian reefs of Gotland. Sedimentology, 1: 211-234.
Manten, A.A., 1965. Book review of Principles of Puleoecology by D.V. Ager.
Palaeogeography, Palaeoclimatol., Palaeoecol., l(2): 17d-176.
Manten, A.A., 1966a. Some problematic shallow-marine structures. Marine Geol.,
4(3): 227-232.
Manten, A.A., 1966b. Note on the formation of stylolites. Geol. Mijnbouw, 45: 264-274.
Manten, A.A., 1968. Pre- or post-induration formation of stylolite seams: a reply.
Geol. Mijnbouw, 47(2): 114-115.
Manten, A.A., 1970. Palaeoecology of Silurian crinoids of Gotland (Sweden).
Palaeogeography, Palaeoclimatol., Palaeoecol., 7: 171-184.
M a r r , J.E., 1882. On the Cambrian (Sedgw.) and Silurian rocks of Scandinavia. Quart.
J. Geol. SOC. London, 38: 313-327.
Marshall, S.M. and O r r , A.P., 1931. Sedimentation on Low Isles and i t s relation to
coral growth. Great B a r r i e r Reef Exp., Sci. Repts., Brit. Museum Nat. Hist.,
1(5): 93-133.
Martinsson, A., 1955. Studies on the ostracode family Primitiopsidae. Bull. Geol.
Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 36: 1-33. Also: Publ. Palaeontol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 4:
1-33.
Martinsson, A., 1956. Ontogeny and development of dimorphism in some Silurian
ostracodes. A study on the Mulde m a r l fauna of Gotland. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ.
Uppsala, 37: 1-42. Also: Publ. Palaeontol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 14: 1 4 2 .
Martinsson, A., 1958. The submarine morphology of the Baltic Cambro-Silurian area.
Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 28: 11-35. Also: Publ. Palaeontol. Inst. Univ.
Uppsala, 21: 11-35.
REFERENCES 487
Martinsson, A., 1960a. The origin of the crumina in beyrichiid ostracodes. Bull. Geol.
Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 39: 12 pp. Also: Publ. Palaeontol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 25:
1-12,
Martinsson, A., 1960b. Two assemblages of polychaete jaws f r o m the Silurian of
Gotland. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 39: 8 pp. Also: Publ. Palaeontol. Inst.
Univ. Uppsala, 26: 1-8.
Martinsson, A., 1962a. Ostracodes of the family Beyrichiidae from the Silurian of
Gotland. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 41: 1-369. Also: Publ. Palaeontol. Inst.
Martinsson, A., 1962b. The concealed Silurian of the Baltic area. Geol. Foren.
Martinsson, A., 1964. Phosphatic linings in bryozoan zooecia. Geol. Foren. Stockholm
Forh., 86: 404-408. Also: Publ. Palaeontol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 68: 4 0 4 4 0 8 .
Martinsson, A., 1965a. The Siluro-Devonian ostracode genus Nodibeyrichia, and
faunally associated klorfrniinrd. Geol. Foren. Stockholm Forh., 87: 109-138.
Martinsson, A., 196513. Remarks on the Silurian ostracode genus Craspedobolbina
f r o m the Baltic a r e a and Britain. Geol. Foren, Stockholm Forh., 87: 314-325.
Martinsson, A., 1965c. Nielsens Grund och Hoburgs Bank i 'Clstersjon. Geol. Foren.
Martinsson, A., 1966a. Beyrichiacean ostracodes associated with the earliest Silurian
vertebrates from Gotland. Geol. Foren. Stockholm Forh., 88: 327-339. Also:
Publ. Palaeontol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala. 68: 327-339.
Martinsson, A . , 1966b. Ampimlum, a new genus of beyrichiacean ostracodes. Geol.
Faren. Stockholm FZlrh., 88: 68-74.
Martinsson, A., 1967. The succession and correlation of ostracode faunas in the
Silurian of Gotland. Geol. Faren. Stockholm Farh., 89: 350-386.
-
Martinsson, A., 1968. The Ordovician Silurian hiatus below Gotland. Geol. Faren.
Stockholm Fdrh., SO: 561-563.
Martinsson, A., 1969. The series of the redefined Silurian System. Lethaia, 2: 153-161,
Martna, J., 1955. Studies on the Macroums and Slandrom formations, 1. Shell
fragment frequencies of the Macrourus formation and adjacent s t r a t a at Fjacka,
Grasggrd, and File Haidar. Geol. Foren. Stockholm Forh., 77: 229-256.
Maxwell, W.G.H., 1968. Atlas of the Great B a r r i e r Reef. Elsevier, Amsterdam, 242pp.
Mayer, A.G., 1914. The effects of temperature upon tropical marine animals. P a p e r s
Tortugas Lab., 6 ( l ) : 1-24.
Milliman, J.D.,1967. Carbonate sedimentation on Hogsty Reef, a Bahamian atoll.
J. Sediment. Petrol., 37(2): 658-676.
Minato, M., 1961. Ontogenic study of some Silurian c o r a l s of Gotland. Stockholm
Contrib. Geol., 8: 37-100.
Moberg, J.C., 1911. Historical-stratigraphical review of the Silurian of Sweden.
Gotland. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.C, 229: 40-57.
Moore, H.B., 1958. Marine Ecology. Wiley, New York, N.Y., 493 pp.
Motoda, S., 1940a. A study of growth r a t e in the massive reef c o r a l Goniastrea aspera
Verrill. Palao Trop. Biol. Station Studies, 2: 1-6.
Motoda, S., 1940b. The environment and the life of massive reef coral, Goniastrea
aspera Verrill, iilhabiting the reef flat in Palao. Palao Trop. Biol. Station
Studies, 2: 61-104.
Munthe, H., 1902. Stratigrafiska studier ofver Gotlands Silurlager. Geol. Foren.
Stockholm Forh., 24: 221-273. Also: Sveriges Geol. Unders'dkn., Ser.C, 192:
221-273.
Munthe, H., 1907. Om stratigrafien inom Syd-Gotlands Silur. Foredrag i Geol. Foren.
i Stockholm jemte yttranden med anledning daraf. Geol. Foren. Stockholm Forh.,
29: 130-140.
Munthe, H., 1910. On the sequence of s t r a t a within southern Gotland. Geol. Foren.
Stockholm Forh., 32(5) (Congr. guide): 139F1453.
Munthe, H., 1912. Om kalkalger och hydrozoer i Gotlands Silurlager. Geol. Foren.
Stockholm Forh., 34(5): 4 7 S 4 7 3 (summary of lecture).
488 REFERENCES
Munthe, H., 1915a. Om en nyligen slutford diamantborrning i Siluren vid Burgsvik

p& Gotland. Geol. Foren. Stockholm Farh., 371 346-349.
Munthe, H., 1915b. Oolit med kraftiga boljslagsmarken vid Klintebys p%Gotland.
Geol. F6ren. Stockholm FGrh., 37: 43&-434.
Munthe, H., 1 9 1 5 ~Stora
. Karlso topografiska och geologiska hufvuddrag. In: Stora
Karlso (Minnesskrift). Karlso Jagt- och Djurskyddsfbrenings A.B., Stockholm,
p.5.
Munthe, H., 1916. Meddelande om en detalj i Silurstratigrafien inom S'Ci:a Gotland.
Munthe, H., 1920. Strandgrottor och narstslende geologiska fenomen i Sverige.
Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.C, 303: 1-67. Also: Sveriges Geol. Undersokn.,
Arslok, 14(4): 1-67.
Munthe, H., 1921a. Sveriges raukar jamte exempel p%pseudoraukar. Sveriges Geol.
Undersokn., Ser.C, 303: 1-39. Also: Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Arsbok, 14(5):
1-39.
Munthe, H., 1921b. Berggrunden (Silursystemet). With contributions by J.E. Hede and
J.C. Moberg. In: H. Munthe, Beskrivning till kartbladet Burgvik jamte Hoburgen
och Ytterholmen. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.Aa, 152: 1 6 7 9 .
Munthe, H., 1923. Till diskussionen om Gottlands Silurstratigrafi. Geol. Foren.
Munthe, H., Hede, J.E. och Von Post, L., 1925. Gotlands geologi. Sveriges Geol.
Undersokn., Ser.C, 331: 1-130. Also: Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Arsbok,
18(1924) (3): 1-130.
Munthe, H. och Lohmander, H., 1946. U r Gotlands geologiska utvecklingshistoria.
In: B . Pettersson och K. Curry-Lindahl (Redaktorer), Natur p% Gotland.
Bokforlaget Svensk Natur, Stockholm, pp.14-30.
Murchison, R.I., 1839. The Silurian System founded on Geological Researches. London.
Murchison, R.I., 1846. On the Silurian and associated rocks in Dalecarlia, and on the
succession f r o m Lower to Upper Silurian in Smoland, 'Gland and Gothland, and
in Scania. Quart. J. Geol. SOC. London, 3: 1-46.
Nathorst, A.G., 1884. Upplysningar till geologisk afversigtskarta Efver Sverige.

Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser. Ba, 4: I-IV, 3-39 (Gotland, pp.23-24).
Nathorst, A.G.. 1886. Anmgrkningar med anledning af A. Hellands uppsats: "Svenska
geologer om indsj'derne". Geol. Faren. Stockholm Fdrh., 8: 322-345.
Newell, N.D., 1955. Depositional fabric in Permian reef limestones. J. Geol., 63:
30 1-309.
Newell, N.D., Rigby, J.K., Fischer, A.G., Whiteman, A.J., Hickox, J.E. and Bradley, J.S.,
1953. The Permian Reef Complex of the Guadelupe Mountains Region, Texas and
New Mexico - A Study in Paleoecology. Freeman, San Francisco, Calif., 236 pp.
Newell, N.D., Purdy, E.G. and Imbrie, J., 1960. Bahamian oolitic sands. J. Geol., 68:
4 81-497.
Nilsson, B., 1913. Gotland. Chart accompanying G. de Geer, 1913. Oversiktskarta over
s a d r a Sveriges landformer. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.Ba, 9.
Noreen, S.E., Holmstrom, R. och Svensson, S.A. (Redaktorer), 1959. Gotland. Allhem,
Malmo, 502 pp.
Odum, H.T., 1957. Biochemical deposition of strontium. Texas Univ., Inst. Marine
Sci., 4: 39-1!4.
'Clpik, A.A., 1934a. Uber Klitamboniten. Acta Commentationes Univ. Tartuensis
(Dorpatensis), A, 26(5): 1-239. Also: Publ. Geol. Inst. Tartu, 39: 1-239.
Upik, A.A., 1934b. Ristrtucrinus, a new Ordovician crinoid f r o m Estonia. Acta
Commentationes Univ. Tartuensis (Dorpatensis), 27(8): 3-7. Also: Publ. Geol.
Inst. Tartu, 40: 3-7.
Peres, J.M., 1965. Reflexions s u r les rapports entre l'bcologie et la pal6o6cologie

marines. Palaeogeography, Palaeoclimatol., Palaeoecol., l(1): 51-68.
Pia, J., 1926. Pflanzen als Gesteinsbildner, Borntrager, Berlin, 355 pp.
REFERENCES 48 9
Pilkey, O.H., Schnitker, D. and Pevear, D.R., 1966. Oolites on the Georgia continental
shelf edge. J. Sediment. Petrol., 36(2): 462-467.
Pinsak, A . P . and Shaver, R.H., 1964. The Silurian formations of northern Indiana.
Indiana Dept. Conserv., Geol. Surv. Bull., 32: 87 pp.
Pokornf, V., 1958. Grundzuge d e r zoologischen Mikropalaontologie, 1. Deutscher
Verlag Wiss., Berlin, 582 pp.
Prokopovich. N., 1952. The origin of stylolites. J. Sediment. Petrol., 32: 212-220.
Purdy, E.G. and Imbrie, J . , 1964. Carbonate Sediments, Great Bahama Bank. A Guide-
book for Field T r i p 2 , Geol. SOC.Am. Conv., Miami, Fla., 58 pp.
Rasmussen, H.W., 1952. A new Silurian asteroid f r o m Gotland, Sweden. Geol. Foren.
Stockholm Forh., 74: l'iL24.
Rauff, H., 1893-1894. Palaeospongiologie. Palaeontographica, 40-41.
Regngll, G., 1940. Om faunan i Planilimbata kalkstenen vid KGping p8 Oland. Kgl.
Fysiograf. Sallskap. Lund Forh., l O ( 1 ) : 1-16. Also: Medd. Lunds Geol. Mineral.
Inst., 80: 1-16.
Regnhll, G., 1942. Stratigraphical and paleontological r e m a r k s on the Lower
Ordovician of central and northern Oland. With special reference to Kopings
Klint. In: G. Regn6ll e t 1 0 al., Lunds Geologiska Faltklubb 1892-1942. Carl
Bloms Boktryckeri, Lund, pp.16%184.
Regndll, G., 1945. Non-crinoid Pelmatozoa from the Paleozoic of Sweden. A taxonomic
study. Thesis, Univ. of Lund, 255 pp. Also: Medd. Lunds Geol. Mineral. Inst.,
108: 1-255.
Regndll, G., 1948. 'Olands geologi. Oland, 1: 17-57.
Regndll, G . , 1956. Silurian echinoids f r o m Gotland. Arkiv Mineral. Geol. Kgl. Svenska
Vetenskapsakad., 2: 155-178.
Regngll, G., 1960. The Lower Palaeozoic of Scania. In: G. Rep611 and J . E . Hede,
The Lower Paleozoic of Scania. The Silurian of Gotland. Excursion guide 21st.
Intern. Geol. Congr., Copenhagen, 1960, pp.3-43.
Reuter, G., 1885. Die Beyrichien d e r obersilurischen Diluvialgeschiebe Ostpreussens.
2. Deut. Geol. Ges., 37: 621-679.
Rice, C.M., 1954. Dictionary of Geological T e r m s . Rice, Princeton, N.J., 465 pp.
Roemer, F., 1856. Bericht von einer geologisch-palaontologischen Reise nach
Schweden. Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol., 1856: 794-815.
Roemer, F., 1858. Die Versteinerungen der silurischen Diluvial-Geschiebe von
Groningen in Holland. Neues Jahrb. Mineral., 1858: 257-272.
R66musoks, A., 1960. Stratigraphy and paleogeography of the Ordovician in Esthonia.
Intern. Geol. Congr., Zlst., Copenhagen, 1960, Rept. Session, Norden, 7: 5%-69.
Roosval, J . , 1950. Den Gotl'tdske Ciceronen. Svenska Turistfareningen, Stockholm,
193 pp.
Roosval, J . , 1952. Gotlands Kyrkokonst. Generalstabens Litografiska Anstalts Farlag,
Stockholm, 115 pp.
Rosvall, S. och Pettersson, B., 1951. Gotlands OrkidBer. Alb. Bonniers Forlag,
Stockholm, 108 pp.
Rothpletz, A., 1891. Fossile Kalkalgen aus den Familien der Codiaceen und der
Corallinieen. 2. Deut. Geol. Ges., 43: 295-322.
Rothpletz, A., 1908. u b e r Algen und Hydrozoen i m Silur von Gotland und Oesel. Kgl.
Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Hand., N.F., 43(5): 1-25.
Rothpletz, A., 1913. Uber die Kalkalgen, Spongiostromen und einige andere Fossilien
aus dem Obersilur Gotlands. Sveriges Geol. Undersijkn., Ser.Ca, 10: 1-56.
Runcorn, S.K.,1966. Corals as paleontological clocks. Sci. Am., 215(4): 2 6 3 3 .
Rutten, M.G., 1956. Devonian reefs from Belgium: relations between geosynclinal
subsidence and hinterland erosion. Am. J. Sci., 254: 685-692.
Rutten, M.G., 1958. Detailuntersuchungen an Gotlhdischen Riffen. Geol. Rundschau,
47: 359-384.
Sanders, J.E. and Friedman, G.M., 1967. Origin and occurrence of limestones. In:
4 90 REFERENCES
G.V. Chilingar, H.J. Bissell and R.W. Fairbridge (Editors), Carbonate Rocks,
A. Origin, Occurrence and Classification. Elsevier, Amsterdam, pp.169-265.
Savage, T.E. and Van Tuyl, F.M., 1919. Geology and stratigraphy of the area of
Paleozoic rocks in the vicinity of Hudson and J a m e s Bays. Bull. Geol. SOC.
Am., 30: 339-378.
Save-Soderbergh, G., 1941. Remarks on "Downtonian" and related vertebrate faunas.
Geol. Foren. Stockholm F o r h . , 63: 229-244.
Schieferdecker, A.A.G. (Editor), 1959. Geological Nomenclature. Royal Geol. Mining
SOC.The Netherlands/Noorduyn, Gorinchem, 521 pp.
Schliiter, C., 1884. Uber Astylospongia gothlundica n. sp. Correspondenzbl.
Naturh. Verein Rheinlande, 41: 79-80.
Schmidt, F., 1858. Untersuchungen iiber die Silurische Formation von Esthland,
Nord-Livland und Oesel. Arch. Naturk. Liv-, Ehst- u. Kurlands, 1 Ser., 2: 1-248.
Schmidt, F., 1859. Beitrag zur Geologie d e r Insel Gotland, nebst einigen Bemerkungen
iiber die untersilurische Formation des Festlandes von Schweden und die Heimat
der norddeutschen silurischen Geschiebe. Arch. Naturk. Liv- , Ehst- u. Kurlands,
1 Ser., 2(6): 403-464.
Schmidt, F . , 1881. Revision der ostbaltischen silurischen Trilobiten nebst geognostischer
Ubersicht des ostbaltischen Silurgebiets, 1. Mbm. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. PBtersbourg,
7 S B r . , 30(1).
Schmidt, F., 1882. On the Silurian (and Cambrian) s t r a t a of the Baltic provinces of
Russia, as compared with those of Scandinavia and the Baltic Isles. Quart. J.
Geol. SOC.London, 38: 514-536.
Schmidt, F., 1890. Bemerkungen iiber die Schichtenfolge d e s Silur auf Gotland. Neues
Jahrb. Mineral. Geol., 1890(2): 249-266.
Schmidt, F., 1891. Einige Bemerkungen Uber das baltische Obersilur in Veranlassung
d e r Arbeit des Prof. W. Dames iiber die Schichtenfolge d e r Silurbildungen
Gotlands. Bull. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. PBtersbourg, Nouv., S B r . , 34(2): 119-138.
Schot, E.H. and P a r k , W.C., 1968. Note on the formation of stylolites. Discussion on
a paper by A.A. Manten. G w l . Mijnbouw, 47(2): '112-113.
Schwarzbach, M., 1949. Fossile Korallenriffe und Wegeners Drifthypothese. Natur-
wissenschaften, 36: 229-233.
Scrutton, C.T., 1965. Periodicity in Devonian coral growth. Palaeontology, 7(4):
552-558.
Seward, A.C., 1898. Fossil Plants: for Students of Botany and Geology. Cambridge
Univ. P r e s s , Cambridge, 452 pp.
Shaub, B.M., 1939. The origin of stylolites. J. Sediment. Petrol., 9: 47-61.
Shaub, B.M., 1949. Do stylolites develop before or after the hardening of the enclosing
rock? J. Sediment. Petrol., 19: 26-36.
Shaub, B.M., 1955. Origin of stylolites: a discussion. J. Sediment. Petrol., 25: 6W66.
Shinn, E.A., 1966. Coral growth r a t e , an environmental indicator. J . Paleontol., 40(2):
233-240.
Shrock, R.R., 1929. The klintar of the Upper Wabash Valley in northern Indiana.
J. Geol., 37: 1Y29.
Shrock, R.R., 1939. Wisconsin Silurian bioherms (organic reefs). Bull. Geol. SOC.Am.,
50: 529-562.
Silvester, R., 1965. Coral r e e f s , atolls and guyots. Nature, 207(4998): 681-688.
Smith, J., 1915. Upper Silurian Foraminifera of Gotland. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. London,
Ser.8, 15: 301-309.
Soderberg, B.G., 1948. Gotland. Wahlstrijm och Widstrand, Stockholm, 238 pp.
Soot-Ryen, H., 1964. Nuculoid pelecypods f r o m the Silurian of Gotland. Arkiv Mineral.
Geol. Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad., 3(28): 489-519.
Spjeldnaes, N., 1950. On some vertebrates fossils from Gotland, with some comments
on the stratigraphy. Arkiv Mineral. Geol. Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad., l(8):
211-21 8,
Spjeldnaes, N., 1951. Ontogeny of Beyrichia jonesi Boll. J. Paleontol., 25: 745-755.
Spjeldnzes, N., 1959. Silurian bentonites from Gotland, Sweden. Geol. Fijren. Stockholm
Forh., 81: 582-587.
REFERENCES 491
Spjeldnes, N., 1966. N.P. Angelin's work on fossil ostracodes. Geol. Foren. Stockholm
Forh., 88: 407-409.
Springer, F., 1920. The Crinoidea Flexibilia. Smithsonian Inst. Publ., 2501: 1-486.
Squirrell, H.C. and Tucker, E.V., 1960. The geology of the Woolhope inlier, Hereford-
shire. Quart. J. Geol. SOC.London, 116: 13SF-185.
Stephenson, T.A. and Stephenson, A., 1933. Growth and asexual reproduction in corals.
Great B a r r i e r Reef Exp., Sci. Repts., Brit, Museum Nat. Hist., 3(7): 167-205.
Stetson, H.C., 1936. Geology and paleontology of the Georges Bank Canyons. Bull.
Geol. SOC.Am., 47: 339-440.
Stockdale, P.B., 1922. Stylolites: their nature and origin. Indiana Univ. Studies, 9(55):
1-97.
Stockdale, P.B., 1943. Stylolites: primary o r secondary. J. Sediment. Petrol., 13: 3-12.
Stolley, E., 1896. Uber gesteinsbildende Algen und die Mitwirkung solcher bei d e r
Bildung d e r skandinavisch-baltischen Silurablagerungen. Naturwiss. Wochenschr.,
Berlin, 1896: 173-178.
Stolley, E., 1897. Die silurische Algenfacies und i h r e Verbreitung i m skandinavisch-
baltischen Silurgebiet. Schr. Naturwiss. Verein. Schleswig-Holstein, 11: 109-148.
Stolley, E., 1900. Geologische Mitteilungen von d e r Insel Sylt, 2. Archiv Anthropol.
Geol. Scleswig-Holsteins, 4(1): 3-49.
Taft, W.H., 1967. Modern carbonate sediments. In: G.V. Chilingar, H.J. Bissell and
R.W. Fairbridge (Editors), Carbonate Rocks, A . Origin, Occurrence and Clas-
sification. Elsevier, Amsterdam, pp.29-50.
Talent, J.A. and Philip, G.M., 1956. Bioherms and biostromes in the Middle Palaeozoic
of Victoria. Resumenes de 10s Trabajos presentados, 20 Congr. Geol. Intern.,
Mexico, p.237.
Taugourdeau, P. e t De Jekhowsky, B., 1964. Chitinozoaires siluriens de Gotland;
comparaison avec les formes sahariennes. Rev. Inst. Frang. Pktrole Ann.
Combust. Liquides, 19(7/8): 845-871.
Teichert, C., 1928. Stratigraphische und palaontologische Untersuchungen i m unteren
Gotlandium (Tamsal-Stufe) des westlichen Estland und der Insel Dago. Neues
Jahrb. Mineral. Geol., Beil.B, Geol. Palaontol., 60: 1-112.
Teichert, C., 1952. Fossile Riffe als Klimazeugen in Australien. Geol. Rundschau, 40:
33-38.
Textoris, D.A., 1966. Algal cap for a Niagaran (Silurian) carbonate mud mound of
Indiana. J. Sediment. Petrol., 36(2): 455-461.
Textoris, D.A. and Carozzi, A.V., 1964. Petrography and evolution of Niagaran
(Silurian) r e e f s , Indiana. Bull. Am. Assoc. Petrol. Geologists, 48: 397-426.
Thorell, T . and Lindstrom, G., 1885. On a Silurian scorpion f r o m Gotland. Kgl.
Svenska Vetenskapsakad. Handl., 21(11,9): 33 pp.
Thorslund, P . , 1948. Silurisk bentonit friin Gotland. Geol. Foren. Stockholm Fiirh.,
70: 245-246.
Thorslund, P., 1958. Djupborrningen p& Gotska Sand6n. Geol. Foren. Stockholm Forh.,
80: 190-197.
Thorslund, P., 1960. The Cambro-Silurian. In: N.H. Magnusson, P. Thorslund,
F. Brotzen, B. Asklund and 0. Kulling, Description to Accompany the Map of
the Pre-Quaternary Rocks of Sweden. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.Ba, 16:
6+110 (Gotland, pp.99-100).
Thorslund, P . , 1968. The Ordovician - Silurian boundary below Gotland. Geol. Foren.
Thorslund, P. and Westerglrd, A.H., 1938. Deep boring through the Cambro-Silurian
at File Haidar, Gotland. Sveriges Geol. U n d e r s o h . , Ser.C, 415: 1-48. Also:
Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Arsbok, 32(5): 1-48.
Thorsteinsson, R. and F o r t i e r , Y.O., 1953. Report of progress on the geology of
Cornwallis Island, Arctic Archipelago, Northwest T e r r i t o r i e s . Geol. Surv. Can.
Paper 5 S 2 4 : 1-25.
Tripp, K., 1933. Die Favositen Gotlands. Palaeontographica, A, 79: 75-142.
492 REFERENCES
Troedsson, G.T., 1931. Studies on Baltic fossil cephalopods, 1. On the nautiloid genus
Orthoceras. Lunds Univ. A r s s k r . , N.F., Avd.2, 27(16): 5-36. Also: Kgl.
Fysiograf. S d l s k a p . Handl., N.F., 42(16): 5-36.
Troedsson, G.T., 1932. Studies on Baltic fossil cephalopods, 2. Vertically striated o r
fluted orthoceracones in the Orthoceras Limestone. Lunds Univ. Arssko, N.F.,
Avd.2, 28(6): 5-38. Also: Kgl. Fysiograf. Sallskap. Handl., N.F., 43(6): 5-38.
Troedsson, G.T., 1936. The OrdoviciarrSilurian boundary in Europe, mainly in the
Scandinaviam-Baltic region. Intern. Geol. Congr., 16th., Washington, 1933,
Repts., pp.495-504.
Trusheim, F . , 1957. u b e r Halokinese und i h r e Bedeutung f u r die strukturelle
Entwicklung Norddeutschlands, Z. Dect. Geol. Ges., 109: 111-158.
Tullberg, S.A., 1883. u b e r die Schichtenfolge des Silurs in Schonen, nebst einem
Vergleiche mit anderen gleichaltrigen Bildungen. Z. Deut. Geol. Ges., 35:
223-269.
Twenhofel, W.H., 1916. Expedition t o the Baltic provinces of Russia and Scandinavia,
1914. P a r t 3. An interpretation of the Silurian section of Gotland. Bull. Mus.
Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll., 56: 341-354.
Twenhofel, W.H., 1927. The geology of Anticosti Island. Can. Geol. Surv. Mem., 154:
1-107.
Twenhofel, W.H., 1950. Coral and other organic reefs in geologic column. Bull. Am.
Assoc. Petrol. Geologists, 34: 18E202.
Ubaghs, G., 195Ba. Recherches s u r l e s crinoides camerata du Silurien de Gotland

(Suede). Introduction gbnerale et partie I: Morphologie e t pal6obiologie de
Barrandeocrinus sceptrum Angelin. Arkiv Zool. Kgl. Svenska Vetenskaps-
akad., Ser.2, 9(26): 515-550.
Ubaghs, G., 1956b. Recherches s u r les crinoides camerata du Silurien de Gotland
(Su8de). P a r t i e 11: Morphologie et position systbmatique de Polypeltes
granulatus Angelin. Arkiv Zool. Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad., Ser. 2, 9(27):
55 1-57 2.
Ubaghs, G., 1958. Recherches s u r l e s crinoides camerata du Silurien de Gotland
(Suede). P a r t i e Ill: Melocrinicae. Avec d e s remarques s u r l'bvolution des
Melocrinidae. Arkiv Zool. Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad., Ser.2, l l ( 1 6 ) : 25+306.
Usdowski, H.E., 1963. Der Rogenstein des norddeutschen Unteren Buntsandsteins, ein
KalkoGlith des marinen Faziesbereichs. Fortschr. Geol. Rheinland Westfalen,
10: 337-342.
Van Bemmelen, R.W., 1954. Mountain Building. Martinus Nijhoff, The Hague, 177 pp.
Van Hoepen, E.C.N., 1910. De Bouw van het Siluur van Gotland. Thesis, Technische
Hoogeschool, Delft, 161 pp.
Vaughan, T.W., 1911. The physical conditions under which Paleozoic coral r e e f s were
Bull. Geol. SOC.Am., 22: 238-252.
Vaughan, T.W., 1915a. The geologic significance of the growth r a t e of the Flridian and
Bahaman shoal-water corals. Washington Acad. Sci. J., 5: 591-600.
Vaughan, T.W., 1915b. Growth r a t e of the Floridian andBahaman shoal-water corals.
Carnegie Inst. Washington, Year Book, 14: 221-231.
Vaughan, T.W., 1919. Corals and the formation of coral reefs. Annual Rept. t o the
Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, 1917: 18+276.
Vaughan, T.W. and Wells, J.W., 1943. Revision of the suborders, families and genera
of the Scleractinia. Geol. SOC.Am., Spec. Papers, 44: I X V , 1-363.
Von Bromell, M., 1727. Lithographiae Suecanae. Acta l i t e r a r i a Sueciae, 2-3. Upsaliae
e t Stockholmiae.
Von Bubnoff, S., 1931. Zur Deutung des sudbaltischen Kluftnetzes. Geol. Rundschau,
22: 306-308.
Von Bubnoff, S., 1943. Der Sudrand Skandinaviens. Geol. Rundschau, 34: 197-208.
Von Bubnoff, S., 1952. Fennosarmatia. Geologische Analyse des europaischen Kern-
gebietes. Akademie Verlag, Berlin, 450 pp.
Von Kiesow, J., 1888. Uber Gotlandische Beyrichien. 2. Deut. Geol. Ges., 40(1): 1-16.
REFERENCES 493
Waern, B., 1948. The Silurian s t r a t a of the Kullatorp core. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ.
Upsala, 32: 43+474.
Waern, B . , 1949. Palaeontology and stratigraphy of the Cambrian and lowermost
Ordovician of the Bodahamn core. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 34: 22+250.
Waern, B., 1960. Bentonit och f j a r r konnektion. Anmarkningar med anledning av
N. Spjeldnaes' uppsats "Silurian bentonites f r o m Gotland" (Bentonite and long-
distance correlation. .Comments on N . S p j e l d n z s ' paper "Silurian bentonites
from Gotland".). Geol. Foren. Stockholm Forh., 82: 342-344.
Waern, B . , Thorslund, P. and Henningsmoen, G., 1948. Deep boring through Ordovician
and Silurian strata at Kinnekulle, Vastergotland. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Upsala,
32: 337-474.
Walmsley, V.G., 1962. The identity and a new description of Pteronite1k.z retroflexa
(Wahlenberg) f r o m the Upper Silurian of Gotland and the Welsh borders. Geol.
Foren. Stockholm Forh., 84: 351-362.
Wedekind, R., 1927. Die Zoantharia Rugosa von Gotland (bes. Nordgotland). Nebst
Bemerkungen zur Biostratigraphie des Gotlandium. Sveriges Geol. Underszkn.,
Ser.Ca, 19: 1-94.
Wedekind, R., 1932. Die biostratigraphische Gliederung des Gotlandiums von Gotland.
Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Geol. Palaontol., Beil. B, Geol. Palaontol., 68: 391-402.
Wedekind, R. und Tripp, K., 1930. Die Korallenriffe Gotlands. Ein Beitrag zur Losung
d e s Problems von der Entstehung der Barrierriffe. Centr. Mineral. Geol., B,
l(8): 295-304.
Wells, J.W., 1963. Coral growth and geochronometry. Nature, 197(4871): 949950.
Westerberg, A., 1895. En dolomitisk Gfversilurisk kalksten p% Gotland. Geol. Foren.
Westergbrd, A.H., 1922. Sveriges olenidskiffer. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.Ca,
18: 1-205.
Westergbrd, A.H., 1929. A deep boring through Middle and Lower Cambrian s t r a t a at
Borgholm, Isle of 'Cjland. Sver. Geol. Undersokn., Ser.C, 355: 1-19.
Westergbrd, A.H., 1936.Payadoxides oelandicus beds of Oland, with the account of
a diamond boring through the Cambrian at Mossberga. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn.,
Ser.C, 394: 1-66. Also: Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Arsbok, 30(1): 1-66.
Westergbrd, A.H., 1944. Borrningar genom alunskifferlagret pa Oland och i o s t e r -
gotland 1943. Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., Ser.C, 463: 1-22. Also: Sveriges Geol.
Undersokn., Arsbok, 38(5): 1-22.
Westergbrd, A.H., 1946. Agnostidea of the Middle Cambrian of Sweden. Sveriges Geol.
Undersokn., Ser.C, 477: 1-140. Also: Sveriges Geol. Undersokn., l r s b o k , 40:
1-140.
Westerggrd, A.H., 1947. Nya data rorande alunskifferlagret p%Oland. Sveriges Geol.
Undersokn., Ser.C, 483: 3-12. Also: SverigesGeol. Undersokn.,Arsbok,41(2): F l 2 .
White, E.I., 1950. The vertebrate faunas of the Lower Old Red Sandstone of the Welsh
Borders. Bull. Brit. Museum, Geol., l(3): 49.
Wiman, C., 1897a. Uber Silurische Korallenriffe in Gotland. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ.
Uppsala, 3: 311-326.
Wiman, C., 189713. Uber den Bau einiger gotlihdischen Graptoliten. Bull. Geol. Inst.
Wiman, C., 1901. Uber die Borkholmer Schicht i m Mittelbaltischen Silurgebiet. Bull.
Geol. Inst. Univ. Uppsala, 5(2): 151-222.
Wiman, C., 1933. Ein neuer Typus gotl'sindischer Korallenriffe. Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ.
Uppsala, 24: 279-286.
Winterer, E.L. and Murphy, M.A., 1960. Silurian reef complex and associated facies,
central Nevada. J. Geol., 68: 117-139.
Wolf, K.H., 1960. Simplified limestone classification. Bull. Am. Assoc. Petrol.
Geologists, 44: 1414-1416.
Wolf, K.H., Chilingar, G.V. and Beales, F.W., 1967. Elemental composition of
carbonate skeletons, minerals, and sediments. In: G.V. Chilingar, H.J. Bissell
and R.W. Fairbridge (Editors), Carbonate Rocks, B. Physical and Chemical
Aspects. Elsevier, Amsterdam, pp.23-149.
4 94 REFERENCES
Wood, A . , 1948. l'Sphaerocodium'l,a misinterpreted fossil from the Wenlock

Limestone. Proc. Geol. Assoc. London, 59: 9-22.
Woodford, A . O . , 1965. Historical Geology. Freeman, San Francisco, Calif., 512 pp.
Wright, A.D., 1965. The shell punctation of Dicoelosia biloba (Linnaeus). Geol.
F6ren. Stockholm Forh., 87: 548-556.
Yonge, C.M., 1935. Studies on the biology of Tortugas corals. Carnegie Inst.
Washington Publ., 452: 185-208.
Yonge, C.M., 1940. The biology of reef-building corals. Great B a r r i e r Reef Exp.,
Sci. Repts., Brit Museum Nat. Hist., l ( 1 3 ) : 35+391.
Ziegler, A . M . , 1965. Silurian marine communities and their environmental significance.

Nature, 207(4994): 270-272.
495
INDEX’
Aaloe, A.0.,457,477 Algae (continued)

Acenularia, 60, 71, 129, 175, 249,291, reef builders since Precambrian, 55
306,330,371,429 Algal balls, 396,410
Acenularia ananas (Linnaeus), 60,71,226, Algal limestones
261,271,306,330,345,380 formation, 41
Acenularia breviseptata Weissermel, 60, 306 Hamra-Sundre Beds, 41,73,74, 396,
Acrotreta Sandstone (Esthonia), 18 409-41 1,439,450,454
A ctinopterella, 64, 382 Tofta limestone, 41,285,309-310,
Actinostromu, 60,69,306,330 311,473
Actinostromu astroites (Rosen), 60,306 Algonkian
Adavere Stage (Esthonia), 17, 20 Gotska Sandon, 13
Adla member (Esthonia), 456,458 Allmungs (Sthga), 349
Aechmina bovina Jones, 428 Almar (Stora Karlso), 228,232,254,255,256
Aeropoma prismaticum (Lmdstrom), 426 Alpine molasse, 396
Ager, D.V.,454,477 Alskog Parish
Agterberg, F.P., 420,477 Bofrideklint, 367-368
Aiketrask (Firo), 314 3.5 km N-NE of church, 368
Aikse Bakke (Ardre), 367 hneklint, 134-135,367
Ala Parish Alstade (Frojel), 51
Hemse Beds, 350 Alum Shales (Oland), 10
Meklinta (Oland), 10 Alva Parish
Algae, 423 Eke Beds, 387
blue-green, 466,467 Alvar, 2,209
depth indicators, 3 11,439,466-467 Alveolites, 461
effect upon recrystallization,255 Alveolites fougti, see Planalveolitesfougti
green, 396 h a t a Stage (Esthonia), 17
in Klinteberg Beds, 337,338,349 Ambonychia punctata Lindstrom, 428
in limestone facies, 429,454 America, North
red, 466,467 Mississippian, 454, 463
reef builders in American Silurian, 460 Ordovician, 397
reef builders in English Wenlockian, Permian, 78,176
455,456 Silurian, 55,126,136,438,452,
reef builders in Esthonia , 19,20,457 458-462,463,464
reef builders in Gotland, 41, 57, 60, Amphineura, 424
73-74,77,78, 114, 118, 176, 180, Amphistrophia funiculata (McCoy), 63,
181,182,184,185,186,187,188- 226,33 1,428
189,210,306,311,330,380,439, Amplexograptlas vasae Zone (Scania), 11
440,472,473,474 Anastrophia deflexa (J. de C . Sowerby),63,226
English alphabetizationis used throughout this index. Consequently, the Swedish A and A
are treated as A’s, and the 8 is treated as 0.
496 INDEX
Ancylus lake, 6,208,225,241,257,281, Ardre Parish (continued)

282,286,292,312,352 Ljugarn, 6,37,42,58,179,183,187,
Andersson, G., 423,477 190, 191,200,201,202,203,212,
Anga Parish 223,377,380-384,384,386,439
Fjile, 339 Petsarveklint, 6,351,367
Angelin, N.P., 424,477 Arenigian, 25
Angopora hisingeri, see Thecia hisingeri palaeogeography, 24,25
Annelida, 423,425,427 Arkell, W.J., 191,477
in Karlsoarna, 226 Arthropoda, 74,75-76,120,423
in reef and crinoid limestones of Arachnoidea, 424
Gotland, 62,307,331,381 Crustaceae, 74,423
Annual growth rings in corals, 434 Hexapoda, 424
Anthozoa, 423 Ostracoda, 68, 76, 176, 228, 229, 278,
Heliolitida, 61-62, 71, 72, 84, 92, 226, 309,333,384,425,428
278,279,307,330,380,425,427,429 Trilobita, 67-68, 75-76, 181, 192,
Tabulata, 61, 71,72, 125, 226, 278, 227,229, 278,309,333,384,425,
306,330,380,425,427,429,455 429,460
Tetracoralla, 60-61,71, 108, 118, Arukula Stage (Esthonia), 17
226, 278,306,330,380,426,429, Asaphus expansus Limestone (Oland), 11
433 Asaphus lepidurus Limestone (Oland), 11
.
Antirhynchonella linguifera (J. de C Asaphus Limestone (Oland), 10
Sowerby), 63,226,427 Asaphus raniceps Limestone (Oland), 11
Anthraconite, 12 Asaphus Series
Anticosti Island, 55 Gotland, 31, 32,48,49
Apatobolbina simplicidorsata Martinsson, Oland, 11, 12,48
278 palaeogeography, 25,49
Apatobolbina tricuspidata Martinsson, Scania, 11
278 Vastergotland, 11
Arachnoidea, 424 Ascoceras, 67, 333, 383
Arachnophyllum, 461 Ascoceras bohemicum Barrande, 67
Arachnophyllum shale (Gotland), 33,42 Ascoceras cochleatum Lindstriim, 67
Aragonite, 75,78 Ascoceras cucumis Lindstrom, 67, 383
Archaean, 8 Ascoceras decipiens Lindstrom, 67, 383
Gotland, 29,30 Ascoceras fistula Lindstrom, 67, 333
Arctinurus, 67,309 Ascoceras gradatum Lindstrom, 67
Arctinurus ornatus (Angelin), 67, 309, Ascoceras lagena Lindstrom, 67,333
333 Ascoceras layer, 34
Ardennes (Belgium), 56 Ascoceras limestone, 180
Ardre Odekyrka, 134 Ascoceras manubrium Lindstrom, 67,383
Ardre Parish Ascoceras pupa Lindstrom, 67,383
Aikse Bakke, 367 Ascoceras reticulatum Lindstrom, 67,383
Ardre Odekyrka, 134 Ascoceras sipho Lindstrom, 67, 383
Aseri Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17, 18
Dgelhammar, 6,42, 179,190,191,194,
Ashgdlian (Swedish mainland), 25
195,200, 203, 206,209,375,377, Xske (Stora Karlso), 228, 232, 235,252
378,379,380-384,385,386, 436, Associated organisms, see Reef dwellers
437,440,444 Asteroidea, 424
Hemse Beds, 351 Asunden, 209
Kaupungsklint, 6,134,351,352,367, Atla member (Esthonia), 20
380-384
INDEX 497
Attypa, 280 Barrandeocrinus sceptrum Angelin, 62,331

Attypa imbricata, see Plectatrypa Barymetopon infantile Martinsson, 278
imbricata Bassler, R.S., 424,477
Atlypa lamellosa (Lovkn), 425 Baste Tr’dsk (Fleringe), 46
A ttypa marginalis, see Plectatrypa Bather, F.A., 56,424,477
marginalis Bed, 121
“Atrypa”phoca Salter, 63 Beds, 39
“Attypa” pusilh (Hisinger), 425 Bekker, H., 18,477
Attypa reticularis (Linnaeus), 63, 226, Belgium
232,236,240,249,307 317,331, Devonian, 56,438,460
381,425,428 Bell, A., 458,478
Attypina angelini (Lindstrom), 63,307 Bellerophon, 65, 332,429
Aulacophyllum angelini Wedekind, 426 Bellerophon gemma Lindstrom, 65,382
Aulacophyllum linnarssoni Wedekind, 426 Bellerophon taenia Lindstrom, 65, 382
Aulopora, 19,61, 85,226,306,330, 362, Berenicea consimilis (Lonsdale), 62,381,
365,380,425 427
Aulopora roemeri Foerste, 61,380,425 Bergenhayn, J.R.M.,423,424,478
Aurivillius, C.W.S., 423,477 Bersier, A. and Vernet, J.P., 396,397,478
Ausarveklint (Linde), 174,369 Betic Cordilleras (Spain), 76
Austerberg (Stora Karlso), 228, 235 Beyershamn (Uland), 10
Austerberg Limestone (Stora Karlso), 225, Beyrichia, 68,309,333
226-228,232,235-236,242,257, Beyrichia bicuspis Kiesow, 304
272,275,336 Beyrichia buchiana (Jones), 425
Australia Beyrichia clavata, see Craspedobolbina
Devonian, 55 clavata
Silurian, 55 Beyrichia halliana Martinsson, 304
Austre (Vamlingbo), 42, 179,419,420 Beyrichia hirsuta Martinsson, 278
Austria Beyrichia hystricoides Martinsson, 304
Gosau Formation, 432 Beyrichia Iauensis Kiesow, 428
Autodetus, 427 Beyrichia maccoyiana (Jones), 425
Autodetus calyptratus (Schrenk), 62,381 Beyrichia nodulosa Boll, 425
Axelsro (Vasterhejde), 4, 5, 79, 84,87,88, Beyrichia ponderosa Martinsson, 305
91,93,94,98,101,103,104,289 Beyrichia spinigera Boll, 428
Aymestrian, 33 Beyrichia steusloffi Krause, 428
Beyrichienkalk, 44
Badgley, P.C., 49, 52,477 Beyrichiidae, 428
Bahamas, 397 Billingen Age, 24,25
Ball-stones,32 Bilobites bilobus, see Dicaelosia biloba
Bd Parish Binger Limestone, 34
pseudo-tectonic phenomena, 45 Bingeria cyamoides Martinsson, 305
Slite 111 Beds, 3 15 Bingeria zygophora Martinsson, 305
Baltic Ice Sea, 241 Bingerskvarn (Visby), 309
Baltic Sea floor, 7,8,457 Bioherm
Baltic Series (Esthonia), 15,17 definition, 54
Barabacke (Horsne), 51,312,326, waistcoat-pocket form, 70,71
330-333,334,335 Biostromes
Bara Odekyrka (Horsne), 47,326,327, biostromal expansions of reefs, 118
329,330-333,334 definition, 54
Bara oolite, 327,334,335,336 in Esthonia, 457
498 INDEX
Biostromes (continued) Botvide (Lau), 388,390

in Karlsoarna, 229 Boucot, A.J., 424,478
reefs approaching biostromal appear- Bouma, A.H., 402
ance, 54,359 Brachiopoda,424
stromatoporoid limestone in Hemse guide fossils, 425
Beds, 363 in Karlsoarna, 226-227, 230, 249, 252,
in Upper Visby Beds, 279,280 253,265
in view of Hadding, 54 in marly sediments, 278,427-428,429
Bissell, H.J. and Chilingar, G.V., 396,478 in normal stratified limestones, 101,
Bjars (Vasterhejde), 3 13 103,108,109,429
Bjerges Station (Vhge), 338 persistent fossils, 425
Bjers' Hdlar (Guldrupe), 338, 348 in reef limestones, 63-64,75, 85, 120,
B l W (Tofta), 81, 87, 89, 101 181, 192, 249,252,253, 265,
Blastoidea, 461 307-308,331-332,381-382,429,
Blue Clay (Esthonia), 15 460,461
Boda (Oland), 14 in reef-surroundingsediments, 63-64,
Bijda-hamn (Oland), 10 230,307-308,331-332,381-382
Boda Limestone (Dalecarlia), 25 Brachyprion walmstedti (Lindstrom), 278
Bodarna (Lilla Karlso), 237,241,263,264, BrandAkers-udd (Gammelgarn), 375
265,266 Bringes (Oja), 412
Bofrideklint (Alskog), 367-368 Bringes (Vange), 173
Bogeklint (Boge), 6,47,51, 121, 123,209, Brissund (Vaskinde), 6, 126, 139, 145,
214,215,217,221,312,316, 168,281,291,292,293,295
320-322,330-333,446 Bronni Limestone (Scania), 11
Boge Parish Bronaderrose (Lilla Karlso), 237,266,
Bogeklint (Klinteklint), 6,47,51, 121, 267,268,269
123,209,214,215,217,221,312, Bronteus polyactin, see Scutellum polyactin
316,320-322,330-333,446 Bro Parish
Tjelders, 209,325,326 Suderbys, 3 15
Tjeldersholm,47,316,317,326, Broskogs (FAro), 3 14
330-333 Bro-trask (StBnga), 369
Mger, H., 424,478 Bvggans Fisklage (Gothem), 47,334
Bohlin, B., 12,478 Brygge (Stora Karlso), 228,229, 23 1, 232
Boll, E., 423,478 Bryozoa, 55,424
Bonde (Lau), 349 in Karlsoarna, 73,226,229,243,247,
Borg, F., 424,478 249, 250, 252, 253, 259, 261, 262,
Borgholm (Mand), 9, 10 263,265,266,269
Borings in marly sediments, 229,427
Burgwik, 392,393 persistent fossils, 425
East Baltic area, 14,19,21 reef builders in Esthonia, 20,457
File Haidar, 14,29,31,32,42,48 reef builders in Gotland, 62-63,73,77,
Oland, 9,12 85, 118, 158, 181, 182, 189, 195,
Ringe (Denmark), 25 197, 201, 205,305,307,331,381,
Vamlingbo, 392,409 387,406,407,473
Visby, 14,29,32,48 reef dwellers in American Silurian,460
Borkholmschichten(Esthonia), 16, 32 m Visby Beds, 103,278
Bornholm (Denmark), 25 Building Limestone, see Lasnarniigi Stage
Botke, J., 423,478 Bumastus, 67,227,309,333,365,384
Botryocrinus, 62,331 Bumastus sulcatus Lindstrom, 67,333,429
INDEX 499
Bungenas (Bunge), 5 1 Buttle Parish

Bunge Parish Buttle Station, 173
Bungenas, 5 1 Byrum (Oland), 10
Enenas, 3 16 Byxelkrok (tlland), 10
Grundudden, 3 16
Slite marlstone, 47,334 Calceocrinus, 62,331,381
Slite I11 Beds, 316 Calcite
Utbunge, 3 16 direct crystallization, 126
Burgen (Burs), 51,405,406,407,413, filling cavities in reef limestone, 78
417,418,421 filing joints, 49, 51
Burgsvik (tlja), 6,37,49, S1,392,393, recrystallized from aragonite, 75
399,400,402,407 structure in oolites, 396
Burgwik Beds, 392-408 Caledonian orogeny, 456
average dip of strata, 45,47 Callonema obesum Lindstrom, 278
boundary with Eke Beds, 421 Callonema scalariforme Lindstrom, 278
boundary with Hamra-Sundre Beds, Calostylis denticulatu (Kjerulf), 60,306,
409,421 426
claystone, 393,398 Calymene, 67,227,309,333,384
comparison with other stratigraphies, Calymene excavata Lindstrom, 67
35 Calymene neointermedia R. et E. Richter, 67
core drilling at Burgsvik, 392,393 Calymene spectabilis Angelin, 67,384
correlation with other areas, 42,43,44, Calymene tuberculata (Briinn), 67,309,
394 333,425
environment of formation, 407,408, Camarotoechia, 63,331
474,475 Camarotoechia borealis (Buch), 63, 227,
facies fossils, 427,428,429 232,249,269,307,331,425
joints, 49, 51, 52 Camarotoechia diodonta (Dalman), 63,
marlstone, 398 331,381,425
oolite, 46,393,394-397,398,399, Camarotoechia nucula (J. de C. Sowerby),
400,401,407,409,410,474 63,307,331,381,425
reef limestones, 58,60-67, 115, Cambrian
405-407,474,475 Baltic basin, 7,8,9,21,22,23
sandstone, 116,393,394,398-405 Bthonia, 7,14,15-16,17
stem diameter of crinoids, 449,450 Gotland, 29,30,31
stratified sediments, 60-67, 393-405 Gotska Sandon, 13, 14
thickness, 392, 393,421,471 Norway, 21
Burgsviken, 5,392 Oland, 7,9-12,14,21,48,49
Burgsvik Folgen, 35,39, 40,42 palaeogeography, 21,22,23,48
Burgsvik Sandstone reef formation, 55
in stratigraphy by Van Hoepen, 34 Swedish mainland, 7,21,49
Burgsvik Sandstone and Oolite Camerata, 452,461
in stratigraphy by Hede, 34,35,36,38 Canada
Burrows, 29,31,76,401 Silurian, 458
Burs Parish Carozzi, A.V., 458,460,461,478,491
Burgen, 51,405,406,407,413,417, Catazygafurcata (Sowerby), 20
418,421 Catenipora escharoides Lamarck, 61,278,
Eke Beds, 387 427
Hummelbosholmen, 387 "Caunapora", 440
Burtnicki Stage (Esthonia), 17 Cayeux, L., 395,396,397,478
500 INDEX
Cement factory raukar field (Slite), 321,323 Ciliophora, 76

Central Lilla Karlso reef limestone, 236, Clathrodictyon, 69
237,239,240,241,258,259-260, Clathrodictyonstriatellum (d'orbigny),
263,265,266,273,275,276 60,85,226,330
Cephalograptus cometa Zone (Gotland), Clathrodictyon variolare Rosen, 60, 306
32,42 Clathrodictyon vesiculosum Nicholson et
Cephalopoda, 67,75,85,181,227,278, Murie, 60,306
309,333,383-384,424,460 Cliffs, 4, 5, 8
Cephalopoda stratum, 33 Cliftonia lindstr6mi ulrich et Cooper, 63,
Ceramopora lindstromi Hisinger, 278,427 307,429
Ceratopyge Limestone Climmograptushaddingi Zone (Scania), 11
Gland, 11 Clint complex on Baltic Sea floor, 8
Scania, 11 Clint Level, 34
Vastergotland, 11 Clintiella bingeriana Martinsson, 305
Ceratopyge Series Clisiophyllum involutum Edwards et
Gotland, 31 Haime, 60,278,426
Oland, 11,12,48 Clorinda community, 329
palaeogeography,48 Cloud, P.E., Jr., 466,478
Scania, 11 Coated grains, 396
Vastergiitland, 11 Coelenterata, 423 (see further Corals)
Ceratopyge Shales (Oland), 11 Coenites, 62,331, 381,427,461
Chamberlin, T.C., 458,478 Coenites repens (Wahlenberg), 62,331,
Chapman, T., 423,478 381,457
Chasmops Limestone Coenites variabilis Hisinger, 62
Gland, 10 Coenostroma discoideum. see Stroma-
Vastergiitland, 11 topora discoideum
Chasmops macrourns Limestone Colonus Series
Oland, 11 Gotland, 43
Vastergotland, 11 Scania, 26,27,43
Chasmops Series Colpos insignis Moberg, 428
Gotland, 31,32 Colter, V.S., 53, 75,76, 77,78, 85, 176,
Oland, 11, 12 444,455,456,462,478
Chilidiopsispecten (Linnaeus), 63, 227, Competition between reefs, 135-138,299,
307,331,427 311,415,417
Chilingar, G.V., 396,478,493 Compound reefs, 125,139-143,288,
Chitinozoa, 423 293,297,459
Choanoceras mutabile Lindstrom, 67, 333 Conchicolites, 62,307, 331,381,427
Chonetes, 63,307, 33 1,428 Conchicolites nicholsoni Vine, 62
Chonetes cingulatus Lindstrom, 428 Conchicolites tu berculiferus Chapman, 62
Ch netes gotlandicus Hede, 63,428 Conchidium, 63,381
i
C onetes striatellus (Dalman), 63, 269,
381,428
Conchidium biloculare (Hisinger), 227,276
Conchidium conchidium (Linnaeus), 63,
Chonetoideagrayi (Davidson), 63, 331 337,381
Chonophyllum patellatum, see Ptycho- Conchidium knighti ( J . Sowerby), 63,381
phyllum patelbtum Conchidium sculpturn (Walmstedt), 63,
Chordata 227,232,236,331
Pisces, 424 Conchidiu m tenuistriatu m (Walmstedt),
Cilia, 445 63,316,331,425
INDEX 501
Conchidium tenuistriaturn Zone, 3 13 Corals (continued)

Conglomerates, 10,12,15, 18,20,26, solitary, 71,74,85,101,103,108,
172,284 109,118,154,158,185,229,253,
Cmocardium, 65,75,308,332,382, 269,279,294,300,301,430
425 Tabulata, 61,71,72,125,226,278,
Conularia laevis Lindstrom, 65,332 306,330,380,425,427,429,455
Conularidae, 461 Tetracoralla, 60-61,71,108,118,
Coquina, crinoid, see Crinoid limestones 226,278,306,330,380,426,429,
Corals, 55,423 433
annual growth rings, 434 Cornellites damesi (philippi), 428
branched, 63,64,118,119,122,158, Cornellites sowerbyi (McCoy), 428
187,201,261,262,263,302,305, Cornulites, 62,226,307,331,427
432,435,455 Cornulites scalariformis Vine, 62,331
competition with stromatoporoids, Comulites serpularius Schlotheim, 62,
229,244,245,438,439,440 331,381,425
compound, 71,72,101,103,109, Cornwallis Island, 55
111,112,339,435-438 Corynotrypa dissimilis (Vine), 427
Favositidae, 84,279,439,456 Cosmiolithus halysitoides Lindstrom, 61 ,
growth forms, 71-73,84,102,430-433 427
Halysitidae, 84,85 Cosmiolithus omatus Lindstrom, 427
Heliolitida, 61-62,71,72,84,92, Crania, 63
226,278,279,307,330,380,425, Craniops implicata (J. de C. Sowerby),
427,429 63,381,425,428
life orientation, 83,84,148,154,262, Craspedobolbinaclavata (Kolmodin), 68,
288,301,435-438,456 228,333,428
overgrown by stromatoporoids,439 Craspedobolbinainsulicola Martinsson, 228
palaeoecology, 71-73,83,84,85, Craspedobolbinajuguligera Martinsson, 278
229,263,429-438,438-440 Craspedobolbina mucronulata Martinsson,
persistent fossils, 425 305
rate of growth, 430-432,468 Oaspedobolbina percurrens Martinsson,
reef builders in American Silurian, 305
460,461 Craspedobolbinauncilifera Martinsson,
reef builders in Belgian Devonian, 438 304
reef builders in British Wenlockian, Craspedostoma, 65,333
455-456 Craspedostoma elegantulum Lindstrom,
reef builders in Esthonia, 19,457 65,332,382
reef builders in Gotland, 60-62, Craspedostomaglabmm Lindstrom, 65,
71-73,83,84,85,114,117-118, 382
122,125,129,148,151,154,158, Crassicauda Limestone
173,176,181,182,184,185-187, Oland, 11
189,195,197,302,303,306-307, Vastergijtland, 11
330,380,472,473 Crepipora lunariata Hisinger, 278,427
reef builders in Karlsoama, 71,243, Crescent-shapedreefs, 189-191,211,372,
244,245,247,249,250,252,254, 374,375,386
259,261,262,263,265,266, Crevice, see Fissure
269 Crinoidea, 424
rhythmic growth patterns, 433-434 average diameter of stem fragments,
social, see compound 448-451
502 INDEX
Crinoidea (continued) cllspate reefs, 211

in Karlsoarna, 226, 231,239, 242, Cuvillier, J. and Sacal, V., 76,479
245,247,249,250,255 Cyathocrinitespentagonalis Goldfuss, 452
in North America, 452,454,460,461, Cyathocrinus, 62,307,331
463-464 Cyathophyllum, 60,380
in reef limestones in Gotland, 59, 62, Cyathophyllum bisectum, 60, 380
74-75,85,120,182,184,185,186, Cyclonema, 65,333,382,429
187, 188,189, 192, 194,205, 307, Cyclonema adstrictum Lindstrom, 65,382
331,347,381,448,449,450,451, Cyclonema apicatum Lindstrom, 65,382
463-464 Cyclonema cancellatum Lindstrom, 65,
in reef-surrounding sediments in Gotland, 382
62,75,85, 103, 168, 182,214,221, Cyclonema carinatum (Sowerby), 65
222,231,269,290, 291,307,331, Cyclonema delicatulum Lindstrom, 278
381,446-448,449-451,452,461, Cyclonema distans Lindstrom, 65, 382
463-464 Cyclonema injlata, see Cyclotrypa infzata
palaeoecology, 114, 229,446-454, Cyclonema giganteum Lindstrom, 278
46 1,463-464 Cyclonema pervemum Lindstrom, 65,382
Crinoid limestones Cyclonema tum’tumLindstrom, 65,308
fossil content, 60-67, 165, 306-309, Cyclonema zonatum Lindstrom, 65,382
330-333,380-384 Cjxlotrypa injlata (Hisinger), 427
Hoburg “marble”, 103, 117, 144, 168, Cypricardinia, 65, 308, 332,425
246,286,411,412,413,415,451,453 Cypricardinia crispula (Lindstrom), 65
in Karlsoarna, 103, 245, 246,247,248, Cypricardinia exornata Lindstrom in museo,,
249,254,255,257,259,262,266, 65,382
269 Cyrtia exporrecta (Wahlenberg), 63, 227,
intercalated in reef limestone, 191, 329,331,428
198,199,254,255,345,449 Cyrtia trapezoidalis (Hisinger), 428
surrounding reef limestones in Gotland, Cyrtograptus lapwrthi Zone (Scania), 25
85,103,117,134,144,145, Cyrtograptus Series
157, 158, 165, 166, 168, 176, Gotland, 43
189-190,191,214-218,246,285, Scania, 25-26,43
286,290,291,293,300,304,326, Cystiphyllum, 229
339,340,348,368,387,390,405, Cystiphyllum cylindricum Lonsdale, 60,
406,411,412,413,415,446-448, 226,249,306,330,426
449,45 1,453,498 Ostiphyllum siluriense Lonsdale, 426
Crosfield, M.C.and Johnston, M.S.,455, Cystiphyllum tenue Wedekind, 426
456,478 Cystiphyllum visbyense Wedekind, 426
Cross-bedding, 26, 129, 130, 169, 170, Cystoidea, 461
176,284, 285,291, 305,340,344, Cytherellina siliqua (Jones), 425
345,347,348, 349,357,368,387,
398,399,405,406,407,411,412, Dago, see Hiiumaa
418,448 Dalecarlia
Cross joints, 49, 5 1 Ordovician, 25
Crotalocrinus, 62,45 2 Silurian, 26
Crustacea, 74,423 Dalmanella basalis, see Resserella basalis
Qenodonta sulcata (Hisinger), 429 Dalmanella canaliculata, see Levenea
Cudovo Stage (Esthonia), 17 canaliculata
Cumings, E.R.,54,458,478,479 Dalmanella elegantula, see Resserella
Current bedding, 171, 172 elegantula
INDEX 503
Dahanella visbyensis, see Resserella Depressionsunderneath reefs

visbyensis Hoburgen-type reefs, 46, 145, 1 5 4
Dalinanites imbricatulus (Angelin), 67, 155, 156, 174,288,290,295,352,
333 388,390,413,414,468
Dalmnites obhcsus (Lindstrom), 67,384 Holmhiillar-type reefs, 375
Dalmanitina Limestone Grlsoarna, 229, 232,245, 246, 248,
Scania, 11 251,252
Vastergotland, 11 Upper Visby-type reefs, 93,97,98,99,
Dalmanitina Series, 25 101,104,109,112
Gotland, 31,32 De Sitter, L.U., 203,479
Oland, 11 Detritus layer (Esthonia), 18
Ostergijtland, 11,25 De Verneuil, E., 424,479
Scania, 11 Devonian
Vastergotland, 25 Australia, 55
Dalmanitina Shales (Scania), 11 Baltic basin, 7, 8
Dalmanophyllum dalmani, see Syringaxon Belgium, 56,438,460
dalmani boundary with Silurian, 43-44,394
Dames, W.,479 Esthonia, 7, 14, 17, 20, 2 1
on reef limestones, 56 Gotland, 4 3 4 4 , 3 9 4
on Spongiae, 423 Oslo area, 14
stratigraphicalviews, 7, 33 reef formation, 55
Davidson, T. and King, W.,424,479 Sahara, 76
Davis, R.A., Jr., 395,397,479 Dicaelosia, 280
Dawsonoceras annulatum (J. Sowerby), Dicaelosia biloba (Linnaeus), 63,227, 232,
67,227,309 269,329,381,427
Dayia flags, 34,352,386,388,390,391 Dicaelosia verneuilana (Lindstrom), 63,
Dayia navicula (J. de C . Sowerby), 63,352, 307,427
381,390,427 Dicranograptus clingani Zone (Scania), 11
Days, number per year, 434 Dictyonella, 63, 331
Degerhamn (Uland), 10 Dictyonella capewelli (Davidson), 63, 307
De Jekhowsky, B., 423,491 Dictyonema, 426
Delthyris elevata Dalman, 63,227,307, Dictyonema Shales
331,381,425 Esthonia, 16, 18
Depressions in reefs, debris-filled Uland, 11,12
Hoburgen-type reefs, 145, 147-149, Didymograptus Shale (Scania), 11
161,162,299,355,437,450 Differential compression, 46, 120, 140,
Holmar-type reefs, 187, 191, 155,156,174,176,295,435
192-194,223,377,420,448,450, Dinant basin (Belgium), 438
451,453 Dinobulus davidsoni (Salter), 280,429
Stiiurnasar-typereets, 245 Dinophyllum hisingeri (Edwardset Haime), 426
Depressionsin reefs, with different fauna, Dinophyllum involutum, see Clisiophyllum
73,437 involutum
pools in Hoburgen-typereefs, 144, 149, Dinorthis rigida (Davidson), 63,381
323,367,371,437 Dinorthis rustica, see Dolerorthis rustica
pools in HolMar-type reefs, 187, @P
191,192,194-196,203,377,420, joints, 49, 51
441-442 of reef-debris pieces, 219,221-224
pools in Scurnasar-type reefs, 245 of strata in Gotland, 32,46-49,311,
334,407,421
504 INDEX
Diplocraterion parellelum Thorell, 29 Eke Beds (continued)

Diploepora gruyi (Edwards et Haime), 60, bounda& with Hemse Beds, 40,41, 43,
306,330,380 391,474
Diplograptus molestus Zone (Scania), 11 comparison with other stratigraphies,
Discontinuity 35
between Hemse and Eke Beds, 40,41, correlation with other areas, 43,391
43,391,474 environment of formation, 391-392,
between Hogklint and Slite Beds, 309, 474
310 facies fossils, 428
between Hogklint and Tofta limestones, guide fossils, 425
284,309,310 in stratigraphy by Hede, 34,35,36,38
between Tofta and Slite limestones, in view of Jux, 40
309,310 reef limestones, 58,60-67, 115, 123,
on Karlsoarna, 233,234,239,240, 387-391,448,451,453,474,475
242,273-275,276 stem diameters of crinoids, 449,450,
Discordant bedding, 398 45 1
Djupvik (Oland), 10 stratified sediments, 60-67, 156,387
Djupvik FisHage (Eksta), 275 thickness, 387,420,421,471
Djupviks Fisklage (Krliklingbo), 350 Eke Parish
Dokophyllum hogbomi Wedekind, 60,306 Eke Beds, 387
Dolerorthis rustica (J. de C. Sowerby), Ekmyr (Garde), 349
63,227,276,331,381 Eksta Parish
Dolomithation, 126,459,460 Djupvik Fisklage, 275
Downtonian Lilla Karlso, 209, 225,226-228,
Gotland, 439 44 236-241,242,243,258-272,
Great Britain, 43, 44 273-275,275--276,336,435,436,
Downward-slippingphenomena, 233, 437,473,475
276,273-275 Stora Karlso, 37,71,209,225,225-236,
Dudley (Great Britain), 456 242-258,272,273,274,275-276,
Dybowsky, W., 423,479 336,473,475
Elevation of reefs over sea floor, 216,
Echinodermata, 424 468-469
Asteroidea, 424 Elles, G.L. and Wood, E.M.R., 42,479
Crinoidea, 59,62,74-75,85, 103, Encrinurus laevis (Angel$, 67,278
114,120,168,182,184,185,186, Encrinurus obtusus (Angelin), 67
187, 188, 189, 192, 194, 205,214, Encrinurus punctatus (Wahlenberg), 67,
221,222,226,229, 231,239,242, 227,240,309,333,384,425
245,247,249,250,255,269,290, Endre Parish
291,307,331,347,381,424, Endre Backe, 217,328
446-454,460,461,463-464 Lilla Fjells, 328
Echinoidea, 424 Enenas (Bunge), 3 16
Pelmatozoa non Crinoidea, 424 England
Echinosphaeritenkalkstein(Esthonia), 16 Ludlowian, 43,44
Echinosphaerites Limestone (Oland), 11 Wenlockian, 75,76,77,78,439,
Eisenack, A., 423,424,479 455-456,463
Eke Beds, 387-392 Entelophyllum fasciculatum Wedekind,
average dip of strata, 47 60,330,380
boundary with Burgsvik Beds, 421 Entelophyllum roemen Wedekind, 226
INDEX 505
Entomis migrans Barrande, 428 Buomphalopterus alatus (Wahlenberg), 65,

Enviken (Hamra), 412,420 227,308,333,425
E'ophacops, 67 Euomphalus walmstedti Lindstrom, 65,
Eophacops rnusheni (Salter), 67 382
Eophyton Sandstone (Esthonia), 15 Eurypterus, 20
Eospirifer, 63,332 Euiypterus fischeri Eichwald, 350
Eospirifer globosus (Salter), 63,332 Euspirocrinus spiralis Angelin, 62, 307,
Eospirifergrandis (Hedstrom), 63, 332 331
Eospirifer interlineatus (Hedstrom, non Exporrecta Conglomerate, see Oligomys
J. de C. Sowerby), 63,276,332,381 exporrecta Conglomerate
Eospirifer interlineatus (J. de C . Sowerby), Exposures, nature of, 6
227
Eospirifer marklini De Verneuil, 278 Facies fossils,424,426-429
Eospirifer plicatellus (Linnaeus), 427 Faecal pellets, 76, 176
Eospirifer radiants (J. de C. Sowerby), Filgelhammar (Ardre)
63,227,307,427 depressions within the reefs, 194, 195
Eospirifer schmidti (Lindstrom), 63,381 environment of reef formation, 42,386
Eospirifer sinuosus (Hedstrom), 63, 332 fissures in reef limestone, 200,203
Eospirifer sulcatus (Hisinger), 63 fossil content, 380-384
Eosteinhomensis conodont zone, 44 general description, 375,377,378,
Epeirogenetic movements, 1,27,47,48,49, 379,385
52, 190,276, 285,311, 336,349, orientation of coral colonies, 436,437
386,421,472,473,474,475 origin of raukar field, 6, 179,209
Erosion reef debris, 206
of Halla limestone during Silurian, 334, shape and size of reefs, 190,191,375
335,336 stromatoporoid growth forms, 440,
of reef limestone during Palaeozoic, 444
132, 134, 177,310,314,353,359, Fiihraeus, L.E., 44,479
468 Faludden (Oja), 179, 190,411,412,420
Erosion channels, 401,402 Fanterna (Stora Karlso), 228, 231,233,
Eskelhem Parish 234,235,243; 252,253
VaUve, 313 Fanterna reef limestone (Stora Karlso),
Esthonia 231,235,236, 238, 243,252,253,
Cambrian, 7,14,15-16,17 254,256
crystalline basement, 15 Fanterna reef type, 68, 71, 72, 231, 236,
Devonian, 7,14,17,20,21 243,253,473
Ordovician, 7,9,16-19., 25,456 Fardenia pecten, see Chilidiopsis pecten
Silurian, 7,9,17,19-21,25,27, Fardhem Parish
456-458,463 Sandarve Kulle, 372,380-384
Etelhems limestone, 180 Farjestaden (Oland), 1o
Etelhem Parish Filro Limestone, 34
cross-roads Etelhem-Garde-Lye,168, Filro Parish, 37, 283,310
368,380-384 Aiketrask, 3 14
Hagby-trask,369,370, 380-384 Broskogs, 3 14
Ovre Lundsmyr, 173 Holmudden Lighthouse, 3 16
Sigvalde-trask,369,380-384 joints, 51
Eucalyptocrinus granulatus Lewis, 62,307 Kalbjerga, 314
Euchiysalis lineolata Lindstrom, 65,382 Lansa, 314
506 INDEX
F%roParish fcontinued) Flank reefs,

Lauterhorn, 284 GotIand, 93
Lautur, 314 Lilla Karlso, 236,239,240, 243,259,
Ryssnas, 3 16 260,263-272,273,274,275,276
Faults, 45,46, 133,274,285,290,301 North America, 459
Faunal zonation within a reef, 244,245, Stora Karlso, 233,243,274,275
438,459-461 Fleringe Parish
Favosites, 61, 84,92, 108, 129,232, 236, Baste Trask, 46
249,254, 260,266, 269, 271, 272, Hau, 46
306,330,365,380,427,434,439, Molnars, 3 15
457,460 Nors, 314
Favosites asper d'orbigny, 61, 306, 330 Tralgar, 315
Favosites clausus Lindstrom, 84 Vialms, 310,314,315
Favosites forbesi Edwards et Haime, 84 Vialms-udd, 51
Favosites gothlandicus Lamarck, 61, 72, Fletcheria, 46 1
84,226,306,330,380,425,434 Flexibilia, 461
Favosites mirandus Sok., 457 Flexure, 140
Favositidae, 84, 279,439,456 Flinta, 392,393,394
Fenestella, 62, 85,226,269,307,331, Fluctuations in reef growth, 134-135, 148
381,427 Riigel, E., 438,440,479
Fenestella mobergi Hennig, 62,307,331 Flute marks, 402
Fenestella reticulara (Hisinger), 62, 307, Fole Parish, 217
331,381,425 Lillfole, 328
Fennoscandian crystalline basement, 7,9, Slite I11 Beds, 315, 316
27 Stora Hellvigs, 328
Fenton, C.L., 458,479 Stora Ryftes, 315
Fideniis (Fide), 49, 51 Follingbo Limestone, 34
Fide Parish Follingbo Marl,34
Burgsvik Beds, 392,401 Follingbo Parish
Burgsviken, 5,392 Norrbys, 217
Fidenas, 49,5 1 Stora Vede, 217,328,436
fossil offshore bars, 400 Folmanella duplicata (Lindstrom in museo),
Rommunds, 395 429
Tubode Fisklage, 392 Fora (Oland), 10
File (Othem), 315 Foraminifera, 423
File Haidar (Othem), 6, 14,29,31,32, Forse (Stenkumla), 313
42,48,312,316,325 Fortier, Y.O.,458,491
Finnish Gulf, 9 Frasnian
Fischer, A.G., 434,479 Belgium, 438
Fissures Esthonia, 17,21
in Hoburgen-typereefs, 152-1 53,328 Freeman, T., 395,397,479
in Holrddler-type reefs, 188, Fridhem (Vasterhejde), 79,92, 105, 106,
200-205,420 107
in Rojsuhajd reef, 250 Frojel Fisklage (Frojel), 275
Fistulipora, 63,73,307,331, 381 Frojelklint (Frojel), 6, 347,348
Fistulipora membranacea Hisinger, 427 Frojel Parish
Fistulipora mutabilis Hisinger, 427 Alstiide, 51
Fjde (Anga), 339 Frojel Fisklage, 275
INDEX 507
Frojel Parish (continued) Geological map, added as enclosure to

Frojelklint, 6,347,348 this book
Mulde-Stenstu, 51 Geomorphology of Gotland, 3,4-5,45,
Mulde Tegelbruk, 335 3 12,349,407
Pristklint, 348 Gigantostraca, 350
F r o m , E., 27,479 Gigas Limestone, see Megistaspis gigas
Furillen (Rute), 47 Limestone
Fusion of reefs, 128, 138-139,303,340 Girvanella, 74,410
Girvanella limestone, 73,409
Galgberg (Visby), 6, 51,77, 123, 126, Girvanella problematica Stolley, 73
282,285,286,291,292,306-309 Gisslauseklint (Othem), 152,312,325
Galgberg Extension (Visby), 292,435, Gissocrinus, 62,307,331,381
436,437 Givetian (Esthonia), 17,21
Gdlungs (Vaskinde), 3 15 Gjaus-hill (Stora Karlso), 228, 236
Gammelgam Parish Glassia compressa (J. de C . Sowerby), 427
BrMdikers-udd, 375 Glassia obovata (J. de C . Sowerby), 227,
Grynge-udd Fisklage, 375 427
Herrgkdsklint, 363,365 Glauconite, 388,391
Klinteklint, 6, 123, 163, 164, 217, Glauconite Limestone, see Toila Stage
218,223,352,365-367 Glauconite Sandstone (Esthonia), 16, 18
Sjausterhammar,5 1, 180, 189, 190, Glauconitkalkstein(Esthonia), 16
191, 206,207,209,375,376,377, Glauconitsand (Esthonia), 16
443 Glossoceras gracile Barrande, 67,384
Gannberg (Ostergarn), 6, 134, 351, Glossograptus hincksi Zone (Scania), 11
352-357,359,380-384,386, Gnisvards Fisklage (Tofta), 279
436,445 Goldberg, E.D., 396,480
Gannberg variety of Hoburgen reef type, Gomphoceras, 67,384
69,357,362,363 Coniastrea aspera Verrill, 43 1
Ganne (Ostergarn), 352 Goniophora cymbaeformis (J. de C .
Ganwiken, 5 Sowerby), 65,382
Ganthem Parish Goniophyllum pyramidale (Hisinger), 60,
Klinteberg Beds, 337 278,426
Garde Parish Gorbatschev, R., 14,480
Ekmyr, 349 Goreau, T., 43 1,480
Guffrideklint, 352,368,386 Gosau Formation (Austria), 432
Sigsarve, 51 Gothem Parish
Gardrungs (Stenkumla), 328,330-333 Bryggans Fisklage, 47,334
Gardslosa (Oland), 10 pseudo-tectonicphenomena, 45
Gastropoda, 424 Gothograptus nassa (Holm), 426
in Karlsoarna, 227,229 Gotland, general
in marly sediments, 229,278,429 Cambrian, 29,30,31
persistent fossils, 425 climate, 2-3
in reef limestones, 65-66,75,85, correlation with Karlsoama, 275-276,
120,181,308,332-333,382-383, 336
460 Devonian, 4 3 4 4 , 3 9 4
in reef-surroundingsediments, 65-66, geographicallocation, 2
75,192,308,332-333,382-383 geomorphology, 3,4-5,45,312,349,
Gauja Stage (Esthonia), 17 407
Gdovi Stage (Esthonia), 15, 17 history, 3
508 INDEX
Gotland, general (continued) Guldrupe Parish

history of study of geology, 32-42, Bjers' W a r , 338, 348
55-56 Hallbjens, 173
military territories, 3 Hiistings, 173
Ordovician, 30,31,32 Klinteberg Beds, 337,339
present vegetation, 2-3 Krasse, 173
Gotska Sandon, 12-14 Vasterby, 173
Algonkian, 13 Gulf of Bothnia
Cambrian, 13,14 Ordovician, 25
Ordovician, 13, 14 Gulf of St. Lawrence, 55
Silurian, 13 Gunnor (Lau), 387,388,389
Graptolithina, 424,426 Gustavsvik, 132
Grasghrd (Oland), 10 Gutevtigen (Visby), 285
Graunsklint (Llirbro), 6,312,325 Gypidula gaZeata (Dalman),64,227,332,
Graute (Hejnum), 316 381,428
Great Bahama Bank, 397
Great Barrier Reef, 75, 120 Hablingbo Parish
Great Britain Petesviken, 433,434
Jurassic, 191 Stora Vasstade, 351
Silurian, 43,44,55,75,76,77,78,329, Hadding, A., 480
439,455-456,463 on Algae, 73,74,181,423
Great Lakes area (North America), on calcite formation, 126
126,136,452,458-459 on classification of stromatoporoid
Grey Limestone (Vastergtitland), 11 growth forms, 69-71
Grogarnsberg (Ostergarn), 6,351,352, on Oland, 12
359,361-362,380-384,386 on raukar formation, 208
Grogarnshuvud (Ostergarn), 351,362 on recrystallization of fossils, 125
Gronhogen (tiland), 10 on reef limestones in southern Gotland,
Gross, W., 424,480 41
Grotlingbo-holm(Grotlingbo), 410 on reef-limestonestructures, 77,120-121
Grotlingbo Parish on reef shape, 127,128
Burgsvik Beds, 392 on reefs in Karlsoarna, 258
Eke Beds, 387 on ripple marks, 399
Gansviken, 5 on sedimentationpatterns, 171, 172,
Grotlingbo-holm,410 462 '
Grotlingbo-udd, 37,41,395,409,410, stratigraphical views, 38, 56,304,309,

411,413 310
Hamra-Sundre Beds, 410 on supposed water depths, 281,349,
smiss, 49, 51 422,462
Uddvide, 400,410 on Upper Visby Beds, 81,279,281
Grotlingbo-udd(Grotlingbo), 37,41,395, usage of stratigraphical terms, 39
409,410,411,413 usage of term biostrome, 54
Grumpevik (Vamlingbo), 410 HiiftingskIint (Hangvar), 127,142
Grundudden (Bunge), 3 16 Hagby-trask (Etelhem), 369,370,380-384
Grynge-udd Fisklage (Gammelgarn), 375 Halla limestone, 275,334-335,472
Guelph Limestone (Canada), 33 Halla Limestone
GuffrideMint (Garde), 352,368,386 not mentioned by Maillieux, 56
Guide fossils, 304,305,424-426 stratigraphicalview by Hadding, 38,56
INDEX 509
Halla Limestone (continued) Habsites catenularius (hnaeus), 61, 72,

in stratigraphy by Hede, 34,35,36,38 84,226,229,244,247,306,330,
Halla-Mulde Beds, 334-336,472 380
Bara oolite, 334,335,336 Halysites catenulatus (Martini), 61, 72, 84,
comparison with other stratigraphies, 301,306,324,330
35 Halysite? escharoides, see Catenipora
correlation with Karlsijarna, 275,276 escharoides
correlation with other areas, 42,43,458 Halysitidae, 84,85
dip of boundary with Slite Beds, 47,48 Hammaren (Nar), 391
environment of formation, 48,276,336, HammarshagahUlar (Hamra), 5,37,42,
473 179,189,208,209,418
guide fossils, 425,426, 305 Hamnudden (Gotska Sandon), 14
Halla limestone, 275,334-335,472 Hamra limestone, 117,409-41 1,472
joints, 51,52 Hamra Limestone
movement of basin floor, 48 in stratigraphy by Hede, 34,35,36,38
Mulde marlstone, 34,35,36, 38, 335, Hamra Parish
428,472 Enviken, 412,420
reef limestones, 58,60-67, 115, Hammarshgahallar, 5,37,42,179,189,
335-336,475 208,209,418
stem diameters of crinoids, 449,450 Hamra-Sundre Beds, 409,4 12
stratified sediments, 60-67,334-335 Wmung, 4 12
thickness, 334,335,471 Skret, 420
Hallbjiins (Sundre), 5,412 Stockviken, 45,412
Hallbjens (Guldrupe), 173 VZindburgsviken, 51
Hallbro Slott (Vasterhejde), 314 Hamra-Sundre Beds, 408-422,472
W e , T.G.,423,480 algal limestone, 41,73, 74, 396,409-411,
Hall Marl, 34 439,450,454
Hall Parish average dip of strata, 47
Halls Fisklage, 119,302,305,311 boundaq with Bur@ Beds, 409,421
Hallshuk, 37, 58, 79,82, 278,279, 281 comparison with other stratigraphies, 35
Hallshukklint, 122,156,157,158,166, correlation with other areas, 43,44,394
167,169,170,284,303,306-309 environment of formation, 127,164,
Hjannklint, 71, 119, 122, 126, 155, 210-212,216,421-422,474
159,161,281,284,302,305 Hamra limestone, 117,409-41 1,472
Norsklint, 303 joints, 51
Hallsarve (Lau), 388 reef limestones, 41, 58, 60-67, 115,
Halls Fisklage (Hall), 119,302,305,311 117,123,126,127,131,135-138,
Hallshuk(Hall), 37,58,79,82,278,279, 144,145,147,148,149-152, 154,
281 161-162,164,165,174,175,
Hallshukklint (Hall), 122,156,157,158, 179-205,208-212,216,218,407,
166, 167, 169, 170,284,303, 410,413-420,439,441-443,444,
306-309 449,450,451,475
Wudden (Uland), 10 reef-talus deposits, 161-163,175
Halshage Trask (Oja), 45 stem diameters of crinoids, 449,450,
Halysites, 61, 71, 72, 84, 92,98, 129, 45 1
231,244,245,247,266,269,272, stratified sediments, 60-67, 174, 175,
279,280,301,303,304,330,340, 209,409-413
342,344,345,365,371,427,434, Sundre limestone, 179,411-413,472
457,460 thickness, 409,421,471
510 INDEX
Hamra-Sundre Beds (continued) Heliolites parvistella Ferd. Roemer, 6 1,

in view of Jux, 41 72,307,330,380,427,432,455
Hangvar Parish Heliolites repletus Lindstrom, 427
Hiiftingsklint, 127,142 Heliolites spongodes Lindstrorn, 6 1,427
Ihrevik, 37,70,172,279,302 Heliolitida
Kappelshamn, 171,172,310 in Karlsoarna, 226
Sigsarvebodar, 124, 159, 160, 302, in marly sediments, 427
303,304,306-309 in normal stratified limestones, 429
Hapsal (Esthonia), 7 persistent fossils, 425
Harjuan Series (Esthonia), 16, 17, 19 in reef and crinoid limestones of
Hassli (Stora Karlso), 228,232,235 Gotland, 61-62,71,72,84,307
Hastings (Guldrupe), 173 330,380
Hiistkliv (Stora Karlsii), 228,235 in Visby Beds, 84,92,278,279
Hau (Fleringe), 46 Hellvi Parish
Havdhem Parish Hydeviken, 324-325
Eke Beds, 387 Sankt Olofsholm, 47, 51
KvinngArde, 351 Smojen, 171
Hawkings Oilfield, 203 Smoje-udd, 47
Hede, J.E., 1,32,34,35,36,38,40,41, Ytterholmen, 3 17
42,43,46,47,56,82, 132, 135, 179, Helopora, 85
180,208,253,276,277,282, 284, Helopora lindstrilmi Ulrich, 63, 307,427
304,309,310,312,313,314,315, Hemichordata
316,317,335,336,337,338,339, Graptolithina, 424
350,351,363,369,394,411,424, Hemse Beds, 349-386
426,471,481,488 average dip of strata, 47
Hedstroemophyllum, 60,306, 380 boundary with Eke Beds, 40,41,
Hedstroemophyllum articulatum 43,391,474
Wedekind, 60,306,330,426 comparison with other stratigraphies, 35
Hedstrom, H., 29,32, 34, 35, 56,423, correlation with other areas, 42,43,458,
424,48 1,482 463
Hejde Parish environment of formation, 210-212,
Klinteberg Beds, 173,337,348 386,474,475
Mulde marlstone, 335 erosion of reef surface during Silurian,
Hejdeby Parish, 51,334 132,134,353,359
Hejnum Parish guide fossils, 305,425,426
Graute, 316 joints, 51
Hejnum m a r , 152,312,325,436 layered coral colony, 434
Slite III Beds, 315 marlstone, 277,351-352,390,428
Heliholm (Vamlingbo), 37,42,179,189, orientation of coral colonies, 436
190,196,200,202,203,208,209, reef limestones, 42,58,60-67, 115,
420,444 123,128,131,134-135,152,
Heliolites, 61,72,84, 108,226,229, 163-164,168,174,179, 180,183,
236,249, 272,307,330,365,380, 189,190, 191, 194, 195,200,202,
43 1,434,460 203,206-208,231, 212,216,217,
Heliolites barrandei Penecke, 61,330, 219,221,223,224,352-386,436,
380,427 439,445,450,458,463,468,474,
Heliolites interstinctus (Linnaeus), 61,72, 475
226,232,307,330,380,425,427 stem diameters of crinoids, 449,450,451
INDEX 511
Hemse Beds (continued) Hoburgen (Sundre) (continued)

stratified sediments, 60-67, 168, 174, competition between reefs, 135-138
349-352,380-384,388,390,391 coral reef limestone, 71
thickness, 350,351,352,471 crinoid limestone, 117, 144, 168, 246,
Hemse Group 286,411,412,413,415,451,453
in stratigraphy by Hede, 34,35,36, 38 debris-faed depressions in reefs, 145,
Hemse marlstone, 277,351-352,390,428 161,162
Hemse Parish demolition, 274
Mdlvalds, 35 1 depressions in Burgsvik sandstone, 46
Hemsiella maccoyana (Jones), 68, 384 413,414
Hemtrask (Lojsta), 369 general description, 115- 117
Hennig, A., 424,482 geomorphology, 5,40
Henson, F.R.S., 255,482 Hamra-Sundre Beds, 117, 174, 175,
Hermes, J.J., 76,482 408,409,411,412,418
Herpetocrinus, 62,33 1 height of reefs above sea floor, 216
Herrg&rdsMint(Gammelgarn), 363,365 Hoburgsgubben, 209
Herrvik (Ostergarn), 123,219, 351,352, Hoburgsgubbens Matsal, 135,136
361,362-363,372,386,444 Hoburgsgubbens Skatkammare, 417
Hesperorthis davidsoni (DeVerneuil), 278 Hoburgsgubbens Trappa, 149, 151,
Hesselby L;ide (Stora Karld), 228, 257 174,175
Hessland, I., 12,482 interreef basins, 144, 145
Hexactinellida, 76 interruptiQn in reef growth, 131,418
Hexapoda, 424 joints in' Burgsvik sandstone, 49, 5 1
Hiatus, stratigraphic Lithberg Grotta (Cave), 138, 151, 162
between Hemse and Eke Beds, 40,41, origin, 6
43,391,474 reef debris, 138,144,218
between Hijgkljnt and Slite Beds, 309, reef frame, 126
310 reef limestones, 41, 123, 127, 135, 136,
between Hogklint and Tofta limestones, 138,154,164,165,174,175,
284,309,310 413-417,418,421,422
between Tofta and Slite limestones, 309, roots of reef formation, 149-152
310 Storburg, 71, 116, 117, 138, 149-152,
Hien (Stora Karlso), 228 162, 168, 174, 175, 218,274,413,
Hiiumaa (Esthonia), 7, 8,9, 19,25 414,415,416,422
Hilliste member (Esthonia), 19,456 stromatoporoid sizes, 443
Hinde, G.J., 423,482 supposed tectonical origin of cliff
History of geology of Gotland coast, 45
chronological distribution of publica- talus mantle of reefs, 161-163, 164, 218
tions, 56 type locality of reef type, 58, 115-1 17
reefs, 55-56 Hoburgen reef
stratigraphy, 32-42 in stratigraphy by Wedekind and Tripp,
Hjannklint (Hall), 71,119, 122,126,155, 36
159,161,281,284,302,305 Hoburgen reef type, 57-58,473
Hoburg Bank, 44 competition between reefs, 135-138,
Hoburgen (Sundre), 37,115,116 299,311,415,417
boundary between reef and stratified compound reefs, 125,139-143,288,293,
limestone, 174 297
Burgsvik Beds, 116,392,394,402, crinoids, 60-67, 120,448,449,450,451,
403,404,405,407 452,453
512 INDEX
Hoburgen reef type (continued) Hoburgen reef type (continued)

debris, 128, 134, 135, 138, 144, 145, 146, 303,321,323,324, 326,327,341,
147, 148, 149, 151, 152, 153, 159, 348,361,388,389,390
161-164,165-172, 176,214-216, stratigraphical distribution, 58
217-218,221,223,290,291,294, structure of reef limestone, 120-126
295,299,304,305,322,323,325, stylolites, 153, 154
326,327,328,347,349,352,353, talus mantle, 128,134-135,151,
357,359,361,362,363,365,366, 153,161-164,175,218,294,
367,368,369,370,371,415 295,303,366
debris-fded depressions, 145,147-149, type locality, 58
161,162,299,355,437,450 Hoburg “marble”, 103, 11 7 444, 168,
environment of formation, 127, 128, 246,286,411,412,413,415,
129,134,138,161,164,176-177, 451,453
211-212,310-311,329,334,336, Hodgson, R.A., 49,482
349,386,391-392,407,421-422, Hogby (Oland), 10
473-474,475 Hogklint (Vasterhejde), 5, 6, 51, 74, 76,
fissures, 152-153,328 90,98,99, 103,115, 123, 126,
fluctuations in reef growth, 134-135, 281,285-286,306-309,311,
148 433
fusion of reefs, 128,138-139,303,340 HijgMint Beds, 281-311
Gannberg variety, 69,357,-362,363 average dip of strata, 47
geographical distribution, 58 boundary with Slite Beds, 48,309-310,
height of reefs over sea floor, 216, 311,314
468-469 boundary with Visby Beds, 79,90,113,
interreef basins, 136,144-145,146-147 280,282,289,290,291,293,296,
interruptions in reef growth, 124, 297,301,311
130-132,133,134,302,362,415, comparison with other stratigraphies, 35
416,418 correlation with other areas, 42,43,457
main characteristics, 57-58 environment of formation, 114,127,176,
matrix, 57,118-120,121,122,123, 310-311,473
125-126,131,149,151,174, erosion of reef surface during Silurian,
132,134
302,320,322,371,387
organic composition, 59,60-67,68, facies fossils, 426,428,430
geomorphology, 5
69,70,71, 72,73,74,75, 117-120,
guide fossils, 304,305
124-126,148,164,174,306-309,
joints, 51
330-333,380-384,443,467 orientation of coral colonies, 435-437
pods, 144,149,323,367,971,437 reef limestones, 5, 54, 58, 71, 73, 74,
reef frame, 126 76,77,90, 114, 115, 118, 119, 123,
roots of reef formation, 138, 124, 125,126, 127, 128, 131, 132,
149-152,303 133,137,139-143,146-147,152,
size and shape, 126-130,322,323, 155,156,157,158,159-161,166,
327,364,365,366,413 167,284,285-303,304,305,
stratified sediments, lateral to, 139, 306-309,436,439,450,468,475
165-176,327,355,361,366, stem diameters of crinoids, 449,450
446-448 stratified sediments, 79, 166, 167, 169,
stratified sediments, underneath, 170,172,282-285,306-309
133,149,150,151, 153-161,174, thickness, 283,284,310,471
286,287,288,289,291,294, 295, Tofta limestone, 34,35,36,38,41,282,
INDEX 5 13
Hogklint Beds (continued) HoLmh;illar reef type (contiwed)

284,285,304-305,309-310,311, interruptions in reef growth, 196-199,
456,472,473 442
Hogklint Limestone main characteristics, 57-58
in stratigaphy by Hede, 34,35,36,38 matrix, 57,180-183,184,185,186,
mgklint Limestone and Marl 187-188,196,197, 199,440-442
in stratigraphy by Van Hoepen, 34 organic composition, 59,60-67,68,70,
Holland, C.H., 39,482 71,74,75,180-187,188-189, 194,
Holland, H.D., 396,482 195,197,198,223,255, 380-384,
Holm, G., 33,'56,424,482 439,44042,443,467
Holmhdlar (Vamlingbo), 179,418 pools, 187, 191, 192, 194-196,203,
depressionswithin reef surface, 377,420,441-442
191-196 sediments underneath, 206-207
fissures in reef limestone, 200-205 size and shape, 189-191,372,373,374,
interruptions in reef growth, 196-1 99 375,386
in view of Jux, 42 stratigraphical distribution, 58
map, added as loose enclosure to this surrounding crinoid limestones, 60-67,
book 189-190,191,372,380-384,448
matrix of the reef, 184, 185, 186, type locality, 58
187,188,196 Holmia kjerulfi Stage (Uland), 11
method of study of reef composition, Holmia Series
181-183 Gotland, 29,31
origin of raukar field, 5,6,208,209 Uland, 9, 11
reef buildersJ81, 183, 184, 187, 189, Holmsen, P., 25,482
439,441442,444 Holmudden Lighthouse (Ffiro), 3 16
size and shape of reef, 190 Holopea applanata Lindstrom, 65,308
type locality of reef type, 58,180 Holopea nux Lindstrom,,65,383
Holmhiillar reef type, 58,179, 180,474 Holopella minuta Lindstrom, .65, 383
crinoids, 62,181,184,185,186,187, Holophragma calceoloides (Lindstrom), 60,
188, 189, 192, 194,205,381,448, 277,426
449,450,451 ,452,453,454 Hommunds (Horsne), 327
debris, 188,189,190,192-194,199, Hoppe, K.H., 457,483
203,205,206-208,210,216-217, Hormotoma, 65,333
219,221,223,224,372,374,375, Hornsudde (Uland), 10
377 Horse-shoe-shapedreefs, 189- 191,459
debris-filled depressions, 187,191, H o m e Parish
192-194,223,377,420, 448,450, Barabacke, 51,312,326,330-333,
451,453 334,335
environment of formation, 210-21 2, Bara Udekyrka, 47,326,327,329,
386,474 330-333,334
fissures, 188, 200-205,420 Hommunds, 327
geographical distribution, 58 Simunde, 327,328,329
Hamra-Sundre Beds, 58, 179-205, Simunde Station, 327,328,328
208-212,418-420 Howellella elegans (Muir-Wood), 64, 227,
Hemse Beds, 58,179,180, 183,189, 269,307,425
190,191, 194, 195,200,202, 203, Hulterstad (Uland), 10
206-208,211,212, 216,221,224, Hummelbosholmen (Burs), 387
372-379,380-383,384-386 Hunneberg Age, 24
Hydeviken (Hellvi), 324-325
5 14 INDEX
Hydrozoa, see Stromatoporoids Jonker, H.G., 33,483

Hypanthocrinus, 62,307 Jotnian, 14,49
Hystrichosphaeridae, 423 Jungfrun (Stenkyrka), 209,299
Jurassic (Great Britain), 191
Idavere Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17,18 Jutland, 21
Ihrevik (Hangvar), 37,70,172,279, Juuru Stage (Esthonia), 17, 19
302 Juves (Sundre), 413
Ilionia layer, 34 Jux, U., 1,35,36,38,39, 40, 41,43,
Ilioniaprisca (Hisinger), 21,65,314, 56,483
337,350,351,382,429
Ilionia prisca - Megalomus Zone, 310, 314 Kaarma Stage (Esthonia), 17,20,457
Ilionia prisca Zone, 337,338, 339,349 Kalbjerga (Fgro), 3 14
llionia - Spongiostroma layer, 34 Kaljo, D. and Sarv, L., 44,483
Illinois (U.S.A.), 55,438,459 Kalmar, 7,8,9,49
Imbrie, J., 397,489 Kalmarsont, 7,9
Inadunata, 452,461 Kappelshamn (Hangvar), 171, 172,3 10
Index fossils, see Guide fossils Kappelshamnsviken, 6
Indiana (U.S.A.), 55,454,459,460 Karelian Nose, 9
Ingels, J.J.C., 458,483 Karlskrona, 7
Interreef basins, 136,144-145,146-147 Karlsoama, see Stora Karlso and LiUa
Interruptions in reef growth Karla
Hoburgen reef type, 124,130-132,133, Karlso Jakt- Wh
134,302,362,415,416,418 DjurskyddsforeningensA.B., 225
Holmhiillar reef type, 196-199,442 Karlsoklubben, 225
Inverted-cone-shapedreefs, 54, 89-92, Karlso marble”, 103,245, 248
95,127,133 Katrinelund (Visby), 3 14
Iraq, 255 Kattegat, 21, 26, 27
Irase member (Esthonia), 21 Kaufmann, R.,49,51,483
Irregular reefs, 128,456 Kaugatuma Stage (Esthonia), 17,21,458
IN Subseries (Esthonia), 16,17,18 Kiiupru (Stora Karlso), 228,229, 232, 233
Isorthis lov&zi(Lindstrom), 427 234,275
Itfersche Schichten (Esthonia), 16 Kaupungskkt (Ardre), 6, 134,351,352,
367,380-384
Jaagarahu limestone (EsthoniaX457 Keila Stage (Esthonia), 16,17,18
Jaagarahu Stage (Esthonia), 17,20,456, Keila-Vasalemma Stage (Esthonia), 16
457 Kesselaid dolomite (Esthonia), 457
Jaani Stage (Esthonia), 17,20,457 Kesselaid member (Esthonia), 20
Jaanusson, V., 12,18,423,483 Ketophyllum, 226,229
Jamtland Ketophyllum annulatum (Wedekind), 426
Ordovician, 25 Ketophyllum elegantulum Wedekind, 426
Silurian, 27 Ketophyllum hoegbomi (Wedekind),426
Janedi (Wla Karla), 237,259,263, Ketophyllum subturbinatum (Edwards et
265 Haime), 426
Johnston, M.S., 455,456,478 Ketophyllum Zone (Stora Karlso), 229
JOhvi Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17, 18 Ketteldrd (Vamlingbo), 41,49,417,419
J6hvischichten (Esthonia), 16 Kettelviken (Vamlingbo), 51,410,411,413
Joints, 49-52,152 Kiaer, J., 35,483
Jones, F.W., 432,483 Killingholmen (Vamlingbo), 41,399,413
Jones, T.R.,423,483 King, W.,424,479
INDEX 515
Kinner (Lummelunda), 281,296 Kneippbyn (Vasterhejde), 79, 81,90,91,

Kinnertorpklint (Lummelunda), 126, 92, 94, 95, 96, 97, 108-112, 289,
292,293,294,295,296 290,311,431,436,439
Klehammars-udd (Sundre), 409 Knoll-shaped reefs, 86-87,91,95,97,
Klev (Stora Karld), 228,229 105
Klev (Sundre), 6,413 Kodonophyllum truncatum (Linnaeus),
Klint, see Clint 60,306
Klinteberg (Klinte), 6,41, 51, 128, 129, Kogula member (Esthonia), 21
130,131,132,133,337,338-344, Kohila Subseries (Esthonia), 16, 17
345 Kolmodin, L., 423,483
Klinteberg Beds, 337-349 Koping (Uland), 10
average dip of strata, 47 KoppM, 392,409
comparison with other stratigraphies,35 Korpklint (Snackgrdsbaden, Visby), 6,
correlation with Karlsoarna, 275, 276 290
correlation with other areas, 42,43 Korpklint (Tofta), 79,81,93,97
environment of formation, 129, 173, Korpklint (Vasterhejde), 79,97, 288
276,349,473-474,475 Korpklint Limestone, 34
facies fossils, 428 Kose member (Esthonia), 20
guide fossils, 425 Kotlini Stage (Esthonia), 15, 17
joints, 51 Kozlowskiellina deltidialis (Hedstrom), 64
reef limestones, 58, 60-67, 115, 123, m g b o Marl, 34
128-130,131,132,133,173, KrWngbo Parish
338-348,443,448,449,450,453, Djupviks Fisklage, 350
474,475 Hemse Beds, 350,351
stem diameters of crinoids, 449,450 Klinteberg Beds, 339
stratified sediments, 60-67, 173, 336 Lilla Hammars, 350
337 Millklint, 351,363
thickness, 337,471 Tjbgvide-lucka, 364,365
Klinteberg Folgen, 35,39, 40 Torsburgen, 6, 123,351,363-365
Kliteberg Limestone Krasse (Guldrupe), 173
in stratigraphy by Hede, 34,35,36,38 Krause, A., 423,484
Klinteberg reef Kroksteats Brye (Oja), 399
in stratigraphy by Wedekind and Kuenen, FkH., 210,468,484
Tripp, 36 Kiihn, O., 432,484
Klintebys (Klinte), 334,338,345,347 Kuiper, W.N.,423,484
Klintehamn, 37,225 Kukersche Schichten (Esthonia), 16
Klinteklint (Boge), see Bogeklint Kukruse-Idavere Stage (Esthonia), 16
Klinteklint (Gammelgarn), 6, 123, 163, Kukruse Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17, 18
164,217,218,223,352,365-367 Kullsberg Limestone (Dalecarlia), 25
Klinte Limestone, 34 Kummerow, E., 423,484
Klinte Marl, 34 Kunda Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17, 18,31
Klinte Parish Kuppen (Ostergarn), 219,363,373
Klinteberg, 6,41, 51, 128,129, 130, Kuren ( m a Karla), 237,265
131,132,133,337,338-344,345 Kurna Subseries (Esthonia), 16, 17
Klintebys, 334,338,345,347 Kvarna (Vamlingbo), 411
Klintehamn, 37,225 Kvarnbacken (Slite), 316,322,323-324,
pseudo-tectonic phenomena, 45 330-333
Tyrvalds W e , 348 Kvie Grane (Vate), 335,336
516 INDEX
IkinngArde (Havdhem), 351 Lau Parish (continued)

Kyphophyllum, 60 Lau Backar, 387,388,390,391
Kyphophyllum conicum Wedekind, 426 Lau Holmar, 387
Kyrkberget (Ostergarn), 355,357,359 Lauviken, 5,349
supposed dislocations, 46
Labechia, 69,118, 128,443 Lauphargi (Stora Karl@), 228,232,248,
Labechia conferta (Lonsdale), 60,69,306, 249
380,432 Lauphargi reef limestone (Stora Karlso),
Ladd, H.S., 462,484 232,242,248-250
Laguna Madre (Texas, U.S.A.), 397 Lauterhom (FAro), 284
Lajkarn (Lilla Karl&), 237 Lautur ( F h o ) , 314
Lake cuds (Esthonia), 19 Lauviken, 5,349
Lamellibranchiata, 424 Lawson, J.D., 39,43,484
in Burgsvik sandstone, 400,401 Lecompte, M.,438,460,484
in marly sediments, 229,279,428-429 Leetse Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17, 18
in normal stratified limestones, 429 Leintwardine Beds (Great Britain), 44
persistent fossils, 425 Leningrad (U.S.S.R.), 14
in reef limestones, 65,75, 120, 181, Lens-shaped reefs, 87-89,95, 128,
192,308,332,382,460 456,458
in reef-surroundingsediments, 65, Leperditia, 68,228,240,279,309,
308,332,382 315
Laminarite Clay (Esthonia), 15 Leperditia baltica (Hisinger), 68, 333,425,
Laminarite Sandstones(Esthonia), 15 428
k a b e r g (Site), 6, 144,148,209,319, Leperditia gigantea Roemer, 68, 384
320,322-323,436 Leperditia grandis Schrenck,428
Lansa (FAro), 314 Leperditia gregaria Kiesow, 68,384
Grbro Parish Leperditia hisingeri Schmidt, 278,425
Graunsklint, 6,312,325 Leperditia phaseolus (Hisinger), 68,384,
Patvalds, 312,325,436 425
pseudo-tectonic phenomena, 46 Leptaena, 280,283
Storugns, 46, 51,315 Leptaena laevigata (J. de C . Sowerby), 427
UppMrds, 3 15 Leptaena lov&i De Verneuil, 64,308,427
L a s n d g i Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17, 18 Leptaena rhomboidalis (Wdckens), 64,227,232,
Latilaminae of stromatoporoids, 70,7 1, 236,240,308,332,381,425,428
122,183,285,445-446 Leptaenoidea silurica Hedstrom, 64,382
Latvia Leptobolbina hypnodes Martinsson, 278
Silurian, 19 Leptostrophia filosa (J. de C. Sowerby), 64
Lau Backar (Lau), 387,388,390,391 Leptostrophia impressa (Lindstrom), 64,382
Laudon, L.R.,452,484 Lerberg (Stora Karla), 228,229
Lauensis Marl, 34 Lerberg Marlstone (Stora Karlso), 71,225,
Lau H o l m (Lau), 387 226-228,229,244,246,250,251,
Lauks (Lokrume), 3 15 256,257,272,275
Lau Parish, 43 Levede Parish
Bonde, 349 Pejnarve, 349
Botvide, 388,390 Levenea canaliculata (Lindstrom), 64,382
Eke Beds, 387,391 Lickershamn (Stenkyrka), 82, 281, 299,
Ekmyr, 349 300,301,306-309,311,436
Gunnor, 387,388,389 Lickershamn raukar field (Stenkyrka), 123,
Hallsarve, 388 209,281,299
INDEX 517
Liksarve (Tofta), 47,313,328,330-333, Lithistida, 76

334 Lithothamnium, 410
Liljevallia gotlandica Hedstrom, 278 Littorina sea, 6, 135, 136, 208, 209,
Lilla Fjells (Endre), 328 225, 281, 282,312, 352,413,
Lilla Hammars (Kraklingbo), 350 420
Lilla Karlsii, 225 Ljugarn (Ardre), 37, 58, 179
correlation with Gotland, 275-276 corals, 187
correlation with Stora Karlso, 272, 275 environment of reef formation, 42,
orientation of coral colonies, 435,436, 386
437 fissures in reef limestone, 200,201,
raukar, 209,237, 258,259, 261,262, 202,203
270,271,274 fossil content, 380-384
reef limestones, 237,258-272,273, general description, 377,384,386
275,463,473,475 origin of raukar field, 6, 179,212
stratified sediments, 226-228, shape and size of reef, 190, 191, 377,
236-241,242,243,259,260,261, 386
271,272,273-275,276,336 stromatoporoids, 183, 223,439
Lilla Karlso Limestone ( m a Karlso), Ilandoverian
226-228,236,238,240-241, Dalecarlia, 26
259,260,271,272,275,276,336 Esthonia, 7,17,19-20,456
Lillfole (Fole), 328 Gotland, 7,32,33,42,43
Limbata Limestone, see Megistaspis Jamtland, 26
limbata Limestone Ostergotland, 26
Limonite, 310 palaeogeography, 26
LindblDm, A. and Svahnstrom, G., 3,484 Scania, 25
Lindeklint (Linde), 6,51, 123,217,223, Vastergotfand, 26
349,370,371,380-384,386 Lojsta Parish
Linde-Lau marl Hemtrask, 369
in stratigraphy by Wedekind and M6rt-trask, 369
Tripp, 36 pseudo-tectonic phenomena, 45
Linde Parish Tonnklint, 369,380-384
Ausarve, 174,369 Lokrume Parish
Lindeklint, 6, 51, 123,217, 223, 349, Lauks, 3 15
370,371,380-384,386 Slite I1 Beds, 314
Lindstrom, G., 32,33, 34,42, 276, Vidmyr, 315
423,424,429,485,491 Lomonosqovi Stage (Esthonia), 15, 17
Lindstrom, M., 12,485 Longitudinaljoints, 52
LindstrGmia dalmani, see Syringaxon Lontova Stage (Esthonia), 15, 17
dalmani Lophospira bicincta (Hall), 65,333
Lindstromia siluriensis, see Syringaxon Ltit (tliand), io
siluriense Lotsbacken (Slite), see Kvarnbacken
Lingula lew'si J. de C . Sowerby, 64,382, Lowenstam, H.A., 54, 55, 136,438,
427 452,458,459,460,461,462,
Lingula striata J. de C . Sowerby, 427 463, 485,486
Linnarsson, G., 424,485 Loxonema, 429
LinnQ Ask (Stora Karla), 250 Loxonema fasciatum Lindstrom, 65, 383
Linoporella punctata (DeVerneuil), 64, Loxonema strangulatum Lindstrom, 65,
308,332,429 383
Lissatrypa, 64,382
518 INDEX
Ludibundus Limestone Macrourus Limestone, see Chasmops

Uland, 11 macrourus Limestone
Vhtergotland, 11 Madison County (Ill. ,
U.S.A.), 459
Ludlow Bone-Bed, 43,44,394 Magnesium-calciumratio, 396, 397
Ludlowian Maillieux, E., 56,486
Dalecarlia, 26 Maldes (Nar), 391
Esthonia, 7,17,20-21,456 Manicina areolata, 43 1
Gotland, 7,33,42,43,44,391,394 Manten,A.A., 3, 12, 56, 72, 86, 100,
Great Britain, 43,44 110, 111,137, 140, 142, 143,
Ustergotland, 27 153, 154, 158, 166, 167, 169,
Scania, 26 172,290,293,297,299,399,
Vastergtitland, 27 402,403,404,405,423,424,
Luha, A., 457,486 426,43 1,432,433,434,447,
Lumanda (Esthonia), 21 449,454,486
Lummelunda Parish Marbardshue (Sundre), 409,413
Kinner, 281,296 Marble reef limestone, 180
Kinnertorpklint, 126, 292, 293, 294, Marine reef (North America), 459,461
295,296 Marmorberg (Stora Karla), 228,242,
Lummelunds-bruk, 3 10,313 245-248,250
Lundsklint, 82, 113, 125, 133, 140, Marmorberg reef limestone (Stora
141-142,143,146-147,296, Karlso), 230,242,245-248,251
297 Marshall, S.M. and Orr, A.P., 430,486
Luseklint, 51, 113, 142,434 Martille (Stenkumla), 313,314
Nyhamn Fisklage, 113,281,296 Martinsson, A., 483,486,487
Lummelunds-bruk(Lummelunda), 3 10, on Baltic sea floor, 8,457
313 on bryozoans, 424
Lundquist, G., 3,486 on geochrondogy of reef formation, 42
Lundsklint (Lummelunda), 82,113, on Hemse marlstone, 352
125,133,140,141-142,143, on Hoburg Bank, 44
146-147,296,297 on ostracodes, 423,425,428
Lundsmyr (Etelhem), 173 on Silurian System, 44
Luseklint (Lummelunda), 51, 113, 142, on subdivision of Slite Beds, 305,313
434 on Tentaculata, 424
Lyckholmschichten (Esthonia), 16,32 on Tofta limestone, 304; 305
Lye Parish on vertebrates, 424
Rotarve, 349 on worms, 423
Lykophyllum hisingeri Wedekind, 60,306, usage of stratigraphical terms, 39
330 Masur Limestone
Lykophyllum tabulatum Wedekind, 60, Uland, 11
278 Vhtergotland, 11
Lykophyllum torquatum Wedekind, 60 Matrix of reefs, 77-78
Fanterna reef type, 253,266
Ma, T.Y.H., 433,486 Hoburgen reef type, 57, 118- 120,
Maardu member (Esthonia), 18 121,122,123,125-126,131,
Maasi member (Esthonia), 20 149, 151, 174,302,320,322,
Machrochilina bulimina Lindstrom, 65, 371,387
383 HolnMlar reef type, 57,180-183,
Machrochilina cancellata Lindstrom, 65, 184,185,186,187-188,196,
383 197,199,440-442
INDEX 519
Matrix of reefs (continued) Mollusca (continued)

Stiiurnasar reef type, 244,245,247, Gastropoda, 65-66, 75,85,120, 181,
249,261 192,227,229,278,308,332-333,
Upper Visby type, 57,80, 83, 85, 382-383,424,425,429,460
87,92,93,94,97,99,106, 112 Lamellibranchiata,65,75,120,181,
Maxwell, W.G.H., 75,120,211,262, 192,229,279,308,332,382,400,
487 401,424,425,428-429,460
Mayer, AS., 466,487 Pteropoda, 65,75,332,424
Megalaspis, see Megistaspis Molnars (Fleringe), 315
Megalaspis Limestone, 16 (see also Toila Moluccas, 468,469
Stage) Mliniste (Esthonia), 21
“Megalomus”, 65, 314,316,332,429 Monograptus bohemicus (Biyrande), 426
Megalomus banks, 33 Monograptus chimaera (Barrande), 426
“Mega1omus”gotlandicus Lindstrom, Monograptus dubius (Suess), 426
65, 134,350,367,368,375, Monograptus flemingi (Salter), 426
382 Monograptus nilssoni (Barrande), 426
Megalomuslayer, 34 Monograptus nilssoni Zone, 42
Megistaspis gigas Limestone Monograptus scanicus Zone, 42,391
Gotland, 31,32 Monograptus spiralis (Geinitz), 426
Gotska Sandon, 14 Monograptus spiralis Zone, 25
Uland, 10, 11 Monograptus tumescens Zone, 391
Megistaspis limbata Limestone Monograptus uniformis Zone, 394
Gotland, 31 Monograptus varians Wood, 426
Uland, 10,ll Moore, H.B., 210,466,468,469,487
Megistaspis Limestone (Esthonia), 16, 18 MBrbylAnga (Uland), 10
Megistaspis planilimbata Limestone MGrt-trask (Lojsta), 369
Gotland, 31 Mossberga (Uland), 10
Uland, 10, 11 Motoda, S., 430,487
Merbabu volcano, 203 Mud cracks, 403,407
Meristina obtusa (J. Sowerby), 64, 227, Muhu (Esthonia), 20,456
332 Mulde Marl
Mesotrypa suprasilurica Hisinger, 278,427 in stratigraphy by Van Hoepen, 34
Milleporites madreporiformis Wahlenberg, Mulde marlstone, 335,428,472
61,380 Mulde Marlstone
Millklint (Kraklingbo), 351,363 stratigraphical view by Hadding, 38
Millklint limestone, 351,363, 364, 365 in stratigraphy by Hede, 34, 35, 36, 38
Millsnabb (Stora Karlso), 228, 232 Mulde-Stenstu (Frojel), 5 1
Minato, M., 423,487 Mulde Tegelbruk (Frtijel), 335
Mississippian (North America), 454 Mullvalds (Hemse), 35 1
Mitrobeyrichia clavata, see Oaspedobolbina Munthe, H., 32,33,34,35,41,43,45,46,
clavata 47, 56, 180,209,277,334,375,390,
Mitrobeyrichia insulicola, see 394,395,398,399,400,409,410,
Oaspedobolbina insulicola 411,412,413,487,488
Mjolhatte Triisk (Uja), 45,46 Murchison, R.I., 7,32,36,43, 56,394,
Molasse (Alps), 396 455,488
Mollusca, 74,75,120,424 Murchisonia attenuata (Hisinger), 65,383
Amphineura, 424 Murchisonia cancellata Lindstrom, 65,383
Cephalopoda, 67,75,85,181,227, Murchisonia cochleata Lindstrom, 66, 383
278,309,333,383-384,424,460
520 INDEX
Murchisonia compressa Lindstrom, 66,3 83 Norderslatt reef limestone (Lilla Karlso),

Murchisonia crispa Lindstrom, 66, 383 237,258,259,261-262,272,273,
Murchisonia deflexa Lindstrom, 66,383 275
Murchisonia imbricata Lindstrom, 66,333, Norder Vagnhus (Lilla Karlso), 237,238,
383 239,241,259,265
Murchisonia paradoxa Lindstrijm, 66, 383 Noreen, S.E., 3,488
Murphy, M.A., 55,493 Norrbys (Follingbo), 217
Mustvee (Esthonia), 19 Norrgirde (Tofta), 313
Myren (Lilla Karlsij), 237,262,266 Norrlanda Parish
Myren (Stora Karlso), 228, 247,248,262 Klinteberg Beds, 337
Mytilarca acuta Lindstrom in museo, Nors (Fleringe), 314
65,332 NDrsklint (Hall), 303
North America
Nabala Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17, 19,32 Mississippian, 454,463
Nabbens Fisklage (Nar), 387 Ordovician, 397
Narke, 26, 27 Permian, 78,176
Nar Parish Silurian, 55,126,136,438,452,
Eke Beds, 387,391 458-462,463,464
Hammaren, 391 Norway
Maldes, 391 Cambrian, 21
Nabbens Fisklage, 387 Devonian, 14
Narsholm, 405,406,407 Silurian, 25,27
Nyudden, 387,390 Noviportia simpliciuscula Martinsson, 278
Osterviken, 387 Nucleospira pisum (J. de C . Sowerby), 64,
Wrsholm (Nar), 405,406,407 227,382,427
Narva Stage (Esthonia), 17 Nucula anglica (d’orbigny), 429
Nas Parish Nyhamn Fisklage (Lumrnelunda), 113,
Burgsviken, 5,392 281,296
Eke Beds, 387 Nyrevsudde (Tofta), 6,58,79,81,
Nasudden, 387 83.-84,87,88
Nathorst, A.G., 45,488 Nyudden (Nar), 387,390
Negro heads, 194,210
Nemagraptus gracilis Zone (Scania), 11 Oandu member (Esthonia), 18
Neobeyrichia, 68,384 Oandu Subseries (Estho&a), 16,17
Neobeyrichia buchiana (Jones), 68 Obolus, 18
Neobeyrichia nodulosa (Boll), 68, 384 Obulus Conglomerate (Esthonia), 18
Nevada (U.S.A.), 55 Obulus Sandstone (Esthonia), 16,18
Newell, N.D., 78,176,396,397, Odekyrka, 327
488 Odum, H.T., 396,488
New England (N. Dak.,U.S.A.), 210 Oelandicus Shales (Oland), 10 (see
Niagaran (North America), 438,452, further Paradoxides oelandicus Stage)
458-462,463 Oesel, see Saaremaa
Nisse Limestone, 34 Offshores bars, 397,399-400,407
Norderhamn (Stora Karlso), 228 Ohesaar (Esthonia), 21
Norderhamnsberg (Stora Karlso), 228, Ohesaar Stage (Esthonia), 17, 19,21,458
232,246,247 Oja Parish, 49,51
Norderslatt ( L i a Karlso), 237,258 Bringes, 412
Norderslatt (Stora Karlso), 228,232, 250 Burgsvik, 6,37,49, 51,392,393,
INDEX 521
t)ja Parish (continued) Orbiculoidea rugata (J. de C . Sowerby),

399,400,402,407 227,427
Burgsviken, 5,392 Ordovician
Burgwik oolite, 395 Baltic basin, 7 , 8
Faludden, 179,190,411,412,420 Qalecarlia, 25
Halshage Trask, 45 Esthonia, 7,9,16-19,25,456
Hamra-Sundre Beds, 409 Gotland, 30,31,32
joints in Wrgnik sandstone, 49 Gotska Sandon, 13,14
Kroksteats Brye, 399 Jamtland, 25
Mjolhatte Trask, 45,46 North America, 397
Rorviks Trask, 45 Uland, 7, l O , l l , 12,25,48,49
Sibbenarve,412 Ostergotland, 25
Stockviken, 45,412 palaeogeography, 24,25,48,49
Oland reef formation, 55
Cambrian, 7,9-12,14,21,48,49 Scania, 11
geological map, 10 Viistergotland, 25
Ordovician, 7, 10, 11, 12,25,48,49 Oriostoma acutum Lindstrijm, 66,333
vegetation, 3 Oriostoma alatum Lindstrom, 66,308
Olandian (Esthonia), 17,18 Oriostoma angulatum (Wahlenberg),
Olenus Series 66,308,333
Gotland, 31,48 Oriostoma contrarium Lindstrom,
Oland, 11,12,48 66,308
palaeogeography,48 Oriostoma coronatum Lindstrom,
Scania, 11 66,383
Vastergtjtland, 11 “Oriostoma” nitidissimum Lindstrom,
Oligomys exporrecta (innarsson), 12 66,383
Oligomys exporrecta Conglomerate ( O hid), Orr, A.P., 430,486
12 Orsa Sandstone (Dalecarlia), 26
Omphyma, 60,279,306,330 Orthis bouchardi, see Ptychopleurella
Omphyma subturbinata, 229 bouchardi
Omphyma turbinata, 229 Orthis davidsoni, sea ffesperorthis
Ontika Subseries (Esthonia), 16,17,18 davidsoni
Onychochilus cochleatum Lindstrom, Orthis punctata, see Linoporella
66,383 punctata
Onychochilus reticulatum Lindstrom, “Orthis” tubulata Lindstrom, 64,
66,383 382
Oolites, 465 Orthoceras, 67,227,309,333,384
Burgsvik Beds, 46,393,394-397, Orthoceras Limestone
398,399,400,401,407,409, Oland, 10
410,474 scania, 11
ma-Mulde Beds, 334,335,336 Orthocems Series, see Asaphus Series
Ophidioceras, 67,333 Orthoceratids, 192
Ophidioceras reticulatum Angelin, 67, Orthothetes adnata Hedstrom, 64
333,384 Oscillation ripples, 399,407
Ophidioceras rota Lindstrom, 67,384 Oslo area
Opik, A.A., 17,18,488 Devonian, 14
Orbiculoidea, 64,332,382 Silurian, 25,27
Orbiculoidea pilidium (Lindstrom), 64 bterby (Visby), 313
522 INDEX
Ostergarn Marl, 34 Pachypora lamellicornis, see Thamnopora

Ostergarn Parish, 37, 5 1 lamellicornis
Gannberg, 6, 134, 351, Pakerordi Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17, 18
352-357,359,380-384,386, Palaeacmaea solarium Lindstrom, 66,383
436,445 Palaeocyclus porpita, see Porpites porpita
Ganne, 352 Palaeoenvironments
Grogarnsberg, 6,351,352,359, based upon interpretations, 58
361-362,380-384,386 Palaeogeography
Grogarnshuvud, 351,362 Cambrian, 21,22,23,48
Hemse Beds, 350,351,386 Ordovician, 24,25,48,49
Hermik, 123,219,351,352,361, Silurian, 25-27
362-363,372,386,444 Paleoporella Limestone
Kuppen, 219,363,373 Gotska Sandon, 14
Kyrkberget, 355, 357, 359 Oland, 11
pseudo-tectonic phenomena, 45 Pangamagi member (Esthonia), 20
Sandviken, 180, 183, 190,212, Paradoxides forchhammeri Stage (Gland),
372, 374 11, 12,48
Snabben, 58, 180, 183, 190, 191, Paradoxides oelandicus Stage
207, 208, i l l , 212, 216,219, 221, Gotland, 29,31
223,-224,572,373, 380-384,386 Oland, 9-10,11,29
Sysne-udd, 190, 191, 207, 208, 216, Paradoxides paradoxissirnus Stage (Oland),
219,221,223, 224,373,374, 10, 11,48
380-384,386 Paradoxides Series
Ostergotland Gotland, 31
Ordovician, 25 Oland, 9-1 2
Silurian, 26,27 palaeogeography, 48
Ostersjo Limestone (Oland), 11 Paradoxissirnus Sandstone (Uland), 10
Osterviken (Nar), 387 (see further Paradoxides
Ostracoda, 68, 76, 176, 228, 229, paradoxissimus Stage)
278,309,333,384,425,428 Parishes, 3
Othem Parish Parmorthis visbyensis, see Resserella
File, 3 15 visby ensis
File Haidar, 6, 14,29,31,32,42, Piirnu Stage (Esthonia), 17
48,312,316,325 Paskallavik, 7
GislauseMint,152,312,325 Patch reefs, 126, 128, 138-139, 155,
Slite 111 Beds, 315, 316 177,302,303,352,353
Slite marlstone, 47, 334 Patvalds (Erbro), 312,325,436
SpSlingsklint, 118, 209, 3 12,325, Paviken (Vastergam), 313
330-333,439 Pejnarve (Levede), 349
see also Slite Pellet-like bodies, 429
Ottenby (Oland), 10 Pellets, faecal, 76, 176
Oved-Ramsisa Series Pelmatozoa, 424
Gotland, 43,44 Pentamems borealis Eichwald, 19
Scania, 26,43 Pentarnems estonus Eichwald, 20
Ovre Lundsmyr, 173 Pentamerus gotlandicus Lebedev, 64,
227, 231; 232,233, 237,238, 240,
Paadla (Esthonia), 21 249,261,272,275,316,332,427
Paadla Stage (Esthonia), 17,20-21, Pentarnems gotlandicus breccia
456,458 Lilla Karlso, 238,239-240,241,266,273
INDEX 523
Pentamerus gotlandicus breccia (continued) Planalveolites fougti (Edwards et Haime),

Stora Karlso, 233,234 61,278,306,330,432
Pentamerus gotlandicus Limestone ( m a Planilimbata Limestone, see Megistaspis
Karlso), 226-228,236,237-239,240, plan ilimbata Limestone
242,243,259,261,272,273,275 Plasmopora, 62, 72, 84,330
Pentamerus limestone (Esthonia), 19 Plasmopora calyculata Lindstrom, 61,427
Pentamerus linguiferus, see Bawandella Plasmopora foroensis Lindstrom, 61,330
linguifera Plasmopora heliolitoides Lindstrom, 61, 380
Pentamerus oblongus Sowerby, 20 Plasmopora petalliformis (Lonsdale), 61,
Pentamerus sphaera Lindstrom, 427 226,330,427
Permian Plasmopora rosa Lindstrom, 6 1,380
North America, 78,176 Plasmopora nrdis Lindstrom, 61,330,
Pernau (Esthonia), 7 380
Persistent fossils,424-425 Plasmopora scita Edwards et Haime, 61,
Persniis (Uland), 10 226,427
Petesviken (Hablingbo), 433,434 Plasmopora suprema Lindstrom, 61, 380
btesvik-Hablingbo fauna, 33,34 Platform for reef formation, 250,251,253,
Petesvik Marl, 34 260,261,269,270
Petsarveklint (Ardre), 6,351,367 Platyceras comutum Hisinger, 66, 75, 120,
Petterson, B., 3,489 145,227,308,333,383,425
Phacites Limestone, 34 Platyceras cyathinum Lindstrom, 66,333
Phaenopora IindstrOmi Ulrich, 63,307,427 Platyceras disciforme Lindstrom, 66
Phaulactis angusta (Lonsdale), 60,278,426 Platyceras enorme Lindstrom, 66,333
Phaulactis iyegulare (Wedekind), 426 Platyceras spiratum (Sowerby), 66, 227,383
Phaulactis tabulatus (Wedekind), 426 Platystrophia, 64,308,332,429
Philip, G.M., 55,491 Platystrophia biforata (Schlotheim), 64,332
Pholidophyllum hedskami Wedekind, 60 Platyurus Limestone
Pholidophyllum tabulatum Schlotheim, Gotland, 31,32
60,278 Uland, 10, 11
Pholidophyllum tenue Wedekind, 60 Plectambonites inconstans (Haupt), 427
Pholidops implicata, see Craniops Plectambonites segmentum (Angelin), 427
implicata Plectambonites transversalis, see
Phosphorite, 388,391 Plectodonta transversalis
Phragmoceras, 67,333,384 Plectatrypa imbricata {J. de C. Sowerby), 64,
Phragmoceras convolutum (Hedstrom), 278 227,308,332,427
Phragmoceras costatum Hedstrom, 278 Plectatrypa lamellosa (Loven), 64,332
Phragmoceras inflexum Hedstrom, 67, 333 Plectatrypa marginalis (Dalman), 64, 227,
Phragmoceras praecurvum Hedstrom, 67,384 276,382,427
Pia, J., 74,488 Plectodonta duvali (Davidson), 64
Pilina unguis (Lindstrom), 66, 308 Plectodonta transversalis (Dalman), 278,
Pilothrix, 74 329,427
Pinsak, A.P. and Shaver, R.H., 458,489 Plectodonta transversalis lata (Jones), 64,
Pirgu Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17, 18, 19, 227,232,236,308,427
456 Pleurotomaria, 66,383,429
Pirita Stage (Esthonia), 15, 17 Pleurotomaria aequilatera Wahlenberg, 66,308
Pisces, 424 Pleurotomaria alata, .see
Pisocrinus, 62,331,381 Euomphalopterus alatus
Planalveolites, 85 Pleurotomaria bicincta (Hall),66, 383
524 INDEX
Pleurotomaria cirrhosa Lindstrom, 66, Precambrian (continued)

383 Gotland, 29,30
Pleurotomaria claustrata Lindstrom, 66, Gotska Sandon, 13,14
308 Aimitia mundula (Jones), 425
Pleurotomaria glandiformis Lindstrom, 66, Primitia valida Jones et Holl, 428
383 Proetus, 68,227,240,309,333,384
Pleurotomaria gradata Lindstrom, 66, Proetus conspersus (Angelin), 67,384
383 Proetus delicatus Hedstrom, 67,227
Pleurotomaria laqueata Lindstrom, 66 Proetus verrucosus Lindstrom, 68,333
Pleurotomaria limata Lindstrom, 66, Prokopovich, N., 153,489
227,308,333 Promelocrinus, 62,331
“Pleurotomaria” linnarssoni Lindstrom, Propora, 72, 84
66,383 Propora conferta Edwards et Haime, 62,
Pleurotomaria lloydi Sowerby, 66,383 427
Pleurotomaria marklini Lindstrom, 66 Propora euiycantha Lindstrom, 427
Pleurotomaria planorbis (Hisinger), 66, Propora speciosa Billings, 62,330
383 Propora tubulata (J-onsdale),62,307,427
Pleurotomaria voluta Lindstrom, 66, Protoathyris, 64,308
383 Protoathyrisdidyma (Dalman), 64,382
Pokomf, V., 76,489 Protozeuga bicarinata (Angelin), 428
Poleumita, 66, 333 Protozoa, 76
Poleumita discors (J. Sowerby), 66,308, Chitinozoa, 423
333,383 Foraminifera, 423
Poleumita globosum (Schlotheim), 66, Psilophytales, 423
227,308,333,383 Pskovi Stage (Esthonia), 17
Poleumita roemeri (Lindstrom), 66, Pterinea, 65,332
278,280 Prerinea nodulosa Lindstrom in museo,
Poleumita sculptum (J. de C. Sowerby), 65,382
66,227 Pteropoda, 65,75,332,424
Polyorophe glabra Lindstrom, 60,306, Pterygotus stratum, 33
426 Ptilodictya lanceolata (Goldfuss), 63,
Polyorophe lindstromi Wedekind, 60,306 261,307,331,381,410,425,427
Polypeltes, 62, 307 Ptilodictya triangularis Hisinger, 63,307
Pools within reef surface, 73,437 Ptychophyllum patellatum, see
Hoburgen reef type, 144,149,323, Schlotheimophyllumpatellatum
367,371,437 Ptychophyllum tnrncatum (Linnaeus), 60
Holmhdlar reef type, 187, 191, 192, Ftychopleurella bouchurdi (Davidson), 64,
194-196,203,377,420,441-442 227,269,331,382,428
Stiiurnasar reef type, 245 Purdy, E.G. and Imbrie, J., 397,489
Porifera, 423 Purga member (Esthonia), 19
Porkuni Stage (Esthonia), 17, 19,32, Purtse Subseries (Esthonia), 16, 17
456 Pycnactis, 60
Porpites porpita (Linnaeus), 278,426 Pycnomphalus acutus Lindstrom, 66,383
Posidonomya glabra Munster, 429 Pyrite, 18,278,280,323,337,351,394,
Pothole-likeexcavations, 401-402 412,429,468
PriistMint (Frojel), 348 Pyrite layer (Esthonia), 18
Precambrian, 7,8,9, 27,49
algal reefs, Raikkiila Stage (Esthonia), 17,20,456
Esthonia, 15 W e r e Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17, 19,32
INDEX 525
Ramraur (Stora Karlso), 228,229,230, Raukar (continued)

23 1,246 Stora Karlso, 209,228,232,236,
Ramtrask (Stilnga), 369 252,253,257
Rasmussen, H. W.,424,489 Tjelders (Boge), 209,325,326
Rasm'tes Series Recognizability of fossils, 124- 126
Dalecarlia, 26 Recrystallization, 69,71,75, 121, 122,
Gotland, 32 125-126,180,181,183,236,243,
Scania, 25,26 247,253,254,255,266,355,396
Rauff, H., 423,489 Red Limestone (Vastergotland), 11
Raukar, 179 Reef
Asunden, 209 defintion, 53-55,472
Austre (Vamlingbo), 42, 179,419, Reef builders, 59,84-85, 117-1 18,
420 180-187,188-189
Bogeklint (Boge), 6,209,320 Algae, 19,20,41, 55, 57, 60,73-74,
cement-factory raukar field (slite), 77,78, 114, 118, 176,180, 181,
321,323 182,184,185,186,187,188-189,
Fagelhammar (Ardre), 6,42, 179, 191, 210,306,311,330,380,439,440,
194,195,200,203,206,209,375, 455,456,457,460,472,473,474
377,378,379,385,440 bryozoans, 20,62 -63,73,77,85,118,
HammarshagahiUar (Hamra), 6,37, 158,181, 182, 189, 195,197, 201, 205,
42,179,189,208,209,418 226,229,243,247, 249,250,252,
Heliholm (Vamlingbo), 37,42, 179, 253,259,261,262,263,265,266,
189,196,200,203,208,209, 269,305, 307,331, 381,387,406,
418,420 407,457,473
Hoburgen (Sundre), 209 corals, 19,60-62,71-73,83,84,85,
Holmhlillar (Vamlingbo), 5, 6,42, 114,117-118,122,125,129,148,
179,180, 188, 189, 193, 196, 151,154,158 173,176,181,182,
197,198,200,203,204,205, 184,185-187,189,195,197,243,
20C, 209,441,442 244,245,247,249,250,252,254,
Hydeviken (Hellvi), 324,325 259,261,262,263, 265, 266, 269,
Jungfrun (Stenkyrka), 209, 299 302,303,306-307,330,380,
m a b e r g (Site), 6,209,3 19,320, 432-433,434,435-438,439,
322-323 455-456,457,460-461,472,473
Lickershamn (Stenkyrka), 123,209, stromatoporoids, 55,57,60,68-71,
281,299 85, 103, 108, 114, 117, 118, 122,
Lilla Karlso, 209,237,258,259,261, 125, 128, 129, 148, 151, 157, 164,
262,270,271,274 165,176,180, 181,182,183-185,
Ljugarn (Ardre), 6,37,42, 179,200, 186, 188, 189, 194, 195, 196, 197,
201,202,203,377 198,207,223,226,244,245,246,
Narsholm (Nar), 406 247,249,250,252,253,258,259,
origin of, 5,6,208-210 263,265,266,269,270,271,272,
Sigsarvebodar (Hangvar), 159 303,306,311,330,363,380,415,
Sjausterhammar (Gammelgarn), 180, 416,438-442,455,456,457,458,
189,206,207,209,375,376,377 460461,463,472,473,474
Smbben (Ostergarn), 180,207,208, Reef debris, 59
372,373 approximation of volume percentage,
Sdklint (Site), 6,209,319,322 213-214
Spillingsklint (Othem), 209,325 direction of dip, 219,221-224
Spinnbjersbacke (Vallstena), 325-326 distribution in horizontal direction,
526 INDEX
Reef debris (continued) Reef dwellers (continued)

217-219,253-254,259 Tintinnia, 76,120
distribution in vertical direction, Trilobita, 67-68,75-76, 181,
214-217 192,309,333,384,460
formation, 216,219,251,261,468, Reef frame, 59,126,460-461
469 Reef-induced turbulence, 462
Hoburgen reef type, 128,134,135,138, Reef limestones
144,145,146,147,148,149,151, Belgium, 43 8
152,153,159,161-164,165-172, Burgsvik Beds, 58,60-67,115,
176,214-216,217-218,221, 223, 405-407,474,475
290,291,294,295,299,304,305, Dalecarlia, 25
322,323,325,326,327,328,347, East Baltic, 18, 19,20,
349,352,353,357,359,361,362, 456-458
363.365,366,367,368,369,370, Eke Beds, 58,60-67, 115,
371; 415. 123,387-391,448,451,
Ho1mh;illar reef type, 188, 189, 190, 453,474,475
192-194,199,-203,205,206-208, environment of formation, 82,
210,216-217,219,221,223,224, 114, 127, 128, 129, 134, 138,
372,374,375,377 161,164,176-177,210-212y
Karlsoarna, 230, 232, 235, 236,242, 280-281,310-311,329,334,
247,249,251,253, 254,260,261, 336,349,386,391-392, 407,
263,266,270,271,272 421422,472-474,475
Silurian, North America, 459,460, Fantematype, 68,71,72,231,235,236,
461,462 238,243,252,253,254,256,473
Upper Visby reef type, 89,92, 103, fossil content, 59-76
104,107 Gannberg variety, 69,357,362,363
Reef dwellers, 59,74-76 general typology, 56-58
Annelida, 76 geographical distribution, 58
Brachiopoda, 63-64, 75, 85, 120, Great Britain, 455-456,463
181, 192, 249,252,253,265, Halla-Mulde Beds, 58,60-67,115,
307-308,331-332,381-382, 335-336,475
429,460,461 Hamra-Sundre Beds, 41, 58,60-67,
Cephalopoda, 67,75,85,181,309, 115, 117,123, 126, 127,131,
333,383-384,460 135-138,144,145,147,148,
Crinoidea, 59,62,74-75,85, 120, 149-152,154,161-162,164,165,
182, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188, 174,175,179-205,208-212,216,
189, 192, 194,205,226,231, 218,407,410, 413-420,439,
239,242,245,247,249,250, 441-443,444,449,450,451, 475
255,307,331,347,381,448, Hemse Beds, 42, 58,60-67, 115, 123,
449,450,452,454,460,461, 128,131,134-135,152,163-164,
463-464 168, 174,179, 180, 183, 189,190,
Gastropoda, 65-66,75, 85, 120, 191, 194, 195,200, 202,203,
181,308,332-333 206-208,211,212, 216,217,219,
Lamellibranchiata, 65,75, 120, 181, 221,223,224,352-386, 436,439,
192,308,332,382,460 445,45oY45a,463, 468,474,475
Ostracoda, 68,76, 176,309,333, Hoburgen type, 57-58,115-177,
3 84 214-216,217,218, 221,223,
Reropoda, 65,75,332 285-303,306-309,3 11,3 17-333,
Tentaculitida, 67,308,333 335-336,338-348,352-372,
INDEX 527
Reef limestones (continued) Resserella, 64, 227, 308, 33 1, 428

380-384,387-391,405-407, Resserella basalis (Dalman), 64,308
413-418,437,448,449,450,451, Resserella elegantula (Dalman), 64, 227, 308,
452,453,467,468-469,473 331,428
Hogklint Beds, 5,54, 58,71,73,74, Resserella visbyensis (Lindstrom), 64,
76,77,90, 114, 115, 119, 123, 278
124,125,126,127, 128,131, 132, Retzia baylei, see Rhynchospirina
133,137,139-143,146,147,152, baylei
155,156,157,158,159-161,166, Reuter, G., 423,489
167, 169, 170, 172, 176, 284, Rhabdophyllum striatum Wedekind, 61,
285-303,304,305,306-309, 306
435,436,437,439,450,457,468, Rhegmaphyllum conulus (Lindstrom), 61,
475 306,330,380
Holmldlar type,58, 59,60-67,68, Rhegmaphyllum slitense Wedekind, 426
70,71,74,75,178-212,216-217, Rhipidium tenuistriatum, see
219,221, 222,223,224,255, Conchidium tenuistriatum
372-386,418-420,439,440-442, Rhipidomella hybri& (J. de C . Sowerby),
443,448,449,450,451,452,453, 64,308,331,382,425,428
454,467,474 Rhizophyllum elongatum Lindstrom, 61,
joints, 49 426
Klinteberg Beds, 58,60-67, 115, 123, Rhizophyllum gotlandicum (Roemer), 61,
125-130,131,132,133,173, 226,426
338-348,443,448,449,450,453, Rhizophyllum reef limestone, 34
474,475 Rhombopteria, 65,308,382
Lilla Karlso, 237,258-272, 273, 275, Rhombopteria mira Barrande, 429
435,436,437,463,473,475 Rhynchonella exigua Lindstrom, 278
North America, 126,136,438,452, Rhynchospirina baylei (Davidson), 64,
458-462,463 382
rate of formation, 468-469 Rhynchospirina bouchardi (Davidson), 64
resistance against erosion, 5, 83, 113, 115, Rhynchotreta cuneata (Dalman), 64,
179,183,258,456,457 227,269,308,332
sediment or sedentate, 54 Rice, C.M., 33,122,489
Slite Beds, 58, 60-67, 73, 115, 118, Ridala member (Esthonia), 19
119,121,123,128,131,144,148, Rill marks, 403,404,407
152, 171,215,216,217,221,223, Ringe (Denmark), 25
317-329,330-333,434,436,439, Ripple marks, 284,315,316,329,334,
450,457,463,473,475 399,407
Staurnasar type, 68,71,242, 243, Roemeria, 61,330
244-245,247,250,258,473 Roemeria kunthiana Lindstrom, 61,
Stora Karlso, 233,236,242-258,272, 306,380,427
273,275,276,463,473,475 Rojsuhajd (Stora Karlso), 228, 242,250,
stratigraphical distribution, 58,475 25 1
Upper Visby type, Upper Visby Beds, Rojsuhajd reef limestone (Stora Karlso),
4, 57, 58,60-67,68,72,79-114, 232,242,250,272,275
123, 161, 173, 176,280,431,436, Rommunds (Fide), 395
439,443,450,455-456,463,467, Rone Parish
475 Eke Beds, 387
Regndll, G., 10, 12,26,27,424,489 Ytterholmen, 409
Rems (Vamlingbo), 420 RGBmusoks, A., 19,489
528 INDEX
Roosval, J., 3,489 Save-Soderbergh, G., 43,394,424,490

Riirviks Trask (Qa), 45 Scania
Romall, S. and Petterson, B., 3,489 Cambrian, 21
Rotarve (Lye), 349 Ordovician, 11
Rothpletz, A., 73,423,489 Silurian, 11,25-26,27
Rothpletzella, 60,74,78,306,330, Scenidium acutum, see Skenidoides acuta
337,380,410,456,466 Scenidium lewisi (Davidson), 428
Rovalds (Vate), 335 Schieferdecker, A.A.G., 33,54,490
Rudist reefs in Iraq, 255 Schlotheimophyllum, 226
Runcorn, S.K., 434,489 Schlotheimophyllum patellatum (Schlotheim),
Runno, 7 61,85,306,427,430
Runsten (Uland), 10 Scldiiter, C., 423,490
Rute Parish Schmidt, F., 7,16,32,36,490
Furillen, 47 Schmidtiellus torelli Stage, 11
Vestrume, 46 Schroeteri Limestone
Rutten, M.G., 1,42,56,70,71,180, Uland, 10,ll
242,265,489 Vastergtitland, 11
Ryssnas (Firii), 316 Schuchertella pecten, see Fardenia pecten
Schwarzbach, M., 55,490
Saaremaa (Esthonia), 7,8,9,19,20,21, Scolecodonts,226
25,33,456,457,458 Scrutton, C.T., 434,490
Saaremgisa Stage (Esthonia), 16 Scutellum polyactin (Angelin), 227
Sacal, V., 76,479 Sedentate, 54
Sagging of sediments underneath Sediment, definition, 54-55
reefs, 46,93,97,98,99, 101,104, !egerstad (Uland), 10
109,112,145,150,155,156,174, Seloni Stage (Esthonia), 17
229,232,245,246,248,251,252, Seward, A.C.,73,490
288,290,295,352,375,388,390, Shaub, B.M., 153,490
413,414,468 Shaver, R.H., 458,489
Sahara Shelf reefs, 21 1
Devonian, 76 Shrock, R.R., 54,458,461,479,490
Saku member (Esthonia), 18 Sibbenarve (Oja), 412
Siillmung (Hamra), 412 S i e i f s (Vamlingbo), 5 1
Salt dome, 203 Sigsarve (Garde), 51
Salt pillows, 421 Sigsarvebodar (Hangvar), 124,159,160,
Salweyia striata (J. de C. Sowerby), 429 302,303,304,306-309
Sandarve Kulle (Fardhem), 372,380-384 Sigvalde-trask (Etelhem), 369,380-384
Sandby (Uland), 10 Silurian, 7
Sandstone fauna of southernmost Gotland, Africa, 55
33 Antarctica, 55
Sandvik (Oland), 10 Australia, 55
Sandviken (Ustergarn), 180,183,190, Baltic basin, 7,8
212,372,374 boundary with Devonian, 4344,394
Sankt Gijran Church (Visby), 291 Canada, 458
Sankt Olofsholm (Hellvi), 47,51 Dalecarlia, 26
Sarv, L., 44,483 Esthonia, 7,9,17,19-21, 25,27,
Saue Subseries (Esthonia), 16 456-458,463
Saunja Stage, see Nabala Stage Gotska Sandiin, 13
Savage, T.E. and Van Tuyl, F.M., 458,490 Great Britain, 43,44,75,76,77,78,
INDEX 529
Silurian (continued) Slite Beds (continued)

329,439,455-456,463 correlation with Karlsoarna, 275, 276
Jamtland, 26, 27 correlation with other areas, 42, 43,
Latvia, 19 457,463
Lithuania, 19 dip of boundary with Halla-Mulde
North America, 55,126,136,438, Beds, 47,48
452,458-462,463,464 environment of formation, 275-276,
Oslo area, 25, 27 329,334,473
Ostergiitland, 26, 27 facies fossils, 428
palaeogeography, 25-27 guide fossils, 304,305,425,426
reef formation, general, 55 joints, 51
Scania, 11,25-26,27 movement of basin floor, 48
South America, 55 orientation of coral colonies, 435,436
southern Europe, 55 reef limestones, 58, 60-67, 73, 115,
Spain, 76 118, 119, 121, 123, 128, 131, 144,
Vastergiitland, 26 148, 152, 171, 215, 216, 217, 221,
Simunde (Horsne), 327,328,329 223,317-329,330-333,434,436,
Simunde Station (Horsne), 327-328,328 439,450,473,475
Sion (TWmla), 3 16 stem diameters of crinoids, 449,450,
Sjausterhammar (Gammelgam), 5 1, 180, 45 1
189, 190, 191,206,207,209,375, stratified sediments, 47, 60-67, 171,
376,377,443 312-317,330-333,446-447
Sjonhem Parish thickness, 312, 313,314,315, 316,
Skiiret (Hamra), 420 Slite I Beds, 310,312,313,328,473
Skenidioides acuta (Lindstrom), 227,427 Slite I1 Beds, 310,312,313-314,329
Skoge (Sundre), 412 Slite I11 Beds, 47, 275, 312, 315-316,
Skolithos linearis Haldeman, 29 325,328,329,473
Skolithos Sandstone (Gotska Sandon), 14 Slite IV Beds, 47,48,214, 215, 216,
Skrubbs Limestone, 34 223,275,312,316-317,318,
Slickensides, 188,435 329,334,435,436,473
Sliding within reef limestone, 126, 128, Slite Group
188,202,296,359 in stratigraphy by Hede, 34,35,36,38
Slite, 37, 56,312 Slite marl
cement-factory raukar field, 321,323 in stratigraphy by Wedekind and Tripp,
Kvarnbacken (Lotsbacken), 316,322, 36
323-324,330-333 Slite marlstone, 275,3 12, 3 15,317, 3 18,
&naberg, 6, 144, 148,209,319,320, 323,324,329,334,428,473
322-323,436 Slottsbacken (Slite), 324
quarry of cement factory, 6,3 17, Smiland, 9
318,321 Smiss (Grotlingbo), 49,51
Slottsbacken, 324 Smith, J., 423,490
Solklint, 6,51, 119, 148,209,214, Smojen (Hellvi), 171
215,217, 221,223,319,322, Smoje-udd (Hellvi), 47
330-333,436,446,447 Smojge (Lilla Karlso), 237, 25 8
Slite Beds, 31 1-334 Snabben (Ostergarn), 58, 180, 183, 190,
boundary with Hogklint Beds, 48, 191,207,208,211, 212, 216,
309-310,311,314 219,221, 223,224,372,373,
comparison with other stratigraphies, 35 380-384,386
530 INDEX
SMckgiirdsbaden (Visby), 6,82, 142,281, Spirorbis lewisi Sowerby, 62,381

286,287,288,289,290,293, Spjeldnaes, N., 43, 391,394,423,424,
306-309,310 490,491
Sniickgirdsbaden Hotel, 80, 81, 82, 103, Spongiae, 55,76,120,423,460
286,292 Spongiostromu, 74, 173,337, 338,410,
Snackviken, 46 456
Snetogori Stage (Esthonia), 17 Spongiostroma holmi Rothpletz, 309,
Sdderberg, bG.,3, 490 337
Solenopora, 21,60, 73, 118,330,350, Spongiostroma layer, 34
380,456,466 Springer, F., 424,491
Solenopora gotlandica Rothpletz, 60, 306 Squirrel, H.C. and Tucker, E.V., 425,
Solklint (Slite), 6, 51, 119, 148,209, 214, 49 1
215, 217, 221,223,319,322, sqvalpvik, 5
330-333,436,446,447 Stalen (Lilla Karla), 237,262,263,265,
Soot-Ryen, H., 424,490 270,271
SBrve Peninsula, 21 Smga Parish
South Gotland Limestone, 34 Allmungs, 349
Sowerby ella transversalis, see Bro-trask, 369
Plectodonta transversalis Hemse Beds, 351
Spain Ramtrask, 369
Silurian, 76 Stauria favosa (Linnaeus), 61, 330
Spanghde (Stora Karlso), 228,229,230, Stiiurnasar (Stora Karlso), 228, 229, 231,
232,246,247,272 244,245,246
Spangiinde Limestone (Stora Karlso), Stiiurnasar reef limestone (Stora
225,226-228,230-233,234, Karlso), 242,244-245,247, 250
242,244,245, 247,248, 250, 256, Stiiurnasar reef type, 68, 71,243,
257,272,275 247,258,473
Spathognathodus steinhornensis Ziegler, 44 Stavsklint (Tofta), 81,85, 86,97,99,
Sphaerexochus, 68,333,384 100,101,102,104,105,278,288
Sphaerexochus laciniatus Lindstrom, 68,384 Stenksa (Uland), 10
Sphaerexochus scabridus Angelin, 227 Stenkumla Parish,51
Sphaerirhynchia wilsoni (J. Sowerby), 64, Forse, 313
227,308,332,382,425 Gardrungs, 328,330-333
Sphaerocodium, 73, 74 Martille, 313,314 .
Sphaerocodium gotlandicum Rothpletz, pseudo-tectonic phenomena, 45
73 Slite I Beds, 313
Sphaerocodium layer, 34 Tomtmyr, 313
Sphaerocodium limestone, 409 Stenkyrkahuks Fyr, 436,431
Spinnbjersbacke (Vallstena), 325-326, Stenkyrka Parish
330-333,434 Jungfrun, 209,299
Spillingsklint (Othem), 118,209,312, Lickershamn, 82,281,299,300,
325,330-333,439 301,306-309,311,436
Spirifer eIevatus, see DeIthyris elevata Lickershamn raukar field, 123,
“Spirifer”insignis Hedstrom, 64,382 209,281,299
Spirifer interlineatus, see Eospirifer Stenkyrkahuks Fyr, 436, 437
interlineatus Stuguklint, 126,296,299
Spirifer marklini, see Eospirifer marklini Stephenson, T.A. and Stephenson, A.,
Spirifer radiatus, see Eospirifer radiatus 431,491
Spirorbis, 62,301,331,381,427 Stetson, H.C., 210,491
INDEX 53 1
Stiudden (Stora Karlso), 228, 234, 275 Stratigraphy of Gotland (continued)

Stockdale, P.B., 153,491 according to Wedekind and Tripp,
Stockviken (Hamra), 45,412 35,36
Stolley, E., 33,73,423,491 Stratum, 33
Stomatopora, 63 Streptocrinus crotalums (Angelin), 62,
Stomatopora minor Hisinger, 427 331
Stora Forvar (Stora KarlSa), 228,235 Streptorhynchus nasutum (Lindstrom), 64
Stora Hiistnas (Visby), 309,313,314 Striatopora, 429
Stora Hellvigs (Fole), 328 Striatopora halli Lindstrom, 61, 306
Stora Karld, 37,225 Striatopora stellulata Lindstrom, 61 ,306
correlation with Gotland, 275-276, Stricklandia lirata J. de C. Sowerby,
336 278,279
correlation with Lilla Karl&, 272, 275 Gtricklandinia marl, 32, 33, 34
raukar, 209,228, 232, 236, 252, 253, Strike joints, 49
25 7 Stromatactis, 460,46 1
reef limestones, 233,236, 242-258, Stromatolithi, 457
272,273,275,276,463,473,475 Stromatolitic matrix, 77-78,120,121
stratified sediments, 71, 225-236, Stromatopora, 69
242,244,245,247,248,250,256, Stromatopora discoidea (Lonsdale), 60,
257,272,273,275,336 69,85,280,306
Stora Ror (Oland), 10 Stromatopora Limestone, 34
Stora Ryftes (Fole), 3 15 Stromatopora stratum, 33
Stora Vasstiide (Hablingbo), 35 1 Stromatopora typica Ros., 457
Stora Vede (Follingbo), 217,328,436 Stromatoporella, 60,69, 154
Storburg (Hoburgen, Sundre), 71, 116, Stromatoporoids
117,138,149-152, 162,168,174, competition with corals, 229,244,245,
175,218,274,413,414,415,416, 438,439,440
422 growth forms, 69-71,85,157,183,
Storugns (Grbro), 46,5 1, 3 15 246-247,257,271,326,352,
Strachan, I., 12,483 354,357,363,364,366,371,
Stratigraphichiatus 440,442,443-444
between Heme and Eke Beds, 40,41, latilaminae, 70, 71, 122, 183,285,
43,391,474 445-446
between Hogklint and Slite Beds, 309,3 110 main reef builders in Silurian and
between Hogklint and Tofta limestones, Devonian, 55
284,309,310 not abundant in Fanterna reef type,
between Tofta and Slite limestones, 68,252,253,263,266,269,272
309,3 10 overgrowing corals, 439
Stratigraphy of Gotland, 1 palaeoecology, general, 114,189,
according to Hadding, 38,56,304 438446,463
according to Hede, 34, 3S, 36,36-39, polyp size, 444-445
277 keef builders in American Silurian,
according to Hedstrom, 34,35 438,460,461,463
according to Jux, 35,39-42 reef builders in Belgian Devonian, 438
according to Lindstrom,33,34 reef builders in British Wenlockian,
according to present author, 35,38, 455,456
39,471-472 reef builders in Esthonia, 457,458
according to Schmidt, 32,33 reef builders in Gotland, 57,60,
according to Van Hoepen, 34,35 68-71,85,103,108,114,117,
532 INDEX
Stromatoporoids(continued) Suderbys (Vasterhejde), 309,328,

11 8,122,125, 128,129,148, 330-333
151, 157,164,165,176,180, Suderhamn (Stora Karlso), 228
181,182,183-185,186,188, Suderslatt (Lilla Karld),237, 258
189,194,195,196,197,198, Suderslatt (Stora Karlso), 228,232,248
207,223,303,306,311,330, Suderslatt reef limestone ( M a Karlso),
363,380,415,416,438-442, 237,258,259,262,265,266,
472,473,474 272,273,275
reef builders on Karlsoama, 68, Suder Vagnhus (Lilla Karlso), 237,238,
226,244,245,246,247,249, 240,241,259,263,265,271,273
250,252,253,258,259,263, Sundre limestone, 179,411-413,472
265,266,270,271,272 Sundre Limestone
Strontium-calcium ratio, 396 in stratigraphy by Hede, 34,35,36,38
Stropheodonta semiglobosa (Davidson), 64, Sundre Parish, 51,209
308,331 Hallbjihs, 5,412
“Strophomena”, 64,331 Hamra-Sundre Beds, 411,412,413
“Strophomena” concinna Lindstrom in Hoburgen, 5,6,37,40,41,45,46,
museo, 64,382 49,51,58,71,115-117, 123,
“Strophomena” impressa Munthe, 352 126,127,131,135-138,144,145,
Strophomena lovCni, see Leptaena 149-152,154,161-163,164,
lovtni 165,168, 174, 175, 209,216,
“Strophomena” orbignyi Davidson, 64 218,246,274,286,392,394,402,
“Strophomena” rugata Lindstrom, 403,404,405,407,408,409,411,
64,227 412,413-417,418,421,422,443,
“Strophomena” testudo Lindstrom in 451 ,453
museo, 64,308 Juves, 413
Strophonella euglypha (Hisinger), 428 Klehammars-udd,409
Strophonella finiculata, see Klev, 6,413
Amphis trophia finiculata Marbardshue, 409,413
Structure of reef limestone, 83,120-126 Skoge, 412
bed-like, 120,121 Svahnstrom, G.,3,484
brecciated, 71,120,121,122, 124, SvarWar (Stora Karlso), 228,235,
125,357,363,371 236,252,253,254,255
conglomeratic, 70,71,83,120,122, Svarthiillar reef limestones (Stora
123,125,357,363,366 Karlso), 233,236,242,252-258,
massive, 120,121-123,124 273,275,276
nodulose, 83,122 Svenska Naturskyddsforening, 225
solid, 121,122,125,126 Svinordi Stage (Esthonia), 17
stratified, 83,90,121, 123,129, Swedish language, use of article, 3
135,183,196,253,255,285, Syringaxon dalmani (Edwards et Haime),
302,303,343,415,417 61,306,427
Stuguklint (Stenkyrka), 126,296,299 Syringaxon siluriense (McCoy), 226,232
Stylolites, 122, 153, 154,284,291,316, Syringolites kunthiana, see Roemeria
357 kunthkna
Subulites, 429 Syringopora, 61,154,226,280,330,
Subulites ventricosus Hall (according to 380,460
Hedstrom, 1923), 66,308 Syringostroma, 60,69
Suderbys (Bro), 315 Sysne, see Sysne-udd
INDEX 533
Sysne-udd (Ostergarn), 190, 191,207, Tentaculitida, 67,308,333

208, 216,219,221,223,224, Tetracoralla
373,374,380-384,386 in Karlsoarna, 226
Systematic joints, 49 in marly sediments, 426
in normal stratified limestones, 108,
Tabulate corals 429
in English Wenlockian, 455 in reef and crinoid limestones,
in Karlsoarna, 226 60-61,71,118,306,330,380
in marly sediments, 427 rhythmic growth patterns, 433
in normal stratified limestones, 429 in Visby Beds, 278
persistent fossils, 425 Textoris, D.A., 458,460,461,491
in reef and crinoid limestones, 61, Thamnopora, 61,226
71,72,125,306,330,380 Thamnopora lamellicomis (Lindstrom), 6 1,
in Visby Beds, 278 306,427
Taconic orogenic phase, 456 Thecia, 72,74, 118,461
Talent, J.A. and Philip, G.M.,55,491 Thecia hisingeri (Jones), 62, 278
Tallinn (Esthonia), 14 Thecia swindemiana (Goldfuss), 62,72,
Tallinn Series (Esthonia), 16 307,330,429,432
Talus deposits of reefs, 128, Thlipsurella discreta (Jones), 428
134-135,151,153,161-164, Thorell, T. and Lindstrom, G.,
175,207-208,218,219,249, 424,491
251,294,295,303,366,461 Thorslund, P., 12, 14,22, 23, 24,25, 26,
Tammiku member (Esthonia), 19 29,31,32,48,491
Tamsalu Stage (Esthonia), 17,19,20,456 Thorsteinsson, R. and Fortier, Y.O., 458,
Taugourdeau, P. and De Jekhowsky, B., 49 1
423,491 Tilting, 46-49, 190 (see also Tectonics)
Tectonics Tingstade Parish
dip of the strata, 32,46-49,311, Slite I1 Beds, 314
334,407,421 Slite I11 Beds, 315
epeirogenetic movements, 1,27, Tingstade Trask, 3 15
47,4a, 49,52,190,276,285, 311, Triighrds, 3 15
336,349,386,421,472,473,474, Tingstiide Trask, 3 15
475 Tintinnia, 76,120
joints, 49-52, 152 Tiskre Stage (Esthonia), 15, 17
pseudo-tectonic phenomena, 45-46, Tjiingvide-lucka (KrMingbo), 364,365
375,399-400 Tjelders (Boge), 209,325, 326
Teichert, C., 32,55,491 Tjeldersholm (Boge), 47,316, 317,326,
Tentaculata 330-333
Bryozoa, 20,55,62-63,73,77,85, Tofta limestone, 38,41,282, 284,285,
103,118, 158, 181, 182, 189, 304-305,309-310,311,456,472,
195,197,201,205,226,229, 473
243,247,249,250,252,253, Tofta Limestone
259,261,262,263,265,266, in stratigraphy by Hede, 34,35,36,
269,278,305,307,331,381, 38
387,406,407,424, 425,427, stratigraphicalview by Hadding, 38,
457,460,473 304
Tentaculites, 67, 308,333 stratigraphicalview by Martinsson,
Tentaculites multiannulatus Vine, 67,333 304,305
534 INDEX
Tofta Parish Trimerella, 64,308,331, 382

BlfiW, 81, 87, 89, 101 Trimerella lindstromi (DaU), 64,331
Gnisvards Fisklage, 279 Tripp, K., 1,35,36,38,56,423,491,
Korpklint, 79,81,93,97 493
Liksarve, 47,313,328,330-333, Trochus, 66,308,333
334 Trochus astraliformis Lindstrom, 66
Norrgrde, 3 13 nochus cavus Lindstrom, 66,383
Nyrevsudde, 6, 58,79,81, 83-84, Trochus gotlandicus Lindstrom, 66,308
87,88 Trochus incisus Lindstrom, 66,308,333
Slite I Beds, 313,328,330-333 Trochus mollis Lindstriim, 227
Stavsklint, 81, 85,86,97,99, 100, Trochus visbyensis Lindstrom, 66,308
101,102,104,105,278,288 Troedsson, G.T., 25,424,492
Tofta Skjutfdt, 37,79,81,83,86,87, Trough, moving at depth, 420-422
93,97,99, 100 Trusheim, F., 421,492
Toila Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17, 18 llyblidium reticulatum Lindstrom, 66,
Tomtmyr (Stenkumla), 313 308
Tondd.int (Lojsta), 369,380-384 Tsuudovo Stage, see hdovo Stage
Torsburgen (Krkklingbo), 6, 123,35 1, Tubode FisWage (Fide), 392
363-365 Tucker, E.V., 425,491
Triidgkden ( m a Karlso), 237,239, Ttirissalu member (Esthonia), 18
240,241,242,243,273,274 Twenhofel, W.H.,56,458,492
Tragilrds (Tingstade), 3 15, Tyrvalds Bakke (Klinte), 348
Trakumla Parish
Sion, 3 16 Ubaghs, G., 424,492
Slite I Beds, 313 Uddvide (Grotlingbo), 400,410
Triilgar (Fleringe), 315 Uhaku Stage (Esthonia), 16,17, 18
Trapplagm (Idla Karla),237,241 mgase member (Esthonia), 18
Tremadocian Unconformity, 233,234,239,240,242,
palaeogeography ,24 273-275,276
Tremanotus compressus Lindstrom, Upper Visby reef type, 79-1 14,472
66,383 boundary between reef and stratified
Tremanotus longitudinalis Lindstrom, sediments, 87,89,92,94,95,97,
66,425 97-99,110,111,112,113
Tretaspis Limestone (scania), 11 comparison with reefs in English
netaspis Mudstone (Vastergatland), 11 Wenlockian, 455-456, 463
Tretaspis Series, 25 debris, 89,92,103,104,107
Gotland, 31,32 environment of formation, 82,
Oland, 11,12 114,280-281,472
Ustergiitland, 25 general character, 57,83-84
Scania, 11 geographical distribution, 58,79,81,82
Vastergijtland, 11 limestone mantle, 4, 87,88,89,90,91,
Tretaspis Shales 92,93,94,95,96,97,98,99, 101,
Ostergiitland, 25 102-104,107,109,110,111,112,
scania 11, 113,114,448
Viistergotland, 11 limestone undeiheath, 84,87,91,92,
Triigi Peninsula (Esthonia), 20 93,96,97,98,99-102, 104,105,
Trilobita, 67-68,75-76, 181, 192, 106,107,108,109,110,112,113
227,229,278,309,333,384, matrix, 57, SO, 83,85, 87, 92,93,94,
425,429,460 97,99,106,112
nodulose structure, 83
INDEX 535
Upper Visby reef type (continued) Vamlingbo Parish (continued)

Occurrence at specific stratigraphic Sigreifs, 51
levels, 96, 97, 102, 105-107, 109 Sniickviken, 46
palaeogeographic distribution, 82 Valar, 49,51,392,399,402,407,40S
reef builders, 59,60-67,68,71, 72, Vastlands, 41 1
75, 84-85,89, 108, 111, 112, Van Bemmelen, R.W., 203,492
280,431,439,443,467 Vhdburgsviken (Hamra), 51
reef dwellers, 59,60-67 V i d r a (Esthonia), 20
shape of the reefs, 86-95,97 V i g e Parish
size of the reefs, 86, 87,89,90,92, Bjerges Station, 338
93,94,95,95-97,99, 105, 107, Bringes, 173
108,110,111,112,113 Klinteberg Beds, 338
stratified structure, 83, 87,90,91,92, Van Hoepen, E.C.N., 32,34,35,36,45,
93,97,98,99, 103, 106, 123 46,56,492
stratigraphical distribution, 57,58,79, Van Tuyl, F.M., 458, 490
81,82,113 Vasalemma member (Esthonia), 18
Uppgirrds (Liirbro), 3 15 Vasalemma Stage (Esthonia), 16,17,18,
Usdowski, H.E., 396,492 456
Utbunge (Bunge), 316 Vaskinde Parish
Utfall (Stora Karla), 228,229,235 Brissund, 6, 126, 139, 145, 168, 281,
291, 292, 293, 295
Vaginatenkalkstein (Esthonia), 16 Gdungs, 315
Vaika (Esthonia), 20 Vasterberg (Lilla Karla), 237, 238
Valar (Vamlingbo), 49,51,392,399, Vasterberg (Stora Karlso), 228, 229,230,
402,407,409 246,247
Valdaic Series (Esthonia), 15, 17 Vlisterby (Guldrupe), 173
Valentian, 42 Vastergarn Parish
Vallstena Parish Paviken, 313
Spinnbjersbacke, 325-326,330-333, Vastergiitland
434 Ordovician, 11, 25
Vallve (Eskelhem), 313 Silurian, 11,26,27
Vamlingbo Parish, 51 Vasterhejde Parish
Austre, 42, 179,419,420 Axelsro, 4,5,79, 84, 87,88,91,93,
boring, 392,409 94,98,101,103,104,289
Grumpevik, 410 Bjars, 313
Hamra-Sundre Beds, 41 1,412 Fridhem, 79,92,105,106,107
Heliholm, 37,42,179,189,190, Hallbro Slott, 314
196,200,202,203,208,209, Hogklint, 5,6,51,74,76,90,98,
420, 444 99, 103, 115, 123, 126,281,
Holmhiillar, 5,6,42, 58, 179, 180, 285-286,306-309,3 11,433
181-183,184,185,186,187,188, Kneippbyn, 79, 81,90,91,92,94,
189,190,191-196,196-199, 95,96,97,108-112, 289,290,
200-205, 208, 209, 418, 439, 311,43 1,436,439
u41-442,444 Korpklint, 79,97,288
Ketteldrd, 41,49,417,419 Rite I Beds, 313
Kettelviken, 51,410,411,413 Slite II1 Beds, 3 15
Killingholmen, 41,399,413 Suderbys, 309,328,330-333
Kvarna, 411 Ygne Fhklage, 79
Rems, 420 Vtistlands (Vamlingbo), 41 1
536 INDEX
Vate Parish, 275 Visby Beds (contiiued)

Halla reef limestones, 335 thickness, 471
Kvie GTgine, 335,336 Visby Beds, Lower
Rovalds, 335 stratified sediments, 278-279
Vaughan, T.W., 263,430,465,492 thickness, 278
Veite Auren ( m a Kadso), 237,238 Visby Beds, Upper
Vernet, J.P., 396,397,478 average dip of strata, 47
Vestrume (Rute), 46 boundary with Hogklint Beds, 79,
Vialms (Fleringe), 310,314,315 90,113,280,282,289,290,291,
Vialms-udd (Fleringe), 51 293,296,297,301,311
Vidmyr (Lokrume), 3 15 facies fossils, 277,426,428,430
Vikare (Viklau), 336 joints, 51
Viklau Parish layered coral colony, 434
Halla reef limestones, 335 orientation of coral colonies, 83,
Vikare, 336 reef limestones, 4, 57, 58,60-67,
Vilsandi (Esthonia), 20 68,72,79-114,123,161,173,
Vinglu (Stora Karlso), 228,23 1,256,257 176,280,431,436,439,443,450,
Viruan Series (Esthonia), 16, 17,18 455-456,463,467,475
Visby, 37 stem diameter of crinoids, 449,450
Bingerskvarn, 309 stratified sediments, 71, 72, 79, 82,
boring, 14,29,32,48 86,87,88,93,97-104, 105,106,
capital of Gotland, 3 107, 109, 111, 113, 140, 278,
Galgberg, 6, 51,77,123, 126,282, 279-280
285,286,291,292,306-309 thickness, 279
Galgberg Extension, 292,435,436, Visby fauna, 33,34
437 Visby Folgen, 35,39,40
Gutevagen, 285 Visby marl
Katrinelund, 314 in stratigraphy by Wedekind and Tripp,
Osterby, 313 36
Sankt Wran Church, 291 Visby Marlstone, Lower
Snackgixdsbaden, 6,82, 142,281, in stratigraphy by Hede, 34,35,36,
286, 287, 288, 289, 290, 293, 38
306-309,310 Visby Marlstone, Upper
SnackgiirdsbadenHotel, 80,81,82, in stratigraphy by Hede, 34,35,36,
103,286,292 38
Stora Hiistniis, 309,313,314 Visby reef
Visby Skjutfdt, 51,81, 83, 87,90, in stratigraphy by Wedekind and Tripp,
92,108-112 36
Visby Beds, 277-281 Visby shooting range, 51, 81,83, 87,90,
comparison with other stratigraphies, 92,108-112
32,35 Visneklint (Alskog), 134-135,367
correlation with other areas, 42,43, Volchov Stage, see Toila Stage
457 Von Bubnoff, S., 26,27,49,492
environment of formation, 82, 114, Von Kiesow, J., 423,492
280-281,472 Vormsi Stage (Esthonia), 16, 17, 18, 19,32
guide fossils, 425,426
one unit with two subunits, 277,471 Wabash (Ind., U.S.A.), 460
stratified sediments, 4,5,277-280 Waern, B., 12,25,493
INDEX 537
Waistcoat-pocket bioherm, 70,71 Winterer, E.L. and Murphy, M.A.,

Waldai Series, see Valdaic Series 55,493
Waldheimia bican’nata, see Wolf, K.H., 396,397,493
Protozeuga bicarinata Wood, E.M.R., 42,479
Walmsley, V.G., 424,493 Woodford, A.O., 430,494
Warburgella rugulosa (Lindstrom), 68, 309 Woodward, H., 423, 483
Water aeration, 467-468 Wright, A.D., 424,494
Water depth, 82, 114, 129, 176-177,
210-212,216,251, 266,272,273, Ygne Fisklage (Vasterhejde), 79
275,276,280-;281,311,329,334, Yonge, C.M., 430,445,466,494
336,349,386,391, 392,400,401, Ytterholmen (Hellvi), 3 17
403,406,407,409,418,422, Ytterholmen (Rone), 409
438-440,453,456,457,458,459,
462-463,466-467,472-474,475 Zadnik, V.E., 458,478
Water movement, 53,54, 138, 166, 168, Zaphrentis vortex Lindstrom, 427
169, 171,172, 189, 192, 199,210, Zelophyllum hligklinti Wedekind, 61, 306
214,218,221, 262,266,272,281, Zelophy llu m intermedium Wedekind,
357,395,396,397, 398,407,422, 61,306
435,437,442,453,459,461,462, Zelophyllum spiflosum Wedekind, 6 1,‘
463,467,468 306
Water temperature, 465-466 Ziegler, A.M., 329,494
Wave resistance, 54,461-462 Zooxanthellae, 466-467
Wedekind, R., 1,35,36,38, 56,423,493
Wells, J.W., 263, 434, 492, 493
Wenlockian
Dalecarlia, 26
Esthonia, 7,17,20,456
Gotland, 7,32,33,42,43
Great Britain, 75,76, 77,78,439,
455-456,463
Jamtland, 26
bstergotland, 27
Scania, 26
Vastergiitland, 27
Wesenbergschichten (Esthonia), 16,32
WestergSlrd, A.H., 9, 10, 12,29,31,32,
491,493
Westergarn fauna, 33
Western reef limestones (Stora Karlso),
244-248,250,272,275
Whitcliffe Flags (England), 43, 44, 394
White, E.I., 394,493
Whitfieldella,227
Whitfieldellad i d y m , see
Protoathyris didyma
Wilsonia wilsoni, see
Sphaerirhynchia wilsoni
Wiman, C., 33,56,424,493
539
ENCLOSURES
Geological map of Gotland
Note: F o r reasons of readability, not every one of the large number of localities
mentioned in the text is shown on this map. The m o r e important s i t e s and the
names of all parishes from which localities have been mentioned a r e indicated.
In the index, the parish i s stated in which each locality i s to be found. This still
enables r e a d e r s to establish the approximate position of each locality.
Map of the Holmhallar r a u k a r field


Silurian Reefs of Gotland

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Silurian Reefs of Gotland

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Silurian Reefs of Gotland

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DEVELOPMENTS I N S E D I M E N T O L O G Y 1 3

1. L. M . J. U . VAN STRAATEN, Editor

3. A . H . BOUMA and A . BROUWER, Editors

6 . L. VAN DER PLAS Jr.

7. S. DZULY$SKI and E. K . WALTON

8. G . LARSEN and G. V . CHILINGAR, Editors

9. G. V . CHILINGAR, H. J . BISSELL and R. W . FAIRBRIDGE, Editors

10. P. McL. D. DUFF, A. HALLAM and E. K . WALTON

11. C . C . REEVES Jr.

SILURIAN REEFS OF GOTLAND

Utrecht (The Netherlands}

ELSEVIER PUBLISHING COMPANY Amsterdam London New York 197 1

ELSEVIER PUBLISHING CO. LTD.

AMERICAN ELSEVIER PUBLISHING COMPANY, INC.

LIBRARY OF CONGRESS CARD NUMBER: 68-12477

WITH 230 ILLUSTRATIONS, 24 TABLES AND 2 MAP ENCLOSURES

COPYRIGHT 0 1971 BY ELSEVIER PUBLISHING COMPANY, AMSTERDAM

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE REPRODUCED, STORED IN

PRINTED IN THE NETHERLANDS

CHAPTER I1. PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE BALTIC AREA OUTSIDE

CHAPTER 111. THE PALAEOZOIC DEPOSITS OF GOTLAND . . . . . . . . . . 29

CHAPTER IV . TECTONICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ 45

CHAPTER V . THE FOSSIL REEFS OF GOTLAND, GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . 53

CHAPTER VI . THE UPPER VISBY REEF TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 79

Shape of the reefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

CHAPTER VII . THE HOBURGEN REEF TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

CHAPTER X. STRATIGRAPHY AND REEFS OF 'KARLSGARNA. . . . . . . . . 225

CHAPTER XI. STRATIGRAPHY OF THE SILURIAN OF GOTLAND. . . . . . . 277

limestones, 413 - Holmhallar-type reef limestones, 418) - A moving

CHAPTER XII. PALAEOECOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ON SOME FOSSILS

CHAPTER XIII. COMPARISON O F THE REEFS OF GOTLAND WITH REEFS IN

CHAPTER XIV. GENERAL CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE REEFS OF

CHAPTER XV. CONCLUDING REMARKS AND SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . 471

ENCLOSURES . ............ . ......... ..... ....... 539

THE SCOPE OF THIS BOOK

T h e Swedish island of Gotland, in the Baltic, h a s long attracted the

Attention h a s been paid t o the typology and constitution of the r e e f s , and m o r e

Gotland, off the e a s t coast of southern Sweden, is situated geographical-

THE MORPHOLOGY OF GOTLAND

Although a n extensive discussion of the morphology of Gotland is out-

resistance of the reef limestones is also apparent in the present coast. A

Exposures of Middle Palaeozoic rocks a r e found mainly in ancient and

PALAEOZOIC GEOLOGY OF THE BALTIC AREA

THE PALAEOZOIC BALTIC BASIN

Murchison (1846) was the f i r s t t o state that the Silurian s t r a t a of

Fig.3. Outline map of the Baltic a r e a , showing the submarine distribution of

a n about south-north direction (Olahd) t o an about west-east direction

1 = Silurian 2-Ordovic ian

From a schematized section through the Baltic a r e a from Kalmar t o the

THE STRATIGRAPHY OF OLAND

Before starting with a discussion on the Middle Palaeozoic sediments

Fig.5. Simplified geological map of Oland, showing the distribution of the,

Zone with Dicrono-

Zone with Climaco-

Schroeteri L i m q t o n e Schroeteri Lime- Zone with Glosso-

(Megistaspis) Eimbata I Orthoce ras

Paradoxides forchhammeri Stage

Paradoxides aelandicus Stage

Holmia kjernlfi Stage